diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4608-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 98157 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4608-h/4608-h.htm | 7343 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4608.txt | 6052 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4608.zip | bin | 0 -> 97181 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/13tom10.txt | 6053 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/13tom10.zip | bin | 0 -> 97063 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/13tom10h.htm | 7294 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/13tom10h.zip | bin | 0 -> 97700 bytes |
11 files changed, 26758 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/4608-h.zip b/4608-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8458392 --- /dev/null +++ b/4608-h.zip diff --git a/4608-h/4608-h.htm b/4608-h/4608-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..63ce5f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/4608-h/4608-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7343 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Final//EN"> +<HTML> +<HEAD> +<TITLE>The Project Gutenberg etext of Tom Swift in Captivity</TITLE> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<meta name="author" content="Victor Appleton"> +</HEAD> +<BODY> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Tom Swift in Captivity + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Posting Date: January 16, 2009 [EBook #4608] +Release Date: November, 2003 +Last updated: June 23, 2013 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY *** + + + + +Produced by This e-text was produced by Greg Weeks, Charles +Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + + + +</pre> + + + +<H2>Tom Swift in Captivity</H2> +<P> +or +<BR> +A Daring Escape by Airship + +<P> +by Victor Appleton + +<P> +<H3>CONTENTS</H3> + + +<P> +<A HREF="#I">I A Strange Request</A><BR> +<A HREF="#II">II The Circus Man</A><BR> +<A HREF="#III">III Tom Will Go</A><BR> +<A HREF="#IV">IV "Look Out for my Rival!"</A><BR> +<A HREF="#V">V Andy Foger Learns Something</A><BR> +<A HREF="#VI">VI Alarming News</A><BR> +<A HREF="#VII">VII Fire On Board</A><BR> +<A HREF="#VIII">VIII A Narrow Escape</A><BR> +<A HREF="#IX">IX "Forward March!"</A><BR> +<A HREF="#X">X A Wild Horse Stampede</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XI">XI Caught in a Living Rope</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XII">XII A Native Battle</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XIII">XIII The Desertion</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XIV">XIV In Giant Land</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XV">XV In the "Palace" of the King</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XVI">XVI The Rival Circus Man</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XVII">XVII Held Captives</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XVIII">XVIII Tom's Mysterious Box</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XIX">XIX Weak Giants</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XX">XX The Lone Captive</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXI">XXI A Royal Conspiracy</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXII">XXII The Twin Giants</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXIII">XXIII A Surprise in the Night</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXIV">XXIV The Airship Flight</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXV">XXV Tom's Giant--Conclusion</A> + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="I"></A> +<H3>Chapter I A Strange Request</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift closed the book of adventures he had been reading, tossed +it on the table, and got up. Then he yawned. + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked his chum, Ned Newton, who was deep in +another volume. + +<P> +"Oh, I thought this was going to be something exciting," replied +Tom, motioning toward the book he had discarded. "But say! the make-believe +adventures that fellow had, weren't anything compared to +those we went through in the city of gold, or while rescuing the +exiles of Siberia." + +<P> +"Well," remarked Ned, "they would have to be pretty classy +adventures to lay over those you and I have had lately. But where +are you going?" he continued, for Tom had taken his cap and started +for the door. + +<P> +"I thought I'd go out and take a little run in the aeroplane. Want +to come along? It's more fun than sitting in the house reading about +exciting things that never have happened. Come on out and--" + +<P> +"Yes, and have a tumble from the aeroplane, I suppose you were going +to say," interrupted Ned with a laugh. "Not much! I'm going to stay +here and finish this book." + +<P> +"Say," demanded Tom indignantly. "Did you ever know me to have a +tumble since I knew how to run an airship?" + +<P> +"No, I can't say that I did. I was only joking." + +<P> +"Then you carried the joke too far, as the policeman said to the man +he found lugging off money from the bank. And to make up for it +you've got to come along with me." + +<P> +"Where are you going?" + +<P> +"Oh, anywhere. Just to take a little run in the upper regions, and +clear some of the cobwebs out of my head. I declare, I guess I've +got the spring fever. I haven't done anything since we got back from +Russia last fall, and I'm getting rusty." + +<P> +"You haven't done <i>anything</i>!" exclaimed Ned, following his chum's +example by tossing aside the book. "Do you call working on your new +invention of a noiseless airship nothing?" + +<P> +"Well, I haven't finished that yet. I'm tired of inventing things. I +just want to go off, and have some good fun, like getting +shipwrecked on a desert island, or being lost in the mountains, or +something like that. I want action. I want to get off in the jungle, +and fight wild beasts, and escape from the savages!" + +<P> +"Say! you don't want much," commented Ned. "But I feel the same way, +Tom." + +<P> +"Then come on out and take a run, and maybe we'll get on the track +of an adventure," urged the young inventor. "We won't go far, just +twenty or thirty miles or so." + +<P> +The two youths emerged from the house and started across the big +lawn toward the aeroplane sheds, for Tom Swift owned several speedy +aircrafts, from a big combined aeroplane and dirigible balloon, to a +little monoplane not much larger than a big bird, but which was the +most rapid flier that ever breathed the fumes of gasolene. + +<P> +"Which one you going to take, Tom?" asked Ned, as his chum paused in +front of the row of hangars. + +<P> +"Oh, the little double-seated monoplane, I guess that's in good +shape, and it's easy to manage. When I'm out for fun I hate to be +tinkering with levers and warping wing tips all the while. The <i>Lark</i> +practically flies herself, and we can sit back and take it easy. +I'll have Eradicate fill up the gasolene tank, while I look at the +magneto. It needs a little adjusting, though it works nearly to +perfection since I put in some of that new platinum we got from the +lost mine in Siberia." + +<P> +"Yes, that was a trip that amounted to something. I wouldn't mind +going on another like that, though we ran lots of risks." + +<P> +"We sure did," agreed Tom, and then, raising his voice he called +out: "Rad, I say Rad! Where are you? I want you!" + +<P> +"Comin', massa Tom, comin'," answered an aged colored man, as he +shuffled around the corner of the shed. "What do yo'-all want ob +me?" + +<P> +"Put some gasolene in the <i>Lark</i>, Rad. Ned and I are going to take a +little flight. What were you doing?" + +<P> +"Jest groomin' mah mule Boomerang, Massa Tom, dat's all. Po' +Boomerang he's gittin' old jest same laik I be. He's gittin' old, +an' he needs lots ob 'tention. He has t' hab mo' oats dan usual, +Massa Tom, an' he doan't feel 'em laik he uster, dat's a fac', Massa +Tom." + +<P> +"Well, Rad, give him all he wants. Boomerang was a good mule in his +day." + +<P> +"An' he's good yet, Massa Tom, he's good yet!" said Eradicate +Sampson eagerly. "Doan't yo' all forgit dat, Massa Tom." And the +colored man proceeded to fill the gasolene tank, while Tom adjusted +the electrical mechanism of his aeroplane, Ned assisting by handing +him the tools needed. Eradicate, who said he was named that because +he "eradicated" dirt, was a colored man of all work, who had been in +the service of the Swift household for several years. He and his +mule Boomerang were fixtures. + +<P> +"There, I guess that will do," remarked Tom, after testing the +magneto, and finding that it gave a fat, hot spark. "That ought to +send us along in good shape. Got all the gas in, Rad?" + +<P> +"Every drop, Massa Tom." + +<P> +"Then catch hold and help wheel the <i>Lark</i> out. Ned, you steady her on +that side. How are the tires? Do they need pumping up?" + +<P> +"Hard as rocks," answered Tom's chum, as he tapped his toe against +the rubber circlets of the small bicycle wheels on which the +aeroplane rested. + +<P> +"Then they'll do, I guess. Come on now, and we'll give her a test +before we start off. I ought to get a few hundred more revolutions +per minute out of the motor with the way I've adjusted the magneto. +Rad, you and Ned hold back, while I turn the engine over." + +<P> +The youth and the colored man grasped the rear supports of the long, +tail-like part of the monoplane while Tom stepped to the front to +twist the propeller blades. The first two times there was no +explosion as he swung the delicate wooden blades about, but the +third time the engine started off with a roar, and a succession of +explosions that were deafening, until Tom switched in the muffler, +thereby cutting down the noise. Faster and faster the propeller +whirled about as the motor warmed up, until the young inventor +exclaimed: + +<P> +"That's the stuff! She's better than ever! Climb up Ned, and we'll +start off. You can turn her over, Rad; can't you?" + +<P> +"Suah, Massa Tom," was the reply, for Eradicate had been on so many +trips with Tom, and had had so much to do with airships, that to +merely start one was child's play for him. + +<P> +The two youths had scarcely taken their seats, and the colored man +was about to twist around the fan-like blades of the big propeller +in front, when from behind there came a hail. + +<P> +"Hold on there! Wait a minute, Tom Swift! Bless my admission ticket, +don't go! I've got something important to tell you! Hold on!" + +<P> +"Humph! I know who that is!" cried Tom, motioning to Eradicate to +cease trying to start the motor. + +<P> +"Mr. Damon, of course," agreed Ned. "I wonder what he wants?" + +<P> +"A ride, maybe," went on Tom. "If he does we've got to take the +Scooter instead of this one. That holds four. Well, we may as well +see what he wants." + +<P> +He jumped lightly from his seat in the monoplane and was followed by +Ned. They saw coming toward them, from the direction of the house, a +stout man, who seemed very much excited. He was walking so fast that +he fairly waddled, and he was smiling at the lads, for he was one of +their best friends. + +<P> +"Glad I caught you, Tom." he panted, for his haste had almost +deprived him of breath. "I've got something important to tell you. I +hurried over as soon as I heard about it." + +<P> +"Well, you're just in time," commented Ned with a laugh. "In another +minute we'd have been up in the clouds." + +<P> +"What is it, Mr. Damon?" asked Tom. "Have you got wind of a city of +diamonds, or has some one sent you a map telling where we can go to +pick up ten thousand dollar bills by the basket?" + +<P> +"Neither one, Tom, neither one. It's something better than either of +those, and if you don't jump at the chance I'm mistaken in you, +that's all I've got to say. Come over here." + +<P> +He turned a quick glance over his shoulder as he spoke and advanced +toward the two lads on tiptoe as though he feared some one would see +or hear him. Yet it was broad daylight, the place was the starting +ground for Tom's aeroplanes and save Eradicate there was no one +present except Mr. Damon, Ned and the young inventor himself. + +<P> +"What's up?" asked Tom in wonderment. + +<P> +"Hush!" cautioned the odd gentleman. "Bless my walking stick, Tom! +but this is going to be a great chance for you--for us,--for I'm +going along." + +<P> +"Going where, Mr. Damon?" + +<P> +"I'll tell you in a minute. Is there any one here?" + +<P> +"No one but us?" + +<P> +"You are sure that Andy Foger isn't around." + +<P> +"Sure. He's out of town, you know." + +<P> +"Yes, but you never can tell when he's going to appear on the scene. +Come over here," and taking hold of the coat of each of the youths, +Mr. Damon led them behind the big swinging door of the aeroplane +shed. + +<P> +"You haven't anything on hand; have you, Tom?" asked the odd +gentleman, after peering through the crack to make sure they were +unobserved. + +<P> +"Nothing at all, if you mean in the line of going off on an +adventure trip." + +<P> +"That's what I mean. Bless my earlaps! but I'm glad of that. I've +got just the thing for you. Tom, I want you to go to a strange land, +and bring back one of the biggest men there--a giant! Tom Swift, you +and I and Ned--if he wants to go--are going after a giant!" + +<P> +Mr. Damon gleefully clapped Tom on the back, with such vigor that +our hero coughed, and then the odd gentleman stepped back and gazed +at the two lads, a look of triumph shining in his eyes. + +<P> +For a moment there was a silence. Tom looked at Ned, and Ned gave +his chum a quick glance. Then they both looked sharply at Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"A--a giant," murmured Tom faintly. + +<P> +"That's what I said," replied Mr. Damon. "I want you to help me +capture a giant, Tom." + +<P> +Once more the two youths exchanged significant glances, and then +Tom, in a low and gentle voice said: + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Damon, that's all right. We'll get you a giant right away. +Won't we, Ned? Now you'd better come in the house and lie down, I'll +have Mrs. Baggert make you a cup of tea, and after you have had a +sleep you'll feel better. Come on," and the young inventor gently +tried to lead his friend out from behind the shed door. + +<P> +"Look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd gentleman indignantly. "Do +you think I'm crazy? Lie down? Rest myself? Go to sleep? Say, I'm +not crazy! I'm not tired! I'm not sleepy! This is the greatest +chance you ever had, and if we get one of those giants--" + +<P> +"Yes, yes, we'll get one," put in Ned soothingly. + +<P> +"Of course," added Tom. "Come on, now, Mr. Damon. You'll feel better +after you've had a rest. Dr. Perkinby is coming over to see father +and I'll have him--" + +<P> +Mr. Damon gave one startled glance at the young inventor and his +chum, and then burst into a peal of hearty laughter. + +<P> +"Oh, my!" he exclaimed at intervals in his paroxysms. "Oh, dear! He +thinks I'm out of my head! He can't stand that talk about giants! Oh +dear! Tom Swift, this is the greatest chance you ever had! Come on +in the house and I'll tell you all I know about giant land, and then +if you want to think I'm crazy you can, that's all I've got to say!" + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="II"></A> +<H3>Chapter II The Circus Man</H3> + + +<P> +Without a word Tom and Ned followed Mr. Damon toward the Swift +house. Truth to tell the youths did not know what to say, or they +would have been bubbling over with questions. But the talk of the +odd man, and his strange request to Tom to go off and capture a +giant had so startled the young inventor and his chum that they did +not know whether to think that Mr. Damon was joking, or whether he +had suddenly taken leave of his senses. + +<P> +And while I have a few minutes that are occupied in the journey to +the house I will introduce my new readers more formally to Tom Swift +and his friends. + +<P> +Tom though only a young man, was an inventor of note, as his father +was before him. Father and son lived in a fine house in the town of +Shopton, in New York state, and Mrs. Swift being dead, the two were +well looked after by Mrs. Baggert their housekeeper. Eradicate +Sampson, as I have said, was the man of all work about the place. +Ned Newton who had a position in a Shopton bank, was Tom's +particular chum, and Mr. Wakefeld Damon, of the neighboring town of +Waterfield, was a friend to all who knew him. He had the odd habit +of blessing anything and everything he could think of, interspersing +it in his talk. + +<P> +In the first volume of this series, called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," I related how Tom made the acquaintance of Mr. Damon, +afterward purchasing a damaged motor-cycle from the odd gentleman. On +this machine Tom had many adventures, incidentally saving some of his +father's valuable patents from a gang of conspirators. Later Tom got a +motor boat, and had many races with his rivals on Lake Carlopa, +beating Andy Foger, the red-haired bully of the town, in signal +fashion. After his adventures on the water Tom sighed for some in the +air, and he had them in his airship the <i>Red Cloud</i>. + +<P> +"Tom Swift and His Submarine Boat." is a story of a search after +sunken treasure, and, returning from that quest Tom built an +electric runabout, the speediest car on the road. By means of a +wireless message, later, Tom was able to save himself and the +castaways of Earthquake Island, and, as a direct outcome of that +experience, he was able to go in search of the diamond makers, and +solve the secret of Phantom Mountain, as told in the book dealing +with that subject. + +<P> +When he went to the caves of ice Tom had bad luck, for his airship +was wrecked, and he endured many hardships in getting home with his +companions, particularly as Andy Foger sought revenge on him. + +<P> +But Tom pluckily overcame all obstacles and, later, he built a sky +racer, in which he made the quickest trip on record. After that, +with his electric rifle, he went after elephants in the interior of +Africa and was successful in rescuing some missionaries from the +terrible red pygmies. + +<P> +One of the mission workers, later, sent Tom details about a buried +city of gold in Mexico, and Tom and his chum together with Mr. Damon +located this mysterious place after much trouble, as told in the +book entitled, "Tom Swift in the City of Gold." The gold did not +prove as valuable as they expected, as it was of low grade, but they +got considerable money for it, and were then ready for more +adventures. + +<P> +The adventures soon came, as those of you who have read the book +called, "Tom Swift and His Air Glider," can testify. In that I told +how Tom went to Siberia, and after rescuing some Russian political +exiles, found a valuable deposit of platinum, which to-day is a more +valuable metal than gold. Tom needed some platinum for his +electrical machines, and it proved very useful. + +<P> +He had been back from Russia all winter and, now that Spring had +come again, our hero sighed for more activity, and fresh adventures. +And with the advent of Mr. Damon, and his mysterious talk about +giants, Tom seemed likely to be gratified. + +<P> +The two chums and the odd gentleman continued on to the house, no +one speaking, until finally, when they were seated in the library, +Mr. Damon said: + +<P> +"Well, Tom, are you ready to listen to me now, and have me explain +what I meant when I asked you to get a giant?" + +<P> +"I--I suppose so," hesitated the young inventor. "But hadn't I +better call dad? And are you sure you don't want to lie down and +collect your thoughts? A nice hot cup of tea--" + +<P> +"There, there, Tom Swift; If you tell me to lie down again, or +propose any more tea I'll use you as a punching bag, bless my boxing +gloves if I don't!" cried Mr. Damon and he laughed heartily. "I know +what you think, Tom, and you, too, Ned," he went on, still +chuckling. "You think I don't know what I'm saying, but I'll soon +prove that I do. I'm fully in my senses, I'm not crazy, I'm not +talking in my sleep, and I'm very much in earnest. Tom, this is the +chance of your life to get a giant, and pay a visit to giant land. +Will you take it?" + +<P> +"Mr. Damon, I--er--that is I--" + +<P> +Tom stammered and looked at Ned. + +<P> +"Now look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd man. "When you got +word about the buried city of gold in Mexico you didn't hesitate a +minute about making up your mind to go there; did you?" + +<P> +"No, I didn't." + +<P> +"Well, that wasn't any more of a strain on your imagination than +this giant business; was it?" + +<P> +"Well, I don't know, as--" + +<P> +"Bless my spectacles! Of course it wasn't! Now, look here. Tom, you +just make up your mind that I know what I'm talking about, and we'll +get along better. I don't blame you for being a bit puzzled at +first, but just you listen. You believe there are such things as +giants; don't you?" + +<P> +"I saw a man in the circus once, seven feet high. They called him a +giant," spoke Ned. + +<P> +"A giant! He was a baby compared to the kind of giants I mean," said +Mr. Damon quickly. "Tom, we are going after a race of giants, the +smallest one of which is probably eight feet high, and from that +they go on up to nearly ten feet, and they're not slim fellows +either, but big in proportion. Now in giant land--" + +<P> +"Here's Mrs. Baggert with a quieting cup of tea," interrupted Tom. +"I spoke to her as we came in, and asked her to have some ready. If +you'll drink this, Mr. Damon, I'm sure--" + +<P> +"Bless my sugar bowl, Tom! You make a man nervous, with your cups of +tea. I'm more quiet than you, but I'll drink it to please you. Now +listen to me." + +<P> +"All right, go ahead." + +<P> +"A friend of mine has asked me if I knew any one who could undertake +to go to giant land, and get him one or two specimens of the big men +there. I at once thought of you, and I said I believed you would go. +And I'll go with you, Tom! Think of that! I've got faith enough in +the proposition to go myself!" + +<P> +There was no mistaking Mr. Damon's manner. He was very much in +earnest, and Tom and Ned looked at each other with a different light +in their eyes. + +<P> +"Who is your friend, and where in the world is giant land?" asked +Tom. "I haven't heard of such a place since I read the accounts of +the early travelers, before this continent was discovered. Who is +your friend that wants a giant?" + +<P> +"If you'll let me, I'll have him here in a minute, Tom." + +<P> +"Of course I will. But good land! Have you got him concealed up your +sleeve, or under some of the chairs? Is he a dwarf?" and Tom looked +about the room as if he expected to see some one in hiding. + +<P> +"I left him outside in the garden, Tom," replied the odd man. "I +told him I'd come on ahead, and see how you took the proposition. +Don't tell him you thought me insane at first. I'll have him here in +a jiffy. I'll signal to him." + +<P> +Not waiting for a word from either of the boys, Mr. Damon went to +one of the low library windows, opened it, gave a shrill whistle and +waved his handkerchief vigorously. In a moment there came an +answering whistle. + +<P> +"He's coming," announced the odd gentleman. + +<P> +"But who is he?" insisted Tom. "Is he some professor who wants a +giant to examine, or is he a millionaire who wants one for a body +guard?" + +<P> +"Neither one, Tom. He's the proprietor of a number of circuses, and +a string of museums, and he wants a giant, or even two of them, for +exhibition purposes. There's lots of money in giants. He's had some +seven, and even eight feet tall, but he has lately heard of a land +where the tallest man is nearly ten feet high, and very big, and +he'll pay ten thousand dollars for a giant alive and in good +condition, as the animal men say. I believe we can get one for him, +and--Ah, here he is now," and Mr. Damon interrupted himself as a +small, dark-complexioned man, with a very black mustache, black +eyes, a watch chain as big around as his thumb, a red vest, a large +white hat, and a suit of large-sized checked clothes appeared at the +open library window. + +<P> +"Is it all right?" this strange-appearing man asked of Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I believe so," replied the odd gentleman. "Come in, Sam." + +<P> +With one bound, though the window was some distance from the ground, +the little man leaped into the library. He landed lightly on his +feet, quickly turned two hand springs in rapid succession, and then, +without breathing in the least rapidly, as most men would have done +after that exertion, he made a low bow to Tom and Ned. + +<P> +"Boys, let me introduce you to my friend, Sam Preston, an old +acrobat and now a circus proprietor," said Mr. Damon. "Mr. Preston, +this is Tom Swift, of whom I told you, and his chum, Ned Newton." + +<P> +"And will they get the giant for me?" asked the circus man quickly. + +<P> +"I think they will," replied Mr. Damon. "I had a little difficulty +in making the matter clear to them, and that's why I sent for you. +You can explain everything." + +<P> +"Have a chair," invited Tom politely. "This is a new one on me--going +after giants. I've done almost everything else, though." + +<P> +"So Mr. Damon said," spoke Mr. Preston gravely. He was much more +sedate and composed than one would have supposed after his +sensational entrance into the room. "I am very glad to meet you, Tom +Swift, and I hope we can do business together. Now, if you have a +few minutes to spare, I'll tell you all I know about giant land." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="III"></A> +<H3>Chapter III Tom Will Go</H3> + + +<P> +"Jove! That sounds interesting!" exclaimed Ned, as he settled +himself comfortably in his chair. + +<P> +"It is interesting," replied the circus man. "At least I found it so +when I first listened to one of my men tell it. But whether it is +possible to get to giant land, and, what is more bring away some of +the big men, is something I leave to you, Tom Swift. After you have +heard my story, if you decide to go, I'll stand all the expenses of +fitting out an expedition, and if you fail I won't have a word to +say. If, on the other hand, you bring me back a giant or two, I'll +pay you ten thousand dollars and all expenses. Is it a bargain?" + +<P> +"Let me hear the story first," suggested our hero, who was a +cautious lad when there was need for it. Yet he liked Mr. Preston, +even at first sight, in spite of his "loud" attire, and the rather +"circusy" manner in which he had entered the room. Then too, if he +was a friend of Mr. Damon, that was a great deal in his favor. + +<P> +"I am, as you know, in the circus business," began Mr. Preston. "I +have a number of traveling shows, and several large museums in the +big cities. I am always on the lookout for new attractions, for the +public demands them. Once get in the rut of having nothing new, and +your business will fall off. I know, for I've been in the business, +man and boy, for nearly forty years. I began as a performer, and I +can still do a double somersault over fifteen elephants in a row. I +always keep in practice for there's nothing like showing a performer +how to do a thing yourself." + +<P> +"But about the giants, which is what I'm interested in most now. Of +course I've had giants in my circuses and museums, from the +beginning. The public wanted 'em and we had to have 'em. Some of 'em +were fakes--men on stilts with long pants to cover up their legs, +and others were the real, genuine, all-wool-and-a-yard-wide article. +But none of them were very big. A shade under eight feet was the +limit with me." + +<P> +"I also have lots of wild animals, and it was when some of my men +were out after some tapirs, jaguars and leopards that I got on the +track of the giants. It was about a year ago, but up to this time I +haven't seen my way clear to send after the big men. It was this +way:" + +<P> +Mr. Preston assumed a more comfortable position in his chair, nodded +at Mr. Damon, who was listening attentively to all that was said, +and resumed. + +<P> +"As I said I had sent Jake Poddington, one of my best men, after +tapirs and some other South American animals. He didn't have very +good luck hunting along the Amazon. In the first place that region +has been pretty well cleaned out of circus animals, and another +thing it's getting too well populated. Another thing is that you +can't get the native hunters and beaters to work for you as they did +years ago." + +<P> +"So Poddington wrote to me that he was going to take his assistants, +make a big jump, and hike it for the Argentine Republic. He had a +tip that along the Salado river there might be something doing, and +I told him to go ahead." + +<P> +"He shipped me what few animals he had, and lit out for a three +thousand mile journey. I didn't hear from him for some time, and, +when I did, I got the finest collection of animals I had ever laid +eyes on. I got them about the same time I did a letter from Jake, +for the mail service ain't what you could call rushing in that part +of South America." + +<P> +"But what about the giants?" interrupted Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I'm coming to them," replied the circus man calmly. "It was this +way: At the tail of his letter which he sent with the shipment of +animals Jake said this, and I remember it almost word for word:" + +<P> +"'If all goes well,' he wrote, 'I'll have a big surprise for you +soon. I've heard a story about a race of big natives that have their +stamping ground in this section, and I'm going to try for a few +specimens. I know how much you want a giant.'" + +<P> +"Well?" asked Tom, after a pause, for the circus man had ceased +talking and was staring out of the opened library window into the +garden that was just becoming green. + +<P> +"That was all I ever heard from poor Jake," said Mr. Preston softly. + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. "You didn't tell me +that! What happened to him." + +<P> +"I never could find out," resumed Mr. Preston. "I never heard +another word from him, and I've never seen him from the time I +parted with him to go after the animals. The letter saying he was +going after the giants was the last line of his I've seen." + +<P> +"But didn't you try to locate him?" asked Tom. "Didn't he have some +companions--some one who could tell what became of him?" + +<P> +"Of course I tried!" exclaimed Mr. Preston. "Do you think I'd let a +man like Jake disappear without making some effort to find him? But +he was the only white man in his party, the rest were natives. That +was Jake's way. Well, when some time past and I didn't hear from +him, I got busy. I wrote to our consuls and even some South American +merchants with whom I had done business. But it didn't amount to +anything." + +<P> +"Couldn't you get any news?" asked Ned softly. + +<P> +"Oh, yes, some, but it didn't amount to much. After a long time, and +no end of trouble, I had a man locate a native named Zacatas, who +was the head beater of the black men under Jake." + +<P> +"Zacatas said that he and Jake and the others got safely to the +Salado river section, but I knew that before, for that was where the +fine shipment of animals came from. Then Jake got that tip about the +giants, and set off alone into the interior to locate them, for all +the natives were afraid to go. That was the last seen of poor Jake." + +<P> +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "What did Zacatas say +became of the poor fellow?" + +<P> +"No one knew. Whether he reached giant land and was killed there, or +whether he was struck down by some wild beast in the jungle, I never +could find out. The natives under Zacatas waited in camp for him for +some time, and then went back to the Amazon region where they +belonged. That's all the news I could get." + +<P> +"But I'm sure there are giants in the interior of South America, for +Jake always knew what he was talking about. Now I want to do two +things. I want to get on the trail of poor Jake Poddington if I can, +and I want a giant--two or three of them if it can be managed." + +<P> +"Ever since Jake disappeared I've been trying to arrange things to +make a search for him, and for the giants, but up to now something +has been in the way. I happened to mention the matter to my friend, +Mr. Damon, and he at once spoke of you, Tom Swift." + +<P> +"Now, what I want to know is this: Will you undertake to get a giant +for me, rescue Jake Poddington if he is alive in the interior of +South America, or, if he is dead, find out how it happened and give +him decent burial? Will you do this, Tom Swift?" + +<P> +There was a silence in the room following the dramatic and simple +recital of the circus man. Tom was strangely moved, as was his chum +Ned. As for Mr. Damon, he was softly blessing every thing he could +think of. + +<P> +Tom looked out of the long, opened windows of the library. In fancy +he could see the forest and jungles of South America. He saw a +sluggish river flowing along between rank green banks, while, from +the overhanging trees, long festoons of moss hung down, writhing now +and then as the big water anacondas or boa constrictors looped their +sinuous folds over the low limbs. + +<P> +In fancy he saw dark-skinned natives slinking along with their +deadly blow guns, and poisoned arrows. He thought he could hear the +low growls and whines of the treacherous jaguars and see their lithe +bodies slinking along. He saw the brilliant-hued flowers, saw the +birds of gorgeous plumage, and listened in fancy to their discordant +cries. + +<P> +Then, too, he saw a lonely white man in a miserable native hut +thousands of miles from civilization, waiting, waiting, waiting for he +knew not what fate. Again he saw monstrous men stalking along--men who +towered ten feet or more, and who were big and brawny. All this passed +through the mind of Tom in an instant. + +<P> +"Well?" asked Mr. Preston softly. + +<P> +"I'll go!" suddenly cried the young inventor. "I don't know whether +I can get you a giant or not, Mr. Preston, but if it's possible I'll +get poor Jake Poddington, dead or alive!" + +<P> +"Good!" cried the circus man, jumping up and clasping Tom's hand. "I +thought you were that kind of a lad, after I heard Mr. Damon +describe you. You've taken a big load off my heart, Tom Swift. Now +to talk of ways and means! I'll have a giant yet, and maybe I'll get +back the best man who ever shipped a consignment of wild animals, +good Jake Poddington! Now to business!" + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="IV"></A> +<H3>Chapter IV "Look Out for my Rival!"</H3> + + +<P> +"You'll go in an airship of course; won't you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon, when they had pulled their chairs up around a library table, +and Mr. Preston had taken some papers from his pocket. + +<P> +"An airship? No, I don't believe I shall," replied the young +inventor. "In the first place, I'm a bit tired of scooting through +the air so much, though it isn't to be denied that it's the quickest +way of going. But in South America there are so many jungles that it +will be hard to find a level starting ground for a take-off, after +we land. Of course we could go up as a balloon, but this expedition +is going to be different from any we were ever on before." + +<P> +"How so?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Well, in the first place we've got to start at one end of a trail, +and make careful inquiries all along the way. It isn't like when we +went for the city of gold. There we had to look for a certain ruined +temple, which was the landmark. When we went after the platinum in +Siberia we had to look for the place of the high winds, so I could +use my air glider. But now we're trying to locate a man who traveled +on foot through the jungles, and if we went in an airship we might +just miss the connecting link." + +<P> +"So, I think the best way will be to do just as Mr. Poddington +did--travel on foot or by horses and mules, and go slowly, making +inquiries from time to time. Then we <i>may</i> get to giant land, we +<i>may</i> find him." + +<P> +"I don't hope for all that," said the circus man, "but if you can +only get some news of him it will be a relief. If he died peaceably +it would be better than to be a captive among some of those savage +tribes. It's been a year now since I heard the last of him. But I +agree with Tom that an airship won't be much good in the jungle. You +might take along a small one, if you could pack it, to scare the +natives with. In fact it might be a good thing to show to the +giants, if you find them." + +<P> +"That is my idea," declared Tom. "I'll take the <i>Lark</i> with me. That's +a mighty powerful machine for its size, and it can be taken apart in +sections. It will carry three on a pinch, and I have had five in her +with two auxiliary seats. I'll take the <i>Lark</i>, and she may come in +handy." + +<P> +"When can you start?" asked Mr. Preston. + +<P> +"As soon as we can fit out an expedition," answered Tom. "It +oughtn't to take long. I don't have to build an air glider this +time. It won't take long to take the <i>Lark</i> apart. I haven't finished +work on my noiseless airship yet, but that can wait. Yes, we'll be +ready as soon as you want us to start, Mr. Preston." + +<P> +"It can't be too soon for me. I'll deposit a certain sum in the bank +to your credit, Tom, and you can draw on it for expenses. I'll pay +any amount to get word of poor Jake, to say nothing of having a +giant for my circus. Now as to ways of getting there. Have you a +large map of South America?" + +<P> +Tom had one, and he and the others were pouring over it when Tom's +father came into the room. + +<P> +"Well, well!" he exclaimed. "What's this? What are you up to now, +Tom, my boy? Mrs. Baggert said you took down the South American map. +What's up?" + +<P> +"Lots, dad? I'm going after giants this time!" + +<P> +"Giants, Tom? Are you joking?" + +<P> +"Not a bit of it, Mr. Swift," answered Mr. Damon. "Bless my check +book! I believe if some one wanted the moon Tom Swift would try to +get it for them." + +<P> +Then Mr. Swift noticed the stranger present, and was introduced to +the circus man. + +<P> +"Is it really true, Tom," asked the aged inventor, when the story +had been related, "are you going to have a try for giant land?" + +<P> +"That's what I am, dad, and I wish you were going along." + +<P> +"No, Tom, I'm getting too old for that. But I did hope you'd stay +home for a while, and help me work on my gyroscope invention. It is +almost completed." + +<P> +"I will help you, dad, as soon as I get back with a giant or two. +Who knows? maybe I'll get one myself." + +<P> +"What would you do with one?" asked Ned with a laugh. + +<P> +"Have him help Eradicate," answered the young inventor. "Rad is +getting pretty old, and he needs an assistant." + +<P> +"But are these giants black?" asked Mr. Swift. + +<P> +"That's a point I don't know," answered the circus man frankly. +"Jake didn't say in his letter. They may be black, white or midway +between. That's what Tom has got to find out for us." + +<P> +"And I'll do it!" exclaimed our hero. "Now let's see. I suppose the +best plan would be to take a ship right to the Rio de la Plata, +landing say at Buenos Ayres or Montevideo, and then organize an +expedition to strike into the interior." + +<P> +"Why don't you do just as Mr. Poddington did?" asked Ned, "start +from the Amazon and work south?" + +<P> +"It would take too long," declared Tom. "We know that the giants are +somewhere in the northern part of Argentina, or in Paraguay or +Uruguay. Or they may be on the other side of the Uruguay river in +Brazil. It's quite a stretch of territory, and we've got to take our +time exploring it. That's why I don't want to waste time working +down from the Amazon. We'll go right to Buenos Ayres, I think." + +<P> +"That's what I'd do," advised the old circus man. "Now I can give +you some points on what to take, and how to act when you get there. +The South Americans are a queer people--very nice when treated +right, but very bad if not," and then he told some of his +experiences as a circus man in South America, for he had traveled +there. + +<P> +"I'd go again, if my business didn't keep me here," he concluded, +"for I'd ask nothing better than to hunt for giant land, or try to +rescue poor Jake. But I can't. I'm depending on you, Tom Swift." + +<P> +"What's that? Giant land?" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert, the motherly +housekeeper, as she came in to announce that dinner was ready. "You +don't mean to tell me, Tom, that you're going off again?" + +<P> +"That's what I am, Mrs. Baggert. You'd better put me up a few +sandwiches, for I don't know when I'll be back," and Tom winked at +his chum. + +<P> +"Oh, of all things I ever heard in all my born days!" cried the +housekeeper, throwing up her hands. "Will you ever settle down, Tom +Swift?" + +<P> +"Maybe he will when Miss Mary Nestor is ready to settle down too," +said Ned mischievously, referring to a girl of whom Tom was very +fond. + +<P> +"Say, I'll fix you for that!" cried our hero, as he made an +unsuccessful grab for Ned. "But, Mrs. Baggert, can you put on a +couple of extra plates? Mr. Damon and Mr. Preston will stay to +lunch." + +<P> +"Not if it's going to put you out, Tom," objected the circus man. "I +can go to the hotel, and--" + +<P> +"No, indeed!" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert graciously, for she prided +herself on her housekeeping arrangements, and she used to say that +unexpected company never "flustrated" her. Soon the little party was +seated around the table, where the talk went from grave to gay, the +subject of the giants being uppermost. + +<P> +Mr. Preston told many funny stories of his circus days, and some of +them had the spice of danger in them, for he had been all over the +world, either as a performer or as the owner of amusement +enterprises. + +<P> +"Now, the next question to be settled," said the old circus man, +when they were once more gathered in the library, "is how many are +going?" + +<P> +"I am, for one!" exclaimed Ned quickly. "I'm sure my folks will let +me. Especially as we aren't going to use an airship, but will travel +just as ordinary folks do." + +<P> +"Except in case of emergency," explained Tom. "We'll have the <i>Lark</i> +to use if we need her." + +<P> +"Oh, of course," agreed Ned. "How about you, Mr. Damon? Will you +go?" + +<P> +The odd man looked around the room before replying, as though he +feared someone might be listening on the sly. + +<P> +"Go on, Andy Foger isn't here," invited Tom with a laugh. + +<P> +"I'll go--if I can pursuade my wife to let me," said the odd man in +a whisper, as if, even then, the good lady might overhear him. "I'm +not going to say anything about giants. I'll tell her we are going +to rescue a poor fellow from--er--well from the natives of South +America, and I'm sure she'll consent. Of course I'll go." + +<P> +"That's three," remarked Tom. "I think I can get Eradicate to go. He +doesn't like airships, and when he knows we're not going in one it +will please him. Then he likes it hot, and I guess South America is +about as warm as they come. I am almost sure we can count on Rad." + +<P> +"That will make a nice party," commented the circus man. "Now I'll +make out a list of the supplies you'd better take, and tell you what +to do about getting native helpers, and so on," and with that he +plunged into the midst of details that took up most of the remainder +of the day. + +<P> +"Well, then I guess that settles most everything," remarked Tom, +several hours later. "I'll begin at once to take the <i>Lark</i> apart for +shipment, and begin ordering the things we need." + +<P> +"Oh, there's one thing I almost forgot about," said Mr. Preston +suddenly. "Queer, how I should overlook that, too. I don't suppose +you mind a fight or two; do you?" he asked, looking sharply at Tom. + +<P> +"Well, it all depends. We've had several fights on other +expeditions, though I can't say that I like 'em," replied the young +inventor. "Why do you ask?" + +<P> +"Because you may have one--or several," was the answer of the circus +man. "You'll have to beware of my rival." + +<P> +"Your rival?" + +<P> +"Yes, the bitterest foe I have is a rival circus man named Wayland +Waydell. He, or some of his men, are always camping on my trail when +I send out after a new consignment of wild animals, and I shouldn't +be a bit surprised but what he'd try to get ahead of me on the giant +game." + +<P> +"But how does he know you want giants?" asked Tom. + +<P> +"Because news of circus expeditions always leaks out somehow or +other. I'm sure Waydell will learn that you are acting for me, and +so I warn you in time. In fact, he tried to get ahead of me when I +sent Jake Poddington out over a year ago, and I always had my +suspicions that he had a hand in Jake's disappearance, but maybe I'm +wrong. So that's what I mean when I say beware of Wayland Waydell, +Tom." + +<P> +"I will!" exclaimed Tom. "He'll have to get up early to get ahead of +us." But Tom little knew the man against whom he was to pit himself +in the search for giants. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="V"></A> +<H3>Chapter V Andy Foger Learns Something</H3> + + +<P> +Once Tom Swift made up his mind to do a thing, he did not waste time +in setting about it. He had decided to go to giant land, and that +was all there was to it. His father talked with him about the +matter, pointed out the dangers, and suggested that, as the young +inventor had had many adventures in the last few years, and had made +considerable money from the discovery of the city of gold, and the +platinum mines, the prize offered for a giant was not much of an +inducement. + +<P> +"But it isn't that so much, dad," explained Tom. "There's that poor +circus man, maybe suffering in the centre of South America. I want +to find him, if I can, or get some news that he died a natural +death, and is decently buried." + +<P> +"You never can do it, Tom." + +<P> +"Well dad, I'm going to make a big try!" he returned; and that +settled it as far as Tom was concerned. + +<P> +For several days after the visit of Mr. Preston Tom was busy making +plans for his trip to South America. He wanted to lay out a regular +schedule before proceeding. Ned Newton had had hard work to persuade +his folks to let him go, but they finally consented, and as for Mr. +Damon, his plan was simple. + +<P> +Without mentioning giants at all, he took Mr. Preston home with him, +and the circus man's tale of his assistant lost in the wilds of +South America was too much for Mrs. Damon. + +<P> +"Go? Of course you'll go!" she said to her husband. "I demand that +you go, and I want you to find that poor man and rescue him. If you +could rescue the exiles from uncivilized Siberia I'm sure you can +get a man out of a civilized country." + +<P> +Mr. Damon did not stop to point out that South America was far less +civilized, in some ways, than was Russia. He just kept still, and +made his preparations to go. Mr. Preston was a distant relative of +the odd man, and that was how he had happened to meet him and hear +the story which was destined to play such an important part in the +life of Tom Swift. + +<P> +"Do you think we'll have much trouble after we get to South America, +and strike into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one afternoon, when +he and Mr. Preston were helping Tom in the delicate work of packing +the wing planes of the <i>Lark</i>. + +<P> +"No, South America isn't a bad country to travel in," replied the +circus man. "The natives are fairly friendly, and with a well-organized +party, and plenty of money, which I shall see that you +have, you ought to get along swimmingly. Only one thing bothers me." + +<P> +"What's that?" asked Tom quickly. + +<P> +"That's my rival, Waydell. He's sure to make trouble if he gets on +your trail." + +<P> +"Have you heard from him?" + +<P> +"No, and that's what makes me all the more suspicious. If he'd come +out and fight me in the open it wouldn't be so bad. But this +underhand business gets on my nerves. I don't know what he's up to." + +<P> +"Maybe he isn't up to anything," suggested Ned. "He may not even +know you are going to make another try for the giants." + +<P> +"Oh, yes, he does," replied the circus man. "He didn't succeed in +beating me when poor Jake was after them, for the simple reason that +it was a snap case, and even I didn't know that Poddington was +trying for the giants until he had started. But Waydell was soon +after him, and he knows that when I once set out for a freak or a +certain kind of animal I keep on until I get it. So he has probably +already figured out that I'm making new plans to get a giant." + +<P> +"But how will he know that I am going?" inquired Tom. + +<P> +"I don't know how he will know, but he will. We circus men have +queer ways of finding out things. I shouldn't be a bit surprised but +what he was already plotting and scheming to send an expedition on +my trail, to take advantage of anything you may learn." + +<P> +"Well, we'll try and fool him, the same as we did the Mexicans when +we hunted for the city of gold," spoke Tom; and then putting aside +that worry, he and the others labored hard to get matters in shape +for a departure to South America. + +<P> +"I suppose Eradicate is going," remarked Ned, in the intervals of +packing the aeroplane. + +<P> +"Well, I've hinted it to him," replied Tom, "but I haven't asked him +outright. He said he wouldn't mind going to a hot country though. +Here he comes now. Guess I'll see how he takes it." + +<P> +The colored man shuffled up with a hammer and nails, for he had been +putting covers on packing boxes. + +<P> +"Then you are coming with us to South America; aren't you, Rad?" +asked Tom, winking at Ned. + +<P> +"Souf America? Am dat de hot country yo'-all was referencin' to?" +asked Eradicate. + +<P> +"That's it, Rad. It's nice and warm there. All you have to do is to +lie under a tree and cocoanuts will drop off into your mouth." + +<P> +"Cocoanuts in mah mouf, Massa Tom! 'Scuse me! I doan't want t' go to +no sich country as dat. Cocoanuts in mah mouf! Why I ain't got but a +few teef left, an' a cocoanut droppin' offen a tree would shorely +knock dem teef out, shorely!" + +<P> +"Oh, Rad, I didn't mean cocoanuts! I meant oranges and +bananas--they're soft," and Tom glanced quickly at Ned, for he saw +that he had made a mistake. + +<P> +"Oh, well, den dat's diffunt, Massa Tom. I jes lubs oranges an' +bananas, an' ef yo'-all is shore dat I'll find some, why, I'll come +along." + +<P> +"Find 'em? Of course you will!" cried Ned. + +<P> +"And cocoanuts, too," added Tom. "Only, Rad, I meant to say that the +monkeys would throw the cocoanuts down to you from the trees. That +breaks the hard shells you see, and all you have to do is to take +out the meat, and drink the milk. Then the monkeys throw you down a +palm leaf fan to cool yourself off, while you're eating it. Oh, I +tell you, Rad, South America is the place to go to have a good +time." + +<P> +"I believe you, Massa Tom. When do we-all start?" + +<P> +"Pretty soon now." + +<P> +"An' what all am yo' gwine arter, Massa Tom?" + +<P> +The young inventor thought a moment. In times past he had not +hesitated to confide in his colored helper, but of late years +Eradicate had become somewhat childish, and he talked more than was +necessary. Tom wondered whether it would be safe to trust the giant +secret to him. After a moment's thought he realized that it would +not be. But, at the same time, he knew that if he did not give some +kind of an answer Eradicate would become suspicious, and that would +be worse. The colored helper had been with Tom on too many trips not +to know that his master never went without some object. + +<P> +"Well, Rad, we're after big game this time," Tom said. "I don't know +what it will be that we'll get, whether animals or plants, and--" + +<P> +"Oh, I knows, Massa Tom. Yo'-all means dem orchard plants that lib +on air--dem big orchard plants." Eradicate meant orchids, of which +many rare and beautiful kinds are found in South America. + +<P> +"Yes, Rad, I guess we will get some big orchids," agreed Tom. + +<P> +"An' I shorely will help climb de trees arter 'em. Or maybe we kin +git de monkeys to frow em down, same as dey will de cocoanuts." + +<P> +"Maybe, Rad. Well, now go ahead and nail up the rest of these boxes. +We want to get started as soon as we can," and the colored man got +busy, murmuring from time to time something about oranges and +bananas and cocoanuts. + +<P> +Everyone was occupied in getting matters in shape for the trip to +South America, even Mr. Swift laying aside his work on his pet +invention--a gyroscope--while he helped his son. And had Tom not +been quite so engrossed with his preparations he might have gone +about town more, in which case he would have learned something that +might have saved him and the others considerable trouble and no +little danger. And this fact was that Andy Foger had been in Shopton +several times lately. + +<P> +After the trouble which the red-haired bully and his father caused +Tom and his friends on their trip to the city of gold, Mr. Foger +moved away from Shopton. He had lost his fortune and had to begin +all over again. The Foger homestead was closed up, and Andy ceased +to be a fixture of the town, for which Tom and Ned were very glad. + +<P> +But of late Andy had been seen in Shopton several times, and it was +noticed that, on one or two occasions, he had a man with him--a man +who seemed to have plenty of money--a man with an air about him not +unlike that of Mr. Preston. A man with what newspaper men would have +called a circus or theatrical "air." + +<P> +This man had visited Shopton soon after Mr. Preston made the giant +proposition to Tom, and before meeting Andy Foger had made special +inquiries about Tom Swift. + +<P> +"Who are the people who have a hard feeling against this young +inventor in town?" the man had asked of several persons. + +<P> +"Tom Swift has more friends than enemies," was the general reply. + +<P> +"Oh, surely he must have some enemies," the man insisted. "He's been +running his aeroplanes and autos around town a long time, and surely +there must be some one who has a grudge against him. I suppose he +has lots of friends, but who are his enemies?" + +<P> +Then he learned about Andy Foger, and, hearing that Andy now lived +in a nearby town, the man had at once gone there. It was not long +before he reappeared--and the red-haired bully was with him. + +<P> +"And you haven't learned anything yet, Andy?" asked this mysterious +man one afternoon, when he met his tool in a quiet resort in +Shopton. + +<P> +"Nothing yet, Mr. Waydell. But give me a little more time." + +<P> +"Time! You've had more time now than you need. When I agreed to pay +you for finding out what part of South America Tom Swift would head +for to get some sort of a freak or animal for Preston's circus I +thought you'd make good quicker than this." + +<P> +"So did I. But you see Tom is suspicious of me, and so is his chum, +Ned Newton. I can't go to them, and if I'm seen sneaking around the +house or shop, after what happened last, I'll be driven off." + +<P> +"Well, it's up to you. I paid you to get the information and I +expect you to do it. Why don't you tackle that old colored man whom, +I understand, works for him? He ought to be simple enough to give +the game away." + +<P> +"Eradicate? I will! I never thought of that I'll get that +information for you, Mr. Waydell, in a few days." + +<P> +"You'd better, if you want to keep that money." + +<P> +The two plotters parted, and that very afternoon gave Andy the +chance he wanted. He met Eradicate on his way to the village where +he was going after something Tom needed. + +<P> +"Hello, Rad!" called Andy with a show of good feeling. "I haven't +seen you in some time. I suppose you're getting too old to travel +around with Tom any more?" + +<P> +"Gittin' too old!" exclaimed the colored man indignantly, for that +was his sore point. "What yo'-all mean, Andy Foger? I ain't gittin' +old, an' neider am Boomerang." + +<P> +"Oh, I thought you were, as you haven't been on any trips lately." + +<P> +"I ain't, hey? Well I's gwine on one right soon, let me tell you +dat, Andy Foger!" + +<P> +"No! Is that so? Glad to hear it. Up to the North Pole I suppose?" + +<P> +"No, sah; not much! No cold country for this coon! I's gwine where +it's nice an 'warm, an' where de cocoanuts fall in yo' mouf--I mean +where de bananas an' oranges fall in you mouf, an' de monkeys frow +down cocoanuts an' palm leaf fans to yo'!" + +<P> +"Where's that, Rad?" asked Andy, and he tried to make his voice +sound indifferent, as though the matter did not interest him. + +<P> +"South America, dat's where it am, an' I's gwine wif Massa Tom. We's +gwine t' git a monstrous big orchard plant." + +<P> +"Oh, yes; I've heard about them. Well, I hope you get all the +oranges and bananas you want. South America, eh? I suppose along the +Amazon river, where they have crocodiles forty feet long, that are +always hungry." + +<P> +"No, sah! No crockermiles fo' me! We ain't goin' neah de Amerzon +riber at all. We's gwine away down in de middle part of South +America. It's a place suffin laik Gomeonaway--or Goonaway, or +suffin' laik dat." + +<P> +"Oh, yes; I know where you mean!" and Andy could hardly conceal the +note of triumph in his voice. He had the very information he wanted +from the simple colored man. "Yes, I guess there are no crocodiles +there, and plenty of monkeys and cocoanuts. Well, I hope you have a +good time," and Andy hurried away to seek out the rival circus man. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="VI"></A> +<H3>Chapter VI Alarming News</H3> + + +<P> +"Hand me that hammer, Ned." + +<P> +"There it is, right behind you, on the bench." + +<P> +"Oh, so it is. Here are those nails you were asking for." + +<P> +"Good. Now we'll make things hum," and Ned Newton's voice was +drowned in the rapid driving of nails into boards. + +<P> +"Bless my screw driver!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was +sawing planks to make covers for boxes. + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked Tom, looking up from a bundle he was +tying up. It contained the magneto of his aeroplane and he was +putting waterproof paper about it. "Did you cut your finger?" + +<P> +"No, but I just happened to think that I nailed my watch up in that +last box." + +<P> +"Nailed up your watch!" cried Mr. Preston, who, after a trip to New +York to make arrangements for passages on a steamer, had come back +to help Tom pack up. + +<P> +"Yes, I took it out to see how long it took me to make a box cover, +and then Tom asked me to nail up that box containing the motor +parts, and I laid my watch right down on top, and put the boards +over it." + +<P> +"Well, the only thing to do is to take off the cover," remarked Tom +grimly. + +<P> +"Bless my chronometer! That will delay things," said the odd man +with a sigh. "But I suppose there is no hope for it," and he +proceeded to open the box, while Tom, Ned, the circus man and +Eradicate busied themselves over the hundred and one things to be +done before they would be ready for the trip to the interior of +South America. + +<P> +"Look out, Ned!" called Tom. "You're making those top boards too +long. They'll stick out over the edge, and be ripped off if the box +catches on anything." + +<P> +"Yes, you can't be too careful," cautioned Mr. Preston. "Each box or +package must be the right weight, or the porters and mule drivers +won't carry them into the interior. You may have to cross rough +trails, and even ford rivers. And as for bridges! well, the less +said about them the better. You aren't going to have any picnic, and +if you want to back out, Tom Swift, now is the time to say so." + +<P> +"What! Back out?" cried our hero. "Never! I said I'd go and I'm +going. Ned, pass that brace and bit over, will you. I've got to bore +a hole for these screws." + +<P> +And so the work went on in the big aeroplane shed, which they had +made their packing headquarters. + +<P> +The <i>Lark</i>, that small, but strong and speedy aeroplane, had been +safely packed, and most of it had been sent on ahead to New York, +where the travellers were to take the steamer. There remained to be +transported their clothing, weapons and ammunition, and several +bundles and cases of trinkets which would be of more value in +bartering with the natives than money. Tom and Mr. Preston had +selected the things with great care, and at the last moment the +young inventor had packed a box of his own, and said nothing about +it. Included in it were some of his own and his father's inventions, +and had one been given a glance into that same box he would have +wondered at the queer things. + +<P> +"What in the world are you taking with you, anyhow?" asked Ned, of +his chum, noticing the mysterious box. + +<P> +"'You'll see, if we ever get to giant land," replied Tom with a +smile. + +<P> +"How long before we can start?" asked Mr. Damon, late that day, when +most of the hard work had been finished. He was as anxious and as +eager as either of the youths to make a start. + +<P> +"We ought to be ready at least a week from to-day," replied Tom, +"and perhaps sooner." + +<P> +"Sooner, if you can make it," suggested Mr. Preston. "The steamer +sails a week from to-day, and if you miss that one you'll have to +wait two weeks more." + +<P> +"Then a week from to-day we'll sail," decided Tom, with emphasis. +"We'll work nights getting things in shape." + +<P> +Really, though, not much more remained to be done, and the next day +Mr. Preston again went to New York, accompanying a shipment of boxes +and cases that Tom sent on ahead. + +<P> +The two chums were busy in the aeroplane hangar a few days after +this, nailing up the last of some light cases containing medicines, +personal effects and comforts that would accompany them on their +trip. + +<P> +"Well, I'm glad of one thing," remarked Tom thoughtfully, as he +drove home the last nail in a box, "and that is that we won't be +bothered with that Andy Foger on this trip. I haven't seen hide nor +hair of him in some time. I guess he and his father are down and +out." + +<P> +"I guess so. I haven't seen him either." + +<P> +"Massa Andy were in town a few days ago," ventured Eradicate. + +<P> +"He was?" cried Tom. "Did you see him? What was he doing, Rad?" + +<P> +"Nuffin, same as usual. He done say I were too old to go on any more +hexpiditions wif yo' an' I proved dat I wasn't." + +<P> +"Proved that you weren't, Rad? How?" And Tom looked anxiously at his +colored helper. + +<P> +"Why, I done say t' him dat I was gwine wif yo'-all dis time, t' dat +Comeaway country after a big orchard plant. Dat's how I done prove +it to dat Andy Foger." + +<P> +"Rad, you didn't tell him we were going to South America?" asked Tom +reproachfully. + +<P> +"Suah I done so, Massa Tom. Dat were de only way t' prove t' him dat +I wa'an't gittin' too old." + +<P> +"Oh, Rad! I'm afraid--" and Tom hesitated. + +<P> +"Oh, I don't believe it amounted to anything," interposed Ned. "Andy +didn't have any one with him, did he, Rad?" + +<P> +"No, Massa Ned. He were all alone by hisse'f." + +<P> +"Then I guess it's all right, Tom. Andy was only rigging Eradicate, +and he didn't pay any attention to what he said." + +<P> +"Well, I hope so," and the young inventor wore a thoughtful air as +he resumed the finish of the packing. + +<P> +The colored man, blissfully unconscious that he had been the +innocent cause of a grave danger that overhung Tom and his friends, +whistled gaily as he gathered the boxes, bales and packages into a +pile, ready for the expressman, who was to call in the morning. + +<P> +Tom, together with Ned, Mr. Damon and Eradicate, were to leave the +following afternoon, and stay in New York until the sailing of the +steamer. They preferred to be a day or so ahead of time than half an +hour late, and were taking no chances. + +<P> +"Bless my timetable!" exclaimed Mr. Damon that night, as they sat in +the library of the Swift home, checking over the lists to make sure +that nothing had been forgotten, "bless my timetable, but it doesn't +seem possible that we are going to start at last." + +<P> +"Yes, we'll soon be on the way to giant land," spoke Tom in a low +voice. Somehow the young inventor did not seem to be in his usually +bright spirits. + +<P> +"You don't seem very enthusiastic," remarked Ned. "What's the +matter, Tom?" + +<P> +"Oh, nothing much. Though I would feel better if I knew that Andy +Foger didn't have any inkling of what our plans were," he added, for +Eradicate was not present. + +<P> +"Oh, nonsense!" exclaimed his chum. "Mr. Preston will be here in the +morning, and he'll know whether his rival has any idea of camping on +our trail. Cheer up!" + +<P> +"Yes, I suppose I am foolish to worry," admitted Tom, "but, somehow +I can't help it. I wish Mr. Preston was here now to tell us that +Wayland Waydell had gone off to the centre of Africa for a dwarf. +Then I'd know we had nothing to fear. But I guess--" + +<P> +Tom did not finish his sentence for, at that moment, there came a +peal at the door bell. Instinctively every one started, and Mr. +Damon exclaimed: + +<P> +"Bless my burglar alarm! What's that?" + +<P> +"Someone at the door, Tom," replied Mr. Swift calmly. "That's +nothing unusual. It's early yet." + +<P> +But, in spite of his reassuring words, there was a feeling of vague +alarm. + +<P> +"I'll see who it is," volunteered Ned. "If it's Andy Foger--" + +<P> +Mrs. Baggert entered the room at that moment. She had hurried to the +door, and, as she entered she announced: + +<P> +"Mr. Preston!" + +<P> +"Yes, it is I!" added the circus man following her quickly into the +room. "I came on to-night instead of waiting for the morning, Tom. I +have bad news for you!" + +<P> +"Bad news!" gasped the young inventor. "Has Waydell got hold of your +plans." + +<P> +"I'll wager it has something to do with Andy Foger!" exclaimed Ned. + +<P> +"Neither one," spoke the circus man. "But I have just had a cable +dispatch from one of my animal agents in Brazil, saying that war has +broken out among the tribes in the central part of South America. A +big native war is being waged all around giant land, as near as we +can figure it out." + +<P> +"War among the native tribes!" exclaimed Mr. Swift. + +<P> +"Yes, and one of the worst in years. Of course, Tom, after such +alarming news as this I won't hold you to your promise to go. It's +all off. I'm sorry, but you'd better wait. It won't be safe to go +there now. Better unpack, Tom." + +<P> +For a moment there was a silence in the room. Then the young +inventor leaped to his feet and faced the circus man. + +<P> +"Unpack?" cried Tom in ringing tones. "Never! I'm going to giant +land, fight or no fight! Ned, come with me and we'll put in some of +my electric rifles. I wasn't going to take them along, but I will +now. Unpack? I guess not! I'm going to get a giant for you, Mr. +Preston, and save Jake Poddington if he's alive. Come on, Ned." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="VII"></A> +<H3>Chapter VII Fire On Board</H3> + + +<P> +"Your electric rifles!" exclaimed Ned Newton, as he followed his +chum to the storeroom, where Tom kept a number of spare guns. "It's +a good thing you thought of them, Tom." + +<P> +"Yes, I didn't think we'd need them, for I believe peaceable means +are the best to use on natives. But if there's a war, and we have to +defend ourselves against the tribes, we'll take along something that +will do more damage than an ordinary rifle, and yet I can regulate +it so that it will only stun, and not kill." + +<P> +"That's the stuff, Tom. No use in being needlessly cruel. How many +will you take?" + +<P> +"Two or three. We may need 'em all." + +<P> +A little later the two lads returned to the library where Mr. Damon, +Mr. Swift and the circus man were anxiously awaiting them. Mr. +Preston looked curiously at several objects which Tom and Ned +carried. The objects looked like guns but were different from any +the giant-seeker had seen. + +<P> +"What are they?" he asked Tom. + +<P> +"Electric rifles. One of my inventions," and Tom showed how the +weapon worked. Those of you who have read the volume entitled, "Tom +Swift and His Electric Rifle" will remember this curious weapon. It +was worked by a stored charge of magnetism of the wireless kind. By +this a concentrated globule of electricity was projected from the +muzzle, and it could be made strong or weak at the will of the +marksman. It could be made so powerful that it would totally +annihilate a whale, as Tom had once proved, or it could be made so +mild that it would put an enemy, or several of them, to sleep almost +as gently as some narcotic, and they would awaken after several +hours, little the worse for their experience. + +<P> +A charge of electricity as powerful as five thousand volts could be +concentrated into a small wireless globule the size of a bullet, and +this would fly through space, or even through solid objects until, +reaching the limit of the range set, would strike the object aimed +at. With his wonderful electric rifle Tom had not only killed +elephants, and other big game, but fought off the red pygmies of +Africa. + +<P> +"And we may have a use for it in South America," he added as he +explained the workings to Mr. Preston. + +<P> +"Well, I'm glad you didn't back out," commented the circus man, "and +this may come in mighty handy. I'll feel easier about you now, Tom, +when I know you have some electric rifles with you." + +<P> +The circus man was told of what Eradicate had said to Andy, but he +was of the opinion that no harm would result from it. + +<P> +"As far as I can learn," went on Mr. Preston, "my old rival Waydell +has given up the giant idea. He is looking for a two-headed +crocodile, said to be somewhere along the Nile river, and he's +fitting out an expedition there I understand. I guess we won't be +bothered with him. But the giant for mine! If I get that sort of an +attraction his two-headed crocodile won't be in it. I hope you have +luck, Tom Swift." + +<P> +The last details of the expedition were considered. Nothing seemed +to have been left undone, and though carrying the electric rifles +would make a little more baggage, no one minded that. + +<P> +"I kin carry dem," said Eradicate. "I ain't got much baggage of mah +own." + +<P> +So it was arranged, and early the next morning the little band of +intrepid travelers, who were going in search of giant land, started +for New York. They little knew what was ahead of them, nor what dire +perils they were to pass through. + +<P> +Of course Tom had said good-bye to Mary Nestor and half-jokingly, he +had promised to bring back a giant of his own, that she might see +one outside of a circus. + +<P> +"But, Tom," Mary exclaimed with a laugh, "what will you do with one +of the big creatures if you get one?" + +<P> +"Have him help me on my newest invention--the noiseless airship," +answered the young inventor. "I need some one to lift heavy weights. +It will save putting up a derrick. Yes, I think I'll get a giant of +my own." + +<P> +The last good-byes were said, and the parting between Tom and his +father was affecting. + +<P> +"I'll soon be back, dad," he said in as cheerful a tone as he could +assume, "and I'll help you finish your gyroscope." + +<P> +"I hope you will, Tom," and then, with a pressure of his son's hand, +Mr. Swift turned away and went into the house, closing the door +after him. + +<P> +The first part of the trip to New York was rather a silent one, no +one caring to talk much. Eradicate was the only cheerful member of +the party, which included the circus man, who was going as far as +the steamer with Tom and his friends. + +<P> +"Say," Ned exclaimed finally, "any one would think we were going to +a funeral!" + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I guess something is on all our nerves. +Let's do something to take it off. Here comes a boy with some funny +papers. We'll buy some and read all the jokes." + +<P> +This proved a diversion, and before the train had gone many miles +more the giant-hunters were talking and laughing as though they were +merely starting on a short pleasure trip, instead of an expedition +to the dangerous jungles of South America. + +<P> +They put up at a good hotel in New York, and as soon as they were +established Tom and Mr. Preston went to the steamer <i>Calaban</i> which +was to land them at Buenos Ayres. They found that there was some +confusion about their luggage and boxes, and it took them the better +part of a day to get the tangle straightened out, and their stuff +stored together in one hold. + +<P> +"It will be easier to get it out if it's all together," said Tom, at +the conclusion of their labors, and then he and the circus man +returned to the hotel. The ship was to sail two days later, and, +several hours before the time set for the departure, Tom and his +friends were on board. + +<P> +"You don't see anything of your rival circus friend, do you?" asked +Tom, of the man who wanted a giant. + +<P> +"Not a sign," was the answer, as Mr. Preston glanced over the throng +of on-coming passengers. "I guess we've either given him the slip, +or he's given up the game. You won't have to worry about him. Just +take it easy until you start for the interior, and from then on +you'll have hard work enough." + +<P> +The last of the cargo was being taken aboard, the late passengers +had arrived and were anxiously watching to see that their baggage +was not lost. As Mr. Preston stood talking with Tom near the +gangplank, a clerical looking gentleman approached the circus man. + +<P> +"I beg your pardon," he began in mild accents, "but could you tell +me where my stateroom is?" and he showed his ticket. "I'm not used +to traveling," he needlessly added for that fact was very evident. +Mr. Preston informed him how to get to his berth, and the gentleman +went on: "Are you going all the way to Buenos Ayres?" + +<P> +"No, but my friend is," and the circus man nodded at Tom. + +<P> +"Oh, I'm so glad!" the stranger exclaimed. "Then I shall have +someone of whom I can ask questions. I am quite lost when I travel." + +<P> +"I'll help you all I can," volunteered Tom, "and I'll show you to +your stateroom now." + +<P> +"Ah, thank you. Your name is--" + +<P> +"Tom Swift," supplied the young inventor. + +<P> +"Ah, yes, I believe I have read about your airships. I am the +Reverend Josiah Blinderpool. I am taking a little vacation. I trust +we shall become good friends." + +<P> +"Humph, he's a regular infant, to be away from civilization," mused +Tom, when he had showed the clergyman to the proper stateroom. +"He'll get into trouble, he's so innocent." If he could have seen +that same "clergyman" double up with mirth when he had closed his +stateroom door after him, Tom would not have felt so sure about that +same "innocence." + +<P> +"To think that I was talking face to face with Sam Preston and he +never tumbled to who I was!" exclaimed the newcomer softly. "That's +rich! Now if I play my cards right I shouldn't be surprised but what +they'd invite me to come along with them. That would just suit me. I +wouldn't have any trouble then, getting on the track of those +giants. The information Waydell got from that red-haired Foger chap +wasn't any too definite," and once more the man wearing the garb of +a minister chuckled. + +<P> +"Well, I'll say good-bye," remarked Mr. Preston, a little later, +when the warning bell had rung. "I guess you'll get along all right. +I haven't seen a sign of Waydell, or any of his slick agents. You'll +have no trouble I guess." + +<P> +But if the circus man could have seen the "clergyman" at that same +time looking over letters addressed to "Hank Delby," and signed +"Wayland Waydell" he would not have been so confident. + +<P> +Mr. Preston bade good-bye to his friends, the gangplank was hauled +up, and a hoarse blast came from the whistle of the <i>Calaban</i>. + +<P> +"Bless my pocketbook!" cried Mr. Damon. "We're off!" + +<P> +"Yep, off t' git dat big, giant orchard plant," chimed in Eradicate. + +<P> +"Hush!" exclaimed Tom, who did not like the use of the word "giant" +even in that connection. "Don't tell everyone our business, Rad." + +<P> +"Dat's right, Massa Tom. I clean done forgot dat it's a sort of +secret. I'll keep mighty still 'bout it." + +<P> +The <i>Calaban</i> swung out into the river and began steaming down the +bay. + +<P> +The first week of the voyage was uneventful. The weather was +exceptionally fine, and hardly any one was seasick. The Reverend Mr. +Blinderpool was often on deck, and he made it a point to cultivate +the acquaintance of Tom and his friends. In spite of the fact that +he said he had traveled very little, he seemed to know much about +hidden corners of the world, but always, as on an occasion when he +had accidentally let slip some remark that showed he had been in +far-off China or Asia, he would suddenly change the conversation +when it verged to travel. + +<P> +"There's something queer about that minister," said Ned after one of +these occasions, "but I can't decide what it is." + +<P> +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Tom, who rather liked the man. + +<P> +"No nonsense about it. Why should a minister take a trip like this +when he isn't sick, and when he isn't going to establish a mission +in South America? There's something queer about it, for, by his own +words he just took this voyage as a whim." + +<P> +"Oh, you're too fussy," declared Tom; and for the time the subject +was dropped. + +<P> +They ran into a storm when about ten days out, and for a while they +had a rough time of it, and then the weather cleared again. + +<P> +It was one evening, after the formal dinner, when Tom and Ned were +strolling about on deck, before turning in, that, the quiet of the +ship was broken by what is always an alarming cry at sea. + +<P> +"Fire! Fire!" shouted a man, pointing to a thin wisp of smoke +curling up from the deck amidships. + +<P> +"Keep quiet!" yelled one of the stewards. "It is nothing!" + +<P> +"It's a fire, I tell you!" insisted the man, and several others took +up the cry. + +<P> +A panic was imminent, and the captain came running from his +quarters. + +<P> +"What is it?" he asked. + +<P> +An officer hurried to his side, and said something but in such a low +voice that Tom, who was standing close beside the two, scarcely +heard it. But he did hear this: + +<P> +"There's a fire, sir, in hold number seventeen. We have turned the +hose in there, and the pumps are working." + +<P> +"Very good, Mr. Meld. Now try and quiet the passengers. Tell them it +doesn't amount to much, and if it does we can flood that +compartment." + +<P> +Tom started at that. + +<P> +"Come on, Ned!" he cried, grabbing his chum by the arm. + +<P> +"Why, what's up? What's the matter?" + +<P> +"Matter? Matter enough! The fire is in the hold where all our stuff +is stored, and if the flames reach that box I packed last--well, I +wouldn't give much for the ship!" and fairly dragging his chum +along, Tom raced for the place where the smoke was now coming up in +thicker clouds. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="VIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter VIII A Narrow Escape</H3> + + +<P> +"Here, come back! You can't go past here!" + +<P> +"But I've got to go! I tell you I must go! It's important!" + +<P> +The first speaker was one of the ship's officers, and the other was +Tom Swift, who, accompanied by his chum, was trying to get past a +rope that had been hastily stretched in front of the hold where the +smoke was rolling up in ever-thickening clouds. + +<P> +"It's important that you stay where you are," insisted the officer. +"Look here young man, do you want to start a panic? You know what +that is on board ship. Keep cool, we'll get the fire out all right." + +<P> +"I am cool," responded Tom, and, though he did look a bit excited, +he was calm enough to know what he was doing. + +<P> +"Then keep back!" insisted the officer. + +<P> +A crowd was gathering and there were ominous whispers sent back and +forth. Some hysterical women were beginning to scream, and there +were anxious looks on all faces. + +<P> +"I tell you it's important that I go down there," insisted Tom. "I +want to get a box--" + +<P> +"We'll look after the baggage of the passengers," declared the +officer. "You don't need to worry, young man." + +<P> +"But I tell you I do!" and Tom's voice was loud now. "It isn't so +much on my account, as--" and then, stepping quickly to the side of +the officer he whispered something. + +<P> +"What!" cried the officer. "You don't tell me? That was a risk! I +guess I'll have to help you get it out. Here, Mr. Simm," he called +to one of the mates, "stand guard here. I'm going down into the hold +with this young man." + +<P> +"Shall I come?" cried Ned. + +<P> +"No, you go stay with Mr. Damon and Eradicate," answered Tom. "Tell +them everything is all right. And for cats' sake keep Rad cool. +Don't let him get excited and start a panic. I'll be back in a +minute." + +<P> +With that Tom and the officer disappeared from view, and Ned, after +wondering what it was all about, hastened to reassure Mr. Damon and +the colored man that there was no danger, though from the manner in +which Tom had acted his chum was convinced that something was wrong. + +<P> +Meanwhile our hero, accompanied by the officer, was groping his way +through the thick smoke in the compartment. The officer had switched +on the electric lights, and they shone with a yellow haze through +the clouds of choking vapor. + +<P> +"Can you see it?" asked the officer anxiously. + +<P> +"I had it put where I could easily get at it," answered Tom with a +cough, for some of the smoke had got down his throat. "I had an idea +I might need it in a hurry. Here it is!" and he pointed to a large +box, marked with his initials in red paint. "Give me a hand and +we'll get it out." + +<P> +"Yes, and send it on deck. See, there's the fire!" and the officer +pointed to where a glow could be seen amid some bales of cotton. "It +will be slow burning, that's one good thing, and by turning steam +into this compartment we can soon put it out." + +<P> +"It's pretty close to my box," commented Tom, "but there isn't as +much danger as I thought." + +<P> +It did not take him and the officer long to move the box away from +its proximity to the fire, for the case was not heavy, though it was +of good size, and then the officer having called up an order to some +of his fellow seamen on deck, a rope was let down, and the box +hoisted up. + +<P> +"Whew! That was a narrow escape!" exclaimed Tom as he saw his case +go up on deck. "I suppose I shouldn't have had that stored here. But +there were so many things to think of that I forgot." + +<P> +"Yes, it was a risk," commented the officer. "But what are you going +to do with that sort of stuff, anyhow?" + +<P> +"I may need it when we get among the wild tribes of South American +Indians," answered Tom non-commitally. "I'm much obliged for your +help." + +<P> +"Oh, that's nothing. Anything to save the ship." + +<P> +At that moment there were confused cries, and a series of shouts and +commands up on deck. + +<P> +"We'd better hurry out of here," said the officer. + +<P> +"Why?" + +<P> +"The captain has just ordered steam turned in here. I hope there +isn't anything of yours that will be damaged by it." + +<P> +"No, everything else is in waterproof coverings. Come on, we'll +climb out." + +<P> +They hurried from the compartment and, a little later clouds of +quenching steam were poured in from a hose run from the boiler room. +The hatch was battened down, and then the smoke ceased to come up. + +<P> +"The danger is practically over," the captain assured the frightened +passengers. "The fire will be all out by morning. You may go to your +staterooms in perfect safety." + +<P> +Some did, and others, disbelieving, hung around the hatch-cover, +sniffing and peering to discover traces of smoke. But the sailors +had done their work well, and a stranger would not have known that a +fire was in the hold. + +<P> +The captain had spoken truly, and in the morning the fire was +completely out, a few charred bales of cotton being the only things +damaged. They were hauled up and dumped into the sea, while Tom, +making a hasty inspection of his other goods placed in that +compartment saw, to his relief, that beyond one case of trinkets, +designed for barter with the natives, nothing had been damaged, and +even the trinkets could be used on a pinch. + +<P> +"But what was in that box?" asked Ned, that night as they got ready +to retire, the excitement having calmed down. + +<P> +"Hush! Not so loud," cautioned Tom, for Mr. Damon was in the next +stateroom, while Eradicate had one across the corridor. "I'll tell +you, Ned, but don't breathe a word of it to Rad or Mr. Damon. They +might not intend to give it away, but I'm afraid they would, if they +knew, and I depend on the things in that box to give the native +giants the surprise of their lives in case we--well, in case we come +to close quarters." + +<P> +"Close quarters?" + +<P> +"Yes, have a fight, you know, or in case they get so fond of us that +they won't hear of letting us go--in other words if they make us +captives." + +<P> +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't think they'll do that, do you?" + +<P> +"No telling, but if they do, Ned, I've got some things in that box +that will make them wish they hadn't. It's got--" and Tom leaned +forward and whispered, as though he feared even the walls would +hear. + +<P> +"Good!" cried his chum! "That's the stuff! No wonder you thought the +ship might be damaged if the fire got to that!" + +<P> +It seemed that the slight fire was about all the excitement destined +to take place aboard the <i>Calaban</i>, for, after the blaze was so +effectually quenched, the ship slipped along through the calm seas, +and it was actually an effort to kill time on the part of the +passengers. As they progressed further south the weather became more +and more warm, until, as they approached the equator, every one put +on the lightest garments obtainable. + +<P> +"Crossing the line," was the signal for the usual "stunts" among the +sailors. "Neptune" came aboard, with his usual sea-green whiskers +made from long rope ends, and with his trident much in evidence; and +there was plenty of horseplay which the passengers very much +enjoyed. + +<P> +Then, as the tropical region was left behind, the weather became +more bearable. There were one or two storms, but they were of no +consequence and the steamer weathered them easily. + +<P> +Tom and his friends had several talks with the "Reverend Josiah +Blinderpool," as the pretended clergyman still called himself. But +he did not obtrude his company on them, and though he asked many +questions as to where Tom and his party were going, the young +inventor, with his usual caution in talking to strangers, rather +evaded them. + +<P> +"Hang it all! He's as close-mouthed as a clam," complained "Mr. +Blinderpool" to himself one day, after an attempt to worm something +from Tom, "I'll just have to stick close to him and his chum to get +a line on where they're heading for. And I must find out, or Waydell +will think I'm throwing the game." + +<P> +As for Tom and the others, they gave the seeming clergyman little +thought--that is until one day when something happened. Ned had been +down in the engine room, having had permission to inspect the +wonderful machinery, and, on his way back he passed the smoking +cabin. He was rather surprised to see Mr. Blinderpool in there, +puffing on a big black cigar, and with him were some men whom Ned +recognized as personages who had vainly endeavored to get a number +of passengers into a card game with them. And, unless Ned's eyes +deceived him, the seeming clergyman was about to indulge in a game +himself. + +<P> +"That's mighty queer," mused Ned. "Guess I'll tell Tom about this. I +never saw a minister play cards in public before, and this Mr. +Blinderpool has been trying to get thick with Tom, of late. Maybe +he's a gambler in disguise." + +<P> +Filled with this thought Ned hastened off to warn his chum. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="IX"></A> +<H3>Chapter IX "Forward March!"</H3> + + +<P> +"You don't say so!" exclaimed the young inventor, when Ned had told +him the queer news. "Well, do you know I've been suspicious of that +fellow ever since he tried to make friends with us." + +<P> +"Suspicious? How so? You don't think--" + +<P> +"Oh, I mean I think he's some kind of a confidence man who has +adopted the respectable clothes of a minister to fool people. He may +be a card sharper himself. Well, we won't have anything more to do +with him. It won't be long before we arrive at Buenos Ayres, and +then we won't be bothered with card sharpers or anybody else but--" + +<P> +"Giants and fighting natives," finished Ned, with a laugh. "You +forget, Tom, that there's a war going on near the very place we're +headed for." + +<P> +"That's so, Ned. But with what we have with us I guess we can make +out all right. I'm going to have the electric rifles handy the +minute we start for the interior." + +<P> +The voyage continued, and was fast drawing to a close. "Mr. +Blinderpool" made several more attempts to strike up a friendship +with Tom, or his chum, but they were on their guard now, and, +failing to get into much of a conversation with the two young men, +the pretended clergyman turned his attentions to Mr. Damon. + +<P> +That eccentric gentleman welcomed him at first, until a quiet hint +from Tom brought that to an end. + +<P> +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't say so! Not a +clergyman at all? Dear me!" + +<P> +And then, getting desperate, and needing very much to learn how long +a journey his rivals were to undertake, so that he, too, might +prepare for it, Mr. Hank Delby, alias Blinderpool, began to "pump" +Eradicate. + +<P> +But the latter was too sharp for him. Well knowing that a white man +would not get suddenly friendly with one of the black race unless +for some selfish object, Eradicate fairly snubbed the seeming +minister, until that worthy had to go off by himself, saying bitter +things and casting black looks at our friends. + +<P> +"But I'll get ahead of them yet!" he muttered, "and I'll get their +giants away from them, if they capture any." + +<P> +The box on which Tom set such an importance, and which had so nearly +been the cause of a disaster, had been stored in one of the fireproof +compartments of the ship, and now, as a few days more would +see the vessel entering the harbor of the Rio de la Plata, thence to +steam up to the ancient city of Buenos Ayres, Tom and the others +began to think of what lay before them. + +<P> +"How do you propose to head into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one +afternoon, when the captain announced that the following morning +would see them nearly opposite Montevideo. + +<P> +"I'm going to hire a lot of burrows, donkeys or whatever they have +down here that answers the purpose," replied Tom. "We have a lot of +things to transport, and I guess pack mules would be the best, if we +can get them. Then I've got to hire some drivers and some porters, +camp-makers and the like. In fact we'll have quite a party. I guess +I'll need ten natives, and a head man and with ourselves we'll be +fifteen. So we'll need plenty of food. But then we can get that as +we go along, except when we get away into the interior, and then +we'll have to hunt it ourselves." + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "We haven't had a good hunting +expedition since we went to elephant land, Tom. The electric rifles +will come in handy here." + +<P> +"Yes, I expect they will. Now come on, Ned, and help me get a list +ready of the things we've got to take with us, and how they can best +be divided up." + +<P> +Thick weather delayed the ship somewhat, so it was not until evening +of the next day that they made Montevideo, where part of the cargo +was to be discharged. As they would lay over there a day, the boys +decided to go ashore, which they did, wondering at the strange +sights in the old city. + +<P> +Tom watched to see if the pretended minister would land, and +endeavor to force his acquaintance, but Mr. Hank Delby, to give him +his right name, was not in evidence. In fact he was turning over +scheme after scheme in his mind in order to hit on one that would +enable him to take advantage of the preparations which had been made +by his rival in the circus business. + +<P> +"I've just got to get a line on where those giants are to be found," +mused Mr. Delby, in the seclusion of his stateroom, "even if I have +to take some other disguise and follow that Swift crowd. That's what +I'll do. I'll put on some other disguise! I wonder what it had +better be?" + +<P> +Tom and Ned, to say nothing of Mr. Damon and Eradicate, found much +to interest them in the capital of Uruguay, and they were rather +sorry, in a way, when it was time for them to leave. + +<P> +"But we'll see plenty more strange sights," remarked Tom, as the +steamer started off for Buenos Ayres. "In fact our trip hasn't +really begun yet." + +<P> +In due time they dropped anchor at the ancient city, and then began +a series of confused and busy times. In fact there was so much to +do, seeing to the unloading of their stuff, arranging for hotel +accommodations, seeing to hiring natives for the expedition into the +interior, and other details, that Tom and his friends had no time to +think anything about the pretended clergyman who had caused them a +little worry. + +<P> +Eventually their belongings were stored in a safe place, and our +friends sat down to a good dinner in a hotel that, while it was in +far-off South America, yet was as good as many in New York, and, in +some respects the boys, and Mr. Damon, liked it better. + +<P> +They found that the Spanish and Portuguese languages were the +principal ones spoken, together with a mixture of the native +tongues, and as both Ned and Tom, as well as Mr. Damon, had a +working knowledge of Spanish they got along fairly well. Some of the +hotel people could speak English. + +<P> +Tom made inquiries and found that the best plan would be to +transport all his stuff by the regular route to Rosario, on the +Parana river in Argentina, and there he could make up his pack +train, hire native carriers, and start for the interior. + +<P> +"Then we'll do that," he decided, "and take it easy until we get to +Rosario." + +<P> +It took them the better part of a week to do this, but at last they +were on the ground, and felt for the first time that they were +really going into a wild and little explored country. + +<P> +"Are you going to stick to the Parana river?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"No," replied Tom, in the seclusion of their room, "if there are any +giants they will be found in some undiscovered, or at least little +traveled, part of the country. I don't believe they are in the +vicinity of the big rivers, or other travelers would have heard +about them, and, as far as we know, Mr. Preston's animal agent is +the only one who ever got a trace of them. We'll have to go into the +jungle on either side of the river." + +<P> +"Bless my walking stick!" cried Mr. Damon. "Have we really to go +into the jungle, Tom?" + +<P> +"I'm afraid we have, if we want to get any giants, and get a trace +of Mr. Poddington." + +<P> +"All right, I'm game, but I do hope we won't run into a band of +fighting natives." + +<P> +In Rosario it was learned that while the "war" was not regarded +seriously from the fact that the fighting tribes were far inland, +still it was going on with vigor, and large bands of natives were +roaming about, stealing each others' cattle and horses, burning +villages, and taking captives. + +<P> +"I guess we're in for it," remarked Tom grimly. "But I'm not going +to back out now." + +<P> +Unexpected complications, difficulties in the way of getting the +right kind of help, and a competent man to take charge of the native +drivers, so delayed our friends that it was nearly two weeks after +their arrival in Rosario before they could start for the interior. + +<P> +Of course the object of the expedition was kept a secret, and Tom +let it be known that he and his friends were merely exploring, and +wanted rare plants, orchids, or anything in that line. The natives +were not very curious. + +<P> +At last the day for the start came. The mules, which had been hired +as beasts of burdens, were loaded with boxes or bales on either +side, the natives were marshalled into line. Tom, Ned, and Mr. +Damon, each equipped with a rifle had a saddle animal to ride, and +Eradicate was similarly equipped, though for a weapon he depended on +a shotgun, which he said he understood better than the electric +rifles. + +<P> +The aeroplane, divided into many small packages, the goods for +barter, their supplies, stores, ammunition, and the box of which Tom +took such care--all these were on the backs of the beasts of burden. +Some food was taken along, but for a time, at least, they could +depend on scattered towns or villages, or the forest game, for their +eating. + +<P> +"Are we all ready?" called Tom, looking at the rather imposing +cavalcade of which he was the head. + +<P> +"I guess so," replied Ned. "Let her go!" + +<P> +"Bless my liver pad!" gasped Mr. Damon. "If we've got to start do +it, and let's get it over with Tom." + +<P> +"All ready, Rad?" asked the colored man's young master. + +<P> +"All ready, Massa Tom. But I mus' say dat I'd radder hab Boomerang +dan dish yeah animal what I'm ridin'." + +<P> +"Oh, you'll do all right, Rad. Then, if we're all ready, forward +march!" cried Tom, and with calls to their animals, the drivers +started them off. + +<P> +Hardly had they begun the advance than Ned, who had been narrowly +watching one of the natives, hurried up to Tom, and rapidly +whispered something to his chum. + +<P> +"What?" cried Tom. "Armed with a six-shooter, is he? Well, we'll see +about that! Halt!" he cried in Spanish, and then he called San Pedro +the head mule driver, to him. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="X"></A> +<H3>Chapter X A Wild Horse Stampede</H3> + + +<P> +"Who is that man?" demanded Tom pointing to the one Ned had +indicated. Tom's chum had had a glimpse of a shining revolver in the +hip pocket of one of the mule drivers, and knowing that the simple +natives were not in the habit of carrying such weapons, the lad had +communicated his suspicions to Tom. + +<P> +"What man, senor?" asked the head mule driver. + +<P> +"That one!" and the young inventor again pointed toward him. And, +now that Tom looked a second time he saw that the man was not as +black as the other drivers--not an honest, dark-skinned black but +more of a sickly yellow, like a treacherous half-breed. "Who is he?" +asked Tom, for the man in question was just then tightening a girth +and could not hear him. + +<P> +"I know not, senor. He come to me when I am hiring the others, and +he say he is a good driver. And so he is, I test him before I engage +him," went in San Pedro in Spanish. "He is one good driver." + +<P> +"Why does he carry a revolver?" + +<P> +"A revolver, senor? Santa Maria, I know not! I--" + +<P> +"I'll find out," declared Tom determinedly. "Here," he called to the +offending one, who straightened up quickly. "Come here!" + +<P> +The man came, with all the cringing servility of a born native, and +bowed low. + +<P> +"Why have you a weapon?" asked the young inventor. "I gave orders +that none of the drivers were to carry them." + +<P> +"A revolver, senor? I have none! I--" + +<P> +"Rad, reach in his pocket!" cried Tom, and the colored man did so +with a promptness that the other could not frustrate. Eradicate held +aloft a large calibre, automatic weapon. + +<P> +"What's that for?" asked Tom, virtuously angry. + +<P> +"I--er--I--" and then, with a hopeless shrug of his shoulders the +man turned away. + +<P> +"Give him his gun, and get another driver, San Pedro," directed our +hero, and with another shrug of his shoulders the man accepted the +revolver, and walked slowly off. Another driver was not hard to +engage, as several had been hanging about, hoping for employment at +the last minute, and one was quickly chosen. + +<P> +"It's lucky you saw that gun, Ned," remarked Tom, when they were +actually under way again. + +<P> +"Yes, I saw the sun shining on it as his coat flapped up. What was +his game, do you suppose?" + +<P> +"Oh, he might be what they call a 'bad half-breed' down here. I +guess maybe he thought he could lord it over the other drivers when +we got out in the jungle, and maybe take some of their wages away +from them, or have things easier for himself." + +<P> +"Bless my wishbone!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You don't think he meant +to use it on us, Tom?" + +<P> +"Why no? What makes you ask that?" + +<P> +"Oh, I'm just nervous, I guess," replied the odd man. + +<P> +But if Mr. Damon could have seen that same half-breed a little +later, as he slipped into a Rosario resort, with the yellow stain +washed from his face, the nervousness of the eccentric gentleman +would have increased. For the man who had been detected with the +revolver muttered to himself: + +<P> +"Caught! Well, I'll fool 'em next time all right! I thought I could +get away with the pack train, and then it would have been easy to +turn the natives any way I wished, after I had found what I'm +looking for. But I had to go and carry that gun! I never thought +they'd spot it. Well, it's all up now, and if Waydell heard of it +he'd want to fire me. But I'll make good yet. I'll have to adopt +some other disguise, and see if I can't tag along behind." + +<P> +All unconscious of the plotter they had left back of them, Tom and +his companions pushed on, rapidly leaving such signs of civilization +as were represented by small native towns and villages, and coming +nearer to the jungles and forests that lay between them and the +place where Tom was destined to be made a captive. + +<P> +They were far enough away from the tropics to escape the intolerable +heat, and yet it was quite warm. In fact the weather was not at all +unpleasant, and, once they were started, all enjoyed the novelty of +the trip. + +<P> +Tom planned to keep along the eastern shore of the Parana river, +until they reached the junction where the Salado joins it. Then he +decided that they would do better to cross the Parana and strike +into the big triangle made by that stream and its principal +tributary, heading north toward Bolivia. + +<P> +"For it is in that little-explored part of South America that I +think the giants will be found." said Tom, as he talked it over with +Ned and Mr. Damon in the privacy of their tent, which had been set +up. + +<P> +"But why should there be giants there any more than anywhere else?" +asked Ned. + +<P> +"No particular reason," answered his chum. "But, according to the +last word Mr. Preston had from his agent, that was where he was +heading for, and that's where Zacatas, his native helper, said he +lost track of his master. I have a theory that the giants, if we +find any, will turn out to be a branch of a Patagonian tribe." + +<P> +"Patagonians!" exclaimed Ned. + +<P> +"Yes. You know the natives of the Southern part of Argentina grow to +a considerable size. Now Patagonia is a comparatively bleak and cold +country. What would prevent some of that big tribe centuries ago, +from having migrated to a warmer country, where life was more +favorable? After several generations they may have grown to be +giants." + +<P> +"Bravo!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "It's a good theory, at any rate, Tom. +Though whether you can ever prove it is a question." + +<P> +"Yes, and a big one," agreed the young inventor with a laugh. + +<P> +For some days they traveled along over a comparatively flat country, +bordering the river. At times they would pass through small native +villages, where they would be able to get fresh meat, poultry and +other things that varied their bill of fare. Again there would be +long, lonely stretches of forest or jungle, through which it was +difficult to make their way. And, occasionally they would come to +fair-sized towns where their stay was made pleasant. + +<P> +"I doan't see any ob dem oranges an' bananas droppin' inter mah +mouf, Massa Tom," complained Eradicate one day, after they had been +on the march for over a week. + +<P> +"Have patience, Rad," advised Tom. "We'll come to them when we get a +little farther into the interior. First we'll come to the monkeys, +and the cocoanut trees." + +<P> +"Hones' Massa Tom?" + +<P> +"Surely." + +<P> +And though it was pretty far south for the nimble simians, the next +day they did come upon a drove of them skipping about in the tall +palm trees. + +<P> +"There they are, Rad! There they are!" cried Ned, as the chattering +of the monkeys filled the forest. + +<P> +"By golly! So dey be! Heah's where I get some cocoanuts!" + +<P> +Before anyone could stop him, Eradicate caught up a dead branch, and +threw it at a monkey. The chattering increased, and almost instantly +a shower of cocoanuts came crashing down, narrowly missing some of +our friends. + +<P> +"Hold on, Rad! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Some of us will be hurt!" + +<P> +Crack! came a cocoanut down on the skull of the colored man. + +<P> +"Bless my court plaster! Someone's hurt now!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Hurt? Bless yo' heart, Massa Damon, it takes mo' dan dat t' hurt +dish yeah chile!" cried Eradicate with a grin. "Ah got a hard head, +Ah has, mighty hard head, an' de cocoanut ain't growed dat kin bust +it. Thanks, Mistah Monkey, thanks!" and with a laugh Eradicate +jumped off his mule, and began gathering up the nuts, while the +monkeys fled into the forest. + +<P> +"Very much good to drink milk," said San Pedro, as he picked up a +half-ripe nut, and showed how to chop off the top with a big knife +and drain the slightly acid juice inside. "Very much good for +thirst." + +<P> +"Let's try it," proposed Tom, and they all drank their fill, for +there were many cocoanuts, though it was rather an isolated grove of +them. + +<P> +The monkeys became more numerous as they proceeded farther north +toward the equator, for it must be remembered that they had landed +south of it, and at times the little animals became a positive +nuisance. + +<P> +Several days passed, and they crossed the Parana river and struck +into the almost unpenetrated tract of land where Tom hoped to find +the giants. As yet none of their escort dreamed of the object of the +expedition, and though Tom had caused scouts to be sent back over +their trail to learn if they were being followed there was no trace +of any one. + +<P> +One day, after a night camp on the edge of a rather high table land, +they started across a fertile plain that was covered with a rich +growth of grass. + +<P> +"Good grazing ground here," commented Ned. + +<P> +"Yes," put in San Pedro. "Plenty much horse here pretty soon." + +<P> +"Do the natives graze their herds of horses here?" asked Tom. + +<P> +"No natives--wild horses," explained Pedro. "Plenty much, sometimes +too many they come. You see, maybe." + +<P> +It was nearly noon, and Tom was considering stopping for dinner if +they could come to a good watering place, when Ned, who had ridden +slightly in advance, came galloping back as fast as his steed would +carry him. + +<P> +"Look out! Look out!" he cried. "There's a stampede of 'em, and +they're headed right this way!" + +<P> +"Stampede of what? Who's headed this way?" cried Tom. "A lot of +monkeys?" + +<P> +"No, wild horses! Thousands of 'em! Hear 'em coming?" + +<P> +In the silence that followed Ned's warning there could be heard a +dull, roaring, thundering sound, and the earth seemed to tremble. + +<P> +"The young senor speaks truth! Wild horses are coming!" cried San +Pedro. "Get ready, senors! Have your weapons at hand, and perchance +we can turn the stampede aside." + +<P> +"The rifles! The electric rifles, Ned--Mr. Damon! We've got to stop +them, or they'll trample us to death!" cried Tom. + +<P> +As he spoke the thundering became louder, and then, looking across +the grassy plain, all saw a large troop of wild horses, with flying +manes and tails, headed directly toward them! + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XI"></A> +<H3>Chapter XI Caught in a Living Rope</H3> + + +<P> +"Quick! Peg out the mules!" cried San Pedro, after one look at the +onrushing horses. "Drive the stakes well down! Tie them fast and +then get behind those rocks! Lively!" + +<P> +He cried his orders to the natives in Spanish, at the same time +motioning to Tom and Ned. + +<P> +"Get off your mules!" he went on. "Peg them out. Peg out the others, +and then run for it!" + +<P> +"Run for it?" repeated Tom, "Do you think I'm going to leave my +outfit in the midst of that stampede?" and he waved his hand toward +the thundering, galloping wild horses which were coming nearer every +moment. "Get out the electric rifles, and we'll turn that stampede. +I'm not going to run." + +<P> +"Bless my saddle!" cried Mr. Damon. "This is awful! There must be a +thousand of them." + +<P> +"Nearer two!" cried Ned, who was struggling to loosen the straps that +bound his electric rifle to the side of his mule. Already the pack +animals as well as those ridden by the members of the giant-hunting +party were showing signs of excitement. They seemed to want to join +the stampeding horses. + +<P> +"Peg our animals out! Peg them out! Make them so they can't join the +others!" yelled San Pedro. "It's our only chance!" + +<P> +"I believe he's right!" cried Mr. Damon. "Tom, if we wait until +those maddened brutes are up to us they'll fairly sweep ours along +with them, and there's no telling where we'll end up. I think we'd +better follow his advice and tie our mules as strongly as we can. +Then we can go over there by the rocks, and fire at the wild horses. +We may be able to turn them aside." + +<P> +"Guess that's right," agreed the young inventor after a moment's +thought. "Come on, Ned. Peg out!" + +<P> +"Peg out! Peg out!" yelled the natives, and then began a lively +scene. Pegging stakes were in readiness, and, attached to the bridle +of each mule was a strong, rawhide rope for tying to the stake. The +pegs were driven deeply into the ground and in a trice the animals +were made fast to them, though they snorted, and tried to pull away +as they heard the neighing of the stampeding animals and saw them +coming on with an irresistible rush. + +<P> +"Hurry!" begged San Pedro, and hurry Tom, Ned and the others did. +Animal after animal was made fast--that is all but one and that bore +on its back two rather large but light boxes--the contents of the +case which Tom had rescued from the fire in the hold. + +<P> +"What are you going to do with that mule?" asked Ned, as he saw Tom begin +to lead the animal away, the others having been pegged out. + +<P> +"I'm going to take him over to the rocks with me. I'm not going to +take any chances on this mule getting away with those things in the +boxes. Give me a hand here, and then we'll see what the electric +rifles will do against those horses." + +<P> +But the one mule which Tom had elected to take with him seemed to +resent being separated from his companions. Bracing his feet well +apart, the animal stubbornly refused to move. + +<P> +"Come on!" yelled Tom, pulling on the leading rope. + +<P> +"Bless my porous plaster!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'd better hurry, +Tom! Those wild horses are almost on us!" + +<P> +"I'm trying to hurry!" replied the young inventor, "but this mule +won't come. Ned, get behind and shove, will you?" + +<P> +"Not much! I don't want to be kicked." + +<P> +"Beat him! Strike him! Wait until I get a club!" yelled San Pedro. +"Come, Antonia, Selka, Balaka!" he cried, to several of the natives +who had already started for the sheltering rocks a short distance +away. "Beat the mule for Senor Swift!" + +<P> +Ned joined Tom at the leading rope, and the two lads tried to pull +the animal along. Mr. Damon rushed over to lend his aid, and San +Pedro, catching up a long stick, was about to bring it down on the +mule's back. Meanwhile the stampeding animals were rushing nearer. + +<P> +"Hold on dere, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Yo'-all done +flustered dat mule, dat's what yo' done. Yo'-all am too much excited +'bout him. Be calm! Be calm!" + +<P> +"Calm! With that bunch of wild animals bearing down on us?" shouted +Tom. "Let's see you be calm, Rad. Come on here, you obstinate +brute!" he cried, straining on the rope. + +<P> +"Let me do it, Massa Tom. Let me do it," suggested the colored man +hurrying to the balky beast. + +<P> +Then, as gently as if he was talking to a nervous child, and totally +oblivious to the danger of the approaching horses, Eradicate went up +to the mule's head, rubbed its ears until they pointed naturally +once more, murmured something to it, and then, taking the rope from +Ned and Tom, Eradicate led the mule along toward the rocks as easily +as if there had never been any question about going there. + +<P> +"For the love of tripe! How did you do it?" asked Tom. + +<P> +"Bless my peck of oats!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a good thing we had +Rad along!" + +<P> +"All mules am alike," said the colored man with a grin. "An dish +yeah one ain't much different from mah Boomerang. I guess he's a +sorter cousin." + +<P> +"Come on!" yelled San Pedro. "No time to lose. Make for the rocks!" + +<P> +Tom, Ned and Mr. Damon sprinted then, and there was need to, for the +foremost of the galloping horses was not a hundred feet away. Then +came Eradicate, leading the mule that had at last consented to +hurry. The natives, with San Pedro, were already at the rocks, +waiting for the white hunters with the deadly electric rifles. + +<P> +"If they stampede our mules we'll be in a pickle!" murmured Ned. + +<P> +"I guess those ropes will hold unless they bite them through," +remarked Tom. + +<P> +"Yes, they sure hold," cried San Pedro, and indeed one had to shout +now to be heard above the thundering of the horses. Now the tethered +mules were lost to sight in the multitude of the other steeds all +about them. + +<P> +"Come on, Ned!" yelled Tom, as he sighted his rifle. "Pump it into +them! We must turn them, or they may come over this way, and if they +do it will be all up with us." + +<P> +"Shoot to kill?" asked Ned, as he drew back the firing lever of his +electric rifle. + +<P> +"No, only a stunning charge. Those horses are valuable, and there's +no use killing them. All we want to do is to turn them aside." + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Mr. Damon, forgetting in the excitement of +the moment to bless himself or anything. "We'll only stun them." + +<P> +The rifles were quickly adjusted to send out a comparatively weak +charge of electricity, and then they were trained on the dense mass +of horses, while the three marksmen began working the firing levers. + +<P> +At first, though horse after horse fell to the ground, stunned, +there was no appreciable effect on the thousands in the drove. The +poor mules were hidden from sight, though by reason of divisions in +the living stream of animals it could still be told where they were +tethered, and where the horses separated to go past them. +Fortunately the ropes and pegs held. + +<P> +"Fire faster!" cried Tom. "Shoot across the front of them, and try +to turn them to one side." + +<P> +From the rocks, behind which the natives and our friends crouched, +there came a steady stream of electric fire. Horse after horse went +down, stunned but not badly hurt, and in a few hours the beasts +would feel no ill effects. The firing was redoubled, and then there +came a break in the steady stream of horseflesh. + +<P> +Some hesitated and sought to turn back. Others, behind, pressed them +on, and then, as if in fear at the unknown and unseen power that was +laying low animal after animal, the great body, of horses, suddenly +turned at right angles to their course and broke away. There were +now two bodies of the wild runaways, those that had passed the +tethered mules, and those that had swung off. The stampede had been +broken. + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom, jumping up from behind the rocks, and +swinging his hat. "We've turned them." + +<P> +"And just in time, too," added Ned, as he joined his chum. Then all +the others leaped up, and the sight of the human beings completed +the scare. The stampeding animals swung off more than before, so +that they were nearly doubling back on their own trail. The others +thundered off, and the ground was strewn with unconscious though +unharmed animals. + +<P> +"One mule gone!" cried San Pedro, hastily counting the still +tethered animals which were wildly tugging at their ropes. + +<P> +"Never mind," spoke Tom, "it's the one with some of that damaged +bartering stuff I intended for trading. We can afford to lose that. +Rad, is your animal all right?" + +<P> +"He suah am, Massa Tom. Dish yeah mule am almost as sensible as +Boomerang, ain't yo'?" and Eradicate patted the big animal he was +leading. + +<P> +"I'll send a man down the trail, and maybe he can pick up the +missing one," said San Pedro, and while the other natives were +quieting the restless mules, one tall black man hastened in the wake +of the retreating horses. + +<P> +He came back in an hour with the missing animal, that had broken its +tether rope and then, after running along with the wild horses had +evidently dropped out of the drove. Aside from the loss of a small +box, there had been no damage done, and the cavalcade was soon under +way once more, leaving the motionless horses to recover from the +effects of the electricity. + +<P> +"Bless my saddle pad!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't think I want to go +through anything like that again." + +<P> +"Neither do I," agreed Tom. "We are well out of it." + +<P> +"How much you take for one of them rifles?" asked San Pedro +admiringly. + +<P> +"Not for sale," answered Tom with a laugh. + +<P> +They camped in a fertile valley that night, and had a much-needed +rest. As yet Tom had made no inquiries as to the location of giant +land from any of the natives of the villages or towns through which +they passed. He knew as soon as he did begin asking questions, his +own men would hear of it, and they might be frightened if they knew +they were in an expedition the object of which was to capture some +of the tall men. + +<P> +"We'll just go along for a few days more," said Tom, to Ned, "and +then, when I do spring my surprise, they'll be so far from home that +they won't dare turn back. In a few days I'll begin making +inquiries." + +<P> +They traveled on for three days more, ever heading north, and coming +more into the warmer climate. The vegetation began to take on a more +tropical look, and finally they reached a region infested with many +wild beasts and monkeys, and with patches of dense jungle on either +side of the narrow trail. Fruits, tropical flowers and birds +abounded. + +<P> +"I think we're getting there," remarked Tom, on the evening of the +third day after his talk with Ned. "San Pedro says there's quite a +village about half a day's march ahead, and I may learn something +there. I'll know by to-morrow whether we are on the right trail or +not." + +<P> +The natives were getting supper, and Eradicate was busy with a meal +for the three white hunters. Mr. Damon had strolled down to the bank +of a little stream, and was looking at some small animals like foxes +that had come for their evening drink. They seemed quite fearless. + +<P> +Suddenly something long, round and thick seemed to drop down out of +a tree close to the odd gentleman. So swift and noiseless was it +that Mr. Damon never noticed it. Then, like a flash something went +around him, and he let out a scream of terror. + +<P> +San Pedro, who was nearest to him, saw and heard. The next instant +the black muleteer came rushing toward the camp, crying: + +<P> +"He is caught in a rope! Mr. Damon is caught in a rope!" + +<P> +"A rope!" repeated Ned, not understanding. + +<P> +"Yes, a rope in a tree. Come quickly!" + +<P> +Tom caught up one of the electric rifles and rushed forward. No +sooner had he set eyes on his friend, who was writhing about in the +folds of what looked like a big ship cable, then the young inventor +cried: + +<P> +"A rope! Yes, a living rope! That's a big boa constrictor that has +Mr. Damon! Get a gun, Ned, and follow me! We must save him before he +is crushed to death!" + +<P> +And the two lads rushed forward while the living rope drew its folds +tighter and tighter about the unfortunate man. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XII A Native Battle</H3> + + +<P> +"Bless my--!" but that was as far as poor Mr. Damon could get. The +breath was fairly squeezed out of him by the folds of the great +serpent that had dropped down out of the tree to crush him to death. +His head fell forward on his breast, and his arms were pinioned to +his sides. + +<P> +"Quick, Ned!" cried Tom. "We must fire together! Be careful not to +hit Mr. Damon!" + +<P> +"That's right. I'll take the snake on one side, Tom, and you on the +other!" + +<P> +"No! Then we might hit each other. Come on my side. Aim for the +head, and throw in the highest charge. We want to kill, not stun!" + +<P> +"Right!" gasped Ned, as he ran forward at his chum's side. + +<P> +San Pedro, and the other natives, could do nothing. In the gathering +twilight, broken by the light of several campfires, they stood +helpless watching the two plucky youths advance to do battle with +the serpent. Eradicate had caught up a club, and had dashed forward +to do what he could, but Tom motioned him back. + +<P> +"We can manage," spoke the young inventor. + +<P> +Then he and Ned crept on with ready rifles. The snake raised its +ugly head and hissed, ceasing for a moment to constrict its coils +about the unfortunate man. + +<P> +"Now's our chance--fire!" hoarsely whispered Ned. + +<P> +It seemed as if the big snake heard, for, raising its head still +higher, it fairly glared at Ned and Tom. It was the very chance they +wanted, for they could now fire without the danger of hitting Mr. +Damon. + +<P> +"Ready?" asked Tom of his chum in a low voice. + +<P> +"Ready!" was the equally low answer. + +<P> +It was necessary to kill the serpent at one shot, as to merely wound +it might mean that in its agony it would thresh about, and seriously +injure, if not kill, Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Fire!" called Tom in a whisper, and he and Ned pressed the triggers +of the electric rifles on the same instant. + +<P> +There was a streak of bluish flame that cut like a sliver through +the gathering darkness, and then, as though a blight had fallen upon +it, the folds of the great snake relaxed, and Mr. Damon slipped to +the ground unconscious. The electric charges had gone fairly through +the head of the serpent and it had died instantly. + +<P> +"Quick! Mr. Damon! We must get him away!" cried Tom. "He may be +dead!" + +<P> +Together the chums sprang forward. The folds of the serpent had +scarcely ceased moving before the two youths snatched their friend +away. Dropping their rifles, they lifted him up to bear him to the +sleeping tent which had been erected. + +<P> +"Liver pin!" suddenly ejaculated Mr. Damon. It was what he started +to say when the serpent had squeezed the breath out of him, and, on +regaining consciousness from his momentary faint, his brain carried +out the suggestion it had originally received. + +<P> +"How are you?" cried Tom, nearly dropping Mr. Damon's legs in his +excitement, for he had hold of his feet, while Ned was at the head. + +<P> +"Are you all right?" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Yes--I--I guess so. I--I feel as though I had been put through a +clothes wringer though. What happened?" + +<P> +"A big snake dropped down out of a tree and grabbed you," answered +Tom. + +<P> +"And then what? Put me down, boys, I guess I can walk." + +<P> +"We shot it," said Ned modestly. + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed the odd gentleman. "I--I +hardly know what to say. I'll say it later. You saved my life. Let +me see if any bones are broken." + +<P> +None was, fortunately, and after staggering about a bit Mr. Damon +found that he could limp along. But he was very sore and bruised, +for, though the snake had squeezed him but for part of a minute, +that was long enough. A few seconds more and nearly every bone in +his body would have been crushed, for that is the manner in which a +constrictor snake kills its prey before devouring it. + +<P> +"Santa Maria! The dear gentleman is not dead then?" cried San Pedro, +as the three approached the tents. + +<P> +"Bless my name plate, no!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Praise to all the saints! The brave young senors with their +wonderful guns saved him. Now you must rest and sleep." + +<P> +"I feel as if that was all I wanted to do for a month," commented +Mr. Damon. His soreness and stiffness increased each minute, and he +was glad to get to bed, while the boys and Eradicate rubbed his +limbs with liniment. San Pedro knew of a leaf that grew in the +jungle which, when bruised, and made into poultices, had the +property of drawing out soreness. The next day he found some, and +Mr. Damon was wrapped up in bandages until he declared that he +looked like an Egyptian mummy. + +<P> +But the leaf poultices did him good, and in a few days he was able +to be about, though he was still a trifle stiff. Of course the +cavalcade had to halt in the woods, but they did not mind this as +they had traveled well up to this time, and the enforced rest was +appreciated. + +<P> +"Well, do you feel able to move along?" asked Tom of Mr. Damon one +morning, about a week later, for they were still in the "snake +camp," as they called it in memory of the big serpent. + +<P> +"Oh, yes, I think so, Tom. Where are you going?" + +<P> +"I want to push on to the next village. There I hope to get some +line on giant land, and really I ought to begin making inquiries +soon. San Pedro and the others are wondering what our object is, for +we haven't collected any specimens of either flowers or animals, or +the snake skin, and he thinks we are a sort of scientific +expedition." + +<P> +"Well, let's travel then. I'm able." + +<P> +So they started off once more along the jungle and forest trail. As +San Pedro had predicted, they came upon evidences of a native +village. Scattered huts, made of plastered mud and grass, with +thatched roofs of palm leaves, were met with, as they advanced, but +none of the places seemed to be inhabited, though rude gardens +around them showed that they had been the homes of natives up to +recently. + +<P> +"No one seems to be at home," remarked Tom, when they had gone past +perhaps half a dozen of these lonely huts. + +<P> +"I wonder what can be the matter?" asked Ned. "It looks as if they +had gone off in a hurry, too. Maybe there's been some sort of +epidemic." + +<P> +"No, no sickness," said San Pedro. "Natives no sick." + +<P> +"Bless my liver pill!" cried Mr. Damon, who was almost himself +again. "Then what is it?" + +<P> +"Much fight, maybe." + +<P> +"Much fight?" repeated Tom. + +<P> +"Yes, tribes at war. Maybe natives go away so as not be killed." + +<P> +"By Jove!" exclaimed the young inventor. "That's so. I forgot about +what Mr. Preston said. There's a native war going on around here. +Well, when we get to the town we can find out more about it, and +steer clear of the two armies, if we have to." + +<P> +But as they went farther on, the evidences of a native war became +more pronounced. They passed several huts that had been burned, and +the native mule drivers began showing signs of fear. + +<P> +"I don't like this," murmured Tom to his chum. "It looks bad." + +<P> +"What can you do?" + +<P> +"Nothing, I guess. We've got to keep on. No use turning back now. +Maybe the two rival forces have annihilated each other, and there +aren't any fighters left." + +<P> +At that moment there arose a cry from some of the natives who, with +the mules and their burdens, had pressed on ahead. + +<P> +"What's that?" exclaimed Tom. + +<P> +"Something's happened!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Bless my cartridge box!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +The three went forward and came to a little hill. They looked down +into a valley--a valley that had sheltered a native village, but the +village was no more. It was but a heap of blackened and fire-scarred +ruins, and there were still clouds of smoke arising from the grass +huts, showing that the enemy had but recently made their assault on +the place. + +<P> +"Bless my heart!" cried Mr. Damon. "The whole place has been wiped +out." + +<P> +"Not one hut left," added Ned. + +<P> +"Hark!" cried Tom. + +<P> +An instant later there arose, off in the woods, a chorus of wild +yells. It was followed by the weird sound of tom-toms and the gourd +and skin drums of the natives. The shouting noise increased, and the +sound of the war drums also. + +<P> +"Look!" cried Mr. Damon, pointing to a distant hill, and there the +boys saw two large bodies of natives rushing toward one another, +brandishing spears, clubs and the deadly blow guns. + +<P> +They were not more than half a mile away, and in plain view of Tom +and his party, though the two forces had not yet seen our friends. + +<P> +"They're going to fight!" cried Tom. + +<P> +And the next moment the two bodies of natives came together in a +mass, the enemies hurling themselves at each other with the +eagerness and ferocity of wild beasts. It was a deadly battle. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XIII The Desertion</H3> + + +<P> +"Say, look at those fellows pitch into one another!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"It's fighting at close range all right," commented Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"If they had rifles they wouldn't be at it hand to hand," spoke Tom. +"Maybe it's just as well they haven't, for there won't be so many +killed. But say, we'd better be thinking of ourselves. They may make +up their quarrel and turn against us any minute." + +<P> +"No--never--no danger of them being friends--they are rival tribes," +said San Pedro. "But either one may attack us--the one that is the +victor. It is better that we keep away." + +<P> +"I guess you're right," agreed Tom. "Lead the way, San Pedro, and +we'll get out of sight." + +<P> +But there was a fascination in watching the distant battle that was +hard to resist. It was like looking at a moving picture, for at that +distance none of the horrors of war were visible. True, natives went +down by scores, and it was not to be doubted but what they were +killed or injured, but it seemed more like a big football scrimmage +than a fight. + +<P> +"This is great!" cried Tom. "I like to watch it, but I'm sorry for +the poor chaps that get hurt or killed. I hope they're only stunned +as we stunned the wild horses." + +<P> +"I'm afraid it is more serious than that," spoke San Pedro. "These +natives are very bloodthirsty. It would not be well for us to incur +their anger." + +<P> +"We won't run any chances," decided Tom. "We'll just travel on. Come +on, Ned--Mr. Damon." + +<P> +As he spoke there was a sudden victorious shout from the scene of +the battle. One body of natives was seen to turn and flee, while the +others pursued them. + +<P> +"Now's our time to make tracks!" called Tom. "We'll have to push on +to the next village before we can ask where the gi--" he caught +himself just in time, for San Pedro was looking curiously at him. + +<P> +"The senor wishes to find something?" asked the head mule driver +with an insinuating smile. + +<P> +"Yes," broke in Eradicate. "We all is lookin' fo' some monstrous +giant orchards flowers." + +<P> +"Ah, yes, orchids," spoke San Pedro. "Well, there may be some in the +jungle ahead of us, but the senors have come the wrong trail for +flowers," and he looked curiously at Tom, while, from afar, come the +sound of the native battle though the combatants could no longer be +seen. + +<P> +"Never mind," said our hero quickly. "I guess I'll find what I want. +Now come on." + +<P> +They started off, skirting the burned village to get on the trail +beyond it. But hardly had they made a detour of the burned huts than +one of the native drivers, who was in the rear, came riding up with +a shout. + +<P> +"Now what's the matter?" cried Tom, looking back. + +<P> +There was a voluble chattering in Spanish between the driver and San +Pedro. + +<P> +"He says the natives that lived in this village have driven their +enemies away, and are coming back--after us," translated the head +mule driver. + +<P> +"After us!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Yes," replied San Pedro simply. "They are coming even now. They +will fight too, for all their wild nature is aroused." + +<P> +It needed but a moment's listening to prove this. From the rear came +wild yells and the beating of drums and tom-toms. + +<P> +"Bless my fountain pen!" cried Mr. Damon. "What are we going to do?" + +<P> +"Stop them if we can," answered Tom coolly. "Ned, you and I and Mr. +Damon will form a rear guard. San Pedro, take the mules and the men, +and make as good time as you can in advance. We'll take three of the +fastest mules, and hold these fellows back with the electric rifles, +and when we've done that we'll ride on and catch up to you." + +<P> +"Very good," said San Pedro, who seemed relieved to know that he did +not have to do any of the fighting. + +<P> +Three of the lighter weight mules, who carried small burdens, were +quickly relieved of them, and mounting these steeds in preference to +the ones they had been riding since they took the trail, Tom, Ned +and Mr. Damon dropped back to try and hold off the enemy. + +<P> +They had not far to ride nor long to wait. They could hear the +fierce yells of the victorious tribesmen as they came back to their +ruined village, and though there were doubtless sad hearts among +them, they rejoiced that they had defeated their enemies. They knew +they could soon rebuild the simple grass huts. + +<P> +"Small charges, just to stun them!" ordered Tom, and the electric +rifles were so adjusted. + +<P> +"Here's a good place to meet them," suggested Ned, as they came to a +narrow turn in the trail. "They can't come against us but a few at a +time, and we can pump them full of electricity from here." + +<P> +"The very thing!" cried Tom, as he dismounted, an example followed +by the others. Then, in another moment, they saw the blacks rushing +toward them. They were clad in nondescript garments, evidently of +their own make, and they carried clubs, spears, bows and arrows and +blow guns. There was not a firearm among them, as they passed on +after the party of our friends whom they had seen from the battlehill. +They gave wild yells as they saw the young inventor's friends. + +<P> +"Let 'em have it!" called Tom in a low voice, and the electric +rifles sent out their stunning charges. Several natives in the front +rank dropped, and there was a cry of fear and wonder from the +others. Then, after a moment's hesitation they pressed on again. + +<P> +"Once more!" cried Tom. + +<P> +Again the electric rifles spoke, and half a score went down +unconscious, but not seriously hurt. In a few hours they would be as +well as ever, such was the merciful charge that Tom Swift and the +others used in the rifles. + +<P> +The third time they fired, and this was too much for the natives. +They could not battle against an unseen and silent enemy who mowed +them down like a field of grain. With wild yells they fled back +along the trail they had come. + +<P> +"I guess that does it!" cried Tom. "We'd better join the others +now." + +<P> +Mounting their mules, they galloped back to where San Pedro and his +natives were pressing forward. + +<P> +"Did you have the honor of defeating them," the head mule driver +asked. + +<P> +"I had the <i>honor</i>," answered Tom, with a grim smile. + +<P> +Then they pressed on, but there was no more danger. That night they +camped in a peaceful valley and were not disturbed, and the +following day they put a good many miles behind them. On the advice +of San Pedro, they avoided the next two villages as they realized +that they were in the war zone, and then they headed for a large +town where Tom was sure he would hear some news of the giants. + +<P> +They had to camp twice at night before reaching this town, and when +they did get to it they were warmly welcomed, for white explorers +had been there years before, and had treated the natives well. Tom +distributed many trinkets among the head men and won their good will +so that the party was given comfortable huts in which to sleep, and +a plentiful supply of provisions. + +<P> +"Can you arrange for a talk with the chief?" asked Tom of San Pedro +that night. "I want to ask him about certain things." + +<P> +"About where you can find giant flowers?" asked the mule driver with +a quick look. + +<P> +"Yes--er--and other giant things," replied Tom. "I fix," answered +San Pedro shortly, but there was a queer look on his face. + +<P> +A few hours later Tom was summoned to the hut of the chief of the +town, and thither he went with Ned, Mr. Damon and San Pedro as +interpreter, for the natives spoke a jargon of their own that Tom +could not understand. + +<P> +There were some simple ceremonies to observe, and then Tom found +himself facing the chief, with San Pedro by his side. After the +greetings, and an exchange of presents, Tom giving him a cheap +phonograph with which the chief was wildly delighted, there came the +time to talk. + +<P> +"Ask him where the giant men live?" our hero directed San Pedro, +believing that the time had now come to disclose the object of his +expedition. + +<P> +"Giant men, Senor Swift? I thought it was giant plants--orchids--you +were after," exclaimed San Pedro. + +<P> +"Well, I'll take a few giant men if I can find them. Tell him I +understand there is a tribe of giants in this country. Ask him if he +ever heard of them." + +<P> +San Pedro hesitated. He looked at Tom, and the young inventor +fancied that there was a tinge of white on the swarthy face of the +chief mule driver. But San Pedro translated the question. + +<P> +Its effect on the chief was strange. He half leaped from his seat, +and stared at Tom. Then he uttered a cry--a cry of fear--and spoke +rapidly. + +<P> +"What does he say?" asked Tom of San Pedro eagerly, when the chief +had ceased speaking. + +<P> +"He say--he say," began the mule driver and the words seemed to +stick in his throat--"he say there <i>are</i> giants--many miles to the +north. Terrible big men--very cruel--and they are fearful. Once they +came here and took some of his people away. He is afraid of them. We +are <i>all</i> afraid of them," and San Pedro looked around apprehensively, +as though he might see one of the giants stalking into the chief's +hut at any moment. + +<P> +"Ask him how many miles north?" asked Tom, hardly able to conceal +his delight. The giants had no terrors for him. + +<P> +"Two weeks journey," translated San Pedro. + +<P> +"Good!" cried the young inventor. "Then we'll keep right on. Hurrah! +I'm on the right track at last, and I'll have a giant for the circus +and we may be able to rescue Mr. Poddington!" + +<P> +"Is the senor in earnest?" asked San Pedro, looking at Tom +curiously. "Is he really going among these terrible giants?" + +<P> +"Yes, but I don't believe they'll be so terrible. They may be very +gentle. I'm sure they'll be glad to come with me and join a +circus--some of them--and earn a hundred dollars a week. Of course +we're going on to giant land!" + +<P> +"Very good," said San Pedro quietly, and then he followed Tom out of +the chief's hut. + +<P> +"It's all right, Ned old sport, we'll get to giant land after all!" +cried Tom to his chum as they reached the hut where they were +quartered. + +<P> +The next morning when Tom got up, and looked for San Pedro and his +men, to give orders about the march that day, the mule drivers were +nowhere to be seen. Nor were the mules in the places where they had +been tethered. Their packs lay in a well ordered heap, but the +animals and their drivers were gone. + +<P> +"This is queer," said Tom, rubbing his eyes to make sure that he saw +aright. "I wonder where they are? Rad, look around for them." + +<P> +The colored man did so, and came back soon, to report that San Pedro +and his men had gone in the night. Some of the native villagers told +him so by signs, Eradicate said. They had stolen away. + +<P> +"Gone!" gasped Tom. "Gone where?" + +<P> +"Bless my railroad ticket!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"We're deserted," exclaimed Ned. "They've taken the mules, and left +us." + +<P> +"I guess that's it," admitted Tom ruefully, after a minute's +thought. "San Pedro couldn't stand for the giants. He's had a +frightful flunk. Well, we're all alone, but we'll go on to giant +land anyhow! We can get more mules. A little thing like this can't +phase me. Are you with me, Ned--Mr. Damon--Eradicate?" + +<P> +"Of course we are!" they cried without a moment's hesitation. + +<P> +"Then we'll go to giant land alone!" exclaimed Tom. "Come on, now, +and we'll see if we can arrange for some pack animals." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XIV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XIV In Giant Land</H3> + + +<P> +When it first became sure that San Pedro and the other natives had +deserted--fled in the night, for fear of the giants--there was a +reactionary feeling of despondency and gloom among Tom and his three +friends. But the boldness and energy of the young inventor, his +vigorous words, his determination to proceed at any cost to the +unknown land that lay before them--these served as a tonic, and +after a few moments, Ned, Mr. Damon, and even Eradicate looked at +things with brighter spirits. + +<P> +"Do you really mean it, Tom?" asked Ned. "Will you go on to giant +land?" + +<P> +"I surely will, if we can find it. Why, we found the city of gold +all alone, you and Mr. Damon and I, and I don't see why we can't +find this land, especially when all we have to do is to march +forward." + +<P> +"But look at the lot of stuff we have to carry!" went on Ned, waving +his hand toward the heap of packs that the mule drivers had left +behind. + +<P> +"Bless my baggage check, yes!" added Mr. Damon. "We can never do it. +Tom. We had better leave it here, and try to get back to +civilization." + +<P> +"Never!" cried Tom. "I started off after a giant, and I'm going to +get one, if I can induce one of the big men to come back with me. +I'm not going to give up when we're so close. We can get more pack +animals, I'm sure. I'm going to have a try for it. If I can't speak +the language of these natives I can make signs. Come on, Ned, we'll +pay a morning visit to the chief." + +<P> +"I'll come along," added Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"That's right," replied the young inventor. "Rad, you go stand guard +over our stuff. Some of the natives might not be able to withstand +temptation. Don't let them touch anything." + +<P> +"Dat's what I won't, Massa Tom. Good land a massy! ef I sees any ob +'em lay a finger on a pack I'll shoot off my shotgun close to der +ears, so I will. Oh, ef I only had Boomerang here, he could carry +mos' all ob dis stuff his own se'f." + +<P> +"You've got a great idea of Boomerang's strength," remarked Tom with +a laugh, as he and Ned and Mr. Damon started for the big hut where +the chief lived. + +<P> +"Do you really think San Pedro and the others left because they were +afraid of the giants we might meet?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"I think so," answered his chum. + +<P> +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "In that case maybe we'd +better be on the lookout ourselves." + +<P> +"Time enough to worry when we get there," answered the young +inventor. "From what the circus man said the giants are not +particularly cruel. Of course Mr. Preston didn't have much +information to go on, but--well, we'll have to wait--that's all. But +I'm sure San Pedro and the others were in a blue funk and vamoosed +on that account." + +<P> +"Hey, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Heah am a letter I +found on de baggage," and he ran forward with a missive, rudely +scrawled on a scrap of paper. + +<P> +"It's from San Pedro," remarked Tom after a glance at it, "and it +bears out what I said. He writes that he and his men never suspected +that we were going after the giants, or they would never have come +with us. He says they are very sorry to leave us, as we treated them +well, but are afraid to go on. He adds that they have taken enough +of our bartering goods to make up their wages, and enough food to +carry them to the next village." + +<P> +"Well," finished Tom. as he folded the paper, "I suppose we can't +kick, and, maybe after all, it will be for the best. Now to see if +the chief can let us have some mules." + +<P> +It took some time, by means of signs, to make the chief understand +what had happened, but, when Tom had presented him with a little toy +that ran by a spring, and opened up a pack of trading goods, which +he indicated would be exchanged for mules, or other beasts of +burden, the chief grinned in a friendly fashion, and issued certain +orders. + +<P> +Several of his men hurried from the big hut, and a little later, +when Tom was showing the chief how to run the toy, there was a sound +of confusion outside. + +<P> +"Bless my battle axe!" cried Mr. Damon. "I hope that's not another +war going on." + +<P> +"It's our new mules!" cried Ned, taking a look. "And some cows and a +bony horse or two, Tom. We've drawn a rich lot of pack animals!" + +<P> +Indeed there was a nondescript collection of beasts of burden. There +were one or two good mules, several sorry looking horses, and a +number of sleepy-eyed steers. But there were enough of them to carry +all the boxes and bales that contained the outfit of our friends. + +<P> +"It might be worse," commented Tom. "Now if they'll help us pack up +we'll travel on." + +<P> +More sign language was resorted to, and the chief, after another +present had been made to him, sent some of his men to help put the +packs on the animals. The steers, which Tom did not regard with much +favor, proved to be better than the mules, and by noon our friends +were all packed up again, and ready to take the trail. The chief +gave them a good dinner,--as native dinners go,--and then, after +telling them that, though he had never seen the giants it had long +been known that they inhabited the country to the north, he waved +a friendly good-bye. + +<P> +"Well, we'll see what luck we'll have by ourselves," remarked Tom, +as he mounted a bony mule, an example followed by Ned, Mr. Damon and +Eradicate, They had left behind some of their goods, and so did not +have so much to carry. Food they had in condensed form and they were +getting into the more tropical part of the country where game +abounded. + +<P> +It was not as easy as they had imagined it would be for, with only +four to drive so many animals, several of the beasts were +continually straying from the trail, and once a big steer, with part +of the aeroplane on its back, wandered into a morass and they had to +labor hard to get the animal out. + +<P> +"Well, this is fierce!" exclaimed Tom, at the end of the first day +when, tired and weary, bitten by insects, and torn by jungle briars, +they made camp that night. + +<P> +"Going to give up?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Not much!" + +<P> +They felt better after supper, and, tethering the animals securely, +they stretched out in their tents, with mosquito canopies over them +to keep away the pestering insects. + +<P> +"I've got a new scheme," announced Tom next morning at breakfast. + +<P> +"What is it? Going on the rest of the way in the aeroplane?" asked +Ned hopefully. + +<P> +"No, though I believe if I had brought the big airship along I could +have used it. But I mean about driving the animals. I'm going to +make a long line of them, tying one to the other like the elephants +in the circus when they march around, holding each other's tails. +Then one of us will ride in front, another in the rear, and one on +each side. In that way we'll keep them going and they won't stray +off." + +<P> +"Bless my button hook!" cried Mr. Damon. "That's a good idea, Tom!" +It was carried out with much success, and thereafter they traveled +better. + +<P> +But even at the best it was not easy work, and more than once Tom's +friends urged him to turn back. But he would not, ever pressing on, +with the strange land for his goal. They had long since passed the +last of the native villages, and they had to depend on their own +efforts for food. Fortunately they did not have any lack of game, +and they fared well with what they had with them in the packs. + +<P> +Occasionally they met little bands of native hunters, and, though +usually these men fled at the sight of our friends, yet once they +managed to make signs to one, who, informed them as best he could, +that giant land was still far ahead of them. + +<P> +Twice they heard distant sounds of native battles and the weird +noise of the wooden drums and the tom-toms. Once, as they climbed up +a big hill, they looked down into a valley and saw a great conflict +in which there must have been several thousand natives on either +side. It was a fierce battle, seen even from afar, and Tom and the +others shuddered as they slipped down over the other side of the +rise, and out of sight. + +<P> +"We'd better steer clear of them," was Tom's opinion; and the others +agreed with him. + +<P> +For another week they kept on, the way becoming more and more +difficult, and the country more and more wild. They had fairly to +cut their way through the jungle at times, and the only paths were +animal trails, but they were better than nothing. For the last five +days they had not seen a human being, and the loneliness was telling +on them. + +<P> +"I'd be glad to see even a two-headed giant," remarked Tom +whimsically one night as they made their camp. + +<P> +"Yes, and I'd be glad to hear someone talk, even in the sign +language," added Ned, with a grin. + +<P> +They slept well, for they were very tired, and Tom, who shared his +tent with Ned, was awakened rather early the next morning by hearing +someone moving outside the canvas shelter. + +<P> +"Is that you, Mr. Damon?" he asked, the odd gentleman having a tent +adjoining that of the boys. + +<P> +There was no answer. + +<P> +"Rad, are you getting breakfast?" asked the young inventor. "What +time is it?" + +<P> +Still no answer. + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked Ned, who had been awakened by Tom's +inquiries. + +<P> +Before our hero had a chance to reply the flap of his tent was +pulled back, and a head was thrust in. But such a head! It was +enormous! A head covered with a thick growth of tawny hair, and a +face almost hidden in a big tawny, bushy beard. Then an arm was +thrust in--an arm that terminated in a brawny fist that clasped a +great club. There was no mistaking the object that gazed in on the +two youths. It was a gigantic man--a man almost twice the size of +any Tom had ever seen. And then our hero knew that he had reached +the end of his quest. + +<P> +"A giant!" gasped Tom. "Ned! Ned, we're in the big men's country, +and we didn't know it!" + +<P> +"I--I guess you're right, Tom!" + +<P> +The giant started at the sounds of their voices, and then his face +breaking into a broad grin, that showed a great mouth filled with +white teeth, he called to them in an unknown tongue and in a voice +that seemed to fairly shake the frail tent. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XV In the "Palace" of the King</H3> + + +<P> +For a few moments after their first ejaculations neither Tom nor Ned +knew what to do. The giant continued to gaze at them, with the same +good-natured grin on his face. Possibly he was amused at the small +size of the persons in the tent. Then Tom spoke. + +<P> +"He doesn't look as if he would bite, Ned." + +<P> +"No, he seems harmless enough. Let's get up, and see what happens. I +wonder if there are any more of them? They must have come out on an +early hunt, and stumbled upon our camp." + +<P> +At this moment there arose a cry from Mr. Damon's tent. + +<P> +"Bless my burglar alarm!" shouted the odd gentleman. "Tom--Ned--am I +dreaming? There's a man here as big as a mountain. Tom! Ned!" + +<P> +"It's all right, Mr. Damon!" called Tom. "We're among the giants all +right. They won't hurt you." + +<P> +"Fo' de good land ob massy!" screamed Eradicate, a second later, and +then they knew that he, too, had seen one of the big men. "Fo' de +lub ob pork chops! Am dis de Angel Gabriel? Listen to de blowin' ob +de trump! Oh, please good Massa Angel Gabriel, I ain't nebber done +nuffin! I's jest po' ol' Eradicate Sampson, an' I got a mule +Boomerang, and' dat's all I got. Please good Mr. Angel--" + +<P> +"Dry up, Rad!" yelled Tom. "It's only one of the giants. Come on out +of your tent and get breakfast. We're on the borders of giant land, +evidently, and they seem as harmless as ordinary men. Get up, +everybody." + +<P> +As Tom spoke he rose from the rubber blanket on which he slept. Ned +did the same, and the giant slowly pulled his head out from the +tent. Then the two youths went outside. A strange sight met their +gaze. + +<P> +There were about ten natives standing in the camp--veritable giants, +big men in every way. The young inventor had once seen a giant in a +circus, and, allowing for shoes with very thick soles which the big +man wore, his height was a little over seven feet. But these South +American giants seemed more than a foot higher than that, none of +those who had stumbled upon the camp being less than eight feet. + +<P> +"And I believe there must be bigger ones in their land, wherever +that is," said Tom. Nor were these giants tall and thin, as was the +one Tom had seen, but stout, and well proportioned. They were +savages, that was evident, but the curious part of it was that they +were almost white, and looked much like the pictures of the old +Norsemen. + +<P> +But, best of all, they seemed good-natured, for they were +continually laughing or smiling, and though they looked with wonder +on the pile of boxes and bales, and on the four travelers, they +seemed more bewildered and amused, than vindictive that their +country should have been invaded. Evidently the fears of the natives +who had told Tom about the giants had been unfounded. + +<P> +By this time Mr. Damon and Eradicate had come from their tents, and +were gazing with startled eyes at the giants who surrounded them. + +<P> +"Bless my walking stick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Is it possible?" + +<P> +"Yes, we've arrived!" cried Tom. "Now to see what happens. I wonder +if they'll take us to their village, and I wonder if I can get one +of these giants for Mr. Preston's circus?" + +<P> +"You certainly can't unless he wants to come," declared Ned. "You'd +have a hard tussle trying to carry one of these fellows away against +his will, Tom." + +<P> +"I sure would. I'll have to make inducements. Well, I wonder what is +best to do?" + +<P> +The giant who had looked in the tent of Ned and Tom, and who +appeared to be the leader of the party, now spoke in his big, +booming voice. He seemed to be asking Tom a question, but the young +inventor could not understand the language. Tom replied in Spanish, +giving a short account of why he and his companions had come to the +country, but the giant shook his head. Then Mr. Damon, who knew +several languages, tried all of them--but it was of no use. + +<P> +"We've got to go back to signs," declared Tom, and then, as best he +could, he indicated that he and the others had come from afar to +seek the giants. He doubted whether he was understood, and he +decided to wait until later to try and make them acquainted with the +fact that he wanted one of them to come back with him. + +<P> +The head giant nodded, showing that at least he understood +something, and then spoke to his companions. They conversed in their +loud voices for some time, and then motioned to the pack animals. + +<P> +"I guess they want us to come along," said Tom, "but let's have +breakfast first. Rad, get things going. Maybe the giants will have +some coffee and condensed milk, though they'll have to take about +ten cupsful to make them think they've had anything. Make a lot of +coffee, Rad." + +<P> +"But good land a massy, dey'll eat up eberyt'ing we got, Massa Tom," +objected the colored man. + +<P> +"Can't help it, Rad. They're our guests and we've got to be polite," +replied the youth. "It isn't every day that we have giants to +breakfast." + +<P> +The big men watched curiously while Rad built a fire, and when the +colored man was trying to break a tough stick of wood with the axe, +one of the giants picked up the fagot and snapped it in his fingers +as easily as though it were a twig, though the stick was as thick as +Tom's arm. + +<P> +"Some strength there," murmured Ned to his chum admiringly. + +<P> +"Yes, if they took a notion to go on a rampage we'd have trouble. +But they seem kind and gentle." + +<P> +Indeed the giants did, and they liked the coffee which they tasted +rather gingerly at first. After their first sip they wanted more, +made as sweet as possible, and they laughed and talked among +themselves while Eradicate boiled pot after pot. + +<P> +"Dey suah will eat us out of house an' home, Massa Tom," he wailed. + +<P> +"Never mind, Rad. They will feed us well when we get to their town." + +<P> +Then the pack animals were laden with their burdens. This was always +a task, but for the giants it was child's play. With one hand they +would lift a box or bale that used to tax the combined strength of +the four travelers, and soon the steers, horses and mules were ready +to proceed. The giants went on ahead, to show the way, the first +one, who seemed to be called "Oom," for that was the way his +companions addressed him, walked beside Tom, who rode on a mule. In +fact the giant had to walk slowly, so as not to get ahead of the +animal. Oom tried to talk to Tom, but it was hard work to pick out +the signs that meant something, and so neither gained much +information. + +<P> +Tom did gather, however, that the giants were out on an early hunt +when they had discovered our friends, and their chief town lay about +half a day's journey off in the jungle. The path along which they +proceeded, was better than the forest trails, and showed signs of +being frequently used. + +<P> +"It doesn't seem possible that we are really among giants, Tom," +spoke Ned, as they rode along. "I hardly believed there were +giants." + +<P> +"There always have been giants," declared the young inventor. "I +read about them in an encyclopedia before I started on this trip. Of +course there's lots of wild stories about giants, but there have +really been some very big men. Take the skeleton in the museum of +Trinity College, Dublin. It is eight feet and a half in height, and +the living man must have even taller. There was a giant named +O'Brien, and his skeleton is in the College of Physicians and +Surgeons of England--that one is eight feet two inches high, while +there are reliable records to show that, when living, O'Brien was +two inches taller than that. In fact, according to the books, there +have been a number of giants nine feet high." + +<P> +"Then these chaps aren't so wonderful," replied Ned. + +<P> +"Oh, we haven't seen them all yet. We may find some bigger than +these fellows, though any one of these would be a prize for a +museum. Not a one is less than eight feet, and if we could get one +say ten feet--that <i>would</i> be a find." + +<P> +"Rather an awkward one," commented Ned. + +<P> +It did not seem possible that they were really in giant land, yet +such was the fact. Of course the country itself was no different +from any other part of the jungle, for merely because big men lived +in it did not make the trees or plants any larger. + +<P> +"I tell you how I account for it," said Tom, as they traveled on. +"These men originally belonged to a race of people noted for their +great size. Then they must have lived under favorable conditions, +had plenty of flesh and bone-forming food, and after several +generations they gradually grew larger. You know that by feeding the +right kind of food to animals you can make them bigger, while if +they get the wrong kind they are runts, or dwarfs." + +<P> +"Oh, yes; that's a well-known fact," chimed in Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Then why not with human beings?" went on Tom. "There's nothing +wonderful in this." + +<P> +"No, but it will be wonderful if we get away with one of these +giants," spoke Ned grimly. + +<P> +Further talk was interrupted by a sudden shouting on the part of the +big men. Oom made some rapid motions to Tom, and a little later they +emerged from the woods upon a large, grassy plain, on the other side +of which could be seen a cluster of big grass and mud huts. + +<P> +"There is the city of the giants!" cried Tom, and so it proved, a +little later, when they got to it. + +<P> +Now there was nothing remarkable about this city or native town. It +was just like any other in the wilder parts of South America or +Africa. There was a central place, where, doubtless, the natives +gathered on market days, and from this the huts of the inhabitants +stretched out in irregular lines, like streets. Off to one side of +the "market square," as Tom called it, was a large hut, surrounded +by several smaller ones, and from the manner in which it was laid +out, and decorated, it was evident that this was the "palace" of the +king, or chief ruler. + +<P> +"Say, look at that fellow!" cried Ned, pointing to a giant who was +just entering the "palace" as Tom dubbed the big hut. "He <i>looks</i> +eleven feet if he's an inch." + +<P> +"I believe you!" cried Tom. "Say, I wonder how big the king is?" + +<P> +"I don't know, but he must be a top-notcher. I wonder what will +happen to us?" + +<P> +Oom, who had Tom and his party in charge, led them to the "palace" +and it was evident that they were going to be presented to the chief +or native king. Back of our friends stretched out their pack train, +the beasts carrying the boxes and bales. Surrounding them were +nearly all the inhabitants of the giants' town, and when the +cavalcade had come to a halt in front of the "palace," Oom raised +his voice in a mighty shout. It was taken up by the populace, and +then every one of them knelt down. + +<P> +"I guess His Royal Highness is about to appear," said Tom grimly. + +<P> +"Yes, maybe we'd better kneel, too," spoke Ned. + +<P> +"Not much! We're citizens of the United States, and we don't kneel +to anybody. I'm going to stand up." + +<P> +"So am I!" said Mr. Damon. + +<P> +An instant later the grass mat that formed the front door of the +"palace" was drawn aside, and there stood confronting our hero and +his friends, the King of Giant Land. And a mighty king was he in +size, for he must have been a shade over ten feet tall, while on +either side of him was a man nearly as big as himself. + +<P> +Once more Oom boomed out a mighty shout and, kneeling as the giants +were, they took it up, repeating it three times. The king raised his +hand as though in blessing upon his people, and then, eyeing Tom and +his three friends he beckoned them to approach. + +<P> +"He wants to see us at close range," whispered the young inventor. +"Come on, Ned and Mr. Damon. Trail along, Eradicate." + +<P> +"Good--good land ob massy!" stammered the colored man. And then the +little party advanced into the "palace" of the giant king. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XVI"></A> +<H3>Chapter XVI The Rival Circus Man</H3> + + +<P> +Tom Swift gazed fearlessly into the face of the giant ruler who +confronted him. The young inventor said later that he had made up +his mind that to show no fear was the only way of impressing the big +king, for surely no show of strength could have done it. With one +hand the giant could have crushed the life from our hero. But +evidently he had no such intentions, for after gazing curiously at +the four travelers who stood before him, and looking for some time +at the honest, black face of Eradicate, the king made a motion for +them to sit down. They did, upon grass mats in the big hut that +formed the palace of the ruler. + +<P> +It was not a very elaborate place, but then the king's wants were +few and easily satisfied. The place was clean, Tom was glad to note. + +<P> +The king, who was addressed by his subjects as Kosk, as nearly as +Tom could get it, asked some questions of Oom, who seemed to be the +chief of the hunters. Thereupon the man who had looked into Tom's +and Ned's tent that morning, and who had followed them into the +palace, began a recital of how he had found the little travelers. +Though Tom and his friends could not understand a word of the +language, it was comparatively easy to follow the narrative by the +gestures used. + +<P> +Then the king asked several questions, others of the hunting party +were sent for and quizzed, and finally the ruler seemed satisfied, +for he rattled off a string of talk in his deep, booming voice. + +<P> +Truly he was a magnificent specimen of manhood, being as I have +said, about ten feet tall, and built in proportion. On either side +of him, upon rude benches covered with soft jaguar skins, sat two +men, evidently his brothers, for they looked much like the king. One +was called Tola and the other Koku, for the ruler addressed them +from time to time, and seemed to be asking their advice. + +<P> +"They're making up their minds what to do with us," murmured Tom. "I +only hope they let us stay long enough to learn the language, and +then I can make an offer to take one back to the United States with +me." + +<P> +"Jove! Wouldn't it be great if you could get the king!" exclaimed +Ned. + +<P> +"Oh, that's too much, but I'd like one of his brothers. They're each +a good nine feet tall, and they must be as strong as horses." + +<P> +In contrast to some giants of history, whose only claim to notoriety +lay in their height, these giants were very powerful. Many giants +have flabby muscles, but these of South America were like athletes. +Tom realized this when there suddenly entered the audience chamber a +youth of about our hero's age, but fully seven feet tall, and very +big. He was evidently the king's son, for he wore a jaguar skin, +which seemed to be a badge of royalty. He had seemingly entered +without permission, to see the curious strangers, for the king spoke +quickly to him, and then to Tola, who with a friendly grin on his +big face lifted the lad with one hand and deposited him in a room +that opened out of the big chamber. + +<P> +"Did you see that!" cried Ned. "He lifted him as easily as you or I +would a cat, and I'll bet that fellow weighed close to four hundred +pounds, Tom." + +<P> +"I should say so! It's great!" + +<P> +The audience was now at an end, and Tom thought it was about time to +make some sort of a present to the king to get on good terms with +him. He looked out of the palace hut and saw that their pack animals +were close at hand. Nearby was one that had on its back a box +containing a phonograph and some records. + +<P> +Making signs that he wanted to bring in some of his baggage, Tom +stepped out of the hut, telling his friends to wait for him. The +king and the other giants watched the lad curiously, but did not +endeavor to stop him. + +<P> +"I'm going to give him a little music," went on the young inventor +as he adjusted the phonograph, and slipped in a record of a lively +dance air. His motions were curiously watched, and when the +phonograph started and there was a whirr of the mechanism, some of +the giants who had crowded into the king's audience chamber, showed +a disposition to run. But a word of command from their ruler stopped +them. + +<P> +Suddenly the music started and, coming forth as it did from the +phonograph horn, in the midst of that hut, in which stood the +silence-awed giants, it was like a bolt of lightning from the clear +sky. + +<P> +At first the king and all the others seemed struck dumb, and then +there arose a mighty shout, and one word was repeated over and over +again. It sounded like "Chackalok! Chackalok!" and later Tom learned +that it meant wizard, magician or something like that. + +<P> +Shout after shout rent the air, and was taken up by those outside, +for through the open door the strains of music floated. The giants +seemed immensely pleased, after their first fright, and suddenly the +king, coming down from his throne, stood with his big ear as nearly +inside the horn as he could get it. + +<P> +A great grin spread over his face and then, approaching Tom, he +leaned over, touched him once on the forehead, and uttered a word. +At this sign of royal favor the other giants at once bowed to Tom. + +<P> +"Say," cried Ned, "you've got his number all right! You're one of +the royal family now, Tom." + +<P> +"It looks like it. Well, I'm glad of it, for I want to be on +friendly terms with His Royal Highness." + +<P> +Once more the king addressed Tom, and the head hunter, motioning to +Tom and his friends, led them out of the palace, and to a large hut +not far off. This, he made himself understood by signs, was to be +their resting place, and truly it was not a bad home, for it was +well made. It had simple furniture in it, low couches covered with +skins, stools, and there were several rooms to it. + +<P> +Calling in authorative tones to his fellow hunters, Tom had them +take the packs off the beasts of burdens and soon the boxes, bales +and packages were carried into the big hut, which was destined to be +the abiding place of our friends for some time. The animals were +then led away. + +<P> +"Well, here we are, safe and sound, with all our possessions about +us," commented Tom, when all but Oom had withdrawn. "I guess we'll +make out all right in giant land. I wonder what they have to eat? Or +perhaps we'd better tackle some of our own grub." + +<P> +He looked at Oom, who laughed gleefully. Then Tom rubbed his +stomach, opened his mouth and pointed to it and said: "We'd like to +eat--we're hungry!" + +<P> +Oom boomed out something in his bass voice, grinned cheerfully, and +hurried out. A little later he came back, and following him, a +number of giant women. Each one bore a wooden platter or slab of +bark which answered for a plate. The plates were covered with broad +palm leaves, and when they had been set down on low benches, and the +coverings removed, our friends saw they had food in abundance. + +<P> +There was some boiled lamb, some roasted fowls, some cereal that +looked like boiled rice, some sweet potatoes, a number of other +things which could only be guessed at, and a big gourd filled with +something that smelled like sweet cider. + +<P> +"Say, this is a feast all right, after what we've been living on!" +cried Tom. + +<P> +Once more Oom laughed joyfully, pointing to the food and to our +friends in turn. + +<P> +"Oh, we'll eat all right!" exclaimed Tom. "Don't worry about that!" + +<P> +The good-natured giant showed them where they could find rude wooden +dishes and table implements, and then he left them alone. It was +rather awkward at first, for though the bench or table looked low in +comparison to the size of the room, yet it was very high, to allow +for the long legs of the giants getting under it. + +<P> +"If we stay here long enough we can saw off the table legs," said +the young inventor. "Now for our first meal in giant land." + +<P> +They were just helping themselves when there arose a great shouting +outside. + +<P> +"I wonder what's up now?" asked Tom, pausing with upraised fork. + +<P> +"Maybe the king is coming to see us," suggested Ned. + +<P> +"I'll look," volunteered Mr. Damon, as he went to the door. Then he +called quickly: + +<P> +"Tom! Ned! Look! It's that minister we met on the ship--Reverend +Josiah Blinderpool! How in the world did he ever get here? And how +strangely he's dressed!" + +<P> +Well might Mr. Damon say this, for the supposed clergyman was +attired in a big checked suit, a red vest, a tall hat and white +canvas shoes. In fact he was almost like some theatrical performer. + +<P> +The gaudily-dressed man was accompanied by two natives, and all rode +mules, and there were three other animals, laden with packs on +either side. + +<P> +"What's his game?" mused Ned. + +<P> +The answer came quickly and from the man himself. Riding forward +toward the king's hut or palace, while the populace of wondering +giants followed behind, the man raised his voice in a triumphant +announcement. + +<P> +"Here at last!" he cried. "In giant land! And I'm ahead of Tom Swift +for all his tricks. I've got Tom Swift beat a mile." + +<P> +"Oh, you have!" shouted our hero with a sudden resolve, as he +stepped into view. "Well, you've got another guess coming. I'm here +ahead of you, and there's standing room only." + +<P> +"Tom Swift!" gasped the rival circus man. "Tom Swift here in ahead +of me!" + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XVII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XVII Held Captives</H3> + + +<P> +There was a great commotion among the giants. Men, women and +children ran to and fro, and a number of the largest of the big men +could be seen hurrying into the palace hut of King Kosk. If the +arrival of Tom and his friends had created a surprise it was more +than doubled when the circus man, and his small caravan, advanced +into the giants' city. His approach had been unheralded because the +giants were so taken up with Tom and his party that no one thought +to guard the paths leading into the village. And, as a matter of +fact, the giants were so isolated, they were so certain of their own +strength, and they had been unmolested so many years, that they did +not dream of danger. + +<P> +As for our hero, he stood in the hut gazing at his rival, while Hank +Delby, in turn, stared at the young inventor. Then Hank dismounted +from his mule and approached Tom's hut. + +<P> +"Bless my railroad ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "This is a curious +state of affairs! What in the world are we to do, Tom?" + +<P> +"I don't know, I'm sure. We'll have to wait until we see what <i>he</i> +does. He's been following us all along. He was that fake minister on +the boat. It's a wonder we didn't get on to him. I believe he's been +trying to learn our secret ever since Mr. Preston warned us about +him. Now he's here and he'll probably try to spoil our chances for +getting a giant so that he may get one for himself. Perhaps Andy +Foger gave him a tip about our plans." + +<P> +"But can't we stop him?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"I'm going to try!" exclaimed Tom grimly. + +<P> +"Here he comes," spoke Mr. Damon quickly. "I wonder what he wants?" + +<P> +Hank Delby had started toward the big hut that sheltered our +friends, while the gathered crowd of curious giants looked on and +wondered what the arrival of two white parties so close together +could mean. + +<P> +"Well, what do you want?" asked Tom, when, his rival had come within +speaking distance. + +<P> +"There's no use beating about the bush with you, Tom Swift," was the +frank answer. "I may as well out with it. I came after a giant, and +I'm going to get one for Mr. Waydell." + +<P> +"Then you took advantage of our trail, and followed us?" asked the +young inventor. + +<P> +"Oh, you can put it that way if you like," replied Delby calmly. "I +<i>have</i> followed you, and a hard time I've had of it. I tried to do it +quietly, but you got on to my tricks. However it doesn't matter. I'm +here now, and I'm going to beat you out if I can." + +<P> +"I remember now!" exclaimed Ned whispering in Tom's ear, "he was +disguised as one of the mule drivers and you fired him because he +had a revolver. Don't you remember, Tom?" + +<P> +"That's right!" exclaimed the young inventor as he noted the face +and form of Delby more closely. Then our hero added: "You played a +low-down trick, Mr. Delby, and it won't do you any good. I caught +you trying to sneak along in my company and I'll catch you again. +I'm here first, and I've got the best right to try and get a giant +for Mr. Preston, and if you had any idea of fair play--" + +<P> +"All's fair in this business, Tom Swift," was the quick answer. "I'm +going to do my best to beat you, and I expect you to do your best to +beat me. I can't speak any fairer than that. It's war between us, +from now on, and you might as well know it. One thing I will promise +you, though, if there's any danger of you or your party getting hurt +by these big men I'll fight on your side. But I guess they are too +gentle to fight." + +<P> +"We can look after ourselves," declared Tom. "And since it's to be +war between us look out for yourself." + +<P> +"Don't worry!" exclaimed Tom's rival with a laugh. "I've gone +through a lot to get here, and I'm not going to give up without a +struggle. I guess--" + +<P> +But he did not finish his sentence for at that moment Oom, the big +hunting giant, came up behind him, tapped him on the shoulder, and +pointed to the king's hut, motioning to indicate that Mr. Delby was +wanted there. + +<P> +"Very good," said the circus agent in what he tried to make sound +like a jolly voice, "I'm to call on his majesty; am I? Here's where +I beat you to it, Tom Swift." + +<P> +Tom did not answer, but there was a worried look on his face, as he +turned to join his friends in the big hut. And, as he looked from a +window, and saw Delby being led into the presence of Kosk, Tom could +hear the strains of the big phonograph he had presented to the king. + +<P> +"I guess his royal highness will remain friends with us," said Ned +with a smile, as he heard the music. "He can see what a lot of +presents and other things we have, and as for that Delby, he doesn't +seem to have much of anything." + +<P> +"Oh, I haven't shown half the things I have as yet," spoke Tom. "But +I don't like this, just the same. Those giants may turn from us, and +favor him on the slightest pretence. I guess we've got our work cut +out for us." + +<P> +"Then let's plan some way to beat him," suggested Mr. Damon. "Look +over your goods, Tom, and make the king a present that will bind his +friendship to us." + +<P> +"I believe I will," decided the young inventor and then he and Ned +began overhauling the boxes and bales, while a crowd of curious +giants stood without their hut, and another throng surrounded the +palace of the giant king. + +<P> +"There goes Delby out to get something from his baggage," announced +Ned, looking from the window. Tom saw his rival taking something +from one of the packs slung across the back of a mule. Soon the +circus agent hurried back into the king's hut, and a moment later +there was heard the strains of a banjo being picked by an +unpracticed hand. It was succeeded by a rattling tune played in good +style. + +<P> +"Bless my fiddlestick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "Does your phonograph +have a banjo record, Tom?" + +<P> +"No." was the somewhat hesitating answer of the young inventor. +"Delby who can play a banjo himself must have given Kosk one for a +present, and, like a child, the king is amused by the latest +novelty. So far he has scored one on us," he added, as once more +they heard the unmelodious strains of the banjo slowly picked. "The +king is evidently learning to play the instrument, and he'd rather +have that than a phonograph, which only winds up." + +<P> +"But haven't you some other things you can give the king to off-set +the banjo?" asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Plenty of them," replied Tom. "But if I give him--say a toy steam +engine, for I have one among our things--what is to prevent Delby +giving him some other novelty that will take his attention? In that +way we'll sea-saw back and forth, and I guess Delby has had more +experience in this business than I have. It's going to be a question +which of us gets a giant." + +<P> +"Bless my reserved seat ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I never heard +of such a thing! But, Tom, I'm sure we'll win out." + +<P> +"Get something startling to give the king," advised Ned, and Tom +began opening one of the boxes that had been transported with such +labor from the coast. + +<P> +"Delby had much better luck with his mule drivers than we did Tom," +remarked Ned as he saw the two natives standing by the pack animals +of the rival circus man. "They evidently didn't get scared off by +the giants." + +<P> +"No, but probably he didn't tell them where they were headed for. +Though, as a matter of fact, I don't believe any one has anything to +fear from these big men. All they ask is to be let alone. They're +not at all warlike, and I don't believe they'd attack the other +natives. But probably their size makes them feared, and when our +drivers heard the word 'giant' they simply wilted." + +<P> +"Guess you're right. But come on, Tom. If we're going to make the +king a present that will open his eyes, and get him on our side +instead of Delby's, we'd better be getting at it." + +<P> +"I will. This is what I'm going to give him," and Tom brought out +from a box a small toy circus, with many performing animals and +acrobats, the whole being worked by a small steam engine that burned +alcohol for fuel. A little water put in the boiler of the toy +engine, a lighting of the alcohol wick and there would be a toy that +even a youngster of the United States might be proud to own. + +<P> +"Mah land a massy!" exclaimed Eradicate as Tom got the apparatus +ready to work. "Dat shore will please him!" + +<P> +"It ought to," replied the young inventor. "Come on, now I'm ready." + +<P> +Delby had not yet come from the king's hut, and as Tom and his +friends, bearing the new toy, were about to leave the structure that +had been set aside for their use, they saw a crowd of the giant men +approaching. Each of the big men carried a club and a spear. + +<P> +"Bless my eye glasses!" gasped Mr. Damon. "Something is wrong. What +can it be?" + +<P> +He had his answer a moment later. With a firm but gentle motion the +chief giant shoved our four friends back into the hut, and then +pulled the grass mat over the opening. Then, as Tom and the others +could see by looking from a crack, he and several others took their +position in front, while other giants went to the various windows, +stationing themselves outside like sentries around a guard house. + +<P> +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but words failed him. + +<P> +"We're prisoners!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"It looks like it," admitted Tom grimly. "Evidently Delby has +carried out his threat and set the king against us. We are to be +held captives here, and he can do as he pleases. Oh, why didn't I +think sooner." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XVIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XVIII Tom's Mysterious Box</H3> + + +<P> +The young inventor walked slowly back to the middle of the hut--a +prison now it was--and sat down on a bench. The others followed his +example, and the elaborate toy, with which they had hoped to win the +king's favor, was laid aside. For a moment there was silence in the +structure--a silence broken only by the pacing up and down of the +giant guards outside. Then Eradicate spoke. + +<P> +"Massa Tom," began the aged negro, "can't we git away from heah?" + +<P> +"It doesn't seem so, Rad." + +<P> +"Can't we shoot some of dem giants wif de 'lectric guns, an' carry a +couple ob 'em off after we stun 'em like?" + +<P> +"No, Rad; I'm afraid violent measures won't do, though now that you +speak of the guns I think that we had better get them ready." + +<P> +"You're not going to shoot any of them, are you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon quickly. + +<P> +"No, but if they continue to turn against us as easily as they have, +there is no telling what may happen. If they attack us we will have +to defend ourselves. But I think they are too gentle for that, +unless they are unduly aroused by what misstatements Hank Delby may +make against us." + +<P> +"Misstatements?" inquired Ned. + +<P> +"Yes. I don't doubt but what he told the king a lot of stuff that +isn't true, to cause his majesty to make us captives here. Probably +he said we came to destroy the giant city with magic, or something +like that, and he represented himself as a simple traveler. He's +used to that sort of business, for he has often tried to get ahead +of Mr. Preston in securing freaks or valuable animals for the +circus. He wants to make it look bad for us, and good for himself. +So far he has succeeded. But I've got a plan." + +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I'll tell you when I've got it more worked out. The thing to do now +is to get in shape to stand off the giants if they should attack us. +This hut is pretty strong, and we can risk a siege in here. Let's +arrange the boxes and bales into a sort of breastwork, and then +we'll take the electric rifles inside." + +<P> +This was soon done, and, though there was considerable noise +attending the moving about of the boxes and bales, the giant guards +did not seem at all alarmed. They did not even take the trouble to +stop the work, though they looked in the windows. In a short time +there was a sort of hollow square formed in the middle of the big +main room, and inside of this our friends could give battle. + +<P> +"And now for my plan of teaching these giants a lesson," said Tom, +when this work was finished. "Ned, help me open this box," and he +indicated one with his initials on in red letters. + +<P> +"That's the same one you saved from the fire in the ship," commented +Ned. + +<P> +"Yes, and I can't put it to just exactly the use I intended, as the +situation has changed--for the worse I may say. But this box will +answer a good purpose," and Tom and Ned proceeded to open the +mysterious case which the young inventor had transported with such +care. + +<P> +"Bless my cannon cracker!" exclaimed Mr. Damon who watched them. +"You're as careful of that as if it contained dynamite." + +<P> +"It does contain something like that," answered Tom. "It has some +blasting powder in, and I was going to use it to show the giants how +little their strength would prevail against the power which the +white man could secure from some harmless looking powder. There are +also a lot of fireworks in the box, and I intend to use them to +scare these big men. That's why I was so afraid when I heard that +there was a blaze near my box. I was worried for fear the ship would +be blown up. But I can't use the blasting powder--at least not now. +But we'll give these giants an idea of what Fourth of July looks +like. Come on, Ned, we'll take a look and see from which window it +will be safest to set off the rockets and other things, as I don't +want to set fire to any of the grass huts." + +<P> +Eradicate and Mr. Damon looked on wonderingly while Tom and his chum +got out the packages of fireworks which had been kept safe and dry. +As for the giant guards, if they saw through the windows what was +going on, they made no effort to stop Tom. + +<P> +Tom had brought along a good collection of sky rockets, aerial +bombs, Roman candles and similar things, together with the blasting +powder. The latter was put in a safe place in a side room, and then, +with some boards, the young inventor and his chum proceeded to make +a sort of firing stand. One big window opened out toward a vacant +stretch of woods into which it would not be dangerous to aim the +fireworks. + +<P> +Building the stand took some time, and they knocked off to make a +meal from the food that had been brought, and which they had been +about to eat when the circus man had appeared. The food was good, +and it made them feel better. + +<P> +"I hope they won't forget us to-morrow," observed Tom, for there was +enough of the first meal left for supper. "But if they do we have +some food of our own." + +<P> +"Oh, I don't think they mean to starve us," remarked Ned. "I think +they are just acting on suggestions from that circus man." + +<P> +"Perhaps," agreed Tom. "Well, they may sing another tune when we get +through with them." + +<P> +As night approached the giant guards about the hut were changed, and +again the women came, bearing platters of food. There was plenty of +it, showing that the king, however fickle his friendship might be, +did not intend to starve his captives. Tom and his friends had not +seen Delby come out of the royal palace, and they concluded that he +was still with his giant majesty. + +<P> +"Is it dark enough now, Tom?" asked Ned of his chum, as they sat +about the rude wooden platform which they had made to hold the +fireworks. "Shall we set them off?" + +<P> +"Pretty soon now. Wait until it gets a little darker, and the effect +will be better." The room was dimly lighted by a small portable +electric lamp, one of several Tom had brought along in his +mysterious box. The lamps were operated by miniature but powerful +dry batteries. The giant guards were still outside, but they showed +no disposition to interfere with our friends. + +<P> +"There's something going on at the palace," reported Mr. Damon, who +was watching the big hut. "There are a lot of giants around it with +torches." + +<P> +"Maybe they're going to escort Delby to a hut with the same honors +they paid us," suggested Tom. "If they do, we'll set off the +fireworks as he comes out and maybe they'll think he is afflicted +with bad magic, and they'll give us our freedom." + +<P> +"Good idea!" cried Ned. "Say, that's what they're going to do," he +added a moment later as, in the glare of a number of torches, there +could be seen issuing from the king's palace, the two big giants, +evidently his brothers. Between them was the figure of the circus +man, looking like a dwarf. He was not so far away but what the smile +of triumph on his face could be seen as he glanced in the direction +of the darkened hut where Tom and his friends were captives. + +<P> +"Now's our chance!" cried the young inventor. "Set 'em off, Ned. You +help, Mr. Damon. The more noise and fuss we make at once, the more +impressive it will be. Set off everything in sight!" + +<P> +There was a flicker of matches as they were applied to the fuses, +and then a splutter of sparks. An instant later it seemed as if the +whole heavens had been lighted up. + +<P> +Sky rockets shot screaming toward the zenith, aerial bombs went +whirling slantingly upward amid a shower of sparks, then to burst +with deafening reports, sending out string after string of colored +lights. Red and green fire gleamed, and the hot balls from Roman +candles burst forth. There was a whizz, a rush and a roar. Blinding +flashes and startling reports followed each other as Tom and his +friends set off the fireworks. It was like the Independence Day +celebration of some little country village, and to the simple giants +it must have seemed as if a volcano had suddenly gone into action. + +<P> +For several minutes the din and racket, the glare and explosions, +kept up, pouring out of the big window of the hut. And then, as the +last of the display was shot off, and darkness seemed to settle down +blacker than ever over the giant village, there arose howls of fear +and terror from the big men and their women and children. They cried +aloud in their thunderous voices, and there was fear in every cry. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XIX"></A> +<H3>Chapter XIX Weak Giants</H3> + + +<P> +A great silence followed the setting off of the fireworks--silence +and darkness--and even the circus man ceased to shout. He wanted to +see what the effect would be. So did Tom and the others. When their +eyes had become used to the gloom again, after the glare of the +rockets and bombs, the young inventor said: + +<P> +"Look out of the windows, Ned, and see if our guards have run away." + +<P> +Ned did as requested, but for a few seconds he could make out +nothing. Then he cried out: + +<P> +"They've gone, but they're coming back again, and there are twice as +many. I guess they don't want us to escape, Tom, for fear we may do +a lot of damage." + +<P> +"Bless my hitching post!" cried Mr. Damon. "The guards doubled? We +<i>are</i> in a predicament, Tom." + +<P> +"Yes, I'm afraid so. The fireworks didn't just have the effect I +expected. I thought they'd be glad to let us go, fearing that we +could work magic, and might turn it on them. Most of the natives are +deadly afraid of magic, the evil eye, witch doctors, and stuff like +that. But evidently we've impressed the giants in the wrong way. If +we could only speak their language now, we could explain that unless +they let us go we might destroy their village, though of course we +wouldn't do anything of the kind. If we could only speak their +language but we can't." + +<P> +"Do you suppose they understood what Delby said?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Not a bit of it! He was just desperate when he yelled out that way. +He saw that we had an advantage on him--or at least I thought we +did, but I guess we didn't," and Tom gazed out of the windows in +front of each of which stood two of the largest giants. By means of +the torches it could be seen that the circus man was being taken to +another hut, some distance away from the royal one. Then, after an +awed silence, there broke out a confused talking and shouting among +the giant population, that was drawn up in a circle a respectful +distance from the hut where the captives were confined. Doubtless +they were discussing what had taken place, hoping and yet fearing, +that there might be more fireworks. + +<P> +"Well, we might as well go to bed," declared Tom at length. "We +can't do any more to-night, and I'm dead tired. In the morning we +can talk over new plans. My box of tricks isn't exhausted yet." + +<P> +In spite of their strange captivity our friends slept well, and they +did not awaken once during the night, for they had worked hard that +day, and were almost exhausted. In the morning they looked out and +saw guards still about the hut. + +<P> +"Now for a good breakfast, and another try!" exclaimed Tom, as he +washed in a big earthen jar of water that had been provided. +Freshened by the cool liquid, they were made hungry for the meal +which was brought to them a little later. They noticed that the +women cooks looked at them with fear in their eyes, and did not +linger as they had done before. Instead they set down the trays of +food and hurried away. + +<P> +"They're getting to be afraid of us," declared Tom. "If we could +only talk their language--" + +<P> +"By Jove!" suddenly interrupted Ned. "I've just thought of +something. Jake Poddington you know--the agent for Mr. Preston who +so mysteriously disappeared." + +<P> +"Well, what about him?" asked Tom. "Did you see him?" + +<P> +"No, but he may be here--a captive like ourselves. If he is he's +been here long enough to have learned the language of the giants, +and if he could translate for us, we wouldn't have any trouble. Why +didn't we think of it before? If we could only find Mr. Poddington!" + +<P> +"Yes, <i>if</i> we only could," put in Tom. "But it's a slim chance. I +declare I've forgotten about him in the last few days, so many +things have happened. But what makes you think he is here, Ned?" + +<P> +"Why he started for giant land, you'll remember, and he may have +reached here. Oh, if we could only find him, and save him and save +ourselves!" + +<P> +"It would be great!" admitted Tom. "But I'm afraid we can't do it. +There's a chance, though, that Mr. Poddington may be here, or may +have been here. If we could only get out and make some explorations +or some inquiries. It's tough to be cooped up here like chickens." + +<P> +Tom looked from the window, vainly hoping that the guards might have +been withdrawn. The giants were still before the windows and doors. + +<P> +For a week this captivity was kept up, and in that time Tom and his +friends had occasional glimpses of Hank Delby going to and from the +king's hut. His majesty himself was not seen, but there appeared to +be considerable activity in the giant village. + +<P> +From their prison-hut the captives could see the native market held +in the big open space, and giants from surrounding towns and the +open country came in to trade. There were also curious about the +white captives, and there was a constant throng around the big hut, +peering in. So also there was about the hut where the circus man had +his headquarters. Delby seemed to be free to come and go as he +choose. + +<P> +"I guess he's laying his plans to take a giant or two away with +him," remarked Tom one day. "I wonder what will become of us, when +he does go?" + +<P> +It was a momentous question, and no one could answer it. Tom was +doing some hard thinking those days. Two weeks passed and there was +no change. Our friends were still captives in giant land. They had +tried, by signs, to induce their guards to take some message to the +king, but the giants refused with shakes of their big heads. + +<P> +Yet the adventurers could not complain of bad treatment. They were +well fed, and the guards seemed good natured, laughing among +themselves, and smiling whenever they saw any of the captives. But +let Tom or some of the others, step across the threshold of the +door, and they were kindly, but firmly, shoved back. + +<P> +"It's of no use!" exclaimed Tom in despair one day, after a bold +attempt to walk out. "We've got to do something. If we can't get +word to the king we've got to plan some way to gain the friendship, +or work on the fear of the guards. We have about the same crowd +every time. If we can scare them they may keep far enough off so we +can have a chance to escape." + +<P> +"Escape! That's the thing!" cried Mr. Damon. "Why can't we put the +airship together in this hut, Tom, and fly away in it?" + +<P> +"We can, when the right time comes--if it ever does--but first we've +got to work on the guards. Let me see what I can do? Ha! I have it. +Ned, come here, I want your help. I'm going to show these giants +that, with all their strength, I can make each of them as weak as a +baby, and, at the same time prove that they can't lift even a light +weight." + +<P> +"How you going to do it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I'll soon show you. Come on, Ned." + +<P> +Tom and his chum were busy for several days among the various boxes +and bales that formed the baggage. They rigged up two pieces of +apparatus which I will describe in due time. They also opened +several boxes of trinkets and trading goods, which had been brought +along for barter. These they distributed among the guards, and, +though the giants were immensely pleased, they did not get friendly +enough to walk off and leave our friends free to do as they pleased. + +<P> +"Well, I guess we're ready for the lesson now," remarked Tom one +afternoon, when they had been held captives for about three weeks. +"If they won't respond to gentle treatment we'll try some other kind +of persuasion." + +<P> +The guards had become so friendly of late that some of them often +spent part of the day inside the hut, looking at the curious things +Tom and his party had brought with them. This was just what the +young inventor wanted, as he was now ready to give them a second +lesson in white man's magic. + +<P> +Tom and Ned had learned a few words of the giant's language, which +was quite simple, though it sounded hard, and one day, after he had +shown them simple toys, the young inventor brought forth a simple-looking +box, with two shining handles. + +<P> +"Here is a little thing," explained Tom, partly by words, and partly +by using signs, "a simple little thing which, if one of you will but +take hold of, you cannot let go of again until I move my finger. Do +you believe that a small white man like myself can make this little +thing stronger than a giant?" he asked. + +<P> +One of the biggest of the guards shook his head. + +<P> +"Try," invited Tom. "Take hold of the handles. At first you will be +able to let go easily. But, when I shall move my finger though but a +little, you will be held fast. Then, another movement, and you will +be loose again. Can I do it?" + +<P> +Once more the giant shook his head. + +<P> +"Try," urged Tom, and he put the two shining handles into the big +palms of the giant. The native grinned and some of his companions +laughed. Then to show how easy it was he let go. He took hold again. + +<P> +"Now!" cried Tom, and he moved his finger. + +<P> +Instantly the giant leaped up into the air. He uttered a howl that +seemed to shake the very roof of the hut, and his arms were as rigid +as poles. They were drawn up in knots, and though he tried with all +his great might, he could not loose his fingers from the shiny +handles. He howled in terror, and his companions murmured in +amazement. + +<P> +"It is as I told you!" exclaimed Tom. "Is it enough?" + +<P> +"Loose me! Loose me! Loose me from the terrible magic!" cried the +giant, and, with a movement of his finger, Tom switched off the +current from the electric battery. Instantly the giant's arms +dropped to his side, his hands relaxed and the handles dropped +clattering to the floor. + +<P> +With a look of fear, and a howl of anguish, the big guard fled, but +to the surprise and gratification of Tom and his friends the others +seemed only amused, and they nodded in a friendly fashion to the +captives. They all pressed forward to try the battery. + +<P> +One and all endeavored to loose their hands after Tom, by a movement +of his forefinger, had turned the switch of the battery, and one and +all of the giant guards were unable to stir, as the electricity +gripped their muscles. They were evidently awed. + +<P> +"This is working better than the fireworks did," murmured Tom. "Now +if I can only keep up the good work, and get ahead of Delby I'll be +all right. Now for the other test, Ned." + +<P> +Ned brought from a box what looked to be a small iron bar, with a +large handle on the top. The bottom was ground very smooth. + +<P> +"This is very small and light," explained Tom, partly by signs, and +partly by words. "I can easily lift it by one finger, and to a giant +it is but a feather's weight." + +<P> +He let the giants handle it, and of course they could feel scarcely +any weight at all, for it tipped the scales at only a pound. But it +was shortly to be much heavier. + +<P> +"See," went on the young inventor. "I place the weight on the floor, +and lift it easily. Can you do it?" + +<P> +The giants laughed at such a simple trick. Tom set the iron bar down +and raised it several times. So did several of the giants. + +<P> +"Now for the test!" cried Tom with a dramatic gesture. "I shall put +my magic upon you, and you shall all become as weak as babies. You +cannot lift the bar of iron!" + +<P> +As he spoke he made a signal to Ned, who stood in a distant corner +of the room. Then Tom carefully placed the weight on a sheet of +white paper on a certain spot on the floor of the hut and motioned +to the largest giant to pick up the iron bar. + +<P> +With a laugh of contempt and confidence, the big man stooped over +and grasped the handle. But he did not arise. Instead, the muscles +of his naked arm swelled out in great bunches. + +<P> +"See, you are as a little babe!" taunted Tom. "Another may try!" + +<P> +Another did, and another and another, until it came the turn of the +mightiest giant of all the guard that day. With a sudden wrench he +sought to lift the bar. He tugged and strained. He bent his back and +his legs; his shoulders heaved with the terrific effort he made--but +the bar still held to the floor of the hut as though a part of the +big beams themselves. + +<P> +"Now!" cried Tom. "I shall show you how a white man's magic makes +him stronger than the biggest giant." + +<P> +Once more he made a hidden sign to Ned, and then, stooping over, Tom +crooked his little finger in the handle of the iron bar and lifted +it as easily as if it was a feather. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XX"></A> +<H3>Chapter XX The Lone Captive</H3> + + +<P> +The murmurs of astonishment that greeted Tom's seemingly marvelous +feat of strength was even greater than that which had marked his +trick with the electric battery. The giants stared at him as though +they feared the next moment he might suddenly turn upon them and +hurl them about like ten-pins. + +<P> +"You see, it is easy when one knows the white man's magic," spoke +Tom, making many gestures to help along. "Go tell your king that it +is not well that he keeps us prisoners here, for if he does not soon +let us go the magic may break loose and destroy his palace!" + +<P> +There was a gasp of dismay from the giants at this bold talk. + +<P> +"Better go easy, Tom," counseled Ned. + +<P> +"I'm tired of going easy," replied the young inventor. "Something +has got to happen pretty soon, or it will be all up with us. I'm +getting weary of being cooped up here. Not that the king doesn't +treat us well, but I don't want to be a prisoner. I want to get out +and see if we can't arrange to take a couple of these giants back +for Mr. Preston. That Delby sneak has things all his own way." + +<P> +And this was so, for the circus man had poisoned the king's mind +against Tom and his friends, representing (as our hero learned +later) that the first arrivals in giant land were dangerous people, +and not to be trusted. On his own part, Hank Delby intimated that he +would always be a friend to the king, would teach him many of the +white man's secrets, and would make him powerful. Thus the circus +man was making plans for his own ends, and he was scheming to get a +couple of giants for himself, who he intended to hurry away, leaving +Tom and his friends to escape as best they could. + +<P> +And Delby had brought with him some novelties in the way of toys and +machinery that seemed greatly to take the fancy of the king. Tom +realized this when he saw his rival free to come and go, and one +reason why our hero did the experiments just related was so that the +king might hear of them, and wonder. + +<P> +"Go tell the king that, strong as he is, I am stronger," went on Tom +boldly to the giant guards. "I am not afraid of him." + +<P> +"Bless my war club, Tom, aren't you a little rash to talk that way?" +asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"No. As I said, I want things to happen. If I can only get the king +curious enough to come here I can show him things to open his eyes. +I'll work the miniature circus, and explain that some of his +subjects can take part in a real one if they will come with us. I +want to beat this Delby at his own game." + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "Stick to it, Tom. I'll help you, and +we'll get a giant or two yet. And maybe we can get some news of poor +Jake Poddington." + +<P> +"I intend to make inquiries about him, now that these guards are a +little more friendly," said Tom. "It may be that he is a prisoner in +this very village." + +<P> +The giant guards, now that they had gotten over their fright at +their own inability to raise the bar while Tom had lifted it with +one finger, again crowded around, asking that the trick be repeated. +Tom did it, with the same result. + +<P> +None of the giants could move the iron, yet Tom had no difficulty in +doing so. Of course my readers have already guessed how the trick +was done. It was worked by a strong magnet, hidden in the floor. At +a signal from Tom, Ned would switch on the current. The iron would +be held fast and immovable, but when Tom himself went to raise it +Ned would cut off the electricity and the bar was lifted as easily +as an ordinary piece of iron. But simple as the trick was, it +impressed the giants. Then Tom did some other stunts for them, +simple experiments in physics, that every High School lad has done +in class. + +<P> +"I want to get these guards friendly with me," he explained. "In +time the news will reach the king and he'll be so curious that he'll +come here and then--well, we'll see what will happen." + +<P> +But this did not take place as soon as Tom desired. In fact, the +giants were very slow to act. The guards did get quite friendly, and +every day they wanted the same two first tricks performed over +again. Tom did them many times, wondering when the king would come. + +<P> +Then he played a bold game, and made open inquiries about a white +man, one like the king's captives, who might have come to giant land +about a year previous. + +<P> +"Is there a lone white captive here?" asked Tom. + +<P> +The giant guard to whom he directed his question gave a start, for +Tom could now speak the language fairly well, and, after the first +indication of surprise, the guard muttered something to his +companions. There was a startled ejaculation, a curious glance at +the captives, and then--silence. The guards filed silently away, +and, a little later, could be seen going in the king's big hut. + +<P> +"By Jove, Tom!" cried Ned. "You touched 'em that time. There's +something up, as sure as you're born!" + +<P> +"I believe so myself," agreed the young inventor. "And now to throw +a real scare into these giants," he added, as he went to a distant +room of the hut where he had hidden some of the things he had taken +from his "box of tricks," as Ned dubbed it. + +<P> +"Bless my necktie!" cried Mr. Damon. "What's up now, Tom." + +<P> +"I'm going to show these giants that they'd better make friends with +us soon, or we may blow their whole town sky-high!" cried Tom. "I'm +going to use some of the blasting powder--just a pinch, so to +speak--and knock an empty hut into slivers. I think that will impress +these fellows. If I can only--" + +<P> +"Look, Tom!" suddenly cried Ned. "The king's two brothers are coming +here. Something's up. He's sent some of the family to interview us. +Get ready to receive them." + +<P> +"Couldn't be better!" cried the young inventor. "I've been waiting +for this. Now I'll give them a surprise party." + +<P> +The two big brothers of the king, for such Tom and his friends had +recently learned was the relationship the giants on either side of +the "throne" bore to the ruler, were indeed headed toward the hut of +the captives. They came alone, in their royal garments of jaguar +skins, and, standing about the palace hut, could be seen the giant +guards who had doubtless carried the news of the question Tom had +asked. + +<P> +"Come on, Ned, we've got to get busy!" exclaimed Tom. "Connect the +electric battery, and get that magnet in shape. I'm going to make a +fuse for this blasting powder bomb, and if I can get those royal +brothers to plant it for me, there'll be some high jinks soon." + +<P> +Tom busied himself in making an improvised bomb, while Ned attended +to the electrical attachments, and Mr. Damon and Eradicate acted as +general assistants. + +<P> +The two giant brothers entered the hut and greeted Tom and the +others calmly. Then they explained that the king had sent them to +investigate certain stories told by the guard. + +<P> +"I'll show you!" exclaimed Tom, and he induced them to take hold of +the handles of the battery. The current was turned on full strength, +and from the manner in which the royal brothers writhed and howled +Tom judged that the experiment was a success. + +<P> +"With all your strength you can not let go until I move my finger," +the young inventor explained, and it was so. Even the skeptical +giants agreed on that. + +<P> +"Now I shall show you that I am stronger than you!" exclaimed Tom, +and though the giants smiled incredulously so it was, for the magnet +trick worked as well as before. There were murmurs of surprise from +the two immense brothers, and they talked rapidly together. + +<P> +"I will now show you that I can call the lightning from the sky to +do my bidding," went on Tom. "Is that possible to any of you +giants?" + +<P> +"Never! Never! No man can do it!" cried Tola and Koku together. + +<P> +"Then watch me!" invited Tom. "Is there an empty hut near here?" he +asked. "One that it will do no harm to destroy?" + +<P> +Tola pointed to one visible from the window of the prison of our +friends. + +<P> +"Then take this little ball, with the string attached to it, and +place it in the hut," went on Tom. "Then flee for your lives, for +standing from here, I shall call the lightning down, and you shall +see the hut destroyed." + +<P> +"Why don't you ask them something about Jake Poddington?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Time enough for that after I've shown them what a little powder +will do, when I attach electric wires to it and press a button," +replied Tom. "I've got that bomb fixed so it will go off by an +electric fuse. If they'll only put it in the hut for me. I'd do it +myself, only they won't let me go out." + +<P> +The brothers conferred for a moment and then, seeming to arrive at a +decision, Koku, who was slightly the larger, took the bomb, looked +curiously at it, and walked with it toward the empty hut, the +electric wire being reeled out behind him by Tom. + +<P> +The bomb was left inside the frail structure, the two brothers +hurried away, and, standing at a safe distance from the hut of the +captives, as well as the one that Tom had promised to destroy by +lightning, they waved their hands to show that they were ready. + +<P> +"Bless my admission ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You've got quite +an audience, Tom." + +<P> +And so he had, for there was a crowd in the market square, another +throng about the king's palace, while all about, hidden behind trees +or huts, was nearly the whole population of the giant town. + +<P> +"That's what I want," said the young inventor. "It will be all the +more impressive." + +<P> +"And there's the king himself!" exclaimed Ned. "He's standing in the +door of his royal hut." + +<P> +"Better yet!" cried Tom. "Are those wires all connected, Ned?" + +<P> +"Yes," answered his chum, after a quick inspection. + +<P> +"Then here she goes!" cried Tom, as he pressed the button. + +<P> +Instantly the hut, in which the bomb had been placed, arose in the +air. The roof was lifted off, the sides spread out and there was a +great flash of fire and a puff of smoke. + +<P> +Then as the smoke cleared away Ned cried out: + +<P> +"Look, Tom! Look! You've blown a hole in the hut next to the one you +destroyed!" + +<P> +"Yes, and bless my check book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "some one is +running out of it. A white man, Tom! A white man!" + +<P> +"It's Poddington! Poor Jake Poddington. We've found him at last! +This way, Mr. Poddington! This way! Mr. Preston sent us to rescue +you!" cried Tom. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXI"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXI A Royal Conspiracy</H3> + + +<P> +Howls of terror, cries of anger, and a rushing to and fro on the +part of the giants, followed the latest trick of Tom Swift to +impress them with his power. But to all this the young inventor and +his friends paid no attention. Their eyes were fixed on the ragged +figure of the white man who was rushing toward their hut as fast as +his legs, manacled as they were, would let him. + +<P> +"Come on! Come on!" cried Tom. + +<P> +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "Some of the giants are after him, Tom!" + +<P> +Several of the big men, after their first fright, had recovered +sufficiently to pursue the captive so strangely released by the +explosion. + +<P> +"Hand me an electric rifle, Ned!" cried Tom. + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You're not going to kill +any of the giants; are you, Tom?" + +<P> +"Well, I'm not going to let them capture Jake Poddington again," was +the quick answer, "but I guess if I stun a few of them with the +electric bullets that will answer." + +<P> +Poddington (for later the white captive did prove to be the missing +circus man) ran on, and close behind him came two of the giants, +taking long strides. Tom aimed his electric rifle at the foremost +and pulled the trigger. There was no sound, but the big man crumpled +up and fell, rolling over and over. With a yell of rage his +companion pressed on, but a moment later, he, too, went down, and +then the others, who had started in pursuit of their recent captive, +turned back. + +<P> +"I thought that would fix 'em," murmured Tom gleefully. + +<P> +In another five seconds Poddington was inside the hut, gasping from +his run. He was very thin and pale, and the sudden exertion had been +too much for him. + +<P> +"Water--water!" he gasped, and Mr. Damon gave him some. He sank on +one of the skin-covered benches, and his half-exhausted breath +slowly came back to him. + +<P> +"Boys," he gasped. "I don't know who you are, but thank heaven you +came just in time. I couldn't have stood it much longer. I heard you +yell something about Preston. Is it possible he sent you to find +me?" + +<P> +"Partly that and partly to get a giant," explained Tom. "We didn't +know you were in that hut, or we'd never have blown up the one next +to it, though we suspected you might be held captive somewhere +around here, from the queer way the giants acted when we asked about +you." + +<P> +"And so you blew up that hut?" remarked the circus agent. "I thought +it was struck by lightning. But it did me a good turn. I was chained +to the wall of the hut next door, and your explosion split the beam +to which my chains were fastened. I didn't lose any time running +out, I can tell you. Oh, but it's good to be free once more and to +see someone my own size!" + +<P> +"How did you get here, and why did they keep you a prisoner?" asked +Tom. Then Poddington told his story, while Ned and Mr. Damon aided +Tom in filing off the rude iron shackles from his wrists and ankles. + +<P> +As Mr. Preston had heard, Jake Poddington had started for giant +land. But he lost his way, his escort of natives deserted him, just +as Tom's did, and he wandered on in the jungle, nearly dying. Then, +merely by accident, he came upon giant land, but he had the +misfortune to incur the anger of the big men who took him for an +enemy. They at once made him a prisoner, and had kept him so ever +since, though they did not harm him otherwise, and gave him good +food. + +<P> +"I think they were a bit afraid of me in spite of my small size," +explained the circus man. "I never thought to be rescued, for, +though I figured that Mr. Preston might hear of my plight, he could +never find this place. How did you get here?" + +<P> +Then Tom told his story, and of how they themselves were held +captives because of the treachery of Hank Delby. + +<P> +"That's just like him!" cried Poddington. "He was always mean, and +always trying to get the advantage of his rivals. But I'm glad I'm +with you. With what stuff you have here it oughtn't to be difficult +to get away from giant land." + +<P> +"But I want a giant," insisted Tom. "I told Mr. Preston I'd bring +him back one, and I'm going to do it." + +<P> +"You can't!" cried the circus man. "They won't come with you, and +it's almost impossible to make a prisoner of one. You'd better +escape. I want to get away from giant land. I've had enough." + +<P> +"We'll get away," said Tom confidently, "and we'll have a giant or +two when we go." + +<P> +"You'll have some before you go I guess!" suddenly interrupted Ned. +"There's a whole crowd of 'em headed this way, and they've got +clubs, bows and arrows and those blow guns! I guess they're going to +besiege us." + +<P> +"All right!" cried Tom. "If they want to fight we can give 'em as +good as they send. Ned, you and Mr. Damon and I will handle the +electric rifles. Eradicate, use your shotgun, and fire high. We +don't want to hurt any of the big men. We'll merely stun them with +the electric bullets, but the noise of Rad's gun will help some." + +<P> +"What can I do?" asked Mr. Poddington. + +<P> +"You're too weak to do much," replied Tom. "You just keep on the +lookout, and tell us if they try any surprises. I guess we can +handle 'em all right." + +<P> +With shouts and yells the big men came on. Evidently their +indifference toward their captives had turned to anger because of +the freeing of Poddington, and now they were determined to use harsh +measures. They advanced with wild yells, brandishing their clubs and +other weapons, while the weird sound of the tom-toms and natives +drums added to the din. + +<P> +When a short distance from the hut the giants stopped, and began +firing arrows and darts from the blow guns. + +<P> +"Look out for those!" warned Tom. "They probably are poisoned, and a +scratch may mean death. Give 'em a few shots now, Ned and Mr. Damon! +Rad, give 'em a salute, but fire high!" + +<P> +"Dat's what I will, Massa Tom!" + +<P> +The gun of the colored man barked out a noisy welcome, and, at the +same time three giants fell, stunned by the electric bullets, for +the rifles were adjusted to send out only mild charges. + +<P> +Thrice they charged, and each time they were driven back, and then, +finding that the captives were ever ready for them, they gave up the +attempt to overwhelm them, and hurried away, many going into the +king's hut. His royal majesty did not show himself during the fight. + +<P> +"Well, I guess they won't try that right away again," remarked Tom, +as he saw the stunned giants slowly arouse themselves and crawl +away. "We've taught them a lesson." + +<P> +They felt better after that, and then, when they had eaten and +drank, they began to consider ways and means of escape. But Tom +would not hear of going until he could get at least one giant for +the circus. + +<P> +"But you can't!" insisted Mr. Poddington. + +<P> +"Well, it's too soon to give up yet," declared Tom. "I'd like to +take the king's two brothers with me." + +<P> +"By Jove!" exclaimed Mr. Poddington, "I never thought of that. There +is just a bare chance. Did you know that the two brothers, who are +twins, dislike the king, for he is younger than they, and he +practically took the throne away from them. They should rule jointly +by rights. If we could enlist Tola and Koku on our side we might win +out yet." + +<P> +"Then we'll try!" exclaimed Tom. + +<P> +Jake Poddington, who had been a captive in the giant city long +enough to know something of its history, and had learned to talk the +language, explained how Kosk had usurped the throne. His brothers +were subject to him, he said, but several times they had tried in +vain to start a revolution. To punish them for their rebellious +efforts the king made them his personal servants, and this explained +why he sent them to see the tricks Tom performed. + +<P> +"If we could only get into communication with the big twins," went +on the circus man, "we could offer to take them with us to a country +where they would be bigger kings than their brother is here. It's a +royal conspiracy worth trying." + +<P> +"Then we'll try it!" cried Tom enthusiastically. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXII The Twin Giants</H3> + + +<P> +Daring indeed was the scheme decided on by the captives, and yet its +very boldness might make it possible for them to carry it out. The +king would never suspect them of plotting to carry off his two royal +brothers, and this made it all the easier to lay their plans. In +this they were much helped by Poddington, who knew the language and +who had made a few friends among the more humble people of the +village, though none dared assist him openly. + +<P> +"The first thing to do," said the circus man, "is to get into +communication with the twins." + +<P> +That proved harder than they expected, for a week passed, and they +did not have a glimpse of Tola and Koku. Meanwhile the giant guard +was still maintained about the hut night and day. No more food was +given the prisoners, and they would have starved had not Tom +possessed a good supply of his own provisions. It was evidently the +intention of the king to starve his captives into submission. + +<P> +"Suppose you do get those big brothers to accompany you, Tom?" asked +Ned one day. "How are you going to manage to get away, and take them +with you?" + +<P> +"My aeroplane!" answered Tom quickly. "I've got it all planned out. +You and I with Mr. Damon, Mr. Poddington and Eradicate will skip +away in the aeroplane. We can put it together in here, and I've got +enough gasolene to run it a couple of hundred miles if necessary." + +<P> +"But the giants--you can't carry them in it." + +<P> +"No, and I'm not going to try. If they'll agree to go they can set off +through the woods afoot. We'll meet them in a certain place--where +there's a good land mark which we can easily distinguish from the +aeroplane. We'll take what stuff we can with us, and leave the rest +here. Oh, it can be done, Ned." + +<P> +"But when you start out with the aeroplane they'll make a rush and +overwhelm us." + +<P> +"No, for I'll do it so quickly that they won't have a chance. I'm +going to saw through the beams of one side of this hut. To the rear +there is level ground that will make a fine starting place. When +everything is ready, say some night, we'll pull the side wall down, +start the aeroplane out as it falls, and sail away. Then we'll pick +up the giant brothers out in the woods, and travel to civilization +again." + +<P> +"By Jove! I believe that will work!" cried the circus man. + +<P> +"Bless my corn plaster, I think so myself!" added Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"But first we've got to get the brothers to agree," went on Tom, +"and that is going to be hard work." + +<P> +It was not so difficult as it was tedious. Through an aged woman, +with whom he had made friends when a captive, Jake Poddington +managed to get word to the royal twins that he and the other +captives would like to see them privately. Then they had to wait for +an answer. + +<P> +In the meanwhile the giants tried several times to surprise Tom and +his friends by attacks, but the captives were on the alert, and the +electric rifles drove them back. + +<P> +One night nearly all the guards were observed to be absent. There +were not more than half a dozen scattered about the hut. + +<P> +"I wonder what that means?" asked Tom, who was puzzled. + +<P> +"I know!" exclaimed Jake Poddington after a moment's thought. "It's +their big annual feast. Even the king goes to it. They were just +getting over it when I struck here last year, and maybe that's what +set them so against me. Boys, this may be our chance!" + +<P> +"How?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"The king's brothers may find an opportunity to come and talk to us +when the feast is at its height," was the reply. + +<P> +Anxiously they waited, and in order that the royal brothers might +come in unobserved, if they did conclude to speak to the captives, +Tom and his companions hung some pieces of canvas over the windows +and doors, and had only a single light burning. + +<P> +It was at midnight that a cautious knock sounded at the side of the +hut and Tom glided to the main door. In the shadows he saw the two +royal brothers, Tola and Koku. + +<P> +"Here they are!" whispered Tom to Jake Poddington, who came forward. + +<P> +"Come!" invited the circus man in the giants' tongue, and the +brothers entered the hut. + +<P> +How Jake persuaded them to throw in their fortunes with the captives +the circus man hardly knew himself. Perhaps it was due as much as +anything to the dislike they felt toward the king, and the mean way +he had treated them. + +<P> +"Come, and you will be kings among the small men in our country," +invited Poddington. The brothers looked at each other, talked +together in low tones, and then Koku exclaimed: + +<P> +"We will come, and we will help you to escape. We have spoken, and +we will talk with you again." + +<P> +Then they glided out into the darkness, while from afar came the +sounds of revelry at the big feast. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXIII A Surprise in the Night</H3> + + +<P> +Tom and his friends could scarcely believe their good fortune. It +seemed incredible that they should have induced two of the biggest +giants to accompany them back, and, not only that, but that they had +the promise of the strong men to aid them. + +<P> +"Now we must get busy," declared Tom, when their visitors had gone. +"We've got lots of work to do on the aeroplane, and we must try out +the engine. Then we've got to fix the side of the hut so it will +fall out when we're ready for it. And we've got to plan how to meet +the giants later in the forest." + +<P> +"Yes," agreed the circus man, "and we must take care that Hank Delby +doesn't spoil our plans." + +<P> +Then ensued busy days. In the seclusion of their hut the prisoners +could work undisturbed at the aeroplane, which had been almost +assembled. + +<P> +The engine was installed and tried, and, when the motor began its +thundering explosions, there was consternation among the giants, who +had again surrounded the hut to see that the prisoners did not +escape. + +<P> +Meanwhile Delby seemed to be unusually active. He could be observed +going in and out from his hut to that of the king, and he often +carried large bundles. + +<P> +"He's making himself solid with his royal highness," declared Tom. +"Well, if all goes right, we won't have to worry much longer about +what he does." + +<P> +"If only those twin giants don't fail us," put in Ned. + +<P> +"Oh, you can depend on them," said Mr. Poddington. "These giants are +curious creatures, but once they give their word they stick to it." + +<P> +He told much about the strange big men, confirming Tom's theory that +favorable natural conditions, for a number of generations, had +caused ordinary South American natives to develope into such large +specimens. + +<P> +Our friends were under quite a nervous tension, for they could not +be sure of what would happen from day to day. They continued to work +on the aeroplane, and then, finding that it would work in the +seclusion of the hut, they were anxious for the time to come when +they could try it in the open. + +<P> +"Do you think it will carry the five of us with safety?" asked the +circus man, as he gazed rather dubiously at the somewhat frail-appearing +affair. + +<P> +"Sure!" exclaimed Tom. "We'll get away all right if I can get enough +of a start. Now we must see to opening the side of the hut." + +<P> +This work had to be done cautiously, yet the prisoners had a certain +freedom, for the guards were afraid to approach too closely. + +<P> +The supporting and cross beams were sawed through, for Tom had +brought a number of carpenter tools along with him. Then, in the +silence of the night, the two royal brothers brought other beams +that could be put in place temporarily to hold up the roof when the +others were pulled out to allow the aeroplane to rush forth. + +<P> +In due time all was in readiness for the attempt to escape. The +royal twins had agreed to slip off at a certain signal, and await +Tom and his party in the forest at the foot of a very large hill, +that was a landmark for miles around. The giants could travel fast, +but not as fast as the aeroplane, so it was planned that they were +to have a day and night's start. They would take along food, and +would arrange to have a number of Tom's mules hidden in the woods, +so that our hero and his friends would have means of transportation +back to the coast, after they had ended their flight in the airship. + +<P> +"I wish we had brought along the larger one, so we could take the +giants with us," said Tom, "but I guess they're strong enough to +walk to the coast. We'll take what provisions we can carry, our +electric rifles, and the rest of the things we'll leave here for the +king, though he doesn't deserve them." + +<P> +"What do you think Delby will do?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Give it up. He's got some plan though. I only hope he doesn't get a +giant. Then ours will be a greater attraction." + +<P> +Several days passed, and the last of the preparations had been made. + +<P> +"The giant twins will pretend to go off on a hunting trip to-morrow +morning," said the circus man one night, "but they won't come back. +They'll wait for us at the big hill." + +<P> +"Then we must escape the following morning," decided Tom. "Well, I'm +ready for it." + +<P> +From their hut, surrounded as it was still by the giant guards, our +friends watched the royal brothers start off, seemingly on a hunting +expedition. + +<P> +The day passed slowly. Tom went carefully over the aeroplane, to see +that it was in shape for a quick flight, and he looked to the wall +of the hut--the wall that was to be pulled from place to afford +egress for the air craft. + +<P> +They went to bed early that night--the night they hoped would be +their last in giant land. It must have been about midnight when Tom +suddenly awoke. He thought he heard a noise outside the hut and in a +moment he had jumped up. + +<P> +"Repel boarders!" cried Tom. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXIV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXIV The Airship Flight</H3> + + +<P> +For a few moments there was confusion inside the hut that was to be +the last stronghold of our friends against the approaching force of +giants. Confusion and not a little fear were mingled, for Tom's +words sent a chill to every heart. Then, after the first panic, +there came a calmer feeling--a feeling that each one would do his +duty in the face of danger and, if he had to die, he would die +fighting. + +<P> +"Everyone take a window!" yelled Tom. "Don't kill any one if you can +help it. Shoot to disable, Rad. Mr. Poddington, there's an extra +shotgun somewhere about! See if you can find it. We'll use the +electric rifles. Get those Roman candles somebody!" + +<P> +Tom was like a general giving orders, and once his friends realized +that he was managing things they felt more confidence. Ned grasped +his electric rifle, as did Mr. Damon, and they stood ready to use +them. + +<P> +"The strongest stunning charge!" ordered the young inventor. +"Something that will lay 'em out for a good while. We'll teach 'em a +lesson!" + +<P> +<i>Bang!</i> + +<P> +That was Eradicate's shotgun going off. It had a double load in it, +and the wonder of it was that the barrel did not burst. It sounded +like a small cannon, but it had the good effect of checking the +first rush of giants, for the electric rifles had not yet been +adjusted, and Mr. Poddington, in the light of the single electric +torch that had been left burning, could find neither the spare +shotgun nor the Roman candles. + +<P> +<i>Bang!</i> + +<P> +Eradicate let the other barrel go, almost in the faces of the +advancing giants, but over their heads, for he bore in mind Tom's +words not to injure. + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom. "Come on now, Ned, we're ready for +'em!" + +<P> +But the giants had retreated, and could be seen standing in groups +about the hut, evidently planning what to do next. Then from back in +the village there shone a glare of light. + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy! It's a fire!" cried Mr. Damon. "They're +going to burn us out!" + +<P> +"Jove! If they do!" exclaimed Ned. + +<P> +"We mustn't let 'em!" shouted Tom. "Fire, Ned!" + +<P> +Together the chums discharged their electric rifles at the enemy and +a number of them fell, stunned, and were carried away by their +companions. + +<P> +The glaring light approached and now it could be seen that it was +caused by a number of the big men carrying torches of some kind of +blazing wood. It did look as though they intended to fire the prison +hut. + +<P> +"Give 'em another taste of it!" shouted Ned, and this time the three +electric rifles shot out their streaks of blue flame, for Mr. Damon +had his in action. It was still dark in the hut, for to set aglow +more of the electric torches meant that Tom and his friends would be +exposed to view, and would be the targets for the arrows, or darts +from the deadly blow guns. + +<P> +Several more of the giants toppled over, and then began a retreat to +some distance, the first squad of fighters going to meet the men who +had come up with the torches. There was no sign of women or +children. + +<P> +"Shall we fire again?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"No," answered Tom. "Save your ammunition until they are closer, and +we'll be surer of our marks. Besides, if they let us alone that's +all we ask. We don't want to hurt 'em." + +<P> +"Bless my gizzard!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I wonder why they attacked +us, anyhow?" + +<P> +"Maybe it's about the two giant brothers who have not come back," +suggested Mr. Poddington. "They may imagine that we have them +captive, and they want to rescue them." + +<P> +"That's so," admitted Tom. "Well, if they had only postponed this +reception for a few hours we'd have been out of their way, and they +wouldn't have had this trouble," and he glanced at the aeroplane, +that stood in the big hut, ready for instant flight. + +<P> +"They're coming back!" suddenly shouted Ned, and a look from the +half-opened windows showed the giants again advancing. + +<P> +"I've got the Roman candles!" called Mr. Poddington from a corner +where he had been rummaging in that box of Tom's which contained so +many surprises. "What shall I do with 'em?" + +<P> +"Let 'em go right in their faces!" yelled Tom. "They won't do much +damage, but they'll throw a scare into the big fellows! Get ready, +Ned!" + +<P> +"They're dividing!" shouted his chum. "They're coming at us from two +sides!" + +<P> +"They're only trying to confuse us," decided Tom. "Fire at the main +body!" And with that he opened up with his electric rifle, an +example followed by Mr. Damon and Ned. + +<P> +With a whizz, and several sharp explosions, the circus man got the +Roman candles into action. The glaring fire of them lighted up the +scene better than did the flaming torches of the giants, and truly +it was a wonderful sight. There, in that lonely hut, in the midst of +a South American jungle, four intrepid white persons, and an aged +but brave negro, stood against hundreds of giants--mighty men, who, +had they come to a personal contact, any one of which would have +been more than a match for the combined strength of Tom and his +party. It was a weird picture that the young inventor looked out +upon, but his heart did not quail. + +<P> +Giant after giant went down under the fierce rain of the electric +bullets, stunned, but not otherwise injured. There was a shower of +sparks, and a hail of burning balls from the Roman candles, but +still the advance was kept up. Eradicate was banging away with his +shotgun. + +<P> +"Dis suah am hot work!" cried the colored man, as his hand came in +contact with the barrel. "Wow! It's most <i>red</i> hot!" he added with a +cry of pain. + +<P> +"Use the other gun," advised Tom, never turning his head from the +window through which he was aiming. "That one may get choked, and +explode in here." + +<P> +"All right," answered Eradicate. + +<P> +"Duck!" yelled Ned with sudden energy. "They're going to fire!" A +number of the giants could be seen fitting arrows to bow strings, +while others raised to their lips the long hollow reeds, from which +the blow guns were made. It was the first time the enemy had fired +and doubtless they had held back because they hoped to capture Tom +and his friends alive. But they did not count on such a stubborn +resistance. + +<P> +Every one moved away from the windows, and not an instant too soon, +for, a moment later, a shower of arrows and darts came in, +fortunately injuring no one. + +<P> +Then, above the shouting and yelling of the giants, whose deep, bass +voices had a terrorizing effect, there came the din of the tom-toms, +making a weird combination of sound. + +<P> +"We've got 'em on the run again!" cried Ned, and so it proved, for +the larger body of giants, who had approached the hut from the front +and two sides, were running back. + +<P> +"Guess they've given it up," exclaimed Tom. "I'm glad of it, too, +for--" + +<P> +He paused and glanced behind him. A tiny spurt of flame at the base +of the rear wall of the hut had caught his eye. Instantly the flame +grew larger, and a puff of smoke followed. + +<P> +"Fire!" cried Ned. "We're on fire!" + +<P> +"Bless my water bucket!" gasped Mr. Damon. "They've set fire to the +hut!" + +<P> +It was but too true. While Tom and the others had been standing off +the giants in front, a smaller force had crept around to the rear, +and set the inflamable side of the hut ablaze. + +<P> +Desperately Tom looked around. There was no means at hand of +fighting fire. Hardly a bucket of water was in the place, and the +structure was filled with quick-burning stuff, while the fireworks +that remained, and the blasting powder, made it doubly dangerous. +Then Tom's eyes lighted on the big aeroplane, ready for instant +service. + +<P> +"That's it!" he cried suddenly. "It's our only hope, and the last +one! Come on, everybody! Down with that wall! Pull on the ropes and +it will come! We've got to go now. In another minute it will be too +late. Climb up, Mr. Poddington, Mr. Damon, Ned, and I will start the +machine." + +<P> +"The wall first! The wall!" cried Ned. + +<P> +"Sure," answered Tom. He and his friends grasped the two ropes that +had been attached to the key-beams in the structure. It had been so +arranged that when the supports were pulled out the wall would fall +outward, making a fairly smooth and level gangplank, on which the +aeroplane could rush from the hut. + +<P> +There was a creaking of timbers, a straining of ropes, and then, +with a crash, the wall fell. Instantly there was a yell of surprise +from the giants, and a brighter glare from the torches, as those +carrying them rushed up to see what had happened. The din of the +tom-toms was well-nigh deafening. Fortunately the enemy forgot to +take advantage of the opening and pour in a flight of arrows or +darts. + +<P> +"Start the motor!" cried Tom to his chum. + +<P> +There was a rattling, banging noise, like a salvo of small arms, and +the big propellers revolved with incredible swiftness. The two white +men were already in place, and now Eradicate, still carrying his +shotgun, clambered up. + +<P> +"Up with you, Ned!" yelled Tom. "I'm going to head her around and +make a flying start." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXV Tom's Giant--Conclusion</H3> + + +<P> +"I don't see anything of them, do you?" + +<P> +"No, and yet this is the place where they said they'd meet us." + +<P> +It was Tom who asked the question, and Ned who answered it. It was +the day after their sensational escape from the giants' prison, and +they were circling about in the aeroplane which had been the means +of getting them away from giant land. For they were safely away from +that strange and terrible place, and they were now seeking the two +giant brothers who had promised to meet them at a certain big hill. + +<P> +For an hour that night Tom and his friends had traveled on the wings +of the <i>Lark</i> and when a rising moon showed them a level spot for a +landing, they had gone down and made a camp. They had provisions +with them, and plenty of blankets and it was so warm that more +shelter was not necessary. + +<P> +The next day, leaving Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man in the +temporary camp, Tom and Ned had gone aloft to see if they could pick +up the giant twins, who were to meet them and have some mules ready +for the journey back to civilization. + +<P> +"Well, we're in no great hurry," went on Tom, after vainly scanning +the ground below. "They may not have traveled as fast as we thought +they could, and the mules may have given trouble. We'll stick around +here a day or so, and--" + +<P> +"Look!" suddenly exclaimed Ned. "Didn't you see something moving +then." + +<P> +"Where?" + +<P> +"By that big dead tree." + +<P> +Tom took a look through a pair of field glasses, while Ned steered +the aeroplane. Then the young inventor cried: + +<P> +"It's all right. It's one of the giants, but I can't tell which one. +Ned, I believe they're hiding because they're afraid of us. They've +never seen an aeroplane in action before. I'm going down." + +<P> +Quickly and gracefully the <i>Lark</i> was volplaned to a level place near +the dead tree. No one was in sight, and Tom, after looking about, +called: + +<P> +"Tola! Koku! Where are you? It is I, Tom Swift! We have escaped! +Where are you? Don't be afraid!" + +<P> +There was a moment's silence, and then two big forms rushed from the +dense bushes, one of them--Koku--advancing to Tom, and catching him +up in what was meant for a loving hug. + +<P> +"Oh, I say now, Koku!" cried the young inventor, with a laugh. "I've +got ribs, you know. Easy on that squeeze!" + +<P> +The two giant twins laughed too, and they were immensely pleased to +see their friends again, both talking at once and so fast that not +even the circus man could catch what they said. + +<P> +"Have you got the mules?" asked Tom, for he knew that much depended +on the animals. "Is everything all right?" + +<P> +"All right," answered Koku, the talk being conducted in the language +of the giants of which Tom was now fairly a master when it was +spoken slowly. Then the brothers explained that they had gotten +safely away, had gathered up the mules, and with a supply of food, +had hidden the beasts in a nearby valley. The giant twins were +waiting for Tom to arrive, but, though they had seen the aeroplanes +in the hut they had no idea that it could fly so nearly like a bird, +and when they saw it hovering over them they had become frightened, +and hidden, until Tom's voice had reassured them. + +<P> +"Well, get the animals," advised Tom, after he had told of the fight +of the night before, and the escape. "I'll go find the others and +we'll start from here. Then we'll hike for the United States as fast +as we can." + +<P> +Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man were soon brought to the +place where the giant brothers had made their camp, and it was +decided to remain there a few days until the aeroplane could be +taken apart for transportation, for Tom had no idea of abandoning +it. Of course it could not be packed up very well, as there were no +boxes or bales at hand. But it was made small enough so that the +parts could be slung across the backs of several mules, there being +a number of the pack animals available, some being the same ones Tom +had purchased after his native escort had deserted him. + +<P> +It was the morning they had decided to begin their march for the +coast. Everything was in readiness, they had some food, and with the +shotguns and the electric rifles which they had brought along, they +could get game. All their other things, save a few necessaries, had +been left behind. Eradicate, as he had always done, rode his mule up +beside Tom, to look after his young master. + +<P> +Suddenly Koku, who seemed to have become very fond of Tom, strode +forward and took his place on the other side of the mule ridden by +the young inventor. + +<P> +"Me stay by you," he said with a grin on his big face. "Me like you! +Me take care of you, Tom--be your servant. Him too old," and he +motioned to Eradicate. + +<P> +"Eh! What's dat yo' done said?" gasped the colored man. "Me too old? +Looky heah, giant man, I'd hab yo' know dat I's been in de Swift +fambly a good many years, an' I's jest as spry as I eber was. I kin +look after Massa Tom as good as eber. Now yo' git back where yo' +belongs, giant man, an' doan't let me heah no mo' ob dat foolishness +talk. Nobody waits on Massa Tom Swift but me. Does yo' heah dat, +giant man?" + +<P> +"Me Tom's man!" exclaimed the big fellow, and in fairly good +English. Tom laughed. He had no idea the giant had picked up any +words. + +<P> +"Go on away!" cried Eradicate. + +<P> +Koku gave the colored man one look, then, with a good natured grin +on his face, he reached over one hand, calmly lifted Eradicate from +his mule and set him on the ground. Then, with a push, he shoved the +mule galloping ahead, and took his place at the side of the young +inventor. + +<P> +"Well, what do you know about that?" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Bless my coffee cup!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +Eradicate stood still for a moment, gazing first at his master and +then at the big being who had so ruthlessly plucked him from the +mule's back, as easily as he would have lifted a child. Then +Eradicate, with a trace of tears in his eyes, stretched forth his +hands toward Tom, and turned aside. That was too much for our hero. + +<P> +With one leap he was off his animal, and the next minute he had his +arms around the faithful old colored man. + +<P> +"By Jove, Rad!" cried Tom, and his own eyes were not dry. "I'm not +going to be deserted by you in that way. You're just the same as +ever to me, giant or no giant, and don't you forget it!" and he +patted the old man on the back affectionately. + +<P> +"Praise de Lord fo' heahin' yo' say dat, Massa Tom," gasped +Eradicate. "Praise de dear Lord!" + +<P> +And then, knowing that he still held a place in his young master's +heart, the colored man was content. And from then on he rode on one +side of Tom, while the giant, Koku, strode along on the other. He +had established himself as Tom's bodyguard and even though Eradicate +insisted on remaining, Koku would not go away. + +<P> +"I guess I'll have to keep 'em both," said Tom, with a grin, "but +I'm going to change Koku's name." + +<P> +"What are you going to call him?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Let's see, what month is this?" + +<P> +"August," said Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Then August is his name!" exclaimed Tom. "Koku sounds too much like +a cocoanut cake. Here, August, shift that package on the white +mule," he called, "it's cutting her back," and the giant, with a +pleased grin, did as he was bid. And August he was called from then +on. + +<P> +But my story is getting too long, so I must bring it to a close. And +really there is not much to tell. The march back to the coast was +full of hardships, danger and difficulties, but they accomplished +it. The two giants seemed glad that they had left their own country +behind and they were simple and affectionate beings. Tom made up his +mind he would let the circus man have one and keep the other for his +personal attendant. + +<P> +They traveled by day, and slept at night, shooting game as they +needed it. Several times they narrowly escaped getting mixed up in +the native conflicts. Tom had one striking evidence of his giant +servant's usefulness. One day he was stalking a small beast, like a +deer, when, from a tree overhead, a jaguar sprang down at him. But +Koku--I beg his pardon--August was at hand, and, like Sampson of +old, the giant slew the beast bare-handed, choking it to death. + +<P> +In fine time our friends reached a native town and the wonder caused +by the giants was no less than the amusement of the big men at the +things they saw. They wondered more when they got to a city, and saw +more marvels of the white man's progress. + +<P> +Then Tom and his friends reached the coast, and took a steamer for +New York. The giants created a great sensation, the more when it was +known that Tom intended to keep one for himself. With this +arrangement Mr. Preston agreed, for he only wanted one as an +attraction. + +<P> +"Couldn't have done it better myself!" the circus proprietor said to +Tom when he heard the story, and this was high praise from Mr. +Preston. + +<P> +"And you rescued old Jake, too! Well, well! Couldn't have done it +better myself! I really couldn't!" + +<P> +"I wonder how our old enemy Delby made out?" asked Mr. Poddington. +They heard later that he was driven from giant land, not even being +allowed to take a boy as a specimen. He had worked on the "tip" Andy +Foger had given Mr. Waydell, but it failed. When Tom escaped, the +king confiscated all the things in the hut, and he was so taken up +with the novelties that he paid no more attention to the circus +agent, who had all his trouble, plotting and scheming against Tom +for his pains. + +<P> +"A giant in the house!" cried Mrs. Baggert, when Tom got home with +August. "I never heard of such a thing in all my life! Where will he +sleep? Not a bed is big enough!" + +<P> +"We'll give him two beds then," laughed Tom. + +<P> +And so they did, and August was immensely pleased with his new life. +He proved to be very useful, and readily adapted himself to +civilized ways. + +<P> +Tola, the other giant, made a big sensation when exhibited, and Mr. +Preston said he was well worth the fifteen thousand dollars he had +cost. + +<P> +"Well, Tom, what next?" asked Ned one day, when they had been home +several weeks and had told their story over and over again. + +<P> +"No where!" exclaimed Tom. "I'm going to take a long rest." + +<P> +But Tom Swift wasn't that kind of a young man, and he was soon +active again. If you care to learn more of his doings you may do so +in the next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His +Electric Camera; Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving +Pictures." + +<P> +And now, for a time, we will take leave of the young inventor and +his new giant servant, to meet them again a little later. + + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY *** + +***** This file should be named 4608-h.htm or 4608-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/4/6/0/4608/ + +Produced by This e-text was produced by Greg Weeks, Charles +Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</BODY> +</HTML> diff --git a/4608.txt b/4608.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f98c47c --- /dev/null +++ b/4608.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6052 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Tom Swift in Captivity + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Posting Date: January 16, 2009 [EBook #4608] +Release Date: November, 2003 +Last updated: June 23, 2013 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY *** + + + + +Produced by This e-text was produced by Greg Weeks, Charles +Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + + + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + +OR + +A Daring Escape by Airship + +BY VICTOR APPLETON + +AUTHOR OF "TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE," "TOM SWIFT AND HIS +WIRELESS MESSAGE," "TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD," ETC. + +ILLUSTRATED + + + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I A STRANGE REQUEST + II THE CIRCUS MAN + III TOM WILL GO + IV "LOOK OUT FOR MY RIVAL!" + V ANDY FOGER LEARNS SOMETHING + VI ALARMING NEWS + VII FIRE ON BOARD + VIII A NARROW ESCAPE + IX "FORWARD MARCH!" + X A WILD HORSE STAMPEDE + XI CAUGHT IN A LIVING ROPE + XII A NATIVE BATTLE + XIII THE DESERTION + XIV IN GIANT LAND + XV IN THE "PALACE" OF THE KING + XVI THE RIVAL CIRCUS MAN + XVII HELD CAPTIVES +XVIII TOM'S MYSTERIOUS BOX + XIX WEAK GIANTS + XX THE LONE CAPTIVE + XXI A ROYAL CONSPIRACY + XXII THE TWIN GIANTS +XXIII A SURPRISE IN THE NIGHT + XXIV THE AIRSHIP FLIGHT + XXV TOM'S GIANT--CONCLUSION + + + + +CHAPTER I + +A STRANGE REQUEST + + +Tom Swift closed the book of adventures he had been reading, tossed +it on the table, and got up. Then he yawned. + +"What's the matter?" asked his chum, Ned Newton, who was deep in +another volume. + +"Oh, I thought this was going to be something exciting," replied +Tom, motioning toward the book he had discarded. "But say! the +make-believe adventures that fellow had, weren't anything compared to +those we went through in the city of gold, or while rescuing the +exiles of Siberia." + +"Well," remarked Ned, "they would have to be pretty classy +adventures to lay over those you and I have had lately. But where +are you going?" he continued, for Tom had taken his cap and started +for the door. + +"I thought I'd go out and take a little run in the aeroplane. Want +to come along? It's more fun than sitting in the house reading about +exciting things that never have happened. Come on out and--" + +"Yes, and have a tumble from the aeroplane, I suppose you were going +to say," interrupted Ned with a laugh. "Not much! I'm going to stay +here and finish this book." + +"Say," demanded Tom indignantly. "Did you ever know me to have a +tumble since I knew how to run an airship?" + +"No, I can't say that I did. I was only joking." + +"Then you carried the joke too far, as the policeman said to the man +he found lugging off money from the bank. And to make up for it +you've got to come along with me." + +"Where are you going?" + +"Oh, anywhere. Just to take a little run in the upper regions, and +clear some of the cobwebs out of my head. I declare, I guess I've +got the spring fever. I haven't done anything since we got back from +Russia last fall, and I'm getting rusty." + +"You haven't done ANYTHING!" exclaimed Ned, following his chum's +example by tossing aside the book. "Do you call working on your new +invention of a noiseless airship nothing?" + +"Well, I haven't finished that yet. I'm tired of inventing things. I +just want to go off, and have some good fun, like getting +shipwrecked on a desert island, or being lost in the mountains, or +something like that. I want action. I want to get off in the jungle, +and fight wild beasts, and escape from the savages!" + +"Say! you don't want much," commented Ned. "But I feel the same way, +Tom." + +"Then come on out and take a run, and maybe we'll get on the track +of an adventure," urged the young inventor. "We won't go far, just +twenty or thirty miles or so." + +The two youths emerged from the house and started across the big +lawn toward the aeroplane sheds, for Tom Swift owned several speedy +aircrafts, from a big combined aeroplane and dirigible balloon, to a +little monoplane not much larger than a big bird, but which was the +most rapid flier that ever breathed the fumes of gasolene. + +"Which one you going to take, Tom?" asked Ned, as his chum paused in +front of the row of hangars. + +"Oh, the little double-seated monoplane, I guess that's in good +shape, and it's easy to manage. When I'm out for fun I hate to be +tinkering with levers and warping wing tips all the while. The Lark +practically flies herself, and we can sit back and take it easy. +I'll have Eradicate fill up the gasolene tank, while I look at the +magneto. It needs a little adjusting, though it works nearly to +perfection since I put in some of that new platinum we got from the +lost mine in Siberia." + +"Yes, that was a trip that amounted to something. I wouldn't mind +going on another like that, though we ran lots of risks." + +"We sure did," agreed Tom, and then, raising his voice he called +out: "Rad, I say Rad! Where are you? I want you!" + +"Comin', massa Tom, comin'," answered an aged colored man, as he +shuffled around the corner of the shed. "What do yo'-all want ob +me?" + +"Put some gasolene in the Lark, Rad. Ned and I are going to take a +little flight. What were you doing?" + +"Jest groomin' mah mule Boomerang, Massa Tom, dat's all. Po' +Boomerang he's gittin' old jest same laik I be. He's gittin' old, +an' he needs lots ob 'tention. He has t' hab mo' oats dan usual, +Massa Tom, an' he doan't feel 'em laik he uster, dat's a fac', Massa +Tom." + +"Well, Rad, give him all he wants. Boomerang was a good mule in his +day." + +"An' he's good yet, Massa Tom, he's good yet!" said Eradicate +Sampson eagerly. "Doan't yo' all forgit dat, Massa Tom." And the +colored man proceeded to fill the gasolene tank, while Tom adjusted +the electrical mechanism of his aeroplane, Ned assisting by handing +him the tools needed. Eradicate, who said he was named that because +he "eradicated" dirt, was a colored man of all work, who had been in +the service of the Swift household for several years. He and his +mule Boomerang were fixtures. + +"There, I guess that will do," remarked Tom, after testing the +magneto, and finding that it gave a fat, hot spark. "That ought to +send us along in good shape. Got all the gas in, Rad?" + +"Every drop, Massa Tom." + +"Then catch hold and help wheel the Lark out. Ned, you steady her on +that side. How are the tires? Do they need pumping up?" + +"Hard as rocks," answered Tom's chum, as he tapped his toe against +the rubber circlets of the small bicycle wheels on which the +aeroplane rested. + +"Then they'll do, I guess. Come on now, and we'll give her a test +before we start off. I ought to get a few hundred more revolutions +per minute out of the motor with the way I've adjusted the magneto. +Rad, you and Ned hold back, while I turn the engine over." + +The youth and the colored man grasped the rear supports of the long, +tail-like part of the monoplane while Tom stepped to the front to +twist the propeller blades. The first two times there was no +explosion as he swung the delicate wooden blades about, but the +third time the engine started off with a roar, and a succession of +explosions that were deafening, until Tom switched in the muffler, +thereby cutting down the noise. Faster and faster the propeller +whirled about as the motor warmed up, until the young inventor +exclaimed: + +"That's the stuff! She's better than ever! Climb up Ned, and we'll +start off. You can turn her over, Rad; can't you?" + +"Suah, Massa Tom," was the reply, for Eradicate had been on so many +trips with Tom, and had had so much to do with airships, that to +merely start one was child's play for him. + +The two youths had scarcely taken their seats, and the colored man +was about to twist around the fan-like blades of the big propeller +in front, when from behind there came a hail. + +"Hold on there! Wait a minute, Tom Swift! Bless my admission ticket, +don't go! I've got something important to tell you! Hold on!" + +"Humph! I know who that is!" cried Tom, motioning to Eradicate to +cease trying to start the motor. + +"Mr. Damon, of course," agreed Ned. "I wonder what he wants?" + +"A ride, maybe," went on Tom. "If he does we've got to take the +Scooter instead of this one. That holds four. Well, we may as well +see what he wants." + +He jumped lightly from his seat in the monoplane and was followed by +Ned. They saw coming toward them, from the direction of the house, a +stout man, who seemed very much excited. He was walking so fast that +he fairly waddled, and he was smiling at the lads, for he was one of +their best friends. + +"Glad I caught you, Tom." he panted, for his haste had almost +deprived him of breath. "I've got something important to tell you. I +hurried over as soon as I heard about it." + +"Well, you're just in time," commented Ned with a laugh. "In another +minute we'd have been up in the clouds." + +"What is it, Mr. Damon?" asked Tom. "Have you got wind of a city of +diamonds, or has some one sent you a map telling where we can go to +pick up ten thousand dollar bills by the basket?" + +"Neither one, Tom, neither one. It's something better than either of +those, and if you don't jump at the chance I'm mistaken in you, +that's all I've got to say. Come over here." + +He turned a quick glance over his shoulder as he spoke and advanced +toward the two lads on tiptoe as though he feared some one would see +or hear him. Yet it was broad daylight, the place was the starting +ground for Tom's aeroplanes and save Eradicate there was no one +present except Mr. Damon, Ned and the young inventor himself. + +"What's up?" asked Tom in wonderment. + +"Hush!" cautioned the odd gentleman. "Bless my walking stick, Tom! +but this is going to be a great chance for you--for us,--for I'm +going along." + +"Going where, Mr. Damon?" + +"I'll tell you in a minute. Is there any one here?" + +"No one but us?" + +"You are sure that Andy Foger isn't around." + +"Sure. He's out of town, you know." + +"Yes, but you never can tell when he's going to appear on the scene. +Come over here," and taking hold of the coat of each of the youths, +Mr. Damon led them behind the big swinging door of the aeroplane +shed. + +"You haven't anything on hand; have you, Tom?" asked the odd +gentleman, after peering through the crack to make sure they were +unobserved. + +"Nothing at all, if you mean in the line of going off on an +adventure trip." + +"That's what I mean. Bless my earlaps! but I'm glad of that. I've +got just the thing for you. Tom, I want you to go to a strange land, +and bring back one of the biggest men there--a giant! Tom Swift, you +and I and Ned--if he wants to go--are going after a giant!" + +Mr. Damon gleefully clapped Tom on the back, with such vigor that +our hero coughed, and then the odd gentleman stepped back and gazed +at the two lads, a look of triumph shining in his eyes. + +For a moment there was a silence. Tom looked at Ned, and Ned gave +his chum a quick glance. Then they both looked sharply at Mr. Damon. + +"A--a giant," murmured Tom faintly. + +"That's what I said," replied Mr. Damon. "I want you to help me +capture a giant, Tom." + +Once more the two youths exchanged significant glances, and then +Tom, in a low and gentle voice said: + +"Yes, Mr. Damon, that's all right. We'll get you a giant right away. +Won't we, Ned? Now you'd better come in the house and lie down, I'll +have Mrs. Baggert make you a cup of tea, and after you have had a +sleep you'll feel better. Come on," and the young inventor gently +tried to lead his friend out from behind the shed door. + +"Look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd gentleman indignantly. "Do +you think I'm crazy? Lie down? Rest myself? Go to sleep? Say, I'm +not crazy! I'm not tired! I'm not sleepy! This is the greatest +chance you ever had, and if we get one of those giants--" + +"Yes, yes, we'll get one," put in Ned soothingly. + +"Of course," added Tom. "Come on, now, Mr. Damon. You'll feel better +after you've had a rest. Dr. Perkinby is coming over to see father +and I'll have him--" + +Mr. Damon gave one startled glance at the young inventor and his +chum, and then burst into a peal of hearty laughter. + +"Oh, my!" he exclaimed at intervals in his paroxysms. "Oh, dear! He +thinks I'm out of my head! He can't stand that talk about giants! Oh +dear! Tom Swift, this is the greatest chance you ever had! Come on +in the house and I'll tell you all I know about giant land, and then +if you want to think I'm crazy you can, that's all I've got to say!" + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE CIRCUS MAN + + +Without a word Tom and Ned followed Mr. Damon toward the Swift +house. Truth to tell the youths did not know what to say, or they +would have been bubbling over with questions. But the talk of the +odd man, and his strange request to Tom to go off and capture a +giant had so startled the young inventor and his chum that they did +not know whether to think that Mr. Damon was joking, or whether he +had suddenly taken leave of his senses. + +And while I have a few minutes that are occupied in the journey to +the house I will introduce my new readers more formally to Tom Swift +and his friends. + +Tom though only a young man, was an inventor of note, as his father +was before him. Father and son lived in a fine house in the town of +Shopton, in New York state, and Mrs. Swift being dead, the two were +well looked after by Mrs. Baggert their housekeeper. Eradicate +Sampson, as I have said, was the man of all work about the place. +Ned Newton who had a position in a Shopton bank, was Tom's +particular chum, and Mr. Wakefeld Damon, of the neighboring town of +Waterfield, was a friend to all who knew him. He had the odd habit +of blessing anything and everything he could think of, interspersing +it in his talk. + +In the first volume of this series, called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," I related how Tom made the acquaintance of Mr. Damon, +afterward purchasing a damaged motor-cycle from the odd gentleman. +On this machine Tom had many adventures, incidentally saving some of +his father's valuable patents from a gang of conspirators. Later Tom +got a motor boat, and had many races with his rivals on Lake +Carlopa, beating Andy Foger, the red-haired bully of the town, in +signal fashion. After his adventures on the water Tom sighed for +some in the air, and he had them in his airship the Red Cloud. + +"Tom Swift and His Submarine Boat." is a story of a search after +sunken treasure, and, returning from that quest Tom built an +electric runabout, the speediest car on the road. By means of a +wireless message, later, Tom was able to save himself and the +castaways of Earthquake Island, and, as a direct outcome of that +experience, he was able to go in search of the diamond makers, and +solve the secret of Phantom Mountain, as told in the book dealing +with that subject. + +When he went to the caves of ice Tom had bad luck, for his airship +was wrecked, and he endured many hardships in getting home with his +companions, particularly as Andy Foger sought revenge on him. + +But Tom pluckily overcame all obstacles and, later, he built a sky +racer, in which he made the quickest trip on record. After that, +with his electric rifle, he went after elephants in the interior of +Africa and was successful in rescuing some missionaries from the +terrible red pygmies. + +One of the mission workers, later, sent Tom details about a buried +city of gold in Mexico, and Tom and his chum together with Mr. Damon +located this mysterious place after much trouble, as told in the +book entitled, "Tom Swift in the City of Gold." The gold did not +prove as valuable as they expected, as it was of low grade, but they +got considerable money for it, and were then ready for more +adventures. + +The adventures soon came, as those of you who have read the book +called, "Tom Swift and His Air Glider," can testify. In that I told +how Tom went to Siberia, and after rescuing some Russian political +exiles, found a valuable deposit of platinum, which to-day is a more +valuable metal than gold. Tom needed some platinum for his +electrical machines, and it proved very useful. + +He had been back from Russia all winter and, now that Spring had +come again, our hero sighed for more activity, and fresh adventures. +And with the advent of Mr. Damon, and his mysterious talk about +giants, Tom seemed likely to be gratified. + +The two chums and the odd gentleman continued on to the house, no +one speaking, until finally, when they were seated in the library, +Mr. Damon said: + +"Well, Tom, are you ready to listen to me now, and have me explain +what I meant when I asked you to get a giant?" + +"I--I suppose so," hesitated the young inventor. "But hadn't I +better call dad? And are you sure you don't want to lie down and +collect your thoughts? A nice hot cup of tea--" + +"There, there, Tom Swift; If you tell me to lie down again, or +propose any more tea I'll use you as a punching bag, bless my boxing +gloves if I don't!" cried Mr. Damon and he laughed heartily. "I know +what you think, Tom, and you, too, Ned," he went on, still +chuckling. "You think I don't know what I'm saying, but I'll soon +prove that I do. I'm fully in my senses, I'm not crazy, I'm not +talking in my sleep, and I'm very much in earnest. Tom, this is the +chance of your life to get a giant, and pay a visit to giant land. +Will you take it?" + +"Mr. Damon, I--er--that is I--" + +Tom stammered and looked at Ned. + +"Now look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd man. "When you got +word about the buried city of gold in Mexico you didn't hesitate a +minute about making up your mind to go there; did you?" + +"No, I didn't." + +"Well, that wasn't any more of a strain on your imagination than +this giant business; was it?" + +"Well, I don't know, as--" + +"Bless my spectacles! Of course it wasn't! Now, look here. Tom, you +just make up your mind that I know what I'm talking about, and we'll +get along better. I don't blame you for being a bit puzzled at +first, but just you listen. You believe there are such things as +giants; don't you?" + +"I saw a man in the circus once, seven feet high. They called him a +giant," spoke Ned. + +"A giant! He was a baby compared to the kind of giants I mean," said +Mr. Damon quickly. "Tom, we are going after a race of giants, the +smallest one of which is probably eight feet high, and from that +they go on up to nearly ten feet, and they're not slim fellows +either, but big in proportion. Now in giant land--" + +"Here's Mrs. Baggert with a quieting cup of tea," interrupted Tom. +"I spoke to her as we came in, and asked her to have some ready. If +you'll drink this, Mr. Damon, I'm sure--" + +"Bless my sugar bowl, Tom! You make a man nervous, with your cups of +tea. I'm more quiet than you, but I'll drink it to please you. Now +listen to me." + +"All right, go ahead." + +"A friend of mine has asked me if I knew any one who could undertake +to go to giant land, and get him one or two specimens of the big men +there. I at once thought of you, and I said I believed you would go. +And I'll go with you, Tom! Think of that! I've got faith enough in +the proposition to go myself!" + +There was no mistaking Mr. Damon's manner. He was very much in +earnest, and Tom and Ned looked at each other with a different light +in their eyes. + +"Who is your friend, and where in the world is giant land?" asked +Tom. "I haven't heard of such a place since I read the accounts of +the early travelers, before this continent was discovered. Who is +your friend that wants a giant?" + +"If you'll let me, I'll have him here in a minute, Tom." + +"Of course I will. But good land! Have you got him concealed up your +sleeve, or under some of the chairs? Is he a dwarf?" and Tom looked +about the room as if he expected to see some one in hiding. + +"I left him outside in the garden, Tom," replied the odd man. "I +told him I'd come on ahead, and see how you took the proposition. +Don't tell him you thought me insane at first. I'll have him here in +a jiffy. I'll signal to him." + +Not waiting for a word from either of the boys, Mr. Damon went to +one of the low library windows, opened it, gave a shrill whistle and +waved his handkerchief vigorously. In a moment there came an +answering whistle. + +"He's coming," announced the odd gentleman. + +"But who is he?" insisted Tom. "Is he some professor who wants a +giant to examine, or is he a millionaire who wants one for a body +guard?" + +"Neither one, Tom. He's the proprietor of a number of circuses, and +a string of museums, and he wants a giant, or even two of them, for +exhibition purposes. There's lots of money in giants. He's had some +seven, and even eight feet tall, but he has lately heard of a land +where the tallest man is nearly ten feet high, and very big, and +he'll pay ten thousand dollars for a giant alive and in good +condition, as the animal men say. I believe we can get one for him, +and--Ah, here he is now," and Mr. Damon interrupted himself as a +small, dark-complexioned man, with a very black mustache, black +eyes, a watch chain as big around as his thumb, a red vest, a large +white hat, and a suit of large-sized checked clothes appeared at the +open library window. + +"Is it all right?" this strange-appearing man asked of Mr. Damon. + +"I believe so," replied the odd gentleman. "Come in, Sam." + +With one bound, though the window was some distance from the ground, +the little man leaped into the library. He landed lightly on his +feet, quickly turned two hand springs in rapid succession, and then, +without breathing in the least rapidly, as most men would have done +after that exertion, he made a low bow to Tom and Ned. + +"Boys, let me introduce you to my friend, Sam Preston, an old +acrobat and now a circus proprietor," said Mr. Damon. "Mr. Preston, +this is Tom Swift, of whom I told you, and his chum, Ned Newton." + +"And will they get the giant for me?" asked the circus man quickly. + +"I think they will," replied Mr. Damon. "I had a little difficulty +in making the matter clear to them, and that's why I sent for you. +You can explain everything." + +"Have a chair," invited Tom politely. "This is a new one on me--going +after giants. I've done almost everything else, though." + +"So Mr. Damon said," spoke Mr. Preston gravely. He was much more +sedate and composed than one would have supposed after his +sensational entrance into the room. "I am very glad to meet you, Tom +Swift, and I hope we can do business together. Now, if you have a +few minutes to spare, I'll tell you all I know about giant land." + + + + +CHAPTER III + +TOM WILL GO + + +"Jove! That sounds interesting!" exclaimed Ned, as he settled +himself comfortably in his chair. + +"It is interesting," replied the circus man. "At least I found it so +when I first listened to one of my men tell it. But whether it is +possible to get to giant land, and, what is more bring away some of +the big men, is something I leave to you, Tom Swift. After you have +heard my story, if you decide to go, I'll stand all the expenses of +fitting out an expedition, and if you fail I won't have a word to +say. If, on the other hand, you bring me back a giant or two, I'll +pay you ten thousand dollars and all expenses. Is it a bargain?" + +"Let me hear the story first," suggested our hero, who was a +cautious lad when there was need for it. Yet he liked Mr. Preston, +even at first sight, in spite of his "loud" attire, and the rather +"circusy" manner in which he had entered the room. Then too, if he +was a friend of Mr. Damon, that was a great deal in his favor. + +"I am, as you know, in the circus business," began Mr. Preston. "I +have a number of traveling shows, and several large museums in the +big cities. I am always on the lookout for new attractions, for the +public demands them. Once get in the rut of having nothing new, and +your business will fall off. I know, for I've been in the business, +man and boy, for nearly forty years. I began as a performer, and I +can still do a double somersault over fifteen elephants in a row. I +always keep in practice for there's nothing like showing a performer +how to do a thing yourself." + +"But about the giants, which is what I'm interested in most now. Of +course I've had giants in my circuses and museums, from the +beginning. The public wanted 'em and we had to have 'em. Some of 'em +were fakes--men on stilts with long pants to cover up their legs, +and others were the real, genuine, all-wool-and-a-yard-wide article. +But none of them were very big. A shade under eight feet was the +limit with me." + +"I also have lots of wild animals, and it was when some of my men +were out after some tapirs, jaguars and leopards that I got on the +track of the giants. It was about a year ago, but up to this time I +haven't seen my way clear to send after the big men. It was this +way:" + +Mr. Preston assumed a more comfortable position in his chair, nodded +at Mr. Damon, who was listening attentively to all that was said, +and resumed. + +"As I said I had sent Jake Poddington, one of my best men, after +tapirs and some other South American animals. He didn't have very +good luck hunting along the Amazon. In the first place that region +has been pretty well cleaned out of circus animals, and another +thing it's getting too well populated. Another thing is that you +can't get the native hunters and beaters to work for you as they did +years ago." + +"So Poddington wrote to me that he was going to take his assistants, +make a big jump, and hike it for the Argentine Republic. He had a +tip that along the Salado river there might be something doing, and +I told him to go ahead." + +"He shipped me what few animals he had, and lit out for a three +thousand mile journey. I didn't hear from him for some time, and, +when I did, I got the finest collection of animals I had ever laid +eyes on. I got them about the same time I did a letter from Jake, +for the mail service ain't what you could call rushing in that part +of South America." + +"But what about the giants?" interrupted Mr. Damon. + +"I'm coming to them," replied the circus man calmly. "It was this +way: At the tail of his letter which he sent with the shipment of +animals Jake said this, and I remember it almost word for word:" + +"'If all goes well,' he wrote, 'I'll have a big surprise for you +soon. I've heard a story about a race of big natives that have their +stamping ground in this section, and I'm going to try for a few +specimens. I know how much you want a giant.'" + +"Well?" asked Tom, after a pause, for the circus man had ceased +talking and was staring out of the opened library window into the +garden that was just becoming green. + +"That was all I ever heard from poor Jake," said Mr. Preston softly. + +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. "You didn't tell me +that! What happened to him." + +"I never could find out," resumed Mr. Preston. "I never heard +another word from him, and I've never seen him from the time I +parted with him to go after the animals. The letter saying he was +going after the giants was the last line of his I've seen." + +"But didn't you try to locate him?" asked Tom. "Didn't he have some +companions--some one who could tell what became of him?" + +"Of course I tried!" exclaimed Mr. Preston. "Do you think I'd let a +man like Jake disappear without making some effort to find him? But +he was the only white man in his party, the rest were natives. That +was Jake's way. Well, when some time past and I didn't hear from +him, I got busy. I wrote to our consuls and even some South American +merchants with whom I had done business. But it didn't amount to +anything." + +"Couldn't you get any news?" asked Ned softly. + +"Oh, yes, some, but it didn't amount to much. After a long time, and +no end of trouble, I had a man locate a native named Zacatas, who +was the head beater of the black men under Jake." + +"Zacatas said that he and Jake and the others got safely to the +Salado river section, but I knew that before, for that was where the +fine shipment of animals came from. Then Jake got that tip about the +giants, and set off alone into the interior to locate them, for all +the natives were afraid to go. That was the last seen of poor Jake." + +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "What did Zacatas say +became of the poor fellow?" + +"No one knew. Whether he reached giant land and was killed there, or +whether he was struck down by some wild beast in the jungle, I never +could find out. The natives under Zacatas waited in camp for him for +some time, and then went back to the Amazon region where they +belonged. That's all the news I could get." + +"But I'm sure there are giants in the interior of South America, for +Jake always knew what he was talking about. Now I want to do two +things. I want to get on the trail of poor Jake Poddington if I can, +and I want a giant--two or three of them if it can be managed." + +"Ever since Jake disappeared I've been trying to arrange things to +make a search for him, and for the giants, but up to now something +has been in the way. I happened to mention the matter to my friend, +Mr. Damon, and he at once spoke of you, Tom Swift." + +"Now, what I want to know is this: Will you undertake to get a giant +for me, rescue Jake Poddington if he is alive in the interior of +South America, or, if he is dead, find out how it happened and give +him decent burial? Will you do this, Tom Swift?" + +There was a silence in the room following the dramatic and simple +recital of the circus man. Tom was strangely moved, as was his chum +Ned. As for Mr. Damon, he was softly blessing every thing he could +think of. + +Tom looked out of the long, opened windows of the library. In fancy +he could see the forest and jungles of South America. He saw a +sluggish river flowing along between rank green banks, while, from +the overhanging trees, long festoons of moss hung down, writhing now +and then as the big water anacondas or boa constrictors looped their +sinuous folds over the low limbs. + +In fancy he saw dark-skinned natives slinking along with their +deadly blow guns, and poisoned arrows. He thought he could hear the +low growls and whines of the treacherous jaguars and see their lithe +bodies slinking along. He saw the brilliant-hued flowers, saw the +birds of gorgeous plumage, and listened in fancy to their discordant +cries. + +Then, too, he saw a lonely white man in a miserable native hut +thousands of miles from civilization, waiting, waiting, waiting for +he knew not what fate. Again he saw monstrous men stalking along--men +who towered ten feet or more, and who were big and brawny. All +this passed through the mind of Tom in an instant. + +"Well?" asked Mr. Preston softly. + +"I'll go!" suddenly cried the young inventor. "I don't know whether +I can get you a giant or not, Mr. Preston, but if it's possible I'll +get poor Jake Poddington, dead or alive!" + +"Good!" cried the circus man, jumping up and clasping Tom's hand. "I +thought you were that kind of a lad, after I heard Mr. Damon +describe you. You've taken a big load off my heart, Tom Swift. Now +to talk of ways and means! I'll have a giant yet, and maybe I'll get +back the best man who ever shipped a consignment of wild animals, +good Jake Poddington! Now to business!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +"LOOK OUT FOR MY RIVAL!" + + +"You'll go in an airship of course; won't you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon, when they had pulled their chairs up around a library table, +and Mr. Preston had taken some papers from his pocket. + +"An airship? No, I don't believe I shall," replied the young +inventor. "In the first place, I'm a bit tired of scooting through +the air so much, though it isn't to be denied that it's the quickest +way of going. But in South America there are so many jungles that it +will be hard to find a level starting ground for a take-off, after +we land. Of course we could go up as a balloon, but this expedition +is going to be different from any we were ever on before." + +"How so?" asked Ned. + +"Well, in the first place we've got to start at one end of a trail, +and make careful inquiries all along the way. It isn't like when we +went for the city of gold. There we had to look for a certain ruined +temple, which was the landmark. When we went after the platinum in +Siberia we had to look for the place of the high winds, so I could +use my air glider. But now we're trying to locate a man who traveled +on foot through the jungles, and if we went in an airship we might +just miss the connecting link." + +"So, I think the best way will be to do just as Mr. Poddington +did--travel on foot or by horses and mules, and go slowly, making +inquiries from time to time. Then we MAY get to giant land, we MAY +find him." + +"I don't hope for all that," said the circus man, "but if you can +only get some news of him it will be a relief. If he died peaceably +it would be better than to be a captive among some of those savage +tribes. It's been a year now since I heard the last of him. But I +agree with Tom that an airship won't be much good in the jungle. You +might take along a small one, if you could pack it, to scare the +natives with. In fact it might be a good thing to show to the +giants, if you find them." + +"That is my idea," declared Tom. "I'll take the Lark with me. That's +a mighty powerful machine for its size, and it can be taken apart in +sections. It will carry three on a pinch, and I have had five in her +with two auxiliary seats. I'll take the Lark, and she may come in +handy." + +"When can you start?" asked Mr. Preston. + +"As soon as we can fit out an expedition," answered Tom. "It +oughtn't to take long. I don't have to build an air glider this +time. It won't take long to take the Lark apart. I haven't finished +work on my noiseless airship yet, but that can wait. Yes, we'll be +ready as soon as you want us to start, Mr. Preston." + +"It can't be too soon for me. I'll deposit a certain sum in the bank +to your credit, Tom, and you can draw on it for expenses. I'll pay +any amount to get word of poor Jake, to say nothing of having a +giant for my circus. Now as to ways of getting there. Have you a +large map of South America?" + +Tom had one, and he and the others were pouring over it when Tom's +father came into the room. + +"Well, well!" he exclaimed. "What's this? What are you up to now, +Tom, my boy? Mrs. Baggert said you took down the South American map. +What's up?" + +"Lots, dad? I'm going after giants this time!" + +"Giants, Tom? Are you joking?" + +"Not a bit of it, Mr. Swift," answered Mr. Damon. "Bless my check +book! I believe if some one wanted the moon Tom Swift would try to +get it for them." + +Then Mr. Swift noticed the stranger present, and was introduced to +the circus man. + +"Is it really true, Tom," asked the aged inventor, when the story +had been related, "are you going to have a try for giant land?" + +"That's what I am, dad, and I wish you were going along." + +"No, Tom, I'm getting too old for that. But I did hope you'd stay +home for a while, and help me work on my gyroscope invention. It is +almost completed." + +"I will help you, dad, as soon as I get back with a giant or two. +Who knows? maybe I'll get one myself." + +"What would you do with one?" asked Ned with a laugh. + +"Have him help Eradicate," answered the young inventor. "Rad is +getting pretty old, and he needs an assistant." + +"But are these giants black?" asked Mr. Swift. + +"That's a point I don't know," answered the circus man frankly. +"Jake didn't say in his letter. They may be black, white or midway +between. That's what Tom has got to find out for us." + +"And I'll do it!" exclaimed our hero. "Now let's see. I suppose the +best plan would be to take a ship right to the Rio de la Plata, +landing say at Buenos Ayres or Montevideo, and then organize an +expedition to strike into the interior." + +"Why don't you do just as Mr. Poddington did?" asked Ned, "start +from the Amazon and work south?" + +"It would take too long," declared Tom. "We know that the giants are +somewhere in the northern part of Argentina, or in Paraguay or +Uruguay. Or they may be on the other side of the Uruguay river in +Brazil. It's quite a stretch of territory, and we've got to take our +time exploring it. That's why I don't want to waste time working +down from the Amazon. We'll go right to Buenos Ayres, I think." + +"That's what I'd do," advised the old circus man. "Now I can give +you some points on what to take, and how to act when you get there. +The South Americans are a queer people--very nice when treated +right, but very bad if not," and then he told some of his +experiences as a circus man in South America, for he had traveled +there. + +"I'd go again, if my business didn't keep me here," he concluded, +"for I'd ask nothing better than to hunt for giant land, or try to +rescue poor Jake. But I can't. I'm depending on you, Tom Swift." + +"What's that? Giant land?" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert, the motherly +housekeeper, as she came in to announce that dinner was ready. "You +don't mean to tell me, Tom, that you're going off again?" + +"That's what I am, Mrs. Baggert. You'd better put me up a few +sandwiches, for I don't know when I'll be back," and Tom winked at +his chum. + +"Oh, of all things I ever heard in all my born days!" cried the +housekeeper, throwing up her hands. "Will you ever settle down, Tom +Swift?" + +"Maybe he will when Miss Mary Nestor is ready to settle down too," +said Ned mischievously, referring to a girl of whom Tom was very +fond. + +"Say, I'll fix you for that!" cried our hero, as he made an +unsuccessful grab for Ned. "But, Mrs. Baggert, can you put on a +couple of extra plates? Mr. Damon and Mr. Preston will stay to +lunch." + +"Not if it's going to put you out, Tom," objected the circus man. "I +can go to the hotel, and--" + +"No, indeed!" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert graciously, for she prided +herself on her housekeeping arrangements, and she used to say that +unexpected company never "flustrated" her. Soon the little party was +seated around the table, where the talk went from grave to gay, the +subject of the giants being uppermost. + +Mr. Preston told many funny stories of his circus days, and some of +them had the spice of danger in them, for he had been all over the +world, either as a performer or as the owner of amusement +enterprises. + +"Now, the next question to be settled," said the old circus man, +when they were once more gathered in the library, "is how many are +going?" + +"I am, for one!" exclaimed Ned quickly. "I'm sure my folks will let +me. Especially as we aren't going to use an airship, but will travel +just as ordinary folks do." + +"Except in case of emergency," explained Tom. "We'll have the Lark +to use if we need her." + +"Oh, of course," agreed Ned. "How about you, Mr. Damon? Will you +go?" + +The odd man looked around the room before replying, as though he +feared someone might be listening on the sly. + +"Go on, Andy Foger isn't here," invited Tom with a laugh. + +"I'll go--if I can pursuade my wife to let me," said the odd man in +a whisper, as if, even then, the good lady might overhear him. "I'm +not going to say anything about giants. I'll tell her we are going +to rescue a poor fellow from--er--well from the natives of South +America, and I'm sure she'll consent. Of course I'll go." + +"That's three," remarked Tom. "I think I can get Eradicate to go. He +doesn't like airships, and when he knows we're not going in one it +will please him. Then he likes it hot, and I guess South America is +about as warm as they come. I am almost sure we can count on Rad." + +"That will make a nice party," commented the circus man. "Now I'll +make out a list of the supplies you'd better take, and tell you what +to do about getting native helpers, and so on," and with that he +plunged into the midst of details that took up most of the remainder +of the day. + +"Well, then I guess that settles most everything," remarked Tom, +several hours later. "I'll begin at once to take the Lark apart for +shipment, and begin ordering the things we need." + +"Oh, there's one thing I almost forgot about," said Mr. Preston +suddenly. "Queer, how I should overlook that, too. I don't suppose +you mind a fight or two; do you?" he asked, looking sharply at Tom. + +"Well, it all depends. We've had several fights on other +expeditions, though I can't say that I like 'em," replied the young +inventor. "Why do you ask?" + +"Because you may have one--or several," was the answer of the circus +man. "You'll have to beware of my rival." + +"Your rival?" + +"Yes, the bitterest foe I have is a rival circus man named Wayland +Waydell. He, or some of his men, are always camping on my trail when +I send out after a new consignment of wild animals, and I shouldn't +be a bit surprised but what he'd try to get ahead of me on the giant +game." + +"But how does he know you want giants?" asked Tom. + +"Because news of circus expeditions always leaks out somehow or +other. I'm sure Waydell will learn that you are acting for me, and +so I warn you in time. In fact, he tried to get ahead of me when I +sent Jake Poddington out over a year ago, and I always had my +suspicions that he had a hand in Jake's disappearance, but maybe I'm +wrong. So that's what I mean when I say beware of Wayland Waydell, +Tom." + +"I will!" exclaimed Tom. "He'll have to get up early to get ahead of +us." But Tom little knew the man against whom he was to pit himself +in the search for giants. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +ANDY FOGER LEARNS SOMETHING + + +Once Tom Swift made up his mind to do a thing, he did not waste time +in setting about it. He had decided to go to giant land, and that +was all there was to it. His father talked with him about the +matter, pointed out the dangers, and suggested that, as the young +inventor had had many adventures in the last few years, and had made +considerable money from the discovery of the city of gold, and the +platinum mines, the prize offered for a giant was not much of an +inducement. + +"But it isn't that so much, dad," explained Tom. "There's that poor +circus man, maybe suffering in the centre of South America. I want +to find him, if I can, or get some news that he died a natural +death, and is decently buried." + +"You never can do it, Tom." + +"Well dad, I'm going to make a big try!" he returned; and that +settled it as far as Tom was concerned. + +For several days after the visit of Mr. Preston Tom was busy making +plans for his trip to South America. He wanted to lay out a regular +schedule before proceeding. Ned Newton had had hard work to persuade +his folks to let him go, but they finally consented, and as for Mr. +Damon, his plan was simple. + +Without mentioning giants at all, he took Mr. Preston home with him, +and the circus man's tale of his assistant lost in the wilds of +South America was too much for Mrs. Damon. + +"Go? Of course you'll go!" she said to her husband. "I demand that +you go, and I want you to find that poor man and rescue him. If you +could rescue the exiles from uncivilized Siberia I'm sure you can +get a man out of a civilized country." + +Mr. Damon did not stop to point out that South America was far less +civilized, in some ways, than was Russia. He just kept still, and +made his preparations to go. Mr. Preston was a distant relative of +the odd man, and that was how he had happened to meet him and hear +the story which was destined to play such an important part in the +life of Tom Swift. + +"Do you think we'll have much trouble after we get to South America, +and strike into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one afternoon, when +he and Mr. Preston were helping Tom in the delicate work of packing +the wing planes of the Lark. + +"No, South America isn't a bad country to travel in," replied the +circus man. "The natives are fairly friendly, and with a well-organized +party, and plenty of money, which I shall see that you have, you +ought to get along swimmingly. Only one thing bothers me." + +"What's that?" asked Tom quickly. + +"That's my rival, Waydell. He's sure to make trouble if he gets on +your trail." + +"Have you heard from him?" + +"No, and that's what makes me all the more suspicious. If he'd come +out and fight me in the open it wouldn't be so bad. But this +underhand business gets on my nerves. I don't know what he's up to." + +"Maybe he isn't up to anything," suggested Ned. "He may not even +know you are going to make another try for the giants." + +"Oh, yes, he does," replied the circus man. "He didn't succeed in +beating me when poor Jake was after them, for the simple reason that +it was a snap case, and even I didn't know that Poddington was +trying for the giants until he had started. But Waydell was soon +after him, and he knows that when I once set out for a freak or a +certain kind of animal I keep on until I get it. So he has probably +already figured out that I'm making new plans to get a giant." + +"But how will he know that I am going?" inquired Tom. + +"I don't know how he will know, but he will. We circus men have +queer ways of finding out things. I shouldn't be a bit surprised but +what he was already plotting and scheming to send an expedition on +my trail, to take advantage of anything you may learn." + +"Well, we'll try and fool him, the same as we did the Mexicans when +we hunted for the city of gold," spoke Tom; and then putting aside +that worry, he and the others labored hard to get matters in shape +for a departure to South America. + +"I suppose Eradicate is going," remarked Ned, in the intervals of +packing the aeroplane. + +"Well, I've hinted it to him," replied Tom, "but I haven't asked him +outright. He said he wouldn't mind going to a hot country though. +Here he comes now. Guess I'll see how he takes it." + +The colored man shuffled up with a hammer and nails, for he had been +putting covers on packing boxes. + +"Then you are coming with us to South America; aren't you, Rad?" +asked Tom, winking at Ned. + +"Souf America? Am dat de hot country yo'-all was referencin' to?" +asked Eradicate. + +"That's it, Rad. It's nice and warm there. All you have to do is to +lie under a tree and cocoanuts will drop off into your mouth." + +"Cocoanuts in mah mouf, Massa Tom! 'Scuse me! I doan't want t' go to +no sich country as dat. Cocoanuts in mah mouf! Why I ain't got but a +few teef left, an' a cocoanut droppin' offen a tree would shorely +knock dem teef out, shorely!" + +"Oh, Rad, I didn't mean cocoanuts! I meant oranges and bananas-- +they're soft," and Tom glanced quickly at Ned, for he saw that he +had made a mistake. + +"Oh, well, den dat's diffunt, Massa Tom. I jes lubs oranges an' +bananas, an' ef yo'-all is shore dat I'll find some, why, I'll come +along." + +"Find 'em? Of course you will!" cried Ned. + +"And cocoanuts, too," added Tom. "Only, Rad, I meant to say that the +monkeys would throw the cocoanuts down to you from the trees. That +breaks the hard shells you see, and all you have to do is to take +out the meat, and drink the milk. Then the monkeys throw you down a +palm leaf fan to cool yourself off, while you're eating it. Oh, I +tell you, Rad, South America is the place to go to have a good +time." + +"I believe you, Massa Tom. When do we-all start?" + +"Pretty soon now." + +"An' what all am yo' gwine arter, Massa Tom?" + +The young inventor thought a moment. In times past he had not +hesitated to confide in his colored helper, but of late years +Eradicate had become somewhat childish, and he talked more than was +necessary. Tom wondered whether it would be safe to trust the giant +secret to him. After a moment's thought he realized that it would +not be. But, at the same time, he knew that if he did not give some +kind of an answer Eradicate would become suspicious, and that would +be worse. The colored helper had been with Tom on too many trips not +to know that his master never went without some object. + +"Well, Rad, we're after big game this time," Tom said. "I don't know +what it will be that we'll get, whether animals or plants, and--" + +"Oh, I knows, Massa Tom. Yo'-all means dem orchard plants that lib +on air--dem big orchard plants." Eradicate meant orchids, of which +many rare and beautiful kinds are found in South America. + +"Yes, Rad, I guess we will get some big orchids," agreed Tom. + +"An' I shorely will help climb de trees arter 'em. Or maybe we kin +git de monkeys to frow em down, same as dey will de cocoanuts." + +"Maybe, Rad. Well, now go ahead and nail up the rest of these boxes. +We want to get started as soon as we can," and the colored man got +busy, murmuring from time to time something about oranges and +bananas and cocoanuts. + +Everyone was occupied in getting matters in shape for the trip to +South America, even Mr. Swift laying aside his work on his pet +invention--a gyroscope--while he helped his son. And had Tom not +been quite so engrossed with his preparations he might have gone +about town more, in which case he would have learned something that +might have saved him and the others considerable trouble and no +little danger. And this fact was that Andy Foger had been in Shopton +several times lately. + +After the trouble which the red-haired bully and his father caused +Tom and his friends on their trip to the city of gold, Mr. Foger +moved away from Shopton. He had lost his fortune and had to begin +all over again. The Foger homestead was closed up, and Andy ceased +to be a fixture of the town, for which Tom and Ned were very glad. + +But of late Andy had been seen in Shopton several times, and it was +noticed that, on one or two occasions, he had a man with him--a man +who seemed to have plenty of money--a man with an air about him not +unlike that of Mr. Preston. A man with what newspaper men would have +called a circus or theatrical "air." + +This man had visited Shopton soon after Mr. Preston made the giant +proposition to Tom, and before meeting Andy Foger had made special +inquiries about Tom Swift. + +"Who are the people who have a hard feeling against this young +inventor in town?" the man had asked of several persons. + +"Tom Swift has more friends than enemies," was the general reply. + +"Oh, surely he must have some enemies," the man insisted. "He's been +running his aeroplanes and autos around town a long time, and surely +there must be some one who has a grudge against him. I suppose he +has lots of friends, but who are his enemies?" + +Then he learned about Andy Foger, and, hearing that Andy now lived +in a nearby town, the man had at once gone there. It was not long +before he reappeared--and the red-haired bully was with him. + +"And you haven't learned anything yet, Andy?" asked this mysterious +man one afternoon, when he met his tool in a quiet resort in +Shopton. + +"Nothing yet, Mr. Waydell. But give me a little more time." + +"Time! You've had more time now than you need. When I agreed to pay +you for finding out what part of South America Tom Swift would head +for to get some sort of a freak or animal for Preston's circus I +thought you'd make good quicker than this." + +"So did I. But you see Tom is suspicious of me, and so is his chum, +Ned Newton. I can't go to them, and if I'm seen sneaking around the +house or shop, after what happened last, I'll be driven off." + +"Well, it's up to you. I paid you to get the information and I +expect you to do it. Why don't you tackle that old colored man whom, +I understand, works for him? He ought to be simple enough to give +the game away." + +"Eradicate? I will! I never thought of that I'll get that +information for you, Mr. Waydell, in a few days." + +"You'd better, if you want to keep that money." + +The two plotters parted, and that very afternoon gave Andy the +chance he wanted. He met Eradicate on his way to the village where +he was going after something Tom needed. + +"Hello, Rad!" called Andy with a show of good feeling. "I haven't +seen you in some time. I suppose you're getting too old to travel +around with Tom any more?" + +"Gittin' too old!" exclaimed the colored man indignantly, for that +was his sore point. "What yo'-all mean, Andy Foger? I ain't gittin' +old, an' neider am Boomerang." + +"Oh, I thought you were, as you haven't been on any trips lately." + +"I ain't, hey? Well I's gwine on one right soon, let me tell you +dat, Andy Foger!" + +"No! Is that so? Glad to hear it. Up to the North Pole I suppose?" + +"No, sah; not much! No cold country for this coon! I's gwine where +it's nice an 'warm, an' where de cocoanuts fall in yo' mouf--I mean +where de bananas an' oranges fall in you mouf, an' de monkeys frow +down cocoanuts an' palm leaf fans to yo'!" + +"Where's that, Rad?" asked Andy, and he tried to make his voice +sound indifferent, as though the matter did not interest him. + +"South America, dat's where it am, an' I's gwine wif Massa Tom. We's +gwine t' git a monstrous big orchard plant." + +"Oh, yes; I've heard about them. Well, I hope you get all the +oranges and bananas you want. South America, eh? I suppose along the +Amazon river, where they have crocodiles forty feet long, that are +always hungry." + +"No, sah! No crockermiles fo' me! We ain't goin' neah de Amerzon +riber at all. We's gwine away down in de middle part of South +America. It's a place suffin laik Gomeonaway--or Goonaway, or +suffin' laik dat." + +"Oh, yes; I know where you mean!" and Andy could hardly conceal the +note of triumph in his voice. He had the very information he wanted +from the simple colored man. "Yes, I guess there are no crocodiles +there, and plenty of monkeys and cocoanuts. Well, I hope you have a +good time," and Andy hurried away to seek out the rival circus man. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +ALARMING NEWS + + +"Hand me that hammer, Ned." + +"There it is, right behind you, on the bench." + +"Oh, so it is. Here are those nails you were asking for." + +"Good. Now we'll make things hum," and Ned Newton's voice was +drowned in the rapid driving of nails into boards. + +"Bless my screw driver!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was +sawing planks to make covers for boxes. + +"What's the matter?" asked Tom, looking up from a bundle he was +tying up. It contained the magneto of his aeroplane and he was +putting waterproof paper about it. "Did you cut your finger?" + +"No, but I just happened to think that I nailed my watch up in that +last box." + +"Nailed up your watch!" cried Mr. Preston, who, after a trip to New +York to make arrangements for passages on a steamer, had come back +to help Tom pack up. + +"Yes, I took it out to see how long it took me to make a box cover, +and then Tom asked me to nail up that box containing the motor +parts, and I laid my watch right down on top, and put the boards +over it." + +"Well, the only thing to do is to take off the cover," remarked Tom +grimly. + +"Bless my chronometer! That will delay things," said the odd man +with a sigh. "But I suppose there is no hope for it," and he +proceeded to open the box, while Tom, Ned, the circus man and +Eradicate busied themselves over the hundred and one things to be +done before they would be ready for the trip to the interior of +South America. + +"Look out, Ned!" called Tom. "You're making those top boards too +long. They'll stick out over the edge, and be ripped off if the box +catches on anything." + +"Yes, you can't be too careful," cautioned Mr. Preston. "Each box or +package must be the right weight, or the porters and mule drivers +won't carry them into the interior. You may have to cross rough +trails, and even ford rivers. And as for bridges! well, the less +said about them the better. You aren't going to have any picnic, and +if you want to back out, Tom Swift, now is the time to say so." + +"What! Back out?" cried our hero. "Never! I said I'd go and I'm +going. Ned, pass that brace and bit over, will you. I've got to bore +a hole for these screws." + +And so the work went on in the big aeroplane shed, which they had +made their packing headquarters. + +The Lark, that small, but strong and speedy aeroplane, had been +safely packed, and most of it had been sent on ahead to New York, +where the travellers were to take the steamer. There remained to be +transported their clothing, weapons and ammunition, and several +bundles and cases of trinkets which would be of more value in +bartering with the natives than money. Tom and Mr. Preston had +selected the things with great care, and at the last moment the +young inventor had packed a box of his own, and said nothing about +it. Included in it were some of his own and his father's inventions, +and had one been given a glance into that same box he would have +wondered at the queer things. + +"What in the world are you taking with you, anyhow?" asked Ned, of +his chum, noticing the mysterious box. + +"'You'll see, if we ever get to giant land," replied Tom with a +smile. + +"How long before we can start?" asked Mr. Damon, late that day, when +most of the hard work had been finished. He was as anxious and as +eager as either of the youths to make a start. + +"We ought to be ready at least a week from to-day," replied Tom, +"and perhaps sooner." + +"Sooner, if you can make it," suggested Mr. Preston. "The steamer +sails a week from to-day, and if you miss that one you'll have to +wait two weeks more." + +"Then a week from to-day we'll sail," decided Tom, with emphasis. +"We'll work nights getting things in shape." + +Really, though, not much more remained to be done, and the next day +Mr. Preston again went to New York, accompanying a shipment of boxes +and cases that Tom sent on ahead. + +The two chums were busy in the aeroplane hangar a few days after +this, nailing up the last of some light cases containing medicines, +personal effects and comforts that would accompany them on their +trip. + +"Well, I'm glad of one thing," remarked Tom thoughtfully, as he +drove home the last nail in a box, "and that is that we won't be +bothered with that Andy Foger on this trip. I haven't seen hide nor +hair of him in some time. I guess he and his father are down and +out." + +"I guess so. I haven't seen him either." + +"Massa Andy were in town a few days ago," ventured Eradicate. + +"He was?" cried Tom. "Did you see him? What was he doing, Rad?" + +"Nuffin, same as usual. He done say I were too old to go on any more +hexpiditions wif yo' an' I proved dat I wasn't." + +"Proved that you weren't, Rad? How?" And Tom looked anxiously at his +colored helper. + +"Why, I done say t' him dat I was gwine wif yo'-all dis time, t' dat +Comeaway country after a big orchard plant. Dat's how I done prove +it to dat Andy Foger." + +"Rad, you didn't tell him we were going to South America?" asked Tom +reproachfully. + +"Suah I done so, Massa Tom. Dat were de only way t' prove t' him dat +I wa'an't gittin' too old." + +"Oh, Rad! I'm afraid--" and Tom hesitated. + +"Oh, I don't believe it amounted to anything," interposed Ned. "Andy +didn't have any one with him, did he, Rad?" + +"No, Massa Ned. He were all alone by hisse'f." + +"Then I guess it's all right, Tom. Andy was only rigging Eradicate, +and he didn't pay any attention to what he said." + +"Well, I hope so," and the young inventor wore a thoughtful air as +he resumed the finish of the packing. + +The colored man, blissfully unconscious that he had been the +innocent cause of a grave danger that overhung Tom and his friends, +whistled gaily as he gathered the boxes, bales and packages into a +pile, ready for the expressman, who was to call in the morning. + +Tom, together with Ned, Mr. Damon and Eradicate, were to leave the +following afternoon, and stay in New York until the sailing of the +steamer. They preferred to be a day or so ahead of time than half an +hour late, and were taking no chances. + +"Bless my timetable!" exclaimed Mr. Damon that night, as they sat in +the library of the Swift home, checking over the lists to make sure +that nothing had been forgotten, "bless my timetable, but it doesn't +seem possible that we are going to start at last." + +"Yes, we'll soon be on the way to giant land," spoke Tom in a low +voice. Somehow the young inventor did not seem to be in his usually +bright spirits. + +"You don't seem very enthusiastic," remarked Ned. "What's the +matter, Tom?" + +"Oh, nothing much. Though I would feel better if I knew that Andy +Foger didn't have any inkling of what our plans were," he added, for +Eradicate was not present. + +"Oh, nonsense!" exclaimed his chum. "Mr. Preston will be here in the +morning, and he'll know whether his rival has any idea of camping on +our trail. Cheer up!" + +"Yes, I suppose I am foolish to worry," admitted Tom, "but, somehow +I can't help it. I wish Mr. Preston was here now to tell us that +Wayland Waydell had gone off to the centre of Africa for a dwarf. +Then I'd know we had nothing to fear. But I guess--" + +Tom did not finish his sentence for, at that moment, there came a +peal at the door bell. Instinctively every one started, and Mr. +Damon exclaimed: + +"Bless my burglar alarm! What's that?" + +"Someone at the door, Tom," replied Mr. Swift calmly. "That's +nothing unusual. It's early yet." + +But, in spite of his reassuring words, there was a feeling of vague +alarm. + +"I'll see who it is," volunteered Ned. "If it's Andy Foger--" + +Mrs. Baggert entered the room at that moment. She had hurried to the +door, and, as she entered she announced: + +"Mr. Preston!" + +"Yes, it is I!" added the circus man following her quickly into the +room. "I came on to-night instead of waiting for the morning, Tom. I +have bad news for you!" + +"Bad news!" gasped the young inventor. "Has Waydell got hold of your +plans." + +"I'll wager it has something to do with Andy Foger!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Neither one," spoke the circus man. "But I have just had a cable +dispatch from one of my animal agents in Brazil, saying that war has +broken out among the tribes in the central part of South America. A +big native war is being waged all around giant land, as near as we +can figure it out." + +"War among the native tribes!" exclaimed Mr. Swift. + +"Yes, and one of the worst in years. Of course, Tom, after such +alarming news as this I won't hold you to your promise to go. It's +all off. I'm sorry, but you'd better wait. It won't be safe to go +there now. Better unpack, Tom." + +For a moment there was a silence in the room. Then the young +inventor leaped to his feet and faced the circus man. + +"Unpack?" cried Tom in ringing tones. "Never! I'm going to giant +land, fight or no fight! Ned, come with me and we'll put in some of +my electric rifles. I wasn't going to take them along, but I will +now. Unpack? I guess not! I'm going to get a giant for you, Mr. +Preston, and save Jake Poddington if he's alive. Come on, Ned." + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +FIRE ON BOARD + + +"Your electric rifles!" exclaimed Ned Newton, as he followed his +chum to the storeroom, where Tom kept a number of spare guns. "It's +a good thing you thought of them, Tom." + +"Yes, I didn't think we'd need them, for I believe peaceable means +are the best to use on natives. But if there's a war, and we have to +defend ourselves against the tribes, we'll take along something that +will do more damage than an ordinary rifle, and yet I can regulate +it so that it will only stun, and not kill." + +"That's the stuff, Tom. No use in being needlessly cruel. How many +will you take?" + +"Two or three. We may need 'em all." + +A little later the two lads returned to the library where Mr. Damon, +Mr. Swift and the circus man were anxiously awaiting them. Mr. +Preston looked curiously at several objects which Tom and Ned +carried. The objects looked like guns but were different from any +the giant-seeker had seen. + +"What are they?" he asked Tom. + +"Electric rifles. One of my inventions," and Tom showed how the +weapon worked. Those of you who have read the volume entitled, "Tom +Swift and His Electric Rifle" will remember this curious weapon. It +was worked by a stored charge of magnetism of the wireless kind. By +this a concentrated globule of electricity was projected from the +muzzle, and it could be made strong or weak at the will of the +marksman. It could be made so powerful that it would totally +annihilate a whale, as Tom had once proved, or it could be made so +mild that it would put an enemy, or several of them, to sleep almost +as gently as some narcotic, and they would awaken after several +hours, little the worse for their experience. + +A charge of electricity as powerful as five thousand volts could be +concentrated into a small wireless globule the size of a bullet, and +this would fly through space, or even through solid objects until, +reaching the limit of the range set, would strike the object aimed +at. With his wonderful electric rifle Tom had not only killed +elephants, and other big game, but fought off the red pygmies of +Africa. + +"And we may have a use for it in South America," he added as he +explained the workings to Mr. Preston. + +"Well, I'm glad you didn't back out," commented the circus man, "and +this may come in mighty handy. I'll feel easier about you now, Tom, +when I know you have some electric rifles with you." + +The circus man was told of what Eradicate had said to Andy, but he +was of the opinion that no harm would result from it. + +"As far as I can learn," went on Mr. Preston, "my old rival Waydell +has given up the giant idea. He is looking for a two-headed +crocodile, said to be somewhere along the Nile river, and he's +fitting out an expedition there I understand. I guess we won't be +bothered with him. But the giant for mine! If I get that sort of an +attraction his two-headed crocodile won't be in it. I hope you have +luck, Tom Swift." + +The last details of the expedition were considered. Nothing seemed +to have been left undone, and though carrying the electric rifles +would make a little more baggage, no one minded that. + +"I kin carry dem," said Eradicate. "I ain't got much baggage of mah +own." + +So it was arranged, and early the next morning the little band of +intrepid travelers, who were going in search of giant land, started +for New York. They little knew what was ahead of them, nor what dire +perils they were to pass through. + +Of course Tom had said good-bye to Mary Nestor and half-jokingly, he +had promised to bring back a giant of his own, that she might see +one outside of a circus. + +"But, Tom," Mary exclaimed with a laugh, "what will you do with one +of the big creatures if you get one?" + +"Have him help me on my newest invention--the noiseless airship," +answered the young inventor. "I need some one to lift heavy weights. +It will save putting up a derrick. Yes, I think I'll get a giant of +my own." + +The last good-byes were said, and the parting between Tom and his +father was affecting. + +"I'll soon be back, dad," he said in as cheerful a tone as he could +assume, "and I'll help you finish your gyroscope." + +"I hope you will, Tom," and then, with a pressure of his son's hand, +Mr. Swift turned away and went into the house, closing the door +after him. + +The first part of the trip to New York was rather a silent one, no +one caring to talk much. Eradicate was the only cheerful member of +the party, which included the circus man, who was going as far as +the steamer with Tom and his friends. + +"Say," Ned exclaimed finally, "any one would think we were going to +a funeral!" + +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I guess something is on all our nerves. +Let's do something to take it off. Here comes a boy with some funny +papers. We'll buy some and read all the jokes." + +This proved a diversion, and before the train had gone many miles +more the giant-hunters were talking and laughing as though they were +merely starting on a short pleasure trip, instead of an expedition +to the dangerous jungles of South America. + +They put up at a good hotel in New York, and as soon as they were +established Tom and Mr. Preston went to the steamer Calaban which +was to land them at Buenos Ayres. They found that there was some +confusion about their luggage and boxes, and it took them the better +part of a day to get the tangle straightened out, and their stuff +stored together in one hold. + +"It will be easier to get it out if it's all together," said Tom, at +the conclusion of their labors, and then he and the circus man +returned to the hotel. The ship was to sail two days later, and, +several hours before the time set for the departure, Tom and his +friends were on board. + +"You don't see anything of your rival circus friend, do you?" asked +Tom, of the man who wanted a giant. + +"Not a sign," was the answer, as Mr. Preston glanced over the throng +of on-coming passengers. "I guess we've either given him the slip, +or he's given up the game. You won't have to worry about him. Just +take it easy until you start for the interior, and from then on +you'll have hard work enough." + +The last of the cargo was being taken aboard, the late passengers +had arrived and were anxiously watching to see that their baggage +was not lost. As Mr. Preston stood talking with Tom near the +gangplank, a clerical looking gentleman approached the circus man. + +"I beg your pardon," he began in mild accents, "but could you tell +me where my stateroom is?" and he showed his ticket. "I'm not used +to traveling," he needlessly added for that fact was very evident. +Mr. Preston informed him how to get to his berth, and the gentleman +went on: "Are you going all the way to Buenos Ayres?" + +"No, but my friend is," and the circus man nodded at Tom. + +"Oh, I'm so glad!" the stranger exclaimed. "Then I shall have +someone of whom I can ask questions. I am quite lost when I travel." + +"I'll help you all I can," volunteered Tom, "and I'll show you to +your stateroom now." + +"Ah, thank you. Your name is--" + +"Tom Swift," supplied the young inventor. + +"Ah, yes, I believe I have read about your airships. I am the +Reverend Josiah Blinderpool. I am taking a little vacation. I trust +we shall become good friends." + +"Humph, he's a regular infant, to be away from civilization," mused +Tom, when he had showed the clergyman to the proper stateroom. +"He'll get into trouble, he's so innocent." If he could have seen +that same "clergyman" double up with mirth when he had closed his +stateroom door after him, Tom would not have felt so sure about that +same "innocence." + +"To think that I was talking face to face with Sam Preston and he +never tumbled to who I was!" exclaimed the newcomer softly. "That's +rich! Now if I play my cards right I shouldn't be surprised but what +they'd invite me to come along with them. That would just suit me. I +wouldn't have any trouble then, getting on the track of those +giants. The information Waydell got from that red-haired Foger chap +wasn't any too definite," and once more the man wearing the garb of +a minister chuckled. + +"Well, I'll say good-bye," remarked Mr. Preston, a little later, +when the warning bell had rung. "I guess you'll get along all right. +I haven't seen a sign of Waydell, or any of his slick agents. You'll +have no trouble I guess." + +But if the circus man could have seen the "clergyman" at that same +time looking over letters addressed to "Hank Delby," and signed +"Wayland Waydell" he would not have been so confident. + +Mr. Preston bade good-bye to his friends, the gangplank was hauled +up, and a hoarse blast came from the whistle of the Calaban. + +"Bless my pocketbook!" cried Mr. Damon. "We're off!" + +"Yep, off t' git dat big, giant orchard plant," chimed in Eradicate. + +"Hush!" exclaimed Tom, who did not like the use of the word "giant" +even in that connection. "Don't tell everyone our business, Rad." + +"Dat's right, Massa Tom. I clean done forgot dat it's a sort of +secret. I'll keep mighty still 'bout it." + +The Calaban swung out into the river and began steaming down the +bay. + +The first week of the voyage was uneventful. The weather was +exceptionally fine, and hardly any one was seasick. The Reverend Mr. +Blinderpool was often on deck, and he made it a point to cultivate +the acquaintance of Tom and his friends. In spite of the fact that +he said he had traveled very little, he seemed to know much about +hidden corners of the world, but always, as on an occasion when he +had accidentally let slip some remark that showed he had been in +far-off China or Asia, he would suddenly change the conversation +when it verged to travel. + +"There's something queer about that minister," said Ned after one of +these occasions, "but I can't decide what it is." + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Tom, who rather liked the man. + +"No nonsense about it. Why should a minister take a trip like this +when he isn't sick, and when he isn't going to establish a mission +in South America? There's something queer about it, for, by his own +words he just took this voyage as a whim." + +"Oh, you're too fussy," declared Tom; and for the time the subject +was dropped. + +They ran into a storm when about ten days out, and for a while they +had a rough time of it, and then the weather cleared again. + +It was one evening, after the formal dinner, when Tom and Ned were +strolling about on deck, before turning in, that, the quiet of the +ship was broken by what is always an alarming cry at sea. + +"Fire! Fire!" shouted a man, pointing to a thin wisp of smoke +curling up from the deck amidships. + +"Keep quiet!" yelled one of the stewards. "It is nothing!" + +"It's a fire, I tell you!" insisted the man, and several others took +up the cry. + +A panic was imminent, and the captain came running from his +quarters. + +"What is it?" he asked. + +An officer hurried to his side, and said something but in such a low +voice that Tom, who was standing close beside the two, scarcely +heard it. But he did hear this: + +"There's a fire, sir, in hold number seventeen. We have turned the +hose in there, and the pumps are working." + +"Very good, Mr. Meld. Now try and quiet the passengers. Tell them it +doesn't amount to much, and if it does we can flood that +compartment." + +Tom started at that. + +"Come on, Ned!" he cried, grabbing his chum by the arm. + +"Why, what's up? What's the matter?" + +"Matter? Matter enough! The fire is in the hold where all our stuff +is stored, and if the flames reach that box I packed last--well, I +wouldn't give much for the ship!" and fairly dragging his chum +along, Tom raced for the place where the smoke was now coming up in +thicker clouds. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +A NARROW ESCAPE + + +"Here, come back! You can't go past here!" + +"But I've got to go! I tell you I must go! It's important!" + +The first speaker was one of the ship's officers, and the other was +Tom Swift, who, accompanied by his chum, was trying to get past a +rope that had been hastily stretched in front of the hold where the +smoke was rolling up in ever-thickening clouds. + +"It's important that you stay where you are," insisted the officer. +"Look here young man, do you want to start a panic? You know what +that is on board ship. Keep cool, we'll get the fire out all right." + +"I am cool," responded Tom, and, though he did look a bit excited, +he was calm enough to know what he was doing. + +"Then keep back!" insisted the officer. + +A crowd was gathering and there were ominous whispers sent back and +forth. Some hysterical women were beginning to scream, and there +were anxious looks on all faces. + +"I tell you it's important that I go down there," insisted Tom. "I +want to get a box--" + +"We'll look after the baggage of the passengers," declared the +officer. "You don't need to worry, young man." + +"But I tell you I do!" and Tom's voice was loud now. "It isn't so +much on my account, as--" and then, stepping quickly to the side of +the officer he whispered something. + +"What!" cried the officer. "You don't tell me? That was a risk! I +guess I'll have to help you get it out. Here, Mr. Simm," he called +to one of the mates, "stand guard here. I'm going down into the hold +with this young man." + +"Shall I come?" cried Ned. + +"No, you go stay with Mr. Damon and Eradicate," answered Tom. "Tell +them everything is all right. And for cats' sake keep Rad cool. +Don't let him get excited and start a panic. I'll be back in a +minute." + +With that Tom and the officer disappeared from view, and Ned, after +wondering what it was all about, hastened to reassure Mr. Damon and +the colored man that there was no danger, though from the manner in +which Tom had acted his chum was convinced that something was wrong. + +Meanwhile our hero, accompanied by the officer, was groping his way +through the thick smoke in the compartment. The officer had switched +on the electric lights, and they shone with a yellow haze through +the clouds of choking vapor. + +"Can you see it?" asked the officer anxiously. + +"I had it put where I could easily get at it," answered Tom with a +cough, for some of the smoke had got down his throat. "I had an idea +I might need it in a hurry. Here it is!" and he pointed to a large +box, marked with his initials in red paint. "Give me a hand and +we'll get it out." + +"Yes, and send it on deck. See, there's the fire!" and the officer +pointed to where a glow could be seen amid some bales of cotton. "It +will be slow burning, that's one good thing, and by turning steam +into this compartment we can soon put it out." + +"It's pretty close to my box," commented Tom, "but there isn't as +much danger as I thought." + +It did not take him and the officer long to move the box away from +its proximity to the fire, for the case was not heavy, though it was +of good size, and then the officer having called up an order to some +of his fellow seamen on deck, a rope was let down, and the box +hoisted up. + +"Whew! That was a narrow escape!" exclaimed Tom as he saw his case +go up on deck. "I suppose I shouldn't have had that stored here. But +there were so many things to think of that I forgot." + +"Yes, it was a risk," commented the officer. "But what are you going +to do with that sort of stuff, anyhow?" + +"I may need it when we get among the wild tribes of South American +Indians," answered Tom non-commitally. "I'm much obliged for your +help." + +"Oh, that's nothing. Anything to save the ship." + +At that moment there were confused cries, and a series of shouts and +commands up on deck. + +"We'd better hurry out of here," said the officer. + +"Why?" + +"The captain has just ordered steam turned in here. I hope there +isn't anything of yours that will be damaged by it." + +"No, everything else is in waterproof coverings. Come on, we'll +climb out." + +They hurried from the compartment and, a little later clouds of +quenching steam were poured in from a hose run from the boiler room. +The hatch was battened down, and then the smoke ceased to come up. + +"The danger is practically over," the captain assured the frightened +passengers. "The fire will be all out by morning. You may go to your +staterooms in perfect safety." + +Some did, and others, disbelieving, hung around the hatch-cover, +sniffing and peering to discover traces of smoke. But the sailors +had done their work well, and a stranger would not have known that a +fire was in the hold. + +The captain had spoken truly, and in the morning the fire was +completely out, a few charred bales of cotton being the only things +damaged. They were hauled up and dumped into the sea, while Tom, +making a hasty inspection of his other goods placed in that +compartment saw, to his relief, that beyond one case of trinkets, +designed for barter with the natives, nothing had been damaged, and +even the trinkets could be used on a pinch. + +"But what was in that box?" asked Ned, that night as they got ready +to retire, the excitement having calmed down. + +"Hush! Not so loud," cautioned Tom, for Mr. Damon was in the next +stateroom, while Eradicate had one across the corridor. "I'll tell +you, Ned, but don't breathe a word of it to Rad or Mr. Damon. They +might not intend to give it away, but I'm afraid they would, if they +knew, and I depend on the things in that box to give the native +giants the surprise of their lives in case we--well, in case we come +to close quarters." + +"Close quarters?" + +"Yes, have a fight, you know, or in case they get so fond of us that +they won't hear of letting us go--in other words if they make us +captives." + +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't think they'll do that, do you?" + +"No telling, but if they do, Ned, I've got some things in that box +that will make them wish they hadn't. It's got--" and Tom leaned +forward and whispered, as though he feared even the walls would +hear. + +"Good!" cried his chum! "That's the stuff! No wonder you thought the +ship might be damaged if the fire got to that!" + +It seemed that the slight fire was about all the excitement destined +to take place aboard the Calaban, for, after the blaze was so +effectually quenched, the ship slipped along through the calm seas, +and it was actually an effort to kill time on the part of the +passengers. As they progressed further south the weather became more +and more warm, until, as they approached the equator, every one put +on the lightest garments obtainable. + +"Crossing the line," was the signal for the usual "stunts" among the +sailors. "Neptune" came aboard, with his usual sea-green whiskers +made from long rope ends, and with his trident much in evidence; and +there was plenty of horseplay which the passengers very much +enjoyed. + +Then, as the tropical region was left behind, the weather became +more bearable. There were one or two storms, but they were of no +consequence and the steamer weathered them easily. + +Tom and his friends had several talks with the "Reverend Josiah +Blinderpool," as the pretended clergyman still called himself. But +he did not obtrude his company on them, and though he asked many +questions as to where Tom and his party were going, the young +inventor, with his usual caution in talking to strangers, rather +evaded them. + +"Hang it all! He's as close-mouthed as a clam," complained "Mr. +Blinderpool" to himself one day, after an attempt to worm something +from Tom, "I'll just have to stick close to him and his chum to get +a line on where they're heading for. And I must find out, or Waydell +will think I'm throwing the game." + +As for Tom and the others, they gave the seeming clergyman little +thought--that is until one day when something happened. Ned had been +down in the engine room, having had permission to inspect the +wonderful machinery, and, on his way back he passed the smoking +cabin. He was rather surprised to see Mr. Blinderpool in there, +puffing on a big black cigar, and with him were some men whom Ned +recognized as personages who had vainly endeavored to get a number +of passengers into a card game with them. And, unless Ned's eyes +deceived him, the seeming clergyman was about to indulge in a game +himself. + +"That's mighty queer," mused Ned. "Guess I'll tell Tom about this. I +never saw a minister play cards in public before, and this Mr. +Blinderpool has been trying to get thick with Tom, of late. Maybe +he's a gambler in disguise." + +Filled with this thought Ned hastened off to warn his chum. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +"FORWARD MARCH!" + + +"You don't say so!" exclaimed the young inventor, when Ned had told +him the queer news. "Well, do you know I've been suspicious of that +fellow ever since he tried to make friends with us." + +"Suspicious? How so? You don't think--" + +"Oh, I mean I think he's some kind of a confidence man who has +adopted the respectable clothes of a minister to fool people. He may +be a card sharper himself. Well, we won't have anything more to do +with him. It won't be long before we arrive at Buenos Ayres, and +then we won't be bothered with card sharpers or anybody else but--" + +"Giants and fighting natives," finished Ned, with a laugh. "You +forget, Tom, that there's a war going on near the very place we're +headed for." + +"That's so, Ned. But with what we have with us I guess we can make +out all right. I'm going to have the electric rifles handy the +minute we start for the interior." + +The voyage continued, and was fast drawing to a close. "Mr. +Blinderpool" made several more attempts to strike up a friendship +with Tom, or his chum, but they were on their guard now, and, +failing to get into much of a conversation with the two young men, +the pretended clergyman turned his attentions to Mr. Damon. + +That eccentric gentleman welcomed him at first, until a quiet hint +from Tom brought that to an end. + +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't say so! Not a +clergyman at all? Dear me!" + +And then, getting desperate, and needing very much to learn how long +a journey his rivals were to undertake, so that he, too, might +prepare for it, Mr. Hank Delby, alias Blinderpool, began to "pump" +Eradicate. + +But the latter was too sharp for him. Well knowing that a white man +would not get suddenly friendly with one of the black race unless +for some selfish object, Eradicate fairly snubbed the seeming +minister, until that worthy had to go off by himself, saying bitter +things and casting black looks at our friends. + +"But I'll get ahead of them yet!" he muttered, "and I'll get their +giants away from them, if they capture any." + +The box on which Tom set such an importance, and which had so nearly +been the cause of a disaster, had been stored in one of the fire-proof +compartments of the ship, and now, as a few days more would see +the vessel entering the harbor of the Rio de la Plata, thence to +steam up to the ancient city of Buenos Ayres, Tom and the others +began to think of what lay before them. + +"How do you propose to head into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one +afternoon, when the captain announced that the following morning +would see them nearly opposite Montevideo. + +"I'm going to hire a lot of burrows, donkeys or whatever they have +down here that answers the purpose," replied Tom. "We have a lot of +things to transport, and I guess pack mules would be the best, if we +can get them. Then I've got to hire some drivers and some porters, +camp-makers and the like. In fact we'll have quite a party. I guess +I'll need ten natives, and a head man and with ourselves we'll be +fifteen. So we'll need plenty of food. But then we can get that as +we go along, except when we get away into the interior, and then +we'll have to hunt it ourselves." + +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "We haven't had a good hunting +expedition since we went to elephant land, Tom. The electric rifles +will come in handy here." + +"Yes, I expect they will. Now come on, Ned, and help me get a list +ready of the things we've got to take with us, and how they can best +be divided up." + +Thick weather delayed the ship somewhat, so it was not until evening +of the next day that they made Montevideo, where part of the cargo +was to be discharged. As they would lay over there a day, the boys +decided to go ashore, which they did, wondering at the strange +sights in the old city. + +Tom watched to see if the pretended minister would land, and +endeavor to force his acquaintance, but Mr. Hank Delby, to give him +his right name, was not in evidence. In fact he was turning over +scheme after scheme in his mind in order to hit on one that would +enable him to take advantage of the preparations which had been made +by his rival in the circus business. + +"I've just got to get a line on where those giants are to be found," +mused Mr. Delby, in the seclusion of his stateroom, "even if I have +to take some other disguise and follow that Swift crowd. That's what +I'll do. I'll put on some other disguise! I wonder what it had +better be?" + +Tom and Ned, to say nothing of Mr. Damon and Eradicate, found much +to interest them in the capital of Uruguay, and they were rather +sorry, in a way, when it was time for them to leave. + +"But we'll see plenty more strange sights," remarked Tom, as the +steamer started off for Buenos Ayres. "In fact our trip hasn't +really begun yet." + +In due time they dropped anchor at the ancient city, and then began +a series of confused and busy times. In fact there was so much to +do, seeing to the unloading of their stuff, arranging for hotel +accommodations, seeing to hiring natives for the expedition into the +interior, and other details, that Tom and his friends had no time to +think anything about the pretended clergyman who had caused them a +little worry. + +Eventually their belongings were stored in a safe place, and our +friends sat down to a good dinner in a hotel that, while it was in +far-off South America, yet was as good as many in New York, and, in +some respects the boys, and Mr. Damon, liked it better. + +They found that the Spanish and Portuguese languages were the +principal ones spoken, together with a mixture of the native +tongues, and as both Ned and Tom, as well as Mr. Damon, had a +working knowledge of Spanish they got along fairly well. Some of the +hotel people could speak English. + +Tom made inquiries and found that the best plan would be to +transport all his stuff by the regular route to Rosario, on the +Parana river in Argentina, and there he could make up his pack +train, hire native carriers, and start for the interior. + +"Then we'll do that," he decided, "and take it easy until we get to +Rosario." + +It took them the better part of a week to do this, but at last they +were on the ground, and felt for the first time that they were +really going into a wild and little explored country. + +"Are you going to stick to the Parana river?" asked Ned. + +"No," replied Tom, in the seclusion of their room, "if there are any +giants they will be found in some undiscovered, or at least little +traveled, part of the country. I don't believe they are in the +vicinity of the big rivers, or other travelers would have heard +about them, and, as far as we know, Mr. Preston's animal agent is +the only one who ever got a trace of them. We'll have to go into the +jungle on either side of the river." + +"Bless my walking stick!" cried Mr. Damon. "Have we really to go +into the jungle, Tom?" + +"I'm afraid we have, if we want to get any giants, and get a trace +of Mr. Poddington." + +"All right, I'm game, but I do hope we won't run into a band of +fighting natives." + +In Rosario it was learned that while the "war" was not regarded +seriously from the fact that the fighting tribes were far inland, +still it was going on with vigor, and large bands of natives were +roaming about, stealing each others' cattle and horses, burning +villages, and taking captives. + +"I guess we're in for it," remarked Tom grimly. "But I'm not going +to back out now." + +Unexpected complications, difficulties in the way of getting the +right kind of help, and a competent man to take charge of the native +drivers, so delayed our friends that it was nearly two weeks after +their arrival in Rosario before they could start for the interior. + +Of course the object of the expedition was kept a secret, and Tom +let it be known that he and his friends were merely exploring, and +wanted rare plants, orchids, or anything in that line. The natives +were not very curious. + +At last the day for the start came. The mules, which had been hired +as beasts of burdens, were loaded with boxes or bales on either +side, the natives were marshalled into line. Tom, Ned, and Mr. +Damon, each equipped with a rifle had a saddle animal to ride, and +Eradicate was similarly equipped, though for a weapon he depended on +a shotgun, which he said he understood better than the electric +rifles. + +The aeroplane, divided into many small packages, the goods for +barter, their supplies, stores, ammunition, and the box of which Tom +took such care--all these were on the backs of the beasts of burden. +Some food was taken along, but for a time, at least, they could +depend on scattered towns or villages, or the forest game, for their +eating. + +"Are we all ready?" called Tom, looking at the rather imposing +cavalcade of which he was the head. + +"I guess so," replied Ned. "Let her go!" + +"Bless my liver pad!" gasped Mr. Damon. "If we've got to start do +it, and let's get it over with Tom." + +"All ready, Rad?" asked the colored man's young master. + +"All ready, Massa Tom. But I mus' say dat I'd radder hab Boomerang +dan dish yeah animal what I'm ridin'." + +"Oh, you'll do all right, Rad. Then, if we're all ready, forward +march!" cried Tom, and with calls to their animals, the drivers +started them off. + +Hardly had they begun the advance than Ned, who had been narrowly +watching one of the natives, hurried up to Tom, and rapidly +whispered something to his chum. + +"What?" cried Tom. "Armed with a six-shooter, is he? Well, we'll see +about that! Halt!" he cried in Spanish, and then he called San Pedro +the head mule driver, to him. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +A WILD HORSE STAMPEDE + + +"Who is that man?" demanded Tom pointing to the one Ned had +indicated. Tom's chum had had a glimpse of a shining revolver in the +hip pocket of one of the mule drivers, and knowing that the simple +natives were not in the habit of carrying such weapons, the lad had +communicated his suspicions to Tom. + +"What man, senor?" asked the head mule driver. + +"That one!" and the young inventor again pointed toward him. And, +now that Tom looked a second time he saw that the man was not as +black as the other drivers--not an honest, dark-skinned black but +more of a sickly yellow, like a treacherous half-breed. "Who is he?" +asked Tom, for the man in question was just then tightening a girth +and could not hear him. + +"I know not, senor. He come to me when I am hiring the others, and +he say he is a good driver. And so he is, I test him before I engage +him," went in San Pedro in Spanish. "He is one good driver." + +"Why does he carry a revolver?" + +"A revolver, senor? Santa Maria, I know not! I--" + +"I'll find out," declared Tom determinedly. "Here," he called to the +offending one, who straightened up quickly. "Come here!" + +The man came, with all the cringing servility of a born native, and +bowed low. + +"Why have you a weapon?" asked the young inventor. "I gave orders +that none of the drivers were to carry them." + +"A revolver, senor? I have none! I--" + +"Rad, reach in his pocket!" cried Tom, and the colored man did so +with a promptness that the other could not frustrate. Eradicate held +aloft a large calibre, automatic weapon. + +"What's that for?" asked Tom, virtuously angry. + +"I--er--I--" and then, with a hopeless shrug of his shoulders the +man turned away. + +"Give him his gun, and get another driver, San Pedro," directed our +hero, and with another shrug of his shoulders the man accepted the +revolver, and walked slowly off. Another driver was not hard to +engage, as several had been hanging about, hoping for employment at +the last minute, and one was quickly chosen. + +"It's lucky you saw that gun, Ned," remarked Tom, when they were +actually under way again. + +"Yes, I saw the sun shining on it as his coat flapped up. What was +his game, do you suppose?" + +"Oh, he might be what they call a 'bad half-breed' down here. I +guess maybe he thought he could lord it over the other drivers when +we got out in the jungle, and maybe take some of their wages away +from them, or have things easier for himself." + +"Bless my wishbone!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You don't think he meant +to use it on us, Tom?" + +"Why no? What makes you ask that?" + +"Oh, I'm just nervous, I guess," replied the odd man. + +But if Mr. Damon could have seen that same half-breed a little +later, as he slipped into a Rosario resort, with the yellow stain +washed from his face, the nervousness of the eccentric gentleman +would have increased. For the man who had been detected with the +revolver muttered to himself: + +"Caught! Well, I'll fool 'em next time all right! I thought I could +get away with the pack train, and then it would have been easy to +turn the natives any way I wished, after I had found what I'm +looking for. But I had to go and carry that gun! I never thought +they'd spot it. Well, it's all up now, and if Waydell heard of it +he'd want to fire me. But I'll make good yet. I'll have to adopt +some other disguise, and see if I can't tag along behind." + +All unconscious of the plotter they had left back of them, Tom and +his companions pushed on, rapidly leaving such signs of civilization +as were represented by small native towns and villages, and coming +nearer to the jungles and forests that lay between them and the +place where Tom was destined to be made a captive. + +They were far enough away from the tropics to escape the intolerable +heat, and yet it was quite warm. In fact the weather was not at all +unpleasant, and, once they were started, all enjoyed the novelty of +the trip. + +Tom planned to keep along the eastern shore of the Parana river, +until they reached the junction where the Salado joins it. Then he +decided that they would do better to cross the Parana and strike +into the big triangle made by that stream and its principal +tributary, heading north toward Bolivia. + +"For it is in that little-explored part of South America that I +think the giants will be found." said Tom, as he talked it over with +Ned and Mr. Damon in the privacy of their tent, which had been set +up. + +"But why should there be giants there any more than anywhere else?" +asked Ned. + +"No particular reason," answered his chum. "But, according to the +last word Mr. Preston had from his agent, that was where he was +heading for, and that's where Zacatas, his native helper, said he +lost track of his master. I have a theory that the giants, if we +find any, will turn out to be a branch of a Patagonian tribe." + +"Patagonians!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes. You know the natives of the Southern part of Argentina grow to +a considerable size. Now Patagonia is a comparatively bleak and cold +country. What would prevent some of that big tribe centuries ago, +from having migrated to a warmer country, where life was more +favorable? After several generations they may have grown to be +giants." + +"Bravo!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "It's a good theory, at any rate, Tom. +Though whether you can ever prove it is a question." + +"Yes, and a big one," agreed the young inventor with a laugh. + +For some days they traveled along over a comparatively flat country, +bordering the river. At times they would pass through small native +villages, where they would be able to get fresh meat, poultry and +other things that varied their bill of fare. Again there would be +long, lonely stretches of forest or jungle, through which it was +difficult to make their way. And, occasionally they would come to +fair-sized towns where their stay was made pleasant. + +"I doan't see any ob dem oranges an' bananas droppin' inter mah +mouf, Massa Tom," complained Eradicate one day, after they had been +on the march for over a week. + +"Have patience, Rad," advised Tom. "We'll come to them when we get a +little farther into the interior. First we'll come to the monkeys, +and the cocoanut trees." + +"Hones' Massa Tom?" + +"Surely." + +And though it was pretty far south for the nimble simians, the next +day they did come upon a drove of them skipping about in the tall +palm trees. + +"There they are, Rad! There they are!" cried Ned, as the chattering +of the monkeys filled the forest. + +"By golly! So dey be! Heah's where I get some cocoanuts!" + +Before anyone could stop him, Eradicate caught up a dead branch, and +threw it at a monkey. The chattering increased, and almost instantly +a shower of cocoanuts came crashing down, narrowly missing some of +our friends. + +"Hold on, Rad! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Some of us will be hurt!" + +Crack! came a cocoanut down on the skull of the colored man. + +"Bless my court plaster! Someone's hurt now!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"Hurt? Bless yo' heart, Massa Damon, it takes mo' dan dat t' hurt +dish yeah chile!" cried Eradicate with a grin. "Ah got a hard head, +Ah has, mighty hard head, an' de cocoanut ain't growed dat kin bust +it. Thanks, Mistah Monkey, thanks!" and with a laugh Eradicate +jumped off his mule, and began gathering up the nuts, while the +monkeys fled into the forest. + +"Very much good to drink milk," said San Pedro, as he picked up a +half-ripe nut, and showed how to chop off the top with a big knife +and drain the slightly acid juice inside. "Very much good for +thirst." + +"Let's try it," proposed Tom, and they all drank their fill, for +there were many cocoanuts, though it was rather an isolated grove of +them. + +The monkeys became more numerous as they proceeded farther north +toward the equator, for it must be remembered that they had landed +south of it, and at times the little animals became a positive +nuisance. + +Several days passed, and they crossed the Parana river and struck +into the almost unpenetrated tract of land where Tom hoped to find +the giants. As yet none of their escort dreamed of the object of the +expedition, and though Tom had caused scouts to be sent back over +their trail to learn if they were being followed there was no trace +of any one. + +One day, after a night camp on the edge of a rather high table land, +they started across a fertile plain that was covered with a rich +growth of grass. + +"Good grazing ground here," commented Ned. + +"Yes," put in San Pedro. "Plenty much horse here pretty soon." + +"Do the natives graze their herds of horses here?" asked Tom. + +"No natives--wild horses," explained Pedro. "Plenty much, sometimes +too many they come. You see, maybe." + +It was nearly noon, and Tom was considering stopping for dinner if +they could come to a good watering place, when Ned, who had ridden +slightly in advance, came galloping back as fast as his steed would +carry him. + +"Look out! Look out!" he cried. "There's a stampede of 'em, and +they're headed right this way!" + +"Stampede of what? Who's headed this way?" cried Tom. "A lot of +monkeys?" + +"No, wild horses! Thousands of 'em! Hear 'em coming?" + +In the silence that followed Ned's warning there could be heard a +dull, roaring, thundering sound, and the earth seemed to tremble. + +"The young senor speaks truth! Wild horses are coming!" cried San +Pedro. "Get ready, senors! Have your weapons at hand, and perchance +we can turn the stampede aside." + +"The rifles! The electric rifles, Ned--Mr. Damon! We've got to stop +them, or they'll trample us to death!" cried Tom. + +As he spoke the thundering became louder, and then, looking across +the grassy plain, all saw a large troop of wild horses, with flying +manes and tails, headed directly toward them! + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +CAUGHT IN A LIVING ROPE + + +"Quick! Peg out the mules!" cried San Pedro, after one look at the +onrushing horses. "Drive the stakes well down! Tie them fast and +then get behind those rocks! Lively!" + +He cried his orders to the natives in Spanish, at the same time +motioning to Tom and Ned. + +"Get off your mules!" he went on. "Peg them out. Peg out the others, +and then run for it!" + +"Run for it?" repeated Tom, "Do you think I'm going to leave my +outfit in the midst of that stampede?" and he waved his hand toward +the thundering, galloping wild horses which were coming nearer every +moment. "Get out the electric rifles, and we'll turn that stampede. +I'm not going to run." + +"Bless my saddle!" cried Mr. Damon. "This is awful! There must be a +thousand of them." + +"Nearer two!" cried Ned, who was struggling to loosen the straps +that bound his electric rifle to the side of his mule. Already the +pack animals as well as those ridden by the members of the giant-hunting +party were showing signs of excitement. They seemed to want to join +the stampeding horses. + +"Peg our animals out! Peg them out! Make them so they can't join the +others!" yelled San Pedro. "It's our only chance!" + +"I believe he's right!" cried Mr. Damon. "Tom, if we wait until +those maddened brutes are up to us they'll fairly sweep ours along +with them, and there's no telling where we'll end up. I think we'd +better follow his advice and tie our mules as strongly as we can. +Then we can go over there by the rocks, and fire at the wild horses. +We may be able to turn them aside." + +"Guess that's right," agreed the young inventor after a moment's +thought. "Come on, Ned. Peg out!" + +"Peg out! Peg out!" yelled the natives, and then began a lively +scene. Pegging stakes were in readiness, and, attached to the bridle +of each mule was a strong, rawhide rope for tying to the stake. The +pegs were driven deeply into the ground and in a trice the animals +were made fast to them, though they snorted, and tried to pull away +as they heard the neighing of the stampeding animals and saw them +coming on with an irresistible rush. + +"Hurry!" begged San Pedro, and hurry Tom, Ned and the others did. +Animal after animal was made fast--that is all but one and that bore +on its back two rather large but light boxes--the contents of the +case which Tom had rescued from the fire in the hold. + +"What are you going to do with that mule?" asked Ned, as he saw Tom begin +to lead the animal away, the others having been pegged out. + +"I'm going to take him over to the rocks with me. I'm not going to +take any chances on this mule getting away with those things in the +boxes. Give me a hand here, and then we'll see what the electric +rifles will do against those horses." + +But the one mule which Tom had elected to take with him seemed to +resent being separated from his companions. Bracing his feet well +apart, the animal stubbornly refused to move. + +"Come on!" yelled Tom, pulling on the leading rope. + +"Bless my porous plaster!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'd better hurry, +Tom! Those wild horses are almost on us!" + +"I'm trying to hurry!" replied the young inventor, "but this mule +won't come. Ned, get behind and shove, will you?" + +"Not much! I don't want to be kicked." + +"Beat him! Strike him! Wait until I get a club!" yelled San Pedro. +"Come, Antonia, Selka, Balaka!" he cried, to several of the natives +who had already started for the sheltering rocks a short distance +away. "Beat the mule for Senor Swift!" + +Ned joined Tom at the leading rope, and the two lads tried to pull +the animal along. Mr. Damon rushed over to lend his aid, and San +Pedro, catching up a long stick, was about to bring it down on the +mule's back. Meanwhile the stampeding animals were rushing nearer. + +"Hold on dere, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Yo'-all done +flustered dat mule, dat's what yo' done. Yo'-all am too much excited +'bout him. Be calm! Be calm!" + +"Calm! With that bunch of wild animals bearing down on us?" shouted +Tom. "Let's see you be calm, Rad. Come on here, you obstinate +brute!" he cried, straining on the rope. + +"Let me do it, Massa Tom. Let me do it," suggested the colored man +hurrying to the balky beast. + +Then, as gently as if he was talking to a nervous child, and totally +oblivious to the danger of the approaching horses, Eradicate went up +to the mule's head, rubbed its ears until they pointed naturally +once more, murmured something to it, and then, taking the rope from +Ned and Tom, Eradicate led the mule along toward the rocks as easily +as if there had never been any question about going there. + +"For the love of tripe! How did you do it?" asked Tom. + +"Bless my peck of oats!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a good thing we had +Rad along!" + +"All mules am alike," said the colored man with a grin. "An dish +yeah one ain't much different from mah Boomerang. I guess he's a +sorter cousin." + +"Come on!" yelled San Pedro. "No time to lose. Make for the rocks!" + +Tom, Ned and Mr. Damon sprinted then, and there was need to, for the +foremost of the galloping horses was not a hundred feet away. Then +came Eradicate, leading the mule that had at last consented to +hurry. The natives, with San Pedro, were already at the rocks, +waiting for the white hunters with the deadly electric rifles. + +"If they stampede our mules we'll be in a pickle!" murmured Ned. + +"I guess those ropes will hold unless they bite them through," +remarked Tom. + +"Yes, they sure hold," cried San Pedro, and indeed one had to shout +now to be heard above the thundering of the horses. Now the tethered +mules were lost to sight in the multitude of the other steeds all +about them. + +"Come on, Ned!" yelled Tom, as he sighted his rifle. "Pump it into +them! We must turn them, or they may come over this way, and if they +do it will be all up with us." + +"Shoot to kill?" asked Ned, as he drew back the firing lever of his +electric rifle. + +"No, only a stunning charge. Those horses are valuable, and there's +no use killing them. All we want to do is to turn them aside." + +"That's right," agreed Mr. Damon, forgetting in the excitement of +the moment to bless himself or anything. "We'll only stun them." + +The rifles were quickly adjusted to send out a comparatively weak +charge of electricity, and then they were trained on the dense mass +of horses, while the three marksmen began working the firing levers. + +At first, though horse after horse fell to the ground, stunned, +there was no appreciable effect on the thousands in the drove. The +poor mules were hidden from sight, though by reason of divisions in +the living stream of animals it could still be told where they were +tethered, and where the horses separated to go past them. +Fortunately the ropes and pegs held. + +"Fire faster!" cried Tom. "Shoot across the front of them, and try +to turn them to one side." + +From the rocks, behind which the natives and our friends crouched, +there came a steady stream of electric fire. Horse after horse went +down, stunned but not badly hurt, and in a few hours the beasts +would feel no ill effects. The firing was redoubled, and then there +came a break in the steady stream of horseflesh. + +Some hesitated and sought to turn back. Others, behind, pressed them +on, and then, as if in fear at the unknown and unseen power that was +laying low animal after animal, the great body, of horses, suddenly +turned at right angles to their course and broke away. There were +now two bodies of the wild runaways, those that had passed the +tethered mules, and those that had swung off. The stampede had been +broken. + +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom, jumping up from behind the rocks, and +swinging his hat. "We've turned them." + +"And just in time, too," added Ned, as he joined his chum. Then all +the others leaped up, and the sight of the human beings completed +the scare. The stampeding animals swung off more than before, so +that they were nearly doubling back on their own trail. The others +thundered off, and the ground was strewn with unconscious though +unharmed animals. + +"One mule gone!" cried San Pedro, hastily counting the still +tethered animals which were wildly tugging at their ropes. + +"Never mind," spoke Tom, "it's the one with some of that damaged +bartering stuff I intended for trading. We can afford to lose that. +Rad, is your animal all right?" + +"He suah am, Massa Tom. Dish yeah mule am almost as sensible as +Boomerang, ain't yo'?" and Eradicate patted the big animal he was +leading. + +"I'll send a man down the trail, and maybe he can pick up the +missing one," said San Pedro, and while the other natives were +quieting the restless mules, one tall black man hastened in the wake +of the retreating horses. + +He came back in an hour with the missing animal, that had broken its +tether rope and then, after running along with the wild horses had +evidently dropped out of the drove. Aside from the loss of a small +box, there had been no damage done, and the cavalcade was soon under +way once more, leaving the motionless horses to recover from the +effects of the electricity. + +"Bless my saddle pad!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't think I want to go +through anything like that again." + +"Neither do I," agreed Tom. "We are well out of it." + +"How much you take for one of them rifles?" asked San Pedro +admiringly. + +"Not for sale," answered Tom with a laugh. + +They camped in a fertile valley that night, and had a much-needed +rest. As yet Tom had made no inquiries as to the location of giant +land from any of the natives of the villages or towns through which +they passed. He knew as soon as he did begin asking questions, his +own men would hear of it, and they might be frightened if they knew +they were in an expedition the object of which was to capture some +of the tall men. + +"We'll just go along for a few days more," said Tom, to Ned, "and +then, when I do spring my surprise, they'll be so far from home that +they won't dare turn back. In a few days I'll begin making +inquiries." + +They traveled on for three days more, ever heading north, and coming +more into the warmer climate. The vegetation began to take on a more +tropical look, and finally they reached a region infested with many +wild beasts and monkeys, and with patches of dense jungle on either +side of the narrow trail. Fruits, tropical flowers and birds +abounded. + +"I think we're getting there," remarked Tom, on the evening of the +third day after his talk with Ned. "San Pedro says there's quite a +village about half a day's march ahead, and I may learn something +there. I'll know by to-morrow whether we are on the right trail or +not." + +The natives were getting supper, and Eradicate was busy with a meal +for the three white hunters. Mr. Damon had strolled down to the bank +of a little stream, and was looking at some small animals like foxes +that had come for their evening drink. They seemed quite fearless. + +Suddenly something long, round and thick seemed to drop down out of +a tree close to the odd gentleman. So swift and noiseless was it +that Mr. Damon never noticed it. Then, like a flash something went +around him, and he let out a scream of terror. + +San Pedro, who was nearest to him, saw and heard. The next instant +the black muleteer came rushing toward the camp, crying: + +"He is caught in a rope! Mr. Damon is caught in a rope!" + +"A rope!" repeated Ned, not understanding. + +"Yes, a rope in a tree. Come quickly!" + +Tom caught up one of the electric rifles and rushed forward. No +sooner had he set eyes on his friend, who was writhing about in the +folds of what looked like a big ship cable, then the young inventor +cried: + +"A rope! Yes, a living rope! That's a big boa constrictor that has +Mr. Damon! Get a gun, Ned, and follow me! We must save him before he +is crushed to death!" + +And the two lads rushed forward while the living rope drew its folds +tighter and tighter about the unfortunate man. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +A NATIVE BATTLE + + +"Bless my--!" but that was as far as poor Mr. Damon could get. The +breath was fairly squeezed out of him by the folds of the great +serpent that had dropped down out of the tree to crush him to death. +His head fell forward on his breast, and his arms were pinioned to +his sides. + +"Quick, Ned!" cried Tom. "We must fire together! Be careful not to +hit Mr. Damon!" + +"That's right. I'll take the snake on one side, Tom, and you on the +other!" + +"No! Then we might hit each other. Come on my side. Aim for the +head, and throw in the highest charge. We want to kill, not stun!" + +"Right!" gasped Ned, as he ran forward at his chum's side. + +San Pedro, and the other natives, could do nothing. In the gathering +twilight, broken by the light of several campfires, they stood +helpless watching the two plucky youths advance to do battle with +the serpent. Eradicate had caught up a club, and had dashed forward +to do what he could, but Tom motioned him back. + +"We can manage," spoke the young inventor. + +Then he and Ned crept on with ready rifles. The snake raised its +ugly head and hissed, ceasing for a moment to constrict its coils +about the unfortunate man. + +"Now's our chance--fire!" hoarsely whispered Ned. + +It seemed as if the big snake heard, for, raising its head still +higher, it fairly glared at Ned and Tom. It was the very chance they +wanted, for they could now fire without the danger of hitting Mr. +Damon. + +"Ready?" asked Tom of his chum in a low voice. + +"Ready!" was the equally low answer. + +It was necessary to kill the serpent at one shot, as to merely wound +it might mean that in its agony it would thresh about, and seriously +injure, if not kill, Mr. Damon. + +"Fire!" called Tom in a whisper, and he and Ned pressed the triggers +of the electric rifles on the same instant. + +There was a streak of bluish flame that cut like a sliver through +the gathering darkness, and then, as though a blight had fallen upon +it, the folds of the great snake relaxed, and Mr. Damon slipped to +the ground unconscious. The electric charges had gone fairly through +the head of the serpent and it had died instantly. + +"Quick! Mr. Damon! We must get him away!" cried Tom. "He may be +dead!" + +Together the chums sprang forward. The folds of the serpent had +scarcely ceased moving before the two youths snatched their friend +away. Dropping their rifles, they lifted him up to bear him to the +sleeping tent which had been erected. + +"Liver pin!" suddenly ejaculated Mr. Damon. It was what he started +to say when the serpent had squeezed the breath out of him, and, on +regaining consciousness from his momentary faint, his brain carried +out the suggestion it had originally received. + +"How are you?" cried Tom, nearly dropping Mr. Damon's legs in his +excitement, for he had hold of his feet, while Ned was at the head. + +"Are you all right?" gasped Ned. + +"Yes--I--I guess so. I--I feel as though I had been put through a +clothes wringer though. What happened?" + +"A big snake dropped down out of a tree and grabbed you," answered +Tom. + +"And then what? Put me down, boys, I guess I can walk." + +"We shot it," said Ned modestly. + +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed the odd gentleman. "I--I +hardly know what to say. I'll say it later. You saved my life. Let +me see if any bones are broken." + +None was, fortunately, and after staggering about a bit Mr. Damon +found that he could limp along. But he was very sore and bruised, +for, though the snake had squeezed him but for part of a minute, +that was long enough. A few seconds more and nearly every bone in +his body would have been crushed, for that is the manner in which a +constrictor snake kills its prey before devouring it. + +"Santa Maria! The dear gentleman is not dead then?" cried San Pedro, +as the three approached the tents. + +"Bless my name plate, no!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. + +"Praise to all the saints! The brave young senors with their +wonderful guns saved him. Now you must rest and sleep." + +"I feel as if that was all I wanted to do for a month," commented +Mr. Damon. His soreness and stiffness increased each minute, and he +was glad to get to bed, while the boys and Eradicate rubbed his +limbs with liniment. San Pedro knew of a leaf that grew in the +jungle which, when bruised, and made into poultices, had the +property of drawing out soreness. The next day he found some, and +Mr. Damon was wrapped up in bandages until he declared that he +looked like an Egyptian mummy. + +But the leaf poultices did him good, and in a few days he was able +to be about, though he was still a trifle stiff. Of course the +cavalcade had to halt in the woods, but they did not mind this as +they had traveled well up to this time, and the enforced rest was +appreciated. + +"Well, do you feel able to move along?" asked Tom of Mr. Damon one +morning, about a week later, for they were still in the "snake +camp," as they called it in memory of the big serpent. + +"Oh, yes, I think so, Tom. Where are you going?" + +"I want to push on to the next village. There I hope to get some +line on giant land, and really I ought to begin making inquiries +soon. San Pedro and the others are wondering what our object is, for +we haven't collected any specimens of either flowers or animals, or +the snake skin, and he thinks we are a sort of scientific +expedition." + +"Well, let's travel then. I'm able." + +So they started off once more along the jungle and forest trail. As +San Pedro had predicted, they came upon evidences of a native +village. Scattered huts, made of plastered mud and grass, with +thatched roofs of palm leaves, were met with, as they advanced, but +none of the places seemed to be inhabited, though rude gardens +around them showed that they had been the homes of natives up to +recently. + +"No one seems to be at home," remarked Tom, when they had gone past +perhaps half a dozen of these lonely huts. + +"I wonder what can be the matter?" asked Ned. "It looks as if they +had gone off in a hurry, too. Maybe there's been some sort of +epidemic." + +"No, no sickness," said San Pedro. "Natives no sick." + +"Bless my liver pill!" cried Mr. Damon, who was almost himself +again. "Then what is it?" + +"Much fight, maybe." + +"Much fight?" repeated Tom. + +"Yes, tribes at war. Maybe natives go away so as not be killed." + +"By Jove!" exclaimed the young inventor. "That's so. I forgot about +what Mr. Preston said. There's a native war going on around here. +Well, when we get to the town we can find out more about it, and +steer clear of the two armies, if we have to." + +But as they went farther on, the evidences of a native war became +more pronounced. They passed several huts that had been burned, and +the native mule drivers began showing signs of fear. + +"I don't like this," murmured Tom to his chum. "It looks bad." + +"What can you do?" + +"Nothing, I guess. We've got to keep on. No use turning back now. +Maybe the two rival forces have annihilated each other, and there +aren't any fighters left." + +At that moment there arose a cry from some of the natives who, with +the mules and their burdens, had pressed on ahead. + +"What's that?" exclaimed Tom. + +"Something's happened!" gasped Ned. + +"Bless my cartridge box!" cried Mr. Damon. + +The three went forward and came to a little hill. They looked down +into a valley--a valley that had sheltered a native village, but the +village was no more. It was but a heap of blackened and fire-scarred +ruins, and there were still clouds of smoke arising from the grass +huts, showing that the enemy had but recently made their assault on +the place. + +"Bless my heart!" cried Mr. Damon. "The whole place has been wiped +out." + +"Not one hut left," added Ned. + +"Hark!" cried Tom. + +An instant later there arose, off in the woods, a chorus of wild +yells. It was followed by the weird sound of tom-toms and the gourd +and skin drums of the natives. The shouting noise increased, and the +sound of the war drums also. + +"Look!" cried Mr. Damon, pointing to a distant hill, and there the +boys saw two large bodies of natives rushing toward one another, +brandishing spears, clubs and the deadly blow guns. + +They were not more than half a mile away, and in plain view of Tom +and his party, though the two forces had not yet seen our friends. + +"They're going to fight!" cried Tom. + +And the next moment the two bodies of natives came together in a +mass, the enemies hurling themselves at each other with the +eagerness and ferocity of wild beasts. It was a deadly battle. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE DESERTION + + +"Say, look at those fellows pitch into one another!" gasped Ned. + +"It's fighting at close range all right," commented Mr. Damon. + +"If they had rifles they wouldn't be at it hand to hand," spoke Tom. +"Maybe it's just as well they haven't, for there won't be so many +killed. But say, we'd better be thinking of ourselves. They may make +up their quarrel and turn against us any minute." + +"No--never--no danger of them being friends--they are rival tribes," +said San Pedro. "But either one may attack us--the one that is the +victor. It is better that we keep away." + +"I guess you're right," agreed Tom. "Lead the way, San Pedro, and +we'll get out of sight." + +But there was a fascination in watching the distant battle that was +hard to resist. It was like looking at a moving picture, for at that +distance none of the horrors of war were visible. True, natives went +down by scores, and it was not to be doubted but what they were +killed or injured, but it seemed more like a big football scrimmage +than a fight. + +"This is great!" cried Tom. "I like to watch it, but I'm sorry for +the poor chaps that get hurt or killed. I hope they're only stunned +as we stunned the wild horses." + +"I'm afraid it is more serious than that," spoke San Pedro. "These +natives are very bloodthirsty. It would not be well for us to incur +their anger." + +"We won't run any chances," decided Tom. "We'll just travel on. Come +on, Ned--Mr. Damon." + +As he spoke there was a sudden victorious shout from the scene of +the battle. One body of natives was seen to turn and flee, while the +others pursued them. + +"Now's our time to make tracks!" called Tom. "We'll have to push on +to the next village before we can ask where the gi--" he caught +himself just in time, for San Pedro was looking curiously at him. + +"The senor wishes to find something?" asked the head mule driver +with an insinuating smile. + +"Yes," broke in Eradicate. "We all is lookin' fo' some monstrous +giant orchards flowers." + +"Ah, yes, orchids," spoke San Pedro. "Well, there may be some in the +jungle ahead of us, but the senors have come the wrong trail for +flowers," and he looked curiously at Tom, while, from afar, come the +sound of the native battle though the combatants could no longer be +seen. + +"Never mind," said our hero quickly. "I guess I'll find what I want. +Now come on." + +They started off, skirting the burned village to get on the trail +beyond it. But hardly had they made a detour of the burned huts than +one of the native drivers, who was in the rear, came riding up with +a shout. + +"Now what's the matter?" cried Tom, looking back. + +There was a voluble chattering in Spanish between the driver and San +Pedro. + +"He says the natives that lived in this village have driven their +enemies away, and are coming back--after us," translated the head +mule driver. + +"After us!" gasped Ned. + +"Yes," replied San Pedro simply. "They are coming even now. They +will fight too, for all their wild nature is aroused." + +It needed but a moment's listening to prove this. From the rear came +wild yells and the beating of drums and tom-toms. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" cried Mr. Damon. "What are we going to do?" + +"Stop them if we can," answered Tom coolly. "Ned, you and I and Mr. +Damon will form a rear guard. San Pedro, take the mules and the men, +and make as good time as you can in advance. We'll take three of the +fastest mules, and hold these fellows back with the electric rifles, +and when we've done that we'll ride on and catch up to you." + +"Very good," said San Pedro, who seemed relieved to know that he did +not have to do any of the fighting. + +Three of the lighter weight mules, who carried small burdens, were +quickly relieved of them, and mounting these steeds in preference to +the ones they had been riding since they took the trail, Tom, Ned +and Mr. Damon dropped back to try and hold off the enemy. + +They had not far to ride nor long to wait. They could hear the +fierce yells of the victorious tribesmen as they came back to their +ruined village, and though there were doubtless sad hearts among +them, they rejoiced that they had defeated their enemies. They knew +they could soon rebuild the simple grass huts. + +"Small charges, just to stun them!" ordered Tom, and the electric +rifles were so adjusted. + +"Here's a good place to meet them," suggested Ned, as they came to a +narrow turn in the trail. "They can't come against us but a few at a +time, and we can pump them full of electricity from here." + +"The very thing!" cried Tom, as he dismounted, an example followed +by the others. Then, in another moment, they saw the blacks rushing +toward them. They were clad in nondescript garments, evidently of +their own make, and they carried clubs, spears, bows and arrows and +blow guns. There was not a firearm among them, as they passed on +after the party of our friends whom they had seen from the battle-hill. +They gave wild yells as they saw the young inventor's friends. + +"Let 'em have it!" called Tom in a low voice, and the electric +rifles sent out their stunning charges. Several natives in the front +rank dropped, and there was a cry of fear and wonder from the +others. Then, after a moment's hesitation they pressed on again. + +"Once more!" cried Tom. + +Again the electric rifles spoke, and half a score went down +unconscious, but not seriously hurt. In a few hours they would be as +well as ever, such was the merciful charge that Tom Swift and the +others used in the rifles. + +The third time they fired, and this was too much for the natives. +They could not battle against an unseen and silent enemy who mowed +them down like a field of grain. With wild yells they fled back +along the trail they had come. + +"I guess that does it!" cried Tom. "We'd better join the others +now." + +Mounting their mules, they galloped back to where San Pedro and his +natives were pressing forward. + +"Did you have the honor of defeating them," the head mule driver +asked. + +"I had the HONOR," answered Tom, with a grim smile. + +Then they pressed on, but there was no more danger. That night they +camped in a peaceful valley and were not disturbed, and the +following day they put a good many miles behind them. On the advice +of San Pedro, they avoided the next two villages as they realized +that they were in the war zone, and then they headed for a large +town where Tom was sure he would hear some news of the giants. + +They had to camp twice at night before reaching this town, and when +they did get to it they were warmly welcomed, for white explorers +had been there years before, and had treated the natives well. Tom +distributed many trinkets among the head men and won their good will +so that the party was given comfortable huts in which to sleep, and +a plentiful supply of provisions. + +"Can you arrange for a talk with the chief?" asked Tom of San Pedro +that night. "I want to ask him about certain things." + +"About where you can find giant flowers?" asked the mule driver with +a quick look. + +"Yes--er--and other giant things," replied Tom. "I fix," answered +San Pedro shortly, but there was a queer look on his face. + +A few hours later Tom was summoned to the hut of the chief of the +town, and thither he went with Ned, Mr. Damon and San Pedro as +interpreter, for the natives spoke a jargon of their own that Tom +could not understand. + +There were some simple ceremonies to observe, and then Tom found +himself facing the chief, with San Pedro by his side. After the +greetings, and an exchange of presents, Tom giving him a cheap +phonograph with which the chief was wildly delighted, there came the +time to talk. + +"Ask him where the giant men live?" our hero directed San Pedro, +believing that the time had now come to disclose the object of his +expedition. + +"Giant men, Senor Swift? I thought it was giant plants--orchids--you +were after," exclaimed San Pedro. + +"Well, I'll take a few giant men if I can find them. Tell him I +understand there is a tribe of giants in this country. Ask him if he +ever heard of them." + +San Pedro hesitated. He looked at Tom, and the young inventor +fancied that there was a tinge of white on the swarthy face of the +chief mule driver. But San Pedro translated the question. + +Its effect on the chief was strange. He half leaped from his seat, +and stared at Tom. Then he uttered a cry--a cry of fear--and spoke +rapidly. + +"What does he say?" asked Tom of San Pedro eagerly, when the chief +had ceased speaking. + +"He say--he say," began the mule driver and the words seemed to +stick in his throat--"he say there ARE giants--many miles to the +north. Terrible big men--very cruel--and they are fearful. Once they +came here and took some of his people away. He is afraid of them. We +are ALL afraid of them," and San Pedro looked around apprehensively, +as though he might see one of the giants stalking into the chief's +hut at any moment. + +"Ask him how many miles north?" asked Tom, hardly able to conceal +his delight. The giants had no terrors for him. + +"Two weeks journey," translated San Pedro. + +"Good!" cried the young inventor. "Then we'll keep right on. Hurrah! +I'm on the right track at last, and I'll have a giant for the circus +and we may be able to rescue Mr. Poddington!" + +"Is the senor in earnest?" asked San Pedro, looking at Tom +curiously. "Is he really going among these terrible giants?" + +"Yes, but I don't believe they'll be so terrible. They may be very +gentle. I'm sure they'll be glad to come with me and join a circus--some +of them--and earn a hundred dollars a week. Of course we're going +on to giant land!" + +"Very good," said San Pedro quietly, and then he followed Tom out of +the chief's hut. + +"It's all right, Ned old sport, we'll get to giant land after all!" +cried Tom to his chum as they reached the hut where they were +quartered. + +The next morning when Tom got up, and looked for San Pedro and his +men, to give orders about the march that day, the mule drivers were +nowhere to be seen. Nor were the mules in the places where they had +been tethered. Their packs lay in a well ordered heap, but the +animals and their drivers were gone. + +"This is queer," said Tom, rubbing his eyes to make sure that he saw +aright. "I wonder where they are? Rad, look around for them." + +The colored man did so, and came back soon, to report that San Pedro +and his men had gone in the night. Some of the native villagers told +him so by signs, Eradicate said. They had stolen away. + +"Gone!" gasped Tom. "Gone where?" + +"Bless my railroad ticket!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"We're deserted," exclaimed Ned. "They've taken the mules, and left +us." + +"I guess that's it," admitted Tom ruefully, after a minute's +thought. "San Pedro couldn't stand for the giants. He's had a +frightful flunk. Well, we're all alone, but we'll go on to giant +land anyhow! We can get more mules. A little thing like this can't +phase me. Are you with me, Ned--Mr. Damon--Eradicate?" + +"Of course we are!" they cried without a moment's hesitation. + +"Then we'll go to giant land alone!" exclaimed Tom. "Come on, now, +and we'll see if we can arrange for some pack animals." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +IN GIANT LAND + + +When it first became sure that San Pedro and the other natives had +deserted--fled in the night, for fear of the giants--there was a +reactionary feeling of despondency and gloom among Tom and his three +friends. But the boldness and energy of the young inventor, his +vigorous words, his determination to proceed at any cost to the +unknown land that lay before them--these served as a tonic, and +after a few moments, Ned, Mr. Damon, and even Eradicate looked at +things with brighter spirits. + +"Do you really mean it, Tom?" asked Ned. "Will you go on to giant +land?" + +"I surely will, if we can find it. Why, we found the city of gold +all alone, you and Mr. Damon and I, and I don't see why we can't +find this land, especially when all we have to do is to march +forward." + +"But look at the lot of stuff we have to carry!" went on Ned, waving +his hand toward the heap of packs that the mule drivers had left +behind. + +"Bless my baggage check, yes!" added Mr. Damon. "We can never do it. +Tom. We had better leave it here, and try to get back to +civilization." + +"Never!" cried Tom. "I started off after a giant, and I'm going to +get one, if I can induce one of the big men to come back with me. +I'm not going to give up when we're so close. We can get more pack +animals, I'm sure. I'm going to have a try for it. If I can't speak +the language of these natives I can make signs. Come on, Ned, we'll +pay a morning visit to the chief." + +"I'll come along," added Mr. Damon. + +"That's right," replied the young inventor. "Rad, you go stand guard +over our stuff. Some of the natives might not be able to withstand +temptation. Don't let them touch anything." + +"Dat's what I won't, Massa Tom. Good land a massy! ef I sees any ob +'em lay a finger on a pack I'll shoot off my shotgun close to der +ears, so I will. Oh, ef I only had Boomerang here, he could carry +mos' all ob dis stuff his own se'f." + +"You've got a great idea of Boomerang's strength," remarked Tom with +a laugh, as he and Ned and Mr. Damon started for the big hut where +the chief lived. + +"Do you really think San Pedro and the others left because they were +afraid of the giants we might meet?" asked Ned. + +"I think so," answered his chum. + +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "In that case maybe we'd +better be on the lookout ourselves." + +"Time enough to worry when we get there," answered the young +inventor. "From what the circus man said the giants are not +particularly cruel. Of course Mr. Preston didn't have much +information to go on, but--well, we'll have to wait--that's all. But +I'm sure San Pedro and the others were in a blue funk and vamoosed +on that account." + +"Hey, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Heah am a letter I +found on de baggage," and he ran forward with a missive, rudely +scrawled on a scrap of paper. + +"It's from San Pedro," remarked Tom after a glance at it, "and it +bears out what I said. He writes that he and his men never suspected +that we were going after the giants, or they would never have come +with us. He says they are very sorry to leave us, as we treated them +well, but are afraid to go on. He adds that they have taken enough +of our bartering goods to make up their wages, and enough food to +carry them to the next village." + +"Well," finished Tom. as he folded the paper, "I suppose we can't +kick, and, maybe after all, it will be for the best. Now to see if +the chief can let us have some mules." + +It took some time, by means of signs, to make the chief understand +what had happened, but, when Tom had presented him with a little toy +that ran by a spring, and opened up a pack of trading goods, which +he indicated would be exchanged for mules, or other beasts of +burden, the chief grinned in a friendly fashion, and issued certain +orders. + +Several of his men hurried from the big hut, and a little later, +when Tom was showing the chief how to run the toy, there was a sound +of confusion outside. + +"Bless my battle axe!" cried Mr. Damon. "I hope that's not another +war going on." + +"It's our new mules!" cried Ned, taking a look. "And some cows and a +bony horse or two, Tom. We've drawn a rich lot of pack animals!" + +Indeed there was a nondescript collection of beasts of burden. There +were one or two good mules, several sorry looking horses, and a +number of sleepy-eyed steers. But there were enough of them to carry +all the boxes and bales that contained the outfit of our friends. + +"It might be worse," commented Tom. "Now if they'll help us pack up +we'll travel on." + +More sign language was resorted to, and the chief, after another +present had been made to him, sent some of his men to help put the +packs on the animals. The steers, which Tom did not regard with much +favor, proved to be better than the mules, and by noon our friends +were all packed up again, and ready to take the trail. The chief +gave them a good dinner,--as native dinners go,--and then, after +telling them that, though he had never seen the giants it had long +been known that they inhabited the country to the north, he waved +a friendly good-bye. + +"Well, we'll see what luck we'll have by ourselves," remarked Tom, +as he mounted a bony mule, an example followed by Ned, Mr. Damon and +Eradicate, They had left behind some of their goods, and so did not +have so much to carry. Food they had in condensed form and they were +getting into the more tropical part of the country where game +abounded. + +It was not as easy as they had imagined it would be for, with only +four to drive so many animals, several of the beasts were +continually straying from the trail, and once a big steer, with part +of the aeroplane on its back, wandered into a morass and they had to +labor hard to get the animal out. + +"Well, this is fierce!" exclaimed Tom, at the end of the first day +when, tired and weary, bitten by insects, and torn by jungle briars, +they made camp that night. + +"Going to give up?" asked Ned. + +"Not much!" + +They felt better after supper, and, tethering the animals securely, +they stretched out in their tents, with mosquito canopies over them +to keep away the pestering insects. + +"I've got a new scheme," announced Tom next morning at breakfast. + +"What is it? Going on the rest of the way in the aeroplane?" asked +Ned hopefully. + +"No, though I believe if I had brought the big airship along I could +have used it. But I mean about driving the animals. I'm going to +make a long line of them, tying one to the other like the elephants +in the circus when they march around, holding each other's tails. +Then one of us will ride in front, another in the rear, and one on +each side. In that way we'll keep them going and they won't stray +off." + +"Bless my button hook!" cried Mr. Damon. "That's a good idea, Tom!" +It was carried out with much success, and thereafter they traveled +better. + +But even at the best it was not easy work, and more than once Tom's +friends urged him to turn back. But he would not, ever pressing on, +with the strange land for his goal. They had long since passed the +last of the native villages, and they had to depend on their own +efforts for food. Fortunately they did not have any lack of game, +and they fared well with what they had with them in the packs. + +Occasionally they met little bands of native hunters, and, though +usually these men fled at the sight of our friends, yet once they +managed to make signs to one, who, informed them as best he could, +that giant land was still far ahead of them. + +Twice they heard distant sounds of native battles and the weird +noise of the wooden drums and the tom-toms. Once, as they climbed up +a big hill, they looked down into a valley and saw a great conflict +in which there must have been several thousand natives on either +side. It was a fierce battle, seen even from afar, and Tom and the +others shuddered as they slipped down over the other side of the +rise, and out of sight. + +"We'd better steer clear of them," was Tom's opinion; and the others +agreed with him. + +For another week they kept on, the way becoming more and more +difficult, and the country more and more wild. They had fairly to +cut their way through the jungle at times, and the only paths were +animal trails, but they were better than nothing. For the last five +days they had not seen a human being, and the loneliness was telling +on them. + +"I'd be glad to see even a two-headed giant," remarked Tom +whimsically one night as they made their camp. + +"Yes, and I'd be glad to hear someone talk, even in the sign +language," added Ned, with a grin. + +They slept well, for they were very tired, and Tom, who shared his +tent with Ned, was awakened rather early the next morning by hearing +someone moving outside the canvas shelter. + +"Is that you, Mr. Damon?" he asked, the odd gentleman having a tent +adjoining that of the boys. + +There was no answer. + +"Rad, are you getting breakfast?" asked the young inventor. "What +time is it?" + +Still no answer. + +"What's the matter?" asked Ned, who had been awakened by Tom's +inquiries. + +Before our hero had a chance to reply the flap of his tent was +pulled back, and a head was thrust in. But such a head! It was +enormous! A head covered with a thick growth of tawny hair, and a +face almost hidden in a big tawny, bushy beard. Then an arm was +thrust in--an arm that terminated in a brawny fist that clasped a +great club. There was no mistaking the object that gazed in on the +two youths. It was a gigantic man--a man almost twice the size of +any Tom had ever seen. And then our hero knew that he had reached +the end of his quest. + +"A giant!" gasped Tom. "Ned! Ned, we're in the big men's country, +and we didn't know it!" + +"I--I guess you're right, Tom!" + +The giant started at the sounds of their voices, and then his face +breaking into a broad grin, that showed a great mouth filled with +white teeth, he called to them in an unknown tongue and in a voice +that seemed to fairly shake the frail tent. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +IN THE "PALACE" OF THE KING + + +For a few moments after their first ejaculations neither Tom nor Ned +knew what to do. The giant continued to gaze at them, with the same +good-natured grin on his face. Possibly he was amused at the small +size of the persons in the tent. Then Tom spoke. + +"He doesn't look as if he would bite, Ned." + +"No, he seems harmless enough. Let's get up, and see what happens. I +wonder if there are any more of them? They must have come out on an +early hunt, and stumbled upon our camp." + +At this moment there arose a cry from Mr. Damon's tent. + +"Bless my burglar alarm!" shouted the odd gentleman. "Tom--Ned--am I +dreaming? There's a man here as big as a mountain. Tom! Ned!" + +"It's all right, Mr. Damon!" called Tom. "We're among the giants all +right. They won't hurt you." + +"Fo' de good land ob massy!" screamed Eradicate, a second later, and +then they knew that he, too, had seen one of the big men. "Fo' de +lub ob pork chops! Am dis de Angel Gabriel? Listen to de blowin' ob +de trump! Oh, please good Massa Angel Gabriel, I ain't nebber done +nuffin! I's jest po' ol' Eradicate Sampson, an' I got a mule +Boomerang, and' dat's all I got. Please good Mr. Angel--" + +"Dry up, Rad!" yelled Tom. "It's only one of the giants. Come on out +of your tent and get breakfast. We're on the borders of giant land, +evidently, and they seem as harmless as ordinary men. Get up, +everybody." + +As Tom spoke he rose from the rubber blanket on which he slept. Ned +did the same, and the giant slowly pulled his head out from the +tent. Then the two youths went outside. A strange sight met their +gaze. + +There were about ten natives standing in the camp--veritable giants, +big men in every way. The young inventor had once seen a giant in a +circus, and, allowing for shoes with very thick soles which the big +man wore, his height was a little over seven feet. But these South +American giants seemed more than a foot higher than that, none of +those who had stumbled upon the camp being less than eight feet. + +"And I believe there must be bigger ones in their land, wherever +that is," said Tom. Nor were these giants tall and thin, as was the +one Tom had seen, but stout, and well proportioned. They were +savages, that was evident, but the curious part of it was that they +were almost white, and looked much like the pictures of the old +Norsemen. + +But, best of all, they seemed good-natured, for they were +continually laughing or smiling, and though they looked with wonder +on the pile of boxes and bales, and on the four travelers, they +seemed more bewildered and amused, than vindictive that their +country should have been invaded. Evidently the fears of the natives +who had told Tom about the giants had been unfounded. + +By this time Mr. Damon and Eradicate had come from their tents, and +were gazing with startled eyes at the giants who surrounded them. + +"Bless my walking stick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Is it possible?" + +"Yes, we've arrived!" cried Tom. "Now to see what happens. I wonder +if they'll take us to their village, and I wonder if I can get one +of these giants for Mr. Preston's circus?" + +"You certainly can't unless he wants to come," declared Ned. "You'd +have a hard tussle trying to carry one of these fellows away against +his will, Tom." + +"I sure would. I'll have to make inducements. Well, I wonder what is +best to do?" + +The giant who had looked in the tent of Ned and Tom, and who +appeared to be the leader of the party, now spoke in his big, +booming voice. He seemed to be asking Tom a question, but the young +inventor could not understand the language. Tom replied in Spanish, +giving a short account of why he and his companions had come to the +country, but the giant shook his head. Then Mr. Damon, who knew +several languages, tried all of them--but it was of no use. + +"We've got to go back to signs," declared Tom, and then, as best he +could, he indicated that he and the others had come from afar to +seek the giants. He doubted whether he was understood, and he +decided to wait until later to try and make them acquainted with the +fact that he wanted one of them to come back with him. + +The head giant nodded, showing that at least he understood +something, and then spoke to his companions. They conversed in their +loud voices for some time, and then motioned to the pack animals. + +"I guess they want us to come along," said Tom, "but let's have +breakfast first. Rad, get things going. Maybe the giants will have +some coffee and condensed milk, though they'll have to take about +ten cupsful to make them think they've had anything. Make a lot of +coffee, Rad." + +"But good land a massy, dey'll eat up eberyt'ing we got, Massa Tom," +objected the colored man. + +"Can't help it, Rad. They're our guests and we've got to be polite," +replied the youth. "It isn't every day that we have giants to +breakfast." + +The big men watched curiously while Rad built a fire, and when the +colored man was trying to break a tough stick of wood with the axe, +one of the giants picked up the fagot and snapped it in his fingers +as easily as though it were a twig, though the stick was as thick as +Tom's arm. + +"Some strength there," murmured Ned to his chum admiringly. + +"Yes, if they took a notion to go on a rampage we'd have trouble. +But they seem kind and gentle." + +Indeed the giants did, and they liked the coffee which they tasted +rather gingerly at first. After their first sip they wanted more, +made as sweet as possible, and they laughed and talked among +themselves while Eradicate boiled pot after pot. + +"Dey suah will eat us out of house an' home, Massa Tom," he wailed. + +"Never mind, Rad. They will feed us well when we get to their town." + +Then the pack animals were laden with their burdens. This was always +a task, but for the giants it was child's play. With one hand they +would lift a box or bale that used to tax the combined strength of +the four travelers, and soon the steers, horses and mules were ready +to proceed. The giants went on ahead, to show the way, the first +one, who seemed to be called "Oom," for that was the way his +companions addressed him, walked beside Tom, who rode on a mule. In +fact the giant had to walk slowly, so as not to get ahead of the +animal. Oom tried to talk to Tom, but it was hard work to pick out +the signs that meant something, and so neither gained much +information. + +Tom did gather, however, that the giants were out on an early hunt +when they had discovered our friends, and their chief town lay about +half a day's journey off in the jungle. The path along which they +proceeded, was better than the forest trails, and showed signs of +being frequently used. + +"It doesn't seem possible that we are really among giants, Tom," +spoke Ned, as they rode along. "I hardly believed there were +giants." + +"There always have been giants," declared the young inventor. "I +read about them in an encyclopedia before I started on this trip. Of +course there's lots of wild stories about giants, but there have +really been some very big men. Take the skeleton in the museum of +Trinity College, Dublin. It is eight feet and a half in height, and +the living man must have even taller. There was a giant named +O'Brien, and his skeleton is in the College of Physicians and +Surgeons of England--that one is eight feet two inches high, while +there are reliable records to show that, when living, O'Brien was +two inches taller than that. In fact, according to the books, there +have been a number of giants nine feet high." + +"Then these chaps aren't so wonderful," replied Ned. + +"Oh, we haven't seen them all yet. We may find some bigger than +these fellows, though any one of these would be a prize for a +museum. Not a one is less than eight feet, and if we could get one +say ten feet--that WOULD be a find." + +"Rather an awkward one," commented Ned. + +It did not seem possible that they were really in giant land, yet +such was the fact. Of course the country itself was no different +from any other part of the jungle, for merely because big men lived +in it did not make the trees or plants any larger. + +"I tell you how I account for it," said Tom, as they traveled on. +"These men originally belonged to a race of people noted for their +great size. Then they must have lived under favorable conditions, +had plenty of flesh and bone-forming food, and after several +generations they gradually grew larger. You know that by feeding the +right kind of food to animals you can make them bigger, while if +they get the wrong kind they are runts, or dwarfs." + +"Oh, yes; that's a well-known fact," chimed in Mr. Damon. + +"Then why not with human beings?" went on Tom. "There's nothing +wonderful in this." + +"No, but it will be wonderful if we get away with one of these +giants," spoke Ned grimly. + +Further talk was interrupted by a sudden shouting on the part of the +big men. Oom made some rapid motions to Tom, and a little later they +emerged from the woods upon a large, grassy plain, on the other side +of which could be seen a cluster of big grass and mud huts. + +"There is the city of the giants!" cried Tom, and so it proved, a +little later, when they got to it. + +Now there was nothing remarkable about this city or native town. It +was just like any other in the wilder parts of South America or +Africa. There was a central place, where, doubtless, the natives +gathered on market days, and from this the huts of the inhabitants +stretched out in irregular lines, like streets. Off to one side of +the "market square," as Tom called it, was a large hut, surrounded +by several smaller ones, and from the manner in which it was laid +out, and decorated, it was evident that this was the "palace" of the +king, or chief ruler. + +"Say, look at that fellow!" cried Ned, pointing to a giant who was +just entering the "palace" as Tom dubbed the big hut. "He LOOKS +eleven feet if he's an inch." + +"I believe you!" cried Tom. "Say, I wonder how big the king is?" + +"I don't know, but he must be a top-notcher. I wonder what will +happen to us?" + +Oom, who had Tom and his party in charge, led them to the "palace" +and it was evident that they were going to be presented to the chief +or native king. Back of our friends stretched out their pack train, +the beasts carrying the boxes and bales. Surrounding them were +nearly all the inhabitants of the giants' town, and when the +cavalcade had come to a halt in front of the "palace," Oom raised +his voice in a mighty shout. It was taken up by the populace, and +then every one of them knelt down. + +"I guess His Royal Highness is about to appear," said Tom grimly. + +"Yes, maybe we'd better kneel, too," spoke Ned. + +"Not much! We're citizens of the United States, and we don't kneel +to anybody. I'm going to stand up." + +"So am I!" said Mr. Damon. + +An instant later the grass mat that formed the front door of the +"palace" was drawn aside, and there stood confronting our hero and +his friends, the King of Giant Land. And a mighty king was he in +size, for he must have been a shade over ten feet tall, while on +either side of him was a man nearly as big as himself. + +Once more Oom boomed out a mighty shout and, kneeling as the giants +were, they took it up, repeating it three times. The king raised his +hand as though in blessing upon his people, and then, eyeing Tom and +his three friends he beckoned them to approach. + +"He wants to see us at close range," whispered the young inventor. +"Come on, Ned and Mr. Damon. Trail along, Eradicate." + +"Good--good land ob massy!" stammered the colored man. And then the +little party advanced into the "palace" of the giant king. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE RIVAL CIRCUS MAN + + +Tom Swift gazed fearlessly into the face of the giant ruler who +confronted him. The young inventor said later that he had made up +his mind that to show no fear was the only way of impressing the big +king, for surely no show of strength could have done it. With one +hand the giant could have crushed the life from our hero. But +evidently he had no such intentions, for after gazing curiously at +the four travelers who stood before him, and looking for some time +at the honest, black face of Eradicate, the king made a motion for +them to sit down. They did, upon grass mats in the big hut that +formed the palace of the ruler. + +It was not a very elaborate place, but then the king's wants were +few and easily satisfied. The place was clean, Tom was glad to note. + +The king, who was addressed by his subjects as Kosk, as nearly as +Tom could get it, asked some questions of Oom, who seemed to be the +chief of the hunters. Thereupon the man who had looked into Tom's +and Ned's tent that morning, and who had followed them into the +palace, began a recital of how he had found the little travelers. +Though Tom and his friends could not understand a word of the +language, it was comparatively easy to follow the narrative by the +gestures used. + +Then the king asked several questions, others of the hunting party +were sent for and quizzed, and finally the ruler seemed satisfied, +for he rattled off a string of talk in his deep, booming voice. + +Truly he was a magnificent specimen of manhood, being as I have +said, about ten feet tall, and built in proportion. On either side +of him, upon rude benches covered with soft jaguar skins, sat two +men, evidently his brothers, for they looked much like the king. One +was called Tola and the other Koku, for the ruler addressed them +from time to time, and seemed to be asking their advice. + +"They're making up their minds what to do with us," murmured Tom. "I +only hope they let us stay long enough to learn the language, and +then I can make an offer to take one back to the United States with +me." + +"Jove! Wouldn't it be great if you could get the king!" exclaimed +Ned. + +"Oh, that's too much, but I'd like one of his brothers. They're each +a good nine feet tall, and they must be as strong as horses." + +In contrast to some giants of history, whose only claim to notoriety +lay in their height, these giants were very powerful. Many giants +have flabby muscles, but these of South America were like athletes. +Tom realized this when there suddenly entered the audience chamber a +youth of about our hero's age, but fully seven feet tall, and very +big. He was evidently the king's son, for he wore a jaguar skin, +which seemed to be a badge of royalty. He had seemingly entered +without permission, to see the curious strangers, for the king spoke +quickly to him, and then to Tola, who with a friendly grin on his +big face lifted the lad with one hand and deposited him in a room +that opened out of the big chamber. + +"Did you see that!" cried Ned. "He lifted him as easily as you or I +would a cat, and I'll bet that fellow weighed close to four hundred +pounds, Tom." + +"I should say so! It's great!" + +The audience was now at an end, and Tom thought it was about time to +make some sort of a present to the king to get on good terms with +him. He looked out of the palace hut and saw that their pack animals +were close at hand. Nearby was one that had on its back a box +containing a phonograph and some records. + +Making signs that he wanted to bring in some of his baggage, Tom +stepped out of the hut, telling his friends to wait for him. The +king and the other giants watched the lad curiously, but did not +endeavor to stop him. + +"I'm going to give him a little music," went on the young inventor +as he adjusted the phonograph, and slipped in a record of a lively +dance air. His motions were curiously watched, and when the +phonograph started and there was a whirr of the mechanism, some of +the giants who had crowded into the king's audience chamber, showed +a disposition to run. But a word of command from their ruler stopped +them. + +Suddenly the music started and, coming forth as it did from the +phonograph horn, in the midst of that hut, in which stood the +silence-awed giants, it was like a bolt of lightning from the clear +sky. + +At first the king and all the others seemed struck dumb, and then +there arose a mighty shout, and one word was repeated over and over +again. It sounded like "Chackalok! Chackalok!" and later Tom learned +that it meant wizard, magician or something like that. + +Shout after shout rent the air, and was taken up by those outside, +for through the open door the strains of music floated. The giants +seemed immensely pleased, after their first fright, and suddenly the +king, coming down from his throne, stood with his big ear as nearly +inside the horn as he could get it. + +A great grin spread over his face and then, approaching Tom, he +leaned over, touched him once on the forehead, and uttered a word. +At this sign of royal favor the other giants at once bowed to Tom. + +"Say," cried Ned, "you've got his number all right! You're one of +the royal family now, Tom." + +"It looks like it. Well, I'm glad of it, for I want to be on +friendly terms with His Royal Highness." + +Once more the king addressed Tom, and the head hunter, motioning to +Tom and his friends, led them out of the palace, and to a large hut +not far off. This, he made himself understood by signs, was to be +their resting place, and truly it was not a bad home, for it was +well made. It had simple furniture in it, low couches covered with +skins, stools, and there were several rooms to it. + +Calling in authorative tones to his fellow hunters, Tom had them +take the packs off the beasts of burdens and soon the boxes, bales +and packages were carried into the big hut, which was destined to be +the abiding place of our friends for some time. The animals were +then led away. + +"Well, here we are, safe and sound, with all our possessions about +us," commented Tom, when all but Oom had withdrawn. "I guess we'll +make out all right in giant land. I wonder what they have to eat? Or +perhaps we'd better tackle some of our own grub." + +He looked at Oom, who laughed gleefully. Then Tom rubbed his +stomach, opened his mouth and pointed to it and said: "We'd like to +eat--we're hungry!" + +Oom boomed out something in his bass voice, grinned cheerfully, and +hurried out. A little later he came back, and following him, a +number of giant women. Each one bore a wooden platter or slab of +bark which answered for a plate. The plates were covered with broad +palm leaves, and when they had been set down on low benches, and the +coverings removed, our friends saw they had food in abundance. + +There was some boiled lamb, some roasted fowls, some cereal that +looked like boiled rice, some sweet potatoes, a number of other +things which could only be guessed at, and a big gourd filled with +something that smelled like sweet cider. + +"Say, this is a feast all right, after what we've been living on!" +cried Tom. + +Once more Oom laughed joyfully, pointing to the food and to our +friends in turn. + +"Oh, we'll eat all right!" exclaimed Tom. "Don't worry about that!" + +The good-natured giant showed them where they could find rude wooden +dishes and table implements, and then he left them alone. It was +rather awkward at first, for though the bench or table looked low in +comparison to the size of the room, yet it was very high, to allow +for the long legs of the giants getting under it. + +"If we stay here long enough we can saw off the table legs," said +the young inventor. "Now for our first meal in giant land." + +They were just helping themselves when there arose a great shouting +outside. + +"I wonder what's up now?" asked Tom, pausing with upraised fork. + +"Maybe the king is coming to see us," suggested Ned. + +"I'll look," volunteered Mr. Damon, as he went to the door. Then he +called quickly: + +"Tom! Ned! Look! It's that minister we met on the ship--Reverend +Josiah Blinderpool! How in the world did he ever get here? And how +strangely he's dressed!" + +Well might Mr. Damon say this, for the supposed clergyman was +attired in a big checked suit, a red vest, a tall hat and white +canvas shoes. In fact he was almost like some theatrical performer. + +The gaudily-dressed man was accompanied by two natives, and all rode +mules, and there were three other animals, laden with packs on +either side. + +"What's his game?" mused Ned. + +The answer came quickly and from the man himself. Riding forward +toward the king's hut or palace, while the populace of wondering +giants followed behind, the man raised his voice in a triumphant +announcement. + +"Here at last!" he cried. "In giant land! And I'm ahead of Tom Swift +for all his tricks. I've got Tom Swift beat a mile." + +"Oh, you have!" shouted our hero with a sudden resolve, as he +stepped into view. "Well, you've got another guess coming. I'm here +ahead of you, and there's standing room only." + +"Tom Swift!" gasped the rival circus man. "Tom Swift here in ahead +of me!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +HELD CAPTIVES + + +There was a great commotion among the giants. Men, women and +children ran to and fro, and a number of the largest of the big men +could be seen hurrying into the palace hut of King Kosk. If the +arrival of Tom and his friends had created a surprise it was more +than doubled when the circus man, and his small caravan, advanced +into the giants' city. His approach had been unheralded because the +giants were so taken up with Tom and his party that no one thought +to guard the paths leading into the village. And, as a matter of +fact, the giants were so isolated, they were so certain of their own +strength, and they had been unmolested so many years, that they did +not dream of danger. + +As for our hero, he stood in the hut gazing at his rival, while Hank +Delby, in turn, stared at the young inventor. Then Hank dismounted +from his mule and approached Tom's hut. + +"Bless my railroad ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "This is a curious +state of affairs! What in the world are we to do, Tom?" + +"I don't know, I'm sure. We'll have to wait until we see what HE +does. He's been following us all along. He was that fake minister on +the boat. It's a wonder we didn't get on to him. I believe he's been +trying to learn our secret ever since Mr. Preston warned us about +him. Now he's here and he'll probably try to spoil our chances for +getting a giant so that he may get one for himself. Perhaps Andy +Foger gave him a tip about our plans." + +"But can't we stop him?" asked Ned. + +"I'm going to try!" exclaimed Tom grimly. + +"Here he comes," spoke Mr. Damon quickly. "I wonder what he wants?" + +Hank Delby had started toward the big hut that sheltered our +friends, while the gathered crowd of curious giants looked on and +wondered what the arrival of two white parties so close together +could mean. + +"Well, what do you want?" asked Tom, when, his rival had come within +speaking distance. + +"There's no use beating about the bush with you, Tom Swift," was the +frank answer. "I may as well out with it. I came after a giant, and +I'm going to get one for Mr. Waydell." + +"Then you took advantage of our trail, and followed us?" asked the +young inventor. + +"Oh, you can put it that way if you like," replied Delby calmly. "I +HAVE followed you, and a hard time I've had of it. I tried to do it +quietly, but you got on to my tricks. However it doesn't matter. I'm +here now, and I'm going to beat you out if I can." + +"I remember now!" exclaimed Ned whispering in Tom's ear, "he was +disguised as one of the mule drivers and you fired him because he +had a revolver. Don't you remember, Tom?" + +"That's right!" exclaimed the young inventor as he noted the face +and form of Delby more closely. Then our hero added: "You played a +low-down trick, Mr. Delby, and it won't do you any good. I caught +you trying to sneak along in my company and I'll catch you again. +I'm here first, and I've got the best right to try and get a giant +for Mr. Preston, and if you had any idea of fair play--" + +"All's fair in this business, Tom Swift," was the quick answer. "I'm +going to do my best to beat you, and I expect you to do your best to +beat me. I can't speak any fairer than that. It's war between us, +from now on, and you might as well know it. One thing I will promise +you, though, if there's any danger of you or your party getting hurt +by these big men I'll fight on your side. But I guess they are too +gentle to fight." + +"We can look after ourselves," declared Tom. "And since it's to be +war between us look out for yourself." + +"Don't worry!" exclaimed Tom's rival with a laugh. "I've gone +through a lot to get here, and I'm not going to give up without a +struggle. I guess--" + +But he did not finish his sentence for at that moment Oom, the big +hunting giant, came up behind him, tapped him on the shoulder, and +pointed to the king's hut, motioning to indicate that Mr. Delby was +wanted there. + +"Very good," said the circus agent in what he tried to make sound +like a jolly voice, "I'm to call on his majesty; am I? Here's where +I beat you to it, Tom Swift." + +Tom did not answer, but there was a worried look on his face, as he +turned to join his friends in the big hut. And, as he looked from a +window, and saw Delby being led into the presence of Kosk, Tom could +hear the strains of the big phonograph he had presented to the king. + +"I guess his royal highness will remain friends with us," said Ned +with a smile, as he heard the music. "He can see what a lot of +presents and other things we have, and as for that Delby, he doesn't +seem to have much of anything." + +"Oh, I haven't shown half the things I have as yet," spoke Tom. "But +I don't like this, just the same. Those giants may turn from us, and +favor him on the slightest pretence. I guess we've got our work cut +out for us." + +"Then let's plan some way to beat him," suggested Mr. Damon. "Look +over your goods, Tom, and make the king a present that will bind his +friendship to us." + +"I believe I will," decided the young inventor and then he and Ned +began overhauling the boxes and bales, while a crowd of curious +giants stood without their hut, and another throng surrounded the +palace of the giant king. + +"There goes Delby out to get something from his baggage," announced +Ned, looking from the window. Tom saw his rival taking something +from one of the packs slung across the back of a mule. Soon the +circus agent hurried back into the king's hut, and a moment later +there was heard the strains of a banjo being picked by an +unpracticed hand. It was succeeded by a rattling tune played in good +style. + +"Bless my fiddlestick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "Does your phonograph +have a banjo record, Tom?" + +"No." was the somewhat hesitating answer of the young inventor. +"Delby who can play a banjo himself must have given Kosk one for a +present, and, like a child, the king is amused by the latest +novelty. So far he has scored one on us," he added, as once more +they heard the unmelodious strains of the banjo slowly picked. "The +king is evidently learning to play the instrument, and he'd rather +have that than a phonograph, which only winds up." + +"But haven't you some other things you can give the king to off-set +the banjo?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Plenty of them," replied Tom. "But if I give him--say a toy steam +engine, for I have one among our things--what is to prevent Delby +giving him some other novelty that will take his attention? In that +way we'll sea-saw back and forth, and I guess Delby has had more +experience in this business than I have. It's going to be a question +which of us gets a giant." + +"Bless my reserved seat ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I never heard +of such a thing! But, Tom, I'm sure we'll win out." + +"Get something startling to give the king," advised Ned, and Tom +began opening one of the boxes that had been transported with such +labor from the coast. + +"Delby had much better luck with his mule drivers than we did Tom," +remarked Ned as he saw the two natives standing by the pack animals +of the rival circus man. "They evidently didn't get scared off by +the giants." + +"No, but probably he didn't tell them where they were headed for. +Though, as a matter of fact, I don't believe any one has anything to +fear from these big men. All they ask is to be let alone. They're +not at all warlike, and I don't believe they'd attack the other +natives. But probably their size makes them feared, and when our +drivers heard the word 'giant' they simply wilted." + +"Guess you're right. But come on, Tom. If we're going to make the +king a present that will open his eyes, and get him on our side +instead of Delby's, we'd better be getting at it." + +"I will. This is what I'm going to give him," and Tom brought out +from a box a small toy circus, with many performing animals and +acrobats, the whole being worked by a small steam engine that burned +alcohol for fuel. A little water put in the boiler of the toy +engine, a lighting of the alcohol wick and there would be a toy that +even a youngster of the United States might be proud to own. + +"Mah land a massy!" exclaimed Eradicate as Tom got the apparatus +ready to work. "Dat shore will please him!" + +"It ought to," replied the young inventor. "Come on, now I'm ready." + +Delby had not yet come from the king's hut, and as Tom and his +friends, bearing the new toy, were about to leave the structure that +had been set aside for their use, they saw a crowd of the giant men +approaching. Each of the big men carried a club and a spear. + +"Bless my eye glasses!" gasped Mr. Damon. "Something is wrong. What +can it be?" + +He had his answer a moment later. With a firm but gentle motion the +chief giant shoved our four friends back into the hut, and then +pulled the grass mat over the opening. Then, as Tom and the others +could see by looking from a crack, he and several others took their +position in front, while other giants went to the various windows, +stationing themselves outside like sentries around a guard house. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but words failed him. + +"We're prisoners!" gasped Ned. + +"It looks like it," admitted Tom grimly. "Evidently Delby has +carried out his threat and set the king against us. We are to be +held captives here, and he can do as he pleases. Oh, why didn't I +think sooner." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +TOM'S MYSTERIOUS BOX + + +The young inventor walked slowly back to the middle of the hut--a +prison now it was--and sat down on a bench. The others followed his +example, and the elaborate toy, with which they had hoped to win the +king's favor, was laid aside. For a moment there was silence in the +structure--a silence broken only by the pacing up and down of the +giant guards outside. Then Eradicate spoke. + +"Massa Tom," began the aged negro, "can't we git away from heah?" + +"It doesn't seem so, Rad." + +"Can't we shoot some of dem giants wif de 'lectric guns, an' carry a +couple ob 'em off after we stun 'em like?" + +"No, Rad; I'm afraid violent measures won't do, though now that you +speak of the guns I think that we had better get them ready." + +"You're not going to shoot any of them, are you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon quickly. + +"No, but if they continue to turn against us as easily as they have, +there is no telling what may happen. If they attack us we will have +to defend ourselves. But I think they are too gentle for that, +unless they are unduly aroused by what misstatements Hank Delby may +make against us." + +"Misstatements?" inquired Ned. + +"Yes. I don't doubt but what he told the king a lot of stuff that +isn't true, to cause his majesty to make us captives here. Probably +he said we came to destroy the giant city with magic, or something +like that, and he represented himself as a simple traveler. He's +used to that sort of business, for he has often tried to get ahead +of Mr. Preston in securing freaks or valuable animals for the +circus. He wants to make it look bad for us, and good for himself. +So far he has succeeded. But I've got a plan." + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I'll tell you when I've got it more worked out. The thing to do now +is to get in shape to stand off the giants if they should attack us. +This hut is pretty strong, and we can risk a siege in here. Let's +arrange the boxes and bales into a sort of breastwork, and then +we'll take the electric rifles inside." + +This was soon done, and, though there was considerable noise +attending the moving about of the boxes and bales, the giant guards +did not seem at all alarmed. They did not even take the trouble to +stop the work, though they looked in the windows. In a short time +there was a sort of hollow square formed in the middle of the big +main room, and inside of this our friends could give battle. + +"And now for my plan of teaching these giants a lesson," said Tom, +when this work was finished. "Ned, help me open this box," and he +indicated one with his initials on in red letters. + +"That's the same one you saved from the fire in the ship," commented +Ned. + +"Yes, and I can't put it to just exactly the use I intended, as the +situation has changed--for the worse I may say. But this box will +answer a good purpose," and Tom and Ned proceeded to open the +mysterious case which the young inventor had transported with such +care. + +"Bless my cannon cracker!" exclaimed Mr. Damon who watched them. +"You're as careful of that as if it contained dynamite." + +"It does contain something like that," answered Tom. "It has some +blasting powder in, and I was going to use it to show the giants how +little their strength would prevail against the power which the +white man could secure from some harmless looking powder. There are +also a lot of fireworks in the box, and I intend to use them to +scare these big men. That's why I was so afraid when I heard that +there was a blaze near my box. I was worried for fear the ship would +be blown up. But I can't use the blasting powder--at least not now. +But we'll give these giants an idea of what Fourth of July looks +like. Come on, Ned, we'll take a look and see from which window it +will be safest to set off the rockets and other things, as I don't +want to set fire to any of the grass huts." + +Eradicate and Mr. Damon looked on wonderingly while Tom and his chum +got out the packages of fireworks which had been kept safe and dry. +As for the giant guards, if they saw through the windows what was +going on, they made no effort to stop Tom. + +Tom had brought along a good collection of sky rockets, aerial +bombs, Roman candles and similar things, together with the blasting +powder. The latter was put in a safe place in a side room, and then, +with some boards, the young inventor and his chum proceeded to make +a sort of firing stand. One big window opened out toward a vacant +stretch of woods into which it would not be dangerous to aim the +fireworks. + +Building the stand took some time, and they knocked off to make a +meal from the food that had been brought, and which they had been +about to eat when the circus man had appeared. The food was good, +and it made them feel better. + +"I hope they won't forget us to-morrow," observed Tom, for there was +enough of the first meal left for supper. "But if they do we have +some food of our own." + +"Oh, I don't think they mean to starve us," remarked Ned. "I think +they are just acting on suggestions from that circus man." + +"Perhaps," agreed Tom. "Well, they may sing another tune when we get +through with them." + +As night approached the giant guards about the hut were changed, and +again the women came, bearing platters of food. There was plenty of +it, showing that the king, however fickle his friendship might be, +did not intend to starve his captives. Tom and his friends had not +seen Delby come out of the royal palace, and they concluded that he +was still with his giant majesty. + +"Is it dark enough now, Tom?" asked Ned of his chum, as they sat +about the rude wooden platform which they had made to hold the +fireworks. "Shall we set them off?" + +"Pretty soon now. Wait until it gets a little darker, and the effect +will be better." The room was dimly lighted by a small portable +electric lamp, one of several Tom had brought along in his +mysterious box. The lamps were operated by miniature but powerful +dry batteries. The giant guards were still outside, but they showed +no disposition to interfere with our friends. + +"There's something going on at the palace," reported Mr. Damon, who +was watching the big hut. "There are a lot of giants around it with +torches." + +"Maybe they're going to escort Delby to a hut with the same honors +they paid us," suggested Tom. "If they do, we'll set off the +fireworks as he comes out and maybe they'll think he is afflicted +with bad magic, and they'll give us our freedom." + +"Good idea!" cried Ned. "Say, that's what they're going to do," he +added a moment later as, in the glare of a number of torches, there +could be seen issuing from the king's palace, the two big giants, +evidently his brothers. Between them was the figure of the circus +man, looking like a dwarf. He was not so far away but what the smile +of triumph on his face could be seen as he glanced in the direction +of the darkened hut where Tom and his friends were captives. + +"Now's our chance!" cried the young inventor. "Set 'em off, Ned. You +help, Mr. Damon. The more noise and fuss we make at once, the more +impressive it will be. Set off everything in sight!" + +There was a flicker of matches as they were applied to the fuses, +and then a splutter of sparks. An instant later it seemed as if the +whole heavens had been lighted up. + +Sky rockets shot screaming toward the zenith, aerial bombs went +whirling slantingly upward amid a shower of sparks, then to burst +with deafening reports, sending out string after string of colored +lights. Red and green fire gleamed, and the hot balls from Roman +candles burst forth. There was a whizz, a rush and a roar. Blinding +flashes and startling reports followed each other as Tom and his +friends set off the fireworks. It was like the Independence Day +celebration of some little country village, and to the simple giants +it must have seemed as if a volcano had suddenly gone into action. + +For several minutes the din and racket, the glare and explosions, +kept up, pouring out of the big window of the hut. And then, as the +last of the display was shot off, and darkness seemed to settle down +blacker than ever over the giant village, there arose howls of fear +and terror from the big men and their women and children. They cried +aloud in their thunderous voices, and there was fear in every cry. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +WEAK GIANTS + + +A great silence followed the setting off of the fireworks--silence +and darkness--and even the circus man ceased to shout. He wanted to +see what the effect would be. So did Tom and the others. When their +eyes had become used to the gloom again, after the glare of the +rockets and bombs, the young inventor said: + +"Look out of the windows, Ned, and see if our guards have run away." + +Ned did as requested, but for a few seconds he could make out +nothing. Then he cried out: + +"They've gone, but they're coming back again, and there are twice as +many. I guess they don't want us to escape, Tom, for fear we may do +a lot of damage." + +"Bless my hitching post!" cried Mr. Damon. "The guards doubled? We +ARE in a predicament, Tom." + +"Yes, I'm afraid so. The fireworks didn't just have the effect I +expected. I thought they'd be glad to let us go, fearing that we +could work magic, and might turn it on them. Most of the natives are +deadly afraid of magic, the evil eye, witch doctors, and stuff like +that. But evidently we've impressed the giants in the wrong way. If +we could only speak their language now, we could explain that unless +they let us go we might destroy their village, though of course we +wouldn't do anything of the kind. If we could only speak their +language but we can't." + +"Do you suppose they understood what Delby said?" asked Ned. + +"Not a bit of it! He was just desperate when he yelled out that way. +He saw that we had an advantage on him--or at least I thought we +did, but I guess we didn't," and Tom gazed out of the windows in +front of each of which stood two of the largest giants. By means of +the torches it could be seen that the circus man was being taken to +another hut, some distance away from the royal one. Then, after an +awed silence, there broke out a confused talking and shouting among +the giant population, that was drawn up in a circle a respectful +distance from the hut where the captives were confined. Doubtless +they were discussing what had taken place, hoping and yet fearing, +that there might be more fireworks. + +"Well, we might as well go to bed," declared Tom at length. "We +can't do any more to-night, and I'm dead tired. In the morning we +can talk over new plans. My box of tricks isn't exhausted yet." + +In spite of their strange captivity our friends slept well, and they +did not awaken once during the night, for they had worked hard that +day, and were almost exhausted. In the morning they looked out and +saw guards still about the hut. + +"Now for a good breakfast, and another try!" exclaimed Tom, as he +washed in a big earthen jar of water that had been provided. +Freshened by the cool liquid, they were made hungry for the meal +which was brought to them a little later. They noticed that the +women cooks looked at them with fear in their eyes, and did not +linger as they had done before. Instead they set down the trays of +food and hurried away. + +"They're getting to be afraid of us," declared Tom. "If we could +only talk their language--" + +"By Jove!" suddenly interrupted Ned. "I've just thought of +something. Jake Poddington you know--the agent for Mr. Preston who +so mysteriously disappeared." + +"Well, what about him?" asked Tom. "Did you see him?" + +"No, but he may be here--a captive like ourselves. If he is he's +been here long enough to have learned the language of the giants, +and if he could translate for us, we wouldn't have any trouble. Why +didn't we think of it before? If we could only find Mr. Poddington!" + +"Yes, IF we only could," put in Tom. "But it's a slim chance. I +declare I've forgotten about him in the last few days, so many +things have happened. But what makes you think he is here, Ned?" + +"Why he started for giant land, you'll remember, and he may have +reached here. Oh, if we could only find him, and save him and save +ourselves!" + +"It would be great!" admitted Tom. "But I'm afraid we can't do it. +There's a chance, though, that Mr. Poddington may be here, or may +have been here. If we could only get out and make some explorations +or some inquiries. It's tough to be cooped up here like chickens." + +Tom looked from the window, vainly hoping that the guards might have +been withdrawn. The giants were still before the windows and doors. + +For a week this captivity was kept up, and in that time Tom and his +friends had occasional glimpses of Hank Delby going to and from the +king's hut. His majesty himself was not seen, but there appeared to +be considerable activity in the giant village. + +From their prison-hut the captives could see the native market held +in the big open space, and giants from surrounding towns and the +open country came in to trade. There were also curious about the +white captives, and there was a constant throng around the big hut, +peering in. So also there was about the hut where the circus man had +his headquarters. Delby seemed to be free to come and go as he +choose. + +"I guess he's laying his plans to take a giant or two away with +him," remarked Tom one day. "I wonder what will become of us, when +he does go?" + +It was a momentous question, and no one could answer it. Tom was +doing some hard thinking those days. Two weeks passed and there was +no change. Our friends were still captives in giant land. They had +tried, by signs, to induce their guards to take some message to the +king, but the giants refused with shakes of their big heads. + +Yet the adventurers could not complain of bad treatment. They were +well fed, and the guards seemed good natured, laughing among +themselves, and smiling whenever they saw any of the captives. But +let Tom or some of the others, step across the threshold of the +door, and they were kindly, but firmly, shoved back. + +"It's of no use!" exclaimed Tom in despair one day, after a bold +attempt to walk out. "We've got to do something. If we can't get +word to the king we've got to plan some way to gain the friendship, +or work on the fear of the guards. We have about the same crowd +every time. If we can scare them they may keep far enough off so we +can have a chance to escape." + +"Escape! That's the thing!" cried Mr. Damon. "Why can't we put the +airship together in this hut, Tom, and fly away in it?" + +"We can, when the right time comes--if it ever does--but first we've +got to work on the guards. Let me see what I can do? Ha! I have it. +Ned, come here, I want your help. I'm going to show these giants +that, with all their strength, I can make each of them as weak as a +baby, and, at the same time prove that they can't lift even a light +weight." + +"How you going to do it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I'll soon show you. Come on, Ned." + +Tom and his chum were busy for several days among the various boxes +and bales that formed the baggage. They rigged up two pieces of +apparatus which I will describe in due time. They also opened +several boxes of trinkets and trading goods, which had been brought +along for barter. These they distributed among the guards, and, +though the giants were immensely pleased, they did not get friendly +enough to walk off and leave our friends free to do as they pleased. + +"Well, I guess we're ready for the lesson now," remarked Tom one +afternoon, when they had been held captives for about three weeks. +"If they won't respond to gentle treatment we'll try some other kind +of persuasion." + +The guards had become so friendly of late that some of them often +spent part of the day inside the hut, looking at the curious things +Tom and his party had brought with them. This was just what the +young inventor wanted, as he was now ready to give them a second +lesson in white man's magic. + +Tom and Ned had learned a few words of the giant's language, which +was quite simple, though it sounded hard, and one day, after he had +shown them simple toys, the young inventor brought forth a simple-looking +box, with two shining handles. + +"Here is a little thing," explained Tom, partly by words, and partly +by using signs, "a simple little thing which, if one of you will but +take hold of, you cannot let go of again until I move my finger. Do +you believe that a small white man like myself can make this little +thing stronger than a giant?" he asked. + +One of the biggest of the guards shook his head. + +"Try," invited Tom. "Take hold of the handles. At first you will be +able to let go easily. But, when I shall move my finger though but a +little, you will be held fast. Then, another movement, and you will +be loose again. Can I do it?" + +Once more the giant shook his head. + +"Try," urged Tom, and he put the two shining handles into the big +palms of the giant. The native grinned and some of his companions +laughed. Then to show how easy it was he let go. He took hold again. + +"Now!" cried Tom, and he moved his finger. + +Instantly the giant leaped up into the air. He uttered a howl that +seemed to shake the very roof of the hut, and his arms were as rigid +as poles. They were drawn up in knots, and though he tried with all +his great might, he could not loose his fingers from the shiny +handles. He howled in terror, and his companions murmured in +amazement. + +"It is as I told you!" exclaimed Tom. "Is it enough?" + +"Loose me! Loose me! Loose me from the terrible magic!" cried the +giant, and, with a movement of his finger, Tom switched off the +current from the electric battery. Instantly the giant's arms +dropped to his side, his hands relaxed and the handles dropped +clattering to the floor. + +With a look of fear, and a howl of anguish, the big guard fled, but +to the surprise and gratification of Tom and his friends the others +seemed only amused, and they nodded in a friendly fashion to the +captives. They all pressed forward to try the battery. + +One and all endeavored to loose their hands after Tom, by a movement +of his forefinger, had turned the switch of the battery, and one and +all of the giant guards were unable to stir, as the electricity +gripped their muscles. They were evidently awed. + +"This is working better than the fireworks did," murmured Tom. "Now +if I can only keep up the good work, and get ahead of Delby I'll be +all right. Now for the other test, Ned." + +Ned brought from a box what looked to be a small iron bar, with a +large handle on the top. The bottom was ground very smooth. + +"This is very small and light," explained Tom, partly by signs, and +partly by words. "I can easily lift it by one finger, and to a giant +it is but a feather's weight." + +He let the giants handle it, and of course they could feel scarcely +any weight at all, for it tipped the scales at only a pound. But it +was shortly to be much heavier. + +"See," went on the young inventor. "I place the weight on the floor, +and lift it easily. Can you do it?" + +The giants laughed at such a simple trick. Tom set the iron bar down +and raised it several times. So did several of the giants. + +"Now for the test!" cried Tom with a dramatic gesture. "I shall put +my magic upon you, and you shall all become as weak as babies. You +cannot lift the bar of iron!" + +As he spoke he made a signal to Ned, who stood in a distant corner +of the room. Then Tom carefully placed the weight on a sheet of +white paper on a certain spot on the floor of the hut and motioned +to the largest giant to pick up the iron bar. + +With a laugh of contempt and confidence, the big man stooped over +and grasped the handle. But he did not arise. Instead, the muscles +of his naked arm swelled out in great bunches. + +"See, you are as a little babe!" taunted Tom. "Another may try!" + +Another did, and another and another, until it came the turn of the +mightiest giant of all the guard that day. With a sudden wrench he +sought to lift the bar. He tugged and strained. He bent his back and +his legs; his shoulders heaved with the terrific effort he made--but +the bar still held to the floor of the hut as though a part of the +big beams themselves. + +"Now!" cried Tom. "I shall show you how a white man's magic makes +him stronger than the biggest giant." + +Once more he made a hidden sign to Ned, and then, stooping over, Tom +crooked his little finger in the handle of the iron bar and lifted +it as easily as if it was a feather. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +THE LONE CAPTIVE + + +The murmurs of astonishment that greeted Tom's seemingly marvelous +feat of strength was even greater than that which had marked his +trick with the electric battery. The giants stared at him as though +they feared the next moment he might suddenly turn upon them and +hurl them about like ten-pins. + +"You see, it is easy when one knows the white man's magic," spoke +Tom, making many gestures to help along. "Go tell your king that it +is not well that he keeps us prisoners here, for if he does not soon +let us go the magic may break loose and destroy his palace!" + +There was a gasp of dismay from the giants at this bold talk. + +"Better go easy, Tom," counseled Ned. + +"I'm tired of going easy," replied the young inventor. "Something +has got to happen pretty soon, or it will be all up with us. I'm +getting weary of being cooped up here. Not that the king doesn't +treat us well, but I don't want to be a prisoner. I want to get out +and see if we can't arrange to take a couple of these giants back +for Mr. Preston. That Delby sneak has things all his own way." + +And this was so, for the circus man had poisoned the king's mind +against Tom and his friends, representing (as our hero learned +later) that the first arrivals in giant land were dangerous people, +and not to be trusted. On his own part, Hank Delby intimated that he +would always be a friend to the king, would teach him many of the +white man's secrets, and would make him powerful. Thus the circus +man was making plans for his own ends, and he was scheming to get a +couple of giants for himself, who he intended to hurry away, leaving +Tom and his friends to escape as best they could. + +And Delby had brought with him some novelties in the way of toys and +machinery that seemed greatly to take the fancy of the king. Tom +realized this when he saw his rival free to come and go, and one +reason why our hero did the experiments just related was so that the +king might hear of them, and wonder. + +"Go tell the king that, strong as he is, I am stronger," went on Tom +boldly to the giant guards. "I am not afraid of him." + +"Bless my war club, Tom, aren't you a little rash to talk that way?" +asked Mr. Damon. + +"No. As I said, I want things to happen. If I can only get the king +curious enough to come here I can show him things to open his eyes. +I'll work the miniature circus, and explain that some of his +subjects can take part in a real one if they will come with us. I +want to beat this Delby at his own game." + +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "Stick to it, Tom. I'll help you, and +we'll get a giant or two yet. And maybe we can get some news of poor +Jake Poddington." + +"I intend to make inquiries about him, now that these guards are a +little more friendly," said Tom. "It may be that he is a prisoner in +this very village." + +The giant guards, now that they had gotten over their fright at +their own inability to raise the bar while Tom had lifted it with +one finger, again crowded around, asking that the trick be repeated. +Tom did it, with the same result. + +None of the giants could move the iron, yet Tom had no difficulty in +doing so. Of course my readers have already guessed how the trick +was done. It was worked by a strong magnet, hidden in the floor. At +a signal from Tom, Ned would switch on the current. The iron would +be held fast and immovable, but when Tom himself went to raise it +Ned would cut off the electricity and the bar was lifted as easily +as an ordinary piece of iron. But simple as the trick was, it +impressed the giants. Then Tom did some other stunts for them, +simple experiments in physics, that every High School lad has done +in class. + +"I want to get these guards friendly with me," he explained. "In +time the news will reach the king and he'll be so curious that he'll +come here and then--well, we'll see what will happen." + +But this did not take place as soon as Tom desired. In fact, the +giants were very slow to act. The guards did get quite friendly, and +every day they wanted the same two first tricks performed over +again. Tom did them many times, wondering when the king would come. + +Then he played a bold game, and made open inquiries about a white +man, one like the king's captives, who might have come to giant land +about a year previous. + +"Is there a lone white captive here?" asked Tom. + +The giant guard to whom he directed his question gave a start, for +Tom could now speak the language fairly well, and, after the first +indication of surprise, the guard muttered something to his +companions. There was a startled ejaculation, a curious glance at +the captives, and then--silence. The guards filed silently away, +and, a little later, could be seen going in the king's big hut. + +"By Jove, Tom!" cried Ned. "You touched 'em that time. There's +something up, as sure as you're born!" + +"I believe so myself," agreed the young inventor. "And now to throw +a real scare into these giants," he added, as he went to a distant +room of the hut where he had hidden some of the things he had taken +from his "box of tricks," as Ned dubbed it. + +"Bless my necktie!" cried Mr. Damon. "What's up now, Tom." + +"I'm going to show these giants that they'd better make friends with +us soon, or we may blow their whole town sky-high!" cried Tom. "I'm +going to use some of the blasting powder--just a pinch, so to speak--and +knock an empty hut into slivers. I think that will impress these +fellows. If I can only--" + +"Look, Tom!" suddenly cried Ned. "The king's two brothers are coming +here. Something's up. He's sent some of the family to interview us. +Get ready to receive them." + +"Couldn't be better!" cried the young inventor. "I've been waiting +for this. Now I'll give them a surprise party." + +The two big brothers of the king, for such Tom and his friends had +recently learned was the relationship the giants on either side of +the "throne" bore to the ruler, were indeed headed toward the hut of +the captives. They came alone, in their royal garments of jaguar +skins, and, standing about the palace hut, could be seen the giant +guards who had doubtless carried the news of the question Tom had +asked. + +"Come on, Ned, we've got to get busy!" exclaimed Tom. "Connect the +electric battery, and get that magnet in shape. I'm going to make a +fuse for this blasting powder bomb, and if I can get those royal +brothers to plant it for me, there'll be some high jinks soon." + +Tom busied himself in making an improvised bomb, while Ned attended +to the electrical attachments, and Mr. Damon and Eradicate acted as +general assistants. + +The two giant brothers entered the hut and greeted Tom and the +others calmly. Then they explained that the king had sent them to +investigate certain stories told by the guard. + +"I'll show you!" exclaimed Tom, and he induced them to take hold of +the handles of the battery. The current was turned on full strength, +and from the manner in which the royal brothers writhed and howled +Tom judged that the experiment was a success. + +"With all your strength you can not let go until I move my finger," +the young inventor explained, and it was so. Even the skeptical +giants agreed on that. + +"Now I shall show you that I am stronger than you!" exclaimed Tom, +and though the giants smiled incredulously so it was, for the magnet +trick worked as well as before. There were murmurs of surprise from +the two immense brothers, and they talked rapidly together. + +"I will now show you that I can call the lightning from the sky to +do my bidding," went on Tom. "Is that possible to any of you +giants?" + +"Never! Never! No man can do it!" cried Tola and Koku together. + +"Then watch me!" invited Tom. "Is there an empty hut near here?" he +asked. "One that it will do no harm to destroy?" + +Tola pointed to one visible from the window of the prison of our +friends. + +"Then take this little ball, with the string attached to it, and +place it in the hut," went on Tom. "Then flee for your lives, for +standing from here, I shall call the lightning down, and you shall +see the hut destroyed." + +"Why don't you ask them something about Jake Poddington?" asked Ned. + +"Time enough for that after I've shown them what a little powder +will do, when I attach electric wires to it and press a button," +replied Tom. "I've got that bomb fixed so it will go off by an +electric fuse. If they'll only put it in the hut for me. I'd do it +myself, only they won't let me go out." + +The brothers conferred for a moment and then, seeming to arrive at a +decision, Koku, who was slightly the larger, took the bomb, looked +curiously at it, and walked with it toward the empty hut, the +electric wire being reeled out behind him by Tom. + +The bomb was left inside the frail structure, the two brothers +hurried away, and, standing at a safe distance from the hut of the +captives, as well as the one that Tom had promised to destroy by +lightning, they waved their hands to show that they were ready. + +"Bless my admission ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You've got quite +an audience, Tom." + +And so he had, for there was a crowd in the market square, another +throng about the king's palace, while all about, hidden behind trees +or huts, was nearly the whole population of the giant town. + +"That's what I want," said the young inventor. "It will be all the +more impressive." + +"And there's the king himself!" exclaimed Ned. "He's standing in the +door of his royal hut." + +"Better yet!" cried Tom. "Are those wires all connected, Ned?" + +"Yes," answered his chum, after a quick inspection. + +"Then here she goes!" cried Tom, as he pressed the button. + +Instantly the hut, in which the bomb had been placed, arose in the +air. The roof was lifted off, the sides spread out and there was a +great flash of fire and a puff of smoke. + +Then as the smoke cleared away Ned cried out: + +"Look, Tom! Look! You've blown a hole in the hut next to the one you +destroyed!" + +"Yes, and bless my check book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "some one is +running out of it. A white man, Tom! A white man!" + +"It's Poddington! Poor Jake Poddington. We've found him at last! +This way, Mr. Poddington! This way! Mr. Preston sent us to rescue +you!" cried Tom. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +A ROYAL CONSPIRACY + + +Howls of terror, cries of anger, and a rushing to and fro on the +part of the giants, followed the latest trick of Tom Swift to +impress them with his power. But to all this the young inventor and +his friends paid no attention. Their eyes were fixed on the ragged +figure of the white man who was rushing toward their hut as fast as +his legs, manacled as they were, would let him. + +"Come on! Come on!" cried Tom. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "Some of the giants are after him, Tom!" + +Several of the big men, after their first fright, had recovered +sufficiently to pursue the captive so strangely released by the +explosion. + +"Hand me an electric rifle, Ned!" cried Tom. + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You're not going to kill +any of the giants; are you, Tom?" + +"Well, I'm not going to let them capture Jake Poddington again," was +the quick answer, "but I guess if I stun a few of them with the +electric bullets that will answer." + +Poddington (for later the white captive did prove to be the missing +circus man) ran on, and close behind him came two of the giants, +taking long strides. Tom aimed his electric rifle at the foremost +and pulled the trigger. There was no sound, but the big man crumpled +up and fell, rolling over and over. With a yell of rage his +companion pressed on, but a moment later, he, too, went down, and +then the others, who had started in pursuit of their recent captive, +turned back. + +"I thought that would fix 'em," murmured Tom gleefully. + +In another five seconds Poddington was inside the hut, gasping from +his run. He was very thin and pale, and the sudden exertion had been +too much for him. + +"Water--water!" he gasped, and Mr. Damon gave him some. He sank on +one of the skin-covered benches, and his half-exhausted breath +slowly came back to him. + +"Boys," he gasped. "I don't know who you are, but thank heaven you +came just in time. I couldn't have stood it much longer. I heard you +yell something about Preston. Is it possible he sent you to find +me?" + +"Partly that and partly to get a giant," explained Tom. "We didn't +know you were in that hut, or we'd never have blown up the one next +to it, though we suspected you might be held captive somewhere +around here, from the queer way the giants acted when we asked about +you." + +"And so you blew up that hut?" remarked the circus agent. "I thought +it was struck by lightning. But it did me a good turn. I was chained +to the wall of the hut next door, and your explosion split the beam +to which my chains were fastened. I didn't lose any time running +out, I can tell you. Oh, but it's good to be free once more and to +see someone my own size!" + +"How did you get here, and why did they keep you a prisoner?" asked +Tom. Then Poddington told his story, while Ned and Mr. Damon aided +Tom in filing off the rude iron shackles from his wrists and ankles. + +As Mr. Preston had heard, Jake Poddington had started for giant +land. But he lost his way, his escort of natives deserted him, just +as Tom's did, and he wandered on in the jungle, nearly dying. Then, +merely by accident, he came upon giant land, but he had the +misfortune to incur the anger of the big men who took him for an +enemy. They at once made him a prisoner, and had kept him so ever +since, though they did not harm him otherwise, and gave him good +food. + +"I think they were a bit afraid of me in spite of my small size," +explained the circus man. "I never thought to be rescued, for, +though I figured that Mr. Preston might hear of my plight, he could +never find this place. How did you get here?" + +Then Tom told his story, and of how they themselves were held +captives because of the treachery of Hank Delby. + +"That's just like him!" cried Poddington. "He was always mean, and +always trying to get the advantage of his rivals. But I'm glad I'm +with you. With what stuff you have here it oughtn't to be difficult +to get away from giant land." + +"But I want a giant," insisted Tom. "I told Mr. Preston I'd bring +him back one, and I'm going to do it." + +"You can't!" cried the circus man. "They won't come with you, and +it's almost impossible to make a prisoner of one. You'd better +escape. I want to get away from giant land. I've had enough." + +"We'll get away," said Tom confidently, "and we'll have a giant or +two when we go." + +"You'll have some before you go I guess!" suddenly interrupted Ned. +"There's a whole crowd of 'em headed this way, and they've got +clubs, bows and arrows and those blow guns! I guess they're going to +besiege us." + +"All right!" cried Tom. "If they want to fight we can give 'em as +good as they send. Ned, you and Mr. Damon and I will handle the +electric rifles. Eradicate, use your shotgun, and fire high. We +don't want to hurt any of the big men. We'll merely stun them with +the electric bullets, but the noise of Rad's gun will help some." + +"What can I do?" asked Mr. Poddington. + +"You're too weak to do much," replied Tom. "You just keep on the +lookout, and tell us if they try any surprises. I guess we can +handle 'em all right." + +With shouts and yells the big men came on. Evidently their +indifference toward their captives had turned to anger because of +the freeing of Poddington, and now they were determined to use harsh +measures. They advanced with wild yells, brandishing their clubs and +other weapons, while the weird sound of the tom-toms and natives +drums added to the din. + +When a short distance from the hut the giants stopped, and began +firing arrows and darts from the blow guns. + +"Look out for those!" warned Tom. "They probably are poisoned, and a +scratch may mean death. Give 'em a few shots now, Ned and Mr. Damon! +Rad, give 'em a salute, but fire high!" + +"Dat's what I will, Massa Tom!" + +The gun of the colored man barked out a noisy welcome, and, at the +same time three giants fell, stunned by the electric bullets, for +the rifles were adjusted to send out only mild charges. + +Thrice they charged, and each time they were driven back, and then, +finding that the captives were ever ready for them, they gave up the +attempt to overwhelm them, and hurried away, many going into the +king's hut. His royal majesty did not show himself during the fight. + +"Well, I guess they won't try that right away again," remarked Tom, +as he saw the stunned giants slowly arouse themselves and crawl +away. "We've taught them a lesson." + +They felt better after that, and then, when they had eaten and +drank, they began to consider ways and means of escape. But Tom +would not hear of going until he could get at least one giant for +the circus. + +"But you can't!" insisted Mr. Poddington. + +"Well, it's too soon to give up yet," declared Tom. "I'd like to +take the king's two brothers with me." + +"By Jove!" exclaimed Mr. Poddington, "I never thought of that. There +is just a bare chance. Did you know that the two brothers, who are +twins, dislike the king, for he is younger than they, and he +practically took the throne away from them. They should rule jointly +by rights. If we could enlist Tola and Koku on our side we might win +out yet." + +"Then we'll try!" exclaimed Tom. + +Jake Poddington, who had been a captive in the giant city long +enough to know something of its history, and had learned to talk the +language, explained how Kosk had usurped the throne. His brothers +were subject to him, he said, but several times they had tried in +vain to start a revolution. To punish them for their rebellious +efforts the king made them his personal servants, and this explained +why he sent them to see the tricks Tom performed. + +"If we could only get into communication with the big twins," went +on the circus man, "we could offer to take them with us to a country +where they would be bigger kings than their brother is here. It's a +royal conspiracy worth trying." + +"Then we'll try it!" cried Tom enthusiastically. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE TWIN GIANTS + + +Daring indeed was the scheme decided on by the captives, and yet its +very boldness might make it possible for them to carry it out. The +king would never suspect them of plotting to carry off his two royal +brothers, and this made it all the easier to lay their plans. In +this they were much helped by Poddington, who knew the language and +who had made a few friends among the more humble people of the +village, though none dared assist him openly. + +"The first thing to do," said the circus man, "is to get into +communication with the twins." + +That proved harder than they expected, for a week passed, and they +did not have a glimpse of Tola and Koku. Meanwhile the giant guard +was still maintained about the hut night and day. No more food was +given the prisoners, and they would have starved had not Tom +possessed a good supply of his own provisions. It was evidently the +intention of the king to starve his captives into submission. + +"Suppose you do get those big brothers to accompany you, Tom?" asked +Ned one day. "How are you going to manage to get away, and take them +with you?" + +"My aeroplane!" answered Tom quickly. "I've got it all planned out. +You and I with Mr. Damon, Mr. Poddington and Eradicate will skip +away in the aeroplane. We can put it together in here, and I've got +enough gasolene to run it a couple of hundred miles if necessary." + +"But the giants--you can't carry them in it." + +"No, and I'm not going to try. If they'll agree to go they can set +off through the woods afoot. We'll meet them in a certain place--where +there's a good land mark which we can easily distinguish from the +aeroplane. We'll take what stuff we can with us, and leave the rest +here. Oh, it can be done, Ned." + +"But when you start out with the aeroplane they'll make a rush and +overwhelm us." + +"No, for I'll do it so quickly that they won't have a chance. I'm +going to saw through the beams of one side of this hut. To the rear +there is level ground that will make a fine starting place. When +everything is ready, say some night, we'll pull the side wall down, +start the aeroplane out as it falls, and sail away. Then we'll pick +up the giant brothers out in the woods, and travel to civilization +again." + +"By Jove! I believe that will work!" cried the circus man. + +"Bless my corn plaster, I think so myself!" added Mr. Damon. + +"But first we've got to get the brothers to agree," went on Tom, +"and that is going to be hard work." + +It was not so difficult as it was tedious. Through an aged woman, +with whom he had made friends when a captive, Jake Poddington +managed to get word to the royal twins that he and the other +captives would like to see them privately. Then they had to wait for +an answer. + +In the meanwhile the giants tried several times to surprise Tom and +his friends by attacks, but the captives were on the alert, and the +electric rifles drove them back. + +One night nearly all the guards were observed to be absent. There +were not more than half a dozen scattered about the hut. + +"I wonder what that means?" asked Tom, who was puzzled. + +"I know!" exclaimed Jake Poddington after a moment's thought. "It's +their big annual feast. Even the king goes to it. They were just +getting over it when I struck here last year, and maybe that's what +set them so against me. Boys, this may be our chance!" + +"How?" asked Ned. + +"The king's brothers may find an opportunity to come and talk to us +when the feast is at its height," was the reply. + +Anxiously they waited, and in order that the royal brothers might +come in unobserved, if they did conclude to speak to the captives, +Tom and his companions hung some pieces of canvas over the windows +and doors, and had only a single light burning. + +It was at midnight that a cautious knock sounded at the side of the +hut and Tom glided to the main door. In the shadows he saw the two +royal brothers, Tola and Koku. + +"Here they are!" whispered Tom to Jake Poddington, who came forward. + +"Come!" invited the circus man in the giants' tongue, and the +brothers entered the hut. + +How Jake persuaded them to throw in their fortunes with the captives +the circus man hardly knew himself. Perhaps it was due as much as +anything to the dislike they felt toward the king, and the mean way +he had treated them. + +"Come, and you will be kings among the small men in our country," +invited Poddington. The brothers looked at each other, talked +together in low tones, and then Koku exclaimed: + +"We will come, and we will help you to escape. We have spoken, and +we will talk with you again." + +Then they glided out into the darkness, while from afar came the +sounds of revelry at the big feast. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +A SURPRISE IN THE NIGHT + + +Tom and his friends could scarcely believe their good fortune. It +seemed incredible that they should have induced two of the biggest +giants to accompany them back, and, not only that, but that they had +the promise of the strong men to aid them. + +"Now we must get busy," declared Tom, when their visitors had gone. +"We've got lots of work to do on the aeroplane, and we must try out +the engine. Then we've got to fix the side of the hut so it will +fall out when we're ready for it. And we've got to plan how to meet +the giants later in the forest." + +"Yes," agreed the circus man, "and we must take care that Hank Delby +doesn't spoil our plans." + +Then ensued busy days. In the seclusion of their hut the prisoners +could work undisturbed at the aeroplane, which had been almost +assembled. + +The engine was installed and tried, and, when the motor began its +thundering explosions, there was consternation among the giants, who +had again surrounded the hut to see that the prisoners did not +escape. + +Meanwhile Delby seemed to be unusually active. He could be observed +going in and out from his hut to that of the king, and he often +carried large bundles. + +"He's making himself solid with his royal highness," declared Tom. +"Well, if all goes right, we won't have to worry much longer about +what he does." + +"If only those twin giants don't fail us," put in Ned. + +"Oh, you can depend on them," said Mr. Poddington. "These giants are +curious creatures, but once they give their word they stick to it." + +He told much about the strange big men, confirming Tom's theory that +favorable natural conditions, for a number of generations, had +caused ordinary South American natives to develope into such large +specimens. + +Our friends were under quite a nervous tension, for they could not +be sure of what would happen from day to day. They continued to work +on the aeroplane, and then, finding that it would work in the +seclusion of the hut, they were anxious for the time to come when +they could try it in the open. + +"Do you think it will carry the five of us with safety?" asked the +circus man, as he gazed rather dubiously at the somewhat frail-appearing +affair. + +"Sure!" exclaimed Tom. "We'll get away all right if I can get enough +of a start. Now we must see to opening the side of the hut." + +This work had to be done cautiously, yet the prisoners had a certain +freedom, for the guards were afraid to approach too closely. + +The supporting and cross beams were sawed through, for Tom had +brought a number of carpenter tools along with him. Then, in the +silence of the night, the two royal brothers brought other beams +that could be put in place temporarily to hold up the roof when the +others were pulled out to allow the aeroplane to rush forth. + +In due time all was in readiness for the attempt to escape. The +royal twins had agreed to slip off at a certain signal, and await +Tom and his party in the forest at the foot of a very large hill, +that was a landmark for miles around. The giants could travel fast, +but not as fast as the aeroplane, so it was planned that they were +to have a day and night's start. They would take along food, and +would arrange to have a number of Tom's mules hidden in the woods, +so that our hero and his friends would have means of transportation +back to the coast, after they had ended their flight in the airship. + +"I wish we had brought along the larger one, so we could take the +giants with us," said Tom, "but I guess they're strong enough to +walk to the coast. We'll take what provisions we can carry, our +electric rifles, and the rest of the things we'll leave here for the +king, though he doesn't deserve them." + +"What do you think Delby will do?" asked Ned. + +"Give it up. He's got some plan though. I only hope he doesn't get a +giant. Then ours will be a greater attraction." + +Several days passed, and the last of the preparations had been made. + +"The giant twins will pretend to go off on a hunting trip to-morrow +morning," said the circus man one night, "but they won't come back. +They'll wait for us at the big hill." + +"Then we must escape the following morning," decided Tom. "Well, I'm +ready for it." + +From their hut, surrounded as it was still by the giant guards, our +friends watched the royal brothers start off, seemingly on a hunting +expedition. + +The day passed slowly. Tom went carefully over the aeroplane, to see +that it was in shape for a quick flight, and he looked to the wall +of the hut--the wall that was to be pulled from place to afford +egress for the air craft. + +They went to bed early that night--the night they hoped would be +their last in giant land. It must have been about midnight when Tom +suddenly awoke. He thought he heard a noise outside the hut and in a +moment he had jumped up. + +"Repel boarders!" cried Tom. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE AIRSHIP FLIGHT + + +For a few moments there was confusion inside the hut that was to be +the last stronghold of our friends against the approaching force of +giants. Confusion and not a little fear were mingled, for Tom's +words sent a chill to every heart. Then, after the first panic, +there came a calmer feeling--a feeling that each one would do his +duty in the face of danger and, if he had to die, he would die +fighting. + +"Everyone take a window!" yelled Tom. "Don't kill any one if you can +help it. Shoot to disable, Rad. Mr. Poddington, there's an extra +shotgun somewhere about! See if you can find it. We'll use the +electric rifles. Get those Roman candles somebody!" + +Tom was like a general giving orders, and once his friends realized +that he was managing things they felt more confidence. Ned grasped +his electric rifle, as did Mr. Damon, and they stood ready to use +them. + +"The strongest stunning charge!" ordered the young inventor. +"Something that will lay 'em out for a good while. We'll teach 'em a +lesson!" + +BANG! + +That was Eradicate's shotgun going off. It had a double load in it, +and the wonder of it was that the barrel did not burst. It sounded +like a small cannon, but it had the good effect of checking the +first rush of giants, for the electric rifles had not yet been +adjusted, and Mr. Poddington, in the light of the single electric +torch that had been left burning, could find neither the spare +shotgun nor the Roman candles. + +BANG! + +Eradicate let the other barrel go, almost in the faces of the +advancing giants, but over their heads, for he bore in mind Tom's +words not to injure. + +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom. "Come on now, Ned, we're ready for +'em!" + +But the giants had retreated, and could be seen standing in groups +about the hut, evidently planning what to do next. Then from back in +the village there shone a glare of light. + +"Bless my insurance policy! It's a fire!" cried Mr. Damon. "They're +going to burn us out!" + +"Jove! If they do!" exclaimed Ned. + +"We mustn't let 'em!" shouted Tom. "Fire, Ned!" + +Together the chums discharged their electric rifles at the enemy and +a number of them fell, stunned, and were carried away by their +companions. + +The glaring light approached and now it could be seen that it was +caused by a number of the big men carrying torches of some kind of +blazing wood. It did look as though they intended to fire the prison +hut. + +"Give 'em another taste of it!" shouted Ned, and this time the three +electric rifles shot out their streaks of blue flame, for Mr. Damon +had his in action. It was still dark in the hut, for to set aglow +more of the electric torches meant that Tom and his friends would be +exposed to view, and would be the targets for the arrows, or darts +from the deadly blow guns. + +Several more of the giants toppled over, and then began a retreat to +some distance, the first squad of fighters going to meet the men who +had come up with the torches. There was no sign of women or +children. + +"Shall we fire again?" asked Ned. + +"No," answered Tom. "Save your ammunition until they are closer, and +we'll be surer of our marks. Besides, if they let us alone that's +all we ask. We don't want to hurt 'em." + +"Bless my gizzard!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I wonder why they attacked +us, anyhow?" + +"Maybe it's about the two giant brothers who have not come back," +suggested Mr. Poddington. "They may imagine that we have them +captive, and they want to rescue them." + +"That's so," admitted Tom. "Well, if they had only postponed this +reception for a few hours we'd have been out of their way, and they +wouldn't have had this trouble," and he glanced at the aeroplane, +that stood in the big hut, ready for instant flight. + +"They're coming back!" suddenly shouted Ned, and a look from the +half-opened windows showed the giants again advancing. + +"I've got the Roman candles!" called Mr. Poddington from a corner +where he had been rummaging in that box of Tom's which contained so +many surprises. "What shall I do with 'em?" + +"Let 'em go right in their faces!" yelled Tom. "They won't do much +damage, but they'll throw a scare into the big fellows! Get ready, +Ned!" + +"They're dividing!" shouted his chum. "They're coming at us from two +sides!" + +"They're only trying to confuse us," decided Tom. "Fire at the main +body!" And with that he opened up with his electric rifle, an +example followed by Mr. Damon and Ned. + +With a whizz, and several sharp explosions, the circus man got the +Roman candles into action. The glaring fire of them lighted up the +scene better than did the flaming torches of the giants, and truly +it was a wonderful sight. There, in that lonely hut, in the midst of +a South American jungle, four intrepid white persons, and an aged +but brave negro, stood against hundreds of giants--mighty men, who, +had they come to a personal contact, any one of which would have +been more than a match for the combined strength of Tom and his +party. It was a weird picture that the young inventor looked out +upon, but his heart did not quail. + +Giant after giant went down under the fierce rain of the electric +bullets, stunned, but not otherwise injured. There was a shower of +sparks, and a hail of burning balls from the Roman candles, but +still the advance was kept up. Eradicate was banging away with his +shotgun. + +"Dis suah am hot work!" cried the colored man, as his hand came in +contact with the barrel. "Wow! It's most RED hot!" he added with a +cry of pain. + +"Use the other gun," advised Tom, never turning his head from the +window through which he was aiming. "That one may get choked, and +explode in here." + +"All right," answered Eradicate. + +"Duck!" yelled Ned with sudden energy. "They're going to fire!" A +number of the giants could be seen fitting arrows to bow strings, +while others raised to their lips the long hollow reeds, from which +the blow guns were made. It was the first time the enemy had fired +and doubtless they had held back because they hoped to capture Tom +and his friends alive. But they did not count on such a stubborn +resistance. + +Every one moved away from the windows, and not an instant too soon, +for, a moment later, a shower of arrows and darts came in, +fortunately injuring no one. + +Then, above the shouting and yelling of the giants, whose deep, bass +voices had a terrorizing effect, there came the din of the tom-toms, +making a weird combination of sound. + +"We've got 'em on the run again!" cried Ned, and so it proved, for +the larger body of giants, who had approached the hut from the front +and two sides, were running back. + +"Guess they've given it up," exclaimed Tom. "I'm glad of it, too, +for--" + +He paused and glanced behind him. A tiny spurt of flame at the base +of the rear wall of the hut had caught his eye. Instantly the flame +grew larger, and a puff of smoke followed. + +"Fire!" cried Ned. "We're on fire!" + +"Bless my water bucket!" gasped Mr. Damon. "They've set fire to the +hut!" + +It was but too true. While Tom and the others had been standing off +the giants in front, a smaller force had crept around to the rear, +and set the inflamable side of the hut ablaze. + +Desperately Tom looked around. There was no means at hand of +fighting fire. Hardly a bucket of water was in the place, and the +structure was filled with quick-burning stuff, while the fireworks +that remained, and the blasting powder, made it doubly dangerous. +Then Tom's eyes lighted on the big aeroplane, ready for instant +service. + +"That's it!" he cried suddenly. "It's our only hope, and the last +one! Come on, everybody! Down with that wall! Pull on the ropes and +it will come! We've got to go now. In another minute it will be too +late. Climb up, Mr. Poddington, Mr. Damon, Ned, and I will start the +machine." + +"The wall first! The wall!" cried Ned. + +"Sure," answered Tom. He and his friends grasped the two ropes that +had been attached to the key-beams in the structure. It had been so +arranged that when the supports were pulled out the wall would fall +outward, making a fairly smooth and level gangplank, on which the +aeroplane could rush from the hut. + +There was a creaking of timbers, a straining of ropes, and then, +with a crash, the wall fell. Instantly there was a yell of surprise +from the giants, and a brighter glare from the torches, as those +carrying them rushed up to see what had happened. The din of the +tom-toms was well-nigh deafening. Fortunately the enemy forgot to +take advantage of the opening and pour in a flight of arrows or +darts. + +"Start the motor!" cried Tom to his chum. + +There was a rattling, banging noise, like a salvo of small arms, and +the big propellers revolved with incredible swiftness. The two white +men were already in place, and now Eradicate, still carrying his +shotgun, clambered up. + +"Up with you, Ned!" yelled Tom. "I'm going to head her around and +make a flying start." + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +TOM'S GIANT--CONCLUSION + + +"I don't see anything of them, do you?" + +"No, and yet this is the place where they said they'd meet us." + +It was Tom who asked the question, and Ned who answered it. It was +the day after their sensational escape from the giants' prison, and +they were circling about in the aeroplane which had been the means +of getting them away from giant land. For they were safely away from +that strange and terrible place, and they were now seeking the two +giant brothers who had promised to meet them at a certain big hill. + +For an hour that night Tom and his friends had traveled on the wings +of the Lark and when a rising moon showed them a level spot for a +landing, they had gone down and made a camp. They had provisions +with them, and plenty of blankets and it was so warm that more +shelter was not necessary. + +The next day, leaving Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man in the +temporary camp, Tom and Ned had gone aloft to see if they could pick +up the giant twins, who were to meet them and have some mules ready +for the journey back to civilization. + +"Well, we're in no great hurry," went on Tom, after vainly scanning +the ground below. "They may not have traveled as fast as we thought +they could, and the mules may have given trouble. We'll stick around +here a day or so, and--" + +"Look!" suddenly exclaimed Ned. "Didn't you see something moving +then." + +"Where?" + +"By that big dead tree." + +Tom took a look through a pair of field glasses, while Ned steered +the aeroplane. Then the young inventor cried: + +"It's all right. It's one of the giants, but I can't tell which one. +Ned, I believe they're hiding because they're afraid of us. They've +never seen an aeroplane in action before. I'm going down." + +Quickly and gracefully the Lark was volplaned to a level place near +the dead tree. No one was in sight, and Tom, after looking about, +called: + +"Tola! Koku! Where are you? It is I, Tom Swift! We have escaped! +Where are you? Don't be afraid!" + +There was a moment's silence, and then two big forms rushed from the +dense bushes, one of them--Koku--advancing to Tom, and catching him +up in what was meant for a loving hug. + +"Oh, I say now, Koku!" cried the young inventor, with a laugh. "I've +got ribs, you know. Easy on that squeeze!" + +The two giant twins laughed too, and they were immensely pleased to +see their friends again, both talking at once and so fast that not +even the circus man could catch what they said. + +"Have you got the mules?" asked Tom, for he knew that much depended +on the animals. "Is everything all right?" + +"All right," answered Koku, the talk being conducted in the language +of the giants of which Tom was now fairly a master when it was +spoken slowly. Then the brothers explained that they had gotten +safely away, had gathered up the mules, and with a supply of food, +had hidden the beasts in a nearby valley. The giant twins were +waiting for Tom to arrive, but, though they had seen the aeroplanes +in the hut they had no idea that it could fly so nearly like a bird, +and when they saw it hovering over them they had become frightened, +and hidden, until Tom's voice had reassured them. + +"Well, get the animals," advised Tom, after he had told of the fight +of the night before, and the escape. "I'll go find the others and +we'll start from here. Then we'll hike for the United States as fast +as we can." + +Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man were soon brought to the +place where the giant brothers had made their camp, and it was +decided to remain there a few days until the aeroplane could be +taken apart for transportation, for Tom had no idea of abandoning +it. Of course it could not be packed up very well, as there were no +boxes or bales at hand. But it was made small enough so that the +parts could be slung across the backs of several mules, there being +a number of the pack animals available, some being the same ones Tom +had purchased after his native escort had deserted him. + +It was the morning they had decided to begin their march for the +coast. Everything was in readiness, they had some food, and with the +shotguns and the electric rifles which they had brought along, they +could get game. All their other things, save a few necessaries, had +been left behind. Eradicate, as he had always done, rode his mule up +beside Tom, to look after his young master. + +Suddenly Koku, who seemed to have become very fond of Tom, strode +forward and took his place on the other side of the mule ridden by +the young inventor. + +"Me stay by you," he said with a grin on his big face. "Me like you! +Me take care of you, Tom--be your servant. Him too old," and he +motioned to Eradicate. + +"Eh! What's dat yo' done said?" gasped the colored man. "Me too old? +Looky heah, giant man, I'd hab yo' know dat I's been in de Swift +fambly a good many years, an' I's jest as spry as I eber was. I kin +look after Massa Tom as good as eber. Now yo' git back where yo' +belongs, giant man, an' doan't let me heah no mo' ob dat foolishness +talk. Nobody waits on Massa Tom Swift but me. Does yo' heah dat, +giant man?" + +"Me Tom's man!" exclaimed the big fellow, and in fairly good +English. Tom laughed. He had no idea the giant had picked up any +words. + +"Go on away!" cried Eradicate. + +Koku gave the colored man one look, then, with a good natured grin +on his face, he reached over one hand, calmly lifted Eradicate from +his mule and set him on the ground. Then, with a push, he shoved the +mule galloping ahead, and took his place at the side of the young +inventor. + +"Well, what do you know about that?" gasped Ned. + +"Bless my coffee cup!" cried Mr. Damon. + +Eradicate stood still for a moment, gazing first at his master and +then at the big being who had so ruthlessly plucked him from the +mule's back, as easily as he would have lifted a child. Then +Eradicate, with a trace of tears in his eyes, stretched forth his +hands toward Tom, and turned aside. That was too much for our hero. + +With one leap he was off his animal, and the next minute he had his +arms around the faithful old colored man. + +"By Jove, Rad!" cried Tom, and his own eyes were not dry. "I'm not +going to be deserted by you in that way. You're just the same as +ever to me, giant or no giant, and don't you forget it!" and he +patted the old man on the back affectionately. + +"Praise de Lord fo' heahin' yo' say dat, Massa Tom," gasped +Eradicate. "Praise de dear Lord!" + +And then, knowing that he still held a place in his young master's +heart, the colored man was content. And from then on he rode on one +side of Tom, while the giant, Koku, strode along on the other. He +had established himself as Tom's bodyguard and even though Eradicate +insisted on remaining, Koku would not go away. + +"I guess I'll have to keep 'em both," said Tom, with a grin, "but +I'm going to change Koku's name." + +"What are you going to call him?" asked Ned. + +"Let's see, what month is this?" + +"August," said Mr. Damon. + +"Then August is his name!" exclaimed Tom. "Koku sounds too much like +a cocoanut cake. Here, August, shift that package on the white +mule," he called, "it's cutting her back," and the giant, with a +pleased grin, did as he was bid. And August he was called from then +on. + +But my story is getting too long, so I must bring it to a close. And +really there is not much to tell. The march back to the coast was +full of hardships, danger and difficulties, but they accomplished +it. The two giants seemed glad that they had left their own country +behind and they were simple and affectionate beings. Tom made up his +mind he would let the circus man have one and keep the other for his +personal attendant. + +They traveled by day, and slept at night, shooting game as they +needed it. Several times they narrowly escaped getting mixed up in +the native conflicts. Tom had one striking evidence of his giant +servant's usefulness. One day he was stalking a small beast, like a +deer, when, from a tree overhead, a jaguar sprang down at him. But +Koku--I beg his pardon--August was at hand, and, like Sampson of +old, the giant slew the beast bare-handed, choking it to death. + +In fine time our friends reached a native town and the wonder caused +by the giants was no less than the amusement of the big men at the +things they saw. They wondered more when they got to a city, and saw +more marvels of the white man's progress. + +Then Tom and his friends reached the coast, and took a steamer for +New York. The giants created a great sensation, the more when it was +known that Tom intended to keep one for himself. With this +arrangement Mr. Preston agreed, for he only wanted one as an +attraction. + +"Couldn't have done it better myself!" the circus proprietor said to +Tom when he heard the story, and this was high praise from Mr. +Preston. + +"And you rescued old Jake, too! Well, well! Couldn't have done it +better myself! I really couldn't!" + +"I wonder how our old enemy Delby made out?" asked Mr. Poddington. +They heard later that he was driven from giant land, not even being +allowed to take a boy as a specimen. He had worked on the "tip" Andy +Foger had given Mr. Waydell, but it failed. When Tom escaped, the +king confiscated all the things in the hut, and he was so taken up +with the novelties that he paid no more attention to the circus +agent, who had all his trouble, plotting and scheming against Tom +for his pains. + +"A giant in the house!" cried Mrs. Baggert, when Tom got home with +August. "I never heard of such a thing in all my life! Where will he +sleep? Not a bed is big enough!" + +"We'll give him two beds then," laughed Tom. + +And so they did, and August was immensely pleased with his new life. +He proved to be very useful, and readily adapted himself to +civilized ways. + +Tola, the other giant, made a big sensation when exhibited, and Mr. +Preston said he was well worth the fifteen thousand dollars he had +cost. + +"Well, Tom, what next?" asked Ned one day, when they had been home +several weeks and had told their story over and over again. + +"No where!" exclaimed Tom. "I'm going to take a long rest." + +But Tom Swift wasn't that kind of a young man, and he was soon +active again. If you care to learn more of his doings you may do so +in the next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His +Electric Camera; Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving +Pictures." + +And now, for a time, we will take leave of the young inventor and +his new giant servant, to meet them again a little later. + +THE END + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY *** + +***** This file should be named 4608.txt or 4608.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/4/6/0/4608/ + +Produced by This e-text was produced by Greg Weeks, Charles +Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/4608.zip b/4608.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c414dbc --- /dev/null +++ b/4608.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..75cc5c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #4608 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/4608) diff --git a/old/13tom10.txt b/old/13tom10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a3c8d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/13tom10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6053 @@ +The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg file. + +We encourage you to keep this file, exactly as it is, on your own disk, +thereby keeping an electronic path open for future readers. + +Please do not remove this. + +This header should be the first thing seen when anyone starts to +view the etext. Do not change or edit it without written permission. +The words are carefully chosen to provide users with the information +they need to understand what they may and may not do with the etext. +To encourage this, we have moved most of the information to the end, +rather than having it all here at the beginning. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These Etexts Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get etexts, and +further information, is included below. We need your donations. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a 501(c)(3) +organization with EIN [Employee Identification Number] 64-6221541 +Find out about how to make a donation at the bottom of this file. + + + +Title: Tom Swift in Captivity + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Release Date: November, 2003 [Etext #4608] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on February 17, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton +**********This file should be named 13tom10.txt or 13tom10.zip********** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, 13tom11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 13tom10a.txt + +This e-text was produced by Greg Weeks, +Charles Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + +Project Gutenberg Etexts are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep etexts in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +The "legal small print" and other information about this book +may now be found at the end of this file. Please read this +important information, as it gives you specific rights and +tells you about restrictions in how the file may be used. + + + + + + + + + + +TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + +OR + +A Daring Escape by Airship + +BY VICTOR APPLETON + +AUTHOR OF "TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR-CYCLE," "TOM SWIFT AND HIS +WIRELESS MESSAGE," "TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD," ETC. + +ILLUSTRATED + + + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I A STRANGE REQUEST + II THE CIRCUS MAN + III TOM WILL GO + IV "LOOK OUT FOR MY RIVAL!" + V ANDY FOGER LEARNS SOMETHING + VI ALARMING NEWS + VII FIRE ON BOARD + VIII A NARROW ESCAPE + IX "FORWARD MARCH!" + X A WILD HORSE STAMPEDE + XI CAUGHT IN A LIVING ROPE + XII A NATIVE BATTLE + XIII THE DESERTION + XIV IN GIANT LAND + XV IN THE "PALACE" OF THE KING + XVI THE RIVAL CIRCUS MAN + XVII HELD CAPTIVES +XVIII TOM'S MYSTERIOUS BOX + XIX WEAK GIANTS + XX THE LONE CAPTIVE + XXI A ROYAL CONSPIRACY + XXII THE TWIN GIANTS +XXIII A SURPRISE IN THE NIGHT + XXIV THE AIRSHIP FLIGHT + XXV TOM'S GIANT--CONCLUSION + + + + +CHAPTER I + +A STRANGE REQUEST + + +Tom Swift closed the book of adventures he had been reading, tossed +it on the table, and got up. Then he yawned. + +"What's the matter?" asked his chum, Ned Newton, who was deep in +another volume. + +"Oh, I thought this was going to be something exciting," replied +Tom, motioning toward the book he had discarded. "But say! the make- +believe adventures that fellow had, weren't anything compared to +those we went through in the city of gold, or while rescuing the +exiles of Siberia." + +"Well," remarked Ned, "they would have to be pretty classy +adventures to lay over those you and I have had lately. But where +are you going?" he continued, for Tom had taken his cap and started +for the door. + +"I thought I'd go out and take a little run in the aeroplane. Want +to come along? It's more fun than sitting in the house reading about +exciting things that never have happened. Come on out and--" + +"Yes, and have a tumble from the aeroplane, I suppose you were going +to say," interrupted Ned with a laugh. "Not much! I'm going to stay +here and finish this book." + +"Say," demanded Tom indignantly. "Did you ever know me to have a +tumble since I knew how to run an airship?" + +"No, I can't say that I did. I was only joking." + +"Then you carried the joke too far, as the policeman said to the man +he found lugging off money from the bank. And to make up for it +you've got to come along with me." + +"Where are you going?" + +"Oh, anywhere. Just to take a little run in the upper regions, and +clear some of the cobwebs out of my head. I declare, I guess I've +got the spring fever. I haven't done anything since we got back from +Russia last fall, and I'm getting rusty." + +"You haven't done ANYTHING!" exclaimed Ned, following his chum's +example by tossing aside the book. "Do you call working on your new +invention of a noiseless airship nothing?" + +"Well, I haven't finished that yet. I'm tired of inventing things. I +just want to go off, and have some good fun, like getting +shipwrecked on a desert island, or being lost in the mountains, or +something like that. I want action. I want to get off in the jungle, +and fight wild beasts, and escape from the savages!" + +"Say! you don't want much," commented Ned. "But I feel the same way, +Tom." + +"Then come on out and take a run, and maybe we'll get on the track +of an adventure," urged the young inventor. "We won't go far, just +twenty or thirty miles or so." + +The two youths emerged from the house and started across the big +lawn toward the aeroplane sheds, for Tom Swift owned several speedy +aircrafts, from a big combined aeroplane and dirigible balloon, to a +little monoplane not much larger than a big bird, but which was the +most rapid flier that ever breathed the fumes of gasolene. + +"Which one you going to take, Tom?" asked Ned, as his chum paused in +front of the row of hangars. + +"Oh, the little double-seated monoplane, I guess that's in good +shape, and it's easy to manage. When I'm out for fun I hate to be +tinkering with levers and warping wing tips all the while. The Lark +practically flies herself, and we can sit back and take it easy. +I'll have Eradicate fill up the gasolene tank, while I look at the +magneto. It needs a little adjusting, though it works nearly to +perfection since I put in some of that new platinum we got from the +lost mine in Siberia." + +"Yes, that was a trip that amounted to something. I wouldn't mind +going on another like that, though we ran lots of risks." + +"We sure did," agreed Tom, and then, raising his voice he called +out: "Rad, I say Rad! Where are you? I want you!" + +"Comin', massa Tom, comin'," answered an aged colored man, as he +shuffled around the corner of the shed. "What do yo'-all want ob +me?" + +"Put some gasolene in the Lark, Rad. Ned and I are going to take a +little flight. What were you doing?" + +"Jest groomin' mah mule Boomerang, Massa Tom, dat's all. Po' +Boomerang he's gittin' old jest same laik I be. He's gittin' old, +an' he needs lots ob 'tention. He has t' hab mo' oats dan usual, +Massa Tom, an' he doan't feel 'em laik he uster, dat's a fac', Massa +Tom." + +"Well, Rad, give him all he wants. Boomerang was a good mule in his +day." + +"An' he's good yet, Massa Tom, he's good yet!" said Eradicate +Sampson eagerly. "Doan't yo' all forgit dat, Massa Tom." And the +colored man proceeded to fill the gasolene tank, while Tom adjusted +the electrical mechanism of his aeroplane, Ned assisting by handing +him the tools needed. Eradicate, who said he was named that because +he "eradicated" dirt, was a colored man of all work, who had been in +the service of the Swift household for several years. He and his +mule Boomerang were fixtures. + +"There, I guess that will do," remarked Tom, after testing the +magneto, and finding that it gave a fat, hot spark. "That ought to +send us along in good shape. Got all the gas in, Rad?" + +"Every drop, Massa Tom." + +"Then catch hold and help wheel the Lark out. Ned, you steady her on +that side. How are the tires? Do they need pumping up?" + +"Hard as rocks," answered Tom's chum, as he tapped his toe against +the rubber circlets of the small bicycle wheels on which the +aeroplane rested. + +"Then they'll do, I guess. Come on now, and we'll give her a test +before we start off. I ought to get a few hundred more revolutions +per minute out of the motor with the way I've adjusted the magneto. +Rad, you and Ned hold back, while I turn the engine over." + +The youth and the colored man grasped the rear supports of the long, +tail-like part of the monoplane while Tom stepped to the front to +twist the propeller blades. The first two times there was no +explosion as he swung the delicate wooden blades about, but the +third time the engine started off with a roar, and a succession of +explosions that were deafening, until Tom switched in the muffler, +thereby cutting down the noise. Faster and faster the propeller +whirled about as the motor warmed up, until the young inventor +exclaimed: + +"That's the stuff! She's better than ever! Climb up Ned, and we'll +start off. You can turn her over, Rad; can't you?" + +"Suah, Massa Tom," was the reply, for Eradicate had been on so many +trips with Tom, and had had so much to do with airships, that to +merely start one was child's play for him. + +The two youths had scarcely taken their seats, and the colored man +was about to twist around the fan-like blades of the big propeller +in front, when from behind there came a hail. + +"Hold on there! Wait a minute, Tom Swift! Bless my admission ticket, +don't go! I've got something important to tell you! Hold on!" + +"Humph! I know who that is!" cried Tom, motioning to Eradicate to +cease trying to start the motor. + +"Mr. Damon, of course," agreed Ned. "I wonder what he wants?" + +"A ride, maybe," went on Tom. "If he does we've got to take the +Scooter instead of this one. That holds four. Well, we may as well +see what he wants." + +He jumped lightly from his seat in the monoplane and was followed by +Ned. They saw coming toward them, from the direction of the house, a +stout man, who seemed very much excited. He was walking so fast that +he fairly waddled, and he was smiling at the lads, for he was one of +their best friends. + +"Glad I caught you, Tom." he panted, for his haste had almost +deprived him of breath. "I've got something important to tell you. I +hurried over as soon as I heard about it." + +"Well, you're just in time," commented Ned with a laugh. "In another +minute we'd have been up in the clouds." + +"What is it, Mr. Damon?" asked Tom. "Have you got wind of a city of +diamonds, or has some one sent you a map telling where we can go to +pick up ten thousand dollar bills by the basket?" + +"Neither one; Tom, neither one. It's something better than either of +those, and if you don't jump at the chance I'm mistaken in you, +that's all I've got to say. Come over here." + +He turned a quick glance over his shoulder as he spoke and advanced +toward the two lads on tiptoe as though he feared some one would see +or hear him. Yet it was broad daylight, the place was the starting +ground for Tom's aeroplanes and save Eradicate there was no one +present except Mr. Damon, Ned and the young inventor himself. + +"What's up?" asked Tom in wonderment. + +"Hush!" cautioned the odd gentleman. "Bless my walking stick, Tom! +but this is going to be a great chance for you--for us,--for I'm +going along." + +"Going where, Mr. Damon?" + +"I'll tell you in a minute. Is there any one here?" + +"No one but us?" + +"You are sure that Andy Foger isn't around." + +"Sure. He's out of town, you know." + +"Yes, but you never can tell when he's going to appear on the scene. +Come over here," and taking hold of the coat of each of the youths, +Mr. Damon led them behind the big swinging door of the aeroplane +shed. + +"You haven't anything on hand; have you, Tom?" asked the odd +gentleman, after peering through the crack to make sure they were +unobserved. + +"Nothing at all, if you mean in the line of going off on an +adventure trip." + +"That's what I mean. Bless my earlaps! but I'm glad of that. I've +got just the thing for you. Tom, I want you to go to a strange land, +and bring back one of the biggest men there--a giant! Tom Swift, you +and I and Ned--if he wants to go--are going after a giant!" + +Mr. Damon gleefully clapped Tom on the back, with such vigor that +our hero coughed, and then the odd gentleman stepped back and gazed +at the two lads, a look of triumph shining in his eyes. + +For a moment there was a silence. Tom looked at Ned, and Ned gave +his chum a quick glance. Then they both looked sharply at Mr. Damon. + +"A--a giant," murmured Tom faintly. + +"That's what I said," replied Mr. Damon. "I want you to help me +capture a giant, Tom." + +Once more the two youths exchanged significant glances, and then +Tom, in a low and gentle voice said: + +"Yes, Mr. Damon, that's all right. We'll get you a giant right away. +Won't we, Ned? Now you'd better come in the house and lie down, I'll +have Mrs. Baggert make you a cup of tea, and after you have had a +sleep you'll feel better. Come on," and the young inventor gently +tried to lead his friend out from behind the shed door. + +"Look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd gentleman indignantly. "Do +you think I'm crazy? Lie down? Rest myself? Go to sleep? Say, I'm +not crazy! I'm not tired! I'm not sleepy! This is the greatest +chance you ever had, and if we get one of those giants--" + +"Yes, yes, we'll get one," put in Ned soothingly. + +"Of course," added Tom. "Come on, now, Mr. Damon. You'll feel better +after you've had a rest. Dr. Perkinby is coming over to see father +and I'll have him--" + +Mr. Damon gave one startled glance at the young inventor and his +chum, and then burst into a peal of hearty laughter. + +"Oh, my!" he exclaimed at intervals in his pyroxisms. "Oh, dear! He +thinks I'm out of my head! He can't stand that talk about giants! Oh +dear! Tom Swift, this is the greatest chance you ever had! Come on +in the house and I'll tell you all I know about giant land, and then +if you want to think I'm crazy you can, that's all I've got to say!" + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE CIRCUS MAN + + +Without a word Tom and Ned followed Mr. Damon toward the Swift +house. Truth to tell the youths did not know what to say, or they +would have been bubbling over with questions. But the talk of the +odd man, and his strange request to Tom to go off and capture a +giant had so startled the young inventor and his chum that they did +not know whether to think that Mr. Damon was joking, or whether he +had suddenly taken leave of his senses. + +And while I have a few minutes that are occupied in the journey to +the house I will introduce my new readers more formally to Tom Swift +and his friends. + +Tom though only a young man, was an inventor of note, as his father +was before him. Father and son lived in a fine house in the town of +Shopton, in New York state, and Mrs. Swift being dead, the two were +well looked after by Mrs. Baggert their housekeeper. Eradicate +Sampson, as I have said, was the man of all work about the place. +Ned Newton who had a position in a Shopton bank, was Tom's +particular chum, and Mr. Wakefeld Damon, of the neighboring town of +Waterfield, was a friend to all who knew him. He had the odd habit +of blessing anything and everything he could think of, interspersing +it in his talk. + +In the first volume of this series, called "Tom Swift and His Motor- +Cycle," I related how Tom made the acquaintance of Mr. Damon, +afterward purchasing a damaged motor-cycle from the odd gentleman. +On this machine Tom had many adventures, incidentally saving some of +his father's valuable patents from a gang of conspirators. Later Tom +got a motor boat, and had many races with his rivals on Lake +Carlopa, beating Andy Foger, the red-haired bully of the town, in +signal fashion. After his adventures on the water Tom sighed for +some in the air, and he had them in his airship the Red Cloud. + +"Tom Swift and His Submarine Boat." is a story of a search after +sunken treasure, and, returning from that quest Tom built an +electric runabout, the speedest car on the road. By means of a +wireless message, later, Tom was able to save himself and the +castaways of Earthquake Island, and, as a direct outcome of that +experience, he was able to go in search of the diamond makers, and +solve the secret of Phantom Mountain, as told in the book dealing +with that subject. + +When he went to the caves of ice Tom had bad luck, for his airship +was wrecked, and he endured many hardships in getting home with his +companions, particularly as Andy Foger sought revenge on him. + +But Tom pluckily overcame all obstacles and, later, he built a sky +racer, in which he made the quickest trip on record. After that, +with his electric rifle, he went after elephants in the interior of +Africa and was successful in rescuing some missionaries from the +terrible red pygmies. + +One of the mission workers, later, sent Tom details about a buried +city of gold in Mexico, and Tom and his chum together with Mr. Damon +located this mysterious place after much trouble, as told in the +book entitled, "Tom Swift in the City of Gold." The gold did not +prove as valuable as they expected, as it was of low grade, but they +got considerable money for it, and were then ready for more +adventures. + +The adventures soon came, as those of you who have read the book +called, "Tom Swift and His Air Glider," can testify. In that I told +how Tom went to Siberia, and after rescuing some Russian political +exiles, found a valuable deposit of platinum, which to-day is a more +valuable metal than gold. Tom needed some platinum for his +electrical machines, and it proved very useful. + +He had been back from Russia all winter and, now that Spring had +come again, our hero sighed for more activity, and fresh adventures. +And with the advent of Mr. Damon, and his mysterious talk about +giants, Tom seemed likely to be gratified. + +The two chums and the odd gentleman continued on to the house, no +one speaking, until finally, when they were seated in the library, +Mr. Damon said: + +"Well, Tom, are you ready to listen to me now, and have me explain +what I meant when I asked you to get a giant?" + +"I--I suppose so," hesitated the young inventor. "But hadn't I +better call dad? And are you sure you don't want to lie down and +collect your thoughts? A nice hot cup of tea--" + +"There, there, Tom Swift; If you tell me to lie down again, or +propose any more tea I'll use you as a punching bag, bless my boxing +gloves if I don't!" cried Mr. Damon and he laughed heartily. "I know +what you think, Tom, and you, too, Ned," he went on, still +chuckling. "You think I don't know what I'm saying, but I'll soon +prove that I do. I'm fully in my senses, I'm not crazy, I'm not +talking in my sleep, and I'm very much in earnest. Tom, this is the +chance of your life to get a giant, and pay a visit to giant land. +Will you take it?" + +"Mr. Damon, I--er--that is I--" + +Tom stammered and looked at Ned. + +"Now look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd man. "When you got +word about the buried city of gold in Mexico you didn't hesitate a +minute about making up your mind to go there; did you?" + +"No, I didn't." + +"Well, that wasn't any more of a strain on your imagination than +this giant business; was it?" + +"Well, I don't know, as--" + +"Bless my spectacles! Of course it wasn't! Now, look here. Tom, you +just make up your mind that I know what I'm talking about, and we'll +get along better. I don't blame you for being a bit puzzled at +first, but just you listen. You believe there are such things as +giants; don't you?" + +"I saw a man in the circus once, seven feet high. They called him a +giant," spoke Ned. + +"A giant! He was a baby compared to the kind of giants I mean," said +Mr. Damon quickly. "Tom, we are going after a race of giants, the +smallest one of which is probably eight feet high, and from that +they go on up to nearly ten feet, and they're not slim fellows +either, but big in proportion. Now in giant land--" + +"Here's Mrs. Baggert with a quieting cup of tea," interrupted Tom. +"I spoke to her as we came in, and asked her to have some ready. If +you'll drink this, Mr. Damon, I'm sure--" + +"Bless my sugar bowl, Tom! You make a man nervous, with your cups of +tea. I'm more quiet than you, but I'll drink it to please you. Now +listen to me." + +"All right, go ahead." + +"A friend of mine has asked me if I knew any one who could undertake +to go to giant land, and get him one or two specimens of the big men +there. I at once thought of you, and I said I believed you would go. +And I'll go with you, Tom! Think of that! I've got faith enough in +the proposition to go myself!" + +There was no mistaking Mr. Damon's manner. He was very much in +earnest, and Tom and Ned looked at each other with a different light +in their eyes. + +"Who is your friend, and where in the world is giant land?" asked +Tom. "I haven't heard of such a place since I read the accounts of +the early travelers, before this continent was discovered. Who is +your friend that wants a giant?" + +"If you'll let me, I'll have him here in a minute, Tom." + +"Of course I will. But good land! Have you got him concealed up your +sleeve, or under some of the chairs? Is he a dwarf?" and Tom looked +about the room as if he expected to see some one in hiding. + +"I left him outside in the garden, Tom," replied the odd man. "I +told him I'd come on ahead, and see how you took the proposition. +Don't tell him you thought me insane at first. I'll have him here in +a jiffy. I'll signal to him." + +Not waiting for a word from either of the boys, Mr. Damon went to +one of the low library windows, opened it, gave a shrill whistle and +waved his handkerchief vigorously. In a moment there came an +answering whistle. + +"He's coming," announced the odd gentleman. + +"But who is he?" insisted Tom. "Is he some professor who wants a +giant to examine, or is he a millionaire who wants one for a body +guard?" + +"Neither one, Tom. He's the proprietor of a number of circuses, and +a string of museums, and he wants a giant, or even two of them, for +exhibition purposes. There's lots of money in giants. He's had some +seven, and even eight feet tall, but he has lately heard of a land +where the tallest man is nearly ten feet high, and very big, and +he'll pay ten thousand dollars for a giant alive and in good +condition, as the animal men say. I believe we can get one for him, +and--Ah, here he is now," and Mr. Damon interrupted himself as a +small, dark-complexioned man, with a very black mustache, black +eyes, a watch chain as big around as his thumb, a red vest, a large +white hat, and a suit of large-sized checked clothes appeared at the +open library window. + +"Is it all right?" this strange-appearing man asked of Mr. Damon. + +"I believe so," replied the odd gentleman. "Come in, Sam." + +With one bound, though the window was some distance from the ground, +the little man leaped into the library. He landed lightly on his +feet, quickly turned two hand springs in rapid succession, and then, +without breathing in the least rapidly, as most men would have done +after that exertion, he made a low bow to Tom and Ned. + +"Boys, let me introduce you to my friend, Sam Preston, an old +acrobat and now a circus proprietor," said Mr. Damon. "Mr. Preston, +this is Tom Swift, of whom I told you, and his chum, Ned Newton." + +"And will they get the giant for me?" asked the circus man quickly. + +"I think they will," replied Mr. Damon. "I had a little difficulty +in making the matter clear to them, and that's why I sent for you. +You can explain everything." + +"Have a chair," invited Tom politely. "This is a new one on me-- +going after giants. I've done almost everything else, though." + +"So Mr. Damon said," spoke Mr. Preston gravely. He was much more +sedate and composed than one would have supposed after his +sensational entrance into the room. "I am very glad to meet you, Tom +Swift, and I hope we can do business together. Now, if you have a +few minutes to spare, I'll tell you all I know about giant land." + + + + +CHAPTER III + +TOM WILL GO + + +"Jove! That sounds interesting!" exclaimed Ned, as he settled +himself comfortably in his chair. + +"It is interesting," replied the circus man. "At least I found it so +when I first listened to one of my men tell it. But whether it is +possible to get to giant land, and, what is more bring away some of +the big men, is something I leave to you, Tom Swift. After you have +heard my story, if you decide to go, I'll stand all the expenses of +fitting out an expedition, and if you fail I won't have a word to +say. If, on the other hand, you bring me back a giant or two, I'll +pay you ten thousand dollars and all expenses. Is it a bargain?" + +"Let me hear the story first," suggested our hero, who was a +cautious lad when there was need for it. Yet he liked Mr. Preston, +even at first sight, in spite of his "loud" attire, and the rather +"circusy" manner in which he had entered the room. Then too, if he +was a friend of Mr. Damon, that was a great deal in his favor. + +"I am, as you know, in the circus business," began Mr. Preston. "I +have a number of traveling shows, and several large museums in the +big cities. I am always on the lookout for new attractions, for the +public demands them. Once get in the rut of having nothing new, and +your business will fall off. I know, for I've been in the business, +man and boy, for nearly forty years. I began as a performer, and I +can still do a double somersault over fifteen elephants in a row. I +always keep in practice for there's nothing like showing a performer +how to do a thing yourself." + +"But about the giants, which is what I'm interested in most now. Of +course I've had giants in my circuses and museums, from the +beginning. The public wanted 'em and we had to have 'em. Some of 'em +were fakes--men on stilts with long pants to cover up their legs, +and others were the real, genuine, all-wool-and-a-yard-wide article. +But none of them were very big. A shade under eight feet was the +limit with me." + +"I also have lots of wild animals, and it was when some of my men +were out after some tapirs, jaguars and leopards that I got on the +track of the giants. It was about a year ago, but up to this time I +haven't seen my way clear to send after the big men. It was this +way:" + +Mr. Preston assumed a more comfortable position in his chair, nodded +at Mr. Damon, who was listening attentively to all that was said, +and resumed. + +"As I said I had sent Jake Poddington, one of my best men, after +tapirs and some other South American animals. He didn't have very +good luck hunting along the Amazon. In the first place that region +has been pretty well cleaned out of circus animals, and another +thing it's getting too well populated. Another thing is that you +can't get the native hunters and beaters to work for you as they did +years ago." + +"So Poddington wrote to me that he was going to take his assistants, +make a big jump, and hike it for the Argentine Republic. He had a +tip that along the Salado river there might be something doing, and +I told him to go ahead." + +"He shipped me what few animals he had, and lit out for a three +thousand mile journey. I didn't hear from him for some time, and, +when I did, I got the finest collection of animals I had ever laid +eyes on. I got them about the same time I did a letter from Jake, +for the mail service ain't what you could call rushing in that part +of South America." + +"But what about the giants?" interrupted Mr. Damon. + +"I'm coming to them," replied the circus man calmly. "It was this +way: At the tail of his letter which he sent with the shipment of +animals Jake said this, and I remember it almost word for word:" + +"'If all goes well,' he wrote, 'I'll have a big surprise for you +soon. I've heard a story about a race of big natives that have their +stamping ground in this section, and I'm going to try for a few +specimens. I know how much you want a giant.'" + +"Well?" asked Tom, after a pause, for the circus man had ceased +talking and was staring out of the opened library window into the +garden that was just becoming green. + +"That was all I ever heard from poor Jake," said Mr. Preston softly. + +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. "You didn't tell me +that! What happened to him." + +"I never could find out," resumed Mr. Preston. "I never heard +another word from him, and I've never seen him from the time I +parted with him to go after the animals. The letter saying he was +going after the giants was the last line of his I've seen." + +"But didn't you try to locate him?" asked Tom. "Didn't he have some +companions--some one who could tell what became of him?" + +"Of course I tried!" exclaimed Mr. Preston. "Do you think I'd let a +man like Jake disappear without making some effort to find him? But +he was the only white man in his party, the rest were natives. That +was Jake's way. Well, when some time past and I didn't hear from +him, I got busy. I wrote to our consuls and even some South American +merchants with whom I had done business. But it didn't amount to +anything." + +"Couldn't you get any news?" asked Ned softly. + +"Oh, yes, some, but it didn't amount to much. After a long time, and +no end of trouble, I had a man locate a native named Zacatas, who +was the head beater of the black men under Jake." + +"Zacatas said that he and Jake and the others got safely to the +Salado river section, but I knew that before, for that was where the +fine shipment of animals came from. Then Jake got that tip about the +giants, and set off alone into the interior to locate them, for all +the natives were afraid to go. That was the last seen of poor Jake." + +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "What did Zacatas say +became of the poor fellow?" + +"No one knew. Whether he reached giant land and was killed there, or +whether he was struck down by some wild beast in the jungle, I never +could find out. The natives under Zacatas waited in camp for him for +some time, and then went back to the Amazon region where they +belonged. That's all the news I could get." + +"But I'm sure there are giants in the interior of South America, for +Jake always knew what he was talking about. Now I want to do two +things. I want to get on the trail of poor Jake Poddington if I can, +and I want a giant--two or three of them if it can be managed." + +"Ever since Jake disappeared I've been trying to arrange things to +make a search for him, and for the giants, but up to now something +has been in the way. I happened to mention the matter to my friend, +Mr. Damon, and he at once spoke of you, Tom Swift." + +"Now, what I want to know is this: Will you undertake to get a giant +for me, rescue Jake Poddington if he is alive in the interior of +South America, or, if he is dead, find out how it happened and give +him decent burial? Will you do this, Tom Swift?" + +There was a silence in the room following the dramatic and simple +recital of the circus man. Tom was strangely moved, as was his chum +Ned As for Mr. Damon, he was softly blessing every thing he could +think of. + +Tom looked out of the long, opened windows of the library. In fancy +he could see the forest and jungles of South America. He saw a +sluggish river flowing along between rank green banks, while, from +the overhanging trees, long festoons of moss hung down, writhing now +and then as the big water anacondas or boa constrictors looped their +sinuous folds over the low limbs. + +In fancy he saw dark-skinned natives slinking along with their +deadly blow guns, and poisoned arrows. He thought he could hear the +low growls and whines of the treacherous jaguars and see their lithe +bodies slinking along. He saw the brilliant-hued flowers, saw the +birds of gorgeous plumage, and listened in fancy to their discordant +cries. + +Then, too, he saw a lonely white man in a miserable native hut +thousands of miles from civilization, waiting, waiting, waiting for +he knew not what fate. Again he saw monstrous men stalking along-- +men who towered ten feet or more, and who were big and brawny. All +this passed through the mind of Tom in an instant. + +"Well?" asked Mr. Preston softly. + +"I'll go!" suddenly cried the young inventor. "I don't know whether +I can get you a giant or not, Mr. Preston, but if it's possible I'll +get poor Jake Poddington, dead or alive!" + +"Good!" cried the circus man, jumping up and clasping Tom's hand. "I +thought you were that kind of a lad, after I heard Mr. Damon +describe you. You've taken a big load off my heart, Tom Swift. Now +to talk of ways and means! I'll have a giant yet, and maybe I'll get +back the best man who ever shipped a consignment of wild animals, +good Jake Poddington! Now to business!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +"LOOK OUT FOR MY RIVAL!" + + +"You'll go in an airship of course; won't you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon, when they had pulled their chairs up around a library table, +and Mr. Preston had taken some papers from his pocket. + +"An airship? No, I don't believe I shall," replied the young +inventor. "In the first place, I'm a bit tired of scooting through +the air so much, though it isn't to be denied that it's the quickest +way of going. But in South America there are so many jungles that it +will be hard to find a level starting ground for a take-off, after +we land. Of course we could go up as a balloon, but this expedition +is going to be different from any we were ever on before." + +"How so?" asked Ned. + +"Well, in the first place we've got to start at one end of a trail, +and make careful inquiries all along the way. It isn't like when we +went for the city of gold. There we had to look for a certain ruined +temple, which was the landmark. When we went after the platinum in +Siberia we had to look for the place of the high winds, so I could +use my air glider. But now we're trying to locate a man who traveled +on foot through the jungles, and if we went in an airship we might +just miss the connecting link." + +"So, I think the best way will be to do just as Mr. Poddington did-- +travel on foot or by horses and mules, and go slowly, making +inquiries from time to time. Then we MAY get to giant land, we MAY +find him." + +"I don't hope for all that," said the circus man, "but if you can +only get some news of him it will be a relief. If he died peaceably +it would be better than to be a captive among some of those savage +tribes. It's been a year now since I heard the last of him. But I +agree with Tom that an airship won't be much good in the jungle. You +might take along a small one, if you could pack it, to scare the +natives with. In fact it might be a good thing to show to the +giants, if you find them." + +"That is my idea," declared Tom. "I'll take the Lark with me. That's +a mighty powerful machine for its size, and it can be taken apart in +sections. It will carry three on a pinch, and I have had five in her +with two auxiliary seats. I'll take the Lark, and she may come in +handy." + +"When can you start?" asked Mr. Preston. + +"As soon as we can fit out an expedition," answered Tom. "It +oughtn't to take long. I don't have to build an air glider this +time. It won't take long to take the Lark apart. I haven't finished +work on my noiseless airship yet, but that can wait. Yes, we'll be +ready as soon as you want us to start, Mr. Preston." + +"It can't be too soon for me. I'll deposit a certain sum in the bank +to your credit, Tom, and you can draw on it for expenses. I'll pay +any amount to get word of poor Jake, to say nothing of having a +giant for my circus. Now as to ways of getting there. Have you a +large map of South America?" + +Tom had one, and he and the others were pouring over it when Tom's +father came into the room. + +"Well, well!" he exclaimed. "What's this? What are you up to now, +Tom, my boy? Mrs. Baggert said you took down the South American map. +What's up?" + +"Lots, dad? I'm going after giants this time!" + +"Giants, Tom? Are you joking?" + +"Not a bit of it, Mr. Swift," answered Mr. Damon. "Bless my check +book! I believe if some one wanted the moon Tom Swift would try to +get it for them." + +Then Mr. Swift noticed the stranger present, and was introduced to +the circus man. + +"Is it really true, Tom," asked the aged inventor, when the story +had been related, "are you going to have a try for giant land?" + +"That's what I am, dad, and I wish you were going along." + +"No, Tom, I'm getting too old for that. But I did hope you'd stay +home for a while, and help me work on my gyroscope invention. It is +almost completed." + +"I will help you, dad, as soon as I get back with a giant or two. +Who knows? maybe I'll get one myself." + +"What would you do with one?" asked Ned with a laugh. + +"Have him help Eradicate," answered the young inventor. "Rad is +getting pretty old, and he needs an assistant." + +"But are these giants black?" asked Mr. Swift. + +"That's a point I don't know," answered the circus man frankly. +"Jake didn't say in his letter. They may be black, white or midway +between. That's what Tom has got to find out for us." + +"And I'll do it!" exclaimed our hero. "Now let's see. I suppose the +best plan would be to take a ship right to the Rio de la Plata, +landing say at Buenos Ayres or Montevideo, and then organize an +expedition to strike into the interior." + +"Why don't you do just as Mr. Poddington did?" asked Ned, "start +from the Amazon and work south?" + +"It would take too long," declared Tom. "We know that the giants are +somewhere in the northern part of Argentina, or in Paraguay or +Uruguay. Or they may be on the other side of the Uruguay river in +Brazil. It's quite a stretch of territory, and we've got to take our +time exploring it. That's why I don't want to waste time working +down from the Amazon. We'll go right to Buenos Ayres, I think." + +"That's what I'd do," advised the old circus man. "Now I can give +you some points on what to take, and how to act when you get there. +The South Americans are a queer people--very nice when treated +right, but very bad if not," and then he told some of his +experiences as a circus man in South America, for he had traveled +there. + +"I'd go again, if my business didn't keep me here," he concluded, +"for I'd ask nothing better than to hunt for giant land, or try to +rescue poor Jake. But I can't. I'm depending on you, Tom Swift." + +"What's that? Giant land?" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert, the motherly +housekeeper, as she came in to announce that dinner was ready. "You +don't mean to tell me, Tom, that you're going off again?" + +"That's what I am, Mrs. Baggert. You'd better put me up a few +sandwiches, for I don't know when I'll be back," and Tom winked at +his chum. + +"Oh, of all things I ever heard in all my born days!" cried the +housekeeper, throwing up her hands. "Will you ever settle down, Tom +Swift?" + +"Maybe he will when Miss Mary Nestor is ready to settle down too," +said Ned mischievously, referring to a girl of whom Tom was very +fond. + +"Say, I'll fix you for that!" cried our hero, as he made an +unsuccessful grab for Ned. "But, Mrs. Baggert, can you put on a +couple of extra plates? Mr. Damon and Mr. Preston will stay to +lunch." + +"Not if it's going to put you out, Tom," objected the circus man. "I +can go to the hotel, and--" + +"No, indeed!" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert graciously, for she prided +herself on her housekeeping arrangements, and she used to say that +unexpected company never "flustrated" her. Soon the little party was +seated around the table, where the talk went from grave to gay, the +subject of the giants being uppermost. + +Mr. Preston told many funny stories of his circus days, and some of +them had the spice of danger in them, for he had been all over the +world, either as a performer or as the owner of amusement +enterprises. + +"Now, the next question to be settled," said the old circus man, +when they were once more gathered in the library, "is how many are +going?" + +"I am, for one!" exclaimed Ned quickly. "I'm sure my folks will let +me. Especially as we aren't going to use an airship, but will travel +just as ordinary folks do." + +"Except in case of emergency," explained Tom. "We'll have the Lark +to use if we need her." + +"Oh, of course," agreed Ned. "How about you, Mr. Damon? Will you +go?" + +The odd man looked around the room before replying, as though he +feared someone might be listening on the sly. + +"Go on, Andy Foger isn't here," invited Tom with a laugh. + +"I'll go--if I can pursuade my wife to let me," said the odd man in +a whisper, as if, even then, the good lady might overhear him. "I'm +not going to say anything about giants. I'll tell her we are going +to rescue a poor fellow from--er--well from the natives of South +America, and I'm sure she'll consent. Of course I'll go." + +"That's three," remarked Tom. "I think I can get Eradicate to go. He +doesn't like airships, and when he knows we're not going in one it +will please him. Then he likes it hot, and I guess South America is +about as warm as they come. I am almost sure we can count on Rad." + +"That will make a nice party," commented the circus man. "Now I'll +make out a list of the supplies you'd better take, and tell you what +to do about getting native helpers, and so on," and with that he +plunged into the midst of details that took up most of the remainder +of the day. + +"Well, then I guess that settles most everything," remarked Tom, +several hours later. "I'll begin at once to take the Lark apart for +shipment, and begin ordering the things we need." + +"Oh, there's one thing I almost forgot about," said Mr. Preston +suddenly. "Queer, how I should overlook that, too. I don't suppose +you mind a fight or two; do you?" he asked, looking sharply at Tom. + +"Well, it all depends. We've had several fights on other +expeditions, though I can't say that I like 'em," replied the young +inventor. "Why do you ask?" + +"Because you may have one--or several," was the answer of the circus +man. "You'll have to beware of my rival." + +"Your rival?" + +"Yes, the bitterest foe I have is a rival circus man named Wayland +Waydell. He, or some of his men, are always camping on my trail when +I send out after a new consignment of wild animals, and I shouldn't +be a bit surprised but what he'd try to get ahead of me on the giant +game." + +"But how does he know you want giants?" asked Tom. + +"Because news of circus expeditions always leaks out somehow or +other. I'm sure Waydell will learn that you are acting for me, and +so I warn you in time. In fact, he tried to get ahead of me when I +sent Jake Poddington out over a year ago, and I always had my +suspicions that he had a hand in Jake's disappearance, but maybe I'm +wrong. So that's what I mean when I say beware of Wayland Waydell, +Tom." + +"I will!" exclaimed Tom. "He'll have to get up early to get ahead of +us." But Tom little knew the man against whom he was to pit himself +in the search for giants. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +ANDY FOGER LEARNS SOMETHING + + +Once Tom Swift made up his mind to do a thing, he did not waste time +in setting about it. He had decided to go to giant land, and that +was all there was to it. His father talked with him about the +matter, pointed out the dangers, and suggested that, as the young +inventor had had many adventures in the last few years, and had made +considerable money from the discovery of the city of gold, and the +platinum mines, the prize offered for a giant was not much of an +inducement. + +"But it isn't that so much, dad," explained Tom. "There's that poor +circus man, maybe suffering in the centre of South America. I want +to find him, if I can, or get some news that he died a natural +death, and is decently buried." + +"You never can do it, Tom." + +"Well dad, I'm going to make a big try!" he returned; and that +settled it as far as Tom was concerned. + +For several days after the visit of Mr. Preston Tom was busy making +plans for his trip to South America. He wanted to lay out a regular +schedule before proceeding. Ned Newton had had hard work to persuade +his folks to let him go, but they finally consented, and as for Mr. +Damon, his plan was simple. + +Without mentioning giants at all, he took Mr. Preston home with him, +and the circus man's tale of his assistant lost in the wilds of +South America was too much for Mrs. Damon. + +"Go? Of course you'll go!" she said to her husband. "I demand that +you go, and I want you to find that poor man and rescue him. If you +could rescue the exiles from uncivilized Siberia I'm sure you can +get a man out of a civilized country." + +Mr. Damon did not stop to point out that South America was far less +civilized, in some ways, than was Russia. He just kept still, and +made his preparations to go. Mr. Preston was a distant relative of +the odd man, and that was how he had happened to meet him and hear +the story which was destined to play such an important part in the +life of Tom Swift. + +"Do you think we'll have much trouble after we get to South America, +and strike into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one afternoon, when +he and Mr. Preston were helping Tom in the delicate work of packing +the wing planes of the Lark. + +"No, South America isn't a bad country to travel in," replied the +circus man. "The natives are fairly friendly, and with a well- +organized party, and plenty of money, which I shall see that you +have, you ought to get along swimmingly. Only one thing bothers me." + +"What's that?" asked Tom quickly. + +"That's my rival, Waydell. He's sure to make trouble if he gets on +your trail." + +"Have you heard from him?" + +"No, and that's what makes me all the more suspicious. If he'd come +out and fight me in the open it wouldn't be so bad. But this +underhand business gets on my nerves. I don't know what he's up to." + +"Maybe he isn't up to anything," suggested Ned. "He may not even +know you are going to make another try for the giants." + +"Oh, yes, he does," replied the circus man. "He didn't succeed in +beating me when poor Jake was after them, for the simple reason that +it was a snap case, and even I didn't know that Poddington was +trying for the giants until he had started. But Waydell was soon +after him, and he knows that when I once set out for a freak or a +certain kind of animal I keep on until I get it. So he has probably +already figured out that I'm making new plans to get a giant." + +"But how will he know that I am going?" inquired Tom. + +"I don't know how he will know, but he will. We circus men have +queer ways of finding out things. I shouldn't be a bit surprised but +what he was already plotting and scheming to send an expedition on +my trail, to take advantage of anything you may learn." + +"Well, we'll try and fool him, the same as we did the Mexicans when +we hunted for the city of gold," spoke Tom; and then putting aside +that worry, he and the others labored hard to get matters in shape +for a departure to South America. + +"I suppose Eradicate is going," remarked Ned, in the intervals of +packing the aeroplane. + +"Well, I've hinted it to him," replied Tom, "but I haven't asked him +outright. He said he wouldn't mind going to a hot country though. +Here he comes now. Guess I'll see how he takes it." + +The colored man shuffled up with a hammer and nails, for he had been +putting covers on packing boxes. + +"Then you are coming with us to South America; aren't you, Rad?" +asked Tom, winking at Ned. + +"Souf America? Am dat de hot country yo'-all was referencin' to?" +asked Eradicate. + +"That's it, Rad. It's nice and warm there. All you have to do is to +lie under a tree and cocoanuts will drop off into your mouth." + +"Cocoanuts in mah mouf, Massa Tom! 'Scuse me! I doan't want t' go to +no sich country as dat. Cocoanuts in mah mouf! Why I ain't got but a +few teef left, an' a cocoanut droppin' offen a tree would shorely +knock dem teef out, shorely!" + +"Oh, Rad, I didn't mean cocoanuts! I meant oranges and bananas-- +they're soft," and Tom glanced quickly at Ned, for he saw that he +had made a mistake. + +"Oh, well, den dat's diffunt, Massa Tom. I jes lubs oranges an' +bananas, an' ef yo'-all is shore dat I'll find some, why, I'll come +along." + +"Find 'em? Of course you will!" cried Ned. + +"And cocoanuts, too," added Tom. "Only, Rad, I meant to say that the +monkeys would throw the cocoanuts down to you from the trees. That +breaks the hard shells you see, and all you have to do is to take +out the meat, and drink the milk. Then the monkeys throw you down a +palm leaf fan to cool yourself off, while you're eating it. Oh, I +tell you, Rad, South America is the place to go to have a good +time." + +"I believe you, Massa Tom. When do we-all start?" + +"Pretty soon now." + +"An' what all am yo' gwine arter, Massa Tom?" + +The young inventor thought a moment. In times past he had not +hesitated to confide in his colored helper, but of late years +Eradicate had become somewhat childish, and he talked more than was +necessary. Tom wondered whether it would be safe to trust the giant +secret to him. After a moment's thought he realized that it would +not be. But, at the same time, he knew that if he did not give some +kind of an answer Eradicate would become suspicious, and that would +be worse. The colored helper had been with Tom on too many trips not +to know that his master never went without some object. + +"Well, Rad, we're after big game this time," Tom said. "I don't know +what it will be that we'll get, whether animals or plants, and--" + +"Oh, I knows, Massa Tom. Yo'-all means dem orchard plants that lib +on air--dem big orchard plants." Eradicate meant orchids, of which +many rare and beautiful kinds are found in South America. + +"Yes, Rad, I guess we will get some big orchids," agreed Tom. + +"An' I shorely will help climb de trees arter 'em. Or maybe we kin +git de monkeys to frow em down, same as dey will de cocoanuts." + +"Maybe, Rad. Well, now go ahead and nail up the rest of these boxes. +We want to get started as soon as we can," and the colored man got +busy, murmuring from time to time something about oranges and +bananas and cocoanuts. + +Everyone was occupied in getting matters in shape for the trip to +South America, even Mr. Swift laying aside his work on his pet +invention--a gyroscope--while he helped his son. And had Tom not +been quite so engrossed with his preparations he might have gone +about town more, in which case he would have learned something that +might have saved him and the others considerable trouble and no +little danger. And this fact was that Andy Foger had been in Shopton +several times lately. + +After the trouble which the red-haired bully and his father caused +Tom and his friends on their trip to the city of gold, Mr. Foger +moved away from Shopton. He had lost his fortune and had to begin +all over again. The Foger homestead was closed up, and Andy ceased +to be a fixture of the town, for which Tom and Ned were very glad. + +But of late Andy had been seen in Shopton several times, and it was +noticed that, on one or two occasions, he had a man with him--a man +who seemed to have plenty of money--a man with an air about him not +unlike that of Mr. Preston. A man with what newspaper men would have +called a circus or theatrical "air." + +This man had visited Shopton soon after Mr. Preston made the giant +proposition to Tom, and before meeting Andy Foger had made special +inquiries about Tom Swift. + +"Who are the people who have a hard feeling against this young +inventor in town?" the man had asked of several persons. + +"Tom Swift has more friends than enemies," was the general reply. + +"Oh, surely he must have some enemies," the man insisted. "He's been +running his aeroplanes and autos around town a long time, and surely +there must be some one who has a grudge against him. I suppose he +has lots of friends, but who are his enemies?" + +Then he learned about Andy Foger, and, hearing that Andy now lived +in a nearby town, the man had at once gone there. It was not long +before he reappeared--and the red-haired bully was with him. + +"And you haven't learned anything yet, Andy?" asked this mysterious +man one afternoon, when he met his tool in a quiet resort in +Shopton. + +"Nothing yet, Mr. Waydell. But give me a little more time." + +"Time! You've had more time now than you need. When I agreed to pay +you for finding out what part of South America Tom Swift would head +for to get some sort of a freak or animal for Preston's circus I +thought you'd make good quicker than this." + +"So did I. But you see Tom is suspicious of me, and so is his chum, +Ned Newton. I can't go to them, and if I'm seen sneaking around the +house or shop, after what happened last, I'll be driven off." + +"Well, it's up to you. I paid you to get the information and I +expect you to do it. Why don't you tackle that old colored man whom, +I understand, works for him? He ought to be simple enough to give +the game away." + +"Eradicate? I will! I never thought of that I'll get that +information for you, Mr. Waydell, in a few days." + +"You'd better, if you want to keep that money." + +The two plotters parted, and that very afternoon gave Andy the +chance he wanted. He met Eradicate on his way to the village where +he was going after something Tom needed. + +"Hello, Rad!" called Andy with a show of good feeling. "I haven't +seen you in some time. I suppose you're getting too old to travel +around with Tom any more?" + +"Gittin' too old!" exclaimed the colored man indignantly, for that +was his sore point. "What yo'-all mean, Andy Foger? I ain't gittin' +old, an' neider am Boomerang." + +"Oh, I thought you were, as you haven't been on any trips lately." + +"I ain't, hey? Well I's gwine on one right soon, let me tell you +dat, Andy Foger!" + +"No! Is that so? Glad to hear it. Up to the North Pole I suppose?" + +"No, sah; not much! No cold country for this coon! I's gwine where +it's nice an 'warm, an' where de cocoanuts fall in yo' mouf--I mean +where de bananas an' oranges fall in you mouf, an' de monkeys frow +down cocoanuts an' palm leaf fans to yo'!" + +"Where's that, Rad?" asked Andy, and he tried to make his voice +sound indifferent, as though the matter did not interest him. + +"South America, dat's where it am, an' I's gwine wif Massa Tom. We's +gwine t' git a monstrous big orchard plant." + +"Oh, yes; I've heard about them. Well, I hope you get all the +oranges and bananas you want. South America, eh? I suppose along the +Amazon river, where they have crocodiles forty feet long, that are +always hungry." + +"No, sah! No crockermiles fo' me! We ain't goin' neah de Amerzon +riber at all. We's gwine away down in de middle part of South +America. It's a place suffin laik Gomeonaway--or Goonaway, or +suffin' laik dat." + +"Oh, yes; I know where you mean!" and Andy could hardly conceal the +note of triumph in his voice. He had the very information he wanted +from the simple colored man. "Yes, I guess there are no crocodiles +there, and plenty of monkeys and cocoanuts. Well, I hope you have a +good time," and Andy hurried away to seek out the rival circus man. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +ALARMING NEWS + + +"Hand me that hammer, Ned." + +"There it is, right behind you, on the bench." + +"Oh, so it is. Here are those nails you were asking for." + +"Good. Now we'll make things hum," and Ned Newton's voice was +drowned in the rapid driving of nails into boards. + +"Bless my screw driver!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was +sawing planks to make covers for boxes. + +"What's the matter?" asked Tom, looking up from a bundle he was +tying up. It contained the magneto of his aeroplane and he was +putting waterproof paper about it. "Did you cut your finger?" + +"No, but I just happened to think that I nailed my watch up in that +last box." + +"Nailed up your watch!" cried Mr. Preston, who, after a trip to New +York to make arrangements for passages on a steamer, had come back +to help Tom pack up. + +"Yes, I took it out to see how long it took me to make a box cover, +and then Tom asked me to nail up that box containing the motor +parts, and I laid my watch right down on top, and put the boards +over it." + +"Well, the only thing to do is to take off the cover," remarked Tom +grimly. + +"Bless my chronometer! That will delay things," said the odd man +with a sigh. "But I suppose there is no hope for it," and he +proceeded to open the box, while Tom, Ned, the circus man and +Eradicate busied themselves over the hundred and one things to be +done before they would be ready for the trip to the interior of +South America. + +"Look out, Ned!" called Tom. "You're making those top boards too +long. They'll stick out over the edge, and be ripped off if the box +catches on anything." + +"Yes, you can't be too careful," cautioned Mr. Preston. "Each box or +package must be the right weight, or the porters and mule drivers +won't carry them into the interior. You may have to cross rough +trails, and even ford rivers. And as for bridges! well, the less +said about them the better. You aren't going to have any picnic, and +if you want to back out, Tom Swift, now is the time to say so." + +"What! Back out?" cried our hero. "Never! I said I'd go and I'm +going. Ned, pass that brace and bit over, will you. I've got to bore +a hole for these screws." + +And so the work went on in the big aeroplane shed, which they had +made their packing headquarters. + +The Lark, that small, but strong and speedy aeroplane, had been +safely packed, and most of it had been sent on ahead to New York, +where the travellers were to take the steamer. There remained to be +transported their clothing, weapons and ammunition, and several +bundles and cases of trinkets which would be of more value in +bartering with the natives than money. Tom and Mr. Preston had +selected the things with great care, and at the last moment the +young inventor had packed a box of his own, and said nothing about +it. Included in it were some of his own and his father's inventions, +and had one been given a glance into that same box he would have +wondered at the queer things. + +"What in the world are you taking with you, anyhow?" asked Ned, of +his chum, noticing the mysterious box. + +"'You'll see, if we ever get to giant land," replied Tom with a +smile. + +"How long before we can start?" asked Mr. Damon, late that day, when +most of the hard work had been finished. He was as anxious and as +eager as either of the youths to make a start. + +"We ought to be ready at least a week from to-day," replied Tom, +"and perhaps sooner." + +"Sooner, if you can make it," suggested Mr. Preston. "The steamer +sails a week from to-day, and if you miss that one you'll have to +wait two weeks more." + +"Then a week from to-day we'll sail," decided Tom, with emphasis. +"We'll work nights getting things in shape." + +Really, though, not much more remained to be done, and the next day +Mr. Preston again went to New York, accompanying a shipment of boxes +and cases that Tom sent on ahead. + +The two chums were busy in the aeroplane hangar a few days after +this, nailing up the last of some light cases containing medicines, +personal effects and comforts that would accompany them on their +trip. + +"Well, I'm glad of one thing," remarked Tom thoughtfully, as he +drove home the last nail in a box, "and that is that we won't be +bothered with that Andy Foger on this trip. I haven't seen hide nor +hair of him in some time. I guess he and his father are down and +out." + +"I guess so. I haven't seen him either." + +"Massa Andy were in town a few days ago," ventured Eradicate. + +"He was?" cried Tom. "Did you see him? What was he doing, Rad?" + +"Nuffin, same as usual. He done say I were too old to go on any more +hexpiditions wif yo' an' I proved dat I wasn't." + +"Proved that you weren't, Rad? How?" And Tom looked anxiously at his +colored helper. + +"Why, I done say t' him dat I was gwine wif yo'-all dis time, t' dat +Comeaway country after a big orchard plant. Dat's how I done prove +it to dat Andy Foger." + +"Rad, you didn't tell him we were going to South America?" asked Tom +reproachfully. + +"Suah I done so, Massa Tom. Dat were de only way t' prove t' him dat +I wa'an't gittin' too old." + +"Oh, Rad! I'm afraid--" and Tom hesitated. + +"Oh, I don't believe it amounted to anything," interposed Ned. "Andy +didn't have any one with him, did he, Rad?" + +"No, Massa Ned. He were all alone by hisse'f." + +"Then I guess it's all right, Tom. Andy was only rigging Eradicate, +and he didn't pay any attention to what he said." + +"Well, I hope so," and the young inventor wore a thoughtful air as +he resumed the finish of the packing. + +The colored man, blissfully unconscious that he had been the +innocent cause of a grave danger that overhung Tom and his friends, +whistled gaily as he gathered the boxes, bales and packages into a +pile, ready for the expressman, who was to call in the morning. + +Tom, together with Ned, Mr. Damon and Eradicate, were to leave the +following afternoon, and stay in New York until the sailing of the +steamer. They preferred to be a day or so ahead of time than half an +hour late, and were taking no chances. + +"Bless my timetable!" exclaimed Mr. Damon that night, as they sat in +the library of the Swift home, checking over the lists to make sure +that nothing had been forgotten, "bless my timetable, but it doesn't +seem possible that we are going to start at last." + +"Yes, we'll soon be on the way to giant land," spoke Tom in a low +voice. Somehow the young inventor did not seem to be in his usually +bright spirits. + +"You don't seem very enthusiastic," remarked Ned. "What's the +matter, Tom?" + +"Oh, nothing much. Though I would feel better if I knew that Andy +Foger didn't have any inkling of what our plans were," he added, for +Eradicate was not present. + +"Oh, nonsense!" exclaimed his chum. "Mr. Preston will be here in the +morning, and he'll know whether his rival has any idea of camping on +our trail. Cheer up!" + +"Yes, I suppose I am foolish to worry," admitted Tom. "but, somehow +I can't help it. I wish Mr. Preston was here now to tell us that +Wayland Waydell had gone off to the centre of Africa for a dwarf. +Then I'd know we had nothing to fear. But I guess--" + +Tom did not finish his sentence for, at that moment, there came a +peal at the door bell. Instinctively every one started, and Mr. +Damon exclaimed: + +"Bless my burglar alarm! What's that?" + +"Someone at the door, Tom," replied Mr. Swift calmly. "That's +nothing unusual. It's early yet." + +But, in spite of his reassuring words, there was a feeling of vague +alarm. + +"I'll see who it is," volunteered Ned. "If it's Andy Foger--" + +Mrs. Baggert entered the room at that moment. She had hurried to the +door, and, as she entered she announced: + +"Mr. Preston!" + +"Yes, it is I!" added the circus man following her quickly into the +room. "I came on to-night instead of waiting for the morning, Tom. I +have bad news for you!" + +"Bad news!" gasped the young inventor. "Has Waydell got hold of your +plans." + +"I'll wager it has something to do with Andy Foger!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Neither one," spoke the circus man. "But I have just had a cable +dispatch from one of my animal agents in Brazil, saying that war has +broken out among the tribes in the central part of South America. A +big native war is being waged all around giant land, as near as we +can figure it out." + +"War among the native tribes!" exclaimed Mr. Swift. + +"Yes, and one of the worst in years. Of course, Tom, after such +alarming news as this I won't hold you to your promise to go. It's +all off. I'm sorry, but you'd better wait. It won't be safe to go +there now. Better unpack, Tom." + +For a moment there was a silence in the room. Then the young +inventor leaped to his feet and faced the circus man. + +"Unpack?" cried Tom in ringing tones. "Never! I'm going to giant +land, fight or no fight! Ned, come with me and we'll put in some of +my electric rifles. I wasn't going to take them along, but I will +now. Unpack? I guess not! I'm going to get a giant for you, Mr. +Preston, and save Jake Poddington if he's alive. Come on, Ned." + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +FIRE ON BOARD + + +"Your electric rifles!" exclaimed Ned Newton, as he followed his +chum to the storeroom, where Tom kept a number of spare guns. "It's +a good thing you thought of them, Tom." + +"Yes, I didn't think we'd need them, for I believe peaceable means +are the best to use on natives. But if there's a war, and we have to +defend ourselves against the tribes, we'll take along something that +will do more damage than an ordinary rifle, and yet I can regulate +it so that it will only stun, and not kill." + +"That's the stuff, Tom. No use in being needlessly cruel. How many +will you take?" + +"Two or three. We may need 'em all." + +A little later the two lads returned to the library where Mr. Damon, +Mr. Swift and the circus man were anxiously awaiting them. Mr. +Preston looked curiously at several objects which Tom and Ned +carried. The objects looked like guns but were different from any +the giant-seeker had seen. + +"What are they?" he asked Tom. + +"Electric rifles. One of my inventions," and Tom showed how the +weapon worked. Those of you who have read the volume entitled, "Tom +Swift and His Electric Rifle" will remember this curious weapon. It +was worked by a stored charge of magnetism of the wireless kind. By +this a concentrated globule of electricity was projected from the +muzzle, and it could be made strong or weak at the will of the +marksman. It could be made so powerful that it would totally +annihilate a whale, as Tom had once proved, or it could be made so +mild that it would put an enemy, or several of them, to sleep almost +as gently as some narcotic, and they would awaken after several +hours, little the worse for their experience. + +A charge of electricity as powerful as five thousand volts could be +concentrated into a small wireless globule the size of a bullet, and +this would fly through space, or even through solid objects until, +reaching the limit of the range set, would strike the object aimed +at. With his wonderful electric rifle Tom had not only killed +elephants, and other big game, but fought off the red pygmies of +Africa. + +"And we may have a use for it in South America," he added as he +explained the workings to Mr. Preston. + +"Well, I'm glad you didn't back out," commented the circus man, "and +this may come in mighty handy. I'll feel easier about you now, Tom, +when I know you have some electric rifles with you." + +The circus man was told of what Eradicate had said to Andy, but he +was of the opinion that no harm would result from it. + +"As far as I can learn," went on Mr. Preston, "my old rival Waydell +has given up the giant idea. He is looking for a two-headed +crocodile, said to be somewhere along the Nile river, and he's +fitting out an expedition there I understand. I guess we won't be +bothered with him. But the giant for mine! If I get that sort of an +attraction his two-headed crocodile won't be in it. I hope you have +luck, Tom Swift." + +The last details of the expedition were considered. Nothing seemed +to have been left undone, and though carrying the electric rifles +would make a little more baggage, no one minded that. + +"I kin carry dem," said Eradicate. "I ain't got much baggage of mah +own." + +So it was arranged, and early the next morning the little band of +intrepid travelers, who were going in search of giant land, started +for New York. They little knew what was ahead of them, nor what dire +perils they were to pass through. + +Of course Tom had said good-bye to Mary Nestor and half-jokingly, he +had promised to bring back a giant of his own, that she might see +one outside of a circus. + +"But, Tom," Mary exclaimed with a laugh, "what will you do with one +of the big creatures if you get one?" + +"Have him help me on my newest invention--the noiseless airship," +answered the young inventor. "I need some one to lift heavy weights. +It will save putting up a derrick. Yes, I think I'll get a giant of +my own." + +The last good-byes were said, and the parting between Tom and his +father was affecting. + +"I'll soon be back, dad," he said in as cheerful a tone as he could +assume, "and I'll help you finish your gyroscope." + +"I hope you will, Tom," and then, with a pressure of his son's hand, +Mr. Swift turned away and went into the house, closing the door +after him. + +The first part of the trip to New York was rather a silent one, no +one caring to talk much. Eradicate was the only cheerful member of +the party, which included the circus man, who was going as far as +the steamer with Tom and his friends. + +"Say," Ned exclaimed finally, "any one would think we were going to +a funeral!" + +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I guess something is on all our nerves. +Let's do something to take it off. Here comes a boy with some funny +papers. We'll buy some and read all the jokes." + +This proved a diversion, and before the train had gone many miles +more the giant-hunters were talking and laughing as though they were +merely starting on a short pleasure trip, instead of an expedition +to the dangerous jungles of South America. + +They put up at a good hotel in New York, and as soon as they were +established Tom and Mr. Preston went to the steamer Calaban which +was to land them at Buenos Ayres. They found that there was some +confusion about their luggage and boxes, and it took them the better +part of a day to get the tangle straightened out, and their stuff +stored together in one hold. + +"It will be easier to get it out if it's all together," said Tom, at +the conclusion of their labors, and then he and the circus man +returned to the hotel. The ship was to sail two days later, and, +several hours before the time set for the departure, Tom and his +friends were on board. + +"You don't see anything of your rival circus friend, do you?" asked +Tom, of the man who wanted a giant. + +"Not a sign," was the answer, as Mr. Preston glanced over the throng +of on-coming passengers. "I guess we've either given him the slip, +or he's given up the game. You won't have to worry about him. Just +take it easy until you start for the interior, and from then on +you'll have hard work enough." + +The last of the cargo was being taken aboard, the late passengers +had arrived and were anxiously watching to see that their baggage +was not lost. As Mr. Preston stood talking with Tom near the +gangplank, a clerical looking gentleman approached the circus man. + +"I beg your pardon," he began in mild accents, "but could you tell +me where my stateroom is?" and he showed his ticket. "I'm not used +to traveling," he needlessly added for that fact was very evident. +Mr. Preston informed him how to get to his berth, and the gentleman +went on: "Are you going all the way to Buenos Ayres?" + +"No, but my friend is," and the circus man nodded at Tom. + +"Oh, I'm so glad!" the stranger exclaimed. "Then I shall have +someone of whom I can ask questions. I am quite lost when I travel." + +"I'll help you all I can," volunteered Tom, "and I'll show you to +your stateroom now." + +"Ah, thank you. Your name is--" + +"Tom Swift," supplied the young inventor. + +"Ah, yes, I believe I have read about your airships. I am the +Reverend Josiah Blinderpool. I am taking a little vacation. I trust +we shall become good friends." + +"Humph, he's a regular infant, to be away from civilization," mused +Tom, when he had showed the clergyman to the proper stateroom. +"He'll get into trouble, he's so innocent." If he could have seen +that same "clergyman" double up with mirth when he had closed his +stateroom door after him, Tom would not have felt so sure about that +same "innocence." + +"To think that I was talking face to face with Sam Preston and he +never tumbled to who I was!" exclaimed the newcomer softly. "That's +rich! Now if I play my cards right I shouldn't be surprised but what +they'd invite me to come along with them. That would just suit me. I +wouldn't have any trouble then, getting on the track of those +giants. The information Waydell got from that red-haired Foger chap +wasn't any too definite," and once more the man wearing the garb of +a minister chuckled. + +"Well, I'll say good-bye," remarked Mr. Preston, a little later, +when the warning bell had rung. "I guess you'll get along all right. +I haven't seen a sign of Waydell, or any of his slick agents. You'll +have no trouble I guess." + +But if the circus man could have seen the "clergyman" at that same +time looking over letters addressed to "Hank Delby," and signed +"Wayland Waydell" he would not have been so confident. + +Mr. Preston bade good-bye to his friends, the gangplank was hauled +up, and a hoarse blast came from the whistle of the Calaban. + +"Bless my pocketbook!" cried Mr. Damon. "We're off!" + +"Yep, off t' git dat big, giant orchard plant," chimed in Eradicate. + +"Hush!" exclaimed Tom, who did not like the use of the word "giant" +even in that connection. "Don't tell everyone our business, Rad." + +"Dat's right, Massa Tom. I clean done forgot dat it's a sort of +secret. I'll keep mighty still 'bout it." + +The Calaban swung out into the river and began steaming down the +bay. + +The first week of the voyage was uneventful. The weather was +exceptionally fine, and hardly any one was seasick. The Reverend Mr. +Blinderpool was often on deck, and he made it a point to cultivate +the acquaintance of Tom and his friends. In spite of the fact that +he said he had traveled very little, he seemed to know much about +hidden corners of the world, but always, as on an occasion when he +had accidentally let slip some remark that showed he had been in +far-off China or Asia, he would suddenly change the conversation +when it verged to travel. + +"There's something queer about that minister," said Ned after one of +these occasions, "but I can't decide what it is." + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Tom, who rather liked the man. + +"No nonsense about it. Why should a minister take a trip like this +when he isn't sick, and when he isn't going to establish a mission +in South America? There's something queer about it, for, by his own +words he just took this voyage as a whim." + +"Oh, you're too fussy," declared Tom; and for the time the subject +was dropped. + +They ran into a storm when about ten days out, and for a while they +had a rough time of it, and then the weather cleared again. + +It was one evening, after the formal dinner, when Tom and Ned were +strolling about on deck, before turning in, that, the quiet of the +ship was broken by what is always an alarming cry at sea. + +"Fire! Fire!" shouted a man, pointing to a thin wisp of smoke +curling up from the deck amidships. + +"Keep quiet!" yelled one of the stewards. "It is nothing!" + +"It's a fire, I tell you!" insisted the man, and several others took +up the cry. + +A panic was imminent, and the captain came running from his +quarters. + +"What is it?" he asked. + +An officer hurried to his side, and said something but in such a low +voice that Tom, who was standing close beside the two, scarcely +heard it. But he did hear this: + +"There's a fire, sir, in hold number seventeen. We have turned the +hose in there, and the pumps are working." + +"Very good, Mr. Meld. Now try and quiet the passengers. Tell them it +doesn't amount to much, and if it does we can flood that +compartment." + +Tom started at that. + +"Come on, Ned!" he cried, grabbing his chum by the arm. + +"Why, what's up? What's the matter?" + +"Matter? Matter enough! The fire is in the hold where all our stuff +is stored, and if the flames reach that box I packed last--well, I +wouldn't give much for the ship!" and fairly dragging his chum +along, Tom raced for the place where the smoke was now coming up in +thicker clouds. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +A NARROW ESCAPE + + +"Here, come back! You can't go past here!" + +"But I've got to go! I tell you I must go! It's important!" + +The first speaker was one of the ship's officers, and the other was +Tom Swift, who, accompanied by his chum, was trying to get past a +rope that had been hastily stretched in front of the hold where the +smoke was rolling up in ever-thickening clouds. + +"It's important that you stay where you are," insisted the officer. +"Look here young man, do you want to start a panic? You know what +that is on board ship. Keep cool, we'll get the fire out all right." + +"I am cool," responded Tom, and, though he did look a bit excited, +he was calm enough to know what he was doing. + +"Then keep back!" insisted the officer. + +A crowd was gathering and there were ominous whispers sent back and +forth. Some hysterical women were beginning to scream, and there +were anxious looks on all faces. + +"I tell you it's important that I go down there," insisted Tom. "I +want to get a box--" + +"We'll look after the baggage of the passengers," declared the +officer. "You don't need to worry, young man." + +"But I tell you I do!" and Tom's voice was loud now. "It isn't so +much on my account, as--" and then, stepping quickly to the side of +the officer he whispered something. + +"What!" cried the officer. "You don't tell me? That was a risk! I +guess I'll have to help you get it out. Here, Mr. Simm," he called +to one of the mates, "stand guard here. I'm going down into the hold +with this young man." + +"Shall I come?" cried Ned. + +"No, you go stay with Mr. Damon and Eradicate," answered Tom. "Tell +them everything is all right. And for cats' sake keep Rad cool. +Don't let him get excited and start a panic. I'll be back in a +minute." + +With that Tom and the officer disappeared from view, and Ned, after +wondering what it was all about, hastened to reassure Mr. Damon and +the colored man that there was no danger, though from the manner in +which Tom had acted his chum was convinced that something was wrong. + +Meanwhile our hero, accompanied by the officer, was groping his way +through the thick smoke in the compartment. The officer had switched +on the electric lights, and they shone with a yellow haze through +the clouds of choking vapor. + +"Can you see it?" asked the officer anxiously. + +"I had it put where I could easily get at it," answered Tom with a +cough, for some of the smoke had got down his throat. "I had an idea +I might need it in a hurry. Here it is!" and he pointed to a large +box, marked with his initials in red paint. "Give me a hand and +we'll get it out." + +"Yes, and send it on deck. See, there's the fire!" and the officer +pointed to where a glow could be seen amid some bales of cotton. "It +will be slow burning, that's one good thing, and by turning steam +into this compartment we can soon put it out." + +"It's pretty close to my box," commented Tom, "but there isn't as +much danger as I thought." + +It did not take him and the officer long to move the box away from +its proximity to the fire, for the case was not heavy, though it was +of good size, and then the officer having called up an order to some +of his fellow seamen on deck, a rope was let down, and the box +hoisted up. + +"Whew! That was a narrow escape!" exclaimed Tom as he saw his case +go up on deck. "I suppose I shouldn't have had that stored here. But +there were so many things to think of that I forgot." + +"Yes, it was a risk," commented the officer. "But what are you going +to do with that sort of stuff, anyhow?" + +"I may need it when we get among the wild tribes of South American +Indians," answered Tom non-commitally. "I'm much obliged for your +help." + +"Oh, that's nothing. Anything to save the ship." + +At that moment there were confused cries, and a series of shouts and +commands up on deck. + +"We'd better hurry out of here," said the officer. + +"Why?" + +"The captain has just ordered steam turned in here. I hope there +isn't anything of yours that will be damaged by it." + +"No, everything else is in waterproof coverings. Come on, we'll +climb out." + +They hurried from the compartment and, a little later clouds of +quenching steam were poured in from a hose run from the boiler room. +The hatch was battened down, and then the smoke ceased to come up. + +"The danger is practically over," the captain assured the frightened +passengers. "The fire will be all out by morning. You may go to your +staterooms in perfect safety." + +Some did, and others, disbelieving, hung around the hatch-cover, +sniffing and peering to discover traces of smoke. But the sailors +had done their work well, and a stranger would not have known that a +fire was in the hold. + +The captain had spoken truly, and in the morning the fire was +completely out, a few charred bales of cotton being the only things +damaged. They were hauled up and dumped into the sea, while Tom, +making a hasty inspection of his other goods placed in that +compartment saw, to his relief, that beyond one case of trinkets, +designed for barter with the natives, nothing had been damaged, and +even the trinkets could be used on a pinch. + +"But what was in that box?" asked Ned, that night as they got ready +to retire, the excitement having calmed down. + +"Hush! Not so loud," cautioned Tom, for Mr. Damon was in the next +stateroom, while Eradicate had one across the corridor. "I'll tell +you, Ned, but don't breathe a word of it to Rad or Mr. Damon. They +might not intend to give it away, but I'm afraid they would, if they +knew, and I depend on the things in that box to give the native +giants the surprise of their lives in case we--well, in case we come +to close quarters." + +"Close quarters?" + +"Yes, have a fight, you know, or in case they get so fond of us that +they won't hear of letting us go--in other words if they make us +captives." + +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't think they'll do that, do you?" + +"No telling, but if they do, Ned, I've got some things in that box +that will make them wish they hadn't. It's got--" and Tom leaned +forward and whispered, as though he feared even the walls would +hear. + +"Good!" cried his chum! "That's the stuff! No wonder you thought the +ship might be damaged if the fire got to that!" + +It seemed that the slight fire was about all the excitement destined +to take place aboard the Calaban, for, after the blaze was so +effectually quenched, the ship slipped along through the calm seas, +and it was actually an effort to kill time on the part of the +passengers. As they progressed further south the weather became more +and more warm, until, as they approached the equator, every one put +on the lightest garments obtainable. + +"Crossing the line," was the signal for the usual "stunts" among the +sailors. "Neptune" came aboard, with his usual sea-green whiskers +made from long rope ends, and with his trident much in evidence; and +there was plenty of horseplay which the passengers very much +enjoyed. + +Then, as the tropical region was left behind, the weather became +more bearable. There were one or two storms, but they were of no +consequence and the steamer weathered them easily. + +Torn and his friends had several talks with the "Reverend Josiah +Blinderpool," as the pretended clergyman still called himself. But +he did not obtrude his company on them, and though he asked many +questions as to where Tom and his party were going, the young +inventor, with his usual caution in talking to strangers, rather +evaded them. + +"Hang it all! He's as close-mouthed as a clam," complained "Mr. +Blinderpool" to himself one day, after an attempt to worm something +from Tom, "I'll just have to stick close to him and his chum to get +a line on where they're heading for. And I must find out, or Waydell +will think I'm throwing the game." + +As for Tom and the others, they gave the seeming clergyman little +thought--that is until one day when something happened. Ned had been +down in the engine room, having had permission to inspect the +wonderful machinery, and, on his way back he passed the smoking +cabin. He was rather surprised to see Mr. Blinderpool in there, +puffing on a big black cigar, and with him were some men whom Ned +recognized as personages who had vainly endeavored to get a number +of passengers into a card game with them. And, unless Ned's eyes +deceived him, the seeming clergyman was about to indulge in a game +himself. + +"That's mighty queer," mused Ned. "Guess I'll tell Tom about this. I +never saw a minister play cards in public before, and this Mr. +Blinderpool has been trying to get thick with Tom, of late. Maybe +he's a gambler in disguise." + +Filled with this thought Ned hastened off to warn his chum. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +"FORWARD MARCH!" + + +"You don't say so!" exclaimed the young inventor, when Ned had told +him the queer news. "Well, do you know I've been suspicious of that +fellow ever since he tried to make friends with us." + +"Suspicious? How so? You don't think--" + +"Oh, I mean I think he's some kind of a confidence man who has +adopted the respectable clothes of a minister to fool people. He may +be a card sharper himself. Well, we won't have anything more to do +with him. It won't be long before we arrive at Buenos Ayres, and +then we won't be bothered with card sharpers or anybody else but--" + +"Giants and fighting natives," finished Ned, with a laugh. "You +forget, Tom, that there's a war going on near the very place we're +headed for." + +"That's so, Ned. But with what we have with us I guess we can make +out all right. I'm going to have the electric rifles handy the +minute we start for the interior." + +The voyage continued, and was fast drawing to a close. "Mr. +Blinderpool" made several more attempts to strike up a friendship +with Tom, or his chum, but they were on their guard now, and, +failing to get into much of a conversation with the two young men, +the pretended clergyman turned his attentions to Mr. Damon. + +That eccentric gentleman welcomed him at first, until a quiet hint +from Tom brought that to an end. + +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't say so! Not a +clergyman at all? Dear me!" + +And then, getting desperate, and needing very much to learn how long +a journey his rivals were to undertake, so that he, too, might +prepare for it, Mr. Hank Delby, alias Blinderpool, began to "pump" +Eradicate. + +But the latter was too sharp for him. Well knowing that a white man +would not get suddenly friendly with one of the black race unless +for some selfish object, Eradicate fairly snubbed the seeming +minister, until that worthy had to go off by himself, saying bitter +things and casting black looks at our friends. + +"But I'll get ahead of them yet!" he muttered, "and I'll get their +giants away from them, if they capture any." + +The box on which Tom set such an importance, and which had so nearly +been the cause of a disaster, had been stored in one of the fire- +proof compartments of the ship, and now, as a few days more would +see the vessel entering the harbor of the Rio de la Plata, thence to +steam up to the ancient city of Buenos Ayres, Tom and the others +began to think of what lay before them. + +"How do you propose to head into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one +afternoon, when the captain announced that the following morning +would see them nearly opposite Montevideo. + +"I'm going to hire a lot of burrows, donkeys or whatever they have +down here that answers the purpose," replied Tom. "We have a lot of +things to transport, and I guess pack mules would be the best, if we +can get them. Then I've got to hire some drivers and some porters, +camp-makers and the like. In fact we'll have quite a party. I guess +I'll need ten natives, and a head man and with ourselves we'll be +fifteen. So we'll need plenty of food. But then we can get that as +we go along, except when we get away into the interior, and then +we'll have to hunt it ourselves." + +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "We haven't had a good hunting +expedition since we went to elephant land, Tom. The electric rifles +will come in handy here." + +"Yes, I expect they will. Now come on, Ned, and help me get a list +ready of the things we've got to take with us, and how they can best +be divided up." + +Thick weather delayed the ship somewhat, so it was not until evening +of the next day that they made Montevideo, where part of the cargo +was to be discharged. As they would lay over there a day, the boys +decided to go ashore, which they did, wondering at the strange +sights in the old city. + +Tom watched to see if the pretended minister would land, and +endeavor to force his acquaintance, but Mr. Hank Delby, to give him +his right name, was not in evidence. In fact he was turning over +scheme after scheme in his mind in order to hit on one that would +enable him to take advantage of the preparations which had been made +by his rival in the circus business. + +"I've just got to get a line on where those giants are to be found," +mused Mr. Delby, in the seclusion of his stateroom, "even if I have +to take some other disguise and follow that Swift crowd. That's what +I'll do. I'll put on some other disguise! I wonder what it had +better be?" + +Tom and Ned, to say nothing of Mr. Damon and Eradicate, found much +to interest them in the capital of Uruguay, and they were rather +sorry, in a way, when it was time for them to leave. + +"But we'll see plenty more strange sights," remarked Tom, as the +steamer started off for Buenos Ayres. "In fact our trip hasn't +really begun yet." + +In due time they dropped anchor at the ancient city, and then began +a series of confused and busy times. In fact there was so much to +do, seeing to the unloading of their stuff, arranging for hotel +accommodations, seeing to hiring natives for the expedition into the +interior, and other details, that Tom and his friends had no time to +think anything about the pretended clergyman who had caused them a +little worry. + +Eventually their belongings were stored in a safe place, and our +friends sat down to a good dinner in a hotel that, while it was in +far-off South America, yet was as good as many in New York, and, in +some respects the boys, and Mr. Damon, liked it better. + +They found that the Spanish and Portuguese languages were the +principal ones spoken, together with a mixture of the native +tongues, and as both Ned and Tom, as well as Mr. Damon, had a +working knowledge of Spanish they got along fairly well. Some of the +hotel people could speak English. + +Tom made inquiries and found that the best plan would be to +transport all his stuff by the regular route to Rosario, on the +Parana river in Argentina, and there he could make up his pack +train, hire native carriers, and start for the interior. + +"Then we'll do that," he decided, "and take it easy until we get to +Rosario." + +It took them the better part of a week to do this, but at last they +were on the ground, and felt for the first time that they were +really going into a wild and little explored country. + +"Are you going to stick to the Parana river?" asked Ned. + +"No," replied Tom, in the seclusion of their room, "if there are any +giants they will be found in some undiscovered, or at least little +traveled, part of the country. I don't believe they are in the +vicinity of the big rivers, or other travelers would have heard +about them, and, as far as we know, Mr. Preston's animal agent is +the only one who ever got a trace of them. We'll have to go into the +jungle on either side of the river." + +"Bless my walking stick!" cried Mr. Damon. "Have we really to go +into the jungle, Tom?" + +"I'm afraid we have, if we want to get any giants, and get a trace +of Mr. Poddington." + +"All right, I'm game, but I do hope we won't run into a band of +fighting natives." + +In Rosario it was learned that while the "war" was not regarded +seriously from the fact that the fighting tribes were far inland, +still it was going on with vigor, and large bands of natives were +roaming about, stealing each others' cattle and horses, burning +villages, and taking captives. + +"I guess we're in for it," remarked Tom grimly. "But I'm not going +to back out now." + +Unexpected complications, difficulties in the way of getting the +right kind of help, and a competent man to take charge of the native +drivers, so delayed our friends that it was nearly two weeks after +their arrival in Rosario before they could start for the interior. + +Of course the object of the expedition was kept a secret, and Tom +let it be known that he and his friends were merely exploring, and +wanted rare plants, orchids, or anything in that line. The natives +were not very curious. + +At last the day for the start came. The mules, which had been hired +as beasts of burdens, were loaded with boxes or bales on either +side, the natives were marshalled into line. Tom, Ned, and Mr. +Damon, each equipped with a rifle had a saddle animal to ride, and +Eradicate was similarly equipped, though for a weapon he depended on +a shotgun, which he said he understood better than the electric +rifles. + +The aeroplane, divided into many small packages, the goods for +barter, their supplies, stores, ammunition, and the box of which Tom +took such care--all these were on the backs of the beasts of burden. +Some food was taken along, but for a time, at least, they could +depend on scattered towns or villages, or the forest game, for their +eating. + +"Are we all ready?" called Tom, looking at the rather imposing +cavalcade of which he was the head. + +"I guess so," replied Ned. "Let her go!" + +"Bless my liver pad!" gasped Mr. Damon. "If we've got to start do +it, and let's get it over with Tom." + +"All ready, Rad?" asked the colored man's young master. + +"All ready, Massa Tom. But I mus' say dat I'd radder hab Boomerang +dan dish yeah animal what I'm ridin'." + +"Oh, you'll do all right, Rad. Then, if we're all ready, forward +march!" cried Tom, and with calls to their animals, the drivers +started them off. + +Hardly had they begun the advance than Ned, who had been narrowly +watching one of the natives, hurried up to Tom, and rapidly +whispered something to his chum. + +"What?" cried Tom. "Armed with a six-shooter, is he? Well, we'll see +about that! Halt!" he cried in Spanish, and then he called San Pedro +the head mule driver, to him. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +A WILD HORSE STAMPEDE + + +"Who is that man?" demanded Tom pointing to the one Ned had +indicated. Tom's chum had had a glimpse of a shining revolver in the +hip pocket of one of the mule drivers, and knowing that the simple +natives were not in the habit of carrying such weapons, the lad had +communicated his suspicions to Tom. + +"What man, senor?" asked the head mule driver. + +"That one!" and the young inventor again pointed toward him. And, +now that Tom looked a second time he saw that the man was not as +black as the other drivers--not an honest, dark-skinned black but +more of a sickly yellow, like a treacherous half-breed. "Who is he?" +asked Tom, for the man in question was just then tightening a girth +and could not hear him. + +"I know not, senor. He come to me when I am hiring the others, and +he say he is a good driver. And so he is, I test him before I engage +him," went in San Pedro in Spanish. "He is one good driver." + +"Why does he carry a revolver?" + +"A revolver, senor? Santa Maria, I know not! I--" + +"I'll find out," declared Tom determinedly. "Here," he called to the +offending one, who straightened up quickly. "Come here!" + +The man came, with all the cringing servility of a born native, and +bowed low. + +"Why have you a weapon?" asked the young inventor. "I gave orders +that none of the drivers were to carry them." + +"A revolver, senor? I have none! I--" + +"Rad, reach in his pocket!" cried Tom, and the colored man did so +with a promptness that the other could not frustrate. Eradicate held +aloft a large calibre, automatic weapon. + +"What's that for?" asked Tom, virtuously angry. + +"I--er--I--" and then, with a hopeless shrug of his shoulders the +man turned away. + +"Give him his gun, and get another driver, San Pedro," directed our +hero, and with another shrug of his shoulders the man accepted the +revolver, and walked slowly off. Another driver was not hard to +engage, as several had been hanging about, hoping for employment at +the last minute, and one was quickly chosen. + +"It's lucky you saw that gun, Ned," remarked Tom, when they were +actually under way again. + +"Yes, I saw the sun shining on it as his coat flapped up. What was +his game, do you suppose?" + +"Oh, he might be what they call a 'bad half-breed' down here. I +guess maybe he thought he could lord it over the other drivers when +we got out in the jungle, and maybe take some of their wages away +from them, or have things easier for himself." + +"Bless my wishbone!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You don't think he meant +to use it on us, Tom?" + +"Why no? What makes you ask that?" + +"Oh, I'm just nervous, I guess," replied the odd man. + +But if Mr. Damon could have seen that same half-breed a little +later, as he slipped into a Rosario resort, with the yellow stain +washed from his face, the nervousness of the eccentric gentleman +would have increased. For the man who had been detected with the +revolver muttered to himself: + +"Caught! Well, I'll fool 'em next time all right! I thought I could +get away with the pack train, and then it would have been easy to +turn the natives any way I wished, after I had found what I'm +looking for. But I had to go and carry that gun! I never thought +they'd spot it. Well, it's all up now, and if Waydell heard of it +he'd want to fire me. But I'll make good yet. I'll have to adopt +some other disguise, and see if I can't tag along behind." + +All unconscious of the plotter they had left back of them, Tom and +his companions pushed on, rapidly leaving such signs of civilization +as were represented by small native towns and villages, and coming +nearer to the jungles and forests that lay between them and the +place where Tom was destined to be made a captive. + +They were far enough away from the tropics to escape the intolerable +heat, and yet it was quite warm. In fact the weather was not at all +unpleasant, and, once they were started, all enjoyed the novelty of +the trip. + +Tom planned to keep along the eastern shore of the Parana river, +until they reached the junction where the Salado joins it. Then he +decided that they would do better to cross the Parana and strike +into the big triangle made by that stream and its principal +tributary, heading north toward Bolivia. + +"For it is in that little-explored part of South America that I +think the giants will be found." said Tom, as he talked it over with +Ned and Mr. Damon in the privacy of their tent, which had been set +up. + +"But why should there be giants there any more than anywhere else?" +asked Ned. + +"No particular reason," answered his chum. "But, according to the +last word Mr. Preston had from his agent, that was where he was +heading for, and that's where Zacatas, his native helper, said he +lost track of his master. I have a theory that the giants, if we +find any, will turn out to be a branch of a Patagonian tribe." + +"Patagonians!" exclaimed Ned. + +"Yes. You know the natives of the Southern part of Argentina grow to +a considerable size. Now Patagonia is a comparatively bleak and cold +country. What would prevent some of that big tribe centuries ago, +from having migrated to a warmer country, where life was more +favorable? After several generations they may have grown to be +giants." + +"Bravo!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "It's a good theory, at any rate, Tom. +Though whether you can ever prove it is a question." + +"Yes, and a big one," agreed the young inventor with a laugh. + +For some days they traveled along over a comparatively flat country, +bordering the river. At times they would pass through small native +villages, where they would be able to get fresh meat, poultry and +other things that varied their bill of fare. Again there would be +long, lonely stretches of forest or jungle, through which it was +difficult to make their way. And, occasionally they would come to +fair-sized towns where their stay was made pleasant. + +"I doan't see any ob dem oranges an' bananas droppin' inter mah +mouf, Massa Tom," complained Eradicate one day, after they had been +on the march for over a week. + +"Have patience, Rad," advised Tom. "We'll come to them when we get a +little farther into the interior. First we'll come to the monkeys, +and the cocoanut trees." + +"Hones' Massa Tom?" + +"Surely." + +And though it was pretty far south for the nimble simians, the next +day they did come upon a drove of them skipping about in the tall +palm trees. + +"There they are, Rad! There they are!" cried Ned, as the chattering +of the monkeys filled the forest. + +"By golly! So dey be! Heah's where I get some cocoanuts!" + +Before anyone could stop him, Eradicate caught up a dead branch, and +threw it at a monkey. The chattering increased, and almost instantly +a shower of cocoanuts came crashing down, narrowly missing some of +our friends. + +"Hold on, Rad! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Some of us will be hurt!" + +Crack! came a cocoanut down on the skull of the colored man. + +"Bless my court plaster! Someone's hurt now!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"Hurt? Bless yo' heart, Massa Damon, it takes mo' dan dat t' hurt +dish yeah chile!" cried Eradicate with a grin. "Ah got a hard head, +Ah has, mighty hard head, an' de cocoanut ain't growed dat kin bust +it. Thanks, Mistah Monkey, thanks!" and with a laugh Eradicate +jumped off his mule, and began gathering up the nuts, while the +monkeys fled into the forest. + +"Very much good to drink milk," said San Pedro, as he picked up a +half-ripe nut, and showed how to chop off the top with a big knife +and drain the slightly acid juice inside. "Very much good for +thirst." + +"Let's try it," proposed Tom, and they all drank their fill, for +there were many cocoanuts, though it was rather an isolated grove of +them. + +The monkeys became more numerous as they proceeded farther north +toward the equator, for it must be remembered that they had landed +south of it, and at times the little animals became a positive +nuisance. + +Several days passed, and they crossed the Parana river and struck +into the almost unpenetrated tract of land where Tom hoped to find +the giants. As yet none of their escort dreamed of the object of the +expedition, and though Tom had caused scouts to be sent back over +their trail to learn if they were being followed there was no trace +of any one. + +One day, after a night camp on the edge of a rather high table land, +they started across a fertile plain that was covered with a rich +growth of grass. + +"Good grazing ground here," commented Ned. + +"Yes," put in San Pedro. "Plenty much horse here pretty soon." + +"Do the natives graze their herds of horses here?" asked Tom. + +"No natives--wild horses," explained Pedro. "Plenty much, sometimes +too many they come. You see, maybe." + +It was nearly noon, and Tom was considering stopping for dinner if +they could come to a good watering place, when Ned, who had ridden +slightly in advance, came galloping back as fast as his steed would +carry him. + +"Look out! Look out!" he cried. "There's a stampede of 'em, and +they're headed right this way!" + +"Stampede of what? Who's headed this way?" cried Tom. "A lot of +monkeys?" + +"No, wild horses! Thousands of 'em! Hear 'em coming?" + +In the silence that followed Ned's warning there could be heard a +dull, roaring, thundering sound, and the earth seemed to tremble. + +"The young senor speaks truth! Wild horses are coming!" cried San +Pedro. "Get ready, senors! Have your weapons at hand, and perchance +we can turn the stampede aside." + +"The rifles! The electric rifles, Ned--Mr. Damon! We've got to stop +them, or they'll trample us to death!" cried Tom. + +As he spoke the thundering became louder, and then, looking across +the grassy plain, all saw a large troop of wild horses, with flying +manes and tails, headed directly toward them! + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +CAUGHT IN A LIVING ROPE + + +"Quick! Peg out the mules!" cried San Pedro, after one look at the +onrushing horses. "Drive the stakes well down! Tie them fast and +then get behind those rocks! Lively!" + +He cried his orders to the natives in Spanish, at the same time +motioning to Tom and Ned. + +"Get off your mules!" he went on. "Peg them out. Peg out the others, +and then run for it!" + +"Run for it?" repeated Tom, "Do you think I'm going to leave my +outfit in the midst of that stampede?" and he waved his hand toward +the thundering, galloping wild horses which were coming nearer every +moment. "Get out the electric rifles, and we'll turn that stampede. +I'm not going to run." + +"Bless my saddle!" cried Mr. Damon. "This is awful! There must be a +thousand of them." + +"Nearer two!" cried Ned, who was struggling to loosen the straps +that bound his electric rifle to the side of his mule. Already the +pack animals as well as those ridden by the members of the giant- +hunting party were showing signs of excitement. They seemed to want +to join the stampeding horses. + +"Peg our animals out! Peg them out! Make them so they can't join the +others!" yelled San Pedro. "It's our only chance!" + +"I believe he's right!" cried Mr. Damon. "Tom, if we wait until +those maddened brutes are up to us they'll fairly sweep ours along +with them, and there's no telling where we'll end up. I think we'd +better follow his advice and tie our mules as strongly as we can. +Then we can go over there by the rocks, and fire at the wild horses. +We may be able to turn them aside." + +"Guess that's right," agreed the young inventor after a moment's +thought. "Come on, Ned. Peg out!" + +"Peg out! Peg out!" yelled the natives, and then began a lively +scene. Pegging stakes were in readiness, and, attached to the bridle +of each mule was a strong, rawhide rope for tying to the stake. The +pegs were driven deeply into the ground and in a trice the animals +were made fast to them, though they snorted, and tried to pull away +as they heard the neighing of the stampeding animals and saw them +coming on with an irresistible rush. + +"Hurry!" begged San Pedro, and hurry Tom, Ned and the others did. +Animal after animal was made fast--that is all but one and that bore +on its back two rather large but light boxes--the contents of the +case which Tom had rescued from the fire in the hold. + +"What are you going to do with mule?" asked Ned, as he saw Tom begin +to lead the animal away, the others having been pegged out. + +"I'm going to take him over to the rocks with me. I'm not going to +take any chances on this mule getting away with those things in the +boxes. Give me a hand here, and then we'll see what the electric +rifles will do against those horses." + +But the one mule which Tom had elected to take with him seemed to +resent being separated from his companions. Bracing his feet well +apart, the animal stubbornly refused to move. + +"Come on!" yelled Tom, pulling on the leading rope. + +"Bless my porous plaster!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'd better hurry, +Tom! Those wild horses are almost on us!" + +"I'm trying to hurry!" replied the young inventor, "but this mule +won't come. Ned, get behind and shove, will you?" + +"Not much! I don't want to be kicked." + +"Beat him! Strike him! Wait until I get a club!" yelled San Pedro. +"Come, Antonia, Selka, Balaka!" he cried, to several of the natives +who had already started for the sheltering rocks a short distance +away. "Beat the mule for Senor Swift!" + +Ned joined Tom at the leading rope, and the two lads tried to pull +the animal along. Mr. Damon rushed over to lend his aid, and San +Pedro, catching up a long stick, was about to bring it down on the +mule's back. Meanwhile the stampeding animals were rushing nearer. + +"Hold on dere, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Yo'-all done +flustered dat mule, dat's what yo' done. Yo'-all am too much excited +'bout him. Be calm! Be calm!" + +"Calm! With that bunch of wild animals bearing down on us?" shouted +Tom. "Let's see you be calm, Rad. Come on here, you obstinate +brute!" he cried, straining on the rope. + +"Let me do it, Massa Tom. Let me do it," suggested the colored man +hurrying to the balky beast. + +Then, as gently as if he was talking to a nervous child, and totally +oblivious to the danger of the approaching horses, Eradicate went up +to the mule's head, rubbed its ears until they pointed naturally +once more, murmured something to it, and then, taking the rope from +Ned and Tom, Eradicate led the mule along toward the rocks as easily +as if there had never been any question about going there. + +"For the love of tripe! How did you do it?" asked Tom. + +"Bless my peck of oats!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a good thing we had +Rad along!" + +"All mules am alike," said the colored man with a grin. "An dish +yeah one ain't much different from mah Boomerang. I guess he's a +sorter cousin." + +"Come on!" yelled San Pedro. "No time to lose. Make for the rocks!" + +Tom, Ned and Mr. Damon sprinted then, and there was need to, for the +foremost of the galloping horses was not a hundred feet away. Then +came Eradicate, leading the mule that had at last consented to +hurry. The natives, with San Pedro, were already at the rocks, +waiting for the white hunters with the deadly electric rifles. + +"If they stampede our mules we'll be in a pickle!" murmured Ned. + +"I guess those ropes will hold unless they bite them through," +remarked Tom. + +"Yes, they sure hold," cried San Pedro, and indeed one had to shout +now to be heard above the thundering of the horses. Now the tethered +mules were lost to sight in the multitude of the other steeds all +about them. + +"Come on, Ned!" yelled Tom, as he sighted his rifle. "Pump it into +them! We must turn them, or they may come over this way, and if they +do it will be all up with us." + +"Shoot to kill?" asked Ned, as he drew back the firing lever of his +electric rifle. + +"No, only a stunning charge. Those horses are valuable, and there's +no use killing them. All we want to do is to turn them aside." + +"That's right," agreed Mr. Damon, forgetting in the excitement of +the moment to bless himself or anything. "We'll only stun them." + +The rifles were quickly adjusted to send out a comparatively weak +charge of electricity, and then they were trained on the dense mass +of horses, while the three marksmen began working the firing levers. + +At first, though horse after horse fell to the ground, stunned, +there was no appreciable effect on the thousands in the drove. The +poor mules were hidden from sight, though by reason of divisions in +the living stream of animals it could still be told where they were +tethered, and where the horses separated to go past them. +Fortunately the ropes and pegs held. + +"Fire faster!" cried Tom. "Shoot across the front of them, and try +to turn them to one side." + +From the rocks, behind which the natives and our friends crouched, +there came a steady stream of electric fire. Horse after horse went +down, stunned but not badly hurt, and in a few hours the beasts +would feel no ill effects. The firing was redoubled, and then there +came a break in the steady stream of horseflesh. + +Some hesitated and sought to turn back. Others, behind, pressed them +on, and then, as if in fear at the unknown and unseen power that was +laying low animal after animal, the great body, of horses, suddenly +turned at right angles to their course and broke away. There were +now two bodies of the wild runaways, those that had passed the +tethered mules, and those that had swung off. The stampede had been +broken. + +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom, jumping up from behind the rocks, and +swinging his hat. "We've turned them." + +"And just in time, too," added Ned, as he joined his chum. Then all +the others leaped up, and the sight of the human beings completed +the scare. The stampeding animals swung off more than before, so +that they were nearly doubling back on their own trail. The others +thundered off, and the ground was strewn with unconscious though +unharmed animals. + +"One mule gone!" cried San Pedro, hastily counting the still +tethered animals which were wildly tugging at their ropes. + +"Never mind," spoke Tom, "it's the one with some of that damaged +bartering stuff I intended for trading. We can afford to lose that. +Rad, is your animal all right?" + +"He suah am, Massa Tom. Dish yeah mule am almost as sensible as +Boomerang, ain't yo'?" and Eradicate patted the big animal he was +leading. + +"I'll send a man down the trail, and maybe he can pick up the +missing one," said San Pedro, and while the other natives were +quieting the restless mules, one tall black man hastened in the wake +of the retreating horses. + +He came back in an hour with the missing animal, that had broken its +tether rope and then, after running along with the wild horses had +evidently dropped out of the drove. Aside from the loss of a small +box, there had been no damage done, and the cavalcade was soon under +way once more, leaving the motionless horses to recover from the +effects of the electricity. + +"Bless my saddle pad!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't think I want to go +through anything like that again." + +"Neither do I," agreed Tom. "We are well out of it." + +"How much you take for one of them rifles?" asked San Pedro +admiringly. + +"Not for sale," answered Tom with a laugh. + +They camped in a fertile valley that night, and had a much-needed +rest. As yet Tom had made no inquiries as to the location of giant +land from any of the natives of the villages or towns through which +they passed. He knew as soon as he did begin asking questions, his +own men would hear of it, and they might be frightened if they knew +they were in an expedition the object of which was to capture some +of the tall men. + +"We'll just go along for a few days more," said Tom, to Ned, "and +then, when I do spring my surprise, they'll be so far from home that +they won't dare turn back. In a few days I'll begin making +inquiries." + +They traveled on for three days more, ever heading north, and coming +more into the warmer climate. The vegetation began to take on a more +tropical look, and finally they reached a region infested with many +wild beasts and monkeys, and with patches of dense jungle on either +side of the narrow trail. Fruits, tropical flowers and birds +abounded. + +"I think we're getting there," remarked Tom, on the evening of the +third day after his talk with Ned. "San Pedro says there's quite a +village about half a day's march ahead, and I may learn something +there. I'll know by to-morrow whether we are on the right trail or +not." + +The natives were getting supper, and Eradicate was busy with a meal +for the three white hunters. Mr. Damon had strolled down to the bank +of a little stream, and was looking at some small animals like foxes +that had come for their evening drink. They seemed quite fearless. + +Suddenly something long, round and thick seemed to drop down out of +a tree close to the odd gentleman. So swift and noiseless was it +that Mr. Damon never noticed it. Then, like a flash something went +around him, and he let out a scream of terror. + +San Pedro, who was nearest to him, saw and heard. The next instant +the black muleteer came rushing toward the camp, crying: + +"He is caught in a rope! Mr. Damon is caught in a rope!" + +"A rope!" repeated Ned. not understanding. + +"Yes, a rope in a tree. Come quickly!" + +Tom caught up one of the electric rifles and rushed forward. No +sooner had he set eyes on his friend, who was writhing about in the +folds of what looked like a big ship cable, then the young inventor +cried: + +"A rope! Yes, a living rope! That's a big boa constrictor that has +Mr. Damon! Get a gun, Ned, and follow me! We must save him before he +is crushed to death!" + +And the two lads rushed forward while the living rope drew its folds +tighter and tighter about the unfortunate man. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +A NATIVE BATTLE + + +"Bless my--!" but that was as far as poor Mr. Damon could get. The +breath was fairly squeezed out of him by the folds of the great +serpent that had dropped down out of the tree to crush him to death. +His head fell forward on his breast, and his arms were pinioned to +his sides. + +"Quick, Ned!" cried Tom. "We must fire together! Be careful not to +hit Mr. Damon!" + +"That's right. I'll take the snake on one side, Tom, and you on the +other!" + +"No! Then we might hit each other. Come on my side. Aim for the +head, and throw in the highest charge. We want to kill, not stun!" + +"Right!" gasped Ned, as he ran forward at his chum's side. + +San Pedro, and the other natives, could do nothing. In the gathering +twilight, broken by the light of several campfires, they stood +helpless watching the two plucky youths advance to do battle with +the serpent. Eradicate had caught up a club, and had dashed forward +to do what he could, but Tom motioned him back. + +"We can manage," spoke the young inventor. + +Then he and Ned crept on with ready rifles. The snake raised its +ugly head and hissed, ceasing for a moment to constrict its coils +about the unfortunate man. + +"Now's our chance--fire!" hoarsely whispered Ned. + +It seemed as if the big snake heard, for, raising its head still +higher, it fairly glared at Ned and Tom. It was the very chance they +wanted, for they could now fire without the danger of hitting Mr. +Damon. + +"Ready?" asked Tom of his chum in a low voice. + +"Ready!" was the equally low answer. + +It was necessary to kill the serpent at one shot, as to merely wound +it might mean that in its agony it would thresh about, and seriously +injure, if not kill, Mr. Damon. + +"Fire!" called Tom in a whisper, and he and Ned pressed the triggers +of the electric rifles on the same instant. + +There was a streak of bluish flame that cut like a sliver through +the gathering darkness, and then, as though a blight had fallen upon +it, the folds of the great snake relaxed, and Mr. Damon slipped to +the ground unconscious. The electric charges had gone fairly through +the head of the serpent and it had died instantly. + +"Quick! Mr. Damon! We must get him away!" cried Tom. "He may be +dead!" + +Together the chums sprang forward. The folds of the serpent had +scarcely ceased moving before the two youths snatched their friend +away. Dropping their rifles, they lifted him up to bear him to the +sleeping tent which had been erected. + +"Liver pin!" suddenly ejaculated Mr. Damon. It was what he started +to say when the serpent had squeezed the breath out of him, and, on +regaining consciousness from his momentary faint, his brain carried +out the suggestion it had originally received. + +"How are you?" cried Tom, nearly dropping Mr. Damon's legs in his +excitement, for he had hold of his feet, while Ned was at the head. + +"Are you all right?" gasped Ned. + +"Yes--I--I guess so. I--I feel as though I had been put through a +clothes wringer though. What happened?" + +"A big snake dropped down out of a tree and grabbed you," answered +Tom. + +"And then what? Put me down, boys, I guess I can walk." + +"We shot it," said Ned modestly. + +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed the odd gentleman. "I--I +hardly know what to say. I'll say it later. You saved my life. Let +me see if any bones are broken." + +None was, fortunately, and after staggering about a bit Mr. Damon +found that he could limp along. But he was very sore and bruised, +for, though the snake had squeezed him but for part of a minute, +that was long enough. A few seconds more and nearly every bone in +his body would have been crushed, for that is the manner in which a +constrictor snake kills its prey before devouring it. + +"Santa Maria! The dear gentleman is not dead then?" cried San Pedro, +as the three approached the tents. + +"Bless my name plate, no!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. + +"Praise to all the saints! The brave young senors with their +wonderful guns saved him. Now you must rest and sleep." + +"I feel as if that was all I wanted to do for a month," commented +Mr. Damon. His soreness and stiffness increased each minute, and he +was glad to get to bed, while the boys and Eradicate rubbed his +limbs with liniment. San Pedro knew of a leaf that grew in the +jungle which, when bruised, and made into poultices, had the +property of drawing out soreness. The next day he found some, and +Mr. Damon was wrapped up in bandages until he declared that he +looked like an Egyptian mummy. + +But the leaf poultices did him good, and in a few days he was able +to be about, though he was still a trifle stiff. Of course the +cavalcade had to halt in the woods, but they did not mind this as +they had traveled well up to this time, and the enforced rest was +appreciated. + +"Well, do you feel able to move along?" asked Tom of Mr. Damon one +morning, about a week later, for they were still in the "snake +camp," as they called it in memory of the big serpent. + +"Oh, yes, I think so, Tom. Where are you going?" + +"I want to push on to the next village. There I hope to get some +line on giant land, and really I ought to begin making inquiries +soon. San Pedro and the others are wondering what our object is, for +we haven't collected any specimens of either flowers or animals, or +the snake skin, and he thinks we are a sort of scientific +expedition." + +"Well, let's travel then. I'm able." + +So they started off once more along the jungle and forest trail. As +San Pedro had predicted, they came upon evidences of a native +village. Scattered huts, made of plastered mud and grass, with +thatched roofs of palm leaves, were met with, as they advanced, but +none of the places seemed to be inhabited, though rude gardens +around them showed that they had been the homes of natives up to +recently. + +"No one seems to be at home," remarked Tom, when they had gone past +perhaps half a dozen of these lonely huts. + +"I wonder what can be the matter?" asked Ned. "It looks as if they +had gone off in a hurry, too. Maybe there's been some sort of +epidemic." + +"No, no sickness," said San Pedro. "Natives no sick." + +"Bless my liver pill!" cried Mr. Damon, who was almost himself +again. "Then what is it?" + +"Much fight, maybe." + +"Much fight?" repeated Tom. + +"Yes, tribes at war. Maybe natives go away so as not be killed." + +"By Jove!" exclaimed the young inventor. "That's so. I forgot about +what Mr. Preston said. There's a native war going on around here. +Well, when we get to the town we can find out more about it, and +steer clear of the two armies, if we have to." + +But as they went farther on, the evidences of a native war became +more pronounced. They passed several huts that had been burned, and +the native mule drivers began showing signs of fear. + +"I don't like this," murmured Tom to his chum. "It looks bad." + +"What can you do?" + +"Nothing, I guess. We've got to keep on. No use turning back now. +Maybe the two rival forces have annihilated each other, and there +aren't any fighters left." + +At that moment there arose a cry from some of the natives who, with +the mules and their burdens, had pressed on ahead. + +"What's that?" exclaimed Tom. + +"Something's happened!" gasped Ned. + +"Bless my cartridge box!" cried Mr. Damon. + +The three went forward and came to a little hill. They looked down +into a valley--a valley that had sheltered a native village, but the +village was no more. It was but a heap of blackened and fire-scarred +ruins, and there were still clouds of smoke arising from the grass +huts, showing that the enemy had but recently made their assault on +the place. + +"Bless my heart!" cried Mr. Damon. "The whole place has been wiped +out." + +"Not one hut left," added Ned. + +"Hark!" cried Tom. + +An instant later there arose, off in the woods, a chorus of wild +yells. It was followed by the weird sound of tom-toms and the gourd +and skin drums of the natives. The shouting noise increased, and the +sound of the war drums also. + +"Look!" cried Mr. Damon, pointing to a distant hill, and there the +boys saw two large bodies of natives rushing toward one another, +brandishing spears, clubs and the deadly blow guns. + +They were not more than half a mile away, and in plain view of Tom +and his party, though the two forces had not yet seen our friends. + +"They're going to fight!" cried Tom. + +And the next moment the two bodies of natives came together in a +mass, the enemies hurling themselves at each other with the +eagerness and ferocity of wild beasts. It was a deadly battle. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE DESERTION + + +"Say, look at those fellows pitch into one another!" gasped Ned. + +"It's fighting at close range all right," commented Mr. Damon. + +"If they had rifles they wouldn't be at it hand to hand," spoke Tom. +"Maybe it's just as well they haven't, for there won't be so many +killed. But say, we'd better be thinking of ourselves. They may make +up their quarrel and turn against us any minute." + +"No--never--no danger of them being friends--they are rival tribes," +said San Pedro. "But either one may attack us--the one that is the +victor. It is better that we keep away." + +"I guess you're right," agreed Tom. "Lead the way, San Pedro, and +we'll get out of sight." + +But there was a fascination in watching the distant battle that was +hard to resist. It was like looking at a moving picture, for at that +distance none of the horrors of war were visible. True, natives went +down by scores, and it was not to be doubted but what they were +killed or injured, but it seemed more like a big football scrimmage +than a fight. + +"This is great!" cried Tom. "I like to watch it, but I'm sorry for +the poor chaps that get hurt or killed. I hope they're only stunned +as we stunned the wild horses." + +"I'm afraid it is more serious than that," spoke San Pedro. "These +natives are very bloodthirsty. It would not be well for us to incur +their anger." + +"We won't run any chances," decided Tom. "We'll just travel on. Come +on, Ned--Mr. Damon." + +As he spoke there was a sudden victorious shout from the scene of +the battle. One body of natives was seen to turn and flee, while the +others pursued them. + +"Now's our time to make tracks!" called Tom. "We'll have to push on +to the next village before we can ask where the gi--" he caught +himself just in time, for San Pedro was looking curiously at him. + +"The senor wishes to find something?" asked the head mule driver +with an insinuating smile. + +"Yes," broke in Eradicate. "We all is lookin' fo' some monstrous +giant orchards flowers." + +"Ah, yes, orchids," spoke San Pedro. "Well, there may be some in the +jungle ahead of us, but the senors have come the wrong trail for +flowers," and he looked curiously at Tom, while, from afar, come the +sound of the native battle though the combatants could no longer be +seen. + +"Never mind," said our hero quickly. "I guess I'll find what I want. +Now come on." + +They started off, skirting the burned village to get on the trail +beyond it. But hardly had they made a detour of the burned huts than +one of the native drivers, who was in the rear, came riding up with +a shout. + +"Now what's the matter?" cried Tom, looking back. + +There was a voluble chattering in Spanish between the driver and San +Pedro. + +"He says the natives that lived in this village have driven their +enemies away, and are coming back--after us," translated the head +mule driver. + +"After us!" gasped Ned. + +"Yes," replied San Pedro simply. "They are coming even now. They +will fight too, for all their wild nature is aroused." + +It needed but a moment's listening to prove this. From the rear came +wild yells and the beating of drums and tom-toms. + +"Bless my fountain pen!" cried Mr. Damon. "What are we going to do?" + +"Stop them if we can," answered Tom coolly. "Ned, you and I and Mr. +Damon will form a rear guard. San Pedro, take the mules and the men, +and make as good time as you can in advance. We'll take three of the +fastest mules, and hold these fellows back with the electric rifles, +and when we've done that we'll ride on and catch up to you." + +"Very good," said San Pedro, who seemed relieved to know that he did +not have to do any of the fighting. + +Three of the lighter weight mules, who carried small burdens, were +quickly relieved of them, and mounting these steeds in preference to +the ones they had been riding since they took the trail, Tom, Ned +and Mr. Damon dropped back to try and hold off the enemy. + +They had not far to ride nor long to wait. They could hear the +fierce yells of the victorious tribesmen as they came back to their +ruined village, and though there were doubtless sad hearts among +them, they rejoiced that they had defeated their enemies. They knew +they could soon rebuild the simple grass huts. + +"Small charges, just to stun them!" ordered Tom, and the electric +rifles were so adjusted. + +"Here's a good place to meet them," suggested Ned, as they came to a +narrow turn in the trail. "They can't come against us but a few at a +time, and we can pump them full of electricity from here." + +"The very thing!" cried Tom, as he dismounted, an example followed +by the others. Then, in another moment, they saw the blacks rushing +toward them. They were clad in nondescript garments, evidently of +their own make, and they carried clubs, spears, bows and arrows and +blow guns. There was not a firearm among them, as they passed on +after the party of our friends whom they had seen from the battle- +hill. They gave wild yells as they saw the young inventor's friends. + +"Let 'em have it!" called Tom in a low voice, and the electric +rifles sent out their stunning charges. Several natives in the front +rank dropped, and there was a cry of fear and wonder from the +others. Then, after a moment's hesitation they pressed on again. + +"Once more!" cried Tom. + +Again the electric rifles spoke, and half a score went down +unconscious, but not seriously hurt. In a few hours they would be as +well as ever, such was the merciful charge that Tom Swift and the +others used in the rifles. + +The third time they fired, and this was too much for the natives. +They could not battle against an unseen and silent enemy who mowed +them down like a field of grain. With wild yells they fled back +along the trail they had come. + +"I guess that does it!" cried Tom. "We'd better join the others +now." + +Mounting their mules, they galloped back to where San Pedro and his +natives were pressing forward. + +"Did you have the honor of defeating them," the head mule driver +asked. + +"I had the HONOR," answered Tom, with a grim smile. + +Then they pressed on, but there was no more danger. That night they +camped in a peaceful valley and were not disturbed, and the +following day they put a good many miles behind them. On the advice +of San Pedro, they avoided the next two villages as they realized +that they were in the war zone, and then they headed for a large +town where Tom was sure he would hear some news of the giants. + +They had to camp twice at night before reaching this town, and when +they did get to it they were warmly welcomed, for white explorers +had been there years before, and had treated the natives well. Tom +distributed many trinkets among the head men and won their good will +so that the party was given comfortable huts in which to sleep, and +a plentiful supply of provisions. + +"Can you arrange for a talk with the chief?" asked Tom of San Pedro +that night. "I want to ask him about certain things." + +"About where you can find giant flowers?" asked the mule driver with +a quick look. + +"Yes--er--and other giant things," replied Tom. "I fix," answered +San Pedro shortly, but there was a queer look on his face. + +A few hours later Tom was summoned to the hut of the chief of the +town, and thither he went with Ned, Mr. Damon and San Pedro as +interpreter, for the natives spoke a jargon of their own that Tom +could not understand. + +There were some simple ceremonies to observe, and then Tom found +himself facing the chief, with San Pedro by his side. After the +greetings, and an exchange of presents, Tom giving him a cheap +phonograph with which the chief was wildly delighted, there came the +time to talk. + +"Ask him where the giant men live?" our hero directed San Pedro, +believing that the time had now come to disclose the object of his +expedition. + +"Giant men, Senor Swift? I thought it was giant plants--orchids--you +were after," exclaimed San Pedro. + +"Well, I'll take a few giant men if I can find them. Tell him I +understand there is a tribe of giants in this country. Ask him if he +ever heard of them." + +San Pedro hesitated. He looked at Tom, and the young inventor +fancied that there was a tinge of white on the swarthy face of the +chief mule driver. But San Pedro translated the question. + +Its effect on the chief was strange. He half leaped from his seat, +and stared at Tom. Then he uttered a cry--a cry of fear--and spoke +rapidly. + +"What does he say?" asked Tom of San Pedro eagerly, when the chief +had ceased speaking. + +"He say--he say," began the mule driver and the words seemed to +stick in his throat--"he say there ARE giants--many miles to the +north. Terrible big men--very cruel--and they are fearful. Once they +came here and took some of his people away. He is afraid of them. We +are ALL afraid of them," and San Pedro looked around apprehensively, +as though he might see one of the giants stalking into the chief's +hut at any moment. + +"Ask him how many miles north?" asked Tom, hardly able to conceal +his delight. The giants had no terrors for him. + +"Two weeks journey," translated San Pedro. + +"Good!" cried the young inventor. "Then we'll keep right on. Hurrah! +I'm on the right track at last, and I'll have a giant for the circus +and we may be able to rescue Mr. Poddington!" + +"Is the senor in earnest?" asked San Pedro, looking at Tom +curiously. "Is he really going among these terrible giants?" + +"Yes, but I don't believe they'll be so terrible. They may be very +gentle. I'm sure they'll be glad to come with me and join a circus-- +some of them--and earn a hundred dollars a week. Of course we're +going on to giant land!" + +"Very good," said San Pedro quietly, and then he followed Tom out of +the chief's hut. + +"It's all right, Ned old sport, we'll get to giant land after all!" +cried Tom to his chum as they reached the hut where they were +quartered. + +The next morning when Tom got up, and looked for San Pedro and his +men, to give orders about the march that day, the mule drivers were +nowhere to be seen. Nor were the mules in the places where they had +been tethered. Their packs lay in a well ordered heap, but the +animals and their drivers were gone. + +"This is queer," said Tom, rubbing his eyes to make sure that he saw +aright. "I wonder where they are? Rad, look around for them." + +The colored man did so, and came back soon, to report that San Pedro +and his men had gone in the night. Some of the native villagers told +him so by signs, Eradicate said. They had stolen away. + +"Gone!" gasped Tom. "Gone where?" + +"Bless my railroad ticket!" cried Mr. Damon. + +"We're deserted," exclaimed Ned. "They've taken the mules, and left +us." + +"I guess that's it," admitted Tom ruefully, after a minute's +thought. "San Pedro couldn't stand for the giants. He's had a +frightful flunk. Well, we're all alone, but we'll go on to giant +land anyhow! We can get more mules. A little thing like this can't +phase me. Are you with me, Ned--Mr. Damon--Eradicate?" + +"Of course we are!" they cried without a moment's hesitation. + +"Then we'll go to giant land alone!" exclaimed Tom. "Come on, now, +and we'll see if we can arrange for some pack animals." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +IN GIANT LAND + + +When it first became sure that San Pedro and the other natives had +deserted--fled in the night, for fear of the giants--there was a +reactionary feeling of despondency and gloom among Tom and his three +friends. But the boldness and energy of the young inventor, his +vigorous words, his determination to proceed at any cost to the +unknown land that lay before them--these served as a tonic, and +after a few moments, Ned, Mr. Damon, and even Eradicate looked at +things with brighter spirits. + +"Do you really mean it, Tom?" asked Ned. "Will you go on to giant +land?" + +"I surely will, if we can find it. Why, we found the city of gold +all alone, you and Mr. Damon and I, and I don't see why we can't +find this land, especially when all we have to do is to march +forward." + +"But look at the lot of stuff we have to carry!" went on Ned, waving +his hand toward the heap of packs that the mule drivers had left +behind. + +"Bless my baggage check, yes!" added Mr. Damon. "We can never do it. +Tom. We had better leave it here, and try to get back to +civilization." + +"Never!" cried Tom. "I started off after a giant, and I'm going to +get one, if I can induce one of the big men to come back with me. +I'm not going to give up when we're so close. We can get more pack +animals, I'm sure. I'm going to have a try for it. If I can't speak +the language of these natives I can make signs. Come on, Ned, we'll +pay a morning visit to the chief." + +"I'll come along," added Mr. Damon. + +"That's right," replied the young inventor. "Rad, you go stand guard +over our stuff. Some of the natives might not be able to withstand +temptation. Don't let them touch anything." + +"Dat's what I won't, Massa Tom. Good land a massy! ef I sees any ob +'em lay a finger on a pack I'll shoot off my shotgun close to der +ears, so I will. Oh, ef I only had Boomerang here, he could carry +mos' all ob dis stuff his own se'f." + +"You've got a great idea of Boomerang's strength," remarked Tom with +a laugh, as he and Ned and Mr. Damon started for the big hut where +the chief lived. + +"Do you really think San Pedro and the others left because they were +afraid of the giants we might meet?" asked Ned. + +"I think so," answered his chum. + +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "In that case maybe we'd +better be on the lookout ourselves." + +"Time enough to worry when we get there," answered the young +inventor. "From what the circus man said the giants are not +particularly cruel. Of course Mr. Preston didn't have much +information to go on, but--well, we'll have to wait--that's all. But +I'm sure San Pedro and the others were in a blue funk and vamoosed +on that account." + +"Hey, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Heah am a letter I +found on de baggage," and he ran forward with a missive, rudely +scrawled on a scrap of paper. + +"It's from San Pedro," remarked Tom after a glance at it, "and it +bears out what I said. He writes that he and his men never suspected +that we were going after the giants, or they would never have come +with us. He says they are very sorry to leave us, as we treated them +well, but are afraid to go on. He adds that they have taken enough +of our bartering goods to make up their wages, and enough food to +carry them to the next village." + +"Well," finished Tom. as he folded the paper, "I suppose we can't +kick, and, maybe after all, it will be for the best. Now to see if +the chief can let us have some mules." + +It took some time, by means of signs, to make the chief understand +what had happened, but, when Tom had presented him with a little toy +that ran by a spring, and opened up a pack of trading goods, which +he indicated would be exchanged for mules, or other beasts of +burden, the chief grinned in a friendly fashion, and issued certain +orders. + +Several of his men hurried from the big hut, and a little later, +when Tom was showing the chief how to run the toy, there was a sound +of confusion outside. + +"Bless my battle axe!" cried Mr. Damon. "I hope that's not another +war going on." + +"It's our new mules!" cried Ned, taking a look. "And some cows and a +bony horse or two, Tom. We've drawn a rich lot of pack animals!" + +Indeed there was a nondescript collection of beasts of burden. There +were one or two good mules, several sorry looking horses, and a +number of sleepy-eyed steers. But there were enough of them to carry +all the boxes and bales that contained the outfit of our friends. + +"It might be worse," commented Tom. "Now if they'll help us pack up +we'll travel on." + +More sign language was resorted to, and the chief, after another +present had been made to him, sent some of his men to help put the +packs on the animals. The steers, which Tom did not regard with much +favor, proved to be better than the mules, and by noon our friends +were all packed up again, and ready to take the trail. The chief +gave them a good dinner,--as native dinners go,--and then, after +telling them that, though he had never seen the giants it had long +been known that they inhabitated the country to the north, he waved +a friendly good-bye. + +"Well, we'll see what luck we'll have by ourselves," remarked Tom, +as he mounted a bony mule, an example followed by Ned, Mr. Damon and +Eradicate, They had left behind some of their goods, and so did not +have so much to carry. Food they had in condensed form and they were +getting into the more tropical part of the country where game +abounded. + +It was not as easy as they had imagined it would be for, with only +four to drive so many animals, several of the beasts were +continually straying from the trail, and once a big steer, with part +of the aeroplane on its back, wandered into a morass and they had to +labor hard to get the animal out. + +"Well, this is fierce!" exclaimed Tom, at the end of the first day +when, tired and weary, bitten by insects, and torn by jungle briars, +they made camp that night. + +"Going to give up?" asked Ned. + +"Not much!" + +They felt better after supper, and, tethering the animals securely, +they stretched out in their tents, with mosquito canopies over them +to keep away the pestering insects. + +"I've got a new scheme," announced Tom next morning at breakfast. + +"What is it? Going on the rest of the way in the aeroplane?" asked +Ned hopefully. + +"No, though I believe if I had brought the big airship along I could +have used it. But I mean about driving the animals. I'm going to +make a long line of them, tying one to the other like the elephants +in the circus when they march around, holding each other's tails. +Then one of us will ride in front, another in the rear, and one on +each side. In that way we'll keep them going and they won't stray +off." + +"Bless my button hook!" cried Mr. Damon. "That's a good idea, Tom!" +It was carried out with much success, and thereafter they traveled +better. + +But even at the best it was not easy work, and more than once Tom's +friends urged him to turn back. But he would not, ever pressing on, +with the strange land for his goal. They had long since passed the +last of the native villages, and they had to depend on their own +efforts for food. Fortunately they did not have any lack of game, +and they fared well with what they had with them in the packs. + +Occasionally they met little bands of native hunters, and, though +usually these men fled at the sight of our friends, yet once they +managed to make signs to one, who, informed them as best he could, +that giant land was still far ahead of them. + +Twice they heard distant sounds of native battles and the weird +noise of the wooden drums and the tom-toms. Once, as they climbed up +a big hill, they looked down into a valley and saw a great conflict +in which there must have been several thousand natives on either +side. It was a fierce battle, seen even from afar, and Tom and the +others shuddered as they slipped down over the other side of the +rise, and out of sight. + +"We'd better steer clear of them," was Tom's opinion; and the others +agreed with him. + +For another week they kept on, the way becoming more and more +difficult, and the country more and more wild. They had fairly to +cut their way through the jungle at times, and the only paths were +animal trails, but they were better than nothing. For the last five +days they had not seen a human being, and the loneliness was telling +on them. + +"I'd be glad to see even a two-headed giant," remarked Tom +whimsically one night as they made their camp. + +"Yes, and I'd be glad to hear someone talk, even in the sign +language," added Ned, with a grin. + +They slept well, for they were very tired, and Tom, who shared his +tent with Ned, was awakened rather early the next morning by hearing +someone moving outside the canvas shelter. + +"Is that you, Mr. Damon?" he asked, the odd gentleman having a tent +adjoining that of the boys. + +There was no answer. + +"Rad, are you getting breakfast?" asked the young inventor. "What +time is it?" + +Still no answer. + +"What's the matter?" asked Ned, who had been awakened by Tom's +inquiries. + +Before our hero had a chance to reply the flap of his tent was +pulled back, and a head was thrust in. But such a head! It was +enormous! A head covered with a thick growth of tawny hair, and a +face almost hidden in a big tawny, bushy beard. Then an arm was +thrust in--an arm that terminated in a brawny fist that clasped a +great club. There was no mistaking the, object that gazed in on the +two youths. It was a gigantic man--a man almost twice the size of +any Tom had ever seen. And then our hero knew that he had reached +the end of his quest. + +"A giant!" gasped Tom. "Ned! Ned, we're in the big men's country, +and we didn't know it!" + +"I--I guess you're right, Tom!" + +The giant started at the sounds of their voices, and then his face +breaking into a broad grin, that showed a great mouth filled with +white teeth, he called to them in an unknown tongue and in a voice +that seemed to fairly shake the frail tent. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +IN THE "PALACE" OF THE KING + + +For a few moments after their first ejaculations neither Tom nor Ned +knew what to do. The giant continued to gaze at them, with the same +good-natured grin on his face. Possibly he was amused at the small +size of the persons in the tent. Then Tom spoke. + +"He doesn't look as if he would bite, Ned." + +"No, he seems harmless enough. Let's get up, and see what happens. I +wonder if there are any more of them? They must have come out on an +early hunt, and stumbled upon our camp." + +At this moment there arose a cry from Mr. Damon's tent. + +"Bless my burglar alarm!" shouted the odd gentleman. "Tom--Ned--am I +dreaming? There's a man here as big as a mountain. Tom! Ned!" + +"It's all right, Mr. Damon!" called Tom. "We're among the giants all +right. They won't hurt you." + +"Fo' de good land ob massy!" screamed Eradicate, a second later, and +then they knew that he, too, had seen one of the big men. "Fo' de +lub ob pork chops! Am dis de Angel Gabriel? Listen to de blowin' ob +de trump! Oh, please good Massa Angel Gabriel, I ain't nebber done +nuffin! I's jest po' ol' Eradicate Sampson, an' I got a mule +Boomerang, and' dat's all I got. Please good Mr. Angel--" + +"Dry up, Rad!" yelled Tom. "It's only one of the giants. Come on out +of your tent and get breakfast. We're on the borders of giant land, +evidently, and they seem as harmless as ordinary men. Get up, +everybody." + +As Tom spoke he rose from the rubber blanket on which he slept. Ned +did the same, and the giant slowly pulled his head out from the +tent. Then the two youths went outside. A strange sight met their +gaze. + +There were about ten natives standing in the camp--veritable giants, +big men in every way. The young inventor had once seen a giant in a +circus, and, allowing for shoes with very thick soles which the big +man wore, his height was a little over seven feet. But these South +American giants seemed more than a foot higher than that, none of +those who had stumbled upon the camp being less than eight feet. + +"And I believe there must be bigger ones in their land, wherever +that is," said Tom. Nor were these giants tall and thin, as was the +one Tom had seen, but stout, and well proportioned. They were +savages, that was evident, but the curious part of it was that they +were almost white, and looked much like the pictures of the old +Norsemen. + +But, best of all, they seemed good-natured, for they were +continually laughing or smiling, and though they looked with wonder +on the pile of boxes and bales, and on the four travelers, they +seemed more bewildered and amused, than vindictive that their +country should have been invaded. Evidently the fears of the natives +who had told Tom about the giants had been unfounded. + +By this time Mr. Damon and Eradicate had come from their tents, and +were gazing with startled eyes at the giants who surrounded them. + +"Bless my walking stick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Is it possible?" + +"Yes, we've arrived!" cried Tom. "Now to see what happens. I wonder +if they'll take us to their village, and I wonder if I can get one +of these giants for Mr. Preston's circus?" + +"You certainly can't unless he wants to come," declared Ned. "You'd +have a hard tussle trying to carry one of these fellows away against +his will, Tom." + +"I sure would. I'll have to make inducements. Well, I wonder what is +best to do?" + +The giant who had looked in the tent of Ned and Tom, and who +appeared to be the leader of the party, now spoke in his big, +booming voice. He seemed to be asking Tom a question, but the young +inventor could not understand the language. Tom replied in Spanish, +giving a short account of why he and his companions had come to the +country, but the giant shook his head. Then Mr. Damon, who knew +several languages, tried all of them--but it was of no use. + +"We've got to go back to signs," declared Tom, and then, as best he +could, he indicated that he and the others had come from afar to +seek the giants. He doubted whether he was understood, and he +decided to wait until later to try and make them acquainted with the +fact that he wanted one of them to come back with him. + +The head giant nodded, showing that at least he understood +something, and then spoke to his companions. They conversed in their +loud voices for some time, and then motioned to the pack animals. + +"I guess they want us to come along," said Torn, "but let's have +breakfast first. Rad, get things going. Maybe the giants will have +some coffee and condensed milk, though they'll have to take about +ten cupsful to make them think they've had anything. Make a lot of +coffee, Rad." + +"But good land a massy, dey'll eat up eberyt'ing we got, Massa Tom," +objected the colored man. + +"Can't help it, Rad. They're our guests and we've got to be polite," +replied the youth. "It isn't every day that we have giants to +breakfast." + +The big men watched curiously while Rad built a fire, and when the +colored man was trying to break a tough stick of wood with the axe, +one of the giants picked up the fagot and snapped it in his fingers +as easily as though it were a twig, though the stick was as thick as +Tom's arm. + +"Some strength there," murmured Ned to his chum admiringly. + +"Yes, if they took a notion to go on a rampage we'd have trouble. +But they seem kind and gentle." + +Indeed the giants did, and they liked the coffee which they tasted +rather gingerly at first. After their first sip they wanted more, +made as sweet as possible, and they laughed and talked among +themselves while Eradicate boiled pot after pot. + +"Dey suah will eat us out of house an' home, Massa Tom," he wailed. + +"Never mind, Rad. They will feed us well when we get to their town." + +Then the pack animals were laden with their burdens. This was always +a task, but for the giants it was child's play. With one hand they +would lift a box or bale that used to tax the combined strength of +the four travelers, and soon the steers, horses and mules were ready +to proceed. The giants went on ahead, to show the way, the first +one, who seemed to be called "Oom," for that was the way his +companions addressed him, walked beside Tom, who rode on a mule. In +fact the giant had to walk slowly, so as not to get ahead of the +animal. Oom tried to talk to Tom, but it was hard work to pick out +the signs that meant something, and so neither gained much +information. + +Tom did gather, however, that the giants were out on an early hunt +when they had discovered our friends, and their chief town lay about +half a day's journey off in the jungle. The path along which they +proceeded, was better than the forest trails, and showed signs of +being frequently used. + +"It doesn't seem possible that we are really among giants, Tom," +spoke Ned, as they rode along. "I hardly believed there were +giants." + +"There always have been giants," declared the young inventor. "I +read about them in an encyclopedia before I started on this trip. Of +course there's lots of wild stories about giants, but there have +really been some very big men. Take the skeleton in the museum of +Trinity College, Dublin. It is eight feet and a half in height, and +the living man must have even taller. There was a giant named +O'Brien, and his skeleton is in the College of Physicians and +Surgeons of England--that one is eight feet two inches high, while +there are reliable records to show that, when living, O'Brien was +two inches taller than that. In fact, according to the books, there +have been a number of giants nine feet high." + +"Then these chaps aren't so wonderful," replied Ned. + +"Oh, we haven't seen them all yet. We may find some bigger than +these fellows, though any one of these would be a prize for a +museum. Not a one is less than eight feet, and if we could get one +say ten feet--that WOULD be a find." + +"Rather an awkward one," commented Ned. + +It did not seem possible that they were really in giant land, yet +such was the fact. Of course the country itself was no different +from any other part of the jungle, for merely because big men lived +in it did not make the trees or plants any larger. + +"I tell you how I account for it," said Tom, as they traveled on. +"These men originally belonged to a race of people noted for their +great size. Then they must have lived under favorable conditions, +had plenty of flesh and bone-forming food, and after several +generations they gradually grew larger. You know that by feeding the +right kind of food to animals you can make them bigger, while if +they get the wrong kind they are runts, or dwarfs." + +"Oh, yes; that's a well-known fact," chimed in Mr. Damon. + +"Then why not with human beings?" went on Tom. "There's nothing +wonderful in this." + +"No, but it will be wonderful if we get away with one of these +giants," spoke Ned grimly. + +Further talk was interrupted by a sudden shouting on the part of the +big men. Oom made some rapid motions to Tom, and a little later they +emerged from the woods upon a large, grassy plain, on the other side +of which could be seen a cluster of big grass and mud huts. + +"There is the city of the giants!" cried Tom, and so it proved, a +little later, when they got to it. + +Now there was nothing remarkable about this city or native town. It +was just like any other in the wilder parts of South America or +Africa. There was a central place, where, doubtless, the natives +gathered on market days, and from this the huts of the inhabitants +stretched out in irregular lines, like streets. Off to one side of +the "market square," as Tom called it, was a large hut, surrounded +by several smaller ones, and from the manner in which it was laid +out, and decorated, it was evident that this was the "palace" of the +king, or chief ruler. + +"Say, look at that fellow!" cried Ned, pointing to a giant who was +just entering the "palace" as Tom dubbed the big hut. "He LOOKS +eleven feet if he's an inch." + +"I believe you!" cried Tom. "Say, I wonder how big the king is?" + +"I don't know, but he must be a top-notcher. I wonder what will +happen to us?" + +Oom, who had Tom and his party in charge, led them to the "palace" +and it was evident that they were going to be presented to the chief +or native king. Back of our friends stretched out their pack train, +the beasts carrying the boxes and bales. Surrounding them were +nearly all the inhabitants of the giants' town, and when the +cavalcade had come to a halt in front of the "palace," Oom raised +his voice in a mighty shout. It was taken up by the populace, and +then every one of them knelt down. + +"I guess His Royal Highness is about to appear," said Tom grimly. + +"Yes, maybe we'd better kneel, too," spoke Ned. + +"Not much! We're citizens of the United States, and we don't kneel +to anybody. I'm going to stand up." + +"So am I!" said Mr. Damon. + +An instant later the grass mat that formed the front door of the +"palace" was drawn aside, and there stood confronting our hero and +his friends, the King of Giant Land. And a mighty king was he in +size, for he must have been a shade over ten feet tall, while on +either side of him was a man nearly as big as himself. + +Once more Oom boomed out a mighty shout and, kneeling as the giants +were, they took it up, repeating it three times. The king raised his +hand as though in blessing upon his people, and then, eyeing Tom and +his three friends he beckoned them to approach. + +"He wants to see us at close range," whispered the young inventor. +"Come on, Ned and Mr. Damon. Trail along, Eradicate." + +"Good--good land ob massy!" stammered the colored man. And then the +little party advanced into the "palace" of the giant king. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE RIVAL CIRCUS MAN + + +Tom Swift gazed fearlessly into the face of the giant ruler who +confronted him. The young inventor said later that he had made up +his mind that to show no fear was the only way of impressing the big +king, for surely no show of strength could have done it. With one +hand the giant could have crushed the life from our hero. But +evidently he had no such intentions, for after gazing curiously at +the four travelers who stood before him, and looking for some time +at the honest, black face of Eradicate, the king made a motion for +them to sit down. They did, upon grass mats in the big hut that +formed the palace of the ruler. + +It was not a very elaborate place, but then the king's wants were +few and easily satisfied. The place was clean, Tom was glad to note. + +The king, who was addressed by his subjects as Kosk, as nearly as +Tom could get it, asked some questions of Oom, who seemed to be the +chief of the hunters. Thereupon the man who had looked into Tom's +and Ned's tent that morning, and who had followed them into the +palace, began a recital of how he had found the little travelers. +Though Tom and his friends could not understand a word of the +language, it was comparatively easy to follow the narrative by the +gestures used. + +Then the king asked several questions, others of the hunting party +were sent for and quizzed, and finally the ruler seemed satisfied, +for he rattled off a string of talk in his deep, booming voice. + +Truly he was a magnificent specimen of manhood, being as I have +said, about ten feet tall, and built in proportion. On either side +of him, upon rude benches covered with soft jaguar skins, sat two +men, evidently his brothers, for they looked much like the king. One +was called Tola and the other Koku, for the ruler addressed them +from time to time, and seemed to be asking their advice. + +"They're making up their minds what to do with us," murmured Tom. "I +only hope they let us stay long enough to learn the language, and +then I can make an offer to take one back to the United States with +me." + +"Jove! Wouldn't it be great if you could get the king!" exclaimed +Ned. + +"Oh, that's too much, but I'd like one of his brothers. They're each +a good nine feet tall, and they must be as strong as horses." + +In contrast to some giants of history, whose only claim to notoriety +lay in their height, these giants were very powerful. Many giants +have flabby muscles, but these of South America were like athletes. +Tom realized this when there suddenly entered the audience chamber a +youth of about our hero's age, but fully seven feet tall, and very +big. He was evidently the king's son, for he wore a jaguar skin, +which seemed to be a badge of royalty. He had seemingly entered +without permission, to see the curious strangers, for the king spoke +quickly to him, and then to Tola, who with a friendly grin on his +big face lifted the lad with one hand and deposited him in a room +that opened out of the big chamber. + +"Did you see that!" cried Ned. "He lifted him as easily as you or I +would a cat, and I'll bet that fellow weighed close to four hundred +pounds, Tom." + +"I should say so! It's great!" + +The audience was now at an end, and Tom thought it was about time to +make some sort of a present to the king to get on good terms with +him. He looked out of the palace hut and saw that their pack animals +were close at hand. Nearby was one that had on its back a box +containing a phonograph and some records. + +Making signs that he wanted to bring in some of his baggage, Tom +stepped out of the hut, telling his friends to wait for him. The +king and the other giants watched the lad curiously, but did not +endeavor to stop him. + +"I'm going to give him a little music," went on the young inventor +as he adjusted the phonograph, and slipped in a record of a lively +dance air. His motions were curiously watched, and when the +phonograph started and there was a whirr of the mechanism, some of +the giants who had crowded into the king's audience chamber, showed +a disposition to run. But a word of command from their ruler stopped +them. + +Suddenly the music started and, coming forth as it did from the +phonograph horn, in the midst of that hut, in which stood the +silence-awed giants, it was like a bolt of lightning from the clear +sky. + +At first the king and all the others seemed struck dumb, and then +there arose a mighty shout, and one word was repeated over and over +again. It sounded like "Chackalok! Chackalok!" and later Tom learned +that it meant wizard, magician or something like that. + +Shout after shout rent the air, and was taken up by those outside, +for through the open door the strains of music floated. The giants +seemed immensely pleased, after their first fright, and suddenly the +king, coming down from his throne, stood with his big ear as nearly +inside the horn as he could get it. + +A great grin spread over his face and then, approaching Tom, he +leaned over, touched him once on the forehead, and uttered a word. +At this sign of royal favor the other giants at once bowed to Tom. + +"Say," cried Ned, "you've got his number all right! You're one of +the royal family now, Tom." + +"It looks like it. Well, I'm glad of it, for I want to be on +friendly terms with His Royal Highness." + +Once more the king addressed Tom, and the head hunter, motioning to +Tom and his friends, led them out of the palace, and to a large hut +not far off. This, he made himself understood by signs, was to be +their resting place, and truly it was not a bad home, for it was +well made. It had simple furniture in it, low couches covered with +skins, stools, and there were several rooms to it. + +Calling in authorative tones to his fellow hunters, Tom had them +take the packs off the beasts of burdens and soon the boxes, bales +and packages were carried into the big hut, which was destined to be +the abiding place of our friends for some time. The animals were +then led away. + +"Well, here we are, safe and sound, with all our possessions about +us," commented Tom, when all but Oom had withdrawn. "I guess we'll +make out all right in giant land. I wonder what they have to eat? Or +perhaps we'd better tackle some of our own grub." + +He looked at Oom, who laughed gleefully. Then Tom rubbed his +stomach, opened his mouth and pointed to it and said: "We'd like to +eat--we're hungry!" + +Oom boomed out something in his bass voice, grinned cheerfully, and +hurried out. A little later he came back, and following him, a +number of giant women. Each one bore a wooden platter or slab of +bark which answered for a plate. The plates were covered with broad +palm leaves, and when they had been set down on low benches, and the +coverings removed, our friends saw they had food in abundance. + +There was some boiled lamb, some roasted fowls, some cereal that +looked like boiled rice, some sweet potatoes, a number of other +things which could only be guessed at, and a big gourd filled with +something that smelled like sweet cider. + +"Say, this is a feast all right, after what we've been living on!" +cried Tom. + +Once more Oom laughed joyfully, pointing to the food and to our +friends in turn. + +"Oh, we'll eat all right!" exclaimed Tom. "Don't worry about that!" + +The good-natured giant showed them where they could find rude wooden +dishes and table implements, and then he left them alone. It was +rather awkward at first, for though the bench or table looked low in +comparison to the size of the room, yet it was very high, to allow +for the long legs of the giants getting under it. + +"If we stay here long enough we can saw off the table legs," said +the young inventor. "Now for our first meal in giant land." + +They were just helping themselves when there arose a great shouting +outside. + +"I wonder what's up now?" asked Tom, pausing with upraised fork. + +"Maybe the king is coming to see us," suggested Ned. + +"I'll look," volunteered Mr. Damon, as he went to the door. Then he +called quickly: + +"Tom! Ned! Look! It's that minister we met on the ship--Reverend +Josiah Blinderpool! How in the world did he ever get here? And how +strangely he's dressed!" + +Well might Mr. Damon say this, for the supposed clergyman was +attired in a big checked suit, a red vest, a tall hat and white +canvas shoes. In fact he was almost like some theatrical performer. + +The gaudily-dressed man was accompanied by two natives, and all rode +mules, and there were three other animals, laden with packs on +either side. + +"What's his game?" mused Ned. + +The answer came quickly and from the man himself. Riding forward +toward the king's hut or palace, while the populace of wondering +giants followed behind, the man raised his voice in a triumphant +announcement. + +"Here at last!" he cried. "In giant land! And I'm ahead of Tom Swift +for all his tricks. I've got Tom Swift beat a mile." + +"Oh, you have!" shouted our hero with a sudden resolve, as he +stepped into view. "Well, you've got another guess coming. I'm here +ahead of you, and there's standing room only." + +"Tom Swift!" gasped the rival circus man. "Tom Swift here in ahead +of me!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +HELD CAPTIVES + + +There was a great commotion among the giants. Men, women and +children ran to and fro, and a number of the largest of the big men +could be seen hurrying into the palace hut of King Kosk. If the +arrival of Tom and his friends had created a surprise it was more +than doubled when the circus man, and his small caravan, advanced +into the giants' city. His approach had been unheralded because the +giants were so taken up with Tom and his party that no one thought +to guard the paths leading into the village. And, as a matter of +fact, the giants were so isolated, they were so certain of their own +strength, and they had been unmolested so many years, that they did +not dream of danger. + +As for our hero, he stood in the hut gazing at his rival, while Hank +Delby, in turn, stared at the young inventor. Then Hank dismounted +from his mule and approached Tom's hut. + +"Bless my railroad ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "This is a curious +state of affairs! What in the world are we to do, Tom?" + +"I don't know, I'm sure. We'll have to wait until we see what HE +does. He's been following us all along. He was that fake minister on +the boat. It's a wonder we didn't get on to him. I believe he's been +trying to learn our secret ever since Mr. Preston warned us about +him. Now he's here and he'll probably try to spoil our chances for +getting a giant so that he may get one for himself. Perhaps Andy +Foger gave him a tip about our plans." + +"But can't we stop him?" asked Ned. + +"I'm going to try!" exclaimed Tom grimly. + +"Here he comes," spoke Mr. Damon quickly. "I wonder what he wants?" + +Hank Delby had started toward the big hut that sheltered our +friends, while the gathered crowd of curious giants looked on and +wondered what the arrival of two white parties so close together +could mean. + +"Well, what do you want?" asked Tom, when, his rival had come within +speaking distance. + +"There's no use beating about the bush with you, Tom Swift," was the +frank answer. "I may as well out with it. I came after a giant, and +I'm going to get one for Mr. Waydell." + +"Then you took advantage of our trail, and followed us?" asked the +young inventor. + +"Oh, you can put it that way if you like," replied Delby calmly. "I +HAVE followed you, and a hard time I've had of it. I tried to do it +quietly, but you got on to my tricks. However it doesn't matter. I'm +here now, and I'm going to beat you out if I can." + +"I remember now!" exclaimed Ned whispering in Tom's ear, "he was +disguised as one of the mule drivers and you fired him because he +had a revolver. Don't you remember, Tom?" + +"That's right!" exclaimed the young inventor as he noted the face +and form of Delby more closely. Then our hero added: "You played a +low-down trick, Mr. Delby, and it won't do you any good. I caught +you trying to sneak along in my company and I'll catch you again. +I'm here first, and I've got the best right to try and get a giant +for Mr. Preston, and if you had any idea of fair play--" + +"All's fair in this business, Tom Swift," was the quick answer. "I'm +going to do my best to beat you, and I expect you to do your best to +beat me. I can't speak any fairer than that. It's war between us, +from now on, and you might as well know it. One thing I will promise +you, though, if there's any danger of you or your party getting hurt +by these big men I'll fight on your side. But I guess they are too +gentle to fight." + +"We can look after ourselves," declared Tom. "And since it's to be +war between us look out for yourself." + +"Don't worry!" exclaimed Tom's rival with a laugh. "I've gone +through a lot to get here, and I'm not going to give up without a +struggle. I guess--" + +But he did not finish his sentence for at that moment Oom, the big +hunting giant, came up behind him, tapped him on the shoulder, and +pointed to the king's hut, motioning to indicate that Mr. Delby was +wanted there. + +"Very good," said the circus agent in what he tried to make sound +like a jolly voice, "I'm to call on his majesty; am I? Here's where +I beat you to it, Tom Swift." + +Tom did not answer, but there was a worried look on his face, as he +turned to join his friends in the big hut. And, as he looked from a +window, and saw Delby being led into the presence of Kosk, Tom could +hear the strains of the big phonograph he had presented to the king. + +"I guess his royal highness will remain friends with us," said Ned +with a smile, as he heard the music. "He can see what a lot of +presents and other things we have, and as for that Delby, he doesn't +seem to have much of anything." + +"Oh, I haven't shown half the things I have as yet," spoke Tom. "But +I don't like this, just the same. Those giants may turn from us, and +favor him on the slightest pretence. I guess we've got our work cut +out for us." + +"Then let's plan some way to beat him," suggested Mr. Damon. "Look +over your goods, Tom, and make the king a present that will bind his +friendship to us." + +"I believe I will," decided the young inventor and then he and Ned +began overhauling the boxes and bales, while a crowd of curious +giants stood without their hut, and another throng surrounded the +palace of the giant king. + +"There goes Delby out to get something from his baggage," announced +Ned, looking from the window. Tom saw his rival taking something +from one of the packs slung across the back of a mule. Soon the +circus agent hurried back into the king's hut, and a moment later +there was heard the strains of a banjo being picked by an +unpracticed hand. It was succeeded by a rattling tune played in good +style. + +"Bless my fiddlestick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "Does your phonograph +have a banjo record, Tom?" + +"No." was the somewhat hesitating answer of the young inventor. +"Delby who can play a banjo himself must have given Kosk one for a +present, and, like a child, the king is amused by the latest +novelty. So far he has scored one on us," he added, as once more +they heard the unmelodious strains of the banjo slowly picked. "The +king is evidently learning to play the instrument, and he'd rather +have that than a phonograph, which only winds up." + +"But haven't you some other things you can give the king to off-set +the banjo?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"Plenty of them," replied Tom. "But if I give him--say a toy steam +engine, for I have one among our things--what is to prevent Delby +giving him some other novelty that will take his attention? In that +way we'll sea-saw back and forth, and I guess Delby has had more +experience in this business than I have. It's going to be a question +which of us gets a giant." + +"Bless my reserved seat ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I never heard +of such a thing! But, Tom, I'm sure we'll win out." + +"Get something startling to give the king," advised Ned, and Tom +began opening one of the boxes that had been transported with such +labor from the coast. + +"Delby had much better luck with his mule drivers than we did Tom," +remarked Ned as he saw the two natives standing by the pack animals +of the rival circus man. "They evidently didn't get scared off by +the giants." + +"No, but probably he didn't tell them where they were headed for. +Though, as a matter of fact, I don't believe any one has anything to +fear from these big men. All they ask is to be let alone. They're +not at all warlike, and I don't believe they'd attack the other +natives. But probably their size makes them feared, and when our +drivers heard the word 'giant' they simply wilted." + +"Guess you're right. But come on, Tom. If we're going to make the +king a present that will open his eyes, and get him on our side +instead of Delby's, we'd better be getting at it." + +"I will. This is what I'm going to give him," and Tom brought out +from a box a small toy circus, with many performing animals and +acrobats, the whole being worked by a small steam engine that burned +alcohol for fuel. A little water put in the boiler of the toy +engine, a lighting of the alcohol wick and there would be a toy that +even a youngster of the United States might be proud to own. + +"Mah land a massy!" exclaimed Eradicate as Tom got the apparatus +ready to work. "Dat shore will please him!" + +"It ought to," replied the young inventor. "Come on, now I'm ready." + +Delby had not yet come from the king's hut, and as Tom and his +friends, bearing the new toy, were about to leave the structure that +had been set aside for their use, they saw a crowd of the giant men +approaching. Each of the big men carried a club and a spear. + +"Bless my eye glasses!" gasped Mr. Damon. "Something is wrong. What +can it be?" + +He had his answer a moment later. With a firm but gentle motion the +chief giant shoved our four friends back into the hut, and then +pulled the grass mat over the opening. Then, as Tom and the others +could see by looking from a crack, he and several others took their +position in front, while other giants went to the various windows, +stationing themselves outside like sentries around a guard house. + +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but words failed him. + +"We're prisoners!" gasped Ned. + +"It looks like it," admitted Tom grimly. "Evidently Delby has +carried out his threat and set the king against us. We are to be +held captives here, and he can do as he pleases. Oh, why didn't I +think sooner." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +TOM'S MYSTERIOUS BOX + + +The young inventor walked slowly back to the middle of the hut--a +prison now it was--and sat down on a bench. The others followed his +example, and the elaborate toy, with which they had hoped to win the +king's favor, was laid aside. For a moment there was silence in the +structure--a silence broken only by the pacing up and down of the +giant guards outside. Then Eradicate spoke. + +"Massa Tom," began the aged negro, "can't we git away from heah?" + +"It doesn't seem so, Rad." + +"Can't we shoot some of dem giants wif de 'lectric guns, an' carry a +couple ob 'em off after we stun 'em like?" + +"No, Rad; I'm afraid violent measures won't do, though now that you +speak of the guns I think that we had better get them ready." + +"You're not going to shoot any of them, are you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon quickly. + +"No, but if they continue to turn against us as easily as they have, +there is no telling what may happen. If they attack us we will have +to defend ourselves. But I think they are too gentle for that, +unless they are unduly aroused by what misstatements Hank Delby may +make against us." + +"Misstatements?" inquired Ned. + +"Yes. I don't doubt but what he told the king a lot of stuff that +isn't true, to cause his majesty to make us captives here. Probably +he said we came to destroy the giant city with magic, or something +like that, and he represented himself as a simple traveler. He's +used to that sort of business, for he has often tried to get ahead +of Mr. Preston in securing freaks or valuable animals for the +circus. He wants to make it look bad for us, and good for himself. +So far he has succeeded. But I've got a plan." + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I'll tell you when I've got it more worked out. The thing to do now +is to get in shape to stand off the giants if they should attack us. +This hut is pretty strong, and we can risk a siege in here. Let's +arrange the boxes and bales into a sort of breastwork, and then +we'll take the electric rifles inside." + +This was soon done, and, though there was considerable noise +attending the moving about of the boxes and bales, the giant guards +did not seem at all alarmed. They did not even take the trouble to +stop the work, though they looked in the windows. In a short time +there was a sort of hollow square formed in the middle of the big +main room, and inside of this our friends could give battle. + +"And now for my plan of teaching these giants a lesson," said Tom, +when this work was finished. "Ned, help me open this box," and he +indicated one with his initials on in red letters. + +"That's the same one you saved from the fire in the ship," commented +Ned. + +"Yes, and I can't put it to just exactly the use I intended, as the +situation has changed--for the worse I may say. But this box will +answer a good purpose," and Tom and Ned proceeded to open the +mysterious case which the young inventor had transported with such +care. + +"Bless my cannon cracker!" exclaimed Mr. Damon who watched them. +"You're as careful of that as if it contained dynamite." + +"It does contain something like that," answered Tom. "It has some +blasting powder in, and I was going to use it to show the giants how +little their strength would prevail against the power which the +white man could secure from some harmless looking powder. There are +also a lot of fireworks in the box, and I intend to use them to +scare these big men. That's why I was so afraid when I heard that +there was a blaze near my box. I was worried for fear the ship would +be blown up. But I can't use the blasting powder--at least not now. +But we'll give these giants an idea of what Fourth of July looks +like. Come on, Ned, we'll take a look and see from which window it +will be safest to set off the rockets and other things, as I don't +want to set fire to any of the grass huts." + +Eradicate and Mr. Damon looked on wonderingly while Tom and his chum +got out the packages of fireworks which had been kept safe and dry. +As for the giant guards, if they saw through the windows what was +going on, they made no effort to stop Tom. + +Tom had brought along a good collection of sky rockets, aerial +bombs, Roman candles and similar things, together with the blasting +powder. The latter was put in a safe place in a side room, and then, +with some boards, the young inventor and his chum proceeded to make +a sort of firing stand. One big window opened out toward a vacant +stretch of woods into which it would not be dangerous to aim the +fireworks. + +Building the stand took some time, and they knocked off to make a +meal from the food that had been brought, and which they had been +about to eat when the circus man had appeared. The food was good, +and it made them feel better. + +"I hope they won't forget us to-morrow," observed Tom, for there was +enough of the first meal left for supper. "But if they do we have +some food of our own." + +"Oh, I don't think they mean to starve us," remarked Ned. "I think +they are just acting on suggestions from that circus man." + +"Perhaps," agreed Tom. "Well, they may sing another tune when we get +through with them." + +As night approached the giant guards about the hut were changed, and +again the women came, bearing platters of food. There was plenty of +it, showing that the king, however fickle his friendship might be, +did not intend to starve his captives. Tom and his friends had not +seen Delby come out of the royal palace, and they concluded that he +was still with his giant majesty. + +"Is it dark enough now, Tom?" asked Ned of his chum, as they sat +about the rude wooden platform which they had made to hold the +fireworks. "Shall we set them off?" + +"Pretty soon now. Wait until it gets a little darker, and the effect +will be better." The room was dimly lighted by a small portable +electric lamp, one of several Tom had brought along in his +mysterious box. The lamps were operated by miniature but powerful +dry batteries. The giant guards were still outside, but they showed +no disposition to interfere with our friends. + +"There's something going on at the palace," reported Mr. Damon, who +was watching the big hut. "There are a lot of giants around it with +torches." + +"Maybe they're going to escort Delby to a hut with the same honors +they paid us," suggested Tom. "If they do, we'll set off the +fireworks as he comes out and maybe they'll think he is afflicted +with bad magic, and they'll give us our freedom." + +"Good idea!" cried Ned. "Say, that's what they're going to do," he +added a moment later as, in the glare of a number of torches, there +could be seen issuing from the king's palace, the two big giants, +evidently his brothers. Between them was the figure of the circus +man, looking like a dwarf. He was not so far away but what the smile +of triumph on his face could be seen as he glanced in the direction +of the darkened hut where Tom and his friends were captives. + +"Now's our chance!" cried the young inventor. "Set 'em off, Ned. You +help, Mr. Damon. The more noise and fuss we make at once, the more +impressive it will be. Set off everything in sight!" + +There was a flicker of matches as they were applied to the fuses, +and then a splutter of sparks. An instant later it seemed as if the +whole heavens had been lighted up. + +Sky rockets shot screaming toward the zenith, aerial bombs went +whirling slantingly upward amid a shower of sparks, then to burst +with deafening reports, sending out string after string of colored +lights. Red and green fire gleamed, and the hot balls from Roman +candles burst forth. There was a whizz, a rush and a roar. Blinding +flashes and startling reports followed each other as Tom and his +friends set off the fireworks. It was like the Independence Day +celebration of some little country village, and to the simple giants +it must have seemed as if a volcano had suddenly gone into action. + +For several minutes the din and racket, the glare and explosions, +kept up, pouring out of the big window of the hut. And then, as the +last of the display was shot off, and darkness seemed to settle down +blacker than ever over the giant village, there arose howls of fear +and terror from the big men and their women and children. They cried +aloud in their thunderous voices, and there was fear in every cry. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +WEAK GIANTS + + +A great silence followed the setting off of the fireworks--silence +and darkness--and even the circus man ceased to shout. He wanted to +see what the effect would be. So did Tom and the others. When their +eyes had become used to the gloom again, after the glare of the +rockets and bombs, the young inventor said: + +"Look out of the windows, Ned, and see if our guards have run away." + +Ned did as requested, but for a few seconds he could make out +nothing. Then he cried out: + +"They've gone, but they're coming back again, and there are twice as +many. I guess they don't want us to escape, Tom, for fear we may do +a lot of damage." + +"Bless my hitching post!" cried Mr. Damon. "The guards doubled? We +ARE in a predicament, Tom." + +"Yes, I'm afraid so. The fireworks didn't just have the effect I +expected. I thought they'd be glad to let us go, fearing that we +could work magic, and might turn it on them. Most of the natives are +deadly afraid of magic, the evil eye, witch doctors, and stuff like +that. But evidently we've impressed the giants in the wrong way. If +we could only speak their language now, we could explain that unless +they let us go we might destroy their village, though of course we +wouldn't do anything of the kind. If we could only speak their +language but we can't." + +"Do you suppose they understood what Delby said?" asked Ned. + +"Not a bit of it! He was just desperate when he yelled out that way. +He saw that we had an advantage on him--or at least I thought we +did, but I guess we didn't," and Tom gazed out of the windows in +front of each of which stood two of the largest giants. By means of +the torches it could be seen that the circus man was being taken to +another hut, some distance away from the royal one. Then, after an +awed silence, there broke out a confused talking and shouting among +the giant population, that was drawn up in a circle a respectful +distance from the hut where the captives were confined. Doubtless +they were discussing what had taken place, hoping and yet fearing, +that there might be more fireworks. + +"Well, we might as well go to bed," declared Tom at length. "We +can't do any more to-night, and I'm dead tired. In the morning we +can talk over new plans. My box of tricks isn't exhausted yet." + +In spite of their strange captivity our friends slept well, and they +did not awaken once during the night, for they had worked hard that +day, and were almost exhausted. In the morning they looked out and +saw guards still about the hut. + +"Now for a good breakfast, and another try!" exclaimed Tom, as he +washed in a big earthen jar of water that had been provided. +Freshened by the cool liquid, they were made hungry for the meal +which was brought to them a little later. They noticed that the +women cooks looked at them with fear in their eyes, and did not +linger as they had done before. Instead they set down the trays of +food and hurried away. + +"They're getting to be afraid of us," declared Tom. "If we could +only talk their language--" + +"By Jove!" suddenly interrupted Ned. "I've just thought of +something. Jake Poddington you know--the agent for Mr. Preston who +so mysteriously disappeared." + +"Well, what about him?" asked Tom. "Did you see him?" + +"No, but he may be here--a captive like ourselves. If he is he's +been here long enough to have learned the language of the giants, +and if he could translate for us, we wouldn't have any trouble. Why +didn't we think of it before? If we could only find Mr. Poddington!" + +"Yes, IF we only could," put in Tom. "But it's a slim chance. I +declare I've forgotten about him in the last few days, so many +things have happened. But what makes you think he is here, Ned?" + +"Why he started for giant land, you'll remember, and he may have +reached here. Oh, if we could only find him, and save him and save +ourselves!" + +"It would be great!" admitted Tom. "But I'm afraid we can't do it. +There's a chance, though, that Mr. Poddington may be here, or may +have been here. If we could only get out and make some explorations +or some inquiries. It's tough to be cooped up here like chickens." + +Tom looked from the window, vainly hoping that the guards might have +been withdrawn. The giants were still before the windows and doors. + +For a week this captivity was kept up, and in that time Tom and his +friends had occasional glimpses of Hank Delby going to and from the +king's hut. His majesty himself was not seen, but there appeared to +be considerable activity in the giant village. + +From their prison-hut the captives could see the native market held +in the big open space, and giants from surrounding towns and the +open country came in to trade. There were also curious about the +white captives, and there was a constant throng around the big hut, +peering in. So also there was about the hut where the circus man had +his headquarters. Delby seemed to be free to come and go as he +choose. + +"I guess he's laying his plans to take a giant or two away with +him," remarked Tom one day. "I wonder what will become of us, when +he does go?" + +It was a momentous question, and no one could answer it. Tom was +doing some hard thinking those days. Two weeks passed and there was +no change. Our friends were still captives in giant land. They had +tried, by signs, to induce their guards to take some message to the +king, but the giants refused with shakes of their big heads. + +Yet the adventurers could not complain of bad treatment. They were +well fed, and the guards seemed good natured, laughing among +themselves, and smiling whenever they saw any of the captives. But +let Tom or some of the others, step across the threshold of the +door, and they were kindly, but firmly, shoved back. + +"It's of no use!" exclaimed Tom in despair one day, after a bold +attempt to walk out. "We've got to do something. If we can't get +word to the king we've got to plan some way to gain the friendship, +or work on the fear of the guards. We have about the same crowd +every time. If we can scare them they may keep far enough off so we +can have a chance to escape." + +"Escape! That's the thing!" cried Mr. Damon. "Why can't we put the +airship together in this hut, Tom, and fly away in it?" + +"We can, when the right time comes--if it ever does--but first we've +got to work on the guards. Let me see what I can do? Ha! I have it. +Ned, come here, I want your help. I'm going to show these giants +that, with all their strength, I can make each of them as weak as a +baby, and, at the same time prove that they can't lift even a light +weight." + +"How you going to do it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +"I'll soon show you. Come on, Ned." + +Tom and his chum were busy for several days among the various boxes +and bales that formed the baggage. They rigged up two pieces of +apparatus which I will describe in due time. They also opened +several boxes of trinkets and trading goods, which had been brought +along for barter. These they distributed among the guards, and, +though the giants were immensely pleased, they did not get friendly +enough to walk off and leave our friends free to do as they pleased. + +"Well, I guess we're ready for the lesson now," remarked Tom one +afternoon, when they had been held captives for about three weeks. +"If they won't respond to gentle treatment we'll try some other kind +of persuasion." + +The guards had become so friendly of late that some of them often +spent part of the day inside the hut, looking at the curious things +Tom and his party had brought with them. This was just what the +young inventor wanted, as he was now ready to give them a second +lesson in white man's magic. + +Tom and Ned had learned a few words of the giant's language, which +was quite simple, though it sounded hard, and one day, after he had +shown them simple toys, the young inventor brought forth a simple- +looking box, with two shining handles. + +"Here is a little thing," explained Tom, partly by words, and partly +by using signs, "a simple little thing which, if one of you will but +take hold of, you cannot let go of again until I move my finger. Do +you believe that a small white man like myself can make this little +thing stronger than a giant?" he asked. + +One of the biggest of the guards shook his head. + +"Try," invited Tom. "Take hold of the handles. At first you will be +able to let go easily. But, when I shall move my finger though but a +little, you will be held fast. Then, another movement, and you will +be loose again. Can I do it?" + +Once more the giant shook his head. + +"Try," urged Tom, and he put the two shining handles into the big +palms of the giant. The native grinned and some of his companions +laughed. Then to show how easy it was he let go. He took hold again. + +"Now!" cried Tom, and he moved his finger. + +Instantly the giant leaped up into the air. He uttered a howl that +seemed to shake the very roof of the hut, and his arms were as rigid +as poles. They were drawn up in knots, and though he tried with all +his great might, he could not loose his fingers from the shiny +handles. He howled in terror, and his companions murmured in +amazement. + +"It is as I told you!" exclaimed Tom. "Is it enough?" + +"Loose me! Loose me! Loose me from the terrible magic!" cried the +giant, and, with a movement of his finger, Tom switched off the +current from the electric battery. Instantly the giant's arms +dropped to his side, his hands relaxed and the handles dropped +clattering to the floor. + +With a look of fear, and a howl of anguish, the big guard fled, but +to the surprise and gratification of Tom and his friends the others +seemed only amused, and they nodded in a friendly fashion to the +captives. They all pressed forward to try the battery. + +One and all endeavored to loose their hands after Tom, by a movement +of his forefinger, had turned the switch of the battery, and one and +all of the giant guards were unable to stir, as the electricity +gripped their muscles. They were evidently awed. + +"This is working better than the fireworks did," murmured Tom. "Now +if I can only keep up the good work, and get ahead of Delby I'll be +all right. Now for the other test, Ned." + +Ned brought from a box what looked to be a small iron bar, with a +large handle on the top. The bottom was ground very smooth. + +"This is very small and light," explained Tom, partly by signs, and +partly by words. "I can easily lift it by one finger, and to a giant +it is but a feather's weight." + +He let the giants handle it, and of course they could feel scarcely +any weight at all, for it tipped the scales at only a pound. But it +was shortly to be much heavier. + +"See," went on the young inventor. "I place the weight on the floor, +and lift it easily. Can you do it?" + +The giants laughed at such a simple trick. Tom set the iron bar down +and raised it several times. So did several of the giants. + +"Now for the test!" cried Tom with a dramatic gesture. "I shall put +my magic upon you, and you shall all become as weak as babies. You +cannot lift the bar of iron!" + +As he spoke he made a signal to Ned, who stood in a distant corner +of the room. Then Tom carefully placed the weight on a sheet of +white paper on a certain spot on the floor of the hut and motioned +to the largest giant to pick up the iron bar. + +With a laugh of contempt and confidence, the big man stooped over +and grasped the handle. But he did not arise. Instead, the muscles +of his naked arm swelled out in great bunches. + +"See, you are as a little babe!" taunted Tom. "Another may try!" + +Another did, and another and another, until it came the turn of the +mightiest giant of all the guard that day. With a sudden wrench he +sought to lift the bar. He tugged and strained. He bent his back and +his legs; his shoulders heaved with the terrific effort he made--but +the bar still held to the floor of the hut as though a part of the +big beams themselves. + +"Now!" cried Tom. "I shall show you how a white man's magic makes +him stronger than the biggest giant." + +Once more he made a hidden sign to Ned, and then, stooping over, Tom +crooked his little finger in the handle of the iron bar and lifted +it as easily as if it was a feather. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +THE LONE CAPTIVE + + +The murmurs of astonishment that greeted Tom's seemingly marvelous +feat of strength was even greater than that which had marked his +trick with the electric battery. The giants stared at him as though +they feared the next moment he might suddenly turn upon them and +hurl them about like ten-pins. + +"You see, it is easy when one knows the white man's magic," spoke +Tom, making many gestures to help along. "Go tell your king that it +is not well that he keeps us prisoners here, for if he does not soon +let us go the magic may break loose and destroy his palace!" + +There was a gasp of dismay from the giants at this bold talk. + +"Better go easy, Tom," counseled Ned. + +"I'm tired of going easy," replied the young inventor. "Something +has got to happen pretty soon, or it will be all up with us. I'm +getting weary of being cooped up here. Not that the king doesn't +treat us well, but I don't want to be a prisoner. I want to get out +and see if we can't arrange to take a couple of these giants back +for Mr. Preston. That Delby sneak has things all his own way." + +And this was so, for the circus man had poisoned the king's mind +against Tom and his friends, representing (as our hero learned +later) that the first arrivals in giant land were dangerous people, +and not to be trusted. On his own part, Hank Delby intimated that he +would always be a friend to the king, would teach him many of the +white man's secrets, and would make him powerful. Thus the circus +man was making plans for his own ends, and he was scheming to get a +couple of giants for himself, who he intended to hurry away, leaving +Tom and his friends to escape as best they could. + +And Delby had brought with him some novelties in the way of toys and +machinery that seemed greatly to take the fancy of the king. Tom +realized this when he saw his rival free to come and go, and one +reason why our hero did the experiments just related was so that the +king might hear of them, and wonder. + +"Go tell the king that, strong as he is, I am stronger," went on Tom +boldly to the giant guards. "I am not afraid of him." + +"Bless my war club, Tom, aren't you a little rash to talk that way?" +asked Mr. Damon. + +"No. As I said, I want things to happen. If I can only get the king +curious enough to come here I can show him things to open his eyes. +I'll work the miniature circus, and explain that some of his +subjects can take part in a real one if they will come with us. I +want to beat this Delby at his own game." + +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "Stick to it, Tom. I'll help you, and +we'll get a giant or two yet. And maybe we can get some news of poor +Jake Poddington." + +"I intend to make inquiries about him, now that these guards are a +little more friendly," said Tom. "It may be that he is a prisoner in +this very village." + +The giant guards, now that they had gotten over their fright at +their own inability to raise the bar while Tom had lifted it with +one finger, again crowded around, asking that the trick be repeated. +Tom did it, with the same result. + +None of the giants could move the iron, yet Tom had no difficulty in +doing so. Of course my readers have already guessed how the trick +was done. It was worked by a strong magnet, hidden in the floor. At +a signal from Tom, Ned would switch on the current. The iron would +be held fast and immovable, but when Tom himself went to raise it +Ned would cut off the electricity and the bar was lifted as easily +as an ordinary piece of iron. But simple as the trick was, it +impressed the giants. Then Tom did some other stunts for them, +simple experiments in physics, that every High School lad has done +in class. + +"I want to get these guards friendly with me," he explained. "In +time the news will reach the king and he'll be so curious that he'll +come here and then--well, we'll see what will happen." + +But this did not take place as soon as Tom desired. In fact, the +giants were very slow to act. The guards did get quite friendly, and +every day they wanted the same two first tricks performed over +again. Tom did them many times, wondering when the king would come. + +Then he played a bold game, and made open inquiries about a white +man, one like the king's captives, who might have come to giant land +about a year previous. + +"Is there a lone white captive here?" asked Tom. + +The giant guard to whom he directed his question gave a start, for +Tom could now speak the language fairly well, and, after the first +indication of surprise, the guard muttered something to his +companions. There was a startled ejaculation, a curious glance at +the captives, and then--silence. The guards filed silently away, +and, a little later, could be seen going in the king's big hut. + +"By Jove, Tom!" cried Ned. "You touched 'em that time. There's +something up, as sure as you're born!" + +"I believe so myself," agreed the young inventor. "And now to throw +a real scare into these giants," he added, as he went to a distant +room of the hut where he had hidden some of the things he had taken +from his "box of tricks," as Ned dubbed it. + +"Bless my necktie!" cried Mr. Damon. "What's up now, Tom." + +"I'm going to show these giants that they'd better make friends with +us soon, or we may blow their whole town sky-high!" cried Tom. "I'm +going to use some of the blasting powder--just a pinch, so to speak- +-and knock an empty hut into slivers. I think that will impress +these fellows. If I can only--" + +"Look, Tom!" suddenly cried Ned. "The king's two brothers are coming +here. Something's up. He's sent some of the family to interview us. +Get ready to receive them." + +"Couldn't be better!" cried the young inventor. "I've been waiting +for this. Now I'll give them a surprise party." + +The two big brothers of the king, for such Tom and his friends had +recently learned was the relationship the giants on either side of +the "throne" bore to the ruler, were indeed headed toward the hut of +the captives. They came alone, in their royal garments of jaguar +skins, and, standing about the palace hut, could be seen the giant +guards who had doubtless carried the news of the question Tom had +asked. + +"Come on, Ned, we've got to get busy!" exclaimed Tom. "Connect the +electric battery, and get that magnet in shape. I'm going to make a +fuse for this blasting powder bomb, and if I can get those royal +brothers to plant it for me, there'll be some high jinks soon." + +Tom busied himself in making an improvised bomb, while Ned attended +to the electrical attachments, and Mr. Damon and Eradicate acted as +general assistants. + +The two giant brothers entered the hut and greeted Tom and the +others calmly. Then they explained that the king had sent them to +investigate certain stories told by the guard. + +"I'll show you!" exclaimed Tom, and he induced them to take hold of +the handles of the battery. The current was turned on full strength, +and from the manner in which the royal brothers writhed and howled +Tom judged that the experiment was a success. + +"With all your strength you can not let go until I move my finger," +the young inventor explained, and it was so. Even the skeptical +giants agreed on that. + +"Now I shall show you that I am stronger than you!" exclaimed Tom, +and though the giants smiled increduously so it was, for the magnet +trick worked as well as before. There were murmurs of surprise from +the two immense brothers, and they talked rapidly together. + +"I will now show you that I can call the lightning from the sky to +do my bidding," went on Tom. "Is that possible to any of you +giants?" + +"Never! Never! No man can do it!" cried Tola and Koku together. + +"Then watch me!" invited Tom. "Is there an empty hut near here?" he +asked. "One that it will do no harm to destroy?" + +Tola pointed to one visible from the window of the prison of our +friends. + +"Then take this little ball, with the string attached to it, and +place it in the hut," went on Tom. "Then flee for your lives, for +standing from here, I shall call the lightning down, and you shall +see the hut destroyed." + +"Why don't you ask them something about Jake Poddington?" asked Ned. + +"Time enough for that after I've shown them what a little powder +will do, when I attach electric wires to it and press a button," +replied Tom. "I've got that bomb fixed so it will go off by an +electric fuse. If they'll only put it in the hut for me. I'd do it +myself, only they won't let me go out." + +The brothers conferred for a moment and then, seeming to arrive at a +decision, Koku, who was slightly the larger, took the bomb, looked +curiously at it, and walked with it toward the empty hut, the +electric wire being reeled out behind him by Tom. + +The bomb was left inside the frail structure, the two brothers +hurried away, and, standing at a safe distance from the hut of the +captives, as well as the one that Tom had promised to destroy by +lightning, they waved their hands to show that they were ready. + +"Bless my admission ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You've got quite +an audience, Tom." + +And so he had, for there was a crowd in the market square, another +throng about the king's palace, while all about, hidden behind trees +or huts, was nearly the whole population of the giant town. + +"That's what I want," said the young inventor. "It will be all the +more impressive." + +"And there's the king himself!" exclaimed Ned. "He's standing in the +door of his royal hut." + +"Better yet!" cried Tom. "Are those wires all connected, Ned?" + +"Yes," answered his chum, after a quick inspection. + +"Then here she goes!" cried Tom, as he pressed the button. + +Instantly the hut, in which the bomb had been placed, arose in the +air. The roof was lifted off, the sides spread out and there was a +great flash of fire and a puff of smoke. + +Then as the smoke cleared away Ned cried out: + +"Look, Tom! Look! You've blown a hole in the hut next to the one you +destroyed!" + +"Yes, and bless my check book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "some one is +running out of it. A white man, Tom! A white man!" + +"It's Poddington! Poor Jake Poddington. We've found him at last! +This way, Mr. Poddington! This way! Mr. Preston sent us to rescue +you!" cried Tom. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +A ROYAL CONSPIRACY + + +Howls of terror, cries of anger, and a rushing to and fro on the +part of the giants, followed the latest trick of Tom Swift to +impress them with his power. But to all this the young inventor and +his friends paid no attention. Their eyes were fixed on the ragged +figure of the white man who was rushing toward their hut as fast as +his legs, manacled as they were, would let him. + +"Come on! Come on!" cried Tom. + +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "Some of the giants are after him, Tom!" + +Several of the big men, after their first fright, had recovered +sufficiently to pursue the captive so strangely released by the +explosion. + +"Hand me an electric rifle, Ned!" cried Tom, + +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You're not going to kill +any of the giants; are you, Tom?" + +"Well, I'm not going to let them capture Jake Poddington again," was +the quick answer, "but I guess if I stun a few of them with the +electric bullets that will answer." + +Poddington (for later the white captive did prove to be the missing +circus man) ran on, and close behind him came two of the giants, +taking long strides. Tom aimed his electric rifle at the foremost +and pulled the trigger. There was no sound, but the big man crumpled +up and fell, rolling over and over. With a yell of rage his +companion pressed on, but a moment later, he, too, went down, and +then the others, who had started in pursuit of their recent captive, +turned back. + +"I thought that would fix 'em," murmured Tom gleefully. + +In another five seconds Poddington was inside the hut, gasping from +his run. He was very thin and pale, and the sudden exertion had been +too much for him. + +"Water--water!" he gasped, and Mr. Damon gave him some. He sank on +one of the skin-covered benches, and his half-exhausted breath +slowly came back to him. + +"Boys," he gasped. "I don't know who you are, but thank heaven you +came just in time. I couldn't have stood it much longer. I heard you +yell something about Preston. Is it possible he sent you to find +me?" + +"Partly that and partly to get a giant," explained Tom. "We didn't +know you were in that hut, or we'd never have blown up the one next +to it, though we suspected you might be held captive somewhere +around here, from the queer way the giants acted when we asked about +you." + +"And so you blew up that hut?" remarked the circus agent. "I thought +it was struck by lightning. But it did me a good turn. I was chained +to the wall of the hut next door, and your explosion split the beam +to which my chains were fastened. I didn't lose any time running +out, I can tell you. Oh, but it's good to be free once more and to +see someone my own size!" + +"How did you get here, and why did they keep you a prisoner?" asked +Tom. Then Poddington told his story, while Ned and Mr. Damon aided +Tom in filing off the rude iron shackles from his wrists and ankles. + +As Mr. Preston had heard, Jake Poddington had started for giant +land. But he lost his way, his escort of natives deserted him, just +as Tom's did, and he wandered on in the jungle, nearly dying. Then, +merely by accident, he came upon giant land, but he had the +misfortune to incur the anger of the big men who took him for an +enemy. They at once made him a prisoner, and had kept him so ever +since, though they did not harm him otherwise, and gave him good +food. + +"I think they were a bit afraid of me in spite of my small size," +explained the circus man. "I never thought to be rescued, for, +though I figured that Mr. Preston might hear of my plight, he could +never find this place. How did you get here?" + +Then Tom told his story, and of how they themselves were held +captives because of the treachery of Hank Delby. + +"That's just like him!" cried Poddington. "He was always mean, and +always trying to get the advantage of his rivals. But I'm glad I'm +with you. With what stuff you have here it oughtn't to be difficult +to get away from giant land." + +"But I want a giant," insisted Tom. "I told Mr. Preston I'd bring +him back one, and I'm going to do it." + +"You can't!" cried the circus man. "They won't come with you, and +it's almost impossible to make a prisoner of one. You'd better +escape. I want to get away from giant land. I've had enough." + +"We'll get away," said Tom confidently, "and we'll have a giant or +two when we go." + +"You'll have some before you go I guess!" suddenly interrupted Ned. +"There's a whole crowd of 'em headed this way, and they've got +clubs, bows and arrows and those blow guns! I guess they're going to +besiege us." + +"All right!" cried Tom. "If they want to fight we can give 'em as +good as they send. Ned, you and Mr. Damon and I will handle the +electric rifles. Eradicate, use your shotgun, and fire high. We +don't want to hurt any of the big men. We'll merely stun them with +the electric bullets, but the noise of Rad's gun will help some." + +"What can I do?" asked Mr. Poddington. + +"You're too weak to do much," replied Tom. "You just keep on the +lookout, and tell us if they try any surprises. I guess we can +handle 'em all right." + +With shouts and yells the big men came on. Evidently their +indifference toward their captives had turned to anger because of +the freeing of Poddington, and now they were determined to use harsh +measures. They advanced with wild yells, brandishing their clubs and +other weapons, while the weird sound of the tom-toms and natives +drums added to the din. + +When a short distance from the hut the giants stopped, and began +firing arrows and darts from the blow guns. + +"Look out for those!" warned Tom. "They probably are poisoned, and a +scratch may mean death. Give 'em a few shots now, Ned and Mr. Damon! +Rad, give 'em a salute, but fire high!" + +"Dat's what I will, Massa Tom!" + +The gun of the colored man barked out a noisy welcome, and, at the +same time three giants fell, stunned by the electric bullets, for +the rifles were adjusted to send out only mild charges. + +Thrice they charged, and each time they were driven back, and then, +finding that the captives were ever ready for them, they gave up the +attempt to overwhelm them, and hurried away, many going into the +king's hut. His royal majesty did not show himself during the fight. + +"Well, I guess they won't try that right away again," remarked Tom, +as he saw the stunned giants slowly arouse themselves and crawl +away. "We've taught them a lesson." + +They felt better after that, and then, when they had eaten and +drank, they began to consider ways and means of escape. But Tom +would not hear of going until he could get at least one giant for +the circus. + +"But you can't!" insisted Mr. Poddington. + +"Well, it's too soon to give up yet," declared Tom. "I'd like to +take the king's two brothers with me." + +"By Jove!" exclaimed Mr. Poddington, "I never thought of that. There +is just a bare chance. Did you know that the two brothers, who are +twins, dislike the king, for he is younger than they, and he +practically took the throne away from them. They should rule jointly +by rights. If we could enlist Tola and Koku on our side we might win +out yet." + +"Then we'll try!" exclaimed Tom. + +Jake Poddington, who had been a captive in the giant city long +enough to know something of its history, and had learned to talk the +language, explained how Kosk had ursurped the throne. His brothers +were subject to him, he said, but several times they had tried in +vain to start a revolution. To punish them for their rebellious +efforts the king made them his personal servants, and this explained +why he sent them to see the tricks Tom performed. + +"If we could only get into communication with the big twins," went +on the circus man, "we could offer to take them with us to a country +where they would be bigger kings than their brother is here. It's a +royal conspiracy worth trying." + +"Then we'll try it!" cried Tom enthusiastically. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE TWIN GIANTS + + +Daring indeed was the scheme decided on by the captives, and yet its +very boldness might make it possible for them to carry it out. The +king would never suspect them of plotting to carry off his two royal +brothers, and this made it all the easier to lay their plans. In +this they were much helped by Poddington, who knew the language and +who had made a few friends among the more humble people of the +village, though none dared assist him openly. + +"The first thing to do," said the circus man, "is to get into +communication with the twins." + +That proved harder than they expected, for a week passed, and they +did not have a glimpse of Tola and Koku. Meanwhile the giant guard +was still maintained about the hut night and day. No more food was +given the prisoners, and they would have starved had not Tom +possessed a good supply of his own provisions. It was evidently the +intention of the king to starve his captives into submission. + +"Suppose you do get those big brothers to accompany you, Tom?" asked +Ned one day. "How are you going to manage to get away, and take them +with you?" + +"My aeroplane!" answered Tom quickly. "I've got it all planned out. +You and I with Mr. Damon, Mr. Poddington and Eradicate will skip +away in the aeroplane. We can put it together in here, and I've got +enough gasolene to run it a couple of hundred miles if necessary." + +"But the giants--you can't carry them in it." + +"No, and I'm not going to try. If they'll agree to go they can set +off through the woods afoot. We'll meet them in a certain place-- +where there's a good land mark which we can easily distinguish from +the aeroplane. We'll take what stuff we can with us, and leave the +rest here. Oh, it can be done, Ned." + +"But when you start out with the aeroplane they'll make a rush and +overwhelm us." + +"No, for I'll do it so quickly that they won't have a chance. I'm +going to saw through the beams of one side of this hut. To the rear +there is level ground that will make a fine starting place. When +everything is ready, say some night, we'll pull the side wall down, +start the aeroplane out as it falls, and sail away. Then we'll pick +up the giant brothers out in the woods, and travel to civilization +again." + +"By Jove! I believe that will work!" cried the circus man. + +"Bless my corn plaster, I think so myself!" added Mr. Damon. + +"But first we've got to get the brothers to agree," went on Tom, +"and that is going to be hard work." + +It was not so difficult as it was tedious. Through an aged woman, +with whom he had made friends when a captive, Jake Poddington +managed to get word to the royal twins that he and the other +captives would like to see them privately. Then they had to wait for +an answer. + +In the meanwhile the giants tried several times to surprise Tom and +his friends by attacks, but the captives were on the alert, and the +electric rifles drove them back. + +One night nearly all the guards were observed to be absent. There +were not more than half a dozen scattered about the hut. + +"I wonder what that means?" asked Tom, who was puzzled. + +"I know!" exclaimed Jake Poddington after a moment's thought. "It's +their big annual feast. Even the king goes to it. They were just +getting over it when I struck here last year, and maybe that's what +set them so against me. Boys, this may be our chance!" + +"How?" asked Ned. + +"The king's brothers may find an opportunity to come and talk to us +when the feast is at its height," was the reply. + +Anxiously they waited, and in order that the royal brothers might +come in unobserved, if they did conclude to speak to the captives, +Tom and his companions hung some pieces of canvas over the windows +and doors, and had only a single light burning. + +It was at midnight that a cautious knock sounded at the side of the +hut and Tom glided to the main door. In the shadows he saw the two +royal brothers, Tola and Koku. + +"Here they are!" whispered Tom to Jake Poddington, who came forward. + +"Come!" invited the circus man in the giants' tongue, and the +brothers entered the hut. + +How Jake persuaded them to throw in their fortunes with the captives +the circus man hardly knew himself. Perhaps it was due as much as +anything to the dislike they felt toward the king, and the mean way +he had treated them. + +"Come, and you will be kings among the small men in our country," +invited Poddington. The brothers looked at each other, talked +together in low tones, and then Koku exclaimed: + +"We will come, and we will help you to escape. We have spoken, and +we will talk with you again." + +Then they glided out into the darkness, while from afar came the +sounds of revelry at the big feast. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +A SURPRISE IN THE NIGHT + + +Tom and his friends could scarcely believe their good fortune. It +seemed incredible that they should have induced two of the biggest +giants to accompany them back, and, not only that, but that they had +the promise of the strong men to aid them. + +"Now we must get busy," declared Tom, when their visitors had gone. +"We've got lots of work to do on the aeroplane, and we must try out +the engine. Then we've got to fix the side of the hut so it will +fall out when we're ready for it. And we've got to plan how to meet +the giants later in the forest." + +"Yes," agreed the circus man, "and we must take care that Hank Delby +doesn't spoil our plans." + +Then ensued busy days. In the seclusion of their hut the prisoners +could work undisturbed at the aeroplane, which had been almost +assembled. + +The engine was installed and tried, and, when the motor began its +thundering explosions, there was consternation among the giants, who +had again surrounded the hut to see that the prisoners did not +escape. + +Meanwhile Delby seemed to be unusually active. He could be observed +going in and out from his hut to that of the king, and he often +carried large bundles. + +"He's making himself solid with his royal highness," declared Tom. +"Well, if all goes right, we won't have to worry much longer about +what he does." + +"If only those twin giants don't fail us," put in Ned. + +"Oh, you can depend on them," said Mr. Poddington. "These giants are +curious creatures, but once they give their word they stick to it." + +He told much about the strange big men, confirming Tom's theory that +favorable natural conditions, for a number of generations, had +caused ordinary South American natives to develope into such large +specimens. + +Our friends were under quite a nervous tension, for they could not +be sure of what would happen from day to day. They continued to work +on the aeroplane, and then, finding that it would work in the +seclusion of the hut, they were anxious for the time to come when +they could try it in the open. + +"Do you think it will carry the five of us with safety?" asked the +circus man, as he gazed rather dubiously at the somewhat frail- +appearing affair. + +"Sure!" exclaimed Tom. "We'll get away all right if I can get enough +of a start. Now we must see to opening the side of the hut." + +This work had to be done cautiously, yet the prisoners had a certain +freedom, for the guards were afraid to approach too closely. + +The supporting and cross beams were sawed through, for Tom had +brought a number of carpenter tools along with him. Then, in the +silence of the night, the two royal brothers brought other beams +that could be put in place temporarily to hold up the roof when the +others were pulled out to allow the aeroplane to rush forth. + +In due time all was in readiness for the attempt to escape. The +royal twins had agreed to slip off at a certain signal, and await +Tom and his party in the forest at the foot of a very large hill, +that was a landmark for miles around. The giants could travel fast, +but not as fast as the aeroplane, so it was planned that they were +to have a day and night's start. They would take along food, and +would arrange to have a number of Tom's mules hidden in the woods, +so that our hero and his friends would have means of transportation +back to the coast, after they had ended their flight in the airship. + +"I wish we had brought along the larger one, so we could take the +giants with us," said Tom, "but I guess they're strong enough to +walk to the coast. We'll take what provisions we can carry, our +electric rifles, and the rest of the things we'll leave here for the +king, though he doesn't deserve them." + +"What do you think Delby will do?" asked Ned. + +"Give it up. He's got some plan though. I only hope he doesn't get a +giant. Then ours will be a greater attraction." + +Several days passed, and the last of the preparations had been made. + +"The giant twins will pretend to go off on a hunting trip to-morrow +morning," said the circus man one night, "but they won't come back. +They'll wait for us at the big hill." + +"Then we must escape the following morning," decided Tom. "Well, I'm +ready for it." + +From their hut, surrounded as it was still by the giant guards, our +friends watched the royal brothers start off, seemingly on a hunting +expedition. + +The day passed slowly. Tom went carefully over the aeroplane, to see +that it was in shape for a quick flight, and he looked to the wall +of the hut--the wall that was to be pulled from place to afford +egress for the air craft. + +They went to bed early that night--the night they hoped would be +their last in giant land. It must have been about midnight when Tom +suddenly awoke. He thought he heard a noise outside the hut and in a +moment he had jumped up. + +"Repel boarders!" cried Tom. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE AIRSHIP FLIGHT + + +For a few moments there was confusion inside the hut that was to be +the last stronghold of our friends against the approaching force of +giants. Confusion and not a little fear were mingled, for Tom's +words sent a chill to every heart. Then, after the first panic, +there came a calmer feeling--a feeling that each one would do his +duty in the face of danger and, if he had to die, he would die +fighting. + +"Everyone take a window!" yelled Tom. "Don't kill any one if you can +help it. Shoot to disable, Rad. Mr. Poddington, there's an extra +shotgun somewhere about! See if you can find it. We'll use the +electric rifles. Get those Roman candles somebody!" + +Tom was like a general giving orders, and once his friends realized +that he was managing things they felt more confidence. Ned grasped +his electric rifle, as did Mr. Damon, and they stood ready to use +them. + +"The strongest stunning charge!" ordered the young inventor. +"Something that will lay 'em out for a good while. We'll teach 'em a +lesson!" + +BANG! + +That was Eradicate's shotgun going off. It had a double load in it, +and the wonder of it was that the barrel did not burst. It sounded +like a small cannon, but it had the good effect of checking the +first rush of giants, for the electric rifles had not yet been +adjusted, and Mr. Poddington, in the light of the single electric +torch that had been left burning, could find neither the spare +shotgun nor the Roman candles. + +BANG! + +Eradicate let the other barrel go, almost in the faces of the +advancing giants, but over their heads, for he bore in mind Tom's +words not to injure. + +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom. "Come on now, Ned, we're ready for +'em!" + +But the giants had retreated, and could be seen standing in groups +about the hut, evidently planning what to do next. Then from back in +the village there shone a glare of light. + +"Bless my insurance policy! It's a fire!" cried Mr. Damon. "They're +going to burn us out!" + +"Jove! If they do!" exclaimed Ned. + +"We mustn't let 'em!" shouted Tom. "Fire, Ned!" + +Together the chums discharged their electric rifles at the enemy and +a number of them fell, stunned, and were carried away by their +companions. + +The glaring light approached and now it could be seen that it was +caused by a number of the big men carrying torches of some kind of +blazing wood. It did look as though they intended to fire the prison +hut. + +"Give 'em another taste of it!" shouted Ned, and this time the three +electric rifles shot out their streaks of blue flame, for Mr. Damon +had his in action. It was still dark in the hut, for to set aglow +more of the electric torches meant that Tom and his friends would be +exposed to view, and would be the targets for the arrows, or darts +from the deadly blow guns. + +Several more of the giants toppled over, and then began a retreat to +some distance, the first squad of fighters going to meet the men who +had come up with the torches. There was no sign of women or +children. + +"Shall we fire again?" asked Ned. + +"No," answered Tom. "Save your ammunition until they are closer, and +we'll be surer of our marks. Besides, if they let us alone that's +all we ask. We don't want to hurt 'em." + +"Bless my gizzard!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I wonder why they attacked +us, anyhow?" + +"Maybe it's about the two giant brothers who have not come back," +suggested Mr. Poddington. "They may imagine that we have them +captive, and they want to rescue them." + +"That's so," admitted Tom. "Well, if they had only postponed this +reception for a few hours we'd have been out of their way, and they +wouldn't have had this trouble," and he glanced at the aeroplane, +that stood in the big hut, ready for instant flight. + +"They're coming back!" suddenly shouted Ned, and a look from the +half-opened windows showed the giants again advancing. + +"I've got the Roman candles!" called Mr. Poddington from a corner +where he had been rummaging in that box of Tom's which contained so +many surprises. "What shall I do with 'em?" + +"Let 'em go right in their faces!" yelled Tom. "They won't do much +damage, but they'll throw a scare into the big fellows! Get ready, +Ned!" + +"They're dividing!" shouted his chum. "They're coming at us from two +sides!" + +"They're only trying to confuse us," decided Tom. "Fire at the main +body!" And with that he opened up with his electric rifle, an +example followed by Mr. Damon and Ned. + +With a whizz, and several sharp explosions, the circus man got the +Roman candles into action. The glaring fire of them lighted up the +scene better than did the flaming torches of the giants, and truly +it was a wonderful sight. There, in that lonely hut, in the midst of +a South American jungle, four intrepid white persons, and an aged +but brave negro, stood against hundreds of giants--mighty men, who, +had they come to a personal contact, any one of which would have +been more than a match for the combined strength of Tom and his +party. It was a weird picture that the young inventor looked out +upon, but his heart did not quail. + +Giant after giant went down under the fierce rain of the electric +bullets, stunned, but not otherwise injured. There was a shower of +sparks, and a hail of burning balls from the Roman candles, but +still the advance was kept up. Eradicate was banging away with his +shotgun. + +"Dis suah am hot work!" cried the colored man, as his hand came in +contact with the barrel. "Wow! It's most RED hot!" he added with a +cry of pain. + +"Use the other gun," advised Tom, never turning his head from the +window through which he was aiming. "That one may get choked, and +explode in here." + +"All right," answered Eradicate. + +"Duck!" yelled Ned with sudden energy. "They're going to fire!" A +number of the giants could be seen fitting arrows to bow strings, +while others raised to their lips the long hollow reeds, from which +the blow guns were made. It was the first time the enemy had fired +and doubtless they had held back because they hoped to capture Tom +and his friends alive. But they did not count on such a stubborn +resistance. + +Every one moved away from the windows, and not an instant too soon, +for, a moment later, a shower of arrows and darts came in, +fortunately injuring no one. + +Then, above the shouting and yelling of the giants, whose deep, bass +voices had a terrorizing effect, there came the din of the tom-toms, +making a weird combination of sound. + +"We've got 'em on the run again!" cried Ned, and so it proved, for +the larger body of giants, who had approached the hut from the front +and two sides, were running back. + +"Guess they've given it up," exclaimed Tom. "I'm glad of it, too, +for--" + +He paused and glanced behind him. A tiny spurt of flame at the base +of the rear wall of the hut had caught his eye. Instantly the flame +grew larger, and a puff of smoke followed. + +"Fire!" cried Ned. "We're on fire!" + +"Bless my water bucket!" gasped Mr. Damon. "They've set fire to the +hut!" + +It was but too true. While Tom and the others had been standing off +the giants in front, a smaller force had crept around to the rear, +and set the inflamable side of the hut ablaze. + +Desperately Tom looked around. There was no means at hand of +fighting fire. Hardly a bucket of water was in the place, and the +structure was filled with quick-burning stuff, while the fireworks +that remained, and the blasting powder, made it doubly dangerous. +Then Tom's eyes lighted on the big aeroplane, ready for instant +service. + +"That's it!" he cried suddenly. "It's our only hope, and the last +one! Come on, everybody! Down with that wall! Pull on the ropes and +it will come! We've got to go now. In another minute it will be too +late. Climb up, Mr. Poddington, Mr. Damon, Ned, and I will start the +machine." + +"The wall first! The wall!" cried Ned. + +"Sure," answered Tom. He and his friends grasped the two ropes that +had been attached to the key-beams in the structure. It had been so +arranged that when the supports were pulled out the wall would fall +outward, making a fairly smooth and level gangplank, on which the +aeroplane could rush from the hut. + +There was a creaking of timbers, a straining of ropes, and then, +with a crash, the wall fell. Instantly there was a yell of surprise +from the giants, and a brighter glare from the torches, as those +carrying them rushed up to see what had happened. The din of the +tom-toms was well-nigh deafening. Fortunately the enemy forgot to +take advantage of the opening and pour in a flight of arrows or +darts. + +"Start the motor!" cried Tom to his chum. + +There was a rattling, banging noise, like a salvo of small arms, and +the big propellers revolved with incredible swiftness. The two white +men were already in place, and now Eradicate, still carrying his +shotgun, clambered up. + +"Up with you, Ned!" yelled Tom. "I'm going to head her around and +make a flying start." + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +TOM'S GIANT--CONCLUSION + + +"I don't see anything of them, do you?" + +"No, and yet this is the place where they said they'd meet us." + +It was Tom who asked the question, and Ned who answered it. It was +the day after their sensational escape from the giants' prison, and +they were circling about in the aeroplane which had been the means +of getting them away from giant land. For they were safely away from +that strange and terrible place, and they were now seeking the two +giant brothers who had promised to meet them at a certain big hill. + +For an hour that night Tom and his friends had traveled on the wings +of the Lark and when a rising moon showed them a level spot for a +landing, they had gone down and made a camp. They had provisions +with them, and plenty of blankets and it was so warm that more +shelter was not necessary. + +The next day, leaving Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man in the +temporary camp, Tom and Ned had gone aloft to see if they could pick +up the giant twins, who were to meet them and have some mules ready +for the journey back to civilization. + +"Well, we're in no great hurry," went on Tom, after vainly scanning +the ground below. "They may not have traveled as fast as we thought +they could, and the mules may have given trouble. We'll stick around +here a day or so, and--" + +"Look!" suddenly exclaimed Ned. "Didn't you see something moving +then." + +"Where?" + +"By that big dead tree." + +Tom took a look through a pair of field glasses, while Ned steered +the aeroplane. Then the young inventor cried: + +"It's all right. It's one of the giants, but I can't tell which one. +Ned, I believe they're hiding because they're afraid of us. They've +never seen an aeroplane in action before. I'm going down." + +Quickly and gracefully the Lark was volplaned to a level place near +the dead tree. No one was in sight, and Tom, after looking about, +called: + +"Tola! Koku! Where are you? It is I, Tom Swift! We have escaped! +Where are you? Don't be afraid!" + +There was a moment's silence, and then two big forms rushed from the +dense bushes, one of them--Koku--advancing to Tom, and catching him +up in what was meant for a loving hug. + +"Oh, I say now, Koku!" cried the young inventor, with a laugh. "I've +got ribs, you know. Easy on that squeeze!" + +The two giant twins laughed too, and they were immensely pleased to +see their friends again, both talking at once and so fast that not +even the circus man could catch what they said. + +"Have you got the mules?" asked Tom, for he knew that much depended +on the animals. "Is everything all right?" + +"All right," answered Koku, the talk being conducted in the language +of the giants of which Tom was now fairly a master when it was +spoken slowly. Then the brothers explained that they had gotten +safely away, had gathered up the mules, and with a supply of food, +had hidden the beasts in a nearby valley. The giant twins were +waiting for Tom to arrive, but, though they had seen the areoplanes +in the hut they had no idea that it could fly so nearly like a bird, +and when they saw it hovering over them they had become frightened, +and hidden, until Tom's voice had reassured them. + +"Well, get the animals," advised Tom, after he had told of the fight +of the night before, and the escape. "I'll go find the others and +we'll start from here. Then we'll hike for the United States as fast +as we can." + +Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man were soon brought to the +place where the giant brothers had made their camp, and it was +decided to remain there a few days until the aeroplane could be +taken apart for transportation, for Tom had no idea of abandoning +it. Of course it could not be packed up very well, as there were no +boxes or bales at hand. But it was made small enough so that the +parts could be slung across the backs of several mules, there being +a number of the pack animals available, some being the same ones Tom +had purchased after his native escort had deserted him. + +It was the morning they had decided to begin their march for the +coast. Everything was in readiness, they had some food, and with the +shotguns and the electric rifles which they had brought along, they +could get game. All their other things, save a few necessaries, had +been left behind. Eradicate, as he had always done, rode his mule up +beside Tom, to look after his young master. + +Suddenly Koku, who seemed to have become very fond of Tom, strode +forward and took his place on the other side of the mule ridden by +the young inventor. + +"Me stay by you," he said with a grin on his big face. "Me like you! +Me take care of you, Tom--be your servant. Him too old," and he +motioned to Eradicate. + +"Eh! What's dat yo' done said?" gasped the colored man. "Me too old? +Looky heah, giant man, I'd hab yo' know dat I's been in de Swift +fambly a good many years, an' I's jest as spry as I eber was. I kin +look after Massa Tom as good as eber. Now yo' git back where yo' +belongs, giant man, an' doan't let me heah no mo' ob dat foolishness +talk. Nobody waits on Massa Tom Swift but me. Does yo' heah dat, +giant man?" + +"Me Tom's man!" exclaimed the big fellow, and in fairly good +English. Tom laughed. He had no idea the giant had picked up any +words. + +"Go on away!" cried Eradicate. + +Koku gave the colored man one look, then, with a good natured grin +on his face, he reached over one hand, calmly lifted Eradicate from +his mule and set him on the ground. Then, with a push, he shoved the +mule galloping ahead, and took his place at the side of the young +inventor. + +"Well, what do you know about that?" gasped Ned. + +"Bless my coffee cup!" cried Mr. Damon. + +Eradicate stood still for a moment, gazing first at his master and +then at the big being who had so ruthlessly plucked him from the +mule's back, as easily as he would have lifted a child. Then +Eradicate, with a trace of tears in his eyes, stretched forth his +hands toward Tom, and turned aside. That was too much for our hero. + +With one leap he was off his animal, and the next minute he had his +arms around the faithful old colored man. + +"By Jove, Rad!" cried Tom, and his own eyes were not dry. "I'm not +going to be deserted by you in that way. You're just the same as +ever to me, giant or no giant, and don't you forget it!" and he +patted the old man on the back affectionately. + +"Praise de Lord fo' heahin' yo' say dat, Massa Tom," gasped +Eradicate. "Praise de dear Lord!" + +And then, knowing that he still held a place in his young master's +heart, the colored man was content. And from then on he rode on one +side of Tom, while the giant, Koku, strode along on the other. He +had established himself as Tom's bodyguard and even though Eradicate +insisted on remaining, Koku would not go away. + +"I guess I'll have to keep 'em both," said Tom, with a grin, "but +I'm going to change Koku's name." + +"What are you going to call him?" asked Ned. + +"Let's see, what month is this?" + +"August," said Mr. Damon. + +"Then August is his name!" exclaimed Tom. "Koku sounds too much like +a cocoanut cake. Here, August, shift that package on the white +mule," he called, "it's cutting her back," and the giant, with a +pleased grin, did as he was bid. And August he was called from then +on. + +But my story is getting too long, so I must bring it to a close. And +really there is not much to tell. The march back to the coast was +full of hardships, danger and difficulties, but they accomplished +it. The two giants seemed glad that they had left their own country +behind and they were simple and affectionate beings. Tom made up his +mind he would let the circus man have one and keep the other for his +personal attendant. + +They traveled by day, and slept at night, shooting game as they +needed it. Several times they narrowly escaped getting mixed up in +the native conflicts. Tom had one striking evidence of his giant +servant's usefulness. One day he was stalking a small beast, like a +deer, when, from a tree overhead, a jaguar sprang down at him. But +Koku--I beg his pardon--August was at hand, and, like Sampson of +old, the giant slew the beast bare-handed, choking it to death. + +In fine time our friends reached a native town and the wonder caused +by the giants was no less than the amusement of the big men at the +things they saw. They wondered more when they got to a city, and saw +more marvels of the white man's progress. + +Then Tom and his friends reached the coast, and took a steamer for +New York. The giants created a great sensation, the more when it was +known that Tom intended to keep one for himself. With this +arrangement Mr. Preston agreed, for he only wanted one as an +attraction. + +"Couldn't have done it better myself!" the circus proprietor said to +Tom when he heard the story, and this was high praise from Mr. +Preston. + +"And you rescued old Jake, too! Well, well! Couldn't have done it +better myself! I really coudn't!" + +"I wonder how our old enemy Delby made out?" asked Mr. Poddington. +They heard later that he was driven from giant land, not even being +allowed to take a boy as a specimen. He had worked on the "tip" Andy +Foger had given Mr. Waydell, but it failed. When Tom escaped, the +king confiscated all the things in the hut, and he was so taken up +with the novelties that he paid no more attention to the circus +agent, who had all his trouble, plotting and scheming against Tom +for his pains. + +"A giant in the house!" cried Mrs. Baggert, when Tom got home with +August. "I never heard of such a thing in all my life! Where will he +sleep? Not a bed is big enough!" + +"We'll give him two beds then," laughed Tom. + +And so they did, and August was immensely pleased with his new life. +He proved to be very useful, and readily adapted himself to +civilized ways. + +Tola, the other giant, made a big sensation when exhibited, and Mr. +Preston said he was well worth the fifteen thousand dollars he had +cost. + +"Well, Tom, what next?" asked Ned one day, when they had been home +several weeks and had told their story over and over again. + +"No where!" exclaimed Tom. "I'm going to take a long rest." + +But Tom Swift wasn't that kind of a young man, and he was soon +active again. If you care to learn more of his doings you may do so +in the next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His +Electric Camera; Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving +Pictures." + +And now, for a time, we will take leave of the young inventor and +his new giant servant, to meet them again a little later. + +THE END + + + + + + + + +The Project Gutenberg Etext of Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton +**********This file should be named 13tom10.txt or 13tom10.zip********** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, 13tom11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 13tom10a.txt + +This e-text was produced by Greg Weeks, +Charles Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + +More information about this book is at the top of this file. + +We are now trying to release all our etexts one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +etexts, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any Etext before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +The most recent list of states, along with all methods for donations +(including credit card donations and international donations), may be +found online at http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etexts, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this etext, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the etext, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this header are copyright (C) 2001 by Michael S. Hart +and may be reprinted only when these Etexts are free of all fees.] +[Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be used in any sales +of Project Gutenberg Etexts or other materials be they hardware or +software or any other related product without express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.10/04/01*END* + +End of Project Gutenberg's Tom Swift in Captivity, by Victor Appleton + diff --git a/old/13tom10.zip b/old/13tom10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2bc2138 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/13tom10.zip diff --git a/old/13tom10h.htm b/old/13tom10h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4db04c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/13tom10h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7294 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Final//EN"> +<HTML> +<HEAD> +<TITLE>The Project Gutenberg etext of Tom Swift in Captivity</TITLE> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<meta name="author" content="Victor Appleton"> +</HEAD> +<BODY> + +<P> +<h2 align="center">The Project Gutenberg etext of <a href="#start">Tom Swift in Captivity</a></h2> +<h3>#13 in our series by Victor Appleton</h3> + +<PRE> +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: Tom Swift in Captivity + +Author: Victor Appleton + +Release Date: November, 2003 [EBook #4608] +[Most recently updated: March 14, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +************************************************************************ + +</PRE> + +<P> +<A NAME="start"></A> +<p>Greg Weeks, Charles Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team.</p> + + +<P> +<H2>Tom Swift in Captivity</H2> +<P> +or +<BR> +A Daring Escape by Airship + +<P> +by Victor Appleton + +<P> +<H3>CONTENTS</H3> + + +<P> +<A HREF="#I">I A Strange Request</A><BR> +<A HREF="#II">II The Circus Man</A><BR> +<A HREF="#III">III Tom Will Go</A><BR> +<A HREF="#IV">IV "Look Out for my Rival!"</A><BR> +<A HREF="#V">V Andy Foger Learns Something</A><BR> +<A HREF="#VI">VI Alarming News</A><BR> +<A HREF="#VII">VII Fire On Board</A><BR> +<A HREF="#VIII">VIII A Narrow Escape</A><BR> +<A HREF="#IX">IX "Forward March!"</A><BR> +<A HREF="#X">X A Wild Horse Stampede</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XI">XI Caught in a Living Rope</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XII">XII A Native Battle</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XIII">XIII The Desertion</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XIV">XIV In Giant Land</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XV">XV In the "Palace" of the King</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XVI">XVI The Rival Circus Man</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XVII">XVII Held Captives</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XVIII">XVIII Tom's Mysterious Box</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XIX">XIX Weak Giants</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XX">XX The Lone Captive</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXI">XXI A Royal Conspiracy</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXII">XXII The Twin Giants</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXIII">XXIII A Surprise in the Night</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXIV">XXIV The Airship Flight</A><BR> +<A HREF="#XXV">XXV Tom's Giant--Conclusion</A> + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="I"></A> +<H3>Chapter I A Strange Request</H3> + +<P> +Tom Swift closed the book of adventures he had been reading, tossed +it on the table, and got up. Then he yawned. + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked his chum, Ned Newton, who was deep in +another volume. + +<P> +"Oh, I thought this was going to be something exciting," replied +Tom, motioning toward the book he had discarded. "But say! the make-believe +adventures that fellow had, weren't anything compared to +those we went through in the city of gold, or while rescuing the +exiles of Siberia." + +<P> +"Well," remarked Ned, "they would have to be pretty classy +adventures to lay over those you and I have had lately. But where +are you going?" he continued, for Tom had taken his cap and started +for the door. + +<P> +"I thought I'd go out and take a little run in the aeroplane. Want +to come along? It's more fun than sitting in the house reading about +exciting things that never have happened. Come on out and--" + +<P> +"Yes, and have a tumble from the aeroplane, I suppose you were going +to say," interrupted Ned with a laugh. "Not much! I'm going to stay +here and finish this book." + +<P> +"Say," demanded Tom indignantly. "Did you ever know me to have a +tumble since I knew how to run an airship?" + +<P> +"No, I can't say that I did. I was only joking." + +<P> +"Then you carried the joke too far, as the policeman said to the man +he found lugging off money from the bank. And to make up for it +you've got to come along with me." + +<P> +"Where are you going?" + +<P> +"Oh, anywhere. Just to take a little run in the upper regions, and +clear some of the cobwebs out of my head. I declare, I guess I've +got the spring fever. I haven't done anything since we got back from +Russia last fall, and I'm getting rusty." + +<P> +"You haven't done <i>anything</i>!" exclaimed Ned, following his chum's +example by tossing aside the book. "Do you call working on your new +invention of a noiseless airship nothing?" + +<P> +"Well, I haven't finished that yet. I'm tired of inventing things. I +just want to go off, and have some good fun, like getting +shipwrecked on a desert island, or being lost in the mountains, or +something like that. I want action. I want to get off in the jungle, +and fight wild beasts, and escape from the savages!" + +<P> +"Say! you don't want much," commented Ned. "But I feel the same way, +Tom." + +<P> +"Then come on out and take a run, and maybe we'll get on the track +of an adventure," urged the young inventor. "We won't go far, just +twenty or thirty miles or so." + +<P> +The two youths emerged from the house and started across the big +lawn toward the aeroplane sheds, for Tom Swift owned several speedy +aircrafts, from a big combined aeroplane and dirigible balloon, to a +little monoplane not much larger than a big bird, but which was the +most rapid flier that ever breathed the fumes of gasolene. + +<P> +"Which one you going to take, Tom?" asked Ned, as his chum paused in +front of the row of hangars. + +<P> +"Oh, the little double-seated monoplane, I guess that's in good +shape, and it's easy to manage. When I'm out for fun I hate to be +tinkering with levers and warping wing tips all the while. The <i>Lark</i> +practically flies herself, and we can sit back and take it easy. +I'll have Eradicate fill up the gasolene tank, while I look at the +magneto. It needs a little adjusting, though it works nearly to +perfection since I put in some of that new platinum we got from the +lost mine in Siberia." + +<P> +"Yes, that was a trip that amounted to something. I wouldn't mind +going on another like that, though we ran lots of risks." + +<P> +"We sure did," agreed Tom, and then, raising his voice he called +out: "Rad, I say Rad! Where are you? I want you!" + +<P> +"Comin', massa Tom, comin'," answered an aged colored man, as he +shuffled around the corner of the shed. "What do yo'-all want ob +me?" + +<P> +"Put some gasolene in the <i>Lark</i>, Rad. Ned and I are going to take a +little flight. What were you doing?" + +<P> +"Jest groomin' mah mule Boomerang, Massa Tom, dat's all. Po' +Boomerang he's gittin' old jest same laik I be. He's gittin' old, +an' he needs lots ob 'tention. He has t' hab mo' oats dan usual, +Massa Tom, an' he doan't feel 'em laik he uster, dat's a fac', Massa +Tom." + +<P> +"Well, Rad, give him all he wants. Boomerang was a good mule in his +day." + +<P> +"An' he's good yet, Massa Tom, he's good yet!" said Eradicate +Sampson eagerly. "Doan't yo' all forgit dat, Massa Tom." And the +colored man proceeded to fill the gasolene tank, while Tom adjusted +the electrical mechanism of his aeroplane, Ned assisting by handing +him the tools needed. Eradicate, who said he was named that because +he "eradicated" dirt, was a colored man of all work, who had been in +the service of the Swift household for several years. He and his +mule Boomerang were fixtures. + +<P> +"There, I guess that will do," remarked Tom, after testing the +magneto, and finding that it gave a fat, hot spark. "That ought to +send us along in good shape. Got all the gas in, Rad?" + +<P> +"Every drop, Massa Tom." + +<P> +"Then catch hold and help wheel the <i>Lark</i> out. Ned, you steady her on +that side. How are the tires? Do they need pumping up?" + +<P> +"Hard as rocks," answered Tom's chum, as he tapped his toe against +the rubber circlets of the small bicycle wheels on which the +aeroplane rested. + +<P> +"Then they'll do, I guess. Come on now, and we'll give her a test +before we start off. I ought to get a few hundred more revolutions +per minute out of the motor with the way I've adjusted the magneto. +Rad, you and Ned hold back, while I turn the engine over." + +<P> +The youth and the colored man grasped the rear supports of the long, +tail-like part of the monoplane while Tom stepped to the front to +twist the propeller blades. The first two times there was no +explosion as he swung the delicate wooden blades about, but the +third time the engine started off with a roar, and a succession of +explosions that were deafening, until Tom switched in the muffler, +thereby cutting down the noise. Faster and faster the propeller +whirled about as the motor warmed up, until the young inventor +exclaimed: + +<P> +"That's the stuff! She's better than ever! Climb up Ned, and we'll +start off. You can turn her over, Rad; can't you?" + +<P> +"Suah, Massa Tom," was the reply, for Eradicate had been on so many +trips with Tom, and had had so much to do with airships, that to +merely start one was child's play for him. + +<P> +The two youths had scarcely taken their seats, and the colored man +was about to twist around the fan-like blades of the big propeller +in front, when from behind there came a hail. + +<P> +"Hold on there! Wait a minute, Tom Swift! Bless my admission ticket, +don't go! I've got something important to tell you! Hold on!" + +<P> +"Humph! I know who that is!" cried Tom, motioning to Eradicate to +cease trying to start the motor. + +<P> +"Mr. Damon, of course," agreed Ned. "I wonder what he wants?" + +<P> +"A ride, maybe," went on Tom. "If he does we've got to take the +Scooter instead of this one. That holds four. Well, we may as well +see what he wants." + +<P> +He jumped lightly from his seat in the monoplane and was followed by +Ned. They saw coming toward them, from the direction of the house, a +stout man, who seemed very much excited. He was walking so fast that +he fairly waddled, and he was smiling at the lads, for he was one of +their best friends. + +<P> +"Glad I caught you, Tom." he panted, for his haste had almost +deprived him of breath. "I've got something important to tell you. I +hurried over as soon as I heard about it." + +<P> +"Well, you're just in time," commented Ned with a laugh. "In another +minute we'd have been up in the clouds." + +<P> +"What is it, Mr. Damon?" asked Tom. "Have you got wind of a city of +diamonds, or has some one sent you a map telling where we can go to +pick up ten thousand dollar bills by the basket?" + +<P> +"Neither one; Tom, neither one. It's something better than either of +those, and if you don't jump at the chance I'm mistaken in you, +that's all I've got to say. Come over here." + +<P> +He turned a quick glance over his shoulder as he spoke and advanced +toward the two lads on tiptoe as though he feared some one would see +or hear him. Yet it was broad daylight, the place was the starting +ground for Tom's aeroplanes and save Eradicate there was no one +present except Mr. Damon, Ned and the young inventor himself. + +<P> +"What's up?" asked Tom in wonderment. + +<P> +"Hush!" cautioned the odd gentleman. "Bless my walking stick, Tom! +but this is going to be a great chance for you--for us,--for I'm +going along." + +<P> +"Going where, Mr. Damon?" + +<P> +"I'll tell you in a minute. Is there any one here?" + +<P> +"No one but us?" + +<P> +"You are sure that Andy Foger isn't around." + +<P> +"Sure. He's out of town, you know." + +<P> +"Yes, but you never can tell when he's going to appear on the scene. +Come over here," and taking hold of the coat of each of the youths, +Mr. Damon led them behind the big swinging door of the aeroplane +shed. + +<P> +"You haven't anything on hand; have you, Tom?" asked the odd +gentleman, after peering through the crack to make sure they were +unobserved. + +<P> +"Nothing at all, if you mean in the line of going off on an +adventure trip." + +<P> +"That's what I mean. Bless my earlaps! but I'm glad of that. I've +got just the thing for you. Tom, I want you to go to a strange land, +and bring back one of the biggest men there--a giant! Tom Swift, you +and I and Ned--if he wants to go--are going after a giant!" + +<P> +Mr. Damon gleefully clapped Tom on the back, with such vigor that +our hero coughed, and then the odd gentleman stepped back and gazed +at the two lads, a look of triumph shining in his eyes. + +<P> +For a moment there was a silence. Tom looked at Ned, and Ned gave +his chum a quick glance. Then they both looked sharply at Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"A--a giant," murmured Tom faintly. + +<P> +"That's what I said," replied Mr. Damon. "I want you to help me +capture a giant, Tom." + +<P> +Once more the two youths exchanged significant glances, and then +Tom, in a low and gentle voice said: + +<P> +"Yes, Mr. Damon, that's all right. We'll get you a giant right away. +Won't we, Ned? Now you'd better come in the house and lie down, I'll +have Mrs. Baggert make you a cup of tea, and after you have had a +sleep you'll feel better. Come on," and the young inventor gently +tried to lead his friend out from behind the shed door. + +<P> +"Look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd gentleman indignantly. "Do +you think I'm crazy? Lie down? Rest myself? Go to sleep? Say, I'm +not crazy! I'm not tired! I'm not sleepy! This is the greatest +chance you ever had, and if we get one of those giants--" + +<P> +"Yes, yes, we'll get one," put in Ned soothingly. + +<P> +"Of course," added Tom. "Come on, now, Mr. Damon. You'll feel better +after you've had a rest. Dr. Perkinby is coming over to see father +and I'll have him--" + +<P> +Mr. Damon gave one startled glance at the young inventor and his +chum, and then burst into a peal of hearty laughter. + +<P> +"Oh, my!" he exclaimed at intervals in his pyroxisms. "Oh, dear! He +thinks I'm out of my head! He can't stand that talk about giants! Oh +dear! Tom Swift, this is the greatest chance you ever had! Come on +in the house and I'll tell you all I know about giant land, and then +if you want to think I'm crazy you can, that's all I've got to say!" + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="II"></A> +<H3>Chapter II The Circus Man</H3> + + +<P> +Without a word Tom and Ned followed Mr. Damon toward the Swift +house. Truth to tell the youths did not know what to say, or they +would have been bubbling over with questions. But the talk of the +odd man, and his strange request to Tom to go off and capture a +giant had so startled the young inventor and his chum that they did +not know whether to think that Mr. Damon was joking, or whether he +had suddenly taken leave of his senses. + +<P> +And while I have a few minutes that are occupied in the journey to +the house I will introduce my new readers more formally to Tom Swift +and his friends. + +<P> +Tom though only a young man, was an inventor of note, as his father +was before him. Father and son lived in a fine house in the town of +Shopton, in New York state, and Mrs. Swift being dead, the two were +well looked after by Mrs. Baggert their housekeeper. Eradicate +Sampson, as I have said, was the man of all work about the place. +Ned Newton who had a position in a Shopton bank, was Tom's +particular chum, and Mr. Wakefeld Damon, of the neighboring town of +Waterfield, was a friend to all who knew him. He had the odd habit +of blessing anything and everything he could think of, interspersing +it in his talk. + +<P> +In the first volume of this series, called "Tom Swift and His +Motor-Cycle," I related how Tom made the acquaintance of Mr. Damon, +afterward purchasing a damaged motor-cycle from the odd gentleman. On +this machine Tom had many adventures, incidentally saving some of his +father's valuable patents from a gang of conspirators. Later Tom got a +motor boat, and had many races with his rivals on Lake Carlopa, +beating Andy Foger, the red-haired bully of the town, in signal +fashion. After his adventures on the water Tom sighed for some in the +air, and he had them in his airship the <i>Red Cloud</i>. + +<P> +"Tom Swift and His Submarine Boat." is a story of a search after +sunken treasure, and, returning from that quest Tom built an +electric runabout, the speedest car on the road. By means of a +wireless message, later, Tom was able to save himself and the +castaways of Earthquake Island, and, as a direct outcome of that +experience, he was able to go in search of the diamond makers, and +solve the secret of Phantom Mountain, as told in the book dealing +with that subject. + +<P> +When he went to the caves of ice Tom had bad luck, for his airship +was wrecked, and he endured many hardships in getting home with his +companions, particularly as Andy Foger sought revenge on him. + +<P> +But Tom pluckily overcame all obstacles and, later, he built a sky +racer, in which he made the quickest trip on record. After that, +with his electric rifle, he went after elephants in the interior of +Africa and was successful in rescuing some missionaries from the +terrible red pygmies. + +<P> +One of the mission workers, later, sent Tom details about a buried +city of gold in Mexico, and Tom and his chum together with Mr. Damon +located this mysterious place after much trouble, as told in the +book entitled, "Tom Swift in the City of Gold." The gold did not +prove as valuable as they expected, as it was of low grade, but they +got considerable money for it, and were then ready for more +adventures. + +<P> +The adventures soon came, as those of you who have read the book +called, "Tom Swift and His Air Glider," can testify. In that I told +how Tom went to Siberia, and after rescuing some Russian political +exiles, found a valuable deposit of platinum, which to-day is a more +valuable metal than gold. Tom needed some platinum for his +electrical machines, and it proved very useful. + +<P> +He had been back from Russia all winter and, now that Spring had +come again, our hero sighed for more activity, and fresh adventures. +And with the advent of Mr. Damon, and his mysterious talk about +giants, Tom seemed likely to be gratified. + +<P> +The two chums and the odd gentleman continued on to the house, no +one speaking, until finally, when they were seated in the library, +Mr. Damon said: + +<P> +"Well, Tom, are you ready to listen to me now, and have me explain +what I meant when I asked you to get a giant?" + +<P> +"I--I suppose so," hesitated the young inventor. "But hadn't I +better call dad? And are you sure you don't want to lie down and +collect your thoughts? A nice hot cup of tea--" + +<P> +"There, there, Tom Swift; If you tell me to lie down again, or +propose any more tea I'll use you as a punching bag, bless my boxing +gloves if I don't!" cried Mr. Damon and he laughed heartily. "I know +what you think, Tom, and you, too, Ned," he went on, still +chuckling. "You think I don't know what I'm saying, but I'll soon +prove that I do. I'm fully in my senses, I'm not crazy, I'm not +talking in my sleep, and I'm very much in earnest. Tom, this is the +chance of your life to get a giant, and pay a visit to giant land. +Will you take it?" + +<P> +"Mr. Damon, I--er--that is I--" + +<P> +Tom stammered and looked at Ned. + +<P> +"Now look here, Tom Swift!" exclaimed the odd man. "When you got +word about the buried city of gold in Mexico you didn't hesitate a +minute about making up your mind to go there; did you?" + +<P> +"No, I didn't." + +<P> +"Well, that wasn't any more of a strain on your imagination than +this giant business; was it?" + +<P> +"Well, I don't know, as--" + +<P> +"Bless my spectacles! Of course it wasn't! Now, look here. Tom, you +just make up your mind that I know what I'm talking about, and we'll +get along better. I don't blame you for being a bit puzzled at +first, but just you listen. You believe there are such things as +giants; don't you?" + +<P> +"I saw a man in the circus once, seven feet high. They called him a +giant," spoke Ned. + +<P> +"A giant! He was a baby compared to the kind of giants I mean," said +Mr. Damon quickly. "Tom, we are going after a race of giants, the +smallest one of which is probably eight feet high, and from that +they go on up to nearly ten feet, and they're not slim fellows +either, but big in proportion. Now in giant land--" + +<P> +"Here's Mrs. Baggert with a quieting cup of tea," interrupted Tom. +"I spoke to her as we came in, and asked her to have some ready. If +you'll drink this, Mr. Damon, I'm sure--" + +<P> +"Bless my sugar bowl, Tom! You make a man nervous, with your cups of +tea. I'm more quiet than you, but I'll drink it to please you. Now +listen to me." + +<P> +"All right, go ahead." + +<P> +"A friend of mine has asked me if I knew any one who could undertake +to go to giant land, and get him one or two specimens of the big men +there. I at once thought of you, and I said I believed you would go. +And I'll go with you, Tom! Think of that! I've got faith enough in +the proposition to go myself!" + +<P> +There was no mistaking Mr. Damon's manner. He was very much in +earnest, and Tom and Ned looked at each other with a different light +in their eyes. + +<P> +"Who is your friend, and where in the world is giant land?" asked +Tom. "I haven't heard of such a place since I read the accounts of +the early travelers, before this continent was discovered. Who is +your friend that wants a giant?" + +<P> +"If you'll let me, I'll have him here in a minute, Tom." + +<P> +"Of course I will. But good land! Have you got him concealed up your +sleeve, or under some of the chairs? Is he a dwarf?" and Tom looked +about the room as if he expected to see some one in hiding. + +<P> +"I left him outside in the garden, Tom," replied the odd man. "I +told him I'd come on ahead, and see how you took the proposition. +Don't tell him you thought me insane at first. I'll have him here in +a jiffy. I'll signal to him." + +<P> +Not waiting for a word from either of the boys, Mr. Damon went to +one of the low library windows, opened it, gave a shrill whistle and +waved his handkerchief vigorously. In a moment there came an +answering whistle. + +<P> +"He's coming," announced the odd gentleman. + +<P> +"But who is he?" insisted Tom. "Is he some professor who wants a +giant to examine, or is he a millionaire who wants one for a body +guard?" + +<P> +"Neither one, Tom. He's the proprietor of a number of circuses, and +a string of museums, and he wants a giant, or even two of them, for +exhibition purposes. There's lots of money in giants. He's had some +seven, and even eight feet tall, but he has lately heard of a land +where the tallest man is nearly ten feet high, and very big, and +he'll pay ten thousand dollars for a giant alive and in good +condition, as the animal men say. I believe we can get one for him, +and--Ah, here he is now," and Mr. Damon interrupted himself as a +small, dark-complexioned man, with a very black mustache, black +eyes, a watch chain as big around as his thumb, a red vest, a large +white hat, and a suit of large-sized checked clothes appeared at the +open library window. + +<P> +"Is it all right?" this strange-appearing man asked of Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I believe so," replied the odd gentleman. "Come in, Sam." + +<P> +With one bound, though the window was some distance from the ground, +the little man leaped into the library. He landed lightly on his +feet, quickly turned two hand springs in rapid succession, and then, +without breathing in the least rapidly, as most men would have done +after that exertion, he made a low bow to Tom and Ned. + +<P> +"Boys, let me introduce you to my friend, Sam Preston, an old +acrobat and now a circus proprietor," said Mr. Damon. "Mr. Preston, +this is Tom Swift, of whom I told you, and his chum, Ned Newton." + +<P> +"And will they get the giant for me?" asked the circus man quickly. + +<P> +"I think they will," replied Mr. Damon. "I had a little difficulty +in making the matter clear to them, and that's why I sent for you. +You can explain everything." + +<P> +"Have a chair," invited Tom politely. "This is a new one on me--going +after giants. I've done almost everything else, though." + +<P> +"So Mr. Damon said," spoke Mr. Preston gravely. He was much more +sedate and composed than one would have supposed after his +sensational entrance into the room. "I am very glad to meet you, Tom +Swift, and I hope we can do business together. Now, if you have a +few minutes to spare, I'll tell you all I know about giant land." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="III"></A> +<H3>Chapter III Tom Will Go</H3> + + +<P> +"Jove! That sounds interesting!" exclaimed Ned, as he settled +himself comfortably in his chair. + +<P> +"It is interesting," replied the circus man. "At least I found it so +when I first listened to one of my men tell it. But whether it is +possible to get to giant land, and, what is more bring away some of +the big men, is something I leave to you, Tom Swift. After you have +heard my story, if you decide to go, I'll stand all the expenses of +fitting out an expedition, and if you fail I won't have a word to +say. If, on the other hand, you bring me back a giant or two, I'll +pay you ten thousand dollars and all expenses. Is it a bargain?" + +<P> +"Let me hear the story first," suggested our hero, who was a +cautious lad when there was need for it. Yet he liked Mr. Preston, +even at first sight, in spite of his "loud" attire, and the rather +"circusy" manner in which he had entered the room. Then too, if he +was a friend of Mr. Damon, that was a great deal in his favor. + +<P> +"I am, as you know, in the circus business," began Mr. Preston. "I +have a number of traveling shows, and several large museums in the +big cities. I am always on the lookout for new attractions, for the +public demands them. Once get in the rut of having nothing new, and +your business will fall off. I know, for I've been in the business, +man and boy, for nearly forty years. I began as a performer, and I +can still do a double somersault over fifteen elephants in a row. I +always keep in practice for there's nothing like showing a performer +how to do a thing yourself." + +<P> +"But about the giants, which is what I'm interested in most now. Of +course I've had giants in my circuses and museums, from the +beginning. The public wanted 'em and we had to have 'em. Some of 'em +were fakes--men on stilts with long pants to cover up their legs, +and others were the real, genuine, all-wool-and-a-yard-wide article. +But none of them were very big. A shade under eight feet was the +limit with me." + +<P> +"I also have lots of wild animals, and it was when some of my men +were out after some tapirs, jaguars and leopards that I got on the +track of the giants. It was about a year ago, but up to this time I +haven't seen my way clear to send after the big men. It was this +way:" + +<P> +Mr. Preston assumed a more comfortable position in his chair, nodded +at Mr. Damon, who was listening attentively to all that was said, +and resumed. + +<P> +"As I said I had sent Jake Poddington, one of my best men, after +tapirs and some other South American animals. He didn't have very +good luck hunting along the Amazon. In the first place that region +has been pretty well cleaned out of circus animals, and another +thing it's getting too well populated. Another thing is that you +can't get the native hunters and beaters to work for you as they did +years ago." + +<P> +"So Poddington wrote to me that he was going to take his assistants, +make a big jump, and hike it for the Argentine Republic. He had a +tip that along the Salado river there might be something doing, and +I told him to go ahead." + +<P> +"He shipped me what few animals he had, and lit out for a three +thousand mile journey. I didn't hear from him for some time, and, +when I did, I got the finest collection of animals I had ever laid +eyes on. I got them about the same time I did a letter from Jake, +for the mail service ain't what you could call rushing in that part +of South America." + +<P> +"But what about the giants?" interrupted Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I'm coming to them," replied the circus man calmly. "It was this +way: At the tail of his letter which he sent with the shipment of +animals Jake said this, and I remember it almost word for word:" + +<P> +"'If all goes well,' he wrote, 'I'll have a big surprise for you +soon. I've heard a story about a race of big natives that have their +stamping ground in this section, and I'm going to try for a few +specimens. I know how much you want a giant.'" + +<P> +"Well?" asked Tom, after a pause, for the circus man had ceased +talking and was staring out of the opened library window into the +garden that was just becoming green. + +<P> +"That was all I ever heard from poor Jake," said Mr. Preston softly. + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" gasped Mr. Damon. "You didn't tell me +that! What happened to him." + +<P> +"I never could find out," resumed Mr. Preston. "I never heard +another word from him, and I've never seen him from the time I +parted with him to go after the animals. The letter saying he was +going after the giants was the last line of his I've seen." + +<P> +"But didn't you try to locate him?" asked Tom. "Didn't he have some +companions--some one who could tell what became of him?" + +<P> +"Of course I tried!" exclaimed Mr. Preston. "Do you think I'd let a +man like Jake disappear without making some effort to find him? But +he was the only white man in his party, the rest were natives. That +was Jake's way. Well, when some time past and I didn't hear from +him, I got busy. I wrote to our consuls and even some South American +merchants with whom I had done business. But it didn't amount to +anything." + +<P> +"Couldn't you get any news?" asked Ned softly. + +<P> +"Oh, yes, some, but it didn't amount to much. After a long time, and +no end of trouble, I had a man locate a native named Zacatas, who +was the head beater of the black men under Jake." + +<P> +"Zacatas said that he and Jake and the others got safely to the +Salado river section, but I knew that before, for that was where the +fine shipment of animals came from. Then Jake got that tip about the +giants, and set off alone into the interior to locate them, for all +the natives were afraid to go. That was the last seen of poor Jake." + +<P> +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "What did Zacatas say +became of the poor fellow?" + +<P> +"No one knew. Whether he reached giant land and was killed there, or +whether he was struck down by some wild beast in the jungle, I never +could find out. The natives under Zacatas waited in camp for him for +some time, and then went back to the Amazon region where they +belonged. That's all the news I could get." + +<P> +"But I'm sure there are giants in the interior of South America, for +Jake always knew what he was talking about. Now I want to do two +things. I want to get on the trail of poor Jake Poddington if I can, +and I want a giant--two or three of them if it can be managed." + +<P> +"Ever since Jake disappeared I've been trying to arrange things to +make a search for him, and for the giants, but up to now something +has been in the way. I happened to mention the matter to my friend, +Mr. Damon, and he at once spoke of you, Tom Swift." + +<P> +"Now, what I want to know is this: Will you undertake to get a giant +for me, rescue Jake Poddington if he is alive in the interior of +South America, or, if he is dead, find out how it happened and give +him decent burial? Will you do this, Tom Swift?" + +<P> +There was a silence in the room following the dramatic and simple +recital of the circus man. Tom was strangely moved, as was his chum +Ned As for Mr. Damon, he was softly blessing every thing he could +think of. + +<P> +Tom looked out of the long, opened windows of the library. In fancy +he could see the forest and jungles of South America. He saw a +sluggish river flowing along between rank green banks, while, from +the overhanging trees, long festoons of moss hung down, writhing now +and then as the big water anacondas or boa constrictors looped their +sinuous folds over the low limbs. + +<P> +In fancy he saw dark-skinned natives slinking along with their +deadly blow guns, and poisoned arrows. He thought he could hear the +low growls and whines of the treacherous jaguars and see their lithe +bodies slinking along. He saw the brilliant-hued flowers, saw the +birds of gorgeous plumage, and listened in fancy to their discordant +cries. + +<P> +Then, too, he saw a lonely white man in a miserable native hut +thousands of miles from civilization, waiting, waiting, waiting for he +knew not what fate. Again he saw monstrous men stalking along--men who +towered ten feet or more, and who were big and brawny. All this passed +through the mind of Tom in an instant. + +<P> +"Well?" asked Mr. Preston softly. + +<P> +"I'll go!" suddenly cried the young inventor. "I don't know whether +I can get you a giant or not, Mr. Preston, but if it's possible I'll +get poor Jake Poddington, dead or alive!" + +<P> +"Good!" cried the circus man, jumping up and clasping Tom's hand. "I +thought you were that kind of a lad, after I heard Mr. Damon +describe you. You've taken a big load off my heart, Tom Swift. Now +to talk of ways and means! I'll have a giant yet, and maybe I'll get +back the best man who ever shipped a consignment of wild animals, +good Jake Poddington! Now to business!" + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="IV"></A> +<H3>Chapter IV "Look Out for my Rival!"</H3> + + +<P> +"You'll go in an airship of course; won't you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon, when they had pulled their chairs up around a library table, +and Mr. Preston had taken some papers from his pocket. + +<P> +"An airship? No, I don't believe I shall," replied the young +inventor. "In the first place, I'm a bit tired of scooting through +the air so much, though it isn't to be denied that it's the quickest +way of going. But in South America there are so many jungles that it +will be hard to find a level starting ground for a take-off, after +we land. Of course we could go up as a balloon, but this expedition +is going to be different from any we were ever on before." + +<P> +"How so?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Well, in the first place we've got to start at one end of a trail, +and make careful inquiries all along the way. It isn't like when we +went for the city of gold. There we had to look for a certain ruined +temple, which was the landmark. When we went after the platinum in +Siberia we had to look for the place of the high winds, so I could +use my air glider. But now we're trying to locate a man who traveled +on foot through the jungles, and if we went in an airship we might +just miss the connecting link." + +<P> +"So, I think the best way will be to do just as Mr. Poddington +did--travel on foot or by horses and mules, and go slowly, making +inquiries from time to time. Then we <i>may</i> get to giant land, we +<i>may</i> find him." + +<P> +"I don't hope for all that," said the circus man, "but if you can +only get some news of him it will be a relief. If he died peaceably +it would be better than to be a captive among some of those savage +tribes. It's been a year now since I heard the last of him. But I +agree with Tom that an airship won't be much good in the jungle. You +might take along a small one, if you could pack it, to scare the +natives with. In fact it might be a good thing to show to the +giants, if you find them." + +<P> +"That is my idea," declared Tom. "I'll take the <i>Lark</i> with me. That's +a mighty powerful machine for its size, and it can be taken apart in +sections. It will carry three on a pinch, and I have had five in her +with two auxiliary seats. I'll take the <i>Lark</i>, and she may come in +handy." + +<P> +"When can you start?" asked Mr. Preston. + +<P> +"As soon as we can fit out an expedition," answered Tom. "It +oughtn't to take long. I don't have to build an air glider this +time. It won't take long to take the <i>Lark</i> apart. I haven't finished +work on my noiseless airship yet, but that can wait. Yes, we'll be +ready as soon as you want us to start, Mr. Preston." + +<P> +"It can't be too soon for me. I'll deposit a certain sum in the bank +to your credit, Tom, and you can draw on it for expenses. I'll pay +any amount to get word of poor Jake, to say nothing of having a +giant for my circus. Now as to ways of getting there. Have you a +large map of South America?" + +<P> +Tom had one, and he and the others were pouring over it when Tom's +father came into the room. + +<P> +"Well, well!" he exclaimed. "What's this? What are you up to now, +Tom, my boy? Mrs. Baggert said you took down the South American map. +What's up?" + +<P> +"Lots, dad? I'm going after giants this time!" + +<P> +"Giants, Tom? Are you joking?" + +<P> +"Not a bit of it, Mr. Swift," answered Mr. Damon. "Bless my check +book! I believe if some one wanted the moon Tom Swift would try to +get it for them." + +<P> +Then Mr. Swift noticed the stranger present, and was introduced to +the circus man. + +<P> +"Is it really true, Tom," asked the aged inventor, when the story +had been related, "are you going to have a try for giant land?" + +<P> +"That's what I am, dad, and I wish you were going along." + +<P> +"No, Tom, I'm getting too old for that. But I did hope you'd stay +home for a while, and help me work on my gyroscope invention. It is +almost completed." + +<P> +"I will help you, dad, as soon as I get back with a giant or two. +Who knows? maybe I'll get one myself." + +<P> +"What would you do with one?" asked Ned with a laugh. + +<P> +"Have him help Eradicate," answered the young inventor. "Rad is +getting pretty old, and he needs an assistant." + +<P> +"But are these giants black?" asked Mr. Swift. + +<P> +"That's a point I don't know," answered the circus man frankly. +"Jake didn't say in his letter. They may be black, white or midway +between. That's what Tom has got to find out for us." + +<P> +"And I'll do it!" exclaimed our hero. "Now let's see. I suppose the +best plan would be to take a ship right to the Rio de la Plata, +landing say at Buenos Ayres or Montevideo, and then organize an +expedition to strike into the interior." + +<P> +"Why don't you do just as Mr. Poddington did?" asked Ned, "start +from the Amazon and work south?" + +<P> +"It would take too long," declared Tom. "We know that the giants are +somewhere in the northern part of Argentina, or in Paraguay or +Uruguay. Or they may be on the other side of the Uruguay river in +Brazil. It's quite a stretch of territory, and we've got to take our +time exploring it. That's why I don't want to waste time working +down from the Amazon. We'll go right to Buenos Ayres, I think." + +<P> +"That's what I'd do," advised the old circus man. "Now I can give +you some points on what to take, and how to act when you get there. +The South Americans are a queer people--very nice when treated +right, but very bad if not," and then he told some of his +experiences as a circus man in South America, for he had traveled +there. + +<P> +"I'd go again, if my business didn't keep me here," he concluded, +"for I'd ask nothing better than to hunt for giant land, or try to +rescue poor Jake. But I can't. I'm depending on you, Tom Swift." + +<P> +"What's that? Giant land?" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert, the motherly +housekeeper, as she came in to announce that dinner was ready. "You +don't mean to tell me, Tom, that you're going off again?" + +<P> +"That's what I am, Mrs. Baggert. You'd better put me up a few +sandwiches, for I don't know when I'll be back," and Tom winked at +his chum. + +<P> +"Oh, of all things I ever heard in all my born days!" cried the +housekeeper, throwing up her hands. "Will you ever settle down, Tom +Swift?" + +<P> +"Maybe he will when Miss Mary Nestor is ready to settle down too," +said Ned mischievously, referring to a girl of whom Tom was very +fond. + +<P> +"Say, I'll fix you for that!" cried our hero, as he made an +unsuccessful grab for Ned. "But, Mrs. Baggert, can you put on a +couple of extra plates? Mr. Damon and Mr. Preston will stay to +lunch." + +<P> +"Not if it's going to put you out, Tom," objected the circus man. "I +can go to the hotel, and--" + +<P> +"No, indeed!" exclaimed Mrs. Baggert graciously, for she prided +herself on her housekeeping arrangements, and she used to say that +unexpected company never "flustrated" her. Soon the little party was +seated around the table, where the talk went from grave to gay, the +subject of the giants being uppermost. + +<P> +Mr. Preston told many funny stories of his circus days, and some of +them had the spice of danger in them, for he had been all over the +world, either as a performer or as the owner of amusement +enterprises. + +<P> +"Now, the next question to be settled," said the old circus man, +when they were once more gathered in the library, "is how many are +going?" + +<P> +"I am, for one!" exclaimed Ned quickly. "I'm sure my folks will let +me. Especially as we aren't going to use an airship, but will travel +just as ordinary folks do." + +<P> +"Except in case of emergency," explained Tom. "We'll have the <i>Lark</i> +to use if we need her." + +<P> +"Oh, of course," agreed Ned. "How about you, Mr. Damon? Will you +go?" + +<P> +The odd man looked around the room before replying, as though he +feared someone might be listening on the sly. + +<P> +"Go on, Andy Foger isn't here," invited Tom with a laugh. + +<P> +"I'll go--if I can pursuade my wife to let me," said the odd man in +a whisper, as if, even then, the good lady might overhear him. "I'm +not going to say anything about giants. I'll tell her we are going +to rescue a poor fellow from--er--well from the natives of South +America, and I'm sure she'll consent. Of course I'll go." + +<P> +"That's three," remarked Tom. "I think I can get Eradicate to go. He +doesn't like airships, and when he knows we're not going in one it +will please him. Then he likes it hot, and I guess South America is +about as warm as they come. I am almost sure we can count on Rad." + +<P> +"That will make a nice party," commented the circus man. "Now I'll +make out a list of the supplies you'd better take, and tell you what +to do about getting native helpers, and so on," and with that he +plunged into the midst of details that took up most of the remainder +of the day. + +<P> +"Well, then I guess that settles most everything," remarked Tom, +several hours later. "I'll begin at once to take the <i>Lark</i> apart for +shipment, and begin ordering the things we need." + +<P> +"Oh, there's one thing I almost forgot about," said Mr. Preston +suddenly. "Queer, how I should overlook that, too. I don't suppose +you mind a fight or two; do you?" he asked, looking sharply at Tom. + +<P> +"Well, it all depends. We've had several fights on other +expeditions, though I can't say that I like 'em," replied the young +inventor. "Why do you ask?" + +<P> +"Because you may have one--or several," was the answer of the circus +man. "You'll have to beware of my rival." + +<P> +"Your rival?" + +<P> +"Yes, the bitterest foe I have is a rival circus man named Wayland +Waydell. He, or some of his men, are always camping on my trail when +I send out after a new consignment of wild animals, and I shouldn't +be a bit surprised but what he'd try to get ahead of me on the giant +game." + +<P> +"But how does he know you want giants?" asked Tom. + +<P> +"Because news of circus expeditions always leaks out somehow or +other. I'm sure Waydell will learn that you are acting for me, and +so I warn you in time. In fact, he tried to get ahead of me when I +sent Jake Poddington out over a year ago, and I always had my +suspicions that he had a hand in Jake's disappearance, but maybe I'm +wrong. So that's what I mean when I say beware of Wayland Waydell, +Tom." + +<P> +"I will!" exclaimed Tom. "He'll have to get up early to get ahead of +us." But Tom little knew the man against whom he was to pit himself +in the search for giants. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="V"></A> +<H3>Chapter V Andy Foger Learns Something</H3> + + +<P> +Once Tom Swift made up his mind to do a thing, he did not waste time +in setting about it. He had decided to go to giant land, and that +was all there was to it. His father talked with him about the +matter, pointed out the dangers, and suggested that, as the young +inventor had had many adventures in the last few years, and had made +considerable money from the discovery of the city of gold, and the +platinum mines, the prize offered for a giant was not much of an +inducement. + +<P> +"But it isn't that so much, dad," explained Tom. "There's that poor +circus man, maybe suffering in the centre of South America. I want +to find him, if I can, or get some news that he died a natural +death, and is decently buried." + +<P> +"You never can do it, Tom." + +<P> +"Well dad, I'm going to make a big try!" he returned; and that +settled it as far as Tom was concerned. + +<P> +For several days after the visit of Mr. Preston Tom was busy making +plans for his trip to South America. He wanted to lay out a regular +schedule before proceeding. Ned Newton had had hard work to persuade +his folks to let him go, but they finally consented, and as for Mr. +Damon, his plan was simple. + +<P> +Without mentioning giants at all, he took Mr. Preston home with him, +and the circus man's tale of his assistant lost in the wilds of +South America was too much for Mrs. Damon. + +<P> +"Go? Of course you'll go!" she said to her husband. "I demand that +you go, and I want you to find that poor man and rescue him. If you +could rescue the exiles from uncivilized Siberia I'm sure you can +get a man out of a civilized country." + +<P> +Mr. Damon did not stop to point out that South America was far less +civilized, in some ways, than was Russia. He just kept still, and +made his preparations to go. Mr. Preston was a distant relative of +the odd man, and that was how he had happened to meet him and hear +the story which was destined to play such an important part in the +life of Tom Swift. + +<P> +"Do you think we'll have much trouble after we get to South America, +and strike into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one afternoon, when +he and Mr. Preston were helping Tom in the delicate work of packing +the wing planes of the <i>Lark</i>. + +<P> +"No, South America isn't a bad country to travel in," replied the +circus man. "The natives are fairly friendly, and with a well-organized +party, and plenty of money, which I shall see that you +have, you ought to get along swimmingly. Only one thing bothers me." + +<P> +"What's that?" asked Tom quickly. + +<P> +"That's my rival, Waydell. He's sure to make trouble if he gets on +your trail." + +<P> +"Have you heard from him?" + +<P> +"No, and that's what makes me all the more suspicious. If he'd come +out and fight me in the open it wouldn't be so bad. But this +underhand business gets on my nerves. I don't know what he's up to." + +<P> +"Maybe he isn't up to anything," suggested Ned. "He may not even +know you are going to make another try for the giants." + +<P> +"Oh, yes, he does," replied the circus man. "He didn't succeed in +beating me when poor Jake was after them, for the simple reason that +it was a snap case, and even I didn't know that Poddington was +trying for the giants until he had started. But Waydell was soon +after him, and he knows that when I once set out for a freak or a +certain kind of animal I keep on until I get it. So he has probably +already figured out that I'm making new plans to get a giant." + +<P> +"But how will he know that I am going?" inquired Tom. + +<P> +"I don't know how he will know, but he will. We circus men have +queer ways of finding out things. I shouldn't be a bit surprised but +what he was already plotting and scheming to send an expedition on +my trail, to take advantage of anything you may learn." + +<P> +"Well, we'll try and fool him, the same as we did the Mexicans when +we hunted for the city of gold," spoke Tom; and then putting aside +that worry, he and the others labored hard to get matters in shape +for a departure to South America. + +<P> +"I suppose Eradicate is going," remarked Ned, in the intervals of +packing the aeroplane. + +<P> +"Well, I've hinted it to him," replied Tom, "but I haven't asked him +outright. He said he wouldn't mind going to a hot country though. +Here he comes now. Guess I'll see how he takes it." + +<P> +The colored man shuffled up with a hammer and nails, for he had been +putting covers on packing boxes. + +<P> +"Then you are coming with us to South America; aren't you, Rad?" +asked Tom, winking at Ned. + +<P> +"Souf America? Am dat de hot country yo'-all was referencin' to?" +asked Eradicate. + +<P> +"That's it, Rad. It's nice and warm there. All you have to do is to +lie under a tree and cocoanuts will drop off into your mouth." + +<P> +"Cocoanuts in mah mouf, Massa Tom! 'Scuse me! I doan't want t' go to +no sich country as dat. Cocoanuts in mah mouf! Why I ain't got but a +few teef left, an' a cocoanut droppin' offen a tree would shorely +knock dem teef out, shorely!" + +<P> +"Oh, Rad, I didn't mean cocoanuts! I meant oranges and +bananas--they're soft," and Tom glanced quickly at Ned, for he saw +that he had made a mistake. + +<P> +"Oh, well, den dat's diffunt, Massa Tom. I jes lubs oranges an' +bananas, an' ef yo'-all is shore dat I'll find some, why, I'll come +along." + +<P> +"Find 'em? Of course you will!" cried Ned. + +<P> +"And cocoanuts, too," added Tom. "Only, Rad, I meant to say that the +monkeys would throw the cocoanuts down to you from the trees. That +breaks the hard shells you see, and all you have to do is to take +out the meat, and drink the milk. Then the monkeys throw you down a +palm leaf fan to cool yourself off, while you're eating it. Oh, I +tell you, Rad, South America is the place to go to have a good +time." + +<P> +"I believe you, Massa Tom. When do we-all start?" + +<P> +"Pretty soon now." + +<P> +"An' what all am yo' gwine arter, Massa Tom?" + +<P> +The young inventor thought a moment. In times past he had not +hesitated to confide in his colored helper, but of late years +Eradicate had become somewhat childish, and he talked more than was +necessary. Tom wondered whether it would be safe to trust the giant +secret to him. After a moment's thought he realized that it would +not be. But, at the same time, he knew that if he did not give some +kind of an answer Eradicate would become suspicious, and that would +be worse. The colored helper had been with Tom on too many trips not +to know that his master never went without some object. + +<P> +"Well, Rad, we're after big game this time," Tom said. "I don't know +what it will be that we'll get, whether animals or plants, and--" + +<P> +"Oh, I knows, Massa Tom. Yo'-all means dem orchard plants that lib +on air--dem big orchard plants." Eradicate meant orchids, of which +many rare and beautiful kinds are found in South America. + +<P> +"Yes, Rad, I guess we will get some big orchids," agreed Tom. + +<P> +"An' I shorely will help climb de trees arter 'em. Or maybe we kin +git de monkeys to frow em down, same as dey will de cocoanuts." + +<P> +"Maybe, Rad. Well, now go ahead and nail up the rest of these boxes. +We want to get started as soon as we can," and the colored man got +busy, murmuring from time to time something about oranges and +bananas and cocoanuts. + +<P> +Everyone was occupied in getting matters in shape for the trip to +South America, even Mr. Swift laying aside his work on his pet +invention--a gyroscope--while he helped his son. And had Tom not +been quite so engrossed with his preparations he might have gone +about town more, in which case he would have learned something that +might have saved him and the others considerable trouble and no +little danger. And this fact was that Andy Foger had been in Shopton +several times lately. + +<P> +After the trouble which the red-haired bully and his father caused +Tom and his friends on their trip to the city of gold, Mr. Foger +moved away from Shopton. He had lost his fortune and had to begin +all over again. The Foger homestead was closed up, and Andy ceased +to be a fixture of the town, for which Tom and Ned were very glad. + +<P> +But of late Andy had been seen in Shopton several times, and it was +noticed that, on one or two occasions, he had a man with him--a man +who seemed to have plenty of money--a man with an air about him not +unlike that of Mr. Preston. A man with what newspaper men would have +called a circus or theatrical "air." + +<P> +This man had visited Shopton soon after Mr. Preston made the giant +proposition to Tom, and before meeting Andy Foger had made special +inquiries about Tom Swift. + +<P> +"Who are the people who have a hard feeling against this young +inventor in town?" the man had asked of several persons. + +<P> +"Tom Swift has more friends than enemies," was the general reply. + +<P> +"Oh, surely he must have some enemies," the man insisted. "He's been +running his aeroplanes and autos around town a long time, and surely +there must be some one who has a grudge against him. I suppose he +has lots of friends, but who are his enemies?" + +<P> +Then he learned about Andy Foger, and, hearing that Andy now lived +in a nearby town, the man had at once gone there. It was not long +before he reappeared--and the red-haired bully was with him. + +<P> +"And you haven't learned anything yet, Andy?" asked this mysterious +man one afternoon, when he met his tool in a quiet resort in +Shopton. + +<P> +"Nothing yet, Mr. Waydell. But give me a little more time." + +<P> +"Time! You've had more time now than you need. When I agreed to pay +you for finding out what part of South America Tom Swift would head +for to get some sort of a freak or animal for Preston's circus I +thought you'd make good quicker than this." + +<P> +"So did I. But you see Tom is suspicious of me, and so is his chum, +Ned Newton. I can't go to them, and if I'm seen sneaking around the +house or shop, after what happened last, I'll be driven off." + +<P> +"Well, it's up to you. I paid you to get the information and I +expect you to do it. Why don't you tackle that old colored man whom, +I understand, works for him? He ought to be simple enough to give +the game away." + +<P> +"Eradicate? I will! I never thought of that I'll get that +information for you, Mr. Waydell, in a few days." + +<P> +"You'd better, if you want to keep that money." + +<P> +The two plotters parted, and that very afternoon gave Andy the +chance he wanted. He met Eradicate on his way to the village where +he was going after something Tom needed. + +<P> +"Hello, Rad!" called Andy with a show of good feeling. "I haven't +seen you in some time. I suppose you're getting too old to travel +around with Tom any more?" + +<P> +"Gittin' too old!" exclaimed the colored man indignantly, for that +was his sore point. "What yo'-all mean, Andy Foger? I ain't gittin' +old, an' neider am Boomerang." + +<P> +"Oh, I thought you were, as you haven't been on any trips lately." + +<P> +"I ain't, hey? Well I's gwine on one right soon, let me tell you +dat, Andy Foger!" + +<P> +"No! Is that so? Glad to hear it. Up to the North Pole I suppose?" + +<P> +"No, sah; not much! No cold country for this coon! I's gwine where +it's nice an 'warm, an' where de cocoanuts fall in yo' mouf--I mean +where de bananas an' oranges fall in you mouf, an' de monkeys frow +down cocoanuts an' palm leaf fans to yo'!" + +<P> +"Where's that, Rad?" asked Andy, and he tried to make his voice +sound indifferent, as though the matter did not interest him. + +<P> +"South America, dat's where it am, an' I's gwine wif Massa Tom. We's +gwine t' git a monstrous big orchard plant." + +<P> +"Oh, yes; I've heard about them. Well, I hope you get all the +oranges and bananas you want. South America, eh? I suppose along the +Amazon river, where they have crocodiles forty feet long, that are +always hungry." + +<P> +"No, sah! No crockermiles fo' me! We ain't goin' neah de Amerzon +riber at all. We's gwine away down in de middle part of South +America. It's a place suffin laik Gomeonaway--or Goonaway, or +suffin' laik dat." + +<P> +"Oh, yes; I know where you mean!" and Andy could hardly conceal the +note of triumph in his voice. He had the very information he wanted +from the simple colored man. "Yes, I guess there are no crocodiles +there, and plenty of monkeys and cocoanuts. Well, I hope you have a +good time," and Andy hurried away to seek out the rival circus man. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="VI"></A> +<H3>Chapter VI Alarming News</H3> + + +<P> +"Hand me that hammer, Ned." + +<P> +"There it is, right behind you, on the bench." + +<P> +"Oh, so it is. Here are those nails you were asking for." + +<P> +"Good. Now we'll make things hum," and Ned Newton's voice was +drowned in the rapid driving of nails into boards. + +<P> +"Bless my screw driver!" suddenly exclaimed Mr. Damon, who was +sawing planks to make covers for boxes. + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked Tom, looking up from a bundle he was +tying up. It contained the magneto of his aeroplane and he was +putting waterproof paper about it. "Did you cut your finger?" + +<P> +"No, but I just happened to think that I nailed my watch up in that +last box." + +<P> +"Nailed up your watch!" cried Mr. Preston, who, after a trip to New +York to make arrangements for passages on a steamer, had come back +to help Tom pack up. + +<P> +"Yes, I took it out to see how long it took me to make a box cover, +and then Tom asked me to nail up that box containing the motor +parts, and I laid my watch right down on top, and put the boards +over it." + +<P> +"Well, the only thing to do is to take off the cover," remarked Tom +grimly. + +<P> +"Bless my chronometer! That will delay things," said the odd man +with a sigh. "But I suppose there is no hope for it," and he +proceeded to open the box, while Tom, Ned, the circus man and +Eradicate busied themselves over the hundred and one things to be +done before they would be ready for the trip to the interior of +South America. + +<P> +"Look out, Ned!" called Tom. "You're making those top boards too +long. They'll stick out over the edge, and be ripped off if the box +catches on anything." + +<P> +"Yes, you can't be too careful," cautioned Mr. Preston. "Each box or +package must be the right weight, or the porters and mule drivers +won't carry them into the interior. You may have to cross rough +trails, and even ford rivers. And as for bridges! well, the less +said about them the better. You aren't going to have any picnic, and +if you want to back out, Tom Swift, now is the time to say so." + +<P> +"What! Back out?" cried our hero. "Never! I said I'd go and I'm +going. Ned, pass that brace and bit over, will you. I've got to bore +a hole for these screws." + +<P> +And so the work went on in the big aeroplane shed, which they had +made their packing headquarters. + +<P> +The <i>Lark</i>, that small, but strong and speedy aeroplane, had been +safely packed, and most of it had been sent on ahead to New York, +where the travellers were to take the steamer. There remained to be +transported their clothing, weapons and ammunition, and several +bundles and cases of trinkets which would be of more value in +bartering with the natives than money. Tom and Mr. Preston had +selected the things with great care, and at the last moment the +young inventor had packed a box of his own, and said nothing about +it. Included in it were some of his own and his father's inventions, +and had one been given a glance into that same box he would have +wondered at the queer things. + +<P> +"What in the world are you taking with you, anyhow?" asked Ned, of +his chum, noticing the mysterious box. + +<P> +"'You'll see, if we ever get to giant land," replied Tom with a +smile. + +<P> +"How long before we can start?" asked Mr. Damon, late that day, when +most of the hard work had been finished. He was as anxious and as +eager as either of the youths to make a start. + +<P> +"We ought to be ready at least a week from to-day," replied Tom, +"and perhaps sooner." + +<P> +"Sooner, if you can make it," suggested Mr. Preston. "The steamer +sails a week from to-day, and if you miss that one you'll have to +wait two weeks more." + +<P> +"Then a week from to-day we'll sail," decided Tom, with emphasis. +"We'll work nights getting things in shape." + +<P> +Really, though, not much more remained to be done, and the next day +Mr. Preston again went to New York, accompanying a shipment of boxes +and cases that Tom sent on ahead. + +<P> +The two chums were busy in the aeroplane hangar a few days after +this, nailing up the last of some light cases containing medicines, +personal effects and comforts that would accompany them on their +trip. + +<P> +"Well, I'm glad of one thing," remarked Tom thoughtfully, as he +drove home the last nail in a box, "and that is that we won't be +bothered with that Andy Foger on this trip. I haven't seen hide nor +hair of him in some time. I guess he and his father are down and +out." + +<P> +"I guess so. I haven't seen him either." + +<P> +"Massa Andy were in town a few days ago," ventured Eradicate. + +<P> +"He was?" cried Tom. "Did you see him? What was he doing, Rad?" + +<P> +"Nuffin, same as usual. He done say I were too old to go on any more +hexpiditions wif yo' an' I proved dat I wasn't." + +<P> +"Proved that you weren't, Rad? How?" And Tom looked anxiously at his +colored helper. + +<P> +"Why, I done say t' him dat I was gwine wif yo'-all dis time, t' dat +Comeaway country after a big orchard plant. Dat's how I done prove +it to dat Andy Foger." + +<P> +"Rad, you didn't tell him we were going to South America?" asked Tom +reproachfully. + +<P> +"Suah I done so, Massa Tom. Dat were de only way t' prove t' him dat +I wa'an't gittin' too old." + +<P> +"Oh, Rad! I'm afraid--" and Tom hesitated. + +<P> +"Oh, I don't believe it amounted to anything," interposed Ned. "Andy +didn't have any one with him, did he, Rad?" + +<P> +"No, Massa Ned. He were all alone by hisse'f." + +<P> +"Then I guess it's all right, Tom. Andy was only rigging Eradicate, +and he didn't pay any attention to what he said." + +<P> +"Well, I hope so," and the young inventor wore a thoughtful air as +he resumed the finish of the packing. + +<P> +The colored man, blissfully unconscious that he had been the +innocent cause of a grave danger that overhung Tom and his friends, +whistled gaily as he gathered the boxes, bales and packages into a +pile, ready for the expressman, who was to call in the morning. + +<P> +Tom, together with Ned, Mr. Damon and Eradicate, were to leave the +following afternoon, and stay in New York until the sailing of the +steamer. They preferred to be a day or so ahead of time than half an +hour late, and were taking no chances. + +<P> +"Bless my timetable!" exclaimed Mr. Damon that night, as they sat in +the library of the Swift home, checking over the lists to make sure +that nothing had been forgotten, "bless my timetable, but it doesn't +seem possible that we are going to start at last." + +<P> +"Yes, we'll soon be on the way to giant land," spoke Tom in a low +voice. Somehow the young inventor did not seem to be in his usually +bright spirits. + +<P> +"You don't seem very enthusiastic," remarked Ned. "What's the +matter, Tom?" + +<P> +"Oh, nothing much. Though I would feel better if I knew that Andy +Foger didn't have any inkling of what our plans were," he added, for +Eradicate was not present. + +<P> +"Oh, nonsense!" exclaimed his chum. "Mr. Preston will be here in the +morning, and he'll know whether his rival has any idea of camping on +our trail. Cheer up!" + +<P> +"Yes, I suppose I am foolish to worry," admitted Tom. "but, somehow +I can't help it. I wish Mr. Preston was here now to tell us that +Wayland Waydell had gone off to the centre of Africa for a dwarf. +Then I'd know we had nothing to fear. But I guess--" + +<P> +Tom did not finish his sentence for, at that moment, there came a +peal at the door bell. Instinctively every one started, and Mr. +Damon exclaimed: + +<P> +"Bless my burglar alarm! What's that?" + +<P> +"Someone at the door, Tom," replied Mr. Swift calmly. "That's +nothing unusual. It's early yet." + +<P> +But, in spite of his reassuring words, there was a feeling of vague +alarm. + +<P> +"I'll see who it is," volunteered Ned. "If it's Andy Foger--" + +<P> +Mrs. Baggert entered the room at that moment. She had hurried to the +door, and, as she entered she announced: + +<P> +"Mr. Preston!" + +<P> +"Yes, it is I!" added the circus man following her quickly into the +room. "I came on to-night instead of waiting for the morning, Tom. I +have bad news for you!" + +<P> +"Bad news!" gasped the young inventor. "Has Waydell got hold of your +plans." + +<P> +"I'll wager it has something to do with Andy Foger!" exclaimed Ned. + +<P> +"Neither one," spoke the circus man. "But I have just had a cable +dispatch from one of my animal agents in Brazil, saying that war has +broken out among the tribes in the central part of South America. A +big native war is being waged all around giant land, as near as we +can figure it out." + +<P> +"War among the native tribes!" exclaimed Mr. Swift. + +<P> +"Yes, and one of the worst in years. Of course, Tom, after such +alarming news as this I won't hold you to your promise to go. It's +all off. I'm sorry, but you'd better wait. It won't be safe to go +there now. Better unpack, Tom." + +<P> +For a moment there was a silence in the room. Then the young +inventor leaped to his feet and faced the circus man. + +<P> +"Unpack?" cried Tom in ringing tones. "Never! I'm going to giant +land, fight or no fight! Ned, come with me and we'll put in some of +my electric rifles. I wasn't going to take them along, but I will +now. Unpack? I guess not! I'm going to get a giant for you, Mr. +Preston, and save Jake Poddington if he's alive. Come on, Ned." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="VII"></A> +<H3>Chapter VII Fire On Board</H3> + + +<P> +"Your electric rifles!" exclaimed Ned Newton, as he followed his +chum to the storeroom, where Tom kept a number of spare guns. "It's +a good thing you thought of them, Tom." + +<P> +"Yes, I didn't think we'd need them, for I believe peaceable means +are the best to use on natives. But if there's a war, and we have to +defend ourselves against the tribes, we'll take along something that +will do more damage than an ordinary rifle, and yet I can regulate +it so that it will only stun, and not kill." + +<P> +"That's the stuff, Tom. No use in being needlessly cruel. How many +will you take?" + +<P> +"Two or three. We may need 'em all." + +<P> +A little later the two lads returned to the library where Mr. Damon, +Mr. Swift and the circus man were anxiously awaiting them. Mr. +Preston looked curiously at several objects which Tom and Ned +carried. The objects looked like guns but were different from any +the giant-seeker had seen. + +<P> +"What are they?" he asked Tom. + +<P> +"Electric rifles. One of my inventions," and Tom showed how the +weapon worked. Those of you who have read the volume entitled, "Tom +Swift and His Electric Rifle" will remember this curious weapon. It +was worked by a stored charge of magnetism of the wireless kind. By +this a concentrated globule of electricity was projected from the +muzzle, and it could be made strong or weak at the will of the +marksman. It could be made so powerful that it would totally +annihilate a whale, as Tom had once proved, or it could be made so +mild that it would put an enemy, or several of them, to sleep almost +as gently as some narcotic, and they would awaken after several +hours, little the worse for their experience. + +<P> +A charge of electricity as powerful as five thousand volts could be +concentrated into a small wireless globule the size of a bullet, and +this would fly through space, or even through solid objects until, +reaching the limit of the range set, would strike the object aimed +at. With his wonderful electric rifle Tom had not only killed +elephants, and other big game, but fought off the red pygmies of +Africa. + +<P> +"And we may have a use for it in South America," he added as he +explained the workings to Mr. Preston. + +<P> +"Well, I'm glad you didn't back out," commented the circus man, "and +this may come in mighty handy. I'll feel easier about you now, Tom, +when I know you have some electric rifles with you." + +<P> +The circus man was told of what Eradicate had said to Andy, but he +was of the opinion that no harm would result from it. + +<P> +"As far as I can learn," went on Mr. Preston, "my old rival Waydell +has given up the giant idea. He is looking for a two-headed +crocodile, said to be somewhere along the Nile river, and he's +fitting out an expedition there I understand. I guess we won't be +bothered with him. But the giant for mine! If I get that sort of an +attraction his two-headed crocodile won't be in it. I hope you have +luck, Tom Swift." + +<P> +The last details of the expedition were considered. Nothing seemed +to have been left undone, and though carrying the electric rifles +would make a little more baggage, no one minded that. + +<P> +"I kin carry dem," said Eradicate. "I ain't got much baggage of mah +own." + +<P> +So it was arranged, and early the next morning the little band of +intrepid travelers, who were going in search of giant land, started +for New York. They little knew what was ahead of them, nor what dire +perils they were to pass through. + +<P> +Of course Tom had said good-bye to Mary Nestor and half-jokingly, he +had promised to bring back a giant of his own, that she might see +one outside of a circus. + +<P> +"But, Tom," Mary exclaimed with a laugh, "what will you do with one +of the big creatures if you get one?" + +<P> +"Have him help me on my newest invention--the noiseless airship," +answered the young inventor. "I need some one to lift heavy weights. +It will save putting up a derrick. Yes, I think I'll get a giant of +my own." + +<P> +The last good-byes were said, and the parting between Tom and his +father was affecting. + +<P> +"I'll soon be back, dad," he said in as cheerful a tone as he could +assume, "and I'll help you finish your gyroscope." + +<P> +"I hope you will, Tom," and then, with a pressure of his son's hand, +Mr. Swift turned away and went into the house, closing the door +after him. + +<P> +The first part of the trip to New York was rather a silent one, no +one caring to talk much. Eradicate was the only cheerful member of +the party, which included the circus man, who was going as far as +the steamer with Tom and his friends. + +<P> +"Say," Ned exclaimed finally, "any one would think we were going to +a funeral!" + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Tom. "I guess something is on all our nerves. +Let's do something to take it off. Here comes a boy with some funny +papers. We'll buy some and read all the jokes." + +<P> +This proved a diversion, and before the train had gone many miles +more the giant-hunters were talking and laughing as though they were +merely starting on a short pleasure trip, instead of an expedition +to the dangerous jungles of South America. + +<P> +They put up at a good hotel in New York, and as soon as they were +established Tom and Mr. Preston went to the steamer <i>Calaban</i> which +was to land them at Buenos Ayres. They found that there was some +confusion about their luggage and boxes, and it took them the better +part of a day to get the tangle straightened out, and their stuff +stored together in one hold. + +<P> +"It will be easier to get it out if it's all together," said Tom, at +the conclusion of their labors, and then he and the circus man +returned to the hotel. The ship was to sail two days later, and, +several hours before the time set for the departure, Tom and his +friends were on board. + +<P> +"You don't see anything of your rival circus friend, do you?" asked +Tom, of the man who wanted a giant. + +<P> +"Not a sign," was the answer, as Mr. Preston glanced over the throng +of on-coming passengers. "I guess we've either given him the slip, +or he's given up the game. You won't have to worry about him. Just +take it easy until you start for the interior, and from then on +you'll have hard work enough." + +<P> +The last of the cargo was being taken aboard, the late passengers +had arrived and were anxiously watching to see that their baggage +was not lost. As Mr. Preston stood talking with Tom near the +gangplank, a clerical looking gentleman approached the circus man. + +<P> +"I beg your pardon," he began in mild accents, "but could you tell +me where my stateroom is?" and he showed his ticket. "I'm not used +to traveling," he needlessly added for that fact was very evident. +Mr. Preston informed him how to get to his berth, and the gentleman +went on: "Are you going all the way to Buenos Ayres?" + +<P> +"No, but my friend is," and the circus man nodded at Tom. + +<P> +"Oh, I'm so glad!" the stranger exclaimed. "Then I shall have +someone of whom I can ask questions. I am quite lost when I travel." + +<P> +"I'll help you all I can," volunteered Tom, "and I'll show you to +your stateroom now." + +<P> +"Ah, thank you. Your name is--" + +<P> +"Tom Swift," supplied the young inventor. + +<P> +"Ah, yes, I believe I have read about your airships. I am the +Reverend Josiah Blinderpool. I am taking a little vacation. I trust +we shall become good friends." + +<P> +"Humph, he's a regular infant, to be away from civilization," mused +Tom, when he had showed the clergyman to the proper stateroom. +"He'll get into trouble, he's so innocent." If he could have seen +that same "clergyman" double up with mirth when he had closed his +stateroom door after him, Tom would not have felt so sure about that +same "innocence." + +<P> +"To think that I was talking face to face with Sam Preston and he +never tumbled to who I was!" exclaimed the newcomer softly. "That's +rich! Now if I play my cards right I shouldn't be surprised but what +they'd invite me to come along with them. That would just suit me. I +wouldn't have any trouble then, getting on the track of those +giants. The information Waydell got from that red-haired Foger chap +wasn't any too definite," and once more the man wearing the garb of +a minister chuckled. + +<P> +"Well, I'll say good-bye," remarked Mr. Preston, a little later, +when the warning bell had rung. "I guess you'll get along all right. +I haven't seen a sign of Waydell, or any of his slick agents. You'll +have no trouble I guess." + +<P> +But if the circus man could have seen the "clergyman" at that same +time looking over letters addressed to "Hank Delby," and signed +"Wayland Waydell" he would not have been so confident. + +<P> +Mr. Preston bade good-bye to his friends, the gangplank was hauled +up, and a hoarse blast came from the whistle of the <i>Calaban</i>. + +<P> +"Bless my pocketbook!" cried Mr. Damon. "We're off!" + +<P> +"Yep, off t' git dat big, giant orchard plant," chimed in Eradicate. + +<P> +"Hush!" exclaimed Tom, who did not like the use of the word "giant" +even in that connection. "Don't tell everyone our business, Rad." + +<P> +"Dat's right, Massa Tom. I clean done forgot dat it's a sort of +secret. I'll keep mighty still 'bout it." + +<P> +The <i>Calaban</i> swung out into the river and began steaming down the +bay. + +<P> +The first week of the voyage was uneventful. The weather was +exceptionally fine, and hardly any one was seasick. The Reverend Mr. +Blinderpool was often on deck, and he made it a point to cultivate +the acquaintance of Tom and his friends. In spite of the fact that +he said he had traveled very little, he seemed to know much about +hidden corners of the world, but always, as on an occasion when he +had accidentally let slip some remark that showed he had been in +far-off China or Asia, he would suddenly change the conversation +when it verged to travel. + +<P> +"There's something queer about that minister," said Ned after one of +these occasions, "but I can't decide what it is." + +<P> +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Tom, who rather liked the man. + +<P> +"No nonsense about it. Why should a minister take a trip like this +when he isn't sick, and when he isn't going to establish a mission +in South America? There's something queer about it, for, by his own +words he just took this voyage as a whim." + +<P> +"Oh, you're too fussy," declared Tom; and for the time the subject +was dropped. + +<P> +They ran into a storm when about ten days out, and for a while they +had a rough time of it, and then the weather cleared again. + +<P> +It was one evening, after the formal dinner, when Tom and Ned were +strolling about on deck, before turning in, that, the quiet of the +ship was broken by what is always an alarming cry at sea. + +<P> +"Fire! Fire!" shouted a man, pointing to a thin wisp of smoke +curling up from the deck amidships. + +<P> +"Keep quiet!" yelled one of the stewards. "It is nothing!" + +<P> +"It's a fire, I tell you!" insisted the man, and several others took +up the cry. + +<P> +A panic was imminent, and the captain came running from his +quarters. + +<P> +"What is it?" he asked. + +<P> +An officer hurried to his side, and said something but in such a low +voice that Tom, who was standing close beside the two, scarcely +heard it. But he did hear this: + +<P> +"There's a fire, sir, in hold number seventeen. We have turned the +hose in there, and the pumps are working." + +<P> +"Very good, Mr. Meld. Now try and quiet the passengers. Tell them it +doesn't amount to much, and if it does we can flood that +compartment." + +<P> +Tom started at that. + +<P> +"Come on, Ned!" he cried, grabbing his chum by the arm. + +<P> +"Why, what's up? What's the matter?" + +<P> +"Matter? Matter enough! The fire is in the hold where all our stuff +is stored, and if the flames reach that box I packed last--well, I +wouldn't give much for the ship!" and fairly dragging his chum +along, Tom raced for the place where the smoke was now coming up in +thicker clouds. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="VIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter VIII A Narrow Escape</H3> + + +<P> +"Here, come back! You can't go past here!" + +<P> +"But I've got to go! I tell you I must go! It's important!" + +<P> +The first speaker was one of the ship's officers, and the other was +Tom Swift, who, accompanied by his chum, was trying to get past a +rope that had been hastily stretched in front of the hold where the +smoke was rolling up in ever-thickening clouds. + +<P> +"It's important that you stay where you are," insisted the officer. +"Look here young man, do you want to start a panic? You know what +that is on board ship. Keep cool, we'll get the fire out all right." + +<P> +"I am cool," responded Tom, and, though he did look a bit excited, +he was calm enough to know what he was doing. + +<P> +"Then keep back!" insisted the officer. + +<P> +A crowd was gathering and there were ominous whispers sent back and +forth. Some hysterical women were beginning to scream, and there +were anxious looks on all faces. + +<P> +"I tell you it's important that I go down there," insisted Tom. "I +want to get a box--" + +<P> +"We'll look after the baggage of the passengers," declared the +officer. "You don't need to worry, young man." + +<P> +"But I tell you I do!" and Tom's voice was loud now. "It isn't so +much on my account, as--" and then, stepping quickly to the side of +the officer he whispered something. + +<P> +"What!" cried the officer. "You don't tell me? That was a risk! I +guess I'll have to help you get it out. Here, Mr. Simm," he called +to one of the mates, "stand guard here. I'm going down into the hold +with this young man." + +<P> +"Shall I come?" cried Ned. + +<P> +"No, you go stay with Mr. Damon and Eradicate," answered Tom. "Tell +them everything is all right. And for cats' sake keep Rad cool. +Don't let him get excited and start a panic. I'll be back in a +minute." + +<P> +With that Tom and the officer disappeared from view, and Ned, after +wondering what it was all about, hastened to reassure Mr. Damon and +the colored man that there was no danger, though from the manner in +which Tom had acted his chum was convinced that something was wrong. + +<P> +Meanwhile our hero, accompanied by the officer, was groping his way +through the thick smoke in the compartment. The officer had switched +on the electric lights, and they shone with a yellow haze through +the clouds of choking vapor. + +<P> +"Can you see it?" asked the officer anxiously. + +<P> +"I had it put where I could easily get at it," answered Tom with a +cough, for some of the smoke had got down his throat. "I had an idea +I might need it in a hurry. Here it is!" and he pointed to a large +box, marked with his initials in red paint. "Give me a hand and +we'll get it out." + +<P> +"Yes, and send it on deck. See, there's the fire!" and the officer +pointed to where a glow could be seen amid some bales of cotton. "It +will be slow burning, that's one good thing, and by turning steam +into this compartment we can soon put it out." + +<P> +"It's pretty close to my box," commented Tom, "but there isn't as +much danger as I thought." + +<P> +It did not take him and the officer long to move the box away from +its proximity to the fire, for the case was not heavy, though it was +of good size, and then the officer having called up an order to some +of his fellow seamen on deck, a rope was let down, and the box +hoisted up. + +<P> +"Whew! That was a narrow escape!" exclaimed Tom as he saw his case +go up on deck. "I suppose I shouldn't have had that stored here. But +there were so many things to think of that I forgot." + +<P> +"Yes, it was a risk," commented the officer. "But what are you going +to do with that sort of stuff, anyhow?" + +<P> +"I may need it when we get among the wild tribes of South American +Indians," answered Tom non-commitally. "I'm much obliged for your +help." + +<P> +"Oh, that's nothing. Anything to save the ship." + +<P> +At that moment there were confused cries, and a series of shouts and +commands up on deck. + +<P> +"We'd better hurry out of here," said the officer. + +<P> +"Why?" + +<P> +"The captain has just ordered steam turned in here. I hope there +isn't anything of yours that will be damaged by it." + +<P> +"No, everything else is in waterproof coverings. Come on, we'll +climb out." + +<P> +They hurried from the compartment and, a little later clouds of +quenching steam were poured in from a hose run from the boiler room. +The hatch was battened down, and then the smoke ceased to come up. + +<P> +"The danger is practically over," the captain assured the frightened +passengers. "The fire will be all out by morning. You may go to your +staterooms in perfect safety." + +<P> +Some did, and others, disbelieving, hung around the hatch-cover, +sniffing and peering to discover traces of smoke. But the sailors +had done their work well, and a stranger would not have known that a +fire was in the hold. + +<P> +The captain had spoken truly, and in the morning the fire was +completely out, a few charred bales of cotton being the only things +damaged. They were hauled up and dumped into the sea, while Tom, +making a hasty inspection of his other goods placed in that +compartment saw, to his relief, that beyond one case of trinkets, +designed for barter with the natives, nothing had been damaged, and +even the trinkets could be used on a pinch. + +<P> +"But what was in that box?" asked Ned, that night as they got ready +to retire, the excitement having calmed down. + +<P> +"Hush! Not so loud," cautioned Tom, for Mr. Damon was in the next +stateroom, while Eradicate had one across the corridor. "I'll tell +you, Ned, but don't breathe a word of it to Rad or Mr. Damon. They +might not intend to give it away, but I'm afraid they would, if they +knew, and I depend on the things in that box to give the native +giants the surprise of their lives in case we--well, in case we come +to close quarters." + +<P> +"Close quarters?" + +<P> +"Yes, have a fight, you know, or in case they get so fond of us that +they won't hear of letting us go--in other words if they make us +captives." + +<P> +"Great Scott, Tom! You don't think they'll do that, do you?" + +<P> +"No telling, but if they do, Ned, I've got some things in that box +that will make them wish they hadn't. It's got--" and Tom leaned +forward and whispered, as though he feared even the walls would +hear. + +<P> +"Good!" cried his chum! "That's the stuff! No wonder you thought the +ship might be damaged if the fire got to that!" + +<P> +It seemed that the slight fire was about all the excitement destined +to take place aboard the <i>Calaban</i>, for, after the blaze was so +effectually quenched, the ship slipped along through the calm seas, +and it was actually an effort to kill time on the part of the +passengers. As they progressed further south the weather became more +and more warm, until, as they approached the equator, every one put +on the lightest garments obtainable. + +<P> +"Crossing the line," was the signal for the usual "stunts" among the +sailors. "Neptune" came aboard, with his usual sea-green whiskers +made from long rope ends, and with his trident much in evidence; and +there was plenty of horseplay which the passengers very much +enjoyed. + +<P> +Then, as the tropical region was left behind, the weather became +more bearable. There were one or two storms, but they were of no +consequence and the steamer weathered them easily. + +<P> +Torn and his friends had several talks with the "Reverend Josiah +Blinderpool," as the pretended clergyman still called himself. But +he did not obtrude his company on them, and though he asked many +questions as to where Tom and his party were going, the young +inventor, with his usual caution in talking to strangers, rather +evaded them. + +<P> +"Hang it all! He's as close-mouthed as a clam," complained "Mr. +Blinderpool" to himself one day, after an attempt to worm something +from Tom, "I'll just have to stick close to him and his chum to get +a line on where they're heading for. And I must find out, or Waydell +will think I'm throwing the game." + +<P> +As for Tom and the others, they gave the seeming clergyman little +thought--that is until one day when something happened. Ned had been +down in the engine room, having had permission to inspect the +wonderful machinery, and, on his way back he passed the smoking +cabin. He was rather surprised to see Mr. Blinderpool in there, +puffing on a big black cigar, and with him were some men whom Ned +recognized as personages who had vainly endeavored to get a number +of passengers into a card game with them. And, unless Ned's eyes +deceived him, the seeming clergyman was about to indulge in a game +himself. + +<P> +"That's mighty queer," mused Ned. "Guess I'll tell Tom about this. I +never saw a minister play cards in public before, and this Mr. +Blinderpool has been trying to get thick with Tom, of late. Maybe +he's a gambler in disguise." + +<P> +Filled with this thought Ned hastened off to warn his chum. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="IX"></A> +<H3>Chapter IX "Forward March!"</H3> + + +<P> +"You don't say so!" exclaimed the young inventor, when Ned had told +him the queer news. "Well, do you know I've been suspicious of that +fellow ever since he tried to make friends with us." + +<P> +"Suspicious? How so? You don't think--" + +<P> +"Oh, I mean I think he's some kind of a confidence man who has +adopted the respectable clothes of a minister to fool people. He may +be a card sharper himself. Well, we won't have anything more to do +with him. It won't be long before we arrive at Buenos Ayres, and +then we won't be bothered with card sharpers or anybody else but--" + +<P> +"Giants and fighting natives," finished Ned, with a laugh. "You +forget, Tom, that there's a war going on near the very place we're +headed for." + +<P> +"That's so, Ned. But with what we have with us I guess we can make +out all right. I'm going to have the electric rifles handy the +minute we start for the interior." + +<P> +The voyage continued, and was fast drawing to a close. "Mr. +Blinderpool" made several more attempts to strike up a friendship +with Tom, or his chum, but they were on their guard now, and, +failing to get into much of a conversation with the two young men, +the pretended clergyman turned his attentions to Mr. Damon. + +<P> +That eccentric gentleman welcomed him at first, until a quiet hint +from Tom brought that to an end. + +<P> +"Bless my fire shovel!" cried Mr. Damon. "You don't say so! Not a +clergyman at all? Dear me!" + +<P> +And then, getting desperate, and needing very much to learn how long +a journey his rivals were to undertake, so that he, too, might +prepare for it, Mr. Hank Delby, alias Blinderpool, began to "pump" +Eradicate. + +<P> +But the latter was too sharp for him. Well knowing that a white man +would not get suddenly friendly with one of the black race unless +for some selfish object, Eradicate fairly snubbed the seeming +minister, until that worthy had to go off by himself, saying bitter +things and casting black looks at our friends. + +<P> +"But I'll get ahead of them yet!" he muttered, "and I'll get their +giants away from them, if they capture any." + +<P> +The box on which Tom set such an importance, and which had so nearly +been the cause of a disaster, had been stored in one of the fireproof +compartments of the ship, and now, as a few days more would +see the vessel entering the harbor of the Rio de la Plata, thence to +steam up to the ancient city of Buenos Ayres, Tom and the others +began to think of what lay before them. + +<P> +"How do you propose to head into the interior?" asked Mr. Damon one +afternoon, when the captain announced that the following morning +would see them nearly opposite Montevideo. + +<P> +"I'm going to hire a lot of burrows, donkeys or whatever they have +down here that answers the purpose," replied Tom. "We have a lot of +things to transport, and I guess pack mules would be the best, if we +can get them. Then I've got to hire some drivers and some porters, +camp-makers and the like. In fact we'll have quite a party. I guess +I'll need ten natives, and a head man and with ourselves we'll be +fifteen. So we'll need plenty of food. But then we can get that as +we go along, except when we get away into the interior, and then +we'll have to hunt it ourselves." + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "We haven't had a good hunting +expedition since we went to elephant land, Tom. The electric rifles +will come in handy here." + +<P> +"Yes, I expect they will. Now come on, Ned, and help me get a list +ready of the things we've got to take with us, and how they can best +be divided up." + +<P> +Thick weather delayed the ship somewhat, so it was not until evening +of the next day that they made Montevideo, where part of the cargo +was to be discharged. As they would lay over there a day, the boys +decided to go ashore, which they did, wondering at the strange +sights in the old city. + +<P> +Tom watched to see if the pretended minister would land, and +endeavor to force his acquaintance, but Mr. Hank Delby, to give him +his right name, was not in evidence. In fact he was turning over +scheme after scheme in his mind in order to hit on one that would +enable him to take advantage of the preparations which had been made +by his rival in the circus business. + +<P> +"I've just got to get a line on where those giants are to be found," +mused Mr. Delby, in the seclusion of his stateroom, "even if I have +to take some other disguise and follow that Swift crowd. That's what +I'll do. I'll put on some other disguise! I wonder what it had +better be?" + +<P> +Tom and Ned, to say nothing of Mr. Damon and Eradicate, found much +to interest them in the capital of Uruguay, and they were rather +sorry, in a way, when it was time for them to leave. + +<P> +"But we'll see plenty more strange sights," remarked Tom, as the +steamer started off for Buenos Ayres. "In fact our trip hasn't +really begun yet." + +<P> +In due time they dropped anchor at the ancient city, and then began +a series of confused and busy times. In fact there was so much to +do, seeing to the unloading of their stuff, arranging for hotel +accommodations, seeing to hiring natives for the expedition into the +interior, and other details, that Tom and his friends had no time to +think anything about the pretended clergyman who had caused them a +little worry. + +<P> +Eventually their belongings were stored in a safe place, and our +friends sat down to a good dinner in a hotel that, while it was in +far-off South America, yet was as good as many in New York, and, in +some respects the boys, and Mr. Damon, liked it better. + +<P> +They found that the Spanish and Portuguese languages were the +principal ones spoken, together with a mixture of the native +tongues, and as both Ned and Tom, as well as Mr. Damon, had a +working knowledge of Spanish they got along fairly well. Some of the +hotel people could speak English. + +<P> +Tom made inquiries and found that the best plan would be to +transport all his stuff by the regular route to Rosario, on the +Parana river in Argentina, and there he could make up his pack +train, hire native carriers, and start for the interior. + +<P> +"Then we'll do that," he decided, "and take it easy until we get to +Rosario." + +<P> +It took them the better part of a week to do this, but at last they +were on the ground, and felt for the first time that they were +really going into a wild and little explored country. + +<P> +"Are you going to stick to the Parana river?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"No," replied Tom, in the seclusion of their room, "if there are any +giants they will be found in some undiscovered, or at least little +traveled, part of the country. I don't believe they are in the +vicinity of the big rivers, or other travelers would have heard +about them, and, as far as we know, Mr. Preston's animal agent is +the only one who ever got a trace of them. We'll have to go into the +jungle on either side of the river." + +<P> +"Bless my walking stick!" cried Mr. Damon. "Have we really to go +into the jungle, Tom?" + +<P> +"I'm afraid we have, if we want to get any giants, and get a trace +of Mr. Poddington." + +<P> +"All right, I'm game, but I do hope we won't run into a band of +fighting natives." + +<P> +In Rosario it was learned that while the "war" was not regarded +seriously from the fact that the fighting tribes were far inland, +still it was going on with vigor, and large bands of natives were +roaming about, stealing each others' cattle and horses, burning +villages, and taking captives. + +<P> +"I guess we're in for it," remarked Tom grimly. "But I'm not going +to back out now." + +<P> +Unexpected complications, difficulties in the way of getting the +right kind of help, and a competent man to take charge of the native +drivers, so delayed our friends that it was nearly two weeks after +their arrival in Rosario before they could start for the interior. + +<P> +Of course the object of the expedition was kept a secret, and Tom +let it be known that he and his friends were merely exploring, and +wanted rare plants, orchids, or anything in that line. The natives +were not very curious. + +<P> +At last the day for the start came. The mules, which had been hired +as beasts of burdens, were loaded with boxes or bales on either +side, the natives were marshalled into line. Tom, Ned, and Mr. +Damon, each equipped with a rifle had a saddle animal to ride, and +Eradicate was similarly equipped, though for a weapon he depended on +a shotgun, which he said he understood better than the electric +rifles. + +<P> +The aeroplane, divided into many small packages, the goods for +barter, their supplies, stores, ammunition, and the box of which Tom +took such care--all these were on the backs of the beasts of burden. +Some food was taken along, but for a time, at least, they could +depend on scattered towns or villages, or the forest game, for their +eating. + +<P> +"Are we all ready?" called Tom, looking at the rather imposing +cavalcade of which he was the head. + +<P> +"I guess so," replied Ned. "Let her go!" + +<P> +"Bless my liver pad!" gasped Mr. Damon. "If we've got to start do +it, and let's get it over with Tom." + +<P> +"All ready, Rad?" asked the colored man's young master. + +<P> +"All ready, Massa Tom. But I mus' say dat I'd radder hab Boomerang +dan dish yeah animal what I'm ridin'." + +<P> +"Oh, you'll do all right, Rad. Then, if we're all ready, forward +march!" cried Tom, and with calls to their animals, the drivers +started them off. + +<P> +Hardly had they begun the advance than Ned, who had been narrowly +watching one of the natives, hurried up to Tom, and rapidly +whispered something to his chum. + +<P> +"What?" cried Tom. "Armed with a six-shooter, is he? Well, we'll see +about that! Halt!" he cried in Spanish, and then he called San Pedro +the head mule driver, to him. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="X"></A> +<H3>Chapter X A Wild Horse Stampede</H3> + + +<P> +"Who is that man?" demanded Tom pointing to the one Ned had +indicated. Tom's chum had had a glimpse of a shining revolver in the +hip pocket of one of the mule drivers, and knowing that the simple +natives were not in the habit of carrying such weapons, the lad had +communicated his suspicions to Tom. + +<P> +"What man, senor?" asked the head mule driver. + +<P> +"That one!" and the young inventor again pointed toward him. And, +now that Tom looked a second time he saw that the man was not as +black as the other drivers--not an honest, dark-skinned black but +more of a sickly yellow, like a treacherous half-breed. "Who is he?" +asked Tom, for the man in question was just then tightening a girth +and could not hear him. + +<P> +"I know not, senor. He come to me when I am hiring the others, and +he say he is a good driver. And so he is, I test him before I engage +him," went in San Pedro in Spanish. "He is one good driver." + +<P> +"Why does he carry a revolver?" + +<P> +"A revolver, senor? Santa Maria, I know not! I--" + +<P> +"I'll find out," declared Tom determinedly. "Here," he called to the +offending one, who straightened up quickly. "Come here!" + +<P> +The man came, with all the cringing servility of a born native, and +bowed low. + +<P> +"Why have you a weapon?" asked the young inventor. "I gave orders +that none of the drivers were to carry them." + +<P> +"A revolver, senor? I have none! I--" + +<P> +"Rad, reach in his pocket!" cried Tom, and the colored man did so +with a promptness that the other could not frustrate. Eradicate held +aloft a large calibre, automatic weapon. + +<P> +"What's that for?" asked Tom, virtuously angry. + +<P> +"I--er--I--" and then, with a hopeless shrug of his shoulders the +man turned away. + +<P> +"Give him his gun, and get another driver, San Pedro," directed our +hero, and with another shrug of his shoulders the man accepted the +revolver, and walked slowly off. Another driver was not hard to +engage, as several had been hanging about, hoping for employment at +the last minute, and one was quickly chosen. + +<P> +"It's lucky you saw that gun, Ned," remarked Tom, when they were +actually under way again. + +<P> +"Yes, I saw the sun shining on it as his coat flapped up. What was +his game, do you suppose?" + +<P> +"Oh, he might be what they call a 'bad half-breed' down here. I +guess maybe he thought he could lord it over the other drivers when +we got out in the jungle, and maybe take some of their wages away +from them, or have things easier for himself." + +<P> +"Bless my wishbone!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You don't think he meant +to use it on us, Tom?" + +<P> +"Why no? What makes you ask that?" + +<P> +"Oh, I'm just nervous, I guess," replied the odd man. + +<P> +But if Mr. Damon could have seen that same half-breed a little +later, as he slipped into a Rosario resort, with the yellow stain +washed from his face, the nervousness of the eccentric gentleman +would have increased. For the man who had been detected with the +revolver muttered to himself: + +<P> +"Caught! Well, I'll fool 'em next time all right! I thought I could +get away with the pack train, and then it would have been easy to +turn the natives any way I wished, after I had found what I'm +looking for. But I had to go and carry that gun! I never thought +they'd spot it. Well, it's all up now, and if Waydell heard of it +he'd want to fire me. But I'll make good yet. I'll have to adopt +some other disguise, and see if I can't tag along behind." + +<P> +All unconscious of the plotter they had left back of them, Tom and +his companions pushed on, rapidly leaving such signs of civilization +as were represented by small native towns and villages, and coming +nearer to the jungles and forests that lay between them and the +place where Tom was destined to be made a captive. + +<P> +They were far enough away from the tropics to escape the intolerable +heat, and yet it was quite warm. In fact the weather was not at all +unpleasant, and, once they were started, all enjoyed the novelty of +the trip. + +<P> +Tom planned to keep along the eastern shore of the Parana river, +until they reached the junction where the Salado joins it. Then he +decided that they would do better to cross the Parana and strike +into the big triangle made by that stream and its principal +tributary, heading north toward Bolivia. + +<P> +"For it is in that little-explored part of South America that I +think the giants will be found." said Tom, as he talked it over with +Ned and Mr. Damon in the privacy of their tent, which had been set +up. + +<P> +"But why should there be giants there any more than anywhere else?" +asked Ned. + +<P> +"No particular reason," answered his chum. "But, according to the +last word Mr. Preston had from his agent, that was where he was +heading for, and that's where Zacatas, his native helper, said he +lost track of his master. I have a theory that the giants, if we +find any, will turn out to be a branch of a Patagonian tribe." + +<P> +"Patagonians!" exclaimed Ned. + +<P> +"Yes. You know the natives of the Southern part of Argentina grow to +a considerable size. Now Patagonia is a comparatively bleak and cold +country. What would prevent some of that big tribe centuries ago, +from having migrated to a warmer country, where life was more +favorable? After several generations they may have grown to be +giants." + +<P> +"Bravo!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "It's a good theory, at any rate, Tom. +Though whether you can ever prove it is a question." + +<P> +"Yes, and a big one," agreed the young inventor with a laugh. + +<P> +For some days they traveled along over a comparatively flat country, +bordering the river. At times they would pass through small native +villages, where they would be able to get fresh meat, poultry and +other things that varied their bill of fare. Again there would be +long, lonely stretches of forest or jungle, through which it was +difficult to make their way. And, occasionally they would come to +fair-sized towns where their stay was made pleasant. + +<P> +"I doan't see any ob dem oranges an' bananas droppin' inter mah +mouf, Massa Tom," complained Eradicate one day, after they had been +on the march for over a week. + +<P> +"Have patience, Rad," advised Tom. "We'll come to them when we get a +little farther into the interior. First we'll come to the monkeys, +and the cocoanut trees." + +<P> +"Hones' Massa Tom?" + +<P> +"Surely." + +<P> +And though it was pretty far south for the nimble simians, the next +day they did come upon a drove of them skipping about in the tall +palm trees. + +<P> +"There they are, Rad! There they are!" cried Ned, as the chattering +of the monkeys filled the forest. + +<P> +"By golly! So dey be! Heah's where I get some cocoanuts!" + +<P> +Before anyone could stop him, Eradicate caught up a dead branch, and +threw it at a monkey. The chattering increased, and almost instantly +a shower of cocoanuts came crashing down, narrowly missing some of +our friends. + +<P> +"Hold on, Rad! Hold on!" cried Tom. "Some of us will be hurt!" + +<P> +Crack! came a cocoanut down on the skull of the colored man. + +<P> +"Bless my court plaster! Someone's hurt now!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Hurt? Bless yo' heart, Massa Damon, it takes mo' dan dat t' hurt +dish yeah chile!" cried Eradicate with a grin. "Ah got a hard head, +Ah has, mighty hard head, an' de cocoanut ain't growed dat kin bust +it. Thanks, Mistah Monkey, thanks!" and with a laugh Eradicate +jumped off his mule, and began gathering up the nuts, while the +monkeys fled into the forest. + +<P> +"Very much good to drink milk," said San Pedro, as he picked up a +half-ripe nut, and showed how to chop off the top with a big knife +and drain the slightly acid juice inside. "Very much good for +thirst." + +<P> +"Let's try it," proposed Tom, and they all drank their fill, for +there were many cocoanuts, though it was rather an isolated grove of +them. + +<P> +The monkeys became more numerous as they proceeded farther north +toward the equator, for it must be remembered that they had landed +south of it, and at times the little animals became a positive +nuisance. + +<P> +Several days passed, and they crossed the Parana river and struck +into the almost unpenetrated tract of land where Tom hoped to find +the giants. As yet none of their escort dreamed of the object of the +expedition, and though Tom had caused scouts to be sent back over +their trail to learn if they were being followed there was no trace +of any one. + +<P> +One day, after a night camp on the edge of a rather high table land, +they started across a fertile plain that was covered with a rich +growth of grass. + +<P> +"Good grazing ground here," commented Ned. + +<P> +"Yes," put in San Pedro. "Plenty much horse here pretty soon." + +<P> +"Do the natives graze their herds of horses here?" asked Tom. + +<P> +"No natives--wild horses," explained Pedro. "Plenty much, sometimes +too many they come. You see, maybe." + +<P> +It was nearly noon, and Tom was considering stopping for dinner if +they could come to a good watering place, when Ned, who had ridden +slightly in advance, came galloping back as fast as his steed would +carry him. + +<P> +"Look out! Look out!" he cried. "There's a stampede of 'em, and +they're headed right this way!" + +<P> +"Stampede of what? Who's headed this way?" cried Tom. "A lot of +monkeys?" + +<P> +"No, wild horses! Thousands of 'em! Hear 'em coming?" + +<P> +In the silence that followed Ned's warning there could be heard a +dull, roaring, thundering sound, and the earth seemed to tremble. + +<P> +"The young senor speaks truth! Wild horses are coming!" cried San +Pedro. "Get ready, senors! Have your weapons at hand, and perchance +we can turn the stampede aside." + +<P> +"The rifles! The electric rifles, Ned--Mr. Damon! We've got to stop +them, or they'll trample us to death!" cried Tom. + +<P> +As he spoke the thundering became louder, and then, looking across +the grassy plain, all saw a large troop of wild horses, with flying +manes and tails, headed directly toward them! + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XI"></A> +<H3>Chapter XI Caught in a Living Rope</H3> + + +<P> +"Quick! Peg out the mules!" cried San Pedro, after one look at the +onrushing horses. "Drive the stakes well down! Tie them fast and +then get behind those rocks! Lively!" + +<P> +He cried his orders to the natives in Spanish, at the same time +motioning to Tom and Ned. + +<P> +"Get off your mules!" he went on. "Peg them out. Peg out the others, +and then run for it!" + +<P> +"Run for it?" repeated Tom, "Do you think I'm going to leave my +outfit in the midst of that stampede?" and he waved his hand toward +the thundering, galloping wild horses which were coming nearer every +moment. "Get out the electric rifles, and we'll turn that stampede. +I'm not going to run." + +<P> +"Bless my saddle!" cried Mr. Damon. "This is awful! There must be a +thousand of them." + +<P> +"Nearer two!" cried Ned, who was struggling to loosen the straps that +bound his electric rifle to the side of his mule. Already the pack +animals as well as those ridden by the members of the giant-hunting +party were showing signs of excitement. They seemed to want to join +the stampeding horses. + +<P> +"Peg our animals out! Peg them out! Make them so they can't join the +others!" yelled San Pedro. "It's our only chance!" + +<P> +"I believe he's right!" cried Mr. Damon. "Tom, if we wait until +those maddened brutes are up to us they'll fairly sweep ours along +with them, and there's no telling where we'll end up. I think we'd +better follow his advice and tie our mules as strongly as we can. +Then we can go over there by the rocks, and fire at the wild horses. +We may be able to turn them aside." + +<P> +"Guess that's right," agreed the young inventor after a moment's +thought. "Come on, Ned. Peg out!" + +<P> +"Peg out! Peg out!" yelled the natives, and then began a lively +scene. Pegging stakes were in readiness, and, attached to the bridle +of each mule was a strong, rawhide rope for tying to the stake. The +pegs were driven deeply into the ground and in a trice the animals +were made fast to them, though they snorted, and tried to pull away +as they heard the neighing of the stampeding animals and saw them +coming on with an irresistible rush. + +<P> +"Hurry!" begged San Pedro, and hurry Tom, Ned and the others did. +Animal after animal was made fast--that is all but one and that bore +on its back two rather large but light boxes--the contents of the +case which Tom had rescued from the fire in the hold. + +<P> +"What are you going to do with mule?" asked Ned, as he saw Tom begin +to lead the animal away, the others having been pegged out. + +<P> +"I'm going to take him over to the rocks with me. I'm not going to +take any chances on this mule getting away with those things in the +boxes. Give me a hand here, and then we'll see what the electric +rifles will do against those horses." + +<P> +But the one mule which Tom had elected to take with him seemed to +resent being separated from his companions. Bracing his feet well +apart, the animal stubbornly refused to move. + +<P> +"Come on!" yelled Tom, pulling on the leading rope. + +<P> +"Bless my porous plaster!" cried Mr. Damon. "You'd better hurry, +Tom! Those wild horses are almost on us!" + +<P> +"I'm trying to hurry!" replied the young inventor, "but this mule +won't come. Ned, get behind and shove, will you?" + +<P> +"Not much! I don't want to be kicked." + +<P> +"Beat him! Strike him! Wait until I get a club!" yelled San Pedro. +"Come, Antonia, Selka, Balaka!" he cried, to several of the natives +who had already started for the sheltering rocks a short distance +away. "Beat the mule for Senor Swift!" + +<P> +Ned joined Tom at the leading rope, and the two lads tried to pull +the animal along. Mr. Damon rushed over to lend his aid, and San +Pedro, catching up a long stick, was about to bring it down on the +mule's back. Meanwhile the stampeding animals were rushing nearer. + +<P> +"Hold on dere, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Yo'-all done +flustered dat mule, dat's what yo' done. Yo'-all am too much excited +'bout him. Be calm! Be calm!" + +<P> +"Calm! With that bunch of wild animals bearing down on us?" shouted +Tom. "Let's see you be calm, Rad. Come on here, you obstinate +brute!" he cried, straining on the rope. + +<P> +"Let me do it, Massa Tom. Let me do it," suggested the colored man +hurrying to the balky beast. + +<P> +Then, as gently as if he was talking to a nervous child, and totally +oblivious to the danger of the approaching horses, Eradicate went up +to the mule's head, rubbed its ears until they pointed naturally +once more, murmured something to it, and then, taking the rope from +Ned and Tom, Eradicate led the mule along toward the rocks as easily +as if there had never been any question about going there. + +<P> +"For the love of tripe! How did you do it?" asked Tom. + +<P> +"Bless my peck of oats!" gasped Mr. Damon. "It's a good thing we had +Rad along!" + +<P> +"All mules am alike," said the colored man with a grin. "An dish +yeah one ain't much different from mah Boomerang. I guess he's a +sorter cousin." + +<P> +"Come on!" yelled San Pedro. "No time to lose. Make for the rocks!" + +<P> +Tom, Ned and Mr. Damon sprinted then, and there was need to, for the +foremost of the galloping horses was not a hundred feet away. Then +came Eradicate, leading the mule that had at last consented to +hurry. The natives, with San Pedro, were already at the rocks, +waiting for the white hunters with the deadly electric rifles. + +<P> +"If they stampede our mules we'll be in a pickle!" murmured Ned. + +<P> +"I guess those ropes will hold unless they bite them through," +remarked Tom. + +<P> +"Yes, they sure hold," cried San Pedro, and indeed one had to shout +now to be heard above the thundering of the horses. Now the tethered +mules were lost to sight in the multitude of the other steeds all +about them. + +<P> +"Come on, Ned!" yelled Tom, as he sighted his rifle. "Pump it into +them! We must turn them, or they may come over this way, and if they +do it will be all up with us." + +<P> +"Shoot to kill?" asked Ned, as he drew back the firing lever of his +electric rifle. + +<P> +"No, only a stunning charge. Those horses are valuable, and there's +no use killing them. All we want to do is to turn them aside." + +<P> +"That's right," agreed Mr. Damon, forgetting in the excitement of +the moment to bless himself or anything. "We'll only stun them." + +<P> +The rifles were quickly adjusted to send out a comparatively weak +charge of electricity, and then they were trained on the dense mass +of horses, while the three marksmen began working the firing levers. + +<P> +At first, though horse after horse fell to the ground, stunned, +there was no appreciable effect on the thousands in the drove. The +poor mules were hidden from sight, though by reason of divisions in +the living stream of animals it could still be told where they were +tethered, and where the horses separated to go past them. +Fortunately the ropes and pegs held. + +<P> +"Fire faster!" cried Tom. "Shoot across the front of them, and try +to turn them to one side." + +<P> +From the rocks, behind which the natives and our friends crouched, +there came a steady stream of electric fire. Horse after horse went +down, stunned but not badly hurt, and in a few hours the beasts +would feel no ill effects. The firing was redoubled, and then there +came a break in the steady stream of horseflesh. + +<P> +Some hesitated and sought to turn back. Others, behind, pressed them +on, and then, as if in fear at the unknown and unseen power that was +laying low animal after animal, the great body, of horses, suddenly +turned at right angles to their course and broke away. There were +now two bodies of the wild runaways, those that had passed the +tethered mules, and those that had swung off. The stampede had been +broken. + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom, jumping up from behind the rocks, and +swinging his hat. "We've turned them." + +<P> +"And just in time, too," added Ned, as he joined his chum. Then all +the others leaped up, and the sight of the human beings completed +the scare. The stampeding animals swung off more than before, so +that they were nearly doubling back on their own trail. The others +thundered off, and the ground was strewn with unconscious though +unharmed animals. + +<P> +"One mule gone!" cried San Pedro, hastily counting the still +tethered animals which were wildly tugging at their ropes. + +<P> +"Never mind," spoke Tom, "it's the one with some of that damaged +bartering stuff I intended for trading. We can afford to lose that. +Rad, is your animal all right?" + +<P> +"He suah am, Massa Tom. Dish yeah mule am almost as sensible as +Boomerang, ain't yo'?" and Eradicate patted the big animal he was +leading. + +<P> +"I'll send a man down the trail, and maybe he can pick up the +missing one," said San Pedro, and while the other natives were +quieting the restless mules, one tall black man hastened in the wake +of the retreating horses. + +<P> +He came back in an hour with the missing animal, that had broken its +tether rope and then, after running along with the wild horses had +evidently dropped out of the drove. Aside from the loss of a small +box, there had been no damage done, and the cavalcade was soon under +way once more, leaving the motionless horses to recover from the +effects of the electricity. + +<P> +"Bless my saddle pad!" cried Mr. Damon. "I don't think I want to go +through anything like that again." + +<P> +"Neither do I," agreed Tom. "We are well out of it." + +<P> +"How much you take for one of them rifles?" asked San Pedro +admiringly. + +<P> +"Not for sale," answered Tom with a laugh. + +<P> +They camped in a fertile valley that night, and had a much-needed +rest. As yet Tom had made no inquiries as to the location of giant +land from any of the natives of the villages or towns through which +they passed. He knew as soon as he did begin asking questions, his +own men would hear of it, and they might be frightened if they knew +they were in an expedition the object of which was to capture some +of the tall men. + +<P> +"We'll just go along for a few days more," said Tom, to Ned, "and +then, when I do spring my surprise, they'll be so far from home that +they won't dare turn back. In a few days I'll begin making +inquiries." + +<P> +They traveled on for three days more, ever heading north, and coming +more into the warmer climate. The vegetation began to take on a more +tropical look, and finally they reached a region infested with many +wild beasts and monkeys, and with patches of dense jungle on either +side of the narrow trail. Fruits, tropical flowers and birds +abounded. + +<P> +"I think we're getting there," remarked Tom, on the evening of the +third day after his talk with Ned. "San Pedro says there's quite a +village about half a day's march ahead, and I may learn something +there. I'll know by to-morrow whether we are on the right trail or +not." + +<P> +The natives were getting supper, and Eradicate was busy with a meal +for the three white hunters. Mr. Damon had strolled down to the bank +of a little stream, and was looking at some small animals like foxes +that had come for their evening drink. They seemed quite fearless. + +<P> +Suddenly something long, round and thick seemed to drop down out of +a tree close to the odd gentleman. So swift and noiseless was it +that Mr. Damon never noticed it. Then, like a flash something went +around him, and he let out a scream of terror. + +<P> +San Pedro, who was nearest to him, saw and heard. The next instant +the black muleteer came rushing toward the camp, crying: + +<P> +"He is caught in a rope! Mr. Damon is caught in a rope!" + +<P> +"A rope!" repeated Ned. not understanding. + +<P> +"Yes, a rope in a tree. Come quickly!" + +<P> +Tom caught up one of the electric rifles and rushed forward. No +sooner had he set eyes on his friend, who was writhing about in the +folds of what looked like a big ship cable, then the young inventor +cried: + +<P> +"A rope! Yes, a living rope! That's a big boa constrictor that has +Mr. Damon! Get a gun, Ned, and follow me! We must save him before he +is crushed to death!" + +<P> +And the two lads rushed forward while the living rope drew its folds +tighter and tighter about the unfortunate man. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XII A Native Battle</H3> + + +<P> +"Bless my--!" but that was as far as poor Mr. Damon could get. The +breath was fairly squeezed out of him by the folds of the great +serpent that had dropped down out of the tree to crush him to death. +His head fell forward on his breast, and his arms were pinioned to +his sides. + +<P> +"Quick, Ned!" cried Tom. "We must fire together! Be careful not to +hit Mr. Damon!" + +<P> +"That's right. I'll take the snake on one side, Tom, and you on the +other!" + +<P> +"No! Then we might hit each other. Come on my side. Aim for the +head, and throw in the highest charge. We want to kill, not stun!" + +<P> +"Right!" gasped Ned, as he ran forward at his chum's side. + +<P> +San Pedro, and the other natives, could do nothing. In the gathering +twilight, broken by the light of several campfires, they stood +helpless watching the two plucky youths advance to do battle with +the serpent. Eradicate had caught up a club, and had dashed forward +to do what he could, but Tom motioned him back. + +<P> +"We can manage," spoke the young inventor. + +<P> +Then he and Ned crept on with ready rifles. The snake raised its +ugly head and hissed, ceasing for a moment to constrict its coils +about the unfortunate man. + +<P> +"Now's our chance--fire!" hoarsely whispered Ned. + +<P> +It seemed as if the big snake heard, for, raising its head still +higher, it fairly glared at Ned and Tom. It was the very chance they +wanted, for they could now fire without the danger of hitting Mr. +Damon. + +<P> +"Ready?" asked Tom of his chum in a low voice. + +<P> +"Ready!" was the equally low answer. + +<P> +It was necessary to kill the serpent at one shot, as to merely wound +it might mean that in its agony it would thresh about, and seriously +injure, if not kill, Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Fire!" called Tom in a whisper, and he and Ned pressed the triggers +of the electric rifles on the same instant. + +<P> +There was a streak of bluish flame that cut like a sliver through +the gathering darkness, and then, as though a blight had fallen upon +it, the folds of the great snake relaxed, and Mr. Damon slipped to +the ground unconscious. The electric charges had gone fairly through +the head of the serpent and it had died instantly. + +<P> +"Quick! Mr. Damon! We must get him away!" cried Tom. "He may be +dead!" + +<P> +Together the chums sprang forward. The folds of the serpent had +scarcely ceased moving before the two youths snatched their friend +away. Dropping their rifles, they lifted him up to bear him to the +sleeping tent which had been erected. + +<P> +"Liver pin!" suddenly ejaculated Mr. Damon. It was what he started +to say when the serpent had squeezed the breath out of him, and, on +regaining consciousness from his momentary faint, his brain carried +out the suggestion it had originally received. + +<P> +"How are you?" cried Tom, nearly dropping Mr. Damon's legs in his +excitement, for he had hold of his feet, while Ned was at the head. + +<P> +"Are you all right?" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Yes--I--I guess so. I--I feel as though I had been put through a +clothes wringer though. What happened?" + +<P> +"A big snake dropped down out of a tree and grabbed you," answered +Tom. + +<P> +"And then what? Put me down, boys, I guess I can walk." + +<P> +"We shot it," said Ned modestly. + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy!" exclaimed the odd gentleman. "I--I +hardly know what to say. I'll say it later. You saved my life. Let +me see if any bones are broken." + +<P> +None was, fortunately, and after staggering about a bit Mr. Damon +found that he could limp along. But he was very sore and bruised, +for, though the snake had squeezed him but for part of a minute, +that was long enough. A few seconds more and nearly every bone in +his body would have been crushed, for that is the manner in which a +constrictor snake kills its prey before devouring it. + +<P> +"Santa Maria! The dear gentleman is not dead then?" cried San Pedro, +as the three approached the tents. + +<P> +"Bless my name plate, no!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Praise to all the saints! The brave young senors with their +wonderful guns saved him. Now you must rest and sleep." + +<P> +"I feel as if that was all I wanted to do for a month," commented +Mr. Damon. His soreness and stiffness increased each minute, and he +was glad to get to bed, while the boys and Eradicate rubbed his +limbs with liniment. San Pedro knew of a leaf that grew in the +jungle which, when bruised, and made into poultices, had the +property of drawing out soreness. The next day he found some, and +Mr. Damon was wrapped up in bandages until he declared that he +looked like an Egyptian mummy. + +<P> +But the leaf poultices did him good, and in a few days he was able +to be about, though he was still a trifle stiff. Of course the +cavalcade had to halt in the woods, but they did not mind this as +they had traveled well up to this time, and the enforced rest was +appreciated. + +<P> +"Well, do you feel able to move along?" asked Tom of Mr. Damon one +morning, about a week later, for they were still in the "snake +camp," as they called it in memory of the big serpent. + +<P> +"Oh, yes, I think so, Tom. Where are you going?" + +<P> +"I want to push on to the next village. There I hope to get some +line on giant land, and really I ought to begin making inquiries +soon. San Pedro and the others are wondering what our object is, for +we haven't collected any specimens of either flowers or animals, or +the snake skin, and he thinks we are a sort of scientific +expedition." + +<P> +"Well, let's travel then. I'm able." + +<P> +So they started off once more along the jungle and forest trail. As +San Pedro had predicted, they came upon evidences of a native +village. Scattered huts, made of plastered mud and grass, with +thatched roofs of palm leaves, were met with, as they advanced, but +none of the places seemed to be inhabited, though rude gardens +around them showed that they had been the homes of natives up to +recently. + +<P> +"No one seems to be at home," remarked Tom, when they had gone past +perhaps half a dozen of these lonely huts. + +<P> +"I wonder what can be the matter?" asked Ned. "It looks as if they +had gone off in a hurry, too. Maybe there's been some sort of +epidemic." + +<P> +"No, no sickness," said San Pedro. "Natives no sick." + +<P> +"Bless my liver pill!" cried Mr. Damon, who was almost himself +again. "Then what is it?" + +<P> +"Much fight, maybe." + +<P> +"Much fight?" repeated Tom. + +<P> +"Yes, tribes at war. Maybe natives go away so as not be killed." + +<P> +"By Jove!" exclaimed the young inventor. "That's so. I forgot about +what Mr. Preston said. There's a native war going on around here. +Well, when we get to the town we can find out more about it, and +steer clear of the two armies, if we have to." + +<P> +But as they went farther on, the evidences of a native war became +more pronounced. They passed several huts that had been burned, and +the native mule drivers began showing signs of fear. + +<P> +"I don't like this," murmured Tom to his chum. "It looks bad." + +<P> +"What can you do?" + +<P> +"Nothing, I guess. We've got to keep on. No use turning back now. +Maybe the two rival forces have annihilated each other, and there +aren't any fighters left." + +<P> +At that moment there arose a cry from some of the natives who, with +the mules and their burdens, had pressed on ahead. + +<P> +"What's that?" exclaimed Tom. + +<P> +"Something's happened!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Bless my cartridge box!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +The three went forward and came to a little hill. They looked down +into a valley--a valley that had sheltered a native village, but the +village was no more. It was but a heap of blackened and fire-scarred +ruins, and there were still clouds of smoke arising from the grass +huts, showing that the enemy had but recently made their assault on +the place. + +<P> +"Bless my heart!" cried Mr. Damon. "The whole place has been wiped +out." + +<P> +"Not one hut left," added Ned. + +<P> +"Hark!" cried Tom. + +<P> +An instant later there arose, off in the woods, a chorus of wild +yells. It was followed by the weird sound of tom-toms and the gourd +and skin drums of the natives. The shouting noise increased, and the +sound of the war drums also. + +<P> +"Look!" cried Mr. Damon, pointing to a distant hill, and there the +boys saw two large bodies of natives rushing toward one another, +brandishing spears, clubs and the deadly blow guns. + +<P> +They were not more than half a mile away, and in plain view of Tom +and his party, though the two forces had not yet seen our friends. + +<P> +"They're going to fight!" cried Tom. + +<P> +And the next moment the two bodies of natives came together in a +mass, the enemies hurling themselves at each other with the +eagerness and ferocity of wild beasts. It was a deadly battle. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XIII The Desertion</H3> + + +<P> +"Say, look at those fellows pitch into one another!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"It's fighting at close range all right," commented Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"If they had rifles they wouldn't be at it hand to hand," spoke Tom. +"Maybe it's just as well they haven't, for there won't be so many +killed. But say, we'd better be thinking of ourselves. They may make +up their quarrel and turn against us any minute." + +<P> +"No--never--no danger of them being friends--they are rival tribes," +said San Pedro. "But either one may attack us--the one that is the +victor. It is better that we keep away." + +<P> +"I guess you're right," agreed Tom. "Lead the way, San Pedro, and +we'll get out of sight." + +<P> +But there was a fascination in watching the distant battle that was +hard to resist. It was like looking at a moving picture, for at that +distance none of the horrors of war were visible. True, natives went +down by scores, and it was not to be doubted but what they were +killed or injured, but it seemed more like a big football scrimmage +than a fight. + +<P> +"This is great!" cried Tom. "I like to watch it, but I'm sorry for +the poor chaps that get hurt or killed. I hope they're only stunned +as we stunned the wild horses." + +<P> +"I'm afraid it is more serious than that," spoke San Pedro. "These +natives are very bloodthirsty. It would not be well for us to incur +their anger." + +<P> +"We won't run any chances," decided Tom. "We'll just travel on. Come +on, Ned--Mr. Damon." + +<P> +As he spoke there was a sudden victorious shout from the scene of +the battle. One body of natives was seen to turn and flee, while the +others pursued them. + +<P> +"Now's our time to make tracks!" called Tom. "We'll have to push on +to the next village before we can ask where the gi--" he caught +himself just in time, for San Pedro was looking curiously at him. + +<P> +"The senor wishes to find something?" asked the head mule driver +with an insinuating smile. + +<P> +"Yes," broke in Eradicate. "We all is lookin' fo' some monstrous +giant orchards flowers." + +<P> +"Ah, yes, orchids," spoke San Pedro. "Well, there may be some in the +jungle ahead of us, but the senors have come the wrong trail for +flowers," and he looked curiously at Tom, while, from afar, come the +sound of the native battle though the combatants could no longer be +seen. + +<P> +"Never mind," said our hero quickly. "I guess I'll find what I want. +Now come on." + +<P> +They started off, skirting the burned village to get on the trail +beyond it. But hardly had they made a detour of the burned huts than +one of the native drivers, who was in the rear, came riding up with +a shout. + +<P> +"Now what's the matter?" cried Tom, looking back. + +<P> +There was a voluble chattering in Spanish between the driver and San +Pedro. + +<P> +"He says the natives that lived in this village have driven their +enemies away, and are coming back--after us," translated the head +mule driver. + +<P> +"After us!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Yes," replied San Pedro simply. "They are coming even now. They +will fight too, for all their wild nature is aroused." + +<P> +It needed but a moment's listening to prove this. From the rear came +wild yells and the beating of drums and tom-toms. + +<P> +"Bless my fountain pen!" cried Mr. Damon. "What are we going to do?" + +<P> +"Stop them if we can," answered Tom coolly. "Ned, you and I and Mr. +Damon will form a rear guard. San Pedro, take the mules and the men, +and make as good time as you can in advance. We'll take three of the +fastest mules, and hold these fellows back with the electric rifles, +and when we've done that we'll ride on and catch up to you." + +<P> +"Very good," said San Pedro, who seemed relieved to know that he did +not have to do any of the fighting. + +<P> +Three of the lighter weight mules, who carried small burdens, were +quickly relieved of them, and mounting these steeds in preference to +the ones they had been riding since they took the trail, Tom, Ned +and Mr. Damon dropped back to try and hold off the enemy. + +<P> +They had not far to ride nor long to wait. They could hear the +fierce yells of the victorious tribesmen as they came back to their +ruined village, and though there were doubtless sad hearts among +them, they rejoiced that they had defeated their enemies. They knew +they could soon rebuild the simple grass huts. + +<P> +"Small charges, just to stun them!" ordered Tom, and the electric +rifles were so adjusted. + +<P> +"Here's a good place to meet them," suggested Ned, as they came to a +narrow turn in the trail. "They can't come against us but a few at a +time, and we can pump them full of electricity from here." + +<P> +"The very thing!" cried Tom, as he dismounted, an example followed +by the others. Then, in another moment, they saw the blacks rushing +toward them. They were clad in nondescript garments, evidently of +their own make, and they carried clubs, spears, bows and arrows and +blow guns. There was not a firearm among them, as they passed on +after the party of our friends whom they had seen from the battlehill. +They gave wild yells as they saw the young inventor's friends. + +<P> +"Let 'em have it!" called Tom in a low voice, and the electric +rifles sent out their stunning charges. Several natives in the front +rank dropped, and there was a cry of fear and wonder from the +others. Then, after a moment's hesitation they pressed on again. + +<P> +"Once more!" cried Tom. + +<P> +Again the electric rifles spoke, and half a score went down +unconscious, but not seriously hurt. In a few hours they would be as +well as ever, such was the merciful charge that Tom Swift and the +others used in the rifles. + +<P> +The third time they fired, and this was too much for the natives. +They could not battle against an unseen and silent enemy who mowed +them down like a field of grain. With wild yells they fled back +along the trail they had come. + +<P> +"I guess that does it!" cried Tom. "We'd better join the others +now." + +<P> +Mounting their mules, they galloped back to where San Pedro and his +natives were pressing forward. + +<P> +"Did you have the honor of defeating them," the head mule driver +asked. + +<P> +"I had the <i>honor</i>," answered Tom, with a grim smile. + +<P> +Then they pressed on, but there was no more danger. That night they +camped in a peaceful valley and were not disturbed, and the +following day they put a good many miles behind them. On the advice +of San Pedro, they avoided the next two villages as they realized +that they were in the war zone, and then they headed for a large +town where Tom was sure he would hear some news of the giants. + +<P> +They had to camp twice at night before reaching this town, and when +they did get to it they were warmly welcomed, for white explorers +had been there years before, and had treated the natives well. Tom +distributed many trinkets among the head men and won their good will +so that the party was given comfortable huts in which to sleep, and +a plentiful supply of provisions. + +<P> +"Can you arrange for a talk with the chief?" asked Tom of San Pedro +that night. "I want to ask him about certain things." + +<P> +"About where you can find giant flowers?" asked the mule driver with +a quick look. + +<P> +"Yes--er--and other giant things," replied Tom. "I fix," answered +San Pedro shortly, but there was a queer look on his face. + +<P> +A few hours later Tom was summoned to the hut of the chief of the +town, and thither he went with Ned, Mr. Damon and San Pedro as +interpreter, for the natives spoke a jargon of their own that Tom +could not understand. + +<P> +There were some simple ceremonies to observe, and then Tom found +himself facing the chief, with San Pedro by his side. After the +greetings, and an exchange of presents, Tom giving him a cheap +phonograph with which the chief was wildly delighted, there came the +time to talk. + +<P> +"Ask him where the giant men live?" our hero directed San Pedro, +believing that the time had now come to disclose the object of his +expedition. + +<P> +"Giant men, Senor Swift? I thought it was giant plants--orchids--you +were after," exclaimed San Pedro. + +<P> +"Well, I'll take a few giant men if I can find them. Tell him I +understand there is a tribe of giants in this country. Ask him if he +ever heard of them." + +<P> +San Pedro hesitated. He looked at Tom, and the young inventor +fancied that there was a tinge of white on the swarthy face of the +chief mule driver. But San Pedro translated the question. + +<P> +Its effect on the chief was strange. He half leaped from his seat, +and stared at Tom. Then he uttered a cry--a cry of fear--and spoke +rapidly. + +<P> +"What does he say?" asked Tom of San Pedro eagerly, when the chief +had ceased speaking. + +<P> +"He say--he say," began the mule driver and the words seemed to +stick in his throat--"he say there <i>are</i> giants--many miles to the +north. Terrible big men--very cruel--and they are fearful. Once they +came here and took some of his people away. He is afraid of them. We +are <i>all</i> afraid of them," and San Pedro looked around apprehensively, +as though he might see one of the giants stalking into the chief's +hut at any moment. + +<P> +"Ask him how many miles north?" asked Tom, hardly able to conceal +his delight. The giants had no terrors for him. + +<P> +"Two weeks journey," translated San Pedro. + +<P> +"Good!" cried the young inventor. "Then we'll keep right on. Hurrah! +I'm on the right track at last, and I'll have a giant for the circus +and we may be able to rescue Mr. Poddington!" + +<P> +"Is the senor in earnest?" asked San Pedro, looking at Tom +curiously. "Is he really going among these terrible giants?" + +<P> +"Yes, but I don't believe they'll be so terrible. They may be very +gentle. I'm sure they'll be glad to come with me and join a +circus--some of them--and earn a hundred dollars a week. Of course +we're going on to giant land!" + +<P> +"Very good," said San Pedro quietly, and then he followed Tom out of +the chief's hut. + +<P> +"It's all right, Ned old sport, we'll get to giant land after all!" +cried Tom to his chum as they reached the hut where they were +quartered. + +<P> +The next morning when Tom got up, and looked for San Pedro and his +men, to give orders about the march that day, the mule drivers were +nowhere to be seen. Nor were the mules in the places where they had +been tethered. Their packs lay in a well ordered heap, but the +animals and their drivers were gone. + +<P> +"This is queer," said Tom, rubbing his eyes to make sure that he saw +aright. "I wonder where they are? Rad, look around for them." + +<P> +The colored man did so, and came back soon, to report that San Pedro +and his men had gone in the night. Some of the native villagers told +him so by signs, Eradicate said. They had stolen away. + +<P> +"Gone!" gasped Tom. "Gone where?" + +<P> +"Bless my railroad ticket!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"We're deserted," exclaimed Ned. "They've taken the mules, and left +us." + +<P> +"I guess that's it," admitted Tom ruefully, after a minute's +thought. "San Pedro couldn't stand for the giants. He's had a +frightful flunk. Well, we're all alone, but we'll go on to giant +land anyhow! We can get more mules. A little thing like this can't +phase me. Are you with me, Ned--Mr. Damon--Eradicate?" + +<P> +"Of course we are!" they cried without a moment's hesitation. + +<P> +"Then we'll go to giant land alone!" exclaimed Tom. "Come on, now, +and we'll see if we can arrange for some pack animals." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XIV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XIV In Giant Land</H3> + + +<P> +When it first became sure that San Pedro and the other natives had +deserted--fled in the night, for fear of the giants--there was a +reactionary feeling of despondency and gloom among Tom and his three +friends. But the boldness and energy of the young inventor, his +vigorous words, his determination to proceed at any cost to the +unknown land that lay before them--these served as a tonic, and +after a few moments, Ned, Mr. Damon, and even Eradicate looked at +things with brighter spirits. + +<P> +"Do you really mean it, Tom?" asked Ned. "Will you go on to giant +land?" + +<P> +"I surely will, if we can find it. Why, we found the city of gold +all alone, you and Mr. Damon and I, and I don't see why we can't +find this land, especially when all we have to do is to march +forward." + +<P> +"But look at the lot of stuff we have to carry!" went on Ned, waving +his hand toward the heap of packs that the mule drivers had left +behind. + +<P> +"Bless my baggage check, yes!" added Mr. Damon. "We can never do it. +Tom. We had better leave it here, and try to get back to +civilization." + +<P> +"Never!" cried Tom. "I started off after a giant, and I'm going to +get one, if I can induce one of the big men to come back with me. +I'm not going to give up when we're so close. We can get more pack +animals, I'm sure. I'm going to have a try for it. If I can't speak +the language of these natives I can make signs. Come on, Ned, we'll +pay a morning visit to the chief." + +<P> +"I'll come along," added Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"That's right," replied the young inventor. "Rad, you go stand guard +over our stuff. Some of the natives might not be able to withstand +temptation. Don't let them touch anything." + +<P> +"Dat's what I won't, Massa Tom. Good land a massy! ef I sees any ob +'em lay a finger on a pack I'll shoot off my shotgun close to der +ears, so I will. Oh, ef I only had Boomerang here, he could carry +mos' all ob dis stuff his own se'f." + +<P> +"You've got a great idea of Boomerang's strength," remarked Tom with +a laugh, as he and Ned and Mr. Damon started for the big hut where +the chief lived. + +<P> +"Do you really think San Pedro and the others left because they were +afraid of the giants we might meet?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"I think so," answered his chum. + +<P> +"Bless my toothpick!" gasped Mr. Damon. "In that case maybe we'd +better be on the lookout ourselves." + +<P> +"Time enough to worry when we get there," answered the young +inventor. "From what the circus man said the giants are not +particularly cruel. Of course Mr. Preston didn't have much +information to go on, but--well, we'll have to wait--that's all. But +I'm sure San Pedro and the others were in a blue funk and vamoosed +on that account." + +<P> +"Hey, Massa Tom!" suddenly called Eradicate. "Heah am a letter I +found on de baggage," and he ran forward with a missive, rudely +scrawled on a scrap of paper. + +<P> +"It's from San Pedro," remarked Tom after a glance at it, "and it +bears out what I said. He writes that he and his men never suspected +that we were going after the giants, or they would never have come +with us. He says they are very sorry to leave us, as we treated them +well, but are afraid to go on. He adds that they have taken enough +of our bartering goods to make up their wages, and enough food to +carry them to the next village." + +<P> +"Well," finished Tom. as he folded the paper, "I suppose we can't +kick, and, maybe after all, it will be for the best. Now to see if +the chief can let us have some mules." + +<P> +It took some time, by means of signs, to make the chief understand +what had happened, but, when Tom had presented him with a little toy +that ran by a spring, and opened up a pack of trading goods, which +he indicated would be exchanged for mules, or other beasts of +burden, the chief grinned in a friendly fashion, and issued certain +orders. + +<P> +Several of his men hurried from the big hut, and a little later, +when Tom was showing the chief how to run the toy, there was a sound +of confusion outside. + +<P> +"Bless my battle axe!" cried Mr. Damon. "I hope that's not another +war going on." + +<P> +"It's our new mules!" cried Ned, taking a look. "And some cows and a +bony horse or two, Tom. We've drawn a rich lot of pack animals!" + +<P> +Indeed there was a nondescript collection of beasts of burden. There +were one or two good mules, several sorry looking horses, and a +number of sleepy-eyed steers. But there were enough of them to carry +all the boxes and bales that contained the outfit of our friends. + +<P> +"It might be worse," commented Tom. "Now if they'll help us pack up +we'll travel on." + +<P> +More sign language was resorted to, and the chief, after another +present had been made to him, sent some of his men to help put the +packs on the animals. The steers, which Tom did not regard with much +favor, proved to be better than the mules, and by noon our friends +were all packed up again, and ready to take the trail. The chief +gave them a good dinner,--as native dinners go,--and then, after +telling them that, though he had never seen the giants it had long +been known that they inhabitated the country to the north, he waved +a friendly good-bye. + +<P> +"Well, we'll see what luck we'll have by ourselves," remarked Tom, +as he mounted a bony mule, an example followed by Ned, Mr. Damon and +Eradicate, They had left behind some of their goods, and so did not +have so much to carry. Food they had in condensed form and they were +getting into the more tropical part of the country where game +abounded. + +<P> +It was not as easy as they had imagined it would be for, with only +four to drive so many animals, several of the beasts were +continually straying from the trail, and once a big steer, with part +of the aeroplane on its back, wandered into a morass and they had to +labor hard to get the animal out. + +<P> +"Well, this is fierce!" exclaimed Tom, at the end of the first day +when, tired and weary, bitten by insects, and torn by jungle briars, +they made camp that night. + +<P> +"Going to give up?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Not much!" + +<P> +They felt better after supper, and, tethering the animals securely, +they stretched out in their tents, with mosquito canopies over them +to keep away the pestering insects. + +<P> +"I've got a new scheme," announced Tom next morning at breakfast. + +<P> +"What is it? Going on the rest of the way in the aeroplane?" asked +Ned hopefully. + +<P> +"No, though I believe if I had brought the big airship along I could +have used it. But I mean about driving the animals. I'm going to +make a long line of them, tying one to the other like the elephants +in the circus when they march around, holding each other's tails. +Then one of us will ride in front, another in the rear, and one on +each side. In that way we'll keep them going and they won't stray +off." + +<P> +"Bless my button hook!" cried Mr. Damon. "That's a good idea, Tom!" +It was carried out with much success, and thereafter they traveled +better. + +<P> +But even at the best it was not easy work, and more than once Tom's +friends urged him to turn back. But he would not, ever pressing on, +with the strange land for his goal. They had long since passed the +last of the native villages, and they had to depend on their own +efforts for food. Fortunately they did not have any lack of game, +and they fared well with what they had with them in the packs. + +<P> +Occasionally they met little bands of native hunters, and, though +usually these men fled at the sight of our friends, yet once they +managed to make signs to one, who, informed them as best he could, +that giant land was still far ahead of them. + +<P> +Twice they heard distant sounds of native battles and the weird +noise of the wooden drums and the tom-toms. Once, as they climbed up +a big hill, they looked down into a valley and saw a great conflict +in which there must have been several thousand natives on either +side. It was a fierce battle, seen even from afar, and Tom and the +others shuddered as they slipped down over the other side of the +rise, and out of sight. + +<P> +"We'd better steer clear of them," was Tom's opinion; and the others +agreed with him. + +<P> +For another week they kept on, the way becoming more and more +difficult, and the country more and more wild. They had fairly to +cut their way through the jungle at times, and the only paths were +animal trails, but they were better than nothing. For the last five +days they had not seen a human being, and the loneliness was telling +on them. + +<P> +"I'd be glad to see even a two-headed giant," remarked Tom +whimsically one night as they made their camp. + +<P> +"Yes, and I'd be glad to hear someone talk, even in the sign +language," added Ned, with a grin. + +<P> +They slept well, for they were very tired, and Tom, who shared his +tent with Ned, was awakened rather early the next morning by hearing +someone moving outside the canvas shelter. + +<P> +"Is that you, Mr. Damon?" he asked, the odd gentleman having a tent +adjoining that of the boys. + +<P> +There was no answer. + +<P> +"Rad, are you getting breakfast?" asked the young inventor. "What +time is it?" + +<P> +Still no answer. + +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked Ned, who had been awakened by Tom's +inquiries. + +<P> +Before our hero had a chance to reply the flap of his tent was +pulled back, and a head was thrust in. But such a head! It was +enormous! A head covered with a thick growth of tawny hair, and a +face almost hidden in a big tawny, bushy beard. Then an arm was +thrust in--an arm that terminated in a brawny fist that clasped a +great club. There was no mistaking the, object that gazed in on the +two youths. It was a gigantic man--a man almost twice the size of +any Tom had ever seen. And then our hero knew that he had reached +the end of his quest. + +<P> +"A giant!" gasped Tom. "Ned! Ned, we're in the big men's country, +and we didn't know it!" + +<P> +"I--I guess you're right, Tom!" + +<P> +The giant started at the sounds of their voices, and then his face +breaking into a broad grin, that showed a great mouth filled with +white teeth, he called to them in an unknown tongue and in a voice +that seemed to fairly shake the frail tent. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XV In the "Palace" of the King</H3> + + +<P> +For a few moments after their first ejaculations neither Tom nor Ned +knew what to do. The giant continued to gaze at them, with the same +good-natured grin on his face. Possibly he was amused at the small +size of the persons in the tent. Then Tom spoke. + +<P> +"He doesn't look as if he would bite, Ned." + +<P> +"No, he seems harmless enough. Let's get up, and see what happens. I +wonder if there are any more of them? They must have come out on an +early hunt, and stumbled upon our camp." + +<P> +At this moment there arose a cry from Mr. Damon's tent. + +<P> +"Bless my burglar alarm!" shouted the odd gentleman. "Tom--Ned--am I +dreaming? There's a man here as big as a mountain. Tom! Ned!" + +<P> +"It's all right, Mr. Damon!" called Tom. "We're among the giants all +right. They won't hurt you." + +<P> +"Fo' de good land ob massy!" screamed Eradicate, a second later, and +then they knew that he, too, had seen one of the big men. "Fo' de +lub ob pork chops! Am dis de Angel Gabriel? Listen to de blowin' ob +de trump! Oh, please good Massa Angel Gabriel, I ain't nebber done +nuffin! I's jest po' ol' Eradicate Sampson, an' I got a mule +Boomerang, and' dat's all I got. Please good Mr. Angel--" + +<P> +"Dry up, Rad!" yelled Tom. "It's only one of the giants. Come on out +of your tent and get breakfast. We're on the borders of giant land, +evidently, and they seem as harmless as ordinary men. Get up, +everybody." + +<P> +As Tom spoke he rose from the rubber blanket on which he slept. Ned +did the same, and the giant slowly pulled his head out from the +tent. Then the two youths went outside. A strange sight met their +gaze. + +<P> +There were about ten natives standing in the camp--veritable giants, +big men in every way. The young inventor had once seen a giant in a +circus, and, allowing for shoes with very thick soles which the big +man wore, his height was a little over seven feet. But these South +American giants seemed more than a foot higher than that, none of +those who had stumbled upon the camp being less than eight feet. + +<P> +"And I believe there must be bigger ones in their land, wherever +that is," said Tom. Nor were these giants tall and thin, as was the +one Tom had seen, but stout, and well proportioned. They were +savages, that was evident, but the curious part of it was that they +were almost white, and looked much like the pictures of the old +Norsemen. + +<P> +But, best of all, they seemed good-natured, for they were +continually laughing or smiling, and though they looked with wonder +on the pile of boxes and bales, and on the four travelers, they +seemed more bewildered and amused, than vindictive that their +country should have been invaded. Evidently the fears of the natives +who had told Tom about the giants had been unfounded. + +<P> +By this time Mr. Damon and Eradicate had come from their tents, and +were gazing with startled eyes at the giants who surrounded them. + +<P> +"Bless my walking stick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "Is it possible?" + +<P> +"Yes, we've arrived!" cried Tom. "Now to see what happens. I wonder +if they'll take us to their village, and I wonder if I can get one +of these giants for Mr. Preston's circus?" + +<P> +"You certainly can't unless he wants to come," declared Ned. "You'd +have a hard tussle trying to carry one of these fellows away against +his will, Tom." + +<P> +"I sure would. I'll have to make inducements. Well, I wonder what is +best to do?" + +<P> +The giant who had looked in the tent of Ned and Tom, and who +appeared to be the leader of the party, now spoke in his big, +booming voice. He seemed to be asking Tom a question, but the young +inventor could not understand the language. Tom replied in Spanish, +giving a short account of why he and his companions had come to the +country, but the giant shook his head. Then Mr. Damon, who knew +several languages, tried all of them--but it was of no use. + +<P> +"We've got to go back to signs," declared Tom, and then, as best he +could, he indicated that he and the others had come from afar to +seek the giants. He doubted whether he was understood, and he +decided to wait until later to try and make them acquainted with the +fact that he wanted one of them to come back with him. + +<P> +The head giant nodded, showing that at least he understood +something, and then spoke to his companions. They conversed in their +loud voices for some time, and then motioned to the pack animals. + +<P> +"I guess they want us to come along," said Torn, "but let's have +breakfast first. Rad, get things going. Maybe the giants will have +some coffee and condensed milk, though they'll have to take about +ten cupsful to make them think they've had anything. Make a lot of +coffee, Rad." + +<P> +"But good land a massy, dey'll eat up eberyt'ing we got, Massa Tom," +objected the colored man. + +<P> +"Can't help it, Rad. They're our guests and we've got to be polite," +replied the youth. "It isn't every day that we have giants to +breakfast." + +<P> +The big men watched curiously while Rad built a fire, and when the +colored man was trying to break a tough stick of wood with the axe, +one of the giants picked up the fagot and snapped it in his fingers +as easily as though it were a twig, though the stick was as thick as +Tom's arm. + +<P> +"Some strength there," murmured Ned to his chum admiringly. + +<P> +"Yes, if they took a notion to go on a rampage we'd have trouble. +But they seem kind and gentle." + +<P> +Indeed the giants did, and they liked the coffee which they tasted +rather gingerly at first. After their first sip they wanted more, +made as sweet as possible, and they laughed and talked among +themselves while Eradicate boiled pot after pot. + +<P> +"Dey suah will eat us out of house an' home, Massa Tom," he wailed. + +<P> +"Never mind, Rad. They will feed us well when we get to their town." + +<P> +Then the pack animals were laden with their burdens. This was always +a task, but for the giants it was child's play. With one hand they +would lift a box or bale that used to tax the combined strength of +the four travelers, and soon the steers, horses and mules were ready +to proceed. The giants went on ahead, to show the way, the first +one, who seemed to be called "Oom," for that was the way his +companions addressed him, walked beside Tom, who rode on a mule. In +fact the giant had to walk slowly, so as not to get ahead of the +animal. Oom tried to talk to Tom, but it was hard work to pick out +the signs that meant something, and so neither gained much +information. + +<P> +Tom did gather, however, that the giants were out on an early hunt +when they had discovered our friends, and their chief town lay about +half a day's journey off in the jungle. The path along which they +proceeded, was better than the forest trails, and showed signs of +being frequently used. + +<P> +"It doesn't seem possible that we are really among giants, Tom," +spoke Ned, as they rode along. "I hardly believed there were +giants." + +<P> +"There always have been giants," declared the young inventor. "I +read about them in an encyclopedia before I started on this trip. Of +course there's lots of wild stories about giants, but there have +really been some very big men. Take the skeleton in the museum of +Trinity College, Dublin. It is eight feet and a half in height, and +the living man must have even taller. There was a giant named +O'Brien, and his skeleton is in the College of Physicians and +Surgeons of England--that one is eight feet two inches high, while +there are reliable records to show that, when living, O'Brien was +two inches taller than that. In fact, according to the books, there +have been a number of giants nine feet high." + +<P> +"Then these chaps aren't so wonderful," replied Ned. + +<P> +"Oh, we haven't seen them all yet. We may find some bigger than +these fellows, though any one of these would be a prize for a +museum. Not a one is less than eight feet, and if we could get one +say ten feet--that <i>would</i> be a find." + +<P> +"Rather an awkward one," commented Ned. + +<P> +It did not seem possible that they were really in giant land, yet +such was the fact. Of course the country itself was no different +from any other part of the jungle, for merely because big men lived +in it did not make the trees or plants any larger. + +<P> +"I tell you how I account for it," said Tom, as they traveled on. +"These men originally belonged to a race of people noted for their +great size. Then they must have lived under favorable conditions, +had plenty of flesh and bone-forming food, and after several +generations they gradually grew larger. You know that by feeding the +right kind of food to animals you can make them bigger, while if +they get the wrong kind they are runts, or dwarfs." + +<P> +"Oh, yes; that's a well-known fact," chimed in Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Then why not with human beings?" went on Tom. "There's nothing +wonderful in this." + +<P> +"No, but it will be wonderful if we get away with one of these +giants," spoke Ned grimly. + +<P> +Further talk was interrupted by a sudden shouting on the part of the +big men. Oom made some rapid motions to Tom, and a little later they +emerged from the woods upon a large, grassy plain, on the other side +of which could be seen a cluster of big grass and mud huts. + +<P> +"There is the city of the giants!" cried Tom, and so it proved, a +little later, when they got to it. + +<P> +Now there was nothing remarkable about this city or native town. It +was just like any other in the wilder parts of South America or +Africa. There was a central place, where, doubtless, the natives +gathered on market days, and from this the huts of the inhabitants +stretched out in irregular lines, like streets. Off to one side of +the "market square," as Tom called it, was a large hut, surrounded +by several smaller ones, and from the manner in which it was laid +out, and decorated, it was evident that this was the "palace" of the +king, or chief ruler. + +<P> +"Say, look at that fellow!" cried Ned, pointing to a giant who was +just entering the "palace" as Tom dubbed the big hut. "He <i>looks</i> +eleven feet if he's an inch." + +<P> +"I believe you!" cried Tom. "Say, I wonder how big the king is?" + +<P> +"I don't know, but he must be a top-notcher. I wonder what will +happen to us?" + +<P> +Oom, who had Tom and his party in charge, led them to the "palace" +and it was evident that they were going to be presented to the chief +or native king. Back of our friends stretched out their pack train, +the beasts carrying the boxes and bales. Surrounding them were +nearly all the inhabitants of the giants' town, and when the +cavalcade had come to a halt in front of the "palace," Oom raised +his voice in a mighty shout. It was taken up by the populace, and +then every one of them knelt down. + +<P> +"I guess His Royal Highness is about to appear," said Tom grimly. + +<P> +"Yes, maybe we'd better kneel, too," spoke Ned. + +<P> +"Not much! We're citizens of the United States, and we don't kneel +to anybody. I'm going to stand up." + +<P> +"So am I!" said Mr. Damon. + +<P> +An instant later the grass mat that formed the front door of the +"palace" was drawn aside, and there stood confronting our hero and +his friends, the King of Giant Land. And a mighty king was he in +size, for he must have been a shade over ten feet tall, while on +either side of him was a man nearly as big as himself. + +<P> +Once more Oom boomed out a mighty shout and, kneeling as the giants +were, they took it up, repeating it three times. The king raised his +hand as though in blessing upon his people, and then, eyeing Tom and +his three friends he beckoned them to approach. + +<P> +"He wants to see us at close range," whispered the young inventor. +"Come on, Ned and Mr. Damon. Trail along, Eradicate." + +<P> +"Good--good land ob massy!" stammered the colored man. And then the +little party advanced into the "palace" of the giant king. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XVI"></A> +<H3>Chapter XVI The Rival Circus Man</H3> + + +<P> +Tom Swift gazed fearlessly into the face of the giant ruler who +confronted him. The young inventor said later that he had made up +his mind that to show no fear was the only way of impressing the big +king, for surely no show of strength could have done it. With one +hand the giant could have crushed the life from our hero. But +evidently he had no such intentions, for after gazing curiously at +the four travelers who stood before him, and looking for some time +at the honest, black face of Eradicate, the king made a motion for +them to sit down. They did, upon grass mats in the big hut that +formed the palace of the ruler. + +<P> +It was not a very elaborate place, but then the king's wants were +few and easily satisfied. The place was clean, Tom was glad to note. + +<P> +The king, who was addressed by his subjects as Kosk, as nearly as +Tom could get it, asked some questions of Oom, who seemed to be the +chief of the hunters. Thereupon the man who had looked into Tom's +and Ned's tent that morning, and who had followed them into the +palace, began a recital of how he had found the little travelers. +Though Tom and his friends could not understand a word of the +language, it was comparatively easy to follow the narrative by the +gestures used. + +<P> +Then the king asked several questions, others of the hunting party +were sent for and quizzed, and finally the ruler seemed satisfied, +for he rattled off a string of talk in his deep, booming voice. + +<P> +Truly he was a magnificent specimen of manhood, being as I have +said, about ten feet tall, and built in proportion. On either side +of him, upon rude benches covered with soft jaguar skins, sat two +men, evidently his brothers, for they looked much like the king. One +was called Tola and the other Koku, for the ruler addressed them +from time to time, and seemed to be asking their advice. + +<P> +"They're making up their minds what to do with us," murmured Tom. "I +only hope they let us stay long enough to learn the language, and +then I can make an offer to take one back to the United States with +me." + +<P> +"Jove! Wouldn't it be great if you could get the king!" exclaimed +Ned. + +<P> +"Oh, that's too much, but I'd like one of his brothers. They're each +a good nine feet tall, and they must be as strong as horses." + +<P> +In contrast to some giants of history, whose only claim to notoriety +lay in their height, these giants were very powerful. Many giants +have flabby muscles, but these of South America were like athletes. +Tom realized this when there suddenly entered the audience chamber a +youth of about our hero's age, but fully seven feet tall, and very +big. He was evidently the king's son, for he wore a jaguar skin, +which seemed to be a badge of royalty. He had seemingly entered +without permission, to see the curious strangers, for the king spoke +quickly to him, and then to Tola, who with a friendly grin on his +big face lifted the lad with one hand and deposited him in a room +that opened out of the big chamber. + +<P> +"Did you see that!" cried Ned. "He lifted him as easily as you or I +would a cat, and I'll bet that fellow weighed close to four hundred +pounds, Tom." + +<P> +"I should say so! It's great!" + +<P> +The audience was now at an end, and Tom thought it was about time to +make some sort of a present to the king to get on good terms with +him. He looked out of the palace hut and saw that their pack animals +were close at hand. Nearby was one that had on its back a box +containing a phonograph and some records. + +<P> +Making signs that he wanted to bring in some of his baggage, Tom +stepped out of the hut, telling his friends to wait for him. The +king and the other giants watched the lad curiously, but did not +endeavor to stop him. + +<P> +"I'm going to give him a little music," went on the young inventor +as he adjusted the phonograph, and slipped in a record of a lively +dance air. His motions were curiously watched, and when the +phonograph started and there was a whirr of the mechanism, some of +the giants who had crowded into the king's audience chamber, showed +a disposition to run. But a word of command from their ruler stopped +them. + +<P> +Suddenly the music started and, coming forth as it did from the +phonograph horn, in the midst of that hut, in which stood the +silence-awed giants, it was like a bolt of lightning from the clear +sky. + +<P> +At first the king and all the others seemed struck dumb, and then +there arose a mighty shout, and one word was repeated over and over +again. It sounded like "Chackalok! Chackalok!" and later Tom learned +that it meant wizard, magician or something like that. + +<P> +Shout after shout rent the air, and was taken up by those outside, +for through the open door the strains of music floated. The giants +seemed immensely pleased, after their first fright, and suddenly the +king, coming down from his throne, stood with his big ear as nearly +inside the horn as he could get it. + +<P> +A great grin spread over his face and then, approaching Tom, he +leaned over, touched him once on the forehead, and uttered a word. +At this sign of royal favor the other giants at once bowed to Tom. + +<P> +"Say," cried Ned, "you've got his number all right! You're one of +the royal family now, Tom." + +<P> +"It looks like it. Well, I'm glad of it, for I want to be on +friendly terms with His Royal Highness." + +<P> +Once more the king addressed Tom, and the head hunter, motioning to +Tom and his friends, led them out of the palace, and to a large hut +not far off. This, he made himself understood by signs, was to be +their resting place, and truly it was not a bad home, for it was +well made. It had simple furniture in it, low couches covered with +skins, stools, and there were several rooms to it. + +<P> +Calling in authorative tones to his fellow hunters, Tom had them +take the packs off the beasts of burdens and soon the boxes, bales +and packages were carried into the big hut, which was destined to be +the abiding place of our friends for some time. The animals were +then led away. + +<P> +"Well, here we are, safe and sound, with all our possessions about +us," commented Tom, when all but Oom had withdrawn. "I guess we'll +make out all right in giant land. I wonder what they have to eat? Or +perhaps we'd better tackle some of our own grub." + +<P> +He looked at Oom, who laughed gleefully. Then Tom rubbed his +stomach, opened his mouth and pointed to it and said: "We'd like to +eat--we're hungry!" + +<P> +Oom boomed out something in his bass voice, grinned cheerfully, and +hurried out. A little later he came back, and following him, a +number of giant women. Each one bore a wooden platter or slab of +bark which answered for a plate. The plates were covered with broad +palm leaves, and when they had been set down on low benches, and the +coverings removed, our friends saw they had food in abundance. + +<P> +There was some boiled lamb, some roasted fowls, some cereal that +looked like boiled rice, some sweet potatoes, a number of other +things which could only be guessed at, and a big gourd filled with +something that smelled like sweet cider. + +<P> +"Say, this is a feast all right, after what we've been living on!" +cried Tom. + +<P> +Once more Oom laughed joyfully, pointing to the food and to our +friends in turn. + +<P> +"Oh, we'll eat all right!" exclaimed Tom. "Don't worry about that!" + +<P> +The good-natured giant showed them where they could find rude wooden +dishes and table implements, and then he left them alone. It was +rather awkward at first, for though the bench or table looked low in +comparison to the size of the room, yet it was very high, to allow +for the long legs of the giants getting under it. + +<P> +"If we stay here long enough we can saw off the table legs," said +the young inventor. "Now for our first meal in giant land." + +<P> +They were just helping themselves when there arose a great shouting +outside. + +<P> +"I wonder what's up now?" asked Tom, pausing with upraised fork. + +<P> +"Maybe the king is coming to see us," suggested Ned. + +<P> +"I'll look," volunteered Mr. Damon, as he went to the door. Then he +called quickly: + +<P> +"Tom! Ned! Look! It's that minister we met on the ship--Reverend +Josiah Blinderpool! How in the world did he ever get here? And how +strangely he's dressed!" + +<P> +Well might Mr. Damon say this, for the supposed clergyman was +attired in a big checked suit, a red vest, a tall hat and white +canvas shoes. In fact he was almost like some theatrical performer. + +<P> +The gaudily-dressed man was accompanied by two natives, and all rode +mules, and there were three other animals, laden with packs on +either side. + +<P> +"What's his game?" mused Ned. + +<P> +The answer came quickly and from the man himself. Riding forward +toward the king's hut or palace, while the populace of wondering +giants followed behind, the man raised his voice in a triumphant +announcement. + +<P> +"Here at last!" he cried. "In giant land! And I'm ahead of Tom Swift +for all his tricks. I've got Tom Swift beat a mile." + +<P> +"Oh, you have!" shouted our hero with a sudden resolve, as he +stepped into view. "Well, you've got another guess coming. I'm here +ahead of you, and there's standing room only." + +<P> +"Tom Swift!" gasped the rival circus man. "Tom Swift here in ahead +of me!" + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XVII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XVII Held Captives</H3> + + +<P> +There was a great commotion among the giants. Men, women and +children ran to and fro, and a number of the largest of the big men +could be seen hurrying into the palace hut of King Kosk. If the +arrival of Tom and his friends had created a surprise it was more +than doubled when the circus man, and his small caravan, advanced +into the giants' city. His approach had been unheralded because the +giants were so taken up with Tom and his party that no one thought +to guard the paths leading into the village. And, as a matter of +fact, the giants were so isolated, they were so certain of their own +strength, and they had been unmolested so many years, that they did +not dream of danger. + +<P> +As for our hero, he stood in the hut gazing at his rival, while Hank +Delby, in turn, stared at the young inventor. Then Hank dismounted +from his mule and approached Tom's hut. + +<P> +"Bless my railroad ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "This is a curious +state of affairs! What in the world are we to do, Tom?" + +<P> +"I don't know, I'm sure. We'll have to wait until we see what <i>he</i> +does. He's been following us all along. He was that fake minister on +the boat. It's a wonder we didn't get on to him. I believe he's been +trying to learn our secret ever since Mr. Preston warned us about +him. Now he's here and he'll probably try to spoil our chances for +getting a giant so that he may get one for himself. Perhaps Andy +Foger gave him a tip about our plans." + +<P> +"But can't we stop him?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"I'm going to try!" exclaimed Tom grimly. + +<P> +"Here he comes," spoke Mr. Damon quickly. "I wonder what he wants?" + +<P> +Hank Delby had started toward the big hut that sheltered our +friends, while the gathered crowd of curious giants looked on and +wondered what the arrival of two white parties so close together +could mean. + +<P> +"Well, what do you want?" asked Tom, when, his rival had come within +speaking distance. + +<P> +"There's no use beating about the bush with you, Tom Swift," was the +frank answer. "I may as well out with it. I came after a giant, and +I'm going to get one for Mr. Waydell." + +<P> +"Then you took advantage of our trail, and followed us?" asked the +young inventor. + +<P> +"Oh, you can put it that way if you like," replied Delby calmly. "I +<i>have</i> followed you, and a hard time I've had of it. I tried to do it +quietly, but you got on to my tricks. However it doesn't matter. I'm +here now, and I'm going to beat you out if I can." + +<P> +"I remember now!" exclaimed Ned whispering in Tom's ear, "he was +disguised as one of the mule drivers and you fired him because he +had a revolver. Don't you remember, Tom?" + +<P> +"That's right!" exclaimed the young inventor as he noted the face +and form of Delby more closely. Then our hero added: "You played a +low-down trick, Mr. Delby, and it won't do you any good. I caught +you trying to sneak along in my company and I'll catch you again. +I'm here first, and I've got the best right to try and get a giant +for Mr. Preston, and if you had any idea of fair play--" + +<P> +"All's fair in this business, Tom Swift," was the quick answer. "I'm +going to do my best to beat you, and I expect you to do your best to +beat me. I can't speak any fairer than that. It's war between us, +from now on, and you might as well know it. One thing I will promise +you, though, if there's any danger of you or your party getting hurt +by these big men I'll fight on your side. But I guess they are too +gentle to fight." + +<P> +"We can look after ourselves," declared Tom. "And since it's to be +war between us look out for yourself." + +<P> +"Don't worry!" exclaimed Tom's rival with a laugh. "I've gone +through a lot to get here, and I'm not going to give up without a +struggle. I guess--" + +<P> +But he did not finish his sentence for at that moment Oom, the big +hunting giant, came up behind him, tapped him on the shoulder, and +pointed to the king's hut, motioning to indicate that Mr. Delby was +wanted there. + +<P> +"Very good," said the circus agent in what he tried to make sound +like a jolly voice, "I'm to call on his majesty; am I? Here's where +I beat you to it, Tom Swift." + +<P> +Tom did not answer, but there was a worried look on his face, as he +turned to join his friends in the big hut. And, as he looked from a +window, and saw Delby being led into the presence of Kosk, Tom could +hear the strains of the big phonograph he had presented to the king. + +<P> +"I guess his royal highness will remain friends with us," said Ned +with a smile, as he heard the music. "He can see what a lot of +presents and other things we have, and as for that Delby, he doesn't +seem to have much of anything." + +<P> +"Oh, I haven't shown half the things I have as yet," spoke Tom. "But +I don't like this, just the same. Those giants may turn from us, and +favor him on the slightest pretence. I guess we've got our work cut +out for us." + +<P> +"Then let's plan some way to beat him," suggested Mr. Damon. "Look +over your goods, Tom, and make the king a present that will bind his +friendship to us." + +<P> +"I believe I will," decided the young inventor and then he and Ned +began overhauling the boxes and bales, while a crowd of curious +giants stood without their hut, and another throng surrounded the +palace of the giant king. + +<P> +"There goes Delby out to get something from his baggage," announced +Ned, looking from the window. Tom saw his rival taking something +from one of the packs slung across the back of a mule. Soon the +circus agent hurried back into the king's hut, and a moment later +there was heard the strains of a banjo being picked by an +unpracticed hand. It was succeeded by a rattling tune played in good +style. + +<P> +"Bless my fiddlestick!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "Does your phonograph +have a banjo record, Tom?" + +<P> +"No." was the somewhat hesitating answer of the young inventor. +"Delby who can play a banjo himself must have given Kosk one for a +present, and, like a child, the king is amused by the latest +novelty. So far he has scored one on us," he added, as once more +they heard the unmelodious strains of the banjo slowly picked. "The +king is evidently learning to play the instrument, and he'd rather +have that than a phonograph, which only winds up." + +<P> +"But haven't you some other things you can give the king to off-set +the banjo?" asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Plenty of them," replied Tom. "But if I give him--say a toy steam +engine, for I have one among our things--what is to prevent Delby +giving him some other novelty that will take his attention? In that +way we'll sea-saw back and forth, and I guess Delby has had more +experience in this business than I have. It's going to be a question +which of us gets a giant." + +<P> +"Bless my reserved seat ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I never heard +of such a thing! But, Tom, I'm sure we'll win out." + +<P> +"Get something startling to give the king," advised Ned, and Tom +began opening one of the boxes that had been transported with such +labor from the coast. + +<P> +"Delby had much better luck with his mule drivers than we did Tom," +remarked Ned as he saw the two natives standing by the pack animals +of the rival circus man. "They evidently didn't get scared off by +the giants." + +<P> +"No, but probably he didn't tell them where they were headed for. +Though, as a matter of fact, I don't believe any one has anything to +fear from these big men. All they ask is to be let alone. They're +not at all warlike, and I don't believe they'd attack the other +natives. But probably their size makes them feared, and when our +drivers heard the word 'giant' they simply wilted." + +<P> +"Guess you're right. But come on, Tom. If we're going to make the +king a present that will open his eyes, and get him on our side +instead of Delby's, we'd better be getting at it." + +<P> +"I will. This is what I'm going to give him," and Tom brought out +from a box a small toy circus, with many performing animals and +acrobats, the whole being worked by a small steam engine that burned +alcohol for fuel. A little water put in the boiler of the toy +engine, a lighting of the alcohol wick and there would be a toy that +even a youngster of the United States might be proud to own. + +<P> +"Mah land a massy!" exclaimed Eradicate as Tom got the apparatus +ready to work. "Dat shore will please him!" + +<P> +"It ought to," replied the young inventor. "Come on, now I'm ready." + +<P> +Delby had not yet come from the king's hut, and as Tom and his +friends, bearing the new toy, were about to leave the structure that +had been set aside for their use, they saw a crowd of the giant men +approaching. Each of the big men carried a club and a spear. + +<P> +"Bless my eye glasses!" gasped Mr. Damon. "Something is wrong. What +can it be?" + +<P> +He had his answer a moment later. With a firm but gentle motion the +chief giant shoved our four friends back into the hut, and then +pulled the grass mat over the opening. Then, as Tom and the others +could see by looking from a crack, he and several others took their +position in front, while other giants went to the various windows, +stationing themselves outside like sentries around a guard house. + +<P> +"Bless my--" began Mr. Damon, but words failed him. + +<P> +"We're prisoners!" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"It looks like it," admitted Tom grimly. "Evidently Delby has +carried out his threat and set the king against us. We are to be +held captives here, and he can do as he pleases. Oh, why didn't I +think sooner." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XVIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XVIII Tom's Mysterious Box</H3> + + +<P> +The young inventor walked slowly back to the middle of the hut--a +prison now it was--and sat down on a bench. The others followed his +example, and the elaborate toy, with which they had hoped to win the +king's favor, was laid aside. For a moment there was silence in the +structure--a silence broken only by the pacing up and down of the +giant guards outside. Then Eradicate spoke. + +<P> +"Massa Tom," began the aged negro, "can't we git away from heah?" + +<P> +"It doesn't seem so, Rad." + +<P> +"Can't we shoot some of dem giants wif de 'lectric guns, an' carry a +couple ob 'em off after we stun 'em like?" + +<P> +"No, Rad; I'm afraid violent measures won't do, though now that you +speak of the guns I think that we had better get them ready." + +<P> +"You're not going to shoot any of them, are you, Tom?" asked Mr. +Damon quickly. + +<P> +"No, but if they continue to turn against us as easily as they have, +there is no telling what may happen. If they attack us we will have +to defend ourselves. But I think they are too gentle for that, +unless they are unduly aroused by what misstatements Hank Delby may +make against us." + +<P> +"Misstatements?" inquired Ned. + +<P> +"Yes. I don't doubt but what he told the king a lot of stuff that +isn't true, to cause his majesty to make us captives here. Probably +he said we came to destroy the giant city with magic, or something +like that, and he represented himself as a simple traveler. He's +used to that sort of business, for he has often tried to get ahead +of Mr. Preston in securing freaks or valuable animals for the +circus. He wants to make it look bad for us, and good for himself. +So far he has succeeded. But I've got a plan." + +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I'll tell you when I've got it more worked out. The thing to do now +is to get in shape to stand off the giants if they should attack us. +This hut is pretty strong, and we can risk a siege in here. Let's +arrange the boxes and bales into a sort of breastwork, and then +we'll take the electric rifles inside." + +<P> +This was soon done, and, though there was considerable noise +attending the moving about of the boxes and bales, the giant guards +did not seem at all alarmed. They did not even take the trouble to +stop the work, though they looked in the windows. In a short time +there was a sort of hollow square formed in the middle of the big +main room, and inside of this our friends could give battle. + +<P> +"And now for my plan of teaching these giants a lesson," said Tom, +when this work was finished. "Ned, help me open this box," and he +indicated one with his initials on in red letters. + +<P> +"That's the same one you saved from the fire in the ship," commented +Ned. + +<P> +"Yes, and I can't put it to just exactly the use I intended, as the +situation has changed--for the worse I may say. But this box will +answer a good purpose," and Tom and Ned proceeded to open the +mysterious case which the young inventor had transported with such +care. + +<P> +"Bless my cannon cracker!" exclaimed Mr. Damon who watched them. +"You're as careful of that as if it contained dynamite." + +<P> +"It does contain something like that," answered Tom. "It has some +blasting powder in, and I was going to use it to show the giants how +little their strength would prevail against the power which the +white man could secure from some harmless looking powder. There are +also a lot of fireworks in the box, and I intend to use them to +scare these big men. That's why I was so afraid when I heard that +there was a blaze near my box. I was worried for fear the ship would +be blown up. But I can't use the blasting powder--at least not now. +But we'll give these giants an idea of what Fourth of July looks +like. Come on, Ned, we'll take a look and see from which window it +will be safest to set off the rockets and other things, as I don't +want to set fire to any of the grass huts." + +<P> +Eradicate and Mr. Damon looked on wonderingly while Tom and his chum +got out the packages of fireworks which had been kept safe and dry. +As for the giant guards, if they saw through the windows what was +going on, they made no effort to stop Tom. + +<P> +Tom had brought along a good collection of sky rockets, aerial +bombs, Roman candles and similar things, together with the blasting +powder. The latter was put in a safe place in a side room, and then, +with some boards, the young inventor and his chum proceeded to make +a sort of firing stand. One big window opened out toward a vacant +stretch of woods into which it would not be dangerous to aim the +fireworks. + +<P> +Building the stand took some time, and they knocked off to make a +meal from the food that had been brought, and which they had been +about to eat when the circus man had appeared. The food was good, +and it made them feel better. + +<P> +"I hope they won't forget us to-morrow," observed Tom, for there was +enough of the first meal left for supper. "But if they do we have +some food of our own." + +<P> +"Oh, I don't think they mean to starve us," remarked Ned. "I think +they are just acting on suggestions from that circus man." + +<P> +"Perhaps," agreed Tom. "Well, they may sing another tune when we get +through with them." + +<P> +As night approached the giant guards about the hut were changed, and +again the women came, bearing platters of food. There was plenty of +it, showing that the king, however fickle his friendship might be, +did not intend to starve his captives. Tom and his friends had not +seen Delby come out of the royal palace, and they concluded that he +was still with his giant majesty. + +<P> +"Is it dark enough now, Tom?" asked Ned of his chum, as they sat +about the rude wooden platform which they had made to hold the +fireworks. "Shall we set them off?" + +<P> +"Pretty soon now. Wait until it gets a little darker, and the effect +will be better." The room was dimly lighted by a small portable +electric lamp, one of several Tom had brought along in his +mysterious box. The lamps were operated by miniature but powerful +dry batteries. The giant guards were still outside, but they showed +no disposition to interfere with our friends. + +<P> +"There's something going on at the palace," reported Mr. Damon, who +was watching the big hut. "There are a lot of giants around it with +torches." + +<P> +"Maybe they're going to escort Delby to a hut with the same honors +they paid us," suggested Tom. "If they do, we'll set off the +fireworks as he comes out and maybe they'll think he is afflicted +with bad magic, and they'll give us our freedom." + +<P> +"Good idea!" cried Ned. "Say, that's what they're going to do," he +added a moment later as, in the glare of a number of torches, there +could be seen issuing from the king's palace, the two big giants, +evidently his brothers. Between them was the figure of the circus +man, looking like a dwarf. He was not so far away but what the smile +of triumph on his face could be seen as he glanced in the direction +of the darkened hut where Tom and his friends were captives. + +<P> +"Now's our chance!" cried the young inventor. "Set 'em off, Ned. You +help, Mr. Damon. The more noise and fuss we make at once, the more +impressive it will be. Set off everything in sight!" + +<P> +There was a flicker of matches as they were applied to the fuses, +and then a splutter of sparks. An instant later it seemed as if the +whole heavens had been lighted up. + +<P> +Sky rockets shot screaming toward the zenith, aerial bombs went +whirling slantingly upward amid a shower of sparks, then to burst +with deafening reports, sending out string after string of colored +lights. Red and green fire gleamed, and the hot balls from Roman +candles burst forth. There was a whizz, a rush and a roar. Blinding +flashes and startling reports followed each other as Tom and his +friends set off the fireworks. It was like the Independence Day +celebration of some little country village, and to the simple giants +it must have seemed as if a volcano had suddenly gone into action. + +<P> +For several minutes the din and racket, the glare and explosions, +kept up, pouring out of the big window of the hut. And then, as the +last of the display was shot off, and darkness seemed to settle down +blacker than ever over the giant village, there arose howls of fear +and terror from the big men and their women and children. They cried +aloud in their thunderous voices, and there was fear in every cry. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XIX"></A> +<H3>Chapter XIX Weak Giants</H3> + + +<P> +A great silence followed the setting off of the fireworks--silence +and darkness--and even the circus man ceased to shout. He wanted to +see what the effect would be. So did Tom and the others. When their +eyes had become used to the gloom again, after the glare of the +rockets and bombs, the young inventor said: + +<P> +"Look out of the windows, Ned, and see if our guards have run away." + +<P> +Ned did as requested, but for a few seconds he could make out +nothing. Then he cried out: + +<P> +"They've gone, but they're coming back again, and there are twice as +many. I guess they don't want us to escape, Tom, for fear we may do +a lot of damage." + +<P> +"Bless my hitching post!" cried Mr. Damon. "The guards doubled? We +<i>are</i> in a predicament, Tom." + +<P> +"Yes, I'm afraid so. The fireworks didn't just have the effect I +expected. I thought they'd be glad to let us go, fearing that we +could work magic, and might turn it on them. Most of the natives are +deadly afraid of magic, the evil eye, witch doctors, and stuff like +that. But evidently we've impressed the giants in the wrong way. If +we could only speak their language now, we could explain that unless +they let us go we might destroy their village, though of course we +wouldn't do anything of the kind. If we could only speak their +language but we can't." + +<P> +"Do you suppose they understood what Delby said?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Not a bit of it! He was just desperate when he yelled out that way. +He saw that we had an advantage on him--or at least I thought we +did, but I guess we didn't," and Tom gazed out of the windows in +front of each of which stood two of the largest giants. By means of +the torches it could be seen that the circus man was being taken to +another hut, some distance away from the royal one. Then, after an +awed silence, there broke out a confused talking and shouting among +the giant population, that was drawn up in a circle a respectful +distance from the hut where the captives were confined. Doubtless +they were discussing what had taken place, hoping and yet fearing, +that there might be more fireworks. + +<P> +"Well, we might as well go to bed," declared Tom at length. "We +can't do any more to-night, and I'm dead tired. In the morning we +can talk over new plans. My box of tricks isn't exhausted yet." + +<P> +In spite of their strange captivity our friends slept well, and they +did not awaken once during the night, for they had worked hard that +day, and were almost exhausted. In the morning they looked out and +saw guards still about the hut. + +<P> +"Now for a good breakfast, and another try!" exclaimed Tom, as he +washed in a big earthen jar of water that had been provided. +Freshened by the cool liquid, they were made hungry for the meal +which was brought to them a little later. They noticed that the +women cooks looked at them with fear in their eyes, and did not +linger as they had done before. Instead they set down the trays of +food and hurried away. + +<P> +"They're getting to be afraid of us," declared Tom. "If we could +only talk their language--" + +<P> +"By Jove!" suddenly interrupted Ned. "I've just thought of +something. Jake Poddington you know--the agent for Mr. Preston who +so mysteriously disappeared." + +<P> +"Well, what about him?" asked Tom. "Did you see him?" + +<P> +"No, but he may be here--a captive like ourselves. If he is he's +been here long enough to have learned the language of the giants, +and if he could translate for us, we wouldn't have any trouble. Why +didn't we think of it before? If we could only find Mr. Poddington!" + +<P> +"Yes, <i>if</i> we only could," put in Tom. "But it's a slim chance. I +declare I've forgotten about him in the last few days, so many +things have happened. But what makes you think he is here, Ned?" + +<P> +"Why he started for giant land, you'll remember, and he may have +reached here. Oh, if we could only find him, and save him and save +ourselves!" + +<P> +"It would be great!" admitted Tom. "But I'm afraid we can't do it. +There's a chance, though, that Mr. Poddington may be here, or may +have been here. If we could only get out and make some explorations +or some inquiries. It's tough to be cooped up here like chickens." + +<P> +Tom looked from the window, vainly hoping that the guards might have +been withdrawn. The giants were still before the windows and doors. + +<P> +For a week this captivity was kept up, and in that time Tom and his +friends had occasional glimpses of Hank Delby going to and from the +king's hut. His majesty himself was not seen, but there appeared to +be considerable activity in the giant village. + +<P> +From their prison-hut the captives could see the native market held +in the big open space, and giants from surrounding towns and the +open country came in to trade. There were also curious about the +white captives, and there was a constant throng around the big hut, +peering in. So also there was about the hut where the circus man had +his headquarters. Delby seemed to be free to come and go as he +choose. + +<P> +"I guess he's laying his plans to take a giant or two away with +him," remarked Tom one day. "I wonder what will become of us, when +he does go?" + +<P> +It was a momentous question, and no one could answer it. Tom was +doing some hard thinking those days. Two weeks passed and there was +no change. Our friends were still captives in giant land. They had +tried, by signs, to induce their guards to take some message to the +king, but the giants refused with shakes of their big heads. + +<P> +Yet the adventurers could not complain of bad treatment. They were +well fed, and the guards seemed good natured, laughing among +themselves, and smiling whenever they saw any of the captives. But +let Tom or some of the others, step across the threshold of the +door, and they were kindly, but firmly, shoved back. + +<P> +"It's of no use!" exclaimed Tom in despair one day, after a bold +attempt to walk out. "We've got to do something. If we can't get +word to the king we've got to plan some way to gain the friendship, +or work on the fear of the guards. We have about the same crowd +every time. If we can scare them they may keep far enough off so we +can have a chance to escape." + +<P> +"Escape! That's the thing!" cried Mr. Damon. "Why can't we put the +airship together in this hut, Tom, and fly away in it?" + +<P> +"We can, when the right time comes--if it ever does--but first we've +got to work on the guards. Let me see what I can do? Ha! I have it. +Ned, come here, I want your help. I'm going to show these giants +that, with all their strength, I can make each of them as weak as a +baby, and, at the same time prove that they can't lift even a light +weight." + +<P> +"How you going to do it?" asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"I'll soon show you. Come on, Ned." + +<P> +Tom and his chum were busy for several days among the various boxes +and bales that formed the baggage. They rigged up two pieces of +apparatus which I will describe in due time. They also opened +several boxes of trinkets and trading goods, which had been brought +along for barter. These they distributed among the guards, and, +though the giants were immensely pleased, they did not get friendly +enough to walk off and leave our friends free to do as they pleased. + +<P> +"Well, I guess we're ready for the lesson now," remarked Tom one +afternoon, when they had been held captives for about three weeks. +"If they won't respond to gentle treatment we'll try some other kind +of persuasion." + +<P> +The guards had become so friendly of late that some of them often +spent part of the day inside the hut, looking at the curious things +Tom and his party had brought with them. This was just what the +young inventor wanted, as he was now ready to give them a second +lesson in white man's magic. + +<P> +Tom and Ned had learned a few words of the giant's language, which +was quite simple, though it sounded hard, and one day, after he had +shown them simple toys, the young inventor brought forth a simple-looking +box, with two shining handles. + +<P> +"Here is a little thing," explained Tom, partly by words, and partly +by using signs, "a simple little thing which, if one of you will but +take hold of, you cannot let go of again until I move my finger. Do +you believe that a small white man like myself can make this little +thing stronger than a giant?" he asked. + +<P> +One of the biggest of the guards shook his head. + +<P> +"Try," invited Tom. "Take hold of the handles. At first you will be +able to let go easily. But, when I shall move my finger though but a +little, you will be held fast. Then, another movement, and you will +be loose again. Can I do it?" + +<P> +Once more the giant shook his head. + +<P> +"Try," urged Tom, and he put the two shining handles into the big +palms of the giant. The native grinned and some of his companions +laughed. Then to show how easy it was he let go. He took hold again. + +<P> +"Now!" cried Tom, and he moved his finger. + +<P> +Instantly the giant leaped up into the air. He uttered a howl that +seemed to shake the very roof of the hut, and his arms were as rigid +as poles. They were drawn up in knots, and though he tried with all +his great might, he could not loose his fingers from the shiny +handles. He howled in terror, and his companions murmured in +amazement. + +<P> +"It is as I told you!" exclaimed Tom. "Is it enough?" + +<P> +"Loose me! Loose me! Loose me from the terrible magic!" cried the +giant, and, with a movement of his finger, Tom switched off the +current from the electric battery. Instantly the giant's arms +dropped to his side, his hands relaxed and the handles dropped +clattering to the floor. + +<P> +With a look of fear, and a howl of anguish, the big guard fled, but +to the surprise and gratification of Tom and his friends the others +seemed only amused, and they nodded in a friendly fashion to the +captives. They all pressed forward to try the battery. + +<P> +One and all endeavored to loose their hands after Tom, by a movement +of his forefinger, had turned the switch of the battery, and one and +all of the giant guards were unable to stir, as the electricity +gripped their muscles. They were evidently awed. + +<P> +"This is working better than the fireworks did," murmured Tom. "Now +if I can only keep up the good work, and get ahead of Delby I'll be +all right. Now for the other test, Ned." + +<P> +Ned brought from a box what looked to be a small iron bar, with a +large handle on the top. The bottom was ground very smooth. + +<P> +"This is very small and light," explained Tom, partly by signs, and +partly by words. "I can easily lift it by one finger, and to a giant +it is but a feather's weight." + +<P> +He let the giants handle it, and of course they could feel scarcely +any weight at all, for it tipped the scales at only a pound. But it +was shortly to be much heavier. + +<P> +"See," went on the young inventor. "I place the weight on the floor, +and lift it easily. Can you do it?" + +<P> +The giants laughed at such a simple trick. Tom set the iron bar down +and raised it several times. So did several of the giants. + +<P> +"Now for the test!" cried Tom with a dramatic gesture. "I shall put +my magic upon you, and you shall all become as weak as babies. You +cannot lift the bar of iron!" + +<P> +As he spoke he made a signal to Ned, who stood in a distant corner +of the room. Then Tom carefully placed the weight on a sheet of +white paper on a certain spot on the floor of the hut and motioned +to the largest giant to pick up the iron bar. + +<P> +With a laugh of contempt and confidence, the big man stooped over +and grasped the handle. But he did not arise. Instead, the muscles +of his naked arm swelled out in great bunches. + +<P> +"See, you are as a little babe!" taunted Tom. "Another may try!" + +<P> +Another did, and another and another, until it came the turn of the +mightiest giant of all the guard that day. With a sudden wrench he +sought to lift the bar. He tugged and strained. He bent his back and +his legs; his shoulders heaved with the terrific effort he made--but +the bar still held to the floor of the hut as though a part of the +big beams themselves. + +<P> +"Now!" cried Tom. "I shall show you how a white man's magic makes +him stronger than the biggest giant." + +<P> +Once more he made a hidden sign to Ned, and then, stooping over, Tom +crooked his little finger in the handle of the iron bar and lifted +it as easily as if it was a feather. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XX"></A> +<H3>Chapter XX The Lone Captive</H3> + + +<P> +The murmurs of astonishment that greeted Tom's seemingly marvelous +feat of strength was even greater than that which had marked his +trick with the electric battery. The giants stared at him as though +they feared the next moment he might suddenly turn upon them and +hurl them about like ten-pins. + +<P> +"You see, it is easy when one knows the white man's magic," spoke +Tom, making many gestures to help along. "Go tell your king that it +is not well that he keeps us prisoners here, for if he does not soon +let us go the magic may break loose and destroy his palace!" + +<P> +There was a gasp of dismay from the giants at this bold talk. + +<P> +"Better go easy, Tom," counseled Ned. + +<P> +"I'm tired of going easy," replied the young inventor. "Something +has got to happen pretty soon, or it will be all up with us. I'm +getting weary of being cooped up here. Not that the king doesn't +treat us well, but I don't want to be a prisoner. I want to get out +and see if we can't arrange to take a couple of these giants back +for Mr. Preston. That Delby sneak has things all his own way." + +<P> +And this was so, for the circus man had poisoned the king's mind +against Tom and his friends, representing (as our hero learned +later) that the first arrivals in giant land were dangerous people, +and not to be trusted. On his own part, Hank Delby intimated that he +would always be a friend to the king, would teach him many of the +white man's secrets, and would make him powerful. Thus the circus +man was making plans for his own ends, and he was scheming to get a +couple of giants for himself, who he intended to hurry away, leaving +Tom and his friends to escape as best they could. + +<P> +And Delby had brought with him some novelties in the way of toys and +machinery that seemed greatly to take the fancy of the king. Tom +realized this when he saw his rival free to come and go, and one +reason why our hero did the experiments just related was so that the +king might hear of them, and wonder. + +<P> +"Go tell the king that, strong as he is, I am stronger," went on Tom +boldly to the giant guards. "I am not afraid of him." + +<P> +"Bless my war club, Tom, aren't you a little rash to talk that way?" +asked Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"No. As I said, I want things to happen. If I can only get the king +curious enough to come here I can show him things to open his eyes. +I'll work the miniature circus, and explain that some of his +subjects can take part in a real one if they will come with us. I +want to beat this Delby at his own game." + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Ned. "Stick to it, Tom. I'll help you, and +we'll get a giant or two yet. And maybe we can get some news of poor +Jake Poddington." + +<P> +"I intend to make inquiries about him, now that these guards are a +little more friendly," said Tom. "It may be that he is a prisoner in +this very village." + +<P> +The giant guards, now that they had gotten over their fright at +their own inability to raise the bar while Tom had lifted it with +one finger, again crowded around, asking that the trick be repeated. +Tom did it, with the same result. + +<P> +None of the giants could move the iron, yet Tom had no difficulty in +doing so. Of course my readers have already guessed how the trick +was done. It was worked by a strong magnet, hidden in the floor. At +a signal from Tom, Ned would switch on the current. The iron would +be held fast and immovable, but when Tom himself went to raise it +Ned would cut off the electricity and the bar was lifted as easily +as an ordinary piece of iron. But simple as the trick was, it +impressed the giants. Then Tom did some other stunts for them, +simple experiments in physics, that every High School lad has done +in class. + +<P> +"I want to get these guards friendly with me," he explained. "In +time the news will reach the king and he'll be so curious that he'll +come here and then--well, we'll see what will happen." + +<P> +But this did not take place as soon as Tom desired. In fact, the +giants were very slow to act. The guards did get quite friendly, and +every day they wanted the same two first tricks performed over +again. Tom did them many times, wondering when the king would come. + +<P> +Then he played a bold game, and made open inquiries about a white +man, one like the king's captives, who might have come to giant land +about a year previous. + +<P> +"Is there a lone white captive here?" asked Tom. + +<P> +The giant guard to whom he directed his question gave a start, for +Tom could now speak the language fairly well, and, after the first +indication of surprise, the guard muttered something to his +companions. There was a startled ejaculation, a curious glance at +the captives, and then--silence. The guards filed silently away, +and, a little later, could be seen going in the king's big hut. + +<P> +"By Jove, Tom!" cried Ned. "You touched 'em that time. There's +something up, as sure as you're born!" + +<P> +"I believe so myself," agreed the young inventor. "And now to throw +a real scare into these giants," he added, as he went to a distant +room of the hut where he had hidden some of the things he had taken +from his "box of tricks," as Ned dubbed it. + +<P> +"Bless my necktie!" cried Mr. Damon. "What's up now, Tom." + +<P> +"I'm going to show these giants that they'd better make friends with +us soon, or we may blow their whole town sky-high!" cried Tom. "I'm +going to use some of the blasting powder--just a pinch, so to +speak--and knock an empty hut into slivers. I think that will impress +these fellows. If I can only--" + +<P> +"Look, Tom!" suddenly cried Ned. "The king's two brothers are coming +here. Something's up. He's sent some of the family to interview us. +Get ready to receive them." + +<P> +"Couldn't be better!" cried the young inventor. "I've been waiting +for this. Now I'll give them a surprise party." + +<P> +The two big brothers of the king, for such Tom and his friends had +recently learned was the relationship the giants on either side of +the "throne" bore to the ruler, were indeed headed toward the hut of +the captives. They came alone, in their royal garments of jaguar +skins, and, standing about the palace hut, could be seen the giant +guards who had doubtless carried the news of the question Tom had +asked. + +<P> +"Come on, Ned, we've got to get busy!" exclaimed Tom. "Connect the +electric battery, and get that magnet in shape. I'm going to make a +fuse for this blasting powder bomb, and if I can get those royal +brothers to plant it for me, there'll be some high jinks soon." + +<P> +Tom busied himself in making an improvised bomb, while Ned attended +to the electrical attachments, and Mr. Damon and Eradicate acted as +general assistants. + +<P> +The two giant brothers entered the hut and greeted Tom and the +others calmly. Then they explained that the king had sent them to +investigate certain stories told by the guard. + +<P> +"I'll show you!" exclaimed Tom, and he induced them to take hold of +the handles of the battery. The current was turned on full strength, +and from the manner in which the royal brothers writhed and howled +Tom judged that the experiment was a success. + +<P> +"With all your strength you can not let go until I move my finger," +the young inventor explained, and it was so. Even the skeptical +giants agreed on that. + +<P> +"Now I shall show you that I am stronger than you!" exclaimed Tom, +and though the giants smiled increduously so it was, for the magnet +trick worked as well as before. There were murmurs of surprise from +the two immense brothers, and they talked rapidly together. + +<P> +"I will now show you that I can call the lightning from the sky to +do my bidding," went on Tom. "Is that possible to any of you +giants?" + +<P> +"Never! Never! No man can do it!" cried Tola and Koku together. + +<P> +"Then watch me!" invited Tom. "Is there an empty hut near here?" he +asked. "One that it will do no harm to destroy?" + +<P> +Tola pointed to one visible from the window of the prison of our +friends. + +<P> +"Then take this little ball, with the string attached to it, and +place it in the hut," went on Tom. "Then flee for your lives, for +standing from here, I shall call the lightning down, and you shall +see the hut destroyed." + +<P> +"Why don't you ask them something about Jake Poddington?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Time enough for that after I've shown them what a little powder +will do, when I attach electric wires to it and press a button," +replied Tom. "I've got that bomb fixed so it will go off by an +electric fuse. If they'll only put it in the hut for me. I'd do it +myself, only they won't let me go out." + +<P> +The brothers conferred for a moment and then, seeming to arrive at a +decision, Koku, who was slightly the larger, took the bomb, looked +curiously at it, and walked with it toward the empty hut, the +electric wire being reeled out behind him by Tom. + +<P> +The bomb was left inside the frail structure, the two brothers +hurried away, and, standing at a safe distance from the hut of the +captives, as well as the one that Tom had promised to destroy by +lightning, they waved their hands to show that they were ready. + +<P> +"Bless my admission ticket!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "You've got quite +an audience, Tom." + +<P> +And so he had, for there was a crowd in the market square, another +throng about the king's palace, while all about, hidden behind trees +or huts, was nearly the whole population of the giant town. + +<P> +"That's what I want," said the young inventor. "It will be all the +more impressive." + +<P> +"And there's the king himself!" exclaimed Ned. "He's standing in the +door of his royal hut." + +<P> +"Better yet!" cried Tom. "Are those wires all connected, Ned?" + +<P> +"Yes," answered his chum, after a quick inspection. + +<P> +"Then here she goes!" cried Tom, as he pressed the button. + +<P> +Instantly the hut, in which the bomb had been placed, arose in the +air. The roof was lifted off, the sides spread out and there was a +great flash of fire and a puff of smoke. + +<P> +Then as the smoke cleared away Ned cried out: + +<P> +"Look, Tom! Look! You've blown a hole in the hut next to the one you +destroyed!" + +<P> +"Yes, and bless my check book!" exclaimed Mr. Damon, "some one is +running out of it. A white man, Tom! A white man!" + +<P> +"It's Poddington! Poor Jake Poddington. We've found him at last! +This way, Mr. Poddington! This way! Mr. Preston sent us to rescue +you!" cried Tom. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXI"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXI A Royal Conspiracy</H3> + + +<P> +Howls of terror, cries of anger, and a rushing to and fro on the +part of the giants, followed the latest trick of Tom Swift to +impress them with his power. But to all this the young inventor and +his friends paid no attention. Their eyes were fixed on the ragged +figure of the white man who was rushing toward their hut as fast as +his legs, manacled as they were, would let him. + +<P> +"Come on! Come on!" cried Tom. + +<P> +"Look out!" yelled Ned. "Some of the giants are after him, Tom!" + +<P> +Several of the big men, after their first fright, had recovered +sufficiently to pursue the captive so strangely released by the +explosion. + +<P> +"Hand me an electric rifle, Ned!" cried Tom, + +<P> +"Bless my shoe laces!" cried Mr. Damon. "You're not going to kill +any of the giants; are you, Tom?" + +<P> +"Well, I'm not going to let them capture Jake Poddington again," was +the quick answer, "but I guess if I stun a few of them with the +electric bullets that will answer." + +<P> +Poddington (for later the white captive did prove to be the missing +circus man) ran on, and close behind him came two of the giants, +taking long strides. Tom aimed his electric rifle at the foremost +and pulled the trigger. There was no sound, but the big man crumpled +up and fell, rolling over and over. With a yell of rage his +companion pressed on, but a moment later, he, too, went down, and +then the others, who had started in pursuit of their recent captive, +turned back. + +<P> +"I thought that would fix 'em," murmured Tom gleefully. + +<P> +In another five seconds Poddington was inside the hut, gasping from +his run. He was very thin and pale, and the sudden exertion had been +too much for him. + +<P> +"Water--water!" he gasped, and Mr. Damon gave him some. He sank on +one of the skin-covered benches, and his half-exhausted breath +slowly came back to him. + +<P> +"Boys," he gasped. "I don't know who you are, but thank heaven you +came just in time. I couldn't have stood it much longer. I heard you +yell something about Preston. Is it possible he sent you to find +me?" + +<P> +"Partly that and partly to get a giant," explained Tom. "We didn't +know you were in that hut, or we'd never have blown up the one next +to it, though we suspected you might be held captive somewhere +around here, from the queer way the giants acted when we asked about +you." + +<P> +"And so you blew up that hut?" remarked the circus agent. "I thought +it was struck by lightning. But it did me a good turn. I was chained +to the wall of the hut next door, and your explosion split the beam +to which my chains were fastened. I didn't lose any time running +out, I can tell you. Oh, but it's good to be free once more and to +see someone my own size!" + +<P> +"How did you get here, and why did they keep you a prisoner?" asked +Tom. Then Poddington told his story, while Ned and Mr. Damon aided +Tom in filing off the rude iron shackles from his wrists and ankles. + +<P> +As Mr. Preston had heard, Jake Poddington had started for giant +land. But he lost his way, his escort of natives deserted him, just +as Tom's did, and he wandered on in the jungle, nearly dying. Then, +merely by accident, he came upon giant land, but he had the +misfortune to incur the anger of the big men who took him for an +enemy. They at once made him a prisoner, and had kept him so ever +since, though they did not harm him otherwise, and gave him good +food. + +<P> +"I think they were a bit afraid of me in spite of my small size," +explained the circus man. "I never thought to be rescued, for, +though I figured that Mr. Preston might hear of my plight, he could +never find this place. How did you get here?" + +<P> +Then Tom told his story, and of how they themselves were held +captives because of the treachery of Hank Delby. + +<P> +"That's just like him!" cried Poddington. "He was always mean, and +always trying to get the advantage of his rivals. But I'm glad I'm +with you. With what stuff you have here it oughtn't to be difficult +to get away from giant land." + +<P> +"But I want a giant," insisted Tom. "I told Mr. Preston I'd bring +him back one, and I'm going to do it." + +<P> +"You can't!" cried the circus man. "They won't come with you, and +it's almost impossible to make a prisoner of one. You'd better +escape. I want to get away from giant land. I've had enough." + +<P> +"We'll get away," said Tom confidently, "and we'll have a giant or +two when we go." + +<P> +"You'll have some before you go I guess!" suddenly interrupted Ned. +"There's a whole crowd of 'em headed this way, and they've got +clubs, bows and arrows and those blow guns! I guess they're going to +besiege us." + +<P> +"All right!" cried Tom. "If they want to fight we can give 'em as +good as they send. Ned, you and Mr. Damon and I will handle the +electric rifles. Eradicate, use your shotgun, and fire high. We +don't want to hurt any of the big men. We'll merely stun them with +the electric bullets, but the noise of Rad's gun will help some." + +<P> +"What can I do?" asked Mr. Poddington. + +<P> +"You're too weak to do much," replied Tom. "You just keep on the +lookout, and tell us if they try any surprises. I guess we can +handle 'em all right." + +<P> +With shouts and yells the big men came on. Evidently their +indifference toward their captives had turned to anger because of +the freeing of Poddington, and now they were determined to use harsh +measures. They advanced with wild yells, brandishing their clubs and +other weapons, while the weird sound of the tom-toms and natives +drums added to the din. + +<P> +When a short distance from the hut the giants stopped, and began +firing arrows and darts from the blow guns. + +<P> +"Look out for those!" warned Tom. "They probably are poisoned, and a +scratch may mean death. Give 'em a few shots now, Ned and Mr. Damon! +Rad, give 'em a salute, but fire high!" + +<P> +"Dat's what I will, Massa Tom!" + +<P> +The gun of the colored man barked out a noisy welcome, and, at the +same time three giants fell, stunned by the electric bullets, for +the rifles were adjusted to send out only mild charges. + +<P> +Thrice they charged, and each time they were driven back, and then, +finding that the captives were ever ready for them, they gave up the +attempt to overwhelm them, and hurried away, many going into the +king's hut. His royal majesty did not show himself during the fight. + +<P> +"Well, I guess they won't try that right away again," remarked Tom, +as he saw the stunned giants slowly arouse themselves and crawl +away. "We've taught them a lesson." + +<P> +They felt better after that, and then, when they had eaten and +drank, they began to consider ways and means of escape. But Tom +would not hear of going until he could get at least one giant for +the circus. + +<P> +"But you can't!" insisted Mr. Poddington. + +<P> +"Well, it's too soon to give up yet," declared Tom. "I'd like to +take the king's two brothers with me." + +<P> +"By Jove!" exclaimed Mr. Poddington, "I never thought of that. There +is just a bare chance. Did you know that the two brothers, who are +twins, dislike the king, for he is younger than they, and he +practically took the throne away from them. They should rule jointly +by rights. If we could enlist Tola and Koku on our side we might win +out yet." + +<P> +"Then we'll try!" exclaimed Tom. + +<P> +Jake Poddington, who had been a captive in the giant city long +enough to know something of its history, and had learned to talk the +language, explained how Kosk had ursurped the throne. His brothers +were subject to him, he said, but several times they had tried in +vain to start a revolution. To punish them for their rebellious +efforts the king made them his personal servants, and this explained +why he sent them to see the tricks Tom performed. + +<P> +"If we could only get into communication with the big twins," went +on the circus man, "we could offer to take them with us to a country +where they would be bigger kings than their brother is here. It's a +royal conspiracy worth trying." + +<P> +"Then we'll try it!" cried Tom enthusiastically. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXII The Twin Giants</H3> + + +<P> +Daring indeed was the scheme decided on by the captives, and yet its +very boldness might make it possible for them to carry it out. The +king would never suspect them of plotting to carry off his two royal +brothers, and this made it all the easier to lay their plans. In +this they were much helped by Poddington, who knew the language and +who had made a few friends among the more humble people of the +village, though none dared assist him openly. + +<P> +"The first thing to do," said the circus man, "is to get into +communication with the twins." + +<P> +That proved harder than they expected, for a week passed, and they +did not have a glimpse of Tola and Koku. Meanwhile the giant guard +was still maintained about the hut night and day. No more food was +given the prisoners, and they would have starved had not Tom +possessed a good supply of his own provisions. It was evidently the +intention of the king to starve his captives into submission. + +<P> +"Suppose you do get those big brothers to accompany you, Tom?" asked +Ned one day. "How are you going to manage to get away, and take them +with you?" + +<P> +"My aeroplane!" answered Tom quickly. "I've got it all planned out. +You and I with Mr. Damon, Mr. Poddington and Eradicate will skip +away in the aeroplane. We can put it together in here, and I've got +enough gasolene to run it a couple of hundred miles if necessary." + +<P> +"But the giants--you can't carry them in it." + +<P> +"No, and I'm not going to try. If they'll agree to go they can set off +through the woods afoot. We'll meet them in a certain place--where +there's a good land mark which we can easily distinguish from the +aeroplane. We'll take what stuff we can with us, and leave the rest +here. Oh, it can be done, Ned." + +<P> +"But when you start out with the aeroplane they'll make a rush and +overwhelm us." + +<P> +"No, for I'll do it so quickly that they won't have a chance. I'm +going to saw through the beams of one side of this hut. To the rear +there is level ground that will make a fine starting place. When +everything is ready, say some night, we'll pull the side wall down, +start the aeroplane out as it falls, and sail away. Then we'll pick +up the giant brothers out in the woods, and travel to civilization +again." + +<P> +"By Jove! I believe that will work!" cried the circus man. + +<P> +"Bless my corn plaster, I think so myself!" added Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"But first we've got to get the brothers to agree," went on Tom, +"and that is going to be hard work." + +<P> +It was not so difficult as it was tedious. Through an aged woman, +with whom he had made friends when a captive, Jake Poddington +managed to get word to the royal twins that he and the other +captives would like to see them privately. Then they had to wait for +an answer. + +<P> +In the meanwhile the giants tried several times to surprise Tom and +his friends by attacks, but the captives were on the alert, and the +electric rifles drove them back. + +<P> +One night nearly all the guards were observed to be absent. There +were not more than half a dozen scattered about the hut. + +<P> +"I wonder what that means?" asked Tom, who was puzzled. + +<P> +"I know!" exclaimed Jake Poddington after a moment's thought. "It's +their big annual feast. Even the king goes to it. They were just +getting over it when I struck here last year, and maybe that's what +set them so against me. Boys, this may be our chance!" + +<P> +"How?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"The king's brothers may find an opportunity to come and talk to us +when the feast is at its height," was the reply. + +<P> +Anxiously they waited, and in order that the royal brothers might +come in unobserved, if they did conclude to speak to the captives, +Tom and his companions hung some pieces of canvas over the windows +and doors, and had only a single light burning. + +<P> +It was at midnight that a cautious knock sounded at the side of the +hut and Tom glided to the main door. In the shadows he saw the two +royal brothers, Tola and Koku. + +<P> +"Here they are!" whispered Tom to Jake Poddington, who came forward. + +<P> +"Come!" invited the circus man in the giants' tongue, and the +brothers entered the hut. + +<P> +How Jake persuaded them to throw in their fortunes with the captives +the circus man hardly knew himself. Perhaps it was due as much as +anything to the dislike they felt toward the king, and the mean way +he had treated them. + +<P> +"Come, and you will be kings among the small men in our country," +invited Poddington. The brothers looked at each other, talked +together in low tones, and then Koku exclaimed: + +<P> +"We will come, and we will help you to escape. We have spoken, and +we will talk with you again." + +<P> +Then they glided out into the darkness, while from afar came the +sounds of revelry at the big feast. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXIII"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXIII A Surprise in the Night</H3> + + +<P> +Tom and his friends could scarcely believe their good fortune. It +seemed incredible that they should have induced two of the biggest +giants to accompany them back, and, not only that, but that they had +the promise of the strong men to aid them. + +<P> +"Now we must get busy," declared Tom, when their visitors had gone. +"We've got lots of work to do on the aeroplane, and we must try out +the engine. Then we've got to fix the side of the hut so it will +fall out when we're ready for it. And we've got to plan how to meet +the giants later in the forest." + +<P> +"Yes," agreed the circus man, "and we must take care that Hank Delby +doesn't spoil our plans." + +<P> +Then ensued busy days. In the seclusion of their hut the prisoners +could work undisturbed at the aeroplane, which had been almost +assembled. + +<P> +The engine was installed and tried, and, when the motor began its +thundering explosions, there was consternation among the giants, who +had again surrounded the hut to see that the prisoners did not +escape. + +<P> +Meanwhile Delby seemed to be unusually active. He could be observed +going in and out from his hut to that of the king, and he often +carried large bundles. + +<P> +"He's making himself solid with his royal highness," declared Tom. +"Well, if all goes right, we won't have to worry much longer about +what he does." + +<P> +"If only those twin giants don't fail us," put in Ned. + +<P> +"Oh, you can depend on them," said Mr. Poddington. "These giants are +curious creatures, but once they give their word they stick to it." + +<P> +He told much about the strange big men, confirming Tom's theory that +favorable natural conditions, for a number of generations, had +caused ordinary South American natives to develope into such large +specimens. + +<P> +Our friends were under quite a nervous tension, for they could not +be sure of what would happen from day to day. They continued to work +on the aeroplane, and then, finding that it would work in the +seclusion of the hut, they were anxious for the time to come when +they could try it in the open. + +<P> +"Do you think it will carry the five of us with safety?" asked the +circus man, as he gazed rather dubiously at the somewhat frail-appearing +affair. + +<P> +"Sure!" exclaimed Tom. "We'll get away all right if I can get enough +of a start. Now we must see to opening the side of the hut." + +<P> +This work had to be done cautiously, yet the prisoners had a certain +freedom, for the guards were afraid to approach too closely. + +<P> +The supporting and cross beams were sawed through, for Tom had +brought a number of carpenter tools along with him. Then, in the +silence of the night, the two royal brothers brought other beams +that could be put in place temporarily to hold up the roof when the +others were pulled out to allow the aeroplane to rush forth. + +<P> +In due time all was in readiness for the attempt to escape. The +royal twins had agreed to slip off at a certain signal, and await +Tom and his party in the forest at the foot of a very large hill, +that was a landmark for miles around. The giants could travel fast, +but not as fast as the aeroplane, so it was planned that they were +to have a day and night's start. They would take along food, and +would arrange to have a number of Tom's mules hidden in the woods, +so that our hero and his friends would have means of transportation +back to the coast, after they had ended their flight in the airship. + +<P> +"I wish we had brought along the larger one, so we could take the +giants with us," said Tom, "but I guess they're strong enough to +walk to the coast. We'll take what provisions we can carry, our +electric rifles, and the rest of the things we'll leave here for the +king, though he doesn't deserve them." + +<P> +"What do you think Delby will do?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Give it up. He's got some plan though. I only hope he doesn't get a +giant. Then ours will be a greater attraction." + +<P> +Several days passed, and the last of the preparations had been made. + +<P> +"The giant twins will pretend to go off on a hunting trip to-morrow +morning," said the circus man one night, "but they won't come back. +They'll wait for us at the big hill." + +<P> +"Then we must escape the following morning," decided Tom. "Well, I'm +ready for it." + +<P> +From their hut, surrounded as it was still by the giant guards, our +friends watched the royal brothers start off, seemingly on a hunting +expedition. + +<P> +The day passed slowly. Tom went carefully over the aeroplane, to see +that it was in shape for a quick flight, and he looked to the wall +of the hut--the wall that was to be pulled from place to afford +egress for the air craft. + +<P> +They went to bed early that night--the night they hoped would be +their last in giant land. It must have been about midnight when Tom +suddenly awoke. He thought he heard a noise outside the hut and in a +moment he had jumped up. + +<P> +"Repel boarders!" cried Tom. + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXIV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXIV The Airship Flight</H3> + + +<P> +For a few moments there was confusion inside the hut that was to be +the last stronghold of our friends against the approaching force of +giants. Confusion and not a little fear were mingled, for Tom's +words sent a chill to every heart. Then, after the first panic, +there came a calmer feeling--a feeling that each one would do his +duty in the face of danger and, if he had to die, he would die +fighting. + +<P> +"Everyone take a window!" yelled Tom. "Don't kill any one if you can +help it. Shoot to disable, Rad. Mr. Poddington, there's an extra +shotgun somewhere about! See if you can find it. We'll use the +electric rifles. Get those Roman candles somebody!" + +<P> +Tom was like a general giving orders, and once his friends realized +that he was managing things they felt more confidence. Ned grasped +his electric rifle, as did Mr. Damon, and they stood ready to use +them. + +<P> +"The strongest stunning charge!" ordered the young inventor. +"Something that will lay 'em out for a good while. We'll teach 'em a +lesson!" + +<P> +<i>Bang!</i> + +<P> +That was Eradicate's shotgun going off. It had a double load in it, +and the wonder of it was that the barrel did not burst. It sounded +like a small cannon, but it had the good effect of checking the +first rush of giants, for the electric rifles had not yet been +adjusted, and Mr. Poddington, in the light of the single electric +torch that had been left burning, could find neither the spare +shotgun nor the Roman candles. + +<P> +<i>Bang!</i> + +<P> +Eradicate let the other barrel go, almost in the faces of the +advancing giants, but over their heads, for he bore in mind Tom's +words not to injure. + +<P> +"That's the stuff!" cried Tom. "Come on now, Ned, we're ready for +'em!" + +<P> +But the giants had retreated, and could be seen standing in groups +about the hut, evidently planning what to do next. Then from back in +the village there shone a glare of light. + +<P> +"Bless my insurance policy! It's a fire!" cried Mr. Damon. "They're +going to burn us out!" + +<P> +"Jove! If they do!" exclaimed Ned. + +<P> +"We mustn't let 'em!" shouted Tom. "Fire, Ned!" + +<P> +Together the chums discharged their electric rifles at the enemy and +a number of them fell, stunned, and were carried away by their +companions. + +<P> +The glaring light approached and now it could be seen that it was +caused by a number of the big men carrying torches of some kind of +blazing wood. It did look as though they intended to fire the prison +hut. + +<P> +"Give 'em another taste of it!" shouted Ned, and this time the three +electric rifles shot out their streaks of blue flame, for Mr. Damon +had his in action. It was still dark in the hut, for to set aglow +more of the electric torches meant that Tom and his friends would be +exposed to view, and would be the targets for the arrows, or darts +from the deadly blow guns. + +<P> +Several more of the giants toppled over, and then began a retreat to +some distance, the first squad of fighters going to meet the men who +had come up with the torches. There was no sign of women or +children. + +<P> +"Shall we fire again?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"No," answered Tom. "Save your ammunition until they are closer, and +we'll be surer of our marks. Besides, if they let us alone that's +all we ask. We don't want to hurt 'em." + +<P> +"Bless my gizzard!" exclaimed Mr. Damon. "I wonder why they attacked +us, anyhow?" + +<P> +"Maybe it's about the two giant brothers who have not come back," +suggested Mr. Poddington. "They may imagine that we have them +captive, and they want to rescue them." + +<P> +"That's so," admitted Tom. "Well, if they had only postponed this +reception for a few hours we'd have been out of their way, and they +wouldn't have had this trouble," and he glanced at the aeroplane, +that stood in the big hut, ready for instant flight. + +<P> +"They're coming back!" suddenly shouted Ned, and a look from the +half-opened windows showed the giants again advancing. + +<P> +"I've got the Roman candles!" called Mr. Poddington from a corner +where he had been rummaging in that box of Tom's which contained so +many surprises. "What shall I do with 'em?" + +<P> +"Let 'em go right in their faces!" yelled Tom. "They won't do much +damage, but they'll throw a scare into the big fellows! Get ready, +Ned!" + +<P> +"They're dividing!" shouted his chum. "They're coming at us from two +sides!" + +<P> +"They're only trying to confuse us," decided Tom. "Fire at the main +body!" And with that he opened up with his electric rifle, an +example followed by Mr. Damon and Ned. + +<P> +With a whizz, and several sharp explosions, the circus man got the +Roman candles into action. The glaring fire of them lighted up the +scene better than did the flaming torches of the giants, and truly +it was a wonderful sight. There, in that lonely hut, in the midst of +a South American jungle, four intrepid white persons, and an aged +but brave negro, stood against hundreds of giants--mighty men, who, +had they come to a personal contact, any one of which would have +been more than a match for the combined strength of Tom and his +party. It was a weird picture that the young inventor looked out +upon, but his heart did not quail. + +<P> +Giant after giant went down under the fierce rain of the electric +bullets, stunned, but not otherwise injured. There was a shower of +sparks, and a hail of burning balls from the Roman candles, but +still the advance was kept up. Eradicate was banging away with his +shotgun. + +<P> +"Dis suah am hot work!" cried the colored man, as his hand came in +contact with the barrel. "Wow! It's most <i>red</i> hot!" he added with a +cry of pain. + +<P> +"Use the other gun," advised Tom, never turning his head from the +window through which he was aiming. "That one may get choked, and +explode in here." + +<P> +"All right," answered Eradicate. + +<P> +"Duck!" yelled Ned with sudden energy. "They're going to fire!" A +number of the giants could be seen fitting arrows to bow strings, +while others raised to their lips the long hollow reeds, from which +the blow guns were made. It was the first time the enemy had fired +and doubtless they had held back because they hoped to capture Tom +and his friends alive. But they did not count on such a stubborn +resistance. + +<P> +Every one moved away from the windows, and not an instant too soon, +for, a moment later, a shower of arrows and darts came in, +fortunately injuring no one. + +<P> +Then, above the shouting and yelling of the giants, whose deep, bass +voices had a terrorizing effect, there came the din of the tom-toms, +making a weird combination of sound. + +<P> +"We've got 'em on the run again!" cried Ned, and so it proved, for +the larger body of giants, who had approached the hut from the front +and two sides, were running back. + +<P> +"Guess they've given it up," exclaimed Tom. "I'm glad of it, too, +for--" + +<P> +He paused and glanced behind him. A tiny spurt of flame at the base +of the rear wall of the hut had caught his eye. Instantly the flame +grew larger, and a puff of smoke followed. + +<P> +"Fire!" cried Ned. "We're on fire!" + +<P> +"Bless my water bucket!" gasped Mr. Damon. "They've set fire to the +hut!" + +<P> +It was but too true. While Tom and the others had been standing off +the giants in front, a smaller force had crept around to the rear, +and set the inflamable side of the hut ablaze. + +<P> +Desperately Tom looked around. There was no means at hand of +fighting fire. Hardly a bucket of water was in the place, and the +structure was filled with quick-burning stuff, while the fireworks +that remained, and the blasting powder, made it doubly dangerous. +Then Tom's eyes lighted on the big aeroplane, ready for instant +service. + +<P> +"That's it!" he cried suddenly. "It's our only hope, and the last +one! Come on, everybody! Down with that wall! Pull on the ropes and +it will come! We've got to go now. In another minute it will be too +late. Climb up, Mr. Poddington, Mr. Damon, Ned, and I will start the +machine." + +<P> +"The wall first! The wall!" cried Ned. + +<P> +"Sure," answered Tom. He and his friends grasped the two ropes that +had been attached to the key-beams in the structure. It had been so +arranged that when the supports were pulled out the wall would fall +outward, making a fairly smooth and level gangplank, on which the +aeroplane could rush from the hut. + +<P> +There was a creaking of timbers, a straining of ropes, and then, +with a crash, the wall fell. Instantly there was a yell of surprise +from the giants, and a brighter glare from the torches, as those +carrying them rushed up to see what had happened. The din of the +tom-toms was well-nigh deafening. Fortunately the enemy forgot to +take advantage of the opening and pour in a flight of arrows or +darts. + +<P> +"Start the motor!" cried Tom to his chum. + +<P> +There was a rattling, banging noise, like a salvo of small arms, and +the big propellers revolved with incredible swiftness. The two white +men were already in place, and now Eradicate, still carrying his +shotgun, clambered up. + +<P> +"Up with you, Ned!" yelled Tom. "I'm going to head her around and +make a flying start." + + + + +<P> +<A NAME="XXV"></A> +<H3>Chapter XXV Tom's Giant--Conclusion</H3> + + +<P> +"I don't see anything of them, do you?" + +<P> +"No, and yet this is the place where they said they'd meet us." + +<P> +It was Tom who asked the question, and Ned who answered it. It was +the day after their sensational escape from the giants' prison, and +they were circling about in the aeroplane which had been the means +of getting them away from giant land. For they were safely away from +that strange and terrible place, and they were now seeking the two +giant brothers who had promised to meet them at a certain big hill. + +<P> +For an hour that night Tom and his friends had traveled on the wings +of the <i>Lark</i> and when a rising moon showed them a level spot for a +landing, they had gone down and made a camp. They had provisions +with them, and plenty of blankets and it was so warm that more +shelter was not necessary. + +<P> +The next day, leaving Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man in the +temporary camp, Tom and Ned had gone aloft to see if they could pick +up the giant twins, who were to meet them and have some mules ready +for the journey back to civilization. + +<P> +"Well, we're in no great hurry," went on Tom, after vainly scanning +the ground below. "They may not have traveled as fast as we thought +they could, and the mules may have given trouble. We'll stick around +here a day or so, and--" + +<P> +"Look!" suddenly exclaimed Ned. "Didn't you see something moving +then." + +<P> +"Where?" + +<P> +"By that big dead tree." + +<P> +Tom took a look through a pair of field glasses, while Ned steered +the aeroplane. Then the young inventor cried: + +<P> +"It's all right. It's one of the giants, but I can't tell which one. +Ned, I believe they're hiding because they're afraid of us. They've +never seen an aeroplane in action before. I'm going down." + +<P> +Quickly and gracefully the <i>Lark</i> was volplaned to a level place near +the dead tree. No one was in sight, and Tom, after looking about, +called: + +<P> +"Tola! Koku! Where are you? It is I, Tom Swift! We have escaped! +Where are you? Don't be afraid!" + +<P> +There was a moment's silence, and then two big forms rushed from the +dense bushes, one of them--Koku--advancing to Tom, and catching him +up in what was meant for a loving hug. + +<P> +"Oh, I say now, Koku!" cried the young inventor, with a laugh. "I've +got ribs, you know. Easy on that squeeze!" + +<P> +The two giant twins laughed too, and they were immensely pleased to +see their friends again, both talking at once and so fast that not +even the circus man could catch what they said. + +<P> +"Have you got the mules?" asked Tom, for he knew that much depended +on the animals. "Is everything all right?" + +<P> +"All right," answered Koku, the talk being conducted in the language +of the giants of which Tom was now fairly a master when it was +spoken slowly. Then the brothers explained that they had gotten +safely away, had gathered up the mules, and with a supply of food, +had hidden the beasts in a nearby valley. The giant twins were +waiting for Tom to arrive, but, though they had seen the areoplanes +in the hut they had no idea that it could fly so nearly like a bird, +and when they saw it hovering over them they had become frightened, +and hidden, until Tom's voice had reassured them. + +<P> +"Well, get the animals," advised Tom, after he had told of the fight +of the night before, and the escape. "I'll go find the others and +we'll start from here. Then we'll hike for the United States as fast +as we can." + +<P> +Mr. Damon, Eradicate and the circus man were soon brought to the +place where the giant brothers had made their camp, and it was +decided to remain there a few days until the aeroplane could be +taken apart for transportation, for Tom had no idea of abandoning +it. Of course it could not be packed up very well, as there were no +boxes or bales at hand. But it was made small enough so that the +parts could be slung across the backs of several mules, there being +a number of the pack animals available, some being the same ones Tom +had purchased after his native escort had deserted him. + +<P> +It was the morning they had decided to begin their march for the +coast. Everything was in readiness, they had some food, and with the +shotguns and the electric rifles which they had brought along, they +could get game. All their other things, save a few necessaries, had +been left behind. Eradicate, as he had always done, rode his mule up +beside Tom, to look after his young master. + +<P> +Suddenly Koku, who seemed to have become very fond of Tom, strode +forward and took his place on the other side of the mule ridden by +the young inventor. + +<P> +"Me stay by you," he said with a grin on his big face. "Me like you! +Me take care of you, Tom--be your servant. Him too old," and he +motioned to Eradicate. + +<P> +"Eh! What's dat yo' done said?" gasped the colored man. "Me too old? +Looky heah, giant man, I'd hab yo' know dat I's been in de Swift +fambly a good many years, an' I's jest as spry as I eber was. I kin +look after Massa Tom as good as eber. Now yo' git back where yo' +belongs, giant man, an' doan't let me heah no mo' ob dat foolishness +talk. Nobody waits on Massa Tom Swift but me. Does yo' heah dat, +giant man?" + +<P> +"Me Tom's man!" exclaimed the big fellow, and in fairly good +English. Tom laughed. He had no idea the giant had picked up any +words. + +<P> +"Go on away!" cried Eradicate. + +<P> +Koku gave the colored man one look, then, with a good natured grin +on his face, he reached over one hand, calmly lifted Eradicate from +his mule and set him on the ground. Then, with a push, he shoved the +mule galloping ahead, and took his place at the side of the young +inventor. + +<P> +"Well, what do you know about that?" gasped Ned. + +<P> +"Bless my coffee cup!" cried Mr. Damon. + +<P> +Eradicate stood still for a moment, gazing first at his master and +then at the big being who had so ruthlessly plucked him from the +mule's back, as easily as he would have lifted a child. Then +Eradicate, with a trace of tears in his eyes, stretched forth his +hands toward Tom, and turned aside. That was too much for our hero. + +<P> +With one leap he was off his animal, and the next minute he had his +arms around the faithful old colored man. + +<P> +"By Jove, Rad!" cried Tom, and his own eyes were not dry. "I'm not +going to be deserted by you in that way. You're just the same as +ever to me, giant or no giant, and don't you forget it!" and he +patted the old man on the back affectionately. + +<P> +"Praise de Lord fo' heahin' yo' say dat, Massa Tom," gasped +Eradicate. "Praise de dear Lord!" + +<P> +And then, knowing that he still held a place in his young master's +heart, the colored man was content. And from then on he rode on one +side of Tom, while the giant, Koku, strode along on the other. He +had established himself as Tom's bodyguard and even though Eradicate +insisted on remaining, Koku would not go away. + +<P> +"I guess I'll have to keep 'em both," said Tom, with a grin, "but +I'm going to change Koku's name." + +<P> +"What are you going to call him?" asked Ned. + +<P> +"Let's see, what month is this?" + +<P> +"August," said Mr. Damon. + +<P> +"Then August is his name!" exclaimed Tom. "Koku sounds too much like +a cocoanut cake. Here, August, shift that package on the white +mule," he called, "it's cutting her back," and the giant, with a +pleased grin, did as he was bid. And August he was called from then +on. + +<P> +But my story is getting too long, so I must bring it to a close. And +really there is not much to tell. The march back to the coast was +full of hardships, danger and difficulties, but they accomplished +it. The two giants seemed glad that they had left their own country +behind and they were simple and affectionate beings. Tom made up his +mind he would let the circus man have one and keep the other for his +personal attendant. + +<P> +They traveled by day, and slept at night, shooting game as they +needed it. Several times they narrowly escaped getting mixed up in +the native conflicts. Tom had one striking evidence of his giant +servant's usefulness. One day he was stalking a small beast, like a +deer, when, from a tree overhead, a jaguar sprang down at him. But +Koku--I beg his pardon--August was at hand, and, like Sampson of +old, the giant slew the beast bare-handed, choking it to death. + +<P> +In fine time our friends reached a native town and the wonder caused +by the giants was no less than the amusement of the big men at the +things they saw. They wondered more when they got to a city, and saw +more marvels of the white man's progress. + +<P> +Then Tom and his friends reached the coast, and took a steamer for +New York. The giants created a great sensation, the more when it was +known that Tom intended to keep one for himself. With this +arrangement Mr. Preston agreed, for he only wanted one as an +attraction. + +<P> +"Couldn't have done it better myself!" the circus proprietor said to +Tom when he heard the story, and this was high praise from Mr. +Preston. + +<P> +"And you rescued old Jake, too! Well, well! Couldn't have done it +better myself! I really coudn't!" + +<P> +"I wonder how our old enemy Delby made out?" asked Mr. Poddington. +They heard later that he was driven from giant land, not even being +allowed to take a boy as a specimen. He had worked on the "tip" Andy +Foger had given Mr. Waydell, but it failed. When Tom escaped, the +king confiscated all the things in the hut, and he was so taken up +with the novelties that he paid no more attention to the circus +agent, who had all his trouble, plotting and scheming against Tom +for his pains. + +<P> +"A giant in the house!" cried Mrs. Baggert, when Tom got home with +August. "I never heard of such a thing in all my life! Where will he +sleep? Not a bed is big enough!" + +<P> +"We'll give him two beds then," laughed Tom. + +<P> +And so they did, and August was immensely pleased with his new life. +He proved to be very useful, and readily adapted himself to +civilized ways. + +<P> +Tola, the other giant, made a big sensation when exhibited, and Mr. +Preston said he was well worth the fifteen thousand dollars he had +cost. + +<P> +"Well, Tom, what next?" asked Ned one day, when they had been home +several weeks and had told their story over and over again. + +<P> +"No where!" exclaimed Tom. "I'm going to take a long rest." + +<P> +But Tom Swift wasn't that kind of a young man, and he was soon +active again. If you care to learn more of his doings you may do so +in the next volume of this series, to be called, "Tom Swift and His +Electric Camera; Or Thrilling Adventures While Taking Moving +Pictures." + +<P> +And now, for a time, we will take leave of the young inventor and +his new giant servant, to meet them again a little later. + +<PRE> +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tom Swift in Captivity +by Victor Appleton + +************************************************************************ + +This file should be named 13tom10h.txt or 13tom10h.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 13tom11h.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 13tom10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +<a href="http://gutenberg.net">http://gutenberg.net</a> or +<a href="http://promo.net/pg">http://promo.net/pg</a> + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +<a href="http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03">http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03</a> or +<a href="ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03">ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03</a> + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html">http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html</a> + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +<a href="mailto:hart@pobox.com">Michael S. Hart</a> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +<a href="mailto:hart@pobox.com">hart@pobox.com</a> + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* +</PRE> + +</BODY> +</HTML> diff --git a/old/13tom10h.zip b/old/13tom10h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d458fd --- /dev/null +++ b/old/13tom10h.zip |